podcastcoach: Recent Episodes
podcastcoach
The School of Podcasting is where you can find everything you need to start a podcast. There are step by step tutorials, resources, live training, and more. Check it out at http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com
Today's episode is an exciting one as we introduce a brand-new show, "Podcasting Hot Seat." This fresh concept blends the best elements of the Podcast Review Show and the Podcast Rodeo Show. Our inaugural guest on Podcasting Hot Seat is the multi-talented Stephanie Graham, who will discuss her engaging podcast, "Nosy AF," her vibrant art practice, and the challenges and triumphs of maintaining a successful online presence. Want a turn in the Podcast Hot Seat? See Got Feedback On This Episode? I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than 5 questions and works great on your phone or computer. Mentioned In This Episode
Today we talk about if your show is feeling stale, maybe a change of input could help. One form of content that might be getting overlooked is books. In addition to libraries, there are online tools. In Ohio we have and that allow you to listen audiobooks for free. Spotify has recently added audiobooks to their service and Amazon has . When you change the information that is feeding your brain, you change the output of your show. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Contributors Zo from Back Look Cinema J from Okie Bookcast John Finkelde - Grow a Healthy Church York from Welcome to Earth Stories Mark from Practical Prepping Mike from the 70's Vs the 80s (mike buy a domain at and point at something). Craig from Live Well and Flourish Mark From Ralph From Ask Ralph Show (Personal Finance from a Christian Persepctive) Books Mentioned Old Man's War Bird by Bird Crucial Conversations The Giving Tree Success Principles Born to Run Letters From a Stoic Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World Storybrand How to Win Friends and Influence People Mastering Your Finances (Free when you sign up for newsletter) Storyworthy by Mathew Dicks Profit From Your Podcast Other Items 00:25:39 - Quit Encouraging Fraud 00:28:43 - Weird Spotify Video Thing 00:31:53 - Eyes on Streamyard 00:33:30 - Podcast Rewind: EO Fire 00:34:16 - Question of the Month 00:37:14 - Live Appearances
Why are reaction videos so popular? I mean, I can watch or listen to something and have my own reaction? Today I tie this into podcasting and how sharing your opinion can help you build your community. I play clips from a show I like, one that drives me nuts, and one that will potentially offend you as it deals with pronouns (which is the whole point - how does it make you feel). I also talk about brand safety and how it's not working, and maybe we shouldn't worry about it. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Got Feedback On This Episode? I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than 5 questions and works great on your phone or computer. Mentioned In This Episode
How do you grow your audience? I hear this every day in every Facebook group. It starts with your content. It can't be good. It can't be great. I needs to be WOW content that your audience HAS to share. Today we talk about the ingredients that make up wow content from the book by Michael Hyatt. I also talk about what GOOGLE thinks is good and what stops us from making WOW content. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Got Feedback On This Episode? I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than 5 questions and works great on your phone or computer. Mentioned In This Episode Fly on the Wall With Dana Carvey, David Spade, and Jerry Seinfeld Tom Webster Podcast Movement Keynote Rick Beato and Jim Barner Make Good Records Sting on Rock Beato Chapter Markers: 00:00:01 - It's Not Just One Thing 00:01:19 - Opening 00:01:54 - How Do I Grow? 00:02:33 - Michael Hyatt Advice 00:03:26 - Characteristics of WOW Content 00:05:18 - Anticipation 00:06:17 - Surprise 00:07:57 - Transcendence 00:08:29 - Clarity 00:08:45 - Evangelism 00:10:24 - Driveway Moments 00:11:22 - Does AI Deliver WOW Content? (aff) 00:13:07 - Back to Surprises 00:13:56 - Maybe It's Not Time To Promote Your Show 00:17:23 - It All Comes Back to Word of Mouth 00:18:01 - Master Your Craft 00:19:09 - What Does Google Look At? 00:19:10 - Podcast Hot Seat 00:19:25 - Experience 00:20:10 - Your Podcast Website 00:20:26 - Google E.E.A.T Experience 00:22:13 - Expertise 00:24:00 - Authoritativeness 00:25:07 - AI Writer 00:25:33 - Congressional Dish 00:26:11 - Trustworthiness 00:26:51 - Beiding Your Morals 00:27:43 - Question of the Month 00:28:41 - Live Appearances https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where 00:29:13 - Back to the Basics 00:30:36 - Tell Us A Little Bit About Yourself 00:32:17 - Other Ingredients of Good Shows 00:36:36 - If You Want To Make Money 00:37:26 - BE AUTHENTIC 00:38:45 - Artwork Counts 00:39:45 - Get Consistency Right 00:40:49 - You Can't Get This Any Place Else 00:41:35 - Overwhelmed? That's OK 00:43:01 - What is It Michael? 00:44:43 - The Mentality of Good Content 00:46:08 - Monetizing Too Early 00:47:15 - So Many Crayons! 00:49:13 - Poor Planning and Execution 00:49:55 - Lack of Authenticity 00:50:47 - Quantity Over Quality 00:51:37 - Failure to Adapt 00:52:43 - Fear of Criticism 00:53:38 - Lack of Patience 00:55:22 - AI In Future Episode 00:55:56 - Grab Your Crayons! 00:57:13 - 3 Years to Monetize
Today, we're thrilled to have of the as our guest. With over 25 years of experience in radio and having embarked on his podcasting journey back in 2016, Matt has reached an incredible milestone with his podcast hitting 400 episodes. In this conversation, we delve into his early challenges, the critical importance of consistency, and the impact of evolving podcasting technology. Matt also shares his insights on hosting platforms, scheduling tools, and the art of podcast interviews. From discussing the differences between traditional radio and podcasting to navigating sponsorships and creative content integration, this episode is packed with valuable tips for budding podcasters. We'll also touch on the growing role of AI in voice acting, the importance of artwork and video in engaging listeners, and the benefits of podcast transcriptions. Plus, learn about Matt’s podcast network and his unique approach to fostering a community of podcasters through cross promos and collaborative efforts. Check out Matt's conversation with Dave on episode 400 at (Podcast Recommendations) Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website. Leave Your Answer at Podcast Rewind Mentioned In This Episode (Podcast Recommendations) (one time lifetime offer) Schedulging tool This is episode 934 of the .
In this episode, we look at how podcasters use YouTube to enhance your podcast. I asked: A) Are you not using YouTube at all? B) Are you creating static videos? C) Are you creating full videos? I also talk about a way to find more content using YouTube even if you're not making videos. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Chapter Markers: 00:01:15 - Opening 00:01:15 - People HAVING to Do YouTube? 00:02:04 - How Are You Using YouTube? 00:02:30 - Dan - Based On A True Story 00:05:17 - Max - Aviation News talk 00:07:37 - Craig Ingles Podcast 00:09:15 - Kim - Pharmacists Podcast / Perrysburg 00:11:34 - Zo - Backlook Cinema 00:13:30 - Mark - Markvinet.com 00:14:49 - Ralp - Ask Ralph Podcast (Finance) 00:16:06 - Bryan Relaxed Male 00:17:17 - Paul - Pass ACLS 00:18:52 - Rich - Two Grumpy Vets and a Dude 00:20:36 - Join the School of Podcasting 00:21:37 - Your Podcast Website 00:21:55 - Ronnie - Dancing is Forbidden 00:24:46 - Todd - Guardian Downcast 00:28:07 - Tim - Create Art Podcast 00:31:25 - Dave - Walking is Fitness 00:33:27 - York - Welcome to Eartch Stories 00:36:05 - Dave's Thoughts 00:37:30 - Check Consumption Rate 00:39:55 - Using YouTube To Check What Topics are Popular 00:41:44 - Question of the Month 00:42:43 - Live Appearances 00:43:17 - Future Episodes 00:44:13 - Join the School of Podcasting 00:44:13 - New Chapter 00:45:02 - Blooper
Today I talk Mark Lawley from the . I brought Mark on as he is a "regular guy" (retired Police Officer) who started a podcast with his wife Krista and the ball has been rolling along as their show grows (they have 14000 people in their Facebook group). Mark shares his journey from initial struggles to unexpected success, revealing the importance of knowing your audience, having fun, and continually learning. Join us and uncover the secrets to making your podcast not just a success but a life-saving venture! Find Mark and Krita at and check out the free Thinking of Starting a Podcast? Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world. With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the today! Go to How Did You Like This Episode? I'm always looking for feedback and on this episode (it takes ) Chapters 00:00:00 - A Letter From Morgan 00:02:04 - Opening 00:03:15 - Mark From Practical Prepping 00:03:20 - Define What You WON'T Do 00:03:39 - Why Prepping? 00:05:23 - What Was It Like Starting Out? 00:06:20 - Doing the Right Things 00:08:30 - An Important Thing to Focus On 00:10:20 - Becoming More Efficient 00:11:33 - When To Remove Ums 00:12:13 - Sponsors Came Knocking 00:14:38 - 00:15:42 - 00:15:56 - Improving Your Website 00:17:05 - Mark Added a Facebook Group 00:22:29 - Audience Approved Content 00:24:05 - Sell a Product or Service 00:25:15 - How Are Book Sales? 00:26:12 - Advice For New Podcasters 00:30:00 - Favorite Comments 00:31:55 - You Don't Need to be THE Expert 00:33:03 - What Does Prepared Look Like? 00:33:40 - Buy Mark a Coffee 00:35:23 - My Thoughts 00:37:37 - 00:38:35 - 00:39:18 - Mentioned In This Episode
Today, I dive into the essence of keeping a positive and persistent approach to podcasting. I play guitar, and one of the reasons I'm pretty good is my attitude when learning to play. Share how you can do the same in podcasting. This gets you further than launching and keeps you going. In this episode, I share stories from his insightful visit to the Content Entrepreneur Expo, revealing varying opinions on the use of AI in content creation. We'll explore how consistently honing your podcasting skills can lead to significant breakthroughs, as demonstrated by Jen Hardy. From the power of perseverance, learning new skills, and leveraging humor and storytelling to strategic content mixing and effective use of technology, this episode is packed with guidance to help you thrive in the competitive podcasting arena. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Chapter Markers: 00:00:18 - Opening 00:00:55 - Changing Your Attitude 00:03:12 - Got a Mentor 00:03:51 - Attitude Change 00:04:54 - Podcast Ingredients 00:05:27 - What About Luck? 00:06:30 - Stealing Attention 00:08:22 - Wow Content 00:08:49 - Sydnie Christmas 00:11:50 - Use Your Voice 00:12:31 - AI Best Practices 00:17:18 - My Podcast Needs to Be Better 00:18:58 - Take Another Swing 00:19:33 - The First Time You... 00:23:04 - The Pieces Fall Into Place ) 00:24:55 - BJ Novak at CEX 00:27:03 - HUGE OPPORTUNITY 00:29:58 - Join the School of Podcasting 00:30:58 - NEW SHOW: Your Podcast Website 00:31:15 - How Much Did My Show Grow From Last Week? 00:32:52 - 18% Came From My Newsletter 00:36:18 - Leave Feedback 00:36:36 - Podcast Rewind: Soundoff Podcast 00:37:29 - Question of the Month 00:38:31 - Live Appearances 00:39:03 - The Notes Are There... 00:40:48 - The Wallet Story Mentioned In This Episode This is episode 931
Today we do a deeper dive into why podcasters quit before getting to 10 episodes. What causes this? We also look at topics that can turn up the heat and controversies around your show.
In this episode, we'll dive deep into the "why" behind rebranding your podcast and how vital it is to know your audience intimately, as these elements profoundly influence the content and success of your show. I revisit the significance of knowing your WHY before changing a podcast’s identity and content approach. I also peel back the curtain on past errors to help you pave the way for smarter future changes, fostering growth and innovation. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. ParticipantsScott From What Was That Like Rick from Renewed Mindsets York from Welcome To Earth Stories Mark from History of North America Tyler from Crying is Manly Ralph From Ask Ralph QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website. Leave Your Answer at Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back. Mentioned In This Episode Quick and Dirty Tips Mike Rowe Podcast Review Show Podcast Rodeo Show: Buzzsprout (aff) Captivate (aff) Libsyn (use code sopfree aff) Chapter Markers: 00:00:00 - Rebranding 00:00:36 - Opening 00:01:17 - The Question 00:01:46 - Scott From What Was That Like 00:03:37 - Rick from Renewed Mindsets 00:05:51 - York from Welcome To Earth Stories 00:08:27 - Mark from History of North America 00:09:14 - Tyler from Crying is Manly 00:10:27 - Ralph From Ask Ralph 00:12:02 - Quick and Dirty Tips 00:13:30 - Switching Out Key Players 00:15:06 - Dave on Mike Rowe 00:16:06 - The AC/DC Fact 00:17:31 - The Way To Win 00:18:48 - Scott Made Changes Based on Community Feedback 00:20:59 - 00:22:01 - Your Podcast Website 00:22:20 - Why Rebrand? 00:23:30 - Why I'm rebranding One of My Shows 00:24:10 - Stupid Mistakes 00:25:08 - New Plan 00:28:25 - Podcast Review Inights 00:29:22 - New Show Your Podcast Website 00:29:59 - Buzzsprout Ads New Texting (aff) 00:31:05 - Captivate Updates Player (Aff) 00:31:39 - See Picture Change 00:31:51 - Back To Normal 00:32:44 - Why I Rant About YouTube 00:35:26 - Question of the Month 00:36:27 - Live Appearances 00:36:58 - Follow the Show 00:38:16 - Join the Community 00:39:06 - Bloopers This show originates at
Alban Brooke has been at for almost ten years and is the head of Marketing. Today we talk about some new features to manage your show in Buzzsprout along with the attitude and expectations to make it in the long game of podcasting. Connect with Alban Brooke Check out Connect with Alban on Twitter Some of the links on this page are affiliate links, I earn from qualifying purchases, but you do not pay any additional fee. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Buzzsprout Features Mention New iOs App (monitoring, sharing, updates) Dynamic Chapters Pre and Post Rolls Buzzsprout Ads (available to anyone) For more information see . QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website. Leave Your Answer at Mentioned In This Episode Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at Podcast Giveaway Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
Welcome to the School of Podcasting! In today's exhilarating episode, we dove deep into the art of leveraging social media to supercharge your podcast. Join me, Dave Jackson, and social media strategist Katie Brinkley as we unpack the power of the 4 pillars strategy—awareness, education, elaboration, and storytelling—to captivate your audience. Discover the secret sauce to building a dedicated community, why consistent posting trumps timing, and the essential tools for tracking and enhancing your social connect. JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting. Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee. Save using this link Connect with Katie Brinkley Katie on Katie on How Did You Like This Episode? I'm always looking for feedback and on this episode (it takes ) Because of My Podcast : Neil Scott Wins an Award Check out Neil's show Podcast Giveaway Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at Mentioned In This Episode
I'm back from Podcast Movement Evolutions in LA. I learned some cool stuff, and YouTube did a presentation and I point out the good, the bad, and the confusing. I also point out some people who got busted doing things that could really damage podcasting's integrity. My friends Harry and Kevin boil down podcast monetization to a single question. I've got a new giveaway, that gets you educated and promoted at the same time.
I am so excited to have on the show today. Joe has been creating great podcasts like , and show for years to coincide with his amazing books like , and Joe also created and sold the Content Marketing Institute and is now the man behind the (May 5-7, 2024, in Cleveland, Ohio). Use the coupon JP100 to save $100. In 2014, he received the "Lifetime Achievement Award" by the Content Council. He successfully exited CMI in 2016 and wrote an award-winning mystery novel, . In other words people, Joe is a "Big Shot Smarty Pants" (the highest level of coolness here at the SOP). Get your pencils ready. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Mentioned In This Episode Joe's books: , and Joe's Podcasts: , and Joe's Website: Joe's Newsletters: , and the (Coupon JP100) Podcasting 2.0 Chapters 00:00:01 - Why Joe is Here? 00:00:24 - Opening 00:01:23 - Joe Pullizzi Interview 00:01:48 - Joe is a Good Guy 00:02:34 - The Tilt Newsletter () 00:04:19 - What is Content Marketing? 00:06:02 - Where to Start When There is No Audience? 00:08:32 - Davus Interruptus How to Sell in a Balanced Way 00:11:37 - Joe Knows What I Want 00:12:16 - Tracking Marketing Success? 00:14:32 - The Orange Newsletter ( ) 00:17:16 - You Don't Need to Be Everywhere 00:20:50 - What is Engaging Content? 00:24:59 - How Long Does it Take to Build An Audience? 00:27:42 - Lessons Learned From Mistakes 00:29:22 - 00:30:23 - Podcasting Checklist () 00:30:37 - What Joe Would Do Differently? 00:33:47 - Content Entrepreneur Expo () 00:35:40 - Do These Tips Apply For Entertainment Shows? 00:40:39 - Networking At CEX 00:41:50 - CEX.EVENTS COUPON JP100 00:43:22 - Don't Just Take Notes 00:44:34 - My Takeaways 00:46:19 - Question of the Month ( ) 00:47:20 - Profit From Your Podcast ( ) 00:47:53 - Book Launch Secrets ( ) 00:48:32 - Can You Share the Show? 00:49:49 - Bloopers - Polishing Content
Welcome to another enlightening episode of the School of Podcasting, where your host, Dave Jackson, invites you on a deep dive into the exciting world of Podcasting 2.0. Join us as we explore the dramatic shift from traditional podcast monetization to earning directly through satoshis, capturing the real impact of this new revenue model with personal stories of enhanced earnings. This episode is a must-listen for all podcast enthusiasts and creators seeking to keep up with the latest trends and features reshaping the podcasting landscape. From Dave's analysis of Google shifting from Google Podcasting to YouTube Music and the quest for the ultimate podcasting app, to a candid review of options like Podorama, Podcast Guru, and truefans.fm, you’ll get an insider's perspective on navigating the changing podcasting ecosystem. There is a website to help at , but first we need to know where to start when it comes to explaining why you should be involved. Thinking of Starting a Podcast? Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world. With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the today! Go to Podcast Giveaway Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at Participants Ethan at Ralph from Zo from York from Brandon from Timeline 00:00:00 - From Here to There 00:01:18 - Opening 00:02:01 - Podcasting 2.0 Initiative 00:04:32 - Ethan Resse 00:06:11 - Ralph Estep Jr. 00:07:24 - Zo Richardson 00:09:54 - Brandon Brinkley 00:14:02 - York 00:18:03 - Join the School of Podcasting 00:19:03 - Podcast Launch Checklist 00:19:20 - Understanding Podcasting 2.0 00:20:04 - Podroll 00:20:55 - Transcripts 00:21:08 - Value Options 00:28:13 - Programmatic Ads Vs Value For Value 00:32:45 - Cross App Comments 00:33:41 - Why Not? It's Free! 00:34:17 - Stats, Stats, and Stats 00:35:02 - Why Does This Exist? 00:36:52 - Total Money Received So Far 00:38:13 - My App Criteria 00:42:18 - Podurama 00:43:35 - Podcast Guru 00:44:43 - True Fans.fm 00:46:21 - Honorable Mentions 00:48:00 - Remove These Buttons 00:48:30 - Question of the Month 00:49:35 - Live Appearances 00:50:06 - Contact Support To Let them Know What You Want 00:52:40 - 00:53:34 - See You At Podcast Movement Evolutions 00:53:53 - Future Interviews 00:55:32 - 00:55:35 - Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at Mentioned In This Episode Where Will I Be? I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate Go to and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. This is episode 924
I get the question, "Should I start a video podcast? " Should I be on YouTube? along with "I uploaded my video and it's not appearing on Spotify" daily, so this episode is to help those struggling with the idea of video. I will also help you avoid a big headache and announce a new way to consume my book. Thinking of Starting a Podcast? Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world. With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't let the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the today! Go to How Did You Like This Episode? I'm always looking for feedback and I would love for your input on this episode () Mentioned In This Episode (NOW AVAILABLE IN AUDIO) (podcast411) (Sounds Profitable) (Sound Off Podcast) (AI video editor) Ubersuggest - Sell Your Podcast (or in my case book) (Coleman Insights - HORRIBLE AUDIO WARNING) Podcast Giveaway Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases
In Episode 922, financial expert joins me to discuss a topic that often trips up content creators: taxes. This episode delves into vital financial considerations for podcasters, emphasizing the importance of recognizing potential tax deductions, proactive financial tracking, and leveraging various tools. Thinking of Starting a Podcast? Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world. With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't letthe voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the today! Go to Meet Ralph Estep Jr. Ralph V. Estep, Jr. is a highly accomplished professional with a diverse finance, accounting, technology, and entrepreneurship background. As the principal at Saggio Management Group, Inc., he has demonstrated exceptional leadership and expertise in various roles throughout his career. For more information, see Use the coupon SOP50 to save on a consultation. Podcast Giveaway Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at How Did You Like This Episode? I'm always looking for feedback and I would love for your input on this episode () Podcasting 2.0 Ready This show uses Podcasting 2.0 chapters enabling you to skip to next topic. If you're not using a new modern app check out on the iPhone and on Android. For more information, see Mentioned In This Episode QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website. Leave Your Answer at Where Will I Be? I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
Today I asked my audience how full is their playlist? Are they looking for more shows? Happy with the Current Line up? Or are you already behind on the shows you follow? Is it harder to grow a podcast today than, say 5 years ago? I also talk about an Evernote alternative (as their price is going WAY UP) and how when things evolve, some will like it and some won't, do what is right for your show, and your sanity. Thinking of Starting a Podcast? Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world. With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the today! Go to Participants/Chapters 00:01:10 - Do People Have Room For Another Podcast? 00:01:38 - Ethan Reese 00:02:26 - Ralph Etep Jr 00:02:46 - Jim Collison 00:03:13 - Kris 00:04:25 - Mark Vinet 00:05:21 - York 00:07:56 - Dave's Take 00:10:07 - Tangent: 3 Percent 00:11:20 - The Importance of Episode Titles 00:13:45 - Evernote and Changing Your Focus ( 00:16:15 - When You Change Your Show Changes 00:17:07 - The People Who Don'y Like You 00:17:54 - SNL Is Not For Me... 00:19:57 - TITLES, TITLES, TITLES 00:21:17 - Because of My Podcast: Live Well and Flourish 00:22:15 - Happy Episode 100! 00:23:39 - AI Goes to College 00:23:50 - The Return of Michael Hyatt 00:25:29 - Question of the Month 00:26:30 - Live Appearances 00:27:02 - Podcast Rewind: Jay Franze 00:28:21 - Consulting Giveaway 00:28:41 - 00:29:44 - Bloopers 00:30:25 - RIP Bob Heil Podcast Giveaway How would you like to win 30 minutes of consulting?. Check it out at (I'm testing a new tool). Podcast RewindDave appeared on the QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website. Leave Your Answer at Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at How Did You Like This Episode? I'm always looking for feedback, and I would on this episode () Mentioned In This Episode Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
Hey there, fellow podcasters! I'm Dave Jackson, and welcome to another episode of the School of Podcasting, where we breathe life into your podcasting journey. Today's lesson is close to my heart: "Strategies for Staying Motivated." We all know the drill — some days, you're on top of the world, ready to share your voice with the masses; other times, the mic might as well be a ten-ton weight. But don't fret; I'm right there with you, and together, we're going to conquer those podcasting blues. Thinking of Starting a Podcast? Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world. With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't let the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the today! Go to Mentioned In This Episode Episodes About Community Daniel Desir Dan Miller Moved Off of Facebook Growing Valuable Podcast Content With a Facebook Group – Katie Krimitsos Starting and Growing and ENGAGED Community That You Can Monetize with Jono Petrohilos Community Tools ($20/month) ($49/month - I Use this) ($99/month) ($99/month) ($119/month) Thanks Dave? If you found this episode helpful, consider
was alerted that his show was in Apple's New and Noteworthy. He didn't know how he got there, and what it meant for his show. Today he shares how being in New and Noteworthy was just the start. Check out Gary's show it's a daily podcast for Intellectually Curious People. Host Gary Arndt tells the stories of interesting people, places, and things from around the world and throughout history. Check out Gary as he prepares to bungee ( scroll down about halfway ) Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Today's Talk With Gary Arndt This discussion covered Gary's experience being featured on Apple's New and Noteworthy section and the significant growth it drove for his podcast. Gary saw a spike in downloads and traffic that propelled his show to the top of Apple podcast charts. While the direct impact of New and Noteworthy was small, the increased visibility helped grow his audience in a sustainable way over subsequent months. Is There a Clear Replacement For Google Podcasts? I've looked at a few apps to replace Google Podcasts. You can filter the results at to show Andoird. I talk about Truefans, Podvers, Podcast Guru, and Podcast Addict. No clear winner for me... how about you? Question of the Month Send in your answer at Live Appearances See my schedule at Mentioned In This Episode Timeline 00:00:00 - Make Good For For Dave 00:03:04 - Gary Arndt Has Great Info 00:04:09 - Welcome to the Show 00:04:41 - How Do I Get Into New and Noteworthy? 00:06:00 - Gary Arndt Interview 00:06:50 - Gary Got Featured 00:09:14 - Part 2 of the Story - The Charts 00:13:02 - Month Over Month Growth 00:14:05 - Apple Leapfrogs Over Spotify 00:15:35 - Number 1 in History 00:16:20 - How Do You Get Into New and Noteworthy? 00:16:59 - Effects on Advertising 00:18:23 - Advertising Insights 00:20:05 - Join the Community 00:21:07 - Your Podcast Website 00:21:23 - Apple Marketing Tools 00:25:15 - How Do You Get An Apple Player? (https://tools.applemediaservices.com/apple-podcasts) 00:26:55 - Should I Use An Apple Player On My Website? 00:28:36 - Android Users 00:29:13 - Spotify Players 00:29:36 - Put the Choice In the Listener's Hands 00:32:20 - Google Podcast Replacement? 00:32:56 - Two Types of Apps 00:35:30 - My Criteria 00:35:43 - Podcast Guru 00:36:24 - Podverse.fm 00:36:49 - Truefans.fm 00:38:36 - If You Had To Pick One.. 00:39:13 - What is Podcasting 2.0? 00:40:20 - Podcast Addict? 00:41:02 - Top 4 Options 00:42:32 - Podcasting 2.org 00:42:48 - Question of the Month 00:43:46 - Live Appearances 00:44:22 - Your Podcast Website is Coming 00:45:05 - Join the School of Podcasting 00:46:03 - Bloopers and Bonus 00:46:33 - OMG That Image 00:47:08 - RIP Lee Silverstein This show originates from as this is episode 918. The assembly took six hours.
In a , Social Media was one of the top things people were NOT going to use going forward. Is it social media or are we using it wrong? Maybe by design, it's not designed to give us what we want. Enter Social Stampede a tool that lets you see how many people engaged with you, but WHO it was. Check out Stampede Social at and use the coupon code dave30 Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Podcasting 2.0 New Website Finally a website to store all things "Podcasting 2.0". Find it at Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Mentioned In This Episode use the coupon dave30 Jeff's Podcast "" (one time fee) (future podcast) Timeline 00:00:00 - Coming Up 00:00:33 - Opening 00:00:59 - Jeff Dwoskin Interview 00:01:56 - What Is It? 00:02:31 - What Makes It Different? 00:04:06 - Just One Link? 00:06:11 - Features and Uses 00:08:46 - Using it For Livestreams 00:09:44 - Giveaways on Stampede Social 00:12:56 - Another Cool Thing 00:15:27 - Do You Get Email Addresses 00:18:25 - Reporting 00:20:56 - 00:21:55 - New SHow COming 00:22:13 - What If Meta Breaks It? 00:26:12 - What Happens If I Run out of # 00:27:48 - The Power of Live 00:29:39 - Use Coupon dave30 00:30:23 - Jeff's Podcast 00:31:05 - Because of My Podcast Story 00:32:38 - Stampede Social vs 00:34:25 - Question of the Month (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question) 00:35:25 - Live Appearances (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where) 00:36:04 - Giveaway Behind the Scenes () 00:38:45 - Podcasting 2.0 Home Page (https://www.podcasting2.org) 00:42:41 - Share This Please (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/follow) 00:43:06 - Free Promotion for Your Show (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question) 00:43:55 - Join the School of Podcasting! (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener) 00:44:24 - Bloopers () Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
We all know the podcasting space is an ever-changing space so I asked, What are you going to STOP doing in 2024 and will you be STARTING in 2024? The audience chimes in so we can all learn together. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate Go to and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website. Leave Your Answer at Time Line and Participants 00:00:00 - What Are You Going to Do? () 00:00:15 - Opening 00:00:51 - Recap on Emotions 00:01:56 - What Will You Start and Stop Doing in 2024? 00:02:51 - Kim Newlove 00:06:09 - Gary Arndt 00:08:22 - Tyler Hespeler 00:10:22 - Angie M Jordan https://www.angiemjordan.com/ 00:11:16 - Julie South 00:13:24 - Inviting People To Your Newsletter (Aff) 00:14:40 - Kelvin the Deaf and Blind Potter 00:17:22 - Mark Vinet 00:17:56 - Affiliate Marketing Best Practices 00:19:59 - Rick Yuhas 00:21:26 - Ethan Resse 00:22:53 - Ralph V. Estep, Jr 00:24:01 - School of Podcasting Affiliate Program 00:24:24 - Join the School of Podcasting 00:25:25 - Your Podcast Website Show 00:25:40 - Allen C. Paul 00:28:08 - Andrea Gadsen 00:31:00 - Not Your Target Audience 00:33:40 - You CAN Press Record 00:34:08 - Put Your Name On Your Website 00:35:18 - Dave Jackson https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com 00:37:03 - Descript 101 00:38:20 - Youtube Updates and Verbage 00:42:16 - Do You Know Who I Am? (Instagram influencer) 00:43:45 - Question of the Month 00:44:44 - Live Appearances 00:45:16 - Giveaway Update 00:45:53 - Follow the Show https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/subscribe 00:46:22 - Save With Coupon Listener https://www.schoolofpodcasitng.com/listener 00:46:54 - Bloopers
We lost Dan Miller a few weeks ago, and Dan was someone who I always walked about smarter after talking to him. I had him on the first episode of the Grow Your Community show, and today I'm replaying that episode. I also learned that Lee Silversteen who appeared on episode 539 has run out of options in regards to battling his cancer. So this episode is a bit "dark" but, well, sometimes life is dark... The question of the month returns next week. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. About Dan Miller Dan is the author of the books , , , and more (check out ). is always bursting with common sense and insights that are often missing in today's business leaders. Dan speaks the truth based on his decades of helping entrepreneurs meet their goals. About Lee Silverstein Lee Silverstein was diagnosed with stage 4 colon cancer 13 years ago. He started the podcast he needed to hear when the doctor said, "You have cancer." He has inspired MULTIPLE podcasts, and his legacy will live on long after Lee. From his Facebook page, Lee recently posted: I feel it’s time to make this official. After close to 13 years there are no more treatment options available to me. I have begun in-home hospice service. I’m quite comfortable and not in any pain. I have far outlived any oncologist’s predictions and I'm grateful for that. I’m at peace and have no regrets. You give a podcast to a teach and they see it as a tool to help people learn. You give a podcast to a marketer and they see it as a too tool to sell. You give a podcast to a guy with stage 4 colon cancer, and he sees it as a tool to inspire. (and he did). Mentioned In This Episode Community Tools more information This is of the School of Podcasting
Today I share parts of a conversation I had, but as I'm saying my negative opinion of a certain practice, I'm not saying the company, and I've replaced the actual guest with an AI-Generated voice (from ). If you plan on paying for a service to promote your show, this is a MUST LISTEN. We also talk about Apple evaporating your downloads is a GOOD thing. Again, the voice you hear as the "Guest" is AI generated from a transcript of the conversation. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website. Leave Your Answer at Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Mentioned In This Episode Time Stamps 00:01:40 - Opening 00:02:18 - Apple Stats Evaporates 30% Of Your Downloads 00:05:47 - Trying Not to Get Sued 00:07:45 - How This Service Works 00:09:26 - Does Your Player Preload? 00:11:51 - The Terms You Need to Understand 00:12:42 - Power Rant: Do Your Job 00:14:57 - Make Yourself Look Good By Comparing Yourself to Something Bad 00:16:47 - Enter Attribution 00:17:30 - Working on Auto Follows 00:18:56 - It's Not Fake? 00:19:54 - How Did You Get My Information? 00:20:12 - Admission of Preloading/Buffering 00:21:23 - All About the Data 00:22:57 - Retargeting Equals More Ad Spend 00:23:38 - Verified Downloads Are Not Good Enough 00:24:09 - The Purpose of This Company 00:24:31 - A Specific Case 00:25:41 - Retention Numbers 00:26:18 - Cost Per Listener 00:27:07 - History Lesson: Twitterbombing 00:28:39 - The Takeaways 00:32:50 - Other Bad Stats 00:33:57 - My YouTube Shorts Stat 00:34:45 - Question of the Month Bloopers This episode originated at
Today I share a story where I took information I was going to publish as an episode, but put it out instead as I was worried it would make me look Salesy. Today I share how I found out that message really resonated with my audience, and now I'm using it here. I also share how getting a can save you TONS of time and HEADACHES and that is often WAY MORE than the price you are paying. YOU: Avoid common mistakes Learn the shortcuts you only learn from doing If you're in a community, you get to network with or creators All of the above can lead to less stress, and more production. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Podcast Giveaway Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at Mentioned In This Episode (Dave's live streaming coach - affiliate) Love Thy Lawyer (because of my podcast story) Timeline 00:00:00 - Introduction 00:00:19 - Opening 00:01:17 - I Discovered a Learning Curve 00:02:33 - Behind the Scenes: Salesy 00:04:14 - Learning New Technology 00:06:50 - What Options Do You Have? 00:07:41 - The Real Value 00:10:19 - One More Benefit 00:11:52 - Research Your Coach 00:13:11 - A Less Stressful Environment 00:14:26 - I Wasn't Going to Share This... 00:16:06 - Edit Out the Bad Content 00:17:45 - Publish All The Good Stuff 00:19:26 - Hire ONE Coach and Avoid Facebook 00:20:20 - 00:21:20 - ! 00:21:36 - Because of My Podcast () 00:24:18 - I Can Save Your $180 Dollars 00:30:22 - Question of the Month () 00:31:21 - Live Appearances () 00:31:51 - Letting People Know What You Do - One More Tip 00:33:01 - Follow the Show () 00:34:05 - 00:35:20 - Blooper This is episode 914 from
Today we have a few topics. First, its a new year! Are you ready? I go through a list of things that you might want to make sure you have. We talk about asking WHY to help you find additional motivation, and to TIME yourself so you can make informed decisions. Lastly, some people are making bad decisions for their podcasts as a business, and I give some advice on what to watch out for. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Podcast Giveaway Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at Chapters 00:00:00 - Introduction 00:00:19 - Opening 00:01:03 - Neil Wants To Sponsor Your Show 00:09:47 - Check Your Email 00:11:24 - Keep Asking Why 00:12:54 - Example: My Whys 00:18:26 - Making Informed Decisions 00:19:27 - Why Podcasting Is Hard 00:20:34 - Join the School of Podcasting 00:21:35 - Giveaway - Enter Today 00:21:51 - The Uncomfortable Conversation 00:25:06 - Trevor Got a Recording Style Deal 00:26:32 - Cohosts Getting Fired 00:27:35 - Network Deals - Do The Work 00:36:13 - School of Podcasting Price Increase? 00:37:12 - Check the Gurus Linkedin 00:38:39 - 00:39:39 - Live Appearances 00:40:11 - Time Yourself with Toggl 00:44:59 - Bloopers 00:45:43 - One More Tip Mentioned In This Episode (Neil Hedley) This episode originates from the School of Podcasting at
The goal of this episode is to help you understand what makes a GOOD podcast, and help you decide if you should also be a video podcast. As it's the beginning of the year, MANY people will be selling you on how you can quit your job with no effort, no work, and how easy it is to leave the 9 to 5. They rave at how much money you will make, after all, they are on a boat! And you will do it quickly. I just can't do that. I want people who are fueled by passion, and understand there is a process of Plan Launch Grow Monetize So today we are going to first look at what makes a GOOD podcast, and then what is going on with the Podcasting space with places like YouTube and Spotify. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Making a Good Podcast Make sure you are doing two or more of the following: Laugh Cry Think Groan Educate Entertain If you do NONE of these you are boring your audience. Some other items I mentioned today: Relevence - When it comes to good content another key ingredient is relevance. When I heard the phrase ‘overwhelm” at a podcast conference FOUR TIMES I created episode 871 Overcoming Podcast Overwhelm: Three Free Tools and a Strategy. Authenticity - Be yourself. Authenticity builds a connection with your audience. Don't be afraid to show personality and vulnerability. Don’t let Chat GPT wash your personality out of your show. Storytelling - We love a good story. How can you make your show more entertaining? Tell a good story. Research - State your sources when available. We want people to trust us, and when we show the work we put into the show, it can help the listener trust what they are hearing. Rehearsal: Practice makes perfect. Rehearse your content to iron out any kinks and ensure smooth delivery. Timeliness: Stay current. If your podcast covers time-sensitive topics, make sure to provide up-to-date information. This is one of those, "it depends" topics. Bert Weiss Boils Podcasting Down to Two Items In the Book Bert Wiess (Hey Bert! Call me. I want to interview you) boils it down to this: A podcast is made up of two things: Content Delivery One without the other will not work. Mentioned In This Episode Turns Your Phone Into a Webcam Libsyn's Podcast Full show notes at
I have a tradition that the last episode of the year is you answering WHY your favorite show is your FAVORITE. You know the show, you get notified in your app, and you immediately stop listening to whatever show and IMMEDIATELY go to theirs. Thanks to all who participated. I did something different and had AI summarize all the "WHYs" together. A special shout-out to Matt Rafferty from . I assembled this at the last minute, and unfortunately ate your reply. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back. PARTICIPANTS Special Apology to your file was corrupt. Kelvin Crosby from the and loves the Podcast Chris Lewis from the podcast loves Show. Craig from loves the loves the show. Danny Brown From loves the . Kim Stewart from the loves the show. Anastasia Lipske from Loves the Todd the Gator from and the loves the Scott from loves the Podcast. Loves , but his WHY from the Podcast Lousis from loves Sam Harris's . Mark from the Podcast Paul from the Pass show loves (but we all hate their URL). SP Rupert from and loves York from Welcome to loves the show Dr. Brad Miller from loves the show a Friend Harvis from loves James Cridland's Tim from and would listen to his show to make it better. Dave Jackson from likes . Mentioned In This Episode
Today on episode number 910, what if you took a feedback tool like SpeakPipe and you combined it with the convenience of my podcast reviews and the networking functionality of something like Refonic and then combined it with someone who is obsessed over data that will help you understand and grow your audience named Daniel j Lewis? Well, you get , and that's what we're gonna talk about today. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. What is Podgagment? Podgagement is ONE tool that provides a written AND audio feedback tool combined with the ability to check your reviews from ALL Apple stores AND Podchaser AND Goodpods (and more) while providing easy-to-remember links to tell your audience to go rate and review your show. Check out the "Follow Page" in action at Who is Daniel J. Lewis? As an award-winning podcaster, Daniel J. Lewis gives you the guts and teaches you the tools to launch and grow your own podcasts for passion and P.R.O.F.I.T. Daniel creates resources for podcasters, such as the and , the , a .a tool to help you know your audience and grow your podcast. He also manages the . As a recognized authority and influencer in the podcasting industry, Daniel speaks on podcasting and hosts his own . , and the . Daniel and his son live near Cincinnati, Ohio, in the USA. One Thing About Ratings and Reviews In Apple Podcasts (they don't help you in the algorithm). Per Apple: What the Apple charts measure: Apple Podcasts Charts reflect the most popular shows and episodes available in a given market and are designed to help people discover what to listen to next. They do not reflect all-time listening records and are not a measure of the largest podcasts by listenership. While the exact algorithm cannot be shared to protect their integrity, the charts measure a mix of the following: Listening: When listeners are engaging with episodes, it’s an indicator of content popularity. Follows: When listeners follow a show to receive new episodes, it’s an indicator of their intent to listen. Completion Rate: When listeners complete episodes, it’s an indicator of content quality. Ratings, reviews, and shares Although ratings, reviews, and shares also help indicate a podcast’s newness, popularity, and quality, they are not factored into the algorithm that determines the rankings for Top Shows and Top Episodes. In other words, they may not help people find a podcast on their own, but they influence whether people will listen or follow, and those factors influence the charts. Source: QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website. Leave Your Answer at Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back. Mentioned In This Episode
I read an article by Leslie Thompson titled, , and it really moved me. It points out that even if you end up ceasing to produce your podcast, the time is not waste. It may feel that way, but Leslie shares how her time on the podcast was not a wate of time and she has used her skills in other projects including her now show . Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Meet Leslie Thompson Leslie is a podcast host, Leslie leads AncoraTN’s podcast, which shares the firsthand stories of human sex trafficking survivors in the state of Tennessee. In addition to hosting, Leslie is a podcast and radio producer, currently senior producer for Christianity Today’s Holy Curiositypodcast, and The Living Church Podcast. Leslie has worked with the , No Small Endeavor’s and , and Sandra McCracken’s through Christianity Today. QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website. Leave Your Answer at Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back. Mentioned In This Episode
You get to do something new. You've never done it before, and you are feeling uncomfortable. In some cases, that feeling will stop you from starting your podcast. Today we talk about that feeling and how to overcome it. Full show notes with video of the performance at JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting. Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee. Save using this link Podcast Rewind: QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website. Leave Your Answer at Where Will I Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back. Mentioned In This Episode TIMELINE 00:00:00 - How We Learn 00:01:04 - Introduction 00:01:41 - Getting The Nerve to Podcast 00:03:28 - The Invite 00:09:07 - Performance Night 00:10:51 - I'm Going to Explode 00:11:28 - Pep Talk 00:13:38 - What is This I'm Feeling? 00:14:21 - Brain Tatoos 00:15:30 - Switch Your Thinking 00:18:22 - Daves Comedy Set 00:24:20 - Daves Comments 00:26:16 - The Magic of Podcasting 00:28:00 - Serve over Fear 00:29:11 - Join the School of Podcasting 00:30:10 - Podcasting Tips 00:30:27 - One Way To Get Past Your Fears 00:31:56 - Invest In Yourself 00:34:40 - Podcast Rewind 00:37:09 - Question of the Month 00:38:09 - Live Appearances 00:38:38 - We Learn From Mistakes 00:39:48 - The Goal of This Episode 00:40:21 - Follow the Show 00:40:45 - Bloopers
I was listening to an episode of the where people who work in the advertising space answered if they listened to ads. I know I am not a fan of bad ads, but I wondered what my audience thought. If you're considering putting advertisements into your podcast, you want to hear what NOT to do. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Timeline 00:00:00 - Introduction / Opening 00:01:30 - Matt: 00:03:26 - Scott: 00:07:22 - Kim: 00:11:32 - Clay: 00:13:32 - York: 00:16:51 - Zoe: 00:19:29 - Mark: 00:20:18 - Paul: 00:22:51 - Chris: 00:23:56 - Timothy: 00:30:49 - 00:31:50 - 00:32:08 - Chimes In 00:33:27 - Sanborn: 00:35:04 - Chris: 00:38:14 - Chris: 00:38:54 - Brian: 00:40:44 - Skipping Ads Settings 00:42:20 - Dave: 00:43:05 - What Did We Learn? 00:44:09 - Media Hosts With Dynamic Tools 00:45:14 - Programmatic Complaints 00:47:42 - Consider Your Source 00:49:38 - Question of the Month 00:50:38 - Live Appearances 00:51:39 - Next Episode Mentioned In This Episode Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
One of the benefits of podcasting is your get to talk to experts. For me, LinkedIn is my weakest social platform. I know I should do more, but I don't. Well, 2024 is right around the corner, and LinkedIn is on the radio, so I brought on Daniel Alfon (who has been on Linkedin since 2004, has written a book on LinkedIn, offers courses, coaching, etc, and generally knows this stuff when it comes to LinkedIn and he answers all my questions. Check him out at
Today I talk about some practices I've seen and heard about that may be designed to prey on the uninformed and/or be designed to serve the podcaster and not their audience. I also comment on , which ties in nicely with a documentary called "" which shows how Z100 in New York City described their show in a way that positioned themselves as an authority. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website. Leave Your Answer at Where Will I Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate Go to and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Mentioned In This Episode by Tom Website of Sounds Profitable
David Hooper published an episode where he gives the "behind the scenes" view of on his t show. I've known Dave for years and respect his insights and snarkiness, and when I heard this episode, I felt compelled to tell everyone about it. That triggered me. Why exactly was I sharing this? Today I brought Dave on as I dissected his episode and got his comments. Check Out Dave's Books As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases Dave has a number of books on Amazon like ) and What I Liked About This Episode Dave would increase the pressure by talking about the stakes of the situation. There was also a lot of "I wonder what happens next," which is always great. At one point, he launched into a story that somewhat relieved the pressure and helped establish Dave's street credibility (he has interviewed a TON of people on his Music Business Radio show). You will also hear Dave be vulnerable as he shares his thoughts on the interview with Dolly. Ultimately, you can't wait to hear how the interview goes. Did it happen? Was it good? Did Dave cry? Did he blow it? You can hear the uninterrupted full version of the episode at Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website. Leave Your Answer at Mentioned In This Episode This is episode of the
We all know the feeling of hearing a brilliant thought or idea during a podcast, only to have it slip away just as quickly. Well, fear not! In this episode, our host shares their struggles with capturing and remembering information, as well as some incredible insights about how to overcome this challenge. I asked my audience and they shared their strategies which range from No Tech to Multi-level tech so you can find what works for you! Click Listen! OK Boomer! It's Time To Start Your Podcast Hey Boomers! Ready to share your wealth of wisdom with the world? The School of Podcasting is calling YOU to become the next podcasting sensation! Don't let the digital age pass you by—join our Boomer-friendly podcasting community. Whether you're into travel tales, grandparenting tips, or reminiscing about the good ol' days, there's an audience eager to hear YOUR story. No tech headaches here! Our step-by-step courses make podcasting a breeze. From vinyl to virtual, let's turn your experiences into captivating audio adventures. Embrace the mic, Boomers! Enroll now at the School of Podcasting and let your voice echo through the digital era. Because your stories are timeless, and the world is ready to listen! Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Contributors Scott from sends an email to himself. Mark from uses Evernote and a Voice Recorder and reviews all the ideas weekly to get them organized. Brandon from Dallas likes Mentioned In This Episode () () () () () Matthew Perry Book: Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website. Leave Your Answer at Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back. TIMELINE 00:00:38 - Opening 00:01:22 - Capturing Fleeting Ideas 00:01:51 - Scott From What Was That Like 00:04:16 - Brandon from Dallas 00:07:22 - Mark from 00:08:19 - Mark From 00:09:50 - Randy From 00:10:45 - York From 00:12:21 - Join The School of Podcasting 00:13:23 - BOOST 00:13:40 - Jim From Home Gadget Geeks 00:14:47 - Dave's Screenshot 00:16:38 - Dave Note-Taking App 00:18:14 - What Do You Need It To Do? 00:19:13 - NOT One Drive ! 00:22:12 - Get To Know Your Tools 00:23:14 - Beware FOMO Fear of Missing Out 00:24:33 - SAAS Frustrations 00:26:28 - Question of the Month 00:27:27 - Live Appearances 00:27:59 - Why Is This Good Coming Back 00:28:20 - Everything is at the School of Podcasting 00:29:00 - Bloopers 00:29:13 - RIP Matthew Perry
While there are no rules for podcasting, there are best practices, and today I'm talking with , who helps people get into the top 100 of the Apple Charts. We also discuss how podcasting can give you back your voice and help you be heard. An entrepreneur can boost sales when their podcast is On a regular schedule (it helps you be seen as reliable). Makes points through personal stories (it helps them to know you, while not going on a complete tangent). Good. Most people do not listen to shows that need help. Seeing you as reliable, personable, and helpful makes it easy to boost sales. Learn More From Courtney Courtney Elmer is from the AntiFragile Entrepreneurship Podcast ( ) where she extracts the invaluable wisdom from business leaders who have turned their biggest failures into fuel for exponential growth. She also conducts live workshops and has a private podcast at Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll quickly create high-quality, engaging content. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Mentioned In This Episode Courtney's Workshop Dave's Blog on YouTube Music Boost The Show Using a New Podcast App Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back. This episode originates from
Today, we are talking about your episodes down to a proverb. Proverbs are crafted phrases that have successfully passed wisdom from generation to generation. Proverbs are the ultimate "long story short" that draw their power from the simplicity of their presentation. Are there things you repeat in your show often? Maybe you should embrace your proverb and turn it into swag. Boiling your content down to a proverb that is easy to remember and easy to recite helps you provide marketing materials for your audience to help them promote your show. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. DAVEISMS Where your WHY and your WHO overlap, you will find your WHAT to talk about. If the goal is monetization, get ready to do your show for FREE for a few years. Less than 10% of podcasters get enough downloads to get a BIG sponsor Starring at your stats will not make your downloads grow; starring at your audience will. Monthly stats are crap ( the stat that people use downloads per episode after 30 days) Spend $100 on a microphone and 100 hours getting to know your audience. Creating a podcast is easy. Creating a GOOD podcast is hard but fun. Podcasting is a marathon, not a sprint. (again, it can take three years to build an audience ) Thinking a GIANT podcast launch will lead to an undeniable podcast success is like saying having a BIG wedding ensures marital bliss. In both cases, the real work is just beginning. You must have someone NOT named Mom to listen to your show and give honest feedback. There is no sense in paying to promote a show if it is not resonating with the audience. Downloads are great, but not as cool as consumption rate (seeing how far people listen can let you know how engaged your audience is) Having an obvious name can make it easy to be found. Choose the one you want to click more when you have multiple titles for an episode. It is NOT the media host that grows the audience. It is the content Treat directories like a child looking for Halloween candy. BE EVERYWHERE. Make sure your content does one (or more) of the following: Laugh, cry, think. Grown, Educate, or Entertain. If not you're boring. Listennotes stats (saying you're in the top X percent) are crap. For those who have money, there is therapy. For the rest of us, there is podcasting. If you want to grow your network, do an interview show. If you want to grow your influence, do a solo show. Even better do BOTH. You don't benefit until your audience benefits. While being consistent in schedule is very important (as you become part of your listener's routine) I'd rather have a "Late" show that was good than an "on time" episode that was Meh. Record without fear and edit without mercy. Podcasting is like sex in high school. Everybody says they are doing it. A few are doing it. Nobody is doing it right. Then, your podcast career is over quickly. Just like sex in high school. Don't try to be the most downloaded show. Try to be te most talked about show. There is no such thing as too long, only too boring - Valerie Geller from the book . (aff) Podcast Networks don't make small shows big. They make big shows bigger - Eric Nuzum from the book (aff) Don't try to be the most downloaded podcast; strive to be the most talked-about podcast. - Darrel Evans. "Remember, customers don’t care about you; they care about themselves and their problems." - Joe Pullizi. (p. 73). McGraw-Hill Education. Kindle...
Episode 900 (as was 800, 700, etc) has me breaking format. In this episode I share why all the not so great things that happened to you grow up help make you, YOU. Your uniqueness may be the EXACT thing that resonates with people who need to hear your content. After coming back from the , I was able to book Jesus as a guest. Not to talk about the benefits of believing in him, but more about his marketing practice. He started with 12 followers, and 2000 years later people are still talking about him. He is the author of the , and has a new series on Amazon called "" (highly recommended). You can also (aff) featuring Samuel L Jackson as God.
I first interviewed Branden Mullen from Podpage back on . Today he's back as they have added Podpage Eilite a new plan that adds tools to help your podcast get found, notify guests, provide stats on links and more. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. What is Podpage? Podpage replaces tools like WordPress, Wix, Squarespace, or any other website tool. It is NOT a media host (it works with any podcast hosting company that provides a valid RSS feed). It integrates with email tools like Mailerlite Convertkit, Speakpipe, Google Analytics, and more. What is Podpage Elite? Elite is for the podcaster looking for tools to help them be found with SEO, see their reviews along with: Advanced SEO analysis Reviews from 175+ countries Zapier connection Automated guest alert emails Episode deep linking Private feed support Pretty link click data Host downloadable files Listener episode email alerts (Early 2024) Automatic transcription (Early 2024) Check out Podpage at Learn Podpage at Mentioned In This Episode
Today we are diving into the strategy of "feed drops" in podcasting. Some special guests are joining us, including York Campbell, Randy Black, and Zoe Richardson. In this episode, we'll explore the concept of feed drops, where a show drops an episode into the feed of another show to gain new listeners. Our guests will discuss their experiences with feed drops and share their perspectives on whether it's an effective strategy. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Feed Drops: Feed drops can be a powerful strategy to gain new listeners and broaden your reach in the podcasting realm. By dropping an episode into the feed of another show, you not only introduce your content to a new audience but also establish connections with other podcasters. Just make sure the dropped episode aligns with the tone and subject matter of the host show to keep your listeners engaged. Participants: Randall Black from Zo Richardson from York from Consider Your Source: There are a number of different types of podcasters. Here are just a couple: Fun Seekers Serious Hobbyist The Side Hustle-ist There are also many ways to monetize your show. The Value Four Value model is gaining steam, and everyone talks about podcast advertising. With the above types of podcasters they have different motivations and metrics. People who work in the advertising end of podcasting focus on making sure advertisers are happy. With this in mind, when you hear news, insights, and ideas about podcasting you might consider evaluating what persepctive they are coming from. There is no "wrong" perspective as there are many ways to plan, launch, grow, and monetize your show. For example one recent written by Steve Goldstein on the seemed to hint that podcasting started when advertising arrived. This makes sense coming from Steve who works in the advertising side of podcasting. Podcast Rewind I appeared on by , talking about how to start a podcast. I shared a story about the gear I used when I first started podcasting. QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell use about your show, and mention your website. Leave Your Answer at Mentioned In This Episode Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
in today's episode, number 897, we'll dive into the crowdfunding world and discuss the best platforms to use. We'll discuss various crowdfunding platforms like Patreon, Glow, Supercast, Spotify and more, comparing their features and implementation. But crowdfunding comes with its own set of challenges and concerns. We'll address these issues, including worries about not making enough money, the time and effort required for promotion, and potential restrictions on speech. So, whether you're just starting out or looking to explore new opportunities for monetizing your podcast, this episode is packed with insights and strategies to help you make informed decisions. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. You can get a free PDF report that summarizes all of this information . Tables and a much deeper dive on the website at Check out Dave on Dave's Mentioned In This Episode
What works for one podcast may not work for another podcast because their audiences are different. Think of the two female singers, Adele and Pink. The are both authentic, talented singers. One tends to stand on stage, tell stories, and perform in a dress. The other does gymnastics that include floating around the entire outside stadium. Could you see Adele flying around a stadium? Instead, know your "WHY" and your "WHO" so you can figure out your WHAT and deliver it authentically in a way that doesn't bore your audience. Plus, we'll tackle the ever-elusive topic of measuring success. I'll reveal the strategies and tools I use to track traffic and engagement and the importance of creating engaging content that keeps listeners coming back for more. Tools To Use To Help You Identify What Works With Your Podcast Instead of just linking to your website, you can add UTM parameters (this isn't as geeky as it sounds). A UTM is Urchin Traffic Monitor (we really don't care). These parameters can be thought of as leaving a breadcrumb so that when you check you can see where the audience specially came from. I'm currently using , which are not free but are easier to read and a bit more privacy-focused. Add UTMs to a Link using the Google UTM Creator the for generating URLs to websites the for generating URLs to apps on the Google Play Store the for generating URLs to apps on the Apple App Store There are parameters you can add that will be seen in your Google Analytics. I have been using Fathom stats as they are easier to understand (it's not free, but I prefer checking out my stats without the frustration of digging through Google Analytics). Why I Like Switchy Switchy is a tool that is currently available for a lifetime deal on App Summo. Not only does this create easy-to-remember links like (which is my affiliate link for the Samson Q2U microphone), but it creates trackable QR codes, and the ability to set UTM parameters and save them as a template. When You Can See What Works, You Can QUit Doing Those Actions That Don't For a while I was putting videos on twitch (primarily known for gaming) and I just didn't any reaction (so I quit wasting my time for now). I have videos and screenshots at Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Live appearances? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell use about your show, and mention your website. Leave Your Answer at Mentioned In This Episode
Alex Sanfilippo has the heart of a servant and has made tools for podcasters that help them, and in some cases pay them, to be better podcasters. He is one of the co-founders of PodPros (makes of , , ) and he is the host of . Today, he shares 10 Factors of Podcasting Success. Erase Your Weaknesses With you take a survey, and answer a few questions, and it identifies areas which you are doing well, and those that need some work (and it's completely free). Alex interviewed 1600 podcasters and summarized the following: 10 Factors of Podcasting Success 1. Self Discipline 2. Self Care 3. Displaying the Value to the Listener - Crystal Clear 4. Clear Strategy to Grow and Monetize Your Show 5. Consistent Plan In Every Episode 6. Keep Your Show Organized 7 Have a team to Delegate 8 8. Have Conversations with Your Audience 9. Consant Improve Your Podcasting Craft 10. Have Accountability Partners and Community Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back. This is show 895 which you can find at
In this episode of the School of Podcasting, we dive deep into time-saving tips for podcasters. I discuss my own experiences and lessons learned, along with a lineup of fantastic guests. We cover a wide range of strategies to improve productivity and efficiency in podcasting. From utilizing second screens and mastering keyboard shortcuts to automating tasks with templates and transcription tools, we explore ways to streamline the podcasting process. Throughout the episode, we highlight individual stories and hacks from our guests, showcasing their unique approaches to saving time in podcasting. Overall, this episode is a treasure trove of practical advice for podcasters looking to make the most of their time and create high-quality content. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Participants and Efficiency Tips Scott from is speeding up editing using keyboard shortcuts and a (aff) Craig from is speeding up editing by using . I use . Jill from eliminates editing by doing more research for your interviews. Branden uses the sound pads on the to help identify edit marks (he assigned tones from Audacity to the pads) Karin from uses templates where she adds all of the files she uses for her show and saves it as a template. Then opens the template and chooses "Save As," and gives it a new name (so the blank version of the episode stays blank). Kim from the also uses Templates for her audio, her images (using ), and anything else. Jim from ensures any online tools (like ) he uses take advantage of any integrations. Tools like Active Pieces and Zapier can tie two products together. Mark Vinet from the s batch records. Steve Steward from the and his own uses two monitors, which speed things up and make things less stressful. Tips To Speed Up Your Podcast From Dave Use the playback speed option in Audacity. It will make people sound like chipmunks, but every little bit helps. Use to create templates or anything you type over and over ( has a snippets feature as does which has episode defaults (templates). is a set-it-and-forget-it website tool. You create an episode, and it just appears on your website. You can . Podpage also has an episode signature at the bottom of every episode on your site. A Transcription service like or any can be used for editing. I use to organize my thoughts to avoid wasting time looking for things. A cheap alternative to . Use a calendar scheduling tool like , (although it's having an issue), or . Using these tools takes the stress out of scheduling guests. I Use to manage my . Use your audience, who often have time, treasure, and talent, to help you with your show. Pin a folder to the left navigation in Windows Explorer and the Finder on a Mac so you don't have to dig down to get to the folder. to do your editing. Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month I ask you a question. This gives you a chance to promote your show and participate in the community. Leave Your Answer at Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that...
Are you running out of hard drive space due to the large files associated with your podcast, especially if you're playing with video? Worry not, because in this week's episode of The School of Podcasting, Dave Jackson provides a solution to this common problem.Dave discusses the benefits of using cloud storage services like Backblaze B2 Cloud Storage to free up space on your computer. He shares his personal experience with Backblaze, emphasizing its reliability and the peace of mind it offers when it comes to backing up your files. Whether you want to save your podcast episodes, old YouTube videos, or any other large files, Backblaze B2 could perfectly fit you. Even better, the first 10GB of storage is free! And the pricing is incredibly affordable, with Backblaze charging only half a cent per gigabyte. So, you can upload many files without worrying about exceeding your budget. See Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. It's Not As Hard As You Think I just returned from speaking at the 40th high school reunion, where they asked me to speak. Speaking always makes me nervous, but due to this talk NOT being about podcasting, I was REALLY Nervous. I followed my own advice and figured out who I was talking to, and what the goal of the talk was (point out that we survived), and then I found people to give me honest feedback before I had to deliver it. It worked. I got a fair amount of compliments. The stress and hand shaking worry was not needed. I had done my homework. So I'm here to tell you from the other side, that the worry is more than likely not necessary (I know, easier said than done). Spotify Video Experiment So Far while I received hundreds of downloads of the audio of the ASk the Podcast show, and a decent amount of video views on YouTube. I have not received a single play on Spotify. Granted I have not promoted it (I promote my Youtube Channel) . I wanted to see what kind of organic traffic Spotify would bring. So far I haven't received any. I do have a niche show, but I wanted you to know. Mentioned In This Episode CHAPTERS 00:00:12 - Topics 00:00:32 - Opening 00:01:12 - Video Files are Bigger 00:01:51 - Backblaze 00:05:16 - How Much Is It? 00:07:39 - What Should I Keep? 00:08:44 - File Structure 00:13:05 - Join the School of Podcasting () 00:13:52 - Studying Mr. Beast 00:14:03 - Free Podcasting Tips Newsletter () 00:15:10 - Editing Old Titles 00:17:03 - 00:18:21 - Overcoming Your Podcast Fear 00:25:33 - Question of the Month () 00:26:35 - Live Appearances () 00:27:08 - Spotify VIdeo Experiment
, a man wearing many hats, found himself in the heart of the digital world, not by chance but by curiosity and sheer determination. His journey wasn't a straight line. Jeff kept evolving from dabbling in corporate video production and website building to exploring social media. During one of these explorations, he stumbled upon Pinterest on a podcast. Hearing about the surge of traffic it brought to a blog stirred his interest. His first foray into Pinterest was a blog post, Manly Pinterest Tips #1, that resonated among the masses. That's when he realized the potential of Pinterest, not just as another social platform but as a visual search engine. BUT I DIDN'T BRING JEFF ON TO JUST TALK ABOUT PINTEREST Jeff has been shooting video for decades and does all of his shows LIVE. If you think about it, you can take this content and repurpose it in ANY format you want, but how do you do that without losing your mind? Jeff shares that today. Check Out Jeff Sieh Topics Include Using Pinterest as a Visual Search Engine Best Practices and Myths of Pinterest Creating Eye-Catching Pins How Jeff Landed Big Guests How Jeff Landed a Big Sponsor The Benefits of Building Relationships Repurposing Content for Maximum Value Why He Uses The Difference Between and Live The Big Attraction of Going Live Growing Your Audience Through Consistency Mentioned In This Episode and This is episode 892 and originates at This show is part of the changing the World One Download at a Time.
Today I'm introducing you to a show with my smallest audience, but also my most vocal. If I go too long without an episode they let me know. This podcast is my audio diary. So yes: I'm not trying to make money I don't care about downloads I'm just talking about me I try to make it entertaining. It is the cheapest therapy I've ever paid for. In today's episode you will hear my talk about a car accident I was in this week. It was a bad day.... or was it? Follow Building a Better Dave in: - - - Like This Episode? .
One of the things podcasters say is “find your voice” without knowing that it’s Jargon. After all, is my voice lost? What does that mean? Today we will look at finding your voice, and I will tell you what the difference is to the listener. Because the interesting thing is your voice isn’t lost. It’s just got a lot of clutter on top of it. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. What Does Finding Your Voice Mean? You start your podcast (congrats!), and you feel uncomfortable. You feel out of place, and people say, "You need to find your voice." That is a really vague instruction. Steps to Finding Your Voice I mention this in almost every episode. It starts with specifically knowing your WHY and Your WHO. The more information you have on each, the clearer the target. It is the blurryness and fuzziness vision of your show that leads to insecurity. Who Are You and Who Aren't You? What do you believe in? What are your values? By defining what you will and will NOT talk about help clear the path for your content. The Netflix show House of Cards had a scene where the main character kills a dog in the first scene. This was on purpose, as they knew this would upset people. They thought, "Well, we might as well draw a line in the sand and offend people upfront. If they couldn't take the first episode, they would NEVER tolerate what else was coming in the remainder episodes. Get Comfortable Through Practice Think back to all the firsts in your life. The first step, first tricycle, bicycle, first kiss are things we weren’t good at when we started. So do it again, and again with the goal of improving with each version of your episodes getting better. Acknowledge That This Will be Uncomfortable When you feel yourself wanting to pull away or come back to it later, push through. If you’ve ever been through counseling of any sort (single, couples, etc) it is uncomfortable. However, you come out better on the other side. I dread getting on a treadmill but never regret getting off. So when you feel that uncomfortable feeling come upon you (and it will) embrace it. You're learning. You are growing. You are improving. Not Everyone Will Like You, and That is OK Life is not a popularity contest. That is one that is easy to say, but not always easy to live. As with everything, the more you practice it, the better you will get at it. So when you get your first one star review realize that the listener was not your target audience. Follow Your Gut There is only one of you. You are 100% unique so embrace that. Every night there are multiple stations covering the same topics. There are different strokes for different folks. Being you is very easy for you. When you try to be something you're not, it's very hard to pull off and often robs you of your passion. Double Check the Facts In Your Head Saying Negative Things Brenda was trying to prove herself to an invisible audience. She had assumed they wanted her to skim over a broad topic. When she got her episode in front of ACTUAL people she found they would rather go deep into a narrow topic. In The End Be Yourself In the end you've had an entire lifetime being you. Relax and embrace your uniqueness. Bob Dylan, Tom Petty, Stevie Nicks, and Rod Stewart have unique voices. You either love them or hate them. Their uniqueness has enabled them to have careers spanning multiple decades....
Are you audio or video first? If you want to ride the "Record the video, strip out the audio, cut the video into shorts, transcribe the audio, and become a millionaire" train, there are some things to remember. Your Legacy I saw someone today that I had not seen in at least 31 years and probably more. The last time I saw him he was a little boy who acted like a little boy. He didn't pay attention; he was hyperactive and always running around and made the job of his Sunday School teacher so hard that she went home and cried. That woman was my Mom. I was probably 11 when I later pinned this you boy who was probably 8, against the wall and said, "If you make my Mom cry again, I'll kill you." Let's call him Roy. Well, Roy walked into my church today, and he's probably 6' 4" and toward over me. After service, he laughed and recounted the pinning on the wall story, and he said he had taken some wrong turns in life, but all those lessons my Mom had taught him got him to turn around and get on the right path. Those lessons were probably close to 50 years ago. My Mom has been gone 34 years, and today part of her legacy walked in and shook my hand. He wanted to let me know just how special my Mom was (something I was well aware of). So when you put your words out into a podcast, you don't know who or how your words will affect people. If you have a message that needs to be heard, it's not helping people sitting on your hard drive. Get it out into the world. Start building your legacy. I can help. With Hollywood on Strike, Is Now the Best Time To Start a Podcast? With both the writers and actors on strike, new content will not be coming to our screens. We have no idea how long this will go on. In a graph on the , James Cridland has some interesting podcasting stats, and you can see that on April 12, 2023, there were 383,996 active podcasts. Fast forward to July and that number is down by 13.4% to 335,930. Meanwhile, every survey that comes out says podcast listenership is going up. A recent study on Australia has monthly listeners going up by 7% and weekly listening went up 24% (26 to 33 million). So if listening is going up, and content creation is going down, that means (in theory) that those who start or continue to make content have a better chance of being found due to the lack of competition while the audience continues to go. I can help. Also, if you do a podcast and would love to have an actor on your show, they may have some available time on their hands. Don't Forget The Links If you want your audience to get frustrated, talk about something on your show, and then don't put a link to it. I recently did this on my Ask the Podcast Coach, and luckily the person who was nice enough to contact me was very nice, but it can make it appear that you don't care about the user. Some things are perceived as basic and expected. A few episodes ago, I talked about a video service that I eventually canceled and got a refund. Why, there was something I thought was basic and should be included, and they wanted me to edit some code. Mentioned In This Episode Turning Your YouTube Content Into a Podcast I listened to a show this morning, and the host said, "I'm talking about three products today, and for you to get the most out of this, you should hop on over to the YouTube version. It will be much more beneficial for you over there. He then went on to say phrases like, "You'll be here on the left" and "Just click on search" right here. At this point, even with the disclaimer I felt like this guy was going to waste my time (and for the most part, he did). So when I went to click on the link to his YouTube channel, you guessed it - no link in the show notes. So you might want to refer to your episode as "the show" instead of podcast or video. Keep it generic. I occasionally share my screen on a live stream I do every Saturday. When I do, I try to make a concerted effort to A Cool Strategy from Udemy Podcast Rewind: The Podcast...
Today I share another one of my shows. It's called . While the School of Podcasting is typically around 40 minutes, Your Podcast Consultant is always 9 minutes or less. It's a nice bit size chunk of podcasting advice based on the common questions I see in the podcasting space. There are 143 episodes available at You can follow the show on - - - P.S. This is , so there are now 4+ Million podcasts (I mention 600K in this episode). This show is part of the
One of the reasons your show may not be growing is you are wasting your time down podcasting rabbit holes. I went down one recently and I thought I would share the insights that I picked up along the way to help you spot a potential rabbit hole, and how to avoid them so you can get back to making great content that you can confidently promote. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. Feedback on this Episode: The Squeeze vs. the Juice: Weighing the Worth of Podcasting Endeavors If it seems too good to be true, it most often is. Do you need the features that have caught your eye? Will you USE them? Be sure you've taken the time to know the equipment and resources you have. Watch out for people who promote products they haven't purchased. Recognize when you've made a bad purchase and ask for the refund. Look at the About page and see who (not what) you're working with (do they have a podcast?) Mentioned In This Episode This is episode 889 of the School of Podcasting Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
Podcasting turned 20 years old this month, and after hearing (Christopher Lydon) it got me thinking about the early "Middle Finger to the Radio Industry" start of podcasting (and sadly, we seem to repeat history). There is a study of 1200 podcasters who shared their why and how they podcast, and I share some additional insights. Some of them are not popular, but they are true (from my desk). Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% Daily Podcast Tips Newsletter Want more tips on planning, launching, growing and monetizing your show with cool podcasting resources? Check out Mentioned In This Episode Full show notes at
I do and over the next few weeks, I'm going to be previewing different podcast related shows I do. Today is the show , which I do with Jim Collison from , and Gallop Podcasts. We answer questions LIVE every Saturday at 10:30 AM EST at You can jump into the video at You can also leave a question by clicking on the microphone in the bottom right-hand corner at See you Monday! Dave
Today I'm talking about how I made 35% more than a host read ad. The POWER of feedback, and I'm playing with a new microphone that really lets me dial in a great sound. Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% Thanks for listening to episode 887 of the School of Podcasting. is always appreciated. The Knee Jerk Reaction to Podcast Ads May Be Missing Other Opportunities I've heard the average host-read ad in a podcast pays about $25 per 1000 downloads. Less than 10% have the needed 10,000 downloads per episode to get a "big sponsor." In some cases, they may have enough for ads that pay anywhere from $3.85 - $7 CPM (boo!). On , I mentioned Switchy ( A link tracker and more) from App Summo (where it's a one-time payment for life). I earned $17.20. Obviously, I'm not going to retire on that, but the show doesn't have a huge audience. When I calculated the CPM, it was $34. So, if you're getting $5 CPM with your programmatic ads, you might want to mix in an affiliate that truly fits your audience. (and buy my book ) For People Looking to Guest On Podcasts (and not start a show), the new Rode PodMic USB is a great choice. The mic is both USB and XLR, so if you later want to plug it into an interface like a , you can. It comes with a sturdy pop filter (the original PodMic was east to "pop." Its all-back design is cool. You can use software that has Aphex processing and tweak the sound of your microphone and then SAVE THAT SOUND into the microphone. So when you plug it in via USB, you're sound is right where you left it. It works with Rode's Capture app, so if you want to record directly to your phone, you can. (I had to use a ). Likewise, if your computer doesn't have a USB C input, you'll need a . The bottom line is for around $ you end up with a single-channel roadcaster. The Negatives While this microphone is obviously meant to be on a stand, when I had it on a boom arm it was very sensitive to any kind of tapping on the desk, etc. So, don't touch the mic or anything when recording. At $200, it is more than double something like a or , but those don't have the Aphex processing. Don't Fear the Feedback I recently created a video sales for the School of Podcasting. I went to my newsletter and asked them to "Talk about it like I wasn't in the room." As I started implementing the suggestions, more came in (so looking back, you might want to wait or give a deadline) as I ended up making seven different versions before I loaded on the final (for now) version. It all was great feedback, and I see people time and time again release their first episode without getting any feedback. What is the point of releasing something that is not going to impact the audience the way you want them to? Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at Mentioned In This Episode Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream Bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
In this podcast episode, Dave Jackson, host of the School of Podcasting, interviews John Ainsworth, CEO and founder of and host of . They discuss various topics related to podcasting, online courses, and marketing. John emphasizes the importance of getting feedback from your audience and shifting your mindset from selling to helping. They also talk about the discontinuation of the Stitcher app and suggest alternative podcast apps. Additionally, Dave shares information about cleared music streaming and its potential impact on the music industry. Overall, the episode provides valuable insights and recommendations for podcasters and online course creators. Join the School of Podcasting Risk-Free Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. You can join risk-free with a 30-day Money Back Guarantee With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% Connect With John Ainsworth and Data-Driven Marketing Technology Recommendations Stitcher Replacements (ios only) (ios Only) ClickFunnels Alternatives Clickfunnels ($127/month) (one-time fee $49) ($29/month) Mentioned In This Episode (one of John's favorite episodes) (aff) Timeline 00:00:00 - Introduction 00:00:37 - Opening 00:01:33 - 00:02:09 - 00:03:04 - The Dangers of Focus Groups 00:04:50 - Encouraging Honest Feedback 00:07:06 - Common Mistakes 00:09:36 - Picking Your Niche 00:11:15 - Benefits of Podcasting 00:12:40 - Getting Listeners On Your Email List 00:16:12 - Join the School of Podcasting 00:17:12 - () 00:17:30 - How to Overcome Feeling Salesy 00:18:17 - How Dave Does His 00:18:34 - Switch From Selling to Helping 00:19:28 - 00:20:51 - John's of His Show 00:22:45 - Preferred for Courses 00:24:42 - Dave Agrees Moving is a Pain 00:25:54 - Something I 00:28:57 - 00:29:58 - 00:30:28 - Sticher App News 00:32:44 - New Features in Podcasting 00:35:12 - Thanks for checking out episode 886 Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
This episode is based on an exercise from the book, (also available on ), where you have to describe your show in a way that can't be used by other shows, and you can use any of . The idea is that instead of using the word "Awesome," explain WHY it's awesome. It's hard, but in the end, it leads you to ponder what makes your show. The book is from Eric Nuzum, who appears in . Join the School of Podcasting Community Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% Chapters 00:00:00 - Introduction 00:00:36 - Opening 00:01:32 - The 10 Magic Words 00:02:03 - Avoid These Words 00:03:44 - Scott From 00:05:25 - Chris From 00:06:17 - Bryan from 00:07:16 - Glenn from 00:09:04 - Eric From 00:09:31 - Harris from 00:11:00 - Paul From 00:11:30 - Sean from 00:11:54 - It's Challenging 00:13:55 - Based on A True Story is Unique () 00:15:53 - How Can My Show Be Different? 00:17:21 - Because of My Podcast Stories Were Moved Based on Feedback 00:18:33 - Join the School of Podcasting () 00:19:34 - Podcasting Observations Newsletter ( ) 00:19:49 - Craig's Because of My Podcast Story () 00:22:18 - Find My Podcast... 00:23:29 - Google Podcasts Issues 00:24:31 - Dig the Well Before You're Thirsty 00:25:11 - 00:29:00 - Podcast Discovery () 00:29:17 - Always Listen Before Publishing () 00:33:07 - Question of the Month () 00:34:07 - Where Will I Be ( ) 00:35:13 - Podcast Baby Steps ( ) Thanks for listening to episode 885. If you'd like to support the show, become an .
NOTE: Today's show is NOT edited to show how much editing I do. JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll create high-quality, engaging content quickly. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% Everyone has their own workflow. Here is mine: Write out what I'm trying to say. Record using the Google doc as a reference. As I'm recording/talking I know what the next paragraph is so I often will expand on the paragraph as I want to tell a story or elaborate on the concept. Previously I would boil down the document to bullet points, but found I have to do less editing, If I write out the main points, and the expand on those points when I record Dual Voices In This Episode So you can hear when I go off script, when I am off script I will be louder on one side of your headphones. Some of this is good as I expand on the point off of the documents. Other times, I'm taking tangents that normally would've been deleted. Don't Go Back to the Beginning Some people when they make a mistake will go back to the very beginning of the episode. You don't need to do this. Go back slightly until you see a good spot to jump in. Talking along with yourself and press the record button. When you get to a good stopping spot, go back and make sure that it sounds natural Relax, It's Not Live I know it's weird to talk to yourself, so think of that one person who needs to hear your content. If you mess up on a solo show, it's no sweat. There are no re-interviews to schedule. Just go back and fix your mistake. Practice, Practice, Practice Even in my early days at the School of Podcasting, while there are things that could be improved for a new podcaster, I felt I had the "talk to your invisible friend" part down. This might be because I often had to entertain myself. I played with audio tools like cassette decks and reel-to-reel tape machines when I was very young. I started and still keep a journal. I'm a musician and have been on stage since I was 15, and I did daily presentations as a teacher for decades. There is no replacement for experience. This doesn't mean it will take you 40 years to sound good, but it will take more than 40 minutes. Just start recording yourself and practice getting words out of your brain, out of your mouth, and into a recording. Then delete it.
Today I bring my insights from working a podcasting helpdesk to help you avoid some common pitfalls. Why isn't my episode in Apple? What is the most compatible audio format? I moved my website and broke my podcast! YouTube is sniffing the idea of being an audio media host... Join the School of Podcasting Community Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at Mentioned In This Episode (domains and hosting) - build a podcast website in 10 minutes! No Coding. Topics: 00:00:44 - Table of Contents 00:01:04 - Opening 00:01:55 - You Can't Fix What You Can't See 00:07:52 - The Most Compatible File Format 00:10:26 - Youtube a Wolf in Sheep's Clothing? () 00:16:34 - Clip From Podnews Weekly 00:17:38 - Join the School of Podcasting Community 00:18:41 - (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter) 00:18:55 - Be Careful Attachnig Your Domain To Your Feed 00:26:02 - 00:27:02 - ? 00:27:33 - I Value Your Time 00:28:27 - 00:29:06 - Bloopers Thanks for listening to episode 883. This show is part of the . Chaning the world one download at a time.
On this episode of School of Podcasting, Dave Jackson covers a range of topics, including the importance of feedback before launching a podcast, insights from the Beatles' interviews (and how they apply to podcasting), the importance of relatability in storytelling, and a challenge to describe one's podcast in 10 words without using certain words. Dave also reflects on how technology has advanced and the nerves that come with it. The guest in this episode is a former street kid turned rapper who shares his inspiring story and encourages people to focus on what makes them unique. Lastly, the podcast discusses the impact of robots on people's jobs and shares a tool called 11 Labs that can generate fake voices. Tune in to this episode to learn more about podcasting and get inspired by the stories shared by its guests. Join the School of Podcasting Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% QUESTION OF THE MONTH This exercise is from the book Describe your podcast in no more than ten words, and do so in a way that describes nothing else in the world. The fun part is you CAN'T use any of these words. Leave Your Answer at I need your answers by 6/26/23 Where Will I Be? I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Mentioned In This Episode Timeline 00:00:00 - Robo Dave 00:00:42 - Opening 00:01:39 - elevenlabs.io 00:03:03 - Robocasting 00:03:49 - Surprise Visit From Joe 00:04:29 - Things Are Going to Get Weird 00:05:09 - The One Thing Robots Can't Do 00:06:24 - People Can Relate To Your Experience 00:08:27 - Double-Down on Being Human 00:08:43 - Taylor Swift Embraces Her Strength 00:09:33 - Talk to one Person -And Give Your Audience What They Want 00:10:48 - We Like to See and Hear Ourselves in Others 00:14:03 - What Makes a Good Podcast? 00:15:36 - Join the School of Podcasting Community (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener) 00:16:37 - Podcasting Observations Newsletter (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter) 00:16:51 - The Beatles Talked to One Person () 00:17:25 - The Beatles Play 576 in 48 Days () 00:18:28 - They See You Before They Hear You () 00:18:45 - Proof Of Concept Before Big Launch () 00:21:04 - Amazing Interviews Made People Want to Know More () 00:21:53 - Know Your Guest and Avoid Sounding Stupid () 00:22:33 - Can Your Audience Relate To Your Content? () 00:24:48 - Content and Delivery () 00:26:44 - Question of the Month (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question) 00:27:47 - Where Will I Be? () 00:28:16 - Conclusion (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener) 00:29:57 - Bloopers: Robo Dave ()
We all use different tools to create our episodes. I left the door WIDE OPEN for your responses and asked what was your favorite tool to create your show. The answers are very interesting.
I get the "Is this good?" question when people first see their numbers. I'm going to share the launch numbers of two shows I did that got a "mild send off" and the shows are growing. Before we get into stats, we need to understand that downloads are just ONE WAY to measure your success. I know our ego is involved but the problem with comparing your podcast stats with others is: Podcasting is a lot like golf or bowling or any other sport that you do against yourself. I'm not saying there is no competition (often much less than you think) but we don't know what we are truly up against. Instead of starring at your competition and getting angry, stare at your audience to help give them what they want. Know Why You're Doing Your Podcast For the School of Podcasting, my goals are to inspire you to start a podcast, go in the right direction with realistic expectations, and help you achieve your goals. How do we do that? By and that is the biggest way I measure my show. was nice enough to take a picture of my book in a Fed-ex store (picture on the website). The goal of that podcast is to inform people with monetization strategies that make them buy the book. We All Go All In on the Podcast Launch When we launch we tell everyone we know (family friends, co-workers, email lists, etc) and we might continue that for a few weeks until we realize that growth is slow. At first, you might jump 10-20% (but that's easy when your first episode had 15 downloads and the next one had 18). Full article with graphics at
Today we explore the factors that contribute to a successful podcast strategy, including getting featured on podcast players and paid advertising efforts. We hear the inspiring journey of Katie, Krimitsos who created the after feeling disinterested in her previous business and finding a lacking market for women and meditation. We learn about the importance of just starting, experimenting, and having fun, as well as curating content for listeners. Katie shares her experience with advertising and maximizing revenue while engineering her pre-roll to not upset listeners. We dive into the uniqueness of her meditations and the focus on improving the content to create an audio experience that touches the listener's soul. Finally, we explore Katie's stickler for priorities and energy management, strategizing her business projects, and streamlining her energy to bring on more one-on-one clients. Check out her many shows at Join the School of Podcasting Community Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll create high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month's question is open-ended. This could be software, hardware, etc. What is your favorite tool? What is the thing that has you saying, "Oh, I'm so glad I have this!" What is your favorite tool? Leave Your Answer at I need your answers by 6/26/23 Mentioned In This Episode
I have a few ideas that I have put together, as they are all short ideas. The goal is to help you grow your show, and hook your listeners. Creating Better Episode Titles For Your Podcast LISTENNOTES INFORMATION What is Listennotes.com Global Rank? This podcast is one of the top 0.5% most popular shows out of 3,100,277 podcasts globally, ranked by Listen Score (the estimated popularity score). According to their site: * Other websites / apps may claim that they have way more than 3,100,277 podcasts in their database. This is because they inflate the number by including A LOT of 1) podcasts that were already deleted long time ago; 2) super low-quality podcasts (e.g., no episodes at all, only one 10-second episode in the RSS feed for testing, or machine-generated audio); 3) non-audio contents distributed via rss (e.g., RSS feeds with only PDF files, not audio). On the other hand, we deploy automatic scripts (24/7) and human moderators (daily) to clean up data. We try our best to minimize the number of such bad "podcasts" in our database. I still find it interesting that my friend's show which had its last real episode in 2015, has a ranking of 42 out of 100, So I'm still a little blurry on how those stats are calculated.. TIMELINE 00:00:00 - Table of Contents 00:00:26 - Opening 00:01:21 - Youtube Music - So Far, Nothing 00:02:27 - Ashley Carmen Story () 00:03:58 - My Numbers So Far 00:06:08 - Youtube is Confusing People 00:07:28 - Confusion in the Wild () 00:09:09 - Still Bogus 00:11:44 - A Very Strange Interview 00:14:44 - Join the School of Podcasting Community () 00:15:45 - Podcasting Observations Newsletter () 00:15:59 - Create Engaging Episode Titles 00:16:39 - NPR Episode Title Summary 00:20:08 - A Great Hook - Daisy Jones and the Six () 00:22:51 - She Podcasts Live () Use coupon sop 00:23:47 - If Podcasts Were Honest | Honest Ads () 00:24:33 - Question of the month () 00:25:34 - Where Will I Be () 00:26:05 - Join the School of Podcasting () Join the School of Podcasting Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month's question is open-ended. This could be software, hardware, etc. What is your favorite tool? What is the thing that has you saying, "Oh, I'm so glad I have this!" What is your favorite tool? Leave Your Answer at I need your answers by 6/26/23
Do you have questions about podcast length? We discuss this with various podcasters. The ideal length of a podcast depends on the type of content and the audience's needs, preferences, and routines. Our guests share their thoughts and experiences on the matter. We also preview new podcast discoveries and the creation of a weight loss accountability group. Tune in, as always, to learn more about podcasting and join our community on schoolofpodcasting.com. Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% Participants: Brandon B (future podcaster) Chris from (Prefers a 1-hour podcast) York from (reminds podcasters to pick a consistent length) Paul from (prefers 20-minute episodes) Todd from , The (expects 1-2 hours per episode). Kim Newlove from ( prefers 8-17 minute episodes) Eric Alton-Glenn Hilliard from and (doesn't have a preference) Sarah Clark from (shares that the content fits the episode) QUESTION OF THE MONTH Each month we ask a question for the listeners to respond. This is a win-win. You get added exposure (sometimes called "The Dave Jackson" effect), and we all learn together. To see this month's question and to get free exposure for your show, go to now. Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Additional Shows About Podcasting From Dave In addition to I have additional shows about podcasting: One tip per episode - 9 Minutes or Less I Grab a Random Podcast and See How Long I Can Hang On : A live "call in" show every Saturday at 10:30 AM ET Myself and radio veteran Erik K Johnson go over your episode and website. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back. Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at Addition Shows By Dave About Podcasting and check out my other podcasts at
So many podcasters think there are only two formats for your podcast: solo and interview. Today I share additional formats that you may choose to use with your show. We also talk about ways to spice up your show for maximum impact. We also have a "Because of My Podcast" story. Formats: 1. Solo 2. Co-host 3. Panel / Roundtable 4. Narrative 5. The Hot Mess 6. Audio Drama Full show notes at schoolofpodcasting.com/875 JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to QUESTION OF THE MONTH Leave Your Answer at I need your answers by 4/21/23 Because of My Podcast: Dan Kreiness Dan hosts the show, and because of his podcast, he was hired to create courses for a company in Dubai. Mentioned In This Episode Libsyn ( - use the coupon code sopfree)
On this episode of School of Podcasting, we're discussing an important topic for podcasters - rebranding. The conversation revolves around the possibility of changing the name, intro, outro, and thumbnail of a show, including updating old episodes and descriptions. Dave offers helpful tips on how to go about the process and stresses not changing your feed..This episode is filled with valuable insights and resources for both aspiring and seasoned podcasters. You won't want to miss it! JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% How Did You Like This Episode? I'm always looking for feedback and I would love for your input on this episode () QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month's question comes from Mark Vinet from the . While we know the perfect length of a podcast is “As long as it needs to be and not a minute more.” What is YOUR perfect podcast length, and why? Leave Your Answer at I need your answers by 4/21/23 Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Because of My Podcast: I'm Alive Jennifer Dragonette shares how podcasting help redefine who she is and put her back on the road to success. I recently appeared on of her Cure for Podfade show. Mentioned In This Episode Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
Deirdre Tshien CEO and co-founder of , recently discussed the mental process of dealing with competition. She explains that is an AI-powered podcast content writer, created to help Podcaster organically grow their show. Additionally, she talks about the new updates in CapSho 2.0, which allows users to have more control over their content, such as being able to drag and drop blocks into their descriptions. In Today's Discussion Always double-check and ensure anything that appears to be "competition" actually is (cause it may not be. Ensure you are solving a problem your audience has by keeping in touch with them and, above all, listen. How Capsho 2.0 puts the reigns of control back into the podcaster's hand through HumAIne controls How pushing through the urge to quit can result in new success (notice Deirdre said it was her third time of making the other with her coaching business How creating amazing content for your listeners can leave them feeling in debited to you (which inspires them to purchase your products). Why every coach should have their own podcast. With the Closing of Volley, I'm Moving to Zip Message I was a big fan of the Volley app except for one thing: it s was free. Eventually, they added additional features that you had to pay for, but in my opinion, they had so many great features in their free version that there wasn't enough motivation to upgrade(although "keeping them in business" should've been motivation enough). So I'm replacing Volley with , which I feel is the closest Volley Alternative at the moment. Here is a . Join the School of Podcasting Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll create high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20%
There is a giant button at the top of your listing in Apple labeled LISTEN. When someone clicks it whatever comes out is going to shape their first impression, and it will influence how long they let this play. I listened to podcasts for 14 hours in the car this weekend as I drove to a speaking gig in Nashville. Bad audio is becoming more and more apparent in this space (especially for "indies" and I thought I would help us understand what it sounds like and what tools are available to help fix it. In This Episode How to politely let potential guests know their audio is unacceptable. How you can sound amazing for less than $ The importance of microphone placement. Why A-List Celebrities are the only people allowed to "dial in" to your show. Tools you can use to get rid of reverb and level out the audio and remove noise. JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll create high-quality, engaging content quickly. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% Question of the Month: Do You Subscribe to Paid Podcasts? Louis from sent in the question, "Do you subscribe to any premium podcasts?" Louis supports , , , , Mark Vinet from the asked a few people and nobody was paying for podcats. Dr. Sarah Clak from the Show pays for a few shows because she wants more content from these shows, and wants to support people who are doing fact-based content that she can trust. Zo from also has not found any podcasts that deliver enough value to support financially. Value For Value Support Dave Jackson supports people via the model, where you can stream cryptocurrency. He has streamed over $125 to many , and the Show, and You can set up your show to receive streaming crypto using the steps . Then your audience can use one of the that are enabled to send you money. The key point is THEY set how valuable you are. Check out the new show about Podcasting 2.0 with Dave Jackson and Daniel J. Lewis at Tools For Cleaning Up Audio The best way to (in Descript) - Great at Removing Room Noise and More - Great at removing reverb/room noise and generally clean up. - Removes Reverb - Noise Reduction, Volume Leveling, Mastering (try it for free) - Noise Removal, Leveling - Expensive - For the Serious Editor Not Tested (but not bad) Deverberate inside of
It’s easy to feel overwhelmed in today’s world. With so many tasks to juggle and responsibilities to manage, staying focused and keeping up with everything can be hard. It’s important to know that you’re not alone in feeling overwhelmed and that there are tools and strategies to help you never feel overwhelmed again. In this episode, you will learn the following: 1. What is the strategy to manage overwhelm and increase productivity? 2. What three tools are necessary to organize and increase productivity (that are free)? 3. What is the best way to decide which tasks to prioritize when feeling overwhelmed? What is Overwehlm? So, what is overwhelm? Overwhelm is when you have a feeling of being completely inundated or overburdened. It’s often accompanied by a feeling of being unable to cope or process anything that’s going on. I know I’ve felt this way before, especially when I was in my 20s and had to juggle school, work, and taking care of my family. I felt like I was running out of time and didn’t have a choice but to keep going. Things to Keep In Mind Your podcast doesn't have to be forever. You don't have an audience when you start. You do NOT have to do a video version of your show. You don't have to make money with your show. Three Free Tools to Help With Overwhelm - A great place to store ideas you don't want to forget. You can even forward things like email to an address and it will be added to Evernote. There is a free version and the first paid version starts at $11/month. - For items, you need to do. You can easily add items from Gmail, setup recurring tasks, prioritize, share with a team, and more. There is a free version with the paid version starting at $5/month. - There are many calendar tools for you to keep up and organize your appointments. If you want to book guests, has a free plan as goes . If you want a "lifetime payment," enables you to charge for your time (as do the other two). Now when someone connects you via email or social you can decide to: Delete it - trash it. Save it - Evernote Schedule it - Add it to your calendar Decide to do it - Add it to your todo list. By using these tools and strategies, you can avoid feeling overwhelmed and stay focused on the tasks that are most important. Remember, you’re not alone in feeling overwhelmed and there are tools and strategies to help you manage your stress and never feel overwhelmed again. Strategy to Avoid Overwhelm 1. Do a brain dump and write everything down so your brain doesn't need to remember everything. 2. Get organized and direct incoming information to the proper location. 3. Try "Not Now" instead of "No" (if it makes you feel better). 4. Set boundaries and a "rope off time" for you to be focused and knock out the work that needs to be done." 5. Break large projects into small, achievable chunks. 6. Realize that creating a podcast is easy, but creating a good podcast takes time, effort, and determination. Set your podcast schedule based on your lifestyle. Don't try to squeeze your lifestyle into your podcast. Join the School of Podcasting Community Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month's question comes from Louis Goodman of the , who wants to know if you are listening to any podcasts via Paid subscription. If so, what so and why. If not, please provide any insights. As always, be sure to mention your show, a little bit about it, and your website address. Leave Your Answer...
Email is a crucial part of modern marketing, with over 330 billion emails sent daily, expected to reach 376 billion by 2025. While email marketing strategies have changed, it remains a key player in any marketing strategy. It is the go-to marketing channel for the best online marketers due to its high return on investment. Email marketing outperforms strategies like SEO, PPC, and Content Marketing, making it the most cost-effective way to promote products and communicate with customers. Today we hear from seasoned email veterans from different viewpoints, purposes, and motivations to share their insights into running a podcast. In Case You Missed Last Week We add a new clip from John Lee Dumas who shares what he would do differently. Last week we heard from Joe from Stacking Benjamins and other veterans on launching a pocast. . Participants A Newsletter Help Remind Your Listeners About You Both James and the No Agenda Show see where their newsletter reminds your audience you exist and hopefully supports you. You Can Use Auto Responders You can create a series of email called an autoresponder to release at certain time intervals. This "Set it and forget it" can help build your connection with your audience (while you sleep) Yes, You Can Automate Your Podcast to Email But... While services Like , , , , and many others will make it easy to enter your podcast RSS feed, and it will take your episode description and convert it to an email. Aside from James, who works some technical voodoo (he's a programmer), none of the participants used the "RSS to Email" tools. They had developed their own format, topics, etc, and wrote them from scratch or copied and pasted their content in an effort to repurpose it. Additional Email Topics What NOT to do with your Email List The benefits of Segmentation Understanding Pricing The Importance of Always Delivering Value What you get from having a newsletter Mentioned In This Episode Newsletter Services (lifetime payment) Ready To Start Your Podcast? Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month's question comes from Louis Goodman of the , who wants to know if you are listening to any podcasts via Paid subscription. If so, what so and why. If not, please provide any insights. As always, be sure to mention your show, a little bit about it, and your website address. Leave Your Answer at I need your answers by 3/24/23 Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to
Planning, launching, and growing a podcast can seem daunting, but with the right guidance and advice from experienced podcasters, it is possible. Veteran podcasters like Joe Saul-Sehy from , , and have all successfully launched and grown their podcasts and have valuable insights to share. We hear about the planning, shaping, and bumps and bruises of launching from the new host Allen Corey and Crystal Hammond of their spin-off show Take Aways Sometimes a "No" is a Not Now. Your podcast can bring you opportunities. Diverse attitudes, experiences, and insights lead to a diverse audience. Ensure that your show's first five minutes inspire people to want to hear more. Joe truly appreciated the feedback that provided ways to improve his show. Listen back to your show to catch mistakes you may have missed. Learning to edit your show improves your relationship with a future editor. They didn't release the first thing they recorded. How they improved after a "brutal conversation." The Importance of incorporating listener feedback into the show. Advertisers are Partners that You've already worked with. Start building relationships before you launch your show and build your network. Know a person who knows the "WHO" in the industry and reach out. QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month's question comes from Louis Goodman of the , who wants to know if you are listening to any podcasts via Paid subscription. If so, what so and why. If not, please provide any insights. As always, be sure to mention your show, a little bit about it, and your website address. Leave Your Answer at I need your answers by 3/24/23 Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Mentioned In This Episode on Episode 862 (also available as an ) email list(send your RSS to Listeners. Also, has this as an option) with Lou Mongello Libsyn.com Podcast Hosting. Get a free month with the coupon " sopfree ". Start Your Podcast, or Grow The One You Have at the School of Podcasting Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20%
PARTICIPANTS Craig - check out this write-up from the about their show. Anthony - Craig - Sarah from Mark from Wayne - , and Ian - and Mark from Colin and Matthew - Mentioned In This Episode Gene Simmons
The great ones make it look easy. Jono drops easy, simple, powerful tips on starting a community, growing it, keeping it engaged, and if you want to build courses based on the information you've learned from your community. Full show notes at Join the School of Podcasting Community Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% Who is Jono Petrohilos? Jono is the co-founder and director of Fitness Education Online, one of the largest online course providers in Australia for Personal Trainers. He sells over $1,000,000 worth of online courses every year and has been awarded the Australian Fitness Industry Educator of the Year multiple times. He now also helps other professionals create and sell online courses with his free Facebook Group and Podcast - the . Wheat you Learn Today When to start a community (Jono uses Facebook) Why No Promotions Without Permissions is the best rule for Facebook/Communities How to Keep Your Sanity and Nurture Engagement Using the Redirect Strategy How Jono's podcast helped him find speakers for his event. How Jono made 100K from a course, he didn't create. How to tell if your course will sell Why New Zenler is currently the best course platform that you can try for free Is an "All in one" platform the best to go for an online course? Mentioned In This Episode Jono's . Jono Petrohilos' Podcast. New Zenler (Podcast) QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month's question is from Jacob from the . When a host has English as a second language and may occasionally mess up a word or two, Is that a no go? Do you listen, or immediately back out? Leave Your Answer at Deadline is 2/24/23 Where Will I Be? I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate Go to and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back. Thanks for listening to episode 867 of the School of Podcasting
Mark Herschberg, a tech startup veteran, author of the book , and MIT professor, set a goal of appearing on 150 podcasts. He pitched over 2000 shows and ended up on close to 350 shows. Mark did it through volume, which is a different strategy than Dave typically preaches. Dave and Mark get together to share their insights to discuss the pet peeves of guests and hosts to uncover the most efficient way to pitch yourself to shows. "Focus on how you're delivering value to the audience. If your pitch starts out with the word 'I' too many times in the first paragraph, know what you offer and get to the point - delivering value to the audience is key!" JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting. Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee. Save using this link What You Will Learn Today The strategies that Mark uses to make it easy to say YES to having him on your show. How letting your guest know who they are talking to always leads to a better interview. Make your guest comfortable by letting them know what to expect (audio, video, both?). How having example questions makes connecting your expertise to your audience easier. The two questions every guest should ask at the end of the interview What a guest needs to make it easy to share Mark (and Dave) use , PodcastGuest and other resources. For a full list, get the . QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month's question is from Jacob from the . When a host has English as a second language and may occasionally mess up a word or two, Is that a no go? Do you listen, or immediately back out? Leave Your Answer at Deadline is 2/24/23 Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate Go to and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
In December, we looked at why some podcasts become part of the listener's routine (and their ) today; we are looking at the other end. When it comes to podcasts, the goal of any podcast creator is to captivate their audience and keep them engaged. However, there are many reasons why listeners may choose to unfollow or unsubscribe from a podcast. In this episode, we will explore what makes listeners tune out of a podcast and how podcast creators can avoid these pitfalls. We will look at common issues such as poor audio quality and how extended chit-chat at the beginning may be causing people to tune out. Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the . Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the . Use the coupon code to save 20% Participants: 02:43 Paul from 04: 49 Orlando from the 06: 42 Carrie Bock from 08:36 Dan from the Dan Smith from the 10:40 Heather from 12:19 Seth from and 17:04 Kris from the 18:29 Paul from 22:09 York from 24:07 Beth from 25:02 Sarah from 27:25 Mark from 28:29 Todd from 30:25 Kim from 35:05 Neil from 38:33 Lee from the and You Choose Podcast (Lee your Squarespace expired! and there is no way to contact you) 40:05 Steve from and the QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month's question is from Jacob from the . When a host has English as a second language and may occasionally mess up a word or two, Is that a no go? Do you listen, or immediately back out? Leave Your Answer at Deadline is 2/24/23 Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Mentioned In This Episode Your Podcast Consultant Other Products From Dave Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
In today's episode of The School of Podcasting, I recount my experience at Podfest which was attended by many new faces. I share my conversation with the host of The Accidental Swingers, a podcast discussing non-exclusive relationships. I also discuss Cinemaker, a Mac-only video recording program for video interviews. Lastly, podcast hosts announced updates at Podfest. I also share my presentation. Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See In this episode, you will learn the following: 1. Uncovering the secret to getting guests to share your episode. 2. Exploring the new podcast hosting technology available. 3. Examining the ingredients of a good podcast. Timeline 00:04:05 Make your interviews unique. 00:10:58 Get feedback before launch. 00:17:14 Get to the point quickly. 00:19:41 Name your podcast clearly. 00:29:00 Grow your show by sharing. 00:34:09 Create great content consistently. 00:43:00 Grow with a consistent theme. 00:46:17 Podcasting never dies. 00:51:51 Tell someone about the podcast. Questions: If you're consistent and persistent in producing shows, what else is needed to continue to grow the audience? Does having a seasonal podcast make for lower downloads? Does podcast growth depend on the platform (media host)? Could it ever be the most painful? That people don't like it? Is a specific theme best or should I have a variety of topics? Are there typical plateau points? QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month's question is from Jacob from the . When a host has English as a second language and may occasionally mess up a word or two, Is that a no go? Do you listen, or immediately back out? Leave Your Answer at Deadline is 2/24/23 Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Mentioned In This Episode
When it comes to making purchases, we are often faced with a conflict between our emotional and logical sides. How we balance these two competing forces can determine our success or failure when it comes to spending. I had my wallet out ready to spend almost $1500 and today I share how I identified my emotional and logical sides in conflict and used logical to save my money for something better. My Video Progression I started with a Logitech C920 and upgraded to the Elgator Facecam. The Facecam had a better picture and NO MICROPHONE (so no accidental recordings using the camera microphone). I later I would upgrade to the Sony VZ-1. Why? Because a YouTube told me that this was THE best camera for the new YouTuber/Content creator. Also, it had a button that MADE THE BACKGROUND BLURRY. I'm not making that up. With the press of ONE button, the background would be BLURRY. OMG! So I had to get it even though it was $900. I bought it on a payment plan, but avoided paying any interest. A little over a year the Sony ZV-10 came out and not only did it have the one-button blurry mode, but you could also CHANGE LENSES. Again, YouTube erupted, letting me know that THIS, yes THIS was THE camera. I was THIS CLOSE to buying this camera, and then I saw another video because as I could switch lenses, I had to figure out what was the best lens. The one lens that made the Youtube host just look dreamy cost $400. Wait, does that say $400? So $800 for the camera and $400 for the lens is $1200, but the other lens, and this and that. QUESTION 1: Do I NEED this, or do I WANT THIS? I thought about it. What happens if I didn't buy this camera? Were my videos on YouTube suffering? After all I've been making videos for years without a blurry background and I have attracted 3000 subscribers. So apparently, you do not NEED a Blurry background. QUESTION 2: Who does this benefit and how? Does this benefit your or our audience, and if so how? Well as I already had the ability to blur my background, there only perc was the ability to switch lenses. Have I run into something where I wanted to change lenses and couldn't? No. Then why am I buying it? Is it easier to use? Slightly, but you will still need to unplug and replug in the cable which frustrates me. So I'm going to spend $1400 to pay for a feature that I will not need. With that, I put my credit card back in my wallet. BE CAREFUL PAYING FOR FLEXIBLE FEATURES YOU CAN GROW INTO I once signed a year-long contract with Vidyard. Why? Because it had TONS of features that I MIGHT use. After all I could see how far people watched my video. What was I trying to do? Make video messages I could email to my students and clients. It turned it this would do it, but I found their interface clunky, and when I found a way to really use it, they wanted me to upgrade. After my contract was over, I found LOOM, and it does exactly what I need it to do for a FRACTION of the cost. Don't spend money for features you will never use. OTHER ITEMS THAT HELPED I've never had someone tell me, "You have to watch this video, the background is BLURRY." HAVE YOU FALLEN INTO THE TRAP? Maybe instead of spending so much TIME concentrating on your background, MAYBE we should focus more on what you are saying into the microphone. WHY PEOPLE UPGRADE MICROPHONES AND VIDEO ITEMS I understand that sometimes we don't feel confident with our voice, but in many cases upgrading from one microphone to another doesn't make that much difference (especially once you get over $100). But I understand that if you would feel more confident behind the microphone if you like your voice, it may be worth the upgrade. Just realize this: Unless your microphone and sound was HORRIBLE, getting a new microphone won't grow your offense. Your content will. Now if your content is noticeably better because you are more confident, than maybe its worth the money. CONCLUSION AND BONUS QUESTIONS...
Are you looking to grow your podcast? You’ve come to the right place! This episode shares how to get your podcast unstuck and find success. Whether you’re just starting out or have been podcasting for a while, the tips shared here will help you get your audience clicking with your content. We’ll provide guidance on finding and following effective strategies for growing your podcast. Weight Loss and Podcasting Instead of focusing on the goal of "I need to lose 40 lbs" focus on the actions that lead to weight loss. Starring at the scale won't make it move, and starring at your stats doesn't make them move easier. What Do We Want Our Audience To Do? When I thought about what we want our audience to do that leads to more podcast growth, it came down to these: FIND: We need our audience to find us. To be easily found we need to know what they are looking for and word it in a way they will use. CLICK: We need our audience to click on our listing, click on our titles, click on play and click follow. FOLLOW: When your audience follows/subscribes to your show you are becoming part of their routine. Make it EASY to follow you SHARE: We want our audience to share the show with their friends. According to Jacobs media 70% of new listeners discover a podcast from their friends. Your Show Is An Experiment Yes we would love to get our show perfect from episode one going forward. I didn't follow my own advice (and didn't get any other opinions) and named one of my shows (about the future of podcasting) "Leading the Bleeding" (as we talk about the bleeding edge of podcasting). I named another "test" show Podcast Rodeo Show (I bet you don't think its full of podcasting tips - it is). If you have to explain your show title - your might regret it later. FIND MY SHOW MY NAME TEST When I say to someone, "I'm doing a show called ______. What do you think it's about?" and they guess correctly, I've got a good name (Especially if there are some keywords in the name). I see people put the name of their show asonegiantword and I'm pretty sure your audience isn't going to type that in. If you want to be found by Goolge, you need a website. Check out to make a site with Podpage, and to learn podpage, see GET YOUR AUDIENCE TO CLICK Here are some things that get people to click on your show: The name of the show. The name of the episodes The artwork An easy to find play button on your website FOLLOW AND SUBSCRIBE Search in podcast apps is getting better, but nothing beats having follow/subscribe buttons on your website. This way, when you tell people to go to your website on the special page made to follow and subscribe, it makes it easy; they don't have to "Find you," and you are reinforcing your brand. There is a great plugin, , that makes it easy to add subscribe buttons to your WordPress Website. Here is my , and . SHARE THE SHOW When your audience shares your content with their friends, you have a decent chance of getting a new listener. At Christmas, EVERYBODY was talking about the show Yellowstone. Consequently, I came home and started watching. You do need to work on your pitch in a way that makes people want to go listen. You should practice this. When someone asks, "So, what is your show about?" they should hear a response that is um, well, kind like, um, you know, um..... There are some cool plugins for WordPress like , , the USE THESE CRITERIA FOR MAKING A DECISIONS I worked with someone who had named their show DCBN Lifestyle. When I asked (cause they didn't explain it in the show) what it stood for it was, "Don't cook bacon naked" which made me laugh. Which one would be found easier? DCBN or Don't cook bacon naked. The audience doesn't know you've abbreviated the title and if they can't find you they will never know. If you're thinking of naming your episode School of Podcasting 861 or How to get your podcast unstuck, which one are you going to click on? Should use...
Imposter syndrome is a feeling of self-doubt and insecurity that experience at some point in our lives. It can be paralyzing and lead to a sense of being inadequate or undeserving of success. While it is difficult to eliminate the negative feelings associated with imposter syndrome completely, there are steps you can take to reduce its impact on your life. Today I talk about how it may be a GOOD THING to have imposter syndrome. You Have Done Hard Things We have all done hard things in the past. One of the hardest things I had to do is let my Grandmother know she had outlived her daughter (my Mom). My last quarter in college was nuts as I was paying for myself to go to school. We all have a list of hard things, so we can do hard things. It's Your Brain For whatever reason (probably due to things that got tattooed to our brains as children), those negative thoughts are hard to control. In researching this topic again, it turns out that most people just understand that they will have these thoughts, and in some cases, it's a good thing. Don't underestimate the power of your brain to manipulate you. how his brain will try to convince him that you can remember large amounts of words and recite them AS HE IS LIVE ON STAGE DOING THAT EXACT THING. You Are Not Alone In this episode, all of these people have imposter syndrome. I share clips from David Letterman with Billie Elish from his "My next guest needs no introduction." Viola Davis from a from his days at SNL. Eddie and Wolfgang Van Halen Other people I didn't mention would be Rick Springfield, and Why a little Imposter Syndrome is a Good Thing You are going to put content in front of an audience. There are two extreme reactions. The extreme imposter feels they are not qualified and that nobody will listen, so they are frozen and never publish anything. The obnoxious ego maniac that feels everyone will love their content and publish everything (and probably is not fun to be around). As Viola Davis put it, if you think you will never work again, you will take any gig. Taking any gigs gives you the opportunity to work on your craft which results in you being a better podcaster. You can't improve something that doesn't exist. The Goal is to Be In The Middle You realize that you will always have that "negative voice" with you. As one person put it, "You can let them in the car, but they can't drive." Too many podcasts ae not being created because people are letting their own negative thoughts stop them from pressing record. You want to build the habit of pressing the record button to feel comfortable behind the microphone without going too far to the point where you become obnoxious. The Giant Carrot of Impact One thing that motivates me to create my podcast is I want to help people avoid making podcasting mistakes. Recently, I've been pointing out how Listennotes shows a bogus stat that can be disproven quickly. Consequently, anyone quoting these stats is either uninformed (and setting themselves up to look silly) or is preying on the uninformed. I ran into one person who seemed to fit the "prey on the uninformed" category. This depressed me. I was shocked. I felt like I had done a bad job , and showed how stupid this stat was. Then I got an email from someone who had seen an interaction I had with this person on YouTube and basically said that THEY HAD SEEN MY VIDEOS and now understood how stupid that stat is. So while this one podcast guru did not, this person did. My efforts had impacted this person in a positive way. I was amazed at how this made me feel (I'm sure a large amount of dopamine in my brain was released). If you are a person with a mission, and a passion, don't let imposter syndrome stop you from impacting the world Ready To Start Your Podcast? You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience...
Every year since 2013 I end the year asking my listeners what their favorite podcast is, and WHY it is their favorite podcast. This gives me insights into my audience (many more females replying than I got back in 2013) and I find out about potential shows that I may want to network with (as we are already sharing an audience). Thanks to everyone who contributed, I deeply appreciate your participation. Some of you have been around since episode 1, and that boggles my mind. Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See My Favorite Podcast Is still loves the show, but instead of mentioning that show again he mentioned the show about finance and more. Steve is also one of the founders of the . It is a phenomenal resource if you want to make some money as an editor. 05:24 Brian Goodwin from the podcast loves the podcast. 08:20 Brooke Smothers from the show loves This by Guy Rax 09:43 Chris Lewis from the loves 10:54 Chris Nesi from the loves the . 13:53 Daniel J Lewis from loves the . 18:26 DR Who produces the show loves the by David Hooper. 21:44 Super Joe Pardo (organizer of the ) loves the Show 23:10 John Wilkerson from the show loves the 24:23 Kim Newlove from loves the (this show). 28:23 Mark Vinet from show loves the show. 29:09 from the show loves the show. 31:00 Neil Scott of the show loves the . 34:06 Nina loves the 42:23Nyree from shows loves a show that just split in two due to some co-host tensions. Check out and . 45:36 Paul From the loves the show. Here the host of Everything Everywhere on where he explains how he grows his show. 47:38 Richard from the loves the show. 51:43 loves the Show. 54:03 loves T show 55:22 York From show loves the show. 57:11 Scott Johnson from the show loves the show. 59:49 Jim Collison from the show loves show. 01:01:46 Dave Jackson from the show loves the Show QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month the question is one I often do in January. What are your top podcasting pet peeve? Those little things that drive you nuts. Leave Your Answer at Deadline is 1/27/23 Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching, and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month the question is one I often do in January. What are your top podcasting pet peeve? Those little things that drive you nuts. Leave Your Answer at Deadline is 1/27/23 Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate Go to and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
Creating a successful and engaging podcastpromo requires careful planning and dedication. Whether you are creating a podcast promo or radio ad, it is important to have a clear understanding of your target audience (hyper clear). By taking into consideration the message you want to convey, the format of your audio advertisement, you can craft an effective promo for your podcast that resonates with listeners. This episode Neil Hedley from who has such a wide skillset (radio, tv, advertising, copywriting, comedian, and instructor of the - use coupon sop50). Helps me understand there is no "cookie cutter recipe" for making a good podcast promo. Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See Creating a Good Podcast Promo In talking with Neil from we discover there is no "paint by numbers" path to making a great podcast promo. There are some best practices such as: Niche down until you have a crystal clear picture of your audience. The message about your show is not a one size fits all situation. If you are advertising on "Joe Rogan Experience" and the "Minister Bob" show, What is missing in most ads is they are just the facts - they are not entertaining or memorable. The job of the first sentence is to get you to listen to the second sentence. There is a skip ad button on YouTube, but no "play ad again." People don't hate ads, they hate BAD ads. Connect with Neil (use coupon sop50) Neil's Book Neil's Agency Because of My Podcast I'm a Pop Up Pastor Because of the Speak Life Church Podcast Kenn was able to fulfill my Call to ministry. The speak life podcast is a church without walls. I am an at-large pop-up pastor to about 300 people nationally. I have been able to travel to officiate Christian weddings, perform baptisms, and funerals, and answer the call to counsel ten people considering suicide. Can you finish the statement "Because of my podcast _______"? Head over to our and share it. QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month the question is the one I do over December. What is your favorite podcast in 2022, and WHY? You can only choose ONE (I know it's hard). If you can get their website URL, that would be VERY helpful. Also, be sure to mention your show, it's the website and a little bit about it. Leave Your Answer at Deadline is 12/30/22 Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Mentioned In This Episode Neil's Previous Episode on Amazon (aff) Podcast - Coaching without Calendars Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back. Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate Go to and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed.
A study has come out showing the results of 1700 new podcasters, and 41% saw their new podcast as an opportunity for additional income, with 29% of those wanting to be their main source of income. There are people who will charge you THOUSANDS of dollars (in three easy payments) who will GUARANTEE a top spot in podcasts apps. They quote their listennotes stats (even when they know they are bogus, see and ) and promote affiliate products - not because they are good - but because they have the highest commission. I'm not them. Today I reveal the truth - even if it is not what you want to hear. So The Plan is Start a Podcast and Get Advertisers? Less than 10% of podcasters get the number of downloads per episode after 30 days to get a host ready from a "big sponsor." Programmatic ads have a CPM that may be around $12 CPM (cost per thousand downloads) The median number of podcasters is around 150 (per libsyn)and the average is around 1500. The median on Buzzsprout is 30. The aver CPM for Advertisecast is $24ish and they require 10,000 downloads per episode. Please note, I'm not saying smaller shows with 1000 downloads an episode can't get a sponsor. With podcasting, it always "Depends" on your topic. If you DO have a hyper niche or hyper-local podcast you can charge more than the rates above. Bruce Chamoff from the NYC Podcast Network I first ran into Bruce when he invited me to be a speaker at his . I wanted to talk to Bruce because I don't see eye to eye on some of the things he does, and I wanted to no more. One was having a network where the topics weren't related. Brice started the back in 2005 (it was the Long Island Podcast Network back then). He has slowly broadened the scope and plans on rebranding it to the Global Podcast Network. Bruce is monetizing by having podcaster pay to be promoted on his site, which gets 20-25 thousand unique visitors a month. That would put him in the top 20% (). You can join for free or pay a small monthly fee to be featured on the site. Bruce monitors all the activity on the website so you can evaluate your traffic from the site and decide if it's worth the fee, or just stay with a free plan (or leave - I'm somewhat worried about having another site competing with YOUR website) Certain plans on the site allow you to link to our show on popular podcast platforms, as well as monetization links, and link to your website (which you can do on your own site for free). Bruce likens it to a social media site based around podcasting. What makes his site different is his level of categorization. You can , try it, and check your stats to see if this works for you. My "Thanks Dave" Engagement Experiment For three weeks, I swapped out my typical School of Podcasting Advertisement and askws people if they felt I had given value over the years (and they had never joined the School of Podcasting) if they would give some of that value back by going to Six people said "Thanks" and gave some value back (Ranging from $5-$25). Steve at James Cridland From Craig Wealand from DR from Mouthy Broad Media Try Price from Front Porch Studios If you take 6/1500 that is .04% (not 4% POINT ZERO 4) I've mentioned in the past that I've heard the VERY popular show Radiolab do a "Fundraiser" type episode trying to get UP TO 1% of their audience to donate. When I've spoken to other people in the industry, a good engagement level is 2-3%. If I count the people who are and , I'm somewhere near that ballpark. Mentioned in This Episode
Creating a successful podcast takes more than just having a great idea. To ensure that the show resonates with listeners, podcasters must understand their audience and the topics they want to hear. Audience surveys are an invaluable tool to help podcasters understand their listeners and create content tailored to them. In this article, we will look at why audience surveys are so crucial for podcasters, as well as some tips on how best to use them. Why Have a Survey? 1. Advertisers 2. Understanding who listening? 3. Understand what they want 4. To help you deliver more value in your show Creating Your Survey What is the goal of this survey? Why are you creating this survey? What do you hope to accomplish with this survey? How will you use the data you are collecting? Question Tips: Explain to the recipients why you are doing this survey and how it will benefit THEM. Start with general questions and then get specific. If you are doing a sliding scale, make it an even number 1-4 instead of 1-5, as it eliminates the ability to choose the items in the middle. If you have advertisers ask if people have purchased one of your sponsor's products. Much more information on the site Take My Survey I'm giving away a $25 Amazon gift card, a 30 minutes consultation, and a copy of my book Attend the Webinar on January 4th at 6:30 PM Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching, and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month the question is the one I do over December. What is your favorite podcast in 2022, and WHY? You can only choose ONE (I know it's hard). If you can get their website URL, that would be VERY helpful. Also, be sure to mention your show, it's website and a little bit about it. Leave Your Answer at Deadline is 12/30/22 BUILD YOUR PODCAST PROFITS STRATEGY WORKSHOP Tired of struggling to monetize your podcast? December 17th 10AM-1PM Central This is not a webinar, it is a workshop, so come prepared to work. There are only 12 seats, so everyone walks out with their monetization strategy. The price is Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all. Please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Mentioned In This Episode Edison Research Show (Coaching without calendars) Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
Podcasts are like Lay's potato chips (you can't have just one). Once you start one, Getting the itch to start a second is something people are thinking about. With this in mind, we look at questions you should ask before starting your first, second, third... podcast. Ready To Start Your Podcast? You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See Podcasters Pondering a Second Show Kim Newlove of the is considering doing a local show about Perrysburg Ohio. Dr. Brad Miller of the show has launched Podcast. Mark Vinet of is mixing in his (for me I would put these in their own show, and promote them in his first show). Matt Rafferty of is thinking of doing a local show that interviews local businesses. Dave Jackson (me) is bringing back a show with a new format at 5 Questions You Should Answer When Starting Your Podcast Why are you starting a podcast? Is this a passion project or a business? Who is your audience What do they want to hear? (Why will they listen to your podcast?) How will you gauge your success? (Bonus) What will you stop doing to find the time to do this show? My Black Friday Purchases I like the output of for cleaning up bad audio that has lots of reverb. I also purchased (aff) to make my pop-ups on my site, and to show social proof on my site. (coupon BF2022-30 ) QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month the question is the one I do every December. What is your favorite podcast in 2022 and WHY? You can only choose ONE (I know it's hard). If you can get their website URL that would be VERY helpful. Also be sure to mention your show, its website, and a little bit about it. Leave Your Answer at Deadline is 12/30/22 Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Put Dave In Your Pocket! If you are a podcaster (or future podcaster) who would like to retain Dave's services without joining the School of Podcasting, I'm not using a new system to allow us to do this with zero scheduling conflicts. Check out Mentioned In This Episode This episode originates at
Gary Arndt is an award-winning travel photographer, blogger, and podcaster who has been traveling the globe for 10 years when covid devastated the travel industry leaving Gary with nothing. Gary knows the value of promotion. He's used various strategies to grow his podcast , including partnering with other podcasts, leveraging his blog traffic, and giving listeners an incentive to subscribe. He also started paying for promotions on other podcasts. As a result, his podcast has reached a wider audience and he's been able to connect with more listeners and is approaching 1 million downloads per month. Ready To Start Your Podcast? You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See Gary Arndt's Multiple Strategy Approach When Gary first launched his 7-day-a-week podcast Everything Everywhere Gary says he was getting around 6000 downloads per episode. Fast forward two and a half year and Gary is approaching getting 1 million downloads per month (a growth of 167%). How did he do it? Gary's Strategies: He never turns down an interview. He executes feed drops (cross-promotion) with other shows. His show is listed in all directories. He has a budget to promote his show on other podcasts. He is investigating advertising in magazines that match his show. It's Not the ONE thing he is doing. He is DOING THE WORK. In today's show you will hear: Why social media doesn’t convert that well for podcasting. How Gary chooses his subjects? What are Gary's growth strategies for your podcast? Why do you think your media property can get away with doing nothing? How to get people to buy your ads. The Spanish National Tourism Board is one of Gary's biggest supporters. Gary may turn his scripts into a book in the future. Podcast Quick Tip: Trade Each Podcast Episode Like a Blog Post On Your Website Make sure your podcast information in your media points to your website. Then when making a new episode, have the link in the episode point to a URL where your audience can find more information (and do all the things you want them to do on your website) This can also lead to boosting your Google SEO Score. If you need a website see or . If you need a website check out Podcast Page, or Learnpodpage.com (Free course) QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month the question is from Matt Rafferty show and he wants to know: The question is, “What is your Next Podcast going to be about?” Not your next episode, but your next SHOW. We all know it is hard to have just one… If you're sticking to just one, explain that as well. Leave Your Answer at Deadline is 11/25/22 Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Mentioned In This Episode and www.learnpodpage.com More info on ADvertising on other shows on Say Thank You
This podcast episode discusses the pros and cons of using artificial intelligence to help with copywriting for a podcast, and whether or not it's worth it. Is the software really worth the price tag? Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See Holiday Hours For Apple and Your Media Hosts Apple has posted their holiday hours. From 11/29/22 - 11/27/22 along with 12/23/22 - 1/2/23, new shows and channels or subscriptions submitted during these windows may not be available within our regular. And responses to support inquiries might be slightly delayed plan accordingly and submit any new content with this in mind, According to Rob Walch at Libsyn, "If you want to have a full launch by January 1, you should submit by November 15." What If I don't submit by November 15th? All is not lost, the world has waited 18 years for your podcast, it may have to wait another week. Be Kind To Your Media Hosts No matter what the company is, your media host, email providers, etc, please remember that everyone is taking time off to be with their family and friends, etc. Lighting up a company on social isn't going to help because (more than likely) nobody is home as they are also with their friends and family (and maybe you should be too). Join my New Dynamic Podcast Newsletter I'm "doubling down" on a podcast newsletter. This will have podcast news, spotlight podcasts, links to my episodes, what is catching my eye, and behind-the-scenes information at the School of Podcasting. If you go to you can check what you want to read. If you're already on the list you will get an email asking you to specify later in the week. For those who are curious, I'm using . Speaking of the newsletter, I am working on an episode about using a newsletter with your podcast. I've got a few interviews lined up as I want this to be a narrative-style podcast. If you use an email list with your podcast, I'd love to interview you. My First Impression of Capsho the AI Copywriting Tool For Podcasters According to their website, Capsho claims, "The Best AI Copywriting Software for Podcasters. Create your podcast promotional copy in under 10 minutes." You upload your episode, and it spits out: Episode title Episode description Show notes Blog post Promotional Email Social Media Captions (for all platforms) LinkedIn Article Transcript Is It Worth It? There are lots of products with AI (Artificial Intelligence). will help you write over 60 different types of descriptions starting at $50/month (there is also a aff). is another copywriting tool for $30/month. with transcribe and make it easy to edit your show (and they have that amazing studio sound tool). from CoSchedule is $9/month. With Capsho plans starting at $29/month, I believe it delivers enough value (but that depends on your budget). In my world, I've decided to keep using it and see how it performs. AI Will NEVER Release a Human I will get into this later, but while a computer can imitate a human, I feel it can't replace. We are all different with these things called opinions and personalities, and even though I can specify a tone in some AI products like Word Hero it almost always needs a tweak to match your personality. So Who Is Capsho Good For? If you're not writing anything or struggling, this does a lot of the heavy lifting. If would love to have someone help you with your description, titles, etc but can't afford a virtual assistant, but can find $29-$90 in the monthly budget, then this might be a good fit. As always, you pay in one of two currencies,...
In a world where we are constantly bombarded with images and noise, it's easy to forget the power of words. But words are still the most powerful tool we have for communication. They can be used to connect with others, to share our stories, and to create change. Podcasting is one of the most intimate forms of communication. It's a way to use words to connect with others in a very personal way. When you hear someone's voice, it feels like they're speaking directly to you. And when you share your own story, you have the opportunity to really connect with your listeners. I was interviewed and the interviewer changed the question from "What is your favorite Books" to "What is one of your favorite books." It puts a whole different level of pressure on the guest. This got me to thinking are there any other words that we can substitute to have a larger impact on our audience. Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See Mark Achieve More Success Quick by Changing From Whining to Winning Mark start a new podcast about the new Lord of the Rings show, and instead of explaining how the was costing money, and it took time, and even when the show wasn't putting out more episodes, he had to pay for hosting, etc he changed his strategy. Mark asked if they received any value, and if they did, would they mind giving any of it back and giving them one link (so it's one call to action). In his first season, he received around $900. For this old podcast, he also received $900 but it took him between 9-0 years. Don't Say This Say That Instead of asking "What is your favorite ____? " you can ask a quest, "What is ONE OF YOUR favorite ____? This still allows us to hear their favorites without having to make them pick their absolute favorite Instead of asking is someone interested in coming on your show, ask them if they are willing. When it comes to willing vs interested, willing sounds more open. When the doctor asked "Are there any other concerns you'd like to address in this visit?" 53% of patients responded affirmatively. Yet when the doctor asked "Are there some other concerns you'd like to address in this visit?" a whopping 90% of patients responded affirmatively. Why? Patients were primed by how each of the words is used elsewhere. Naming "some" concerns implies you have options. "Any" implies random guesswork (at best) or an exhaustive list (at worst.) The word "some" evokes a positive response. () Quick Keys to Communication Keep it simple. Is it unexpected? Be specific Say it in a way that makes your listener invokes emotions. Always use stories when possible Book: QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month the question is from Matt Rafferty show and he wants to know: The question is, “What is your Next Podcast going to be about?” Not your next episode, but your next SHOW. We all know it is hard to have just one… If you're sticking to just one, explain that as well. Leave Your Answer at Deadline is 11/25/22 Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to Mentioned In This Episode School of Podcasting Rings of Power Podcast Resourceful Designer Podcast Branding Book: show Jerry Seinfeld Explains the Pop Tart Joke
Is podcast production getting stale? It seems you either do a solo show, or an interview show. The big networks do narrative style, and next week your Granma is launching a true crime show... Patrick Keller from the Big Seance show wanted to know if anyone was ignoring those "Podcasting Best Practices" and if so, why? (Please note podcasting best practices are subject to a wide view of opinions). Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month the question is from Matt Rafferty show and he wants to know: The question is, “What is your Next Podcast going to be about?” Not your next episode, but your next SHOW. We all know it is hard to have just one… If you're sticking to just one, explain that as well. Leave Your Answer at Deadline is 11/25/22 Participants Patrick from the Kim from Gary from Show Bill from Mark from Mark from Scott from Karen from Matt from Paul - Todd - Dave - Mentioned In This Episode back into their TOS FOLLOW THE SHOW
We all know that person who is always embarking on new adventures and taking risks. It seems like they were born with an innate sense of courage - but the truth is, everyone has the potential for courage. Doubt is part of the podcasting process. Today I'm back from the Erma Bombeck Writers Workshop with some insights to help you get started and keep going. I also made some mistakes that I will share and some insights on some tools and strategies. Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month the question is from Patrick from the Big Seance and he wants to know: What standard or tradition in podcasting do you tend to ignore and why do you do it differently? Don't forget to say the name of your show and website, and a little bit about your show. I need your answer by 10/28/22 Leave Your Answer at Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Mentioned In This Episode Email List Tool on Amazon (aff) book (aff) and by Matthew Dicks Time Table 00-00:55 Opening 56:00 Introduction 01:43:00 Because of My Podcast 03:50 Age is a Number 11:13 Join the School of Podcasting 12:36 Follow the Show 12:55 I'll start podcasting as soon as .... 16:18 Not Everyone Will "Get you" 18:00 Creepy Dudes ENOUGH! 19:42 Book Titles 20:15 Make the Podcast You Want to Hear 20:55 Someday is Today Snippet 24:45 Creators Create 25:54 Start where you are... 26:40 What is the worst thing that could happen? 27:06 What is Stopping You? 28:38 Getting Unstuck with Katrina Kittle 35:50 Notes on My Presentation 39:48 Tools and Strategies from The Event 46:13 Question of the Month 47:42 Where will I be? 48:25 Three Magic Words 50:12 Join the School of Podcasting 51:08 Bloopers This podcast is value-for-value enabled which means you can send boosts and boostagrams using a . You can also (or 5...). This podcast took 9 hours to research, record, edit, document, and publish. Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - -
Audience analysis is a critical part of any effective communication. Without understanding what your audience wants, needs, and values, it is impossible to create a message that will resonate. Fortunately, there are a few key methods for understanding your audience so that you can better serve them. Today I share three tools you can use to better understand your audience. Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See Learn the secret to reading your audience's mind Today I show you three strategies: Amazon Strategy 1. Look at 4 and 2-star reviews in Amazon. They typically are more constructive and specific than 1 and 5-star reviews. Search YouTube 2. Search for your topic and YouTube and find a channel about your topic. Then go to the video and sort by popularity. Then click on the most popular video and sort the comments for the best comments. Search Facebook 3. In Facebook when you see a topic you want to follow click the three dots ( ... an ellipsis) and choose "turn on notifications for this post." Also, there is a search box in Facebook groups that can help you find the answer quicker (often questions have been asked before). Lastly, read the rules of the group and follow them. Search Twitter 5. Search Hashtags on Twitter and start conversations as well as read what people are talking about. So many people only use social media to push notifications about THEM instead of going to listen and research. I found about getting more subscribers from Shawn Dill. to go to Twitter Advanced Search 4. Don't Poach Other People's Clients Often people in the same genre as you will have an open community, if you join this community, don't self-promote. You are a guest in this person's house and it is very tacky to try and score clients. I am in a few groups of people who do the same thing I do. I answer questions and insights, but mostly I'm there to LISTEN. QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month the question is from Patrick from the Big Seance and he wants to know: What standard or tradition in podcasting do you tend to ignore and why do you do it differently? Don't forget to say the name of your show and website, and a little bit about your show. I need your answer by 10/28/22 Leave Your Answer at Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to Because of My Podcast Got a "Because of My Podcast Story? go to Mentioned In This Podcast Effie Parks from
People talk about how hard it is to find guests for their show. I think a more accurate statement is "it's hard to find a good guest for your show." Today I have directories where you can list your show (and yourself) to help you connect with the podcasting space. Dave's Fun Text Tool I'm testing (aff) because there is no monthly fee. There is a $4/month fee for the phone line, and they charge you 4 cents per text I send. I'm not using this for marketing, I am using it to auto-respond when people text the words (with follow or new to 833204405) you will get a text from me. I'm using (aff link). Previous Episode on All thing Interviews Previously I did an 8 about interviews from both sides of the microphone. Keeping Track of Who and When You Contact Potential Podcast Guests The tool is used for this is which isn't so much about building sales funnels as it is a way to keep track of your contact with people. There is a free but there is a bit of a learning curve. Here is a List of Places Where You Can Find Guests For Your Podcast For Podcasters: Invite relevant experts and other podcasters to be guests on your podcast. For Experts: Get booked on great podcasts to expand your reach and audience. I have received more quality interviews from this resource than any other guest booking service. Guest.io is the world's only marketplace to find professional guests and platforms. Got some publicity as this incorporates the ability to charge to be on a show, or charge a fee to appear on a show. You can use Padverb to discover new, exciting interview guests. Our site lists more than 10,000 influencers organized by professional category, such as authors economists, journalists, etc. You can also search profiles by name and browse interviews by keyword. Imagine Your Favorite Online Dating App, But Instead Of Using It For Finding Dates, You're Booking Podcast Interviews. We Use The Same(ish) Technology For Automated Matching! Create your profile as a podcaster, guest speaker, or both! Getting booked as a podcast guest has never been this simple. Podcast hosts can easily browse our network of speakers and make direct contact with them for bookings Whether you’re a seasoned podcaster or just starting out, collaboration is the key to reaching your goals. That’s why at Audry, we bring hosts together to help them grow their audiences and find new ways to communicate. The Easiest Way To Get Booked on Podcasts We help radio talk show, podcast, online radio show, satellite radio, and TV program hosts, bookers, and producers to find new talk show guests, authors, and experts to interview "on the air" – easily and for free! Podcast producers, podcast hosts, & schedulers get free access to top-notch industry experts, authors, thought leaders, executives, & entrepreneurs to be guests on YOUR show WE HELP VISIONARY FOUNDERS TO IMPACT THE WORLD & BETTER MANKIND THROUGH THE POWER OF APPEARING ON TOP PODCASTS. Guest Booking Agencies We will find and book the right guests on your show so you can focus on hosting your show and growing your audience. We help amazing brands grow their business with Podcast Interview Marketing. Let us schedule your podcast interviews on the world’s top podcasts We ensure you get outstanding customer service and quality bookings because we work one-on-one with you. We Deliver More SEO & Lead Generation Power Than Any Other Podcast Guesting Service. Period. as of 10/2022 prices start at $600/2 interviews Podcagent is your best podcast booking agent partner to deliver you the best connections for your business. (from their website) Podino is the agency that inspires and makes world a better place WE HELP REAL ESTATE INVESTORS & AGENTS Raise Capital, Generate More Exposure, and Increase Their Networking Opportunities By Appearing On Top-Rated Podcast WE FIND GUESTS FOR YOUR TV & RADIO SHOW! Podcast Guesting Pro is a dedicated Podcast Booking...
Today I share how I saw the power one person's influence can have as I went to a documentary about Kenny Lambert, and they filled a historic theater in downtown Akron. Why not you? Kenny was a homeless drug addict, and now his influence has helped a ton of people. Heather Osgood is the founder of , a podcast representation agency specializing in podcast advertising. She is also the founder of The Podcast Broker, a marketplace for buying and selling podcasts. With an extensive background in radio advertising and a love for podcasting, Heather was in a unique position to start an agency that could help both advertisers get better results and assist podcasters in finding sponsors. She is the host of The Podcast Advertising Playbook, a show dedicated to educating anyone interested in podcast advertising. When Heather is not playing matchmaker to brands and podcasts, you will find her hiking and spending time with her family at the beach. I Saw What One Person Can Do I interview Kenny Lambert from Just a Dad From Akron, on my show. Kenny explains how he was homeless and suffering from drug addiction, and now he is sober and lives to give back. His life has been turned into a documentary that filled a historic theater in downtown Akron. It was amazing to see all the people one person can touch and to see his influence all in one place. It was amazing. Heather Osgood Can Help You Sell Your Podcast Heather Osgood (along with Ben Richardson and Alberto Betella from James Cridland From , and Gordan "" Firemark) have launched The Podcast Broker was created to simplify the process of buying or selling an established podcast. Utilizing years of experience, we provide a roadmap to execute a well-crafted hand-off from host to host to ensure a seamless experience for both parties. QUESTION OF THE MONTH This month the question is from Patrick from the Big Seance and he wants to know: What standard or tradition in podcasting do you tend to ignore and why do you do it differently? Don't forget to say the name of your show and website, and a little bit about your show. I need your answer by 10/28/22 Leave Your Answer at Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. You also get unlimited one-on-one coaching. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See Mentioned In This Episode
So people are paying to have a promo/trailer of their show played in another podcast. Does this work? Today I ask, "Have you taken action on a show after hearing their trailer on a podcast?" I also talk with Sunny Gault from the Ready To Start Your Podcast? You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See Participants Scott From What Was That Like Mark from the History of North America Spencer from the Recovery Show Tim From the Create Art Show Tim from the Find a Podcast About Fred From Podcast Reporter Steve from Unknown Orbits While trailers do work in some cases, but the thing that seems to really work is when the host (who the audience trusts) recommends a show. Heather Osgood will be on the show in the future, and she mentioned that feed drops are very effective at growing your show. The Podcast Network Alliance I talk with Sunny Gault who is one of the people who help run the where podcasters who are running a podcast network get together and share strategies. Currently, the network is free. Sunny also has the and the network. Mentioned in This Show Craig from
I had someone ask me, "Why do you think Joe Rogan is so popular? and I took some time to do some research. I wrote a blog post/video at Things We Learned/Noticed Joe can be a bit of a lightning rod. You either love him or hate him Joe had impostor syndrome. Joe only has guests he wants to talk to Joe creates an environment where people don't have to worry about triggering others. They talk freely. Joe actually mocks/jokes with his guests. Who do you do this with? Your closest friends. Joe is authentic and it resonates. He spent years learning how to entertain audiences and eventually moved to where he could get more work. While he is a celebrity, that may work to get you to press play ONCE, but you need to deliver value to get them to click AGAIN. Joe states the top skills for an interviewer are listening and thinking My Opinion I listen to Joe's show when I see a guest I know and want to no more. I believe Joe could use some editing. Not to make it 20 minutes, but there are times when I am asking, "How did this make it past the edit?" THE BOTTOM LINE You need to be comfortable being yourself. When you try to be someone else, it's hard and doesn't work. That added weight of being someone else leads to burnout. Play to your strengths. Let your humor shine if you have it. If you're more serious, then build a show around it. Everyone's biggest fear is to create a show while being themselves will result in a show that's not popular. There are SO MANY reasons why a show can fail, . Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See QUESTION OF THE MONTH I need your answer by the end of 9/23/22 Podcasters are starting to buy ads on other podcasts as a way to grow their audience. Have you ever taken action toward a podcast after hearing a promo for their show on another podcast? When you answer be sure to tell us a little about your show, and your website. Go to When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS). Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to MENTION IN THIS SHOW
I am running into more people who say things like, "I'll start my podcast as soon as (event)," or "As soon as I get (piece of gear)." In some cases, they have been waiting for YEARS. So today I'm going to pull back the curtain a bit and show you how a podcast doesn't have to be perfect (as I leave in things I normally might remove) Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See Because of my Podcast: I Won An Award Craig from te Live Well and Flourish started a personal show called, "" which lead to other podcasts that Craig created for Louisiana Tech University (where Craig is a Professor) and he won an innovation award for making podcasts to go along with a textbook he c-authored. Learn From Other's Mistakes I Had the Wrong Country in An Episode I had typos in a blog post (due to multiple tabs) Leave some "Margin" in your life so you can pivot. Have at least one episode recorded and ready to go. Replace your file with a new repaired file. with the exact file name. If you're using Dynamic content, make sure your volume levels are consistent. Spotify only uses mp3 files (so don't upload an m4a file). I recommend 128 kbps stereo mp3. RX10 Is Released This software has tools to clean up audio. We play "bad" audio and their "enhanced version" and again I say, sure this audio was somewhat shrill. I'm not sure spending $800 is worth the results. If you listen, there isn't a TON of difference. Check it out at You don't need this software to create a podcast. If you record things with a decent microphone, in a quiet area, you are probably "good enough." I'm not saying that you can do "whatever you want." Again, you are aiming at perfection but you land on "Very good." QUESTION OF THE MONTH I need your answer by the end of September 23, 2022 THE QUESTION: Podcasters are starting to buy ads on other podcasts as a way to grow their audience. Have you ever taken action toward a podcast after hearing a promo for their show on another podcast? When you answer be sure to tell us a little about your show, and your website. Go to When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS). Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate Go to and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Mentioned In This Episode King's X Three Sides of One This is episode of the School of Podcasting part of the network.
Have you been considering using display ads on podcast apps to grow your show? I've asked Tanner Campbell to join me and share his experience with experimenting. Advertising on Podcast Apps Before you go spending money Tanner and I agree that this only makes sense if your podcast is part of the marketing arm that is generating income. Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See Using Podcast Display Ads to Grow Your Podcast - Minimum Spend $250 - $5/day - Prices Vary by Category - Minimum Spend $1700 - Varies - Minimum Spend $750 for 50,000 Impressions Player.fm The only thing they show on their website is to contact Connect with Tanner Mentioned In This Episode
I met Toby at Podcast Movement Evolutions and he gave me his book in which he gives step-by-step strategies to grow your business using podcasting. The main strategy is to interview your potential customer. I get that strategy, but what about the listener? Toby is the "Pro" behind the Pro Editing service at , and runs his own podcasting services at So I brought Toby on to talk about it. PLEASE NOTE: This was recorded before Podcast Movement 2022 in Dallas which had some controversies. Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters AutoGain – Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed Enhance – Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice Mute – Silence the mic with the touch of a button – don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording Connect your phone – Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly Record to a camera – Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card Loopback – Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback Included software – Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there Learn more at: Narrow Podcasting With Toby Goodman In our discussion with Toby we learn: Why did he write his book What is the Podlationship Cycle? The Criteria Toby Uses to Select His Guests What is a good podcast? Do Audiograms Work? What can a person expect from the Narrow Podcasting Course? For more information on Toby, his book and his course. Check out QUESTION OF THE MONTH I need your answer by the end of August 2022 This month's question comes from Dave from which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener. How often do you return to these key topics? Go to When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS). Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to Mentioned In This Podcast Book
I love it when someone who has listened to this show, and goes out and puts the strategies I talk about like make friends before promoting your podcast or service, or start from where you are, and they come back with a "Because of my podcast story..." Today Hilda followed her passion, and it lead to joining a great community. But she knew that if you want to monetize you have solve a problem for someone. She went to her friends at a nonprofit, and wait until you hear what happens, the adventure that unfolds Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters AutoGain – Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed Enhance – Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice Mute – Silence the mic with the touch of a button – don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording Connect your phone – Record phone calls, high-quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly Record to a camera – Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card Loopback – Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback Included software – Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there Learn more at: Podcast Quick Tip When you mention any brand in your show, be sure to tweet out about your episode and that you mentioned them. In some cases, they may retweet you to their giant brand. Interview With Holistic Hilda In this conversation you will hear: Start with where you are with what you have Make friends and earn trust before doing any pitches Find a community that shares your passion Getting sponsors is not as easy as it looks Be prepared to raise your hand when opportunity knocks Finding clients is not as easy as it looks Dave reads a part of his book about fiscal sponsors Find Hilda at and the non-profit she helping Make Money Promoting the School of Podcasting The School of Podcasting recently updated the back end of the tutorials community and coaching. If you know someone who wants to start a podcast (but don't want all the work of a membership site, support, etc) you can become a and earn 20% commission for each month the person stays subscribed. QUESTION OF THE MONTH I need your answer by the end of August 2022 This month's question comes from Dave from which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener. How often do you return to these key topics? Go to When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS). Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to Join the School of Podcasting Go to Get access to step-by-step tutorials, private podcasting mastermind, group coaching, and unlimited one-on-one time-shifted consulting. Go to Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
In researching successful content creators, I came across quite a few young Youtuber who have six-8 figure subscriber counts, tons of money, and are absolutely miserable. In looking at why someone would pressure something that was putting too much stress on their life it brought me back to passion (when emotions take over the decision making) and Logic (which only does things that make sense). I came across some new research and insights I wanted to share. Please note this episode is clean, but does have some bleeped out words. Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters AutoGain – Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed Enhance – Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice Mute – Silence the mic with the touch of a button – don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording Connect your phone – Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly Record to a camera – Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card Loopback – Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback Included software – Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there Learn more at: QUESTION OF THE MONTH I need your answer by the end of August 2022 This month's question comes from Dave from which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener. How often do you return to these key topics? Go to When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS). Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to have unlimited time-shifted consulting (and quick-fix zoom calls as you like at no extra charge). Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE We Need Passion Passion enables us to "throw caution to the wind" which can come in handy to take those scary leaps. We Need Logic When we put our thoughts into the reality of something happening, that logic can bring us back from making too many decisions from our hearts. See full notes at
In the span of a few weeks I had THREE people say, I'm thinking of becoming a podcast editor and it had been years since I talked to Mark and Steve back on episode That was back when they had just launched the which is an amazing resource with tutorials on software (Hindenburg, Reaper, etc) but it also talks about the business of being a podcaster editor. Now they have 8000 people in their Facebook group, and now are helping all podcasters at a special event at Podcast Movement before revamping the academy. Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters AutoGain – Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed Enhance – Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice Mute – Silence the mic with the touch of a button – don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording Connect your phone – Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly Record to a camera – Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card Loopback – Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback Included software – Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there Learn more at: Charging Guests to Appear On Your Show A recent about guests paying to be on podcasts (and we mention the importance of disclosing this information). The site mentions which (if you wanted) you could have people pay $5 just to pitch you (that might scale back some of the bogus pitches). While I'm not a huge fan of this strategy (I feel it is a slippery slope) if you decide to charge, and always disclose that you were paid to have someone on your show, have at it. (Some people feel this makes your podcast an infomercial. QUESTION OF THE MONTH I need your answer by the end of August 2022 This month's question comes from Dave from which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener. How often do you return to these key topics? Go to When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS). Where I Will Be? I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to Got A Because of My Podcast Story? See Mentioned in this Episode: The importance of having a niche. How Steve started out as a podcast editor without a website. Mark talks about setting expectations by having a contract with your customer. The difference between an editor, an engineer, a manager, and a story shaper. Common mistakes new podcast editors make. Links From Episode (save using coupon sop ) of the Buy the book
You keep doing the same thing you've been doing and you're not seeing your podcast numbers moving up. You're not sure what to try. To this I say check out the book by David Hooper of . All of these templates are short and to the point and for me the book provides a great tool to "brainstorm by yourself." To we cover four of the templates and Dave demonstrates a bonus template. Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters AutoGain – Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed Enhance – Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice Mute – Silence the mic with the touch of a button – don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording Connect your phone – Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly Record to a camera – Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card Loopback – Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback Included software – Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there Learn more at: David Hooper Shares 5 Templates Dave shares four templates from his book . You find that Dave loves to write, but he has to focus to finish his books. (so if you are in this boat you're not alone) Templates Covered: #4 Listener voicemail (see links below for tools #5 Criticize Something with #8 a Weird Viewpoint #10 A Day in the Life #19 ______ with only $100 BONUS TEMPLATE Dave demonstrates the Sidecar template on this episode where he plays a QUESTION OF THE MONTH I need your answer by the end of August 2022 This month's question comes from Dave from which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener. How often do you return to these key topics? Go to When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS). Where I Will Be For my full schedule see Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back. LINKS IN THIS EPISODE
Today I interview t who is the Hospice doctor turned Financial Guru and host of the . he has now taken his unique point of view and penned the new book Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there Learn more at: Jordan Grumet Interview Main TakeAways He started because wanted to have deep-dive discussions on finance and talk to experts. Jordan used the art of subtraction to identify what he really wanted to do. He found out that learning the financial spaces wasn't as hard as he thought it was going to be. Because of His Podcast He had people who signed up to help read different variations and help promote it. He landed an agent and experienced people who walked him through the job of writing a book proposal, getting an agent, and a publisher. As Jordan put it, "I had people." He is also slotted and positioned to have TONS of exposure when it releases next week compared to his first two books. Find him at and (aff) QUESTION OF THE MONTH I need your answer by the end of August 2022 This month's question comes from Dave from which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener. How often do you return to these key topics? Go to When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS). Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back. Also Mentioned In This Episode
Today I look at some things using my experience and share them with you so you can avoid those pitfalls. Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there Learn more at: Kudos to Descript When something motivates me to tell my friends about something, I stop and look at why. Descript did a webinar and to spruce it up, they had a mock customer who kept interrupting the webinar because he couldn't remember his password. At first, it was, "Did that just happen?" By the end, we had all figured out after the third appearance that the "Customer" was a plant, but it was creative and made the webinar (that showcases new video tools) very entertaining as well as educational. Give Out Website Addresses that You Control Instead of sending people to I send people to this way if later I change to a different tool, I don't end up with all my past episodes with links that no longer work. Tool for this are: WordPress Plugin has a built-in tool for Pretty Redirects is a cool tracking and redirecting tool Go Through All The Steps of Your Second Show Once you start a podcast you often feel like starting an additional show. You know the process, and off you go to start podcast #2. I advise that before you do this DO ALL THE WORK. In other words, don't just design it on paper, but go through all the steps of actually creating an episode (even if you don't keep it). I didn't do this with the and what was (on paper) going to take about 15 minutes per episode is taking me twice that. How did I miss this? I did "shallow" investigations into all steps, and it seemed like everything was going work. However, I didn't actually go through and make some test episodes. I didn't do a dress rehearsal. Consequently, it is taking more time, and its cutting into my schedule and causing issues. Amazon Rolls Out a Portal FYI, Amazon has rolled out a portal where you can see how many followers, downloads and more. Go to podcasters.amazon.com Choose What To Monitor Before Paying to Promote Your Show If you are going to pay for a promotion, you need to identify how you will gauge success. I recently played with Buzzsprouot ads where you can advertise on other shows. Halfway through the campaign, I realized I hadn't looked at my numbers before running the campaign so I could see if they went up. Portal where you can see subscriber/follower accounts Put All Of Your Content On Your Website I have a and I occasionally write a blog post on Medium. When I looked at my Google Analytics, I saw that one of my top pages was a post that featured one of my YouTube Videos. Your website is YOUR MAIN HUB, and it makes it easy for people who enjoy your content to find it in one place. I do spotlight it in my , but if should be on my website as well Leave Time On Your Calendar To Learn New Stuff When you purchase courses, watch webinars, or buy software ( in my case) you need to leave time on your calendar to go through the learning curve. No matter how easy it is, there WILL BE some amount of time needed to add to your arsenal of skills. It Doesn't Need...
We start off by hearing about a podcast that received 4,000 donations in our quick tip at the top of the show. I researched what it's like to work in the movie business. Why? Because movies are meant to entertain and take up the audience's time (their most prized possession). We look at the process of making a movie, and some things that podcasters have an easier road, and some steps movies take, that podcasters should seriously consider. SPONSOR: Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there Learn more at: Mentioned in This Episode (not Girls, sorry Sarah) (2013) Sources:
The is the new device from Rode. Today I compare it to the Rodecaster Pro I along with some other devices. This device is $700 and (IMHO) not for someone who is just doing some casual interviews via zoom. Feel free to , and check out any of the other 833 episodes I have. SPONSOR: Focusrite The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster is needed Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high-quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there Learn more at: Things I Like About the Rodcaster II It is an interface, recorder, headphone amplifier, and jingle palet all on one They make updating the firmware (and there WILL BE UPDATEs) INSANELY Easy. Super QUiet Preamps Automatic Monitor Muting Smartpads now play sounds, control midi devices, and add effects Only record the channels you need (FINALLY!) No More Polywave Ability to put the unit on a stand and get it off your desk USB C Electric input which makes it easy to run on batteries. Flexible input assignments and color coding In addition to Aphex processing, new 3-band EQ THINGS THAT ANNOY ME Multiple outputs are confusing and seem to change without me doing anything. I need the ability to turn on and off mix-minus. This is available on USB2, but if I am using (only) that option when I fire up the software on my computer, it won't connect to the unit because I'm not on USB 1. If I want to tie this into my DAW, tracks 1 and 2 are the stereo mix. This means my first slider is #3. The fader features fades out for X amount of seconds and keeps everything faded out. After the X amount of time it should unfade everything. This is an easy one to trip over. Set the Lights Brightness level sounds great, but I couldn't tell a channel was muted because the lights were so dim. This is (again) operator error, but frustrating. Loss of count down number is replaced with a pie chart. Those with older eyesight prefer large numbers. I am required to take the cover off to turn the unit off. I use to be able to press the on off button twice and leave the cover on. Loss way to have a CONNECTED phone call. ON the ROdecaster 1, I could plug in a TRRS cable and the phone did everything like usual. Now if I want to make a phone call, I HAVE to use Bluetooth. When I plugged in the SC19 cable, the Rodecaster rebooted and the sound out of my phone was unusable. I was somewhat bummed after spending $30 on a cable, that I can't use it to make phone calls on my podcast without using Bluetooth. I need to remember to turn off Bluetooth on the unit as my phone keeps connecting to it. Comparing it to Some of the Competition Zoom Podtrak P4 I refer to this as the swiss army of podcasting. It does everything. It is an interface and a recorder, headphone amp, and jingle player, and it comes in at $200ish. Yes the preamps won't be as steller, but as you heard today the hiss is minimal in some cases. Focusrite Vocaster This unit is NOT a recorder, but setting it up and recording into software is super easy. You can send the main outs to a recorder, connect via blue tooth or WIRED TRRS cable. The "2" has blue tooth and output to go to your camera. This one wins the "I need something easy" conversation. Rodecaster Pro II This is for live...
I LOVE people who make me think and when I started reading the book , I couldn't put it down (and it's now available on Audible). It helps you understand your audience and their main goal. Then you identify how you need to describe what you want them to do in a way that they see their problem in a different way. Your message is the words you need to say to an audience about your idea to achieve a particular outcome. Find everything at Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick-fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to SPONSOR: Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets to bring out the best in any voice Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high-quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there Learn more at: MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE
There are times when we need to be able to answer hard questions about our show. Today we talk about some new posts from Apple, and in addition to ABT, we look at why you keep talking yourself out of starting your podcast. Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets to bring out the best in any voice Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high-quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there Learn more at: MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE
I see people who want MORE downloads, and yet they have not listed their show on all the different directories. Why is that? Is this some type of strategy? SPONSOR: Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there Learn more at: Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to Participants Kim - Bryan - Ronnie - John - Karen - Mark - Matt - Steve - Where I Will Be? July 19-20: Online August 23-26 , Dallas, TX September9-10, 8 Philadelphia, PA Oct 20-22 Dayton, Oh For the most up-to-date itinerary, go to Question of the Month This month's question is "What should I ask for the question of the month?" Be sure to mention your name, the podcasts' name, and your website. Should I choose to use your question I will mention your show and website when I bring up the question. I may not use all the questions. MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE Video
Today I am back from Podfest with some insights to share, tips on meeting your audience, and thoughts on the interfaces from Focusrite. Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster is needed Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high-quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there Learn more at: Why We Often Get Sick at Events Because we get to see people we never get to see, these events take on a "one of a kind" atmosphere, and the feat of missing out (and to a certain level, that is true). When we start to "push through" we start to jeopardize our health (even without a pandemic). We get up early to catch flights, do all sorts of walking through airports and hotels, consume things that may not be considered, "Healthy" under-hydrate, and repeat many of these steps for the rest of the conference. Then we go home and blame the plane. I've been doing almost nothing all week trying to get my health back. While I might've missed a fun story staying up later talking with friends, anything I missed would not equal the moment I lost by putting everything on hold. We all love to have fun and see friends, but for me, I'm going to be a bit more responsible in the future. Clearing Up Some Confusion That I Heard At Podfest DOWNLOADS UPON FOLLOW When someone follows your show in Apple, and you have three episodes, you will NOT get three downloads if someone follows you (they only automatically download the last episode. If they want the other two episodes, they need to manually download them. LISTEN NOTES STATS While this sounds impressive to say, "I'm in the top 1% of podcasters on ." Until you read that this is based on people listening on Listen notes and 3rd party data. As every media host I know has asked Apple for listening data (and been turned down), that is not the information that are using. I need to reach out to them to find out exactly what they are using, but to say, "I'm in the top 1% of podcasts (on listen notes) is like me saying, "I'm the #1 podcast (of shows with a host named Dave who live in Akron Ohio). I'm not trying to be "Dave Jackson - Dream Crusher" but to help people focus on more important things that will result in larger downloads (I call it, "their audience."). How To Accept Compliments From Your Audience Many podcasters (including myself) are introverts. Consequently, having someone come up and give you compliments may make you feel uneasy. In the past, I would deflect, or make a joke, and my ex-wife said, "Would you just say Thank You!" and she was right. Here are some tips: Don't correct them Don't downgrade (You're GREAT, and you answer, "It was OK). Don't Brag - Yes, I AM AWESOME Instead, say: Thank You, Thank you very much. That means a lot to me. That's very nice of you to say. Don't forget you have a listener in front of you, after you accept the compliment ask them for feedback so you can hear what is working, and hopefully get some feedback on how to improve. Lastly, don't forget to ask them if they want to take a selfie as they will be happy to share it on social. Focusrite Vocaster Two Review If you're looking for an interface to get your microphone into your...
Mark has been working on his podcast Beyond Bourbon St for years. He had 14 thousand of people in his Facebook Group. He had just gone over 1 million downloads and secure a publisher for a book on New Orleans. And then a pandemic stopped everything. Today you will hear how Mark pivoted without losing his audience, and how he lost 90% of his sponsors without losing his mind. Sponsor: Focusrite Interfaces Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985 Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date Easy to use Great sound quality More info can be found at: Everything Was Going Good Until it Wasn't As many of his partners relied on tourists, when there are no tourists, the result is no partners (or at least 90% less). In this discussion, you will hear How Did Mark Survive Covid How Mark Came Up With His Prices How Does Mark Find Partners? Secrets of a Good Community 1 Million Downloads How He Got a Book Deal Podcast Growth Insights Why Do We Struggle to Promote? Keeping Your Sanity Check out Mark at beyondbourbonst.com and check out his book on New Podcast Launched From a School of Podcasting Member The tools and concepts of Quality are powerful instruments to make things better--products, processes, and services. This podcast explores those ideas plus concepts of psychology, social and cultural norms, strategy, and business to strengthen the capability of professionals motivated to make things better--the Quality Warriors. Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick-fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to
I've known Vincent a few years and we always bump into each other at podcast events. had mentioned his episode "." So I looked into it, and I loved that Incent was having success and by some standards "breaking the rules" of podcasting. That sounded interesting, and that was just the start. Sponsor: Focusrite Interfaces Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985 Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date Easy to use Great sound quality More info can be found at: The Wealth of Connection The is now one of my favorite books. It's filled with lessons and stories which leads to an entertaining read that leaves you thinking. Ignoring Standard Practices: Vincent Pugliese Check out Vincent Pugliese's at Vincent did a TON of DAILY podcasts and released them to a private group before doing any podcasts for the general public. He has no intro or outro music. His only branding is his website which is also the name of his podcast . Vincent is doing what I always advise my clients to do. Focus on the reception - not the broadcast. He uses the "notes" app on his phone (again, it doesn't need to be fancy). He focused on serving his audience, not on monetization. He tried doing seasons and it just about wiped him out. So he focused on creating a podcast that works FOR HIM. It makes no sense to do a podcast that drains you to the point you don't want to do it. Vincent is always looking for the next challenge, and if it doesn't work, you take what you've learned and use it on the next challenge. When you start something, your launch timeframe is not 5 months. It's 5 YEARS, and for the next five years, you spend time moving that project forward. VIncent also shares hits thoughts on impostor syndrome. Check out Vincent at totallifefreedom.com and his book on and (aff link) Because of My Podcast: Kamuela Kaneshiro Because of my podcast, I was able to improve my writing effectively monetize my podcast through books, inspire podcast listeners to embrace their heritage and not be embarrassed for who they are, and bring broken families together Check out his show at Question of the Month Want some free exposure for your podcast? Go to Go to Check out the question and share your thoughts and insights. I assemble these for the last episode of the month. Go to Where I Will Be: May 26-29 : Orlando, Fl. July 19-20: Online Oct 20-22 Dayton, Oh For the most up to date itinerary, go to Mentioned In This Episode
Danny Peña is one of my favorite guests. We started his story on episode 506, got an update on episode 633 and now he has a ton of "Because of My Podcast" stories for episode 827. Danny is an award-winning, 2015 Podcaster Hall of Fame inductee and one of the hosts of Gamertag Radio. He is also the Game Editorial Lead at G4. is an independent online gaming website dedicated to the gaming community that was founded in 2005, and intended to help to unite all gamers. Over the past few years, GTR has grown from a small website to one of the largest and most respected gaming information sites on the Internet. Every week GTR records and distributes new episodic content recapping the news of the past week, including discussions about what is happening in the online gaming community along with interviews and a weekly custom soundtrack highlighting up & coming Hip Hop artists. Sponsor: Focusrite Interfaces Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985 Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date Easy to use Great sound quality More info can be found at: In This Episode You Will Hear How Danny continues to take advantage of opportunities, which then lead to more opportunities. How Danny ended up on a billboard in Time's Square How he got to interview Keanu Reeves How his persistence lead to scoring a large guest (Reggie Fils-Aime). His conversational interviews based on his curiosity lead to six news outlets promoting his interview. Reggie insisted Danny interview him at a large event as part of the . Danny once had access to a new Microsoft product MONTHS before anyone else. Instead of enjoying the new item, he allowed one of his listeners to enjoy it and the video went viral. Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to Where I Will Be: May 26-29 : Orlando, Fl. July 19-20: Online Oct 20-22 Dayton, Oh For the most up to date itinerary, go to Podcast Launch Checklist You want to start a podcast, but you're not sure where to start. This free checklist outlines which step to take first and why. Mentioned In This Episode
We all want to grow our audience. We want to become their favorite show so they just want more. In some cases, you may actually be someone's favorite podcast and they would listen to another episode except you've made it hard to binge. So today we look at nine tips to help your show be Bingeworthy. Sponsor: Focusrite Interfaces Make You Sound Amazing Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985 Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date Easy to use Great sound quality More info can be found at: Making Your Podcast Binge-Worthy Something to think about: What are you offering your audience that they should spend their time-consuming? Not just one but several episodes. That statement is a little scary. 1. It has to be GOOD, actually very good. 2. Create click-attracting titles. I use a tool called 3. Get your audience asking, What Happens Next?? 4. Give them multiple points of insight. 5. Make it EASY to Binge (by making it easy to subscribe/follow). 6. Add an element of Fear of Missing Out (FOMO). 7. Get Your Best Content In Front of Your Audience 8. Teasing Your Audience 9. Have a Show that Walks Through a Process Make your content relevant. Be YOURSELF. Free Zoom Reduces Amount of Time Check out (my favorite). If you must use something free there is and . You can just upgrade your account ($15) Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. Use to get a discount Go to Mentioned In This Episode Media Hosting (use the coupon code sopfree to get up to 2 months free) The movie "" on
I met Connie at an event two years ago. I see her at a conference two years later and ask if she has any "Because of my podcast ____" stories. She not only has one, she has quite a few (TV, Radio, and more). So listen to what can happen when you find someone who can help you avoid the common podcasting mistakes. Connect With Connie at Connie's book, "." Connie's Podcast, "." SPONSOR Focusrite Interfaces Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985 Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date Easy to use Great sound quality More info can be found at: Mentioned In This Episode Nervous about podcasting? Check out (free course) Nervous about Podcast Gear check out this (no email address needed) (a great way to make a podcast site). You can learn podpage for free at media hosting (use the coupon code sopfree) #Question of the Month Want some free exposure for your podcast? Go to Go to Check out the question and share your thoughts and insights. I assemble these for the last episode of the month. Go to Where I Will Be: May 26-29 Orlando Online July 19-20 For the most up to date list see Join the School of Podcasting Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to
We all think, "just make good content and promote your show" but as podcasts become more mainstream and the average listener now consumes multiple episodes a week, do they have room for YOUR show? I asked my audience what their status is. If you found a really good show, would you have to "bump" one you are listening to now? Sponsor: Focusrite Interfaces Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985 Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date Easy to use Great sound quality More info can be found at: Question of the Month Answers You find a show that's great. Do you have enough time to add an additional show to your listening time? Contributors Steve - and Jim - and Mark - Bill - s Dave - York - Arnie- Summary: In general, we are all "out of time, " yet if something good comes along, we seem to make room. We also have different phases of life, and some of the shows we listen to take breaks and we find new shows. The bottom line is there is only so much time to listen and the shows that deliver the most value will be heard. I Heard it On a Podcast No Agenda Show 25% of People Get Their News From Podcasts (1:25:59) - {Podcasting is Therapeutic ) Gets $4000 Donation Cleaning Up Audio With Descript that shows how to clean up your audio in Mentioned in this Show - Audio Editing as a Business (kind of)
After seeing the podcasting space gear up for more advertising (something I'm not thrilled with) more media hosts are developing dynamic content. So what is dynamic content, do you need it, and how do you use it? What is Dynamic Content? Dynamic content is content that your media host inserts into your mp3 file at spots you select. This is often used for ads. In some spaces, people confuse "Dynamic Ad Insertion" and "Dynamic Content" as being the same thing. They are not. While you can use Dynamic Content, it does NOT have to be ads. It can be anything that is time-sensitive. Who Offers This Technology? Libsyn.com (LibsynPro solution - full disclosure I work there). Use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month. has an impressive dynamic content tool that even updates your episode description when you swap out content. has pod ads https://podads.podbean.com/ has a pro version (500 weekly downloads) (10,000 downloads a day) Pros of Dynamic Content No more outdated time-based content The ability to sell your back catalog* Cons of Dynamic Content You really need to pay attention to volume levels (I'm using plugin) To sell your back episodes you need to go through your whole back episodes and insert spots. Updating old files might be trickier You need to consider how to lead in and come out of dynamic content. Focusrite Interfaces Go to Unlimited Time Shifted One-On-One Consulting I've added unlimited time-shifted consulting that can be between you and me. If you need someone to stand by you and guide you through the pitfalls of podcasting, you can join worry-free with a money-back guarantee at I Heard It On a Podcast Disney got all sorts of deals when they built the location in Florida. On the they explain that the reason employees are known as "Castmembers" is to get around Florida Labor laws. It's at the 2 hours and25 minute mark. Apple Charts Criteria I've said for years that ratings and reviews do NOTHING but provide social proof. You want people to ask people to follow you and share your show with a friend. Where I Will Be Where I Will Be: March 23-26 Utah Podcast Coalition April 21st May 26-29 Orlando Question of the Month Want some free exposure for your podcast? Go to Go to Check out the question and share your thoughts and insights. I assemble these for the last episode of the month. This show is part of the Network
Mark was a US air force Pilot, Speaker, Author, and Entrepreneur, but was hesitant to start his podcast. Today we talk about what was stopping him, and how his podcast is helping to promote his Wall Pilot business. We also hear about some discouraging statistics from Chartable about podcast cross-promote (courtesy of ). Spotify may be working on a "Tik Tok meets Tinder" discovery tool. I'm not sure that is going to work. I introduce a new segment "I Heard it on a podcast" this time it was the with Moe and Adam Curry Mentioned in This Episode Mark's Show in , , Question of the Month Want some free exposure for your show, go to and answer the question of the month and be sure to mention your show and website. Do it now! Join the School of Podcasting In addition to the step-by-step tutorials, group coaching, and podcasting mastermind group, I've now added show audits and unlimited time-shifted one-on-one coaching. When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick-fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to
Podcast Movement was a well-oiled machine as always where the hallway meetings were in some cases better than the sessions. I found some cool stuff, created some free resources, and have worries about the future. Quicknotes From This Episode Don't forget the Next Week. (aff link) (book) The Three Main Players in Podcasting I've said in the past that a podcast needs three things to survive podcasting (support, health, and attitude). The podcast industry needs to make sure as it moves forward to take steps that benefit all three main players. Who are the main players? The podcasting companies (media hosts, agencies, etc) The podcaster (creators). The Listener (you). If we don't keep all of them happy (especially the listener) we all lose. A New Great App For Community and Coaching I discovered the app (aff link) listening to a podcast on the way home from Podcast Movement. I tried it out, and it is SO COOL. Especially for those people who hate Facebook. It's like Loom, Zoom, and Slack had a baby. If you want to build a community, this makes it easy as its available on Android, iOs, Mac, and PC. You can have group discussions in public, or in private as well as private one-on-one sessions (where each member's conversations are organized together). You can communicate via: Video Screenshare Audio Text Gif It's a pretty amazing app. There is only ONE FEATURE I REALLY HATE. It's free. I am interviewing one of the co-founders, and he insures me they will monetize eventually but are (for now) working on their feature set. I just hate to build on something free. With this in mind, I'm using it in conjunction with my Facebook group instead of replacing it. I look forward to having time-shifted video/audio conversations with my students. You can learn Volley by joining my (I know how meta can you get?)
The excitement of starting a podcast can really fuel podcasters. You stats to start to grow, but eventually, they may level off. What keeps you going when your podcast isn't growing? Because of My Podcast: Fred Castaneda Check out Fred's shows show March 29th is the National Day for Vietnam Veterans. Thanks for your service Fred! Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to Book Launch Secrets Webinar April 6th April 6th I'll be co-hosting a . If you've ever thought of writing a book, sign up for this webinar (so you can get the replay). See or check out the Course Thanks to Those Who Participated in This Month's Question Kyle - - podcasting 2.0 Mark - - love of topic - working with son Colby - going solo, passion Heather - and the enjoys time with brother, serving audience to get into a better mood, feedback Dan - - Loves having conversations Scott - - Zoom out and see your growth Timothy - and - is leaving a legacy Matt - - Loves the podcast Brandon - Feels his information is needed and doesn’t want people to feel stupid. April Question of the Month Listen to hear this month's question of the month and then leave your answer at Book Launch Secrets Webinar April 6th April 6th I'll be co-hosting a . If you've ever thought of writing a book, sign up for this webinar (so you can get the replay). See or check out the Course Mentioned In This Episode
I was speaking at the National Religious Broadcasters in Nashville Tennessee and kept hearing a few phrases that make me worried. Phrases like, “I had some friend, or some temp, or some web guy, or even a professional service” set up my podcast. Then in talking with them, I learned that (in many cases) everyone is setup wrong. We’ve all been in a situation where we don’t know what we don’t know. We don’t know what should be important. Today, in episode 819, I’m going to tell you. Things You Need to Know Apple, Google, and Spotify have additional stats. If you let someone setup your show "for you" you lose access to those stats. When someone orders your media hosting "For you" THEY OWN YOUR SHOW. Media hosts (eventually ) delete your files if you cancel your account. Make sure you have a copy of your media files. You should own your show and then add your editors to YOUR account. The bottom line is you don’t want anyone between you and your podcast and you and your audience. Question of the Month Share your thoughts and get some exposure for your show and answer the question of the month. Where I Will Be March 23-26 April 21st May 26-29 Orlando Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to Mentioned In This Episode (use coupon code sopfree )
I'm back from speaking at the National Religious Broadcasters event with some lessons learned. I also have some tips on collaborating with other podcasters and a resource that is focused on helping you find collaborators while you earn money selling advertising spots. That resource is and today I'm talking with one of the co-founders Niklas Hildebrand. Book Launch Secrets Webinar April 5th April 5th I'll be co-hosting a . If you've ever thought of writing a book, sign up for this webinar (so you can get the replay). See or check out the Course Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to Audry.io More Than a Guest Finding Resource Whether you’re a seasoned podcaster or just starting out, collaboration is the key to reaching your goals. That’s why at , we bring hosts together to help them grow their audiences and find new ways to communicate. Question of the Month I need your answer by 3/25/22 We love podcasting, but there are peaks and valleys. What keeps you going when your podcast isn't growing? Be sure to mention your website and a little bit about your show. Go to Where I Will Be: March 23-26 Utah Podcast Coalition April 21st May 26-29 Orlando Mentioned In This Episode (compress and resize images) QR Code, Smart Business Card (Liberated Syndication Podcast Hosting)
When Neil Hedley emailed me letting me know he would be going through my town and could he buy me dinner I jumped at the chance to hang out with a listener. I had no idea at the time that Neil: Had exclusively done morning shows ever since, including six #1-rated shows in different markets in the US and Canada. Sprinkled among those years is time as a stand-up comic, singer, restaurateur, bestselling author, college professor, world record holder (that's a fun story), and a pile of other goodies including running and hosting (get it Hedley? Voice in my Hed...) The more we talked, the more I thought I should have him on the show. The Tips: 1 .Tighten Up 2. Rules can Help 3. Ums are normal 4. Every word matters 5. Learn how to Tease 6. Set a Benchmark for your podcast 7. Talk to one person Check out Neil at where he has combined all of these past lives into a venture to you be a better content creator. Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to Mentioned in This Episode (Promo) (Great Tease) Where I Will Be 7-8 (Nashville) 8-11 (speaking) March 23-26 May 26-29 Orlando (speaking) This is episode 817 of the School of Podcasting you can get the back episode by subscribing/following in This podcast is part of the
Every month I ask a question of the audience, and you chime in. This month I ask THE question that everyone wants to know. In January we talked about a day (episode 812). In June of last year I gave you . (Episode 727) In this episode I get to hear YOUR ideas, and share some "outside the box" ideas I found on Facebook. Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to Mentioned in This Episode "Smart Business Card" and "linktree" type service with stats. (here is an example - ) - Promo Participants Brandon from Scott from Kim from Mark from Heater from Spencer from Shane from the Jedrzej from the Fred from the Joe from the Dad from the Question of the Month I need your answer by 3/25/22 We love podcasting, but there are peaks and valleys. What keeps you going when your podcast isn't growing? Be sure to mention your website and a little bit about your show. Go to Subscribe/Follow the Show Won't More Tips? Check out my newsletter with additional podcast insights
I'm excited because I found a book called and even though I'm only 29% of the way through the book I am "Santa Clause is coming tonight" excited about reading the rest of it. The Red Thread represents the path back to where you first started. By remembering what it was like when you first started in your niche, you can better understand your audience who is right where you started. The red thread is your path to success. When you can explain your podcast in a way that resonates with your audience. Sometimes you need to address the "wrong" questions your audience is asking so you can get their attention and provide focused content that points them in the right direction and positions you as a trusted source of content. I'm also going to talk about focus. This is inspired by the book by Ken Davis. I feel this goes along well with the other book. Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to Mentioned In This Episode by Ken Davis.
A trailer has many pros from a creative standpoint. IT forces you to identify WHO you are talking to and what can you say to get them to listen to your podcast. For me, a trailer is 30,60, 90 seconds. When you mark your episode as a trailer it is stuck at the top of your show in Amazon, Spotify, and Apple. Some podcasts do trailer episodes that are 2-5 minutes long. As always in podcasting, there are no set rules. In This Episode The different types of trailers When do you know if your trailer is good? What do you say in a trailer? Where do you post this? How do you use it? Mentioned in This Show Branden Ushio at the (Trailer by ) (Deadline /25/22) (Domain and Web Hosting) 14:04:
You are going through the file of the interview you did a week ago and you notice: 1. The audio of the audience sounds horrible. 2. The guest is boring. Today I showcase some tools that can help you save the audio, but only you can save the boring. Join The School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to Question of the Month What Are You Doing to Grow Your Audience (and is it working)? Go to to answer Podcasts Can't Be Cancelled on Medium. Mentioned in this Episode: with new Studio Sounds (silence your noisy environment) - It's like on Steroids. and Roadmap Tools (could be used by your audience to vote on episode topics) - New Social Sharting and Guest Tools - Has new Snippets tools to make show notes easier. has introduced dynamic show descriptions, and enhanced its dynamic content tool. - Receive payments is a transcript tool I use for editing and for finding pull quotes. Indie Podcast Directory - Cool Social Videos Quickly on Hulu on Netflix - Cardi B Lyric Video This podcast is part of the .
I first discovered Kevin when contemplating creating a new show based on podcast growth. It's well-produced and has actual steps you can take. Kevin started his first podcast Philly Who? Then quit his day job. So how did he turns things around to the point of making six figures? He stopped and took time to learn what works, and then give it to the audience. MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE Question of the Month Contributors When looking at a new podcast in an app, what catches your eye? The artwork and description often came into play along with the episode titles, but what really counts is the first few minutes of your show. Brandon from Erik from Heater from Scott from Kim from Mark from February Question of the Month As we talked about growing your show today, what have you been doing to grow your audience, and do you think it's working? Answer it at . I need your answer by 2/25/22 Kevin's INterview Topics 02:24 Discovering Grow the Show 03:37 What Inspired Philly Who? 04:37 Kevin Quit His Day Job 06:00 Things Got Scary 06:46 1000 Downloads Per Episode 07:22 Sharpening Your Axe 07:54 Multiple Streams of Income 10:47 Laser-Focused Criteria 11:10 Six-Figure Salary 11:45 Sponsorship Tips 13:07 Niche Down 17:12 Most Broad Success Started With a Niche 18:08 Kevin Shut Down a Profitable Show 19:19 TDE Targeted Daily Engagement 20:48 The Baked in Strategies That Don't Work 22:15 ENGAGEMENT 26:49 Get More Specific 27:38 Go To Where Your Audience Is 29:37 Build Relationships 30:59 Kevin's Program JANUARY QUESTION OF THE MONTH: What triggers subscriptions? 33:28 Question of the Month 33:52 Brandon Start 100K 36:27 Heather -Watching Netflix Without You 38:47 The Lost Sheep Has Been Found! 41:11 Scott: What Was That Like 44:07 Kim: The Pharmacist's Voice 47:37 Eric: Raising Financial Freedom 48:47 Mark: The History of North America 50:16 Dave: School of Podcasting FEBRUARY QUESTION OF THE MONTH 51:43 February Question of the Month 53:18 Quick Libsyn Update START YOUR PODCAST TODAY and start your podcast in the right direction with access to step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, 1 on 1 coaching, a private mastermind, and a lack of fear of sounding unprofessional or buying the wrong equipment. Need more? There is even a 30-day money-back guarantee.
Are you one of those people who has thought about doing a solo episode where you open the microphone and talk directly to your audience, but can't overcome how uncomfortable you feel trying it? This show is for you. We also talk about understanding the different roles when you are doing a solo show, an interview, appearing on a panel. Join the School of Podcasting Quit worrying about sounding bad, spending too much money on equipment you don't need. At the School of Podcasting, you get access to step by step tutorials, a private mastermind group (filled with brilliant podcasting minds) and group coaching as well as one on one coaching. Sign up today at The Advantage of a Solo Episode Solo podcast episodes have their advantages: You are 100% in control. You can be as creative as you want You know ahead of time what the content is (instead of hoping you get good answers from your guests) Less production. You won't be interrupting people or trying to match levels with your guest. There is only one level- yours. No Scheduling Conflicts The Hurdles of Solo Podcasts It is all on your shoulders for content You need to watch voice inflection It just feels weird talking to no-one People think it needs to be as long as other episodes TIPS 1. Embrace the Weirdness 2. You Don't Have An Audience (yet) 3. Talk to One Person 4. Answer the question from the invisible person 5. Record it with the thought of never using it. - Just a Sound test 6. Script Your Show 7. Throw Out the Grammar 8. Be yourself and just up your natural voice Question of the Month Submissions I need your answer by 1/28/22 see for more information Full notes at
I am seeing people that seem to be afraid to reach out to their audience. I get it. It's easier to have the reason of "lack of engagement" on your downloads instead of asking people for feedback on your show. Today I share a story on how I was ready to make sweeping changes to the until I decided to open up a discussion with my audience. I was at one point thinking of shutting the podcast down. It turns out that ONE person who had ideas of changing the show was in the minority. That doesn't mean their suggestion has no merit. I was reading and he (of NPR experience) to 18 months to play with the format of their new show. With this in mind, I'm still doing my show, but I'm looking into implementing the things that my audience enjoys while aligning the show a bit more with my brand. I always say, "Your podcast is a recipe - not a statue." Question of the Month Submission When you are in an app and see a show you probably should be listening to what inspires you to go further and potentially subscribe or follow. I need your answer by 1/28/22 Go to My New Page with Affiliate Links Check it out at if you are a person that doesn't feel they would benefit from the School of Podcasting, but wants to support the show, I've now made it easy. Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). Get access to step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee Go to Podcast Rewind Mentioned in This Episode
In the microwave society that we live in, most of us are not accustomed to slowing down. As a podcaster, we may associate silence with "Dead Air" which is a phrase from the radio. However, today I'm going to show you that the best answers come after the awkward pause. The Power of the Dramatic Pause When you put a pause before or after a point it adds emphasis to that point. If you put it before the point, the brain perks up waiting for the next words. If you put the pause after your point, it gives the brain a chance to process what was just said. Start Your Podcast and Grow Your Audience When you join the School of Podcasting you no longer have to worry about buying equipment you don't need. You learn how to get comfortable behind a microphone as our community helps you create your best episodes. There are step by step videos, live group coaching, private one on one coaching, and a private mastermind group. You have every tool you need to succeed as a podcast. Go to Mentioned In This Episode The Question of the Month () Howard Stern on Ben Affleck Movie David Letterman Full Show Notes at Support the Show Buy Dave's Join the Become a or Thank you for listening. I really appreciate it.
As the first episode of 2022, I often do an episode for beginners, such as episode 756 One of the most dangerous things you can do in podcasting is comparing your show to others. When I was in my 20s I would play golf once a year with my brother. My golf scores look like someone who golfed once a year. I would use my Dad's old clubs and would go to one of the cheapest clubs and just a fun day of hanging out. How would I feel if I compared myself to Tiger Woods? That would be insane unless I compared myself to a four-year-old Tiger. When you have your attitude in check, it can change the way you perform moving forward. From the "hobbyist" to the "semi pro" you will see that if the hobbyist attempts to do everything the "semi pro" does they will burn out. Also, anyone who starts a podcast will attract people they didn't expect to attract. Full show notes at QUESTION OF THE MONTH I need your answer before 1/28/22 Picture yourself in a podcast app in front of a podcast you might actually enjoy. Think of this experience and comment on it. What caught your eye? Is the description important? Do you subscribe? or "Cherry Pick" episodes. Do you ever subscribe/Follow? As we all want more followers/subscribers (and yes we know most of us find our podcasts via word of mouth), BUT when you're in an app, (I realize this is kind of vague), but what goes through your mind before you press either play or subscribe/follow? Don't forget to tell us a little bit about your show, and your website address. Go to MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE Episode 756 to get some constructive feedback. Join the and get started in the RIGHT direction. Check out my free course at PodPage is the best way to make a great looking website for your show without any coding.
Since , I've been asking my audio what is your ONE FAVORITE podcast (and yes, I know it's hard to pick just one) but more importantly WHY is it your favorite? Stewart loves the I interview Steve and Mark Deal on about the York from likes the show. Chris Lewis from the podcast loves The . I interview Brian back on episode Glenn from the Podcast loves the . If you're a person of color Kim Newlove of the loves the School of Podcasting ( on Reviews, and when you die) Louis Goodman of loves the Scott Johnson from ? loves the Podcast. Neil Scott from Recovery Coast to Coast Loves the . Matt Rafferty of loves the Joe Saul Sehy from loves the Joe mentioned Mark Vinet from the loves the show. Shane Whaley from and loves the "" podcast. Joe loves the Podcast. Bryan Goodwin of the loves the show Anthony Arno of the Podcast and the Stemclass Podcast loves Podcast. Dave from Your loves from Tom Webster. JANUARY QUESTION OF THE MONTH I need your answer before 1/28/22 Picture yourself in a podcast app in front of a podcast you might actually enjoy. Think of this experience and comment on it. What caught your eye? Is the description important? Do you subscribe? or "Cherry Pick" episodes. Do you ever subscribe/Follow? As we all want more followers/subscribers (and yes we know most of us find our podcasts via word of mouth), BUT when you're in an app, (I realize this is kind of vague), but what goes through your mind before you press either play or subscribe/follow? Don't forget to tell us a little bit about your show, and your website address. Go to Ready To Start Your Podcast? You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
Hallmark Holiday Movies get a lot of flack because they are predictable, cheesy, corny, and more or less if you've seen one - you've seen them all. YES THERE ARE LESSONS TO BE LEARNED Do you know why all Hallmark Movies are the same? Well, do you know why all AC/DC songs sound the same (or Chuck Berry). Ever listen to an episode of Dave Ramsey? They found a format that works, and consequently, they stay with it until that format doesn't work. Why are there so many Friday the 13th movies? Because they were profitable. That goes for many movie franchises. When you find a winning format - stick with it. Monitor how it resonates with your audience and if they love it, keep doing it. TWEAKING A FORMAT WITHOUT LOSING YOUR SOUL My cousin said, "I know what I'm getting with a Hallmark movie. I don't worry about swearing, nudity, violence, etc. It's a trustworthy holiday movie where everyone feels good when it's over. So Hallmark saw that the "formula" worked but they could grow their audience through diversity. They've added movies with people of color. As a middle-aged white guy, I never knew what it was like to see a movie or TV show and not look like the people on screen. The success of the Black Panther Movie, Blackish, Hamilton, and other forms of entertainment that had a different slant found an underserved audience. With this, I beg you people of color, and people of all shapes, sizes, sex, and whatever makes you - YOU. There are people who are tired of hearing about a subject from a middle-aged white guy and would love to hear about your subject from your point of view that includes your influence and heritage. The Missing Piece in Your Podcast Puzzle I see people saying this like, "I've tried everything but my show isn't growing." To this I say, "Everything?" It turns out when I reach out to the last three people who said this NONE of them had taken the steps to get an objective view of their show. This is like: Wondering why your restaurant isn't growing when you never got feedback on your feed. Wondering why your clothing line isn't selling when you never did a focus group of your target buyer. If you need some help, . Currently, in the , this is a free service. QUESTION OF THE MONTH II need your answer by 12/24/21. The question is "What is your favorite Podcast and why?". Please provide: The name of the show The website (if you know it - very helpful) What the show is about WHY YOU LIKE IT - Go as long as you want. Be sure to tell us the name of your podcast, your website, and a little bit about your show. Please answer at Go to Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See
I was talking to someone who said how "Flexible" Anchor/fm was (owned by Spotify). When I hear stuff like this I often wonder "WHAT IS YOUR SOURCE?" I did a video a while ago when there were some serious issues with Anchor that most people were overlooking (hey! it's free!). Today I just feel moved to let you know that YES, I do not recommend Anchor, but for NEW reasons. LINKS - Music/Podcast Feedback Tool TOPICS COVERED: 03:01 Update on Tascam 03:49 Good Customer Service 06:28 Submit Your Favorite Podcast 07:32 learnpodpage.com 08:06 Why I Don't Recommend Anchor.fm 32:22 New Feedback Tool 35:23 Atta Boy To Neil and Scott
Thanks to an older brother and sister, I was born a Beatles fan. When I watched the six-hour documentary Get Back I saw tip after tip that podcasters could benefit from. Ready To Start Your Podcast? You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See Because of My Podcast Andy Driscoll of shares how he is going to get to go to a tradeshow for his podcast and record live on the floor. The show is picking up his hotel expenses. Who doesn't love a trip to vegas? New Free Course From the School of Podcasting: Learn Podpage Podpage is a great tool to make a great-looking website for your podcast without knowing any coding. I've made a top to bottom course of this great tool and made it available for free. See 15 Lessons From The Beatles 02:09 Because of My Podcast: Andy Driscoll 06:13 Free Course learnpodpage.com 07:45 Lessons from the Beatles Opening 09:19 Practice, Practice, Practice 10:32 Get Objective Feedback 11:44 Your Environment Matters 14:48 Set Realistic Goals to Avoid Burnout 17:15 Going Live Requires Practice 18:07 Everyone Needs to Feel Heard 19:44 Chemistry is Important 21:58 Be on Time 22:43 Be Inspired By Others 24:03 Capture Your Ideas 24:56 Get Out Of Your Comfort Zone 26:13 Editing is a Good Thing 30:32 Money Changes Everything 31:26 Don't Let Yoko Sing QUESTION OF THE MONTH II need your answer by 12/24/21. The question is "What is your favorite Podcast and why?". Please provide: The name of the show The website (if you know it - very helpful) What the show is about WHY YOU LIKE IT - Go as long as you want. Be sure to tell us the name of your podcast, your website, and a little bit about your show. Please answer at Go to Tascam Mixcast 4 Nightmare I bought a from Tascam, and it has some great features except it died TWICE in the middle of a live stream. I'll keep you informed as I work with their support team to identify what the issue is. Yes, I'm using the latest firmware. I do enjoy my new . I used the 90 days same as cash option at . MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE - Start Your Podcast
For years I've told people THE BEST ratio I've ever achieved is 4 TO 1 when it comes to making a podcast episode. In other words, a 15-minute podcast will take an hour. I asked my audience how long it took them from idea to pressing publish. They shared their workflow and the amount of time spent per episode. If you'd rather outsource your editing, Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Today we talk about the . Check out Mentioned In This Episode - 802 - 801 Contributors Steve from and the (and the podcast editors club on Facebook Kim from Zita - Bruce from Jim From the Mark - Rich - Orlando - Brandon - Dan - Howard - Neil Mark - Peter - Bill - Stefan - The Final Answer For me, my average is about 6 to 1. So a 15-minute podcast will take 90 minutes. Based on the data from the audience, they averaged 10 minutes for 1 minute of podcast. So a 15-minute podcast will take an hour and a half. To see my flow, visit the website at
Today we look at how two entertainment icons had MORE success AFTER they quit trying to be something they weren't and decided to be themselves. Glenn Hebert runs the . When he started his podcast he had 12 downloads. He didn't quit, and 2800 episodes later he shares some powerful feedback from his audience. Glenn had no idea he would have this effect on people, and you can do the same thing. Let me help you start a podcast. QUESTION OF THE MONTH II need your answer by 10/26/21. How long does it take you to go from idea to clicking publish on an episode? Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website, and a little bit about your show. Go to Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Today we talk about the . Check out MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE () on Sale! Shure MV7 and MV7X "" With Bonus Content Editing Software Time Tracking Software Podcast Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See TOPICS 01:39 Question of the Month Reminder 03:36 Headline Studio Tool 05:15 BE YOURSELF 07:07 Celebrity Pivots 15:56 Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast 17:12 What is this 800? 17:43 Glenn Got Some Feedback 18:44 Real, Raw, Don't Hold Back 19:32 Holy Cow You're In My House 20:50 Laying it Out There 21:27 Life Changing 22:08 Glenn's Prep Time 23:43 The Importance of Community 25:06 Putting YOU Intro an Interview 27:56 Glenn's Audience Gives Back 29:09 Inspiring Life Instead of Death 30:01 Did You See This Coming 30:58 Podcasting Gold 31:29 Two Types of Listeners 35:34 The Birth of Grammar Girl 37:06 Jerry Springer 39:24 Podcast Rodeo Show Promo 40:43 SM7B is ON SALE! 42:07 Join the School of Podcasting! 44:46 Bloopers 45:15 Bad Edits
If you are looking to speed up your podcast production, then this episode is for you. I have compiled 20 tips that will help you take the stress out of producing a quality audio file in a timely manner. From planning to editing, here are some quick tricks that will make your podcast shine! Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Today we talk about the . Check out Mentioned In This Episode book () Media Host (sopfree promo code) TIPS Assess How Much Your Time Is Worth Take the Time to Get Your Guest Sound in Check Quit Multitasking Avoid Distractions Block out time More Planning Equals Less Editing Do the Hardest Stuff First Prioritize Better Speed up Researching Organize Your Content to It's Easy to Find Learn the Software You Are Using (Take a Class) Record it Right the First Time Listen Back Faster Learn Keyboard Shortcuts Google Vs Bang Your Head Against the Desk Know WHO your guest is and WHY You are bringing them on the show Outsource Your Editing Automate When Possible Use Transcripts to find clips for audiograms. Deep Breathing when pulled out of your zone QUESTION OF THE MONTH II need your answer by 11/26/21. How long does it take you to go from idea to published on an episode. Go to
We hear of podcasters getting these big deals for big bucks, and congratulations to all. However, this is not the norm. Just because you start a podcast does not mean you will end up like Rich Uncle Pennybag from Monopoly. If you're a regular listener you've heard me mention how I received a 10-minute voicemail, and one of the points of that voicemail was that maybe we all have some slightly blurry expectations when it comes to podcasting (and in their case how long it takes to create one). Today is my 800th episode and like all of my milestone episodes, I'm going to break my format, and not talk so much about gear, downloads, promotion, interviews, etc and instead I want to talk about some of the more stressful sides of podcasting. Mentioned In This Episode Full Show Notes at Book: National Suicide Prevention Lifeline at 800-273-8255 Question of the Month: How Long Does It Take You to Create an Episode - SURVEY This 60-minute podcast took 8 hours to create from idea to pressing publish. We all know podcasting can take more time than we thought. I'd love to hear how long it took to go from "Idea to Publish" for your last episode. You can answer at Need Help With Your Podcast? Here is you can work with me. Want to support the show, but feel you don't need the School of Podcasting? Consider becoming a Patron. Also, this show is equipped with the value for value model. You can stream bitcoin using the apps at If none of those float your boat, . TOPICS 00:58 Question of the Month 03:43 Origins of Episode 05:06 Podcasting Can Change Your Life 07:35 Everything Works for THE Dave Jackson??? 08:26 Podcasting Played a Part in My Divorce 09:29 Lesson 1: Realistic Expectations 11:40 Separating Work From Home 13:15 Tip 2:Date Night on Steroids 15:00 Relationship Advice from the Divorced Guy 15:10 When to Argue 17:07 Tip 3: Guys - JUST LISTEN 17:31 Tip 4: Ladies Tell Them What You Want 17:55 Tip 5: Make Sure You're Giving Them What They Want 18:46 Stereotypes are Fun! 20:02 Comparison is the Thief of Joy 21:33 The RIGHT Downloads 23:14 Refocus When Comparing Yourself 25:04 So Why Does Dave Podcast? 30:44 Suicide Disclaimer 31:32 Does Being a ProPodcaster Leave You Susceptible to Thoughts of Suicide? 32:58 When Did the Word Hobby Become Derogatory? 34:29 You Are Allowed to Do This For Fun 36:15 Podcasters Can Be Impulsive 38:06 Podcasters Are Isolated 39:07 Realistic Expectations 41:25 We Might Feel Trapped 43:10 The HUSTLE Mentality 44:20 Suicide Rates in America 48:10 It's OK To Ask For Help 49:55 Dealing with Grief 53:51 The Pain of Suicide 54:22 Keep Your Good Emails
For a lot of people, podcasting is just a hobby. They think it's fun to talk about their favorite topics and share them with the world. But for some, podcasting can be so much more than that! It can become a business or even an income source. If you've been thinking about starting your own podcast, here are some tips on how to brand your show like a pro: For entrepreneurs who want to start their own businesses and use podcasts as part of their marketing strategy, branding is important; especially when considering how unique each individual business should be in order to stand out among its competitors. If you're looking for ways on how to brand your show like a professional podcaster, keep reading at Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Today we talk about the . Check out Question of the Month Many podcasters (especially new ones ) are surprised at how long it takes to create an episode. So this month's question is "How long did it take you to go from idea to published (not promotional actions just the planning, recording, editing, and publishing). Be sure to mention your website, your podcast, and a little bit about what to expect. Then let us know how long your finished episode was, how much time it took to publish, and if it was audio, video or both. Go to by November 26th If you want something to help track your time check out , , , (there are a ton of these) Again, Mentioned In This Show (Mark's Company) Ready To Start Your Podcast? You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
You tell me that your guest is a master of (skill) and I'm ready to hear about (skill), but first, you make me listen to where he went to high school, and his entire backstory while all I want to talk about is how he can help me boost (skill). So for me the "tell me about yourself" drives me nuts. I asked my audience, "Am I missing something? and they answered (and in some cases I am). Full show notes at Thanks To The Contributors Scott from Max from Louis from Bill From the Mark from the November Question of the Month As you produce episodes between now and November 26th, 2021 pay attention (and even track) how long it takes you to go from Ideas to pressing "Publish" on your media host (this does NOT include promotion). As always feel free to record a message and say something like, "Hey Dave this is (name) from (name of the show) at (website) my episode was (length of the episode) and it took me (time from idea to publishing). You can find more about my show at (website). If you'd like, I've even where you can enter Name of Podcast (not episode - the podcast) The length of the finished episode (in minutes). The time spent (in minutes) to complete the episode If it was solo, co-host, interview. If there is video was involved. You can answer your question at Mentioned In This Episode EP766 Launching a Podcast in 2022? As you heard in today's show, it takes some time to get focused, find your voice and make content that impacts your audience Join the or Order the
The new series Squid Game on Netflix shot to number 1 in four days. I watched episode 1 and immediately binged the whole thing. This is a very popular show and has become Netflix's best launch. Let's pick it apart and see what podcasters can learn from the success of Squid Game. Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out QUESTION OF THE MONTH II need your answer by 10/22/21. The question is "How do you feel about hearing a guest's FULL story?" Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website, and a little bit about your show. Go to Key Points: 78% of podcasters are discovered vis word of mouth ( Jacobs Media 2019) It's not perfect It got editing before it was released The first episode really hooks you in. You don't get the back story until episode 2 People can identify with the characters What is going to happen next? The audience boosted FOMO Netflix took a chance Sometimes The Audience Doesn’t Know What They Want Until They Get it. So Don’t give up. It might take 10 years It doesn’t have to be perfect Start with the strongest content you have Tease your next episode and leave them wanting more Make materials for your audience to share on social Be patient, and continue to improve your content Inspire and ask for word of mouth WEBINAR NEXT WEEK: APPLE PODCASTS CONNECT Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
As someone who works in the podcast space, and spends hours hanging out in the community there are things I see that make me scratch my head. There are EASY things to do that will help you grow your audience. Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See Common Podcasting Mistakes That Slow Your Audience Growth 02:28 Get a Domain at Least It can be through , or , but BUY a domain for your show. Yes, its icing on the cake, but isn't icing the best part? 05:20 Bad Clips to Start Your Show Instead of spending mountains of time to have people jump into the middle of a conversation, why not just tell people why you're excited about a guest? 10:55 The Start of Your Show Remember Apple has a giant LISTEN button now and people will hear the beginning of your show. Don't blow it with "Music for the sake of nothing" and let them know where they are about to go. 15:54 Follow and Subscribe You want people to listen more than once. Don't make them find you. Give them links like this: Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - 17:30 Impulse Actions Based on Emotions 21:19 Your About Page Figure out what type of website you have, and include any combination of paragraphs about your business, your show, and your hosts. 23:47 Things That May Not Be Accurate 25:56 The #1 Show - (People will say anything - truth be Damned!) 28:31 Shows Proof 28:48 A Podcast Guru Without a Podcast Shouldn't your podcast coach have a podcast? 30:04 Monthly Stats Monthly stats are a great barometer of how your older episodes are doing. They sound better than episode stats (but episode stats are what is used for most sponsors). 33:50 Magic Bullets I'm sorry. There aren't any. 35:48 Question of the Month QUESTION OF THE MONTH II need your answer by 10/22/21. The question is "How do you feel about hearing a guest's FULL story?" Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website, and a little bit about your show. Go to 37:03 - Thumbs Up 39:35 Bloopers Mentioned In This Episode Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back. Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.
There are times when I feel podcasters over-think things, and one of them is "How do I come back if I take an unplanned break?" It's not a whole lot different than starting a podcast from scratch (except it's easier). Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out Mentioned In This Podcast Book QUESTION OF THE MONTH I need your answer by 10/22/21. The question is "How do you feel about hearing a guest's FULL story?" Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website, and a little bit about your show. Go to TOPICS 00:00 Introduction 00:27 Welcome 01:14 Taking Breaks From Your Podcast: Don't 03:34 It's Your Choice 04:10 Things You Should Consider 05:07 Using Seasons 06:34 Off Seasons May Not Be Off 07:39 How I Don't Miss Episodes 08:31 Consistency in VALUE over Schedule 09:57 I Really Need To Take a Break 10:34 The Best Way to Take a Break: PLAN IT 11:23 Figure Out When You're Coming Back 12:28 Keep Your Listener Informed 13:56 SPONSOR: Novel Marketing Podcast 15:11 Unplug If That Is the Goal 16:21 Identify Why You Need a Break 17:13 Make Your Last Episode a GREAT Episode 18:03 No Explanation Needed 20:52 Losing Listeners Is Not More Important 21:21 Relaunching Your Podcast 22:00 Is Taking a Break More Work? 22:35 Have Episodes Recorded and Ready 23:15 Quick Summary So Far 23:55 Other Things to Consider 24:50 Best of Shows 25:33 Where to Announce Your Hiatus? 26:24 Avoid Podfading 27:55 The Biggest Mistake 30:35 Resurrecting a Podfaded Show 33:54 promo code sopfree 34:31 Question of the Month 35:44 One Tip to Making Podcasting Easier 37:12 If You Need a Break From Life 38:13 38:56 Bloopers Ready To Start Your Podcast? You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
Today is a "Question of the Month" episode where we share something we recommended and WHY. We look at the strategy of dripping content to keep people wanting to know what happens next ( the Zeigarnik effect ). Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out Participants Matt from Scott from Jennifer Timothy from and Haley from Jerry from Mark from the Wayne from the , and Fred from MENTIONED IN THIS PODCAST Dave's "" page. promo code sopfree to get a full month free. Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See TOPICS 01:34 Autographed Copies of Profit From Your Podcat 02:10 The Show I Love to Hate 03:21 Zeigarnik effect 05:01 What Makes a Good Podcast? 06:39 What Happens Next? 07:48 Example of Dripping Content 09:11 Sponsor: Novel Marketing Marketing Podcast 13:19 Scott Johnson 15:54 Jennifer Longworth 17:15 Matt Rafferty 18:21 Timothy Kimo Brien 20:39 Haley Radke 23:09 Jerry Dugen 24:56 Mark Vinet 26:02 Wayne Henderson 27:13 Fred Castenada 28:35 Dave Jackson 33:10 October Question of the Month 38:20 Quick Wrap Up 39:08 Mastering Your Craft is a Goal 39:44 Libsyn Promo Code sopfree 40:38 Coming Soon Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
Every Facebook has the question, "where should I host my podcast" about six times a day and every response gets about 17 replies. I realize that question is sometimes confused by the different features, and business plans so this episode is here to help you understand podcast hosting companies. Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out QUESTION OF THE MONTH I need your answer by 9/24/21. The question is "What was the last thing you shared and why?" Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website and a little bit about your show. Go to Mentioned in This Episode (use the coupon sopfree) Fireside.fm Anchor.fm Topics: 01:52 Question of the Month 02:28 Novel Marketing 03:46 Does One Media Host Deliver More Downloads? 08:58 IAB Statistics 10:37 Are IAB Stats Important? 12:22 Will Switching Hosts Bring More Downloads? 13:12 Storage 14:14 Downloads 15:22 What Kindof Stats? 16:23 Demographic Data? 17:08 Podcast Website 18:28 Private Podcasts 18:57 Dynamic Ad Insertion 20:47 Support 21:32 Transcripts 21:54 Audiograms 22:24 Media Hosting Business Models 22:40 Free Media Hosts 24:42 Why Free Media Hosts Fail 25:26 Limited Uploads - Unlimited Downloads 26:16 Unlimited Uploaded - Limited/Pricier Downloads 27:16 Unlimited Everything 27:42 Opinion My Criteria 31:18 Join the School of Podcasting 31:58 How to Choose? 35:07 Opinion on Transcripts 36:48 Opinion Audiograms 38:36 Opinion on Anchor.fm 42:00 Opinion on I Can't Afford It 42:31 Opinion- Busines Models 45:37 Opinion - All Things Unlimited 47:08 Facebook is Useless 49:17 Opinion: WordPress Feeds 51:53 be Careful Switching Hosts
This weekend was the 20th anniversary of 911 in the United States. I recently had a slight health scare, so I brought on a friend of the show to answer the question, "What happens to your podcast if you die." We also get the last report from as he winds up his tour to meet his audience. I also am trying something new with my book Profit From Your Podcast. Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out What Happens to Your Podcast if You Die? I talk with Gordon Firemark about what happens to your podcast if you die. While we all plan to be around much longer, taking the time to designate what happens to your show if you are no longer able to continue (or if you're dead). This is an awkward conversation to have with people, but you should be planning your estate as well, so don't forget your podcast (and dog) when you create directions on what to do with your show. You might check out the book, "?" on For more information about Gordon see Glenn's Reflections on His Tour Glenn "The Geek" Hebert is from the He went on a five-week tour with thousands of miles across the east coast to meet his listeners and sponsors. He loved his and thought staying three days in one place was the best. Next tour he will also plan some time to site see (as they didn't do any). He said that even though traveling in an RV is different, after some time you just get used to it (and it beats hotels, or staying in the listener's homes). Get A Personalized Version of Profit From Your Podcast Go to to get a personalized version of the book (US only) QUESTION OF THE MONTH I need your answer by 9/24/21. The question is "What was the last thing you shared and why?" Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website and a little bit about your show. Go to Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See Topics: 00:00 Intro 01:48 Pushing Past Your Fears 05:36 Mark's First Episode 06:07 How Many Downloads is Considered Good? 09:37 Sponsor: Novel Marketing 11:39 Sad News About Trever Hill 12:54 What Happens To Your Podcast When You Die? 25:40 Glenn the Geek Final Tour Update 32:49 Others are Going on Tour 34:22 Questions of the Month 35:55 Personalized Version of Profit From Your Podcast 36:54 The Importance of Editing 39:50 Bloopers Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back.
Mellisa Guller has experience as a marketing manager, a project manager, an online course designer (she worked at Teachable), as well as a podcast producer, host, and podcast teacher. We take a DEEP DIVE into planning and launching an online course. SPONSOR: Novel Marketing A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out Building Digital Courses with Mellisa Guller Today I get all your questions answered about building and selling an online course: 06:04 When is the right time to build a course? 09:01 How Long Should My Course Be? 11:19 Common Mistakes 13:13 What are the Top Challenges? 20:50 Open or Closed Model? 26:23 The Underutilized Feature in Teachable 27:27 What Do I Charge For My Online Course 32:59 Should I Have Free Lessons? 35:37 What Percentage of My Audience Will Sign Up? 39:38 Why is the Number So Low? 41:04 Why Did You Choose Circle? Melissa's Contact Info Check out all of her courses and services at Question of the Month I need you to answer the question, "What was the last thing you shared, and why?" Go to by 9/24/21 and be sure to tell us about your show and where we can find it (your website). Ready To Start Your Podcast? You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See Mentioned in This Episode
I asked my audience "Do you need to be a celebrity to achieve podcast success?" and they chimed in. You need to know your WHY, and you need to define SUCCESS. SPONSOR: Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at Participants In This Episode - Mark - Scott Johnson - Mike - Civilia Morgan - Matt - Robert Ober - Shane Whaley. Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on: - - - Check out for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters. Did You Get Value From This Episode? Enjoy the Show? and give some of that value back. Mentioned In This Podcast (Lots of Free Stuff)
Today built up a sizeable Facebook group and after trying multiple strategies to have the group pay for itself, SHE MOVED AWAY FROM FACEBOOK. SPONSOR: Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at Danielle is the host of the and one of the founders of the . In addition to being a podcaster, she's also is an Author, Podcast Coach, Freelance Writer and more. Today We Find Out The happy accident that was the start of the WOC Podcasters group. The multiple ways she attempted to monetize. Her thoughts about the "hot leads" from Facebook. Why she moved to , and her favorite features. How she stayed sane running a group of 4000+ people. How she has expanded the group since moving off of Facebook. We get insight into her 17 different streams of income. Because of her podcast she is QUITTING HER DAY JOB! Glenn The Geek Road Report Glenn has recorded a few episodes on the road this week, and at one point was in the parking lot of a liquor store to get good wi-fi. He is getting great feedback from his audience, and seeing the products that people have purchased after hearing it on his show. Glenn then has the customer record a testimonial about the product and sends it to the sponsor (this should make it easy to renew their contract as Glenn has audible proof that advertising on his show works). Check out Gleen at Question of the Month I need your answers by 8/27/21 at Can you achieve podcasting success without being a celebrity? (Be sure to mention your show and website) Share your thoughts. Leading the Bleeding ( A Journey Podcast) I start a new strictly hobby podcast that will help me understand more about earning Bitcoin with your podcast. See for more information. So far I've earned 65.74 (131,866 sats) and will be joined by my friend Harry Durran from and (hopefully) many more people as we create a "Study group." In the words of the great band King's X, "" and we hope to get a group of people into a zoom meeting and share ideas, insights, and education. To check out the first episode, "" and add our first meeting by visiting Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See Mentioned On This Episode (stream bitcoin to podcasters)
We have many topics this week. If your app uses chapters you can jump to the next subject. We are talking about becoming an SPONSOR: Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at Mentioned In This Episode (free book on ) TOPICS 00:00 Put it Back in the Oven 01:28 Intro 02:05 Because of My Podcast: 10,000 Donation 04:49 Mailbag: Discovery Revisited 09:59 Why Did My Show Stop Growing 12:13 You Never Know Who Is Listening 14:29 SPONSOR Podpage 16:37 Should I Create an LLC? 28:05 Glen The Geek IN MY STUDIO 36:16 Podcast Yearbook 43:08 Show Notes Summit 44:27 Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See
Many entrepreneurs say they are unemployable, well Joe Pulizzi (of ) has a new company called (We’re Turning Content Creators into Content Entrepreneurs) just published . It's based on 1400 Content Entrepreneurs and . SPONSOR: Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at Lessons From the Car When I was driving doing 75 mph in my Toyota Camry, if you're guest is using their built-in microphone I couldn't understand what they were saying. Also, just like a GPS that is constantly looking for more efficient ways to get you to your destination, your podcast operates the same way. As you listen to your audience, you can steer your show to success. It Turns Out People Are Listening... In attending an event where my audience is (Podcast Movement 2021), I ran into a few people who listen to my show. I ran into Peter Ferioli of , from MTV's the Headbanger Ball (). While it feeds your ego, you also have the opportunity to get instant feedback on your show. This is always amazing to get feedback, and you actually see that people are listening to you. Glenn The Geek HRN Tour Report Glenn is going on a five-week 3200-mile tour including 14 states, 12 meetups, 1 wedding, to meet his listeners. he is staying at listener farms and campgrounds. Glenn is loving the and using four . He is recording into the P4 and also uses Follow Glenn on the Horses in or check out his Website. Question of the Month Can you achieve podcasting success without being a celebrity? (Be sure to mention your show and website) Share your thoughts... I need your answer by 8/27/21 see Mentioned In This Episode - The unconventionals (and ) Everything you need to sell courses, webinars, downloads, and memberships. - Create online courses and coaching services. Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See
While you can learn from other people's mistakes, you can also learn from other's successes. Jordan Harbinger has been on the show multiple times. He first shared what was working for him back on and he had left his career as a lawyer. He was uber transparent on on starting his new show. When I heard of the Jordan Harbinger Show, I had to reach out to Jordan and say how awesome it was. As I looked at the show/episode deeper () there are a ton of strategies to learn from. SPONSOR: Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at Lessons Learned Jordan promotes what you missed, and let's you know what's coming. His opening tease made me want to hear more without "spoiling" the episode. His fluid transition of his guest left me (again) wanting to hear more. Jordan has created starter packs to get new listeners to the best stuff quickly. Jordan does the work. He reads the book, watches the movie, etc. He does the research for his guest, and consequently asks the best questions that lead to great stories. His guest had a great story AND could tell it. (Example, actors are skilled at reading other people's words and may not be a great interview). He makes points by sharing insights into his life. He put his sponsors in the episode AND on his "" page. This (probably) results in more sales, and makes it easy to share He explains WHY you should go to his website. He has blog posts that are long (to attract Google) and are very well written. These also have links to his episodes. HE can then mention this on his episodes which is another reason to check out the website. While his primary income is sponsors, he also has a page of all the books from his guests (which use affiliate links). Remember, pennies make dollars. You get to know him based on his entertainment recommendations. Findability vs Discoverability I wrote an article some people took to Twitter to say I was wrong. One person was Tanner Cambell from . He explained how: Findability: How easy it is for someone to locate known data, information, or knowledge using search or browse? Example: Googling "Golf Podcast." Discoverability: How easy is it for someone to encounter information or knowledge that was not explicitly sought out? Example: Pandora suggesting songs based on your feedback. Amazon suggesting products. Netflix suggesting shows based on your feedback. After an uncomfortable discussion, I realize I was confusing the two. For me, my friends are my discoverability system. They know what I would enjoy and recommend podcasts for me to listen to that I may not have heard about. Ready To Start Your Podcast You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See Mentioned In This Episode - Steven Pressfield
The formula for many successful musicians is to take their influences and mix them into something new and unique. I recently watched a few documentaries, and as a musician, I'm a bit of a nerd when it comes to music history, especially around rock and roll, and today I've got some great stories that can help your podcast. SPONSOR: Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at Rockstar Lessons From the Beatles and Kiss Start with your why Same but different Sharpen your axes Make your show hard to copy Sacrifices will be made Friendly competition is good Don't promote until your audience says its good Get people talking about you Money changes everything Don't be bored I think the item that really made me go "Whoa!" was the Beatles having the option to come to the US, and they postponed it until they had a hit. Likewise, Kiss walking out on a record deal as the music wasn't right. Podcast Rewind I've been interviewed on the following podcasts: Question of the Month What would you miss the most if you have to quit podcasting? I need your answer by 7/23/21 Go to Ready To Start Your Podcast? You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See Mentioned In This Episode
"Is podcast success only for celebrities?" This is a question many podcasters ask themselves after they start their podcast and find out how much work it really takes to make it successful. Listeners don't care if you're an established celebrity or not. They want good content. Full episode description at Ready to Get Into the Arena With a Podcast? I would love to help you get a professional-sounding, super targeted, extra-engaging podcast off the ground. Let me take my 16 years of podcasting experience to help you avoid the common pitfalls. Come . Enjoy the Podcast But Don't Need My Services? I've provided value, . Mentioned In This Episode , Video
Two Ways To Learn Things You can learn from your mistakes and do less of those. You can also look at anything that worked well and do more of that. This week I talk about episode . I had more people connect with me to say, "Hey, I really liked that interviewed" and I started asking them WHY? What made it stick out? Today I share their answers. SPONSOR: Podpage Podpage makes it super easy to make a website for your podcast without a giant amount of technical know-how. There is no need to cram a podcast into a theme made for a restaurant on Squarespace, a personal trainer on Wix, or the nightmares that are WordPress themes and plugin conflicts. Podpage is made based on podcaster feedback for podcasters!. You can try it for free at Mentioned In This Episode and the (All of Dave's Podcasting Shows) (Dave's Book)
Today we hear part 2 of my conversation with Joe from () comes back to talk about joining Westwood One, why he has a coach and his attitude towards making his show better. SPONSOR: Podpage Have you tried ? makes it super easy to make a website for your podcast. You don't need any technical knowledge. Just put in your RSS feed from your media host, and does the rest. You can try it for free for seven days - no credit card required. Go to TOPICS: 00:00 Gordon the Guided Missile 03:00 Welcome to the Show QUESTION OF THE MONTH 04:38 Podcasting Pet Peeves 04:54 York from 06:59 Seth - 08:53 Dan - IS YOUR PODCAST GOOD? 11:33 Most Haters Just Leave 14:41 Do You REALLY Want Advice? 16:01 Before You Buy Facebook Ads 16:44 How to Not Feel SALESY 18:30 SPONSOR: JOE'S AMAZING ATTITUDE 20:40 Joe From Stackingbenjamins.com 21:12 Why Did Joe Join a Network? 24:20 "Messing" with his content? 25:54 Why Does Someone Successful Need a Coach? 27:27 What Innovations Did You Do? 31:04 How Joe Inspires You To Listen to the Ads 32:31 Knowledge is Powerful When Acted Upon 34:26 Being Everywhere 35:54 Great Points: recap GET MORE OF JOE Podcast Pre-order his book, "" YOUR ATTITUDE 36:55 It Doesn't Have to Be Perfect 38:41 2 Quick Quotes JULY QUESTION OF THE MONTH 40:18 July Question of the Month If you had to stop podcasting (the reason doesn't matter) what would you miss the most? Answer at INSIGHTS FROM SPARK CHRISTIAN PODCAST CONFERENCE 42:20 Example of Standing Out 47:35 In-Person Events ROCK 50:30 Coming Soon MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE ( 781 ) (John Cleese) (learn Podpage for free) - Plan, Launch, Grow and Monetize Your Podcast Thomas Umstattd Jr. ) (Zach Russell) Pre-order Joe's book, "" (Online Series - Interesting Crowdfunding)
Today I am blessed to interview the man who helped invent podcasting. Many people know him from his time as a VJ on MTV but there is so much more to Adam than his leather jacket and golden locks of hair. Born in Va but moved to the Netherlands when he was 7. He built his first transistor radio when he was 15, and by 16 was a station announcer for a hospital. He later worked on Dutch Pirate Radio, and Radio Decibel in Amsterdam. He's also worked part-time in a computer store where he built his own modem. Yes, he was on MTV as a DJ from 1987-1994. Seeing the power of the Internet he started OnRamp which turned into Think New Ideas. 1996 Adam Curry served as CTO of Think New Ideas. He built websites for Budweiser, bud light, and put together the first Live Stream of the Grammys. (the sponsor was one of the first digital cameras). Podshow (a podcast network, later renamed Mevio) was launched 2004 to 2014. It focused on selling ads for a cast of podcasters. In 2005 hosted a show on Sirius Satelite Radio that spotlighted podcasts. In 2007 he launched the with John C Divorak which uses the value for value model. He's part pirate, part broadcaster, part nerd, and part businessman, he's the Podfather, and today we are talking podcasting 2.0 SPONSOR: Podpage If you are a person who understands that having a website for your podcast is important but doesn't have a clue how to build one. You hate WordPress, and found Squarespace confusing, you can build a beautiful podcast website in five minutes (just enter your RSS feed and Podpage does the rest). See Topics Covered With Adam: The problem with podcasting networks ( 7:20) The history of the (14:50) What is Podcasting 2.0 and how to get started (27:05) Mentioned in This Episode Join the School of Podcasting Avoid sounding unprofessional Learn how to connect with your audience Get your show listed in Apple, Spotify, Google and More Go to
Today I am joined by Joe Saul-Sehy from (which was recently added to the Westwood One Network). Joe recently took a class lead by Sinan Aral (author of the book ) and while it's been proven over and over that Apple ratings and Reviews do not help you in the apple podcast charts, but how much influence do ratings have for those looking for new podcasts? Sponsor: Podpage If you're not a technical person, and you're looking for a "Set it and forget it" solution to your podcast's website, look no further than . You can create a beautiful website in five minutes. I use podpage on the Podcast Rodeo Show, Podcast Review Show, Ask the Podcast Coach, and others. It is being built based on the Feedback of 1000 podcasters in their Facebook group. You can try it for free at to see how easy it is to setup your show. Mentioned In This Episode: about Podcast Reviews Topics: 05:26 The Importance of Reviews (outside of Apple charts) 12:35 Follow Trends ( see ) 15:48 A Faster Way To Create Audiograms 16:38 Managing a Community (want a Facebook Alternative? Check out the ) 20:26 SPONSOR: 22:09 Give Your Listeners What They Want 25:13 78% of Podcast Discovery is Word of Mouth according to 29:49 Looking at My Reviews via ( 4 months free on your first yearly subscription ) 31:29 Another Strategy to Battle 1 Star Reviews 33:16 Have I Frightened You From Pressing Record? 34:05 Getting Out Of Our Own Way 37:14 You WILL Get a One Star Review 38:32 Getting Reviews Outside of Apple 39:45 Thanks To My Team 40:31 Bloopers
is one of the Podcast Industries' first in-person events. While I'm excited to get in my car and make my way to Nashville, there are those who are nervous about being in crowds, while others have not been cleared to travel. I ask Co-founder Dan Franks how he weathered the storm of 2020, and what he's doing to address the needs of his conference attendees in 2021. Check out for more information SPONSOR: Podpage.com Automatically create a beautiful, listener-friendly podcast site from your RSS feed. Customize the design to create a professional look you’ll be proud of in a few clicks. No coding or technical knowledge necessary. You can build a beautiful podcast website in five minutes! Check out FREE COURSE: Check out to learn the ins and outs of Podpage. Full Show Notes at Mentioned In This Episode (free book on ) Ready To Start Your Podcast? Get instance access to tutorials, private coaching, and a Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. You don't have to worry about sounding stupid, spending too much on equipment, or wonder how to get into Apple, Spotify, etc.
How do you decide if something should stay in your podcast episode? For when I listen to the question I asked, I look for: 1. When did their response start to actually answer the question I asked. 2. Is it a good answer? Does it deliver value? Today I play some clips of Sean Evans from Hot Ones being interviews by Drew Barrymore the actress turned talk show host. SPONSOR: SCHOOL OF PODCASTING Get the best equipment for your budget Sound professional Learn what your audience wants Network with brilliant podcast minds Private Group Coaching Priority Email Support 30 Day Money-back Guarantee Go to Avoid the Been There Done That The guest provides an answer and you have a similar situation that will answer for the second time your question. Was the answer from the guest so unclear that you need to repeat what is essentially the same point? If not, remove your story. The interview is about the guest (not you). Avoid the Back Story Sometimes we provide some back story so the guest understands the motivation behind the question. Many times the audience doesn't need to hear the back story. You can edit it out and just leave the part Don't Forget to Ask a Question? I find it off that Drew Barrymore often does not ask a question. She says nice things about the guest and just stops. June 2021 Question(s) of the Month 1. What would the ultimate podcast community look like to you? (This will remain between you and me). 2. What are your top pet peaves? (this will be public) Don't forget to provide: The name of your show/ The website. A brief description Go to by 6/25/2021 Need Help With Your Editing? Check out Where I Will Be June 22-24 2021Grapevine, TX Aug 306 20201 Thanks for sharing this show with a friend Mentioned In This Episode Steve Carter and (with their Fake Product)
My Co-host of the Podcast Review Show Eric K Johnson has a saying, "Nobody Gets on a Bus Without Knowing Where It's Going." Today we talk about how it is 100% up to you on how you start your episodes. I also talk about insights from reading the book, "The Creator’s Compass" which talks about three different levels of presenting content. Sponsor: School of Podcasting Get your podcast off the ground, sounding professional, without spending money on equipment you don't need by using the step-by-step tutorials, the private Facebook Group (filled with brilliant podcast minds) and live group coaching. There is a 30-day money-back guarantee when you go to The Generic Show Introduction Welcome to (show name) where we (what you do) so that you can (benefit of listening) our website is (website address). Then introduce the episode, and if you can explain why people should listen to you, throw that in as well. Smooth Transactions Don't Happen By Accident When I do the with Erik K Johnson so we both can see the points each person wants to make. If needed we loft up a "softball" comment so the person can make their point. Consequently, when I see we have hit all the bullet points I don't have to ask, "Are you ready to move on." James and Sam on do a great job of organizing the many topics they cover into stories that easily transition from one to the next. They transition into interviews by providing just the information that resonates with the listener (do we really need their whole LinkedIn bio? No!) and consequently when the show is over I find myself asking, "Already?" It just flows nicely. This doesn't happen by accident. When you have multiple segments take some time to think about how you are going to transition from one to the other. If you don't do this, it's not the end of the world, but it is often the little things that separate good from great. It's the little things that other people don't take the time to do that can really set you apart. I actually use transition music (SHORT music) to signal my audience that we're moving to a new topic. The bottom line is it is YOUR SHOW and you can do WHATEVER you want. Don't let this stop you from creating your show because it's not "perfect."When in doubt ask someone (not related to you) for feedback and/or do what feels right to you. Three Levels of Content I read the ebook from Jay Acunzo and I loved it. It really made me think, and it's pretty creative. Here is one thing that made me go, "Oh yeah, that is better." Level 1 Content You have some gold. (You drop facts in their lap) Level 2: What Could Happen Here’s some gold. You have some now. And because you have some now, you can do all kinds of things: create some jewelry to feel beautiful or make someone else feel beautiful, etc Level 3: Your Opinion When you say the phrase, "I think" you take all the information, all the pros and cons and insights you have, and put them into an opinion. Everyone will have their own opinion and that makes your show different than anyone else's sow. Coming Soon: Dissecting Hot Ones on YouTube is an amazing show, with AMAZING questions. Mentioned In This Episode from Jay Acunzo Uncomfortable Conversations with a Black Man and
There are times when we are either planning your podcast, launching it, or you're just trying to get a larger audience. I see people in groups, websites, and meetups where they are stuck in the decision-making process. Today we are going to walk through the basic steps, and look at where and why people get stuck. Because of My Podcast: Clay Groves is Now the Host of the Morning Radio Show and a Program Director Clay is the man behind the Fish Nerds podcast and because of his podcast he was first selected to be the man behind the scenes who does the editing, some voice-over at a station. That lead to him filling in on the weekends which lead to him NOW being the Morning Radio Show host AND Program Director. HOW COOL? Check out Clay at The Basics of Making a Decision In doing some research and reading a bunch of articles you can boil decision-making down to about 5-10 steps. These are: Step 1: Identify your goal Step 2: Gather information for weighing your options Step 3: Consider the Consequences Step 4. Make the Decision Step 5. Evaluation the decision Full episodes notes at Mistakes People Make When Making A Decisions Zero Research There are some shows that have done zero research and end up naming their show the same as MANY other shows (search for outside the box in your favorite app). Lack of Qualified Advice Not having an expert or someone who has done what you're doing. My ex-wife was a nurse and when I was given the decision of "How do you want your Dad to die, slow or fast?" She asked for a surgical consult. I didn't even know what a surgical consult was, but we did one and it added about five more years to my Dad's life. Paralysis By Analysis by Sheena Lyengar who is a blind psycho economist who specializing in decision making They had 348 different kinds of jam. We set up a little tasting booth right near the entrance of the store. We there put out six different flavors of jam or 24 different flavors of jam, and we looked at two things: First, in which case were people more likely to stop, sample some jam? More people stopped when there were 24, about 60 percent, than when there were six, about 40 percent. The next thing we looked at is in which case were people more likely to buy a jar of jam. Now we see the opposite effect. Of the people who stopped when there were 24, only three percent of them actually bought a jar of jam. Of the people who stopped when there were six, well now we saw that 30 percent of them actually bought a jar of jam. So when you do some research and bounce it off someone who you feel provides trustworthy advice, you're ready to move to on to looking at the consequences. Fear of Consequences You think there is an A U D I E N C E listening when you first start (there isn't). Then a few months later you have fear because people ARE listening. Remember no one will punch you in the face. You can change things later. TOPICS: 00:00 Decisions, Decisions, Decisions 01:13 Welcome to the Show 01:55 Clay Groves is Now the Morning Guy 05:03 Basic Steps of Making Decisions 09:00 Hobby Shows Have Easier Decisions 09:33 Hobby Shows Might Have Easier Decisions 10:17 The Perfect Podcast 11:03 Paralysis By Analysis 13:21 Facebook Groups May Be More Confusing than Helpful 14:17 What Will You NOT Do? 16:23 Emotional Decisions 17:12 Emotional Pressure 18:14 19:12 There Will Be Bad Decisions 21:03 22:31 Dave Uses This Process In Real Life 31:35 Thanks to All My Well Wishers 35:36 Bloopers Mentioned In This Episode Follow me on Apple or Android text " sop " to 31996 Start Your Podcast When you join the school of podcast you can forget about sounding stupid, unprofessional, or spending money on gear you don't need. You get access to step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, time-shifted one-on-one coaching (via video), and a private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. Go to
Today I explain the continuing issues with Apple (and Google, and Spotify). Your podcast is like a baby. It needs never-ending attention and if there is an issue you need it solved NOW. I judge a company on how things are handled when they make a mistake (cause we are all human). To have a problem that is ongoing for weeks, I find it hard to believe. I get that podcasting is barely a revenue generator for Apple (as in almost none), but you have to realize that in the same way that the actions of a child reflect on the parents, the actions of an app (AND YOUR BRAND) are a reflection of the app you told people to use to listen to your show. Bottom line: It's going to take long (for now) for new episodes to appear in Apple. Apple is not displaying links properly. There is currently (May 2021) a bug where duplicate numbers are appearing (I do see where an update is waiting to be installed - fingers crossed). To see any episode numbers you need to follow. Apple (or Google, Spotify etc) don't put out any public notices. Communication is the lubrication of any relationship. It makes you feel very small and insignificant. That feeling does not make me want to use your subscription service. Who is going to answer any of the customer tickets when someone can't access their subscription? or loses their password? etc. I don't want them treating my customers the way they've treated me. They owe me an apology. How Do I Know If I Have An Issue? You can use a tool like inoreader.com or feedly.com and input your feed. You should be able to see if your latest episode is there. If the episode is in the reader, but not the podcast app, the app just needs to catch up. See Ready To Start Your Podcast? Go to Mentioned in This Episode
I reached out to you and asked how you found your co-host and you were nice enough to reply. SPONSOR: School of Podcasting Audio Editing If you're stressed out about your podcast, and you're spending too much time, check out the School of Podcasting Editing service. We have different variations to meet your budget. Go to Tips in Choosing a Co-Host for Your Podcast You want someone who has the same commitment (and support). You want someone who loves your topic, but might approach it from a different angle. You don't need a clone of you. We already have one of you. Make sure you all understand how things are divided up and workaround: Money coming in Podcast production Podcast Promotion Who is paying for what (money going out) How do you get fired or quit? What schedule is the show going to use (record some test shows to determine this) Finding a Co-host Today we hear how some people: Ask other podcasters they knew Ask family members Asked bloggers Asked their audience You might consider starting your show as a solo artist which makes it easier to ask someone to join something that exists than something that is just an idea in your head. see Thanks To The Contributors: Wayne Henderson from the Packers Fan Podcast ( and ) Andrés Brenes from ( a Spanish podcast about Heavy Metal) Brent Bergherm from Lattitude Photography Podcast - Fred Castaneda from Podcast Reporter ( and and ) Roben Harris from Destinations Connections ( ) Matt Rafferty - The Author Inside You () Josh Rivers 24 Faithful Craig Wealand from Ingles Podcast.com ( ) Mentioned In This Show Text " sop " to 31996 Join the School of Podcasting
Apple Is Launching Subscriptions Here is what we know: In the US, it's to participate Your show is only available in the Apple podcast app but it's not exclusive. You can set your monthly and yearly subscription price, and signing up will be super easy. You can offer a free trial along with a freemium model (some free episodes and some paid). The first year a person subscribes Apple takes 30% of the revenue from that listener, the second year of their subscription they take 15. Apple will host your files and choose the output format. Stats on your downloads for the subscribers will come from Apple. When you sign up for a "regular" podcast you need to choose the one with an RSS feed. Apple is having MAJOR difficulties this week and as I write this my dashboard has been reading "We're setting up your account. This could take a few hours. When we're finished, you can start adding new shows" since 4/21 (it's 4/25 as I write this). If you're on Anchor and you let Anchor submit your show, you will need to get your show under your Apple ID. The Math of Subscriptions Let's look at a podcast that is getting 150 downloads on every episode (after 30 days). If you have 150 downloads per episode. The typical percentage of people who will take action is 3%. This would mean 4.5 people which I will round up to 5. If you charge $5/month that is $25 (Five people at $5/month). Apple is going to take 30% ($7.50) and leave you with $17.50 With this in mind when you start thinking of bonus content, and the effort it takes, you need to ask yourself is this worth $17.50. In the same scenario your take-home pay is: Glow.fm: $23.93 Supercast: $23.64 Patreon (8%): $22.88 Apple: $17.47 Is It Worth It? All the extra work, how long is it going to take? You need to answer that question. If you spend four hours a month creating additional content, you want to take that $17.50 per month you are making from subscribers and divide by four hours to get $4.38per hour. Is missing time with your family, your sanity, your health, with it? What We Don't Know About Apple Subscriptions Are they going to release Apple podcasts on Android? This seems like something they should be doing. Is it $20 per year (US) or $20 per year per country? IMHO, this is $20/year (US) for all countries. When I started to sign up last night Apple wanted to charge me $20 My Podcast Reviews Adds Follow Pages On episode 709 Interviewed Daniel J Lewis from My Podcast Reviews (which is ONE place to get ALL of your reviews in ONE place from ALL Countries). Now they have added an easy way to get people to subscribe/follow your podcast (which really is something you want them to d0. You can see it live in action at For more information check out (aff link) Podpage Has Added Multiple Updates I interviewed Brenden from Podpage.com on . That was after Podpage first launched. If you need more than your "built in" website from your media host, but don't need all the complexity from something like WordPress, Podpage is for you. They've added features such as: Free voicemail Episode signatures (default text that is placed at the bottom of every episode A place for transcripts Multiple templates, more color options, and eCommerce Better search (which s great as WordPress search is awful) Email list building tool Check out my free course at Tidycal Adds Zoom Integration If you need a tool to help schedule guests or consulting clients, allows you to create free (or paid) appointments and now it automatically creates a zoom meeting. It also integrates with Paypal, and Google Calendar. Currently, you can purchase LIFETIME access to the tool for $20 (no monthly fees). Check out Get Your Podcast Audited By Two Consultants Want some honest feedback on your show? Check out the Podcast Review Show where I and 30 years radio veteran Erik K Johnson go over your show, your website, and your goals to help you do more of what is working, and tweak anything that is not. Check it out at Ready To...
Currently, I think civilization has a serious problem. We are losing the ability to identify the truth. I'm not talking religion, or anything philosophical. I'm talking about doing research, looking at the evidence, and reporting what we find. Today I use the clip of then Donald Trump's "" press conference. That remark came at 01:07 but the 2-minute mark had him saying, "I'm not talking about the neo Nazi's or the white nationalists because they should be condemned totally." Because of hi"s "Very Fine People" clip, Joe Biden said he HAD to Please note I'm not either pro or against Trump. I liked his stance on China but saw MANY stupid things come out of his mouth. This is not about politics. It's about the media not focusing on delivering the truth, but more interesting in obtaining high ratings. Mentioned In This Episode - video - Book With a Podcast You Can't Be Cancelled While you can be removed off of platforms, as long as you have an RSS feed, people can subscribe/follow your show. It may take them a couple of extra steps to do it manually but you're not "off the air." In some cases being edited . People want to hear what the big deal was that you were censored. QUESTION OF THE MONTH If you have a co-host, I'd love to hear how you found/chose your co-host. Go to Be sure to mention your show, your website, and a little bit about your podcast. Ready to Start Your Podcast? The School of Podcasting is dedicated to teaching you the right way to launch, grow and produce your podcast so that you sound great. Membership includes step-by-step videos that will walk you through planning podcasts, launching them on Apple and other top directories, growing listenership and getting more listeners coming back for more episodes. The live coaching sessions are available via zoom -with a group coaching session every month during a call with other members who are also producing professional content. You have access to me via email as well as mentoring in our private Facebook community filled with brilliant minds such as yourself. See
Billie Eilish (super famous singer - especially to young teenage girls - records her music with her brother in their bedroom. She currently has 44 million followers on Spotify and 81 million followers on Instagram. She earned 25 million from Apple for the movie and her net worth is reportedly 53 million. Not too bad for two people who are having fun recording things in their bedroom. Pet Sitter Confidential Today I talk with Collin who along with his wife produce the podcast. They are truly impacting their audience, and due to their uber-niche topic, it is enabling them to get sponsors (Without 20,000 downloads per episode). SPONSOR: The School of Podcasting Podcasting can feel lonely at times and that's why I created the School of Podcasting - to give you a place where like-minded podcasters can support, guide, challenge & grow. You'll have access to all the step-by-step tutorials so that you know how to launch your podcast without wasting money on equipment or trying to guess what to do when it comes to planning. You get live group coaching, a network Facebook group, and priority email support so that you never go into this alone - learn from me and fellow podcasters. Go to TOPICS COVERED 04:57 Topics on Your Show? 05:33 Who is it For? 05:59 Their Niche Lead to A Sponsor 07:16 Pricing Your Ad Spot 08:27 The Lifetime Value of a Customer 14:32 Building Their Community 15:49 Sponsor Renewal 16:59 Patreon Thoughts 19:18 Did you think anyone would listen? 22:08 Who Are You? 23:24 How to Balance Life? 24:27 The importance Having a Buffer I loved that some of his best guests aren't people with huge followings. Also, when someone is filling up notepads with information from your show, you KNOW you are delivering value. Collin has multiple streams of income. He has the sponsorship along with a Patreon account. Find their show at h QUESTION OF THE MONTH If you have a co-host, I'd love to hear how you found/chose your co-host. Go to Be sure to mention your show, your website, and a little bit about your podcast.
So many times we identify ourselves not by our values or beliefs but by what we DO. I'm a cashier, or I work in accounts payable, the warehouse. That may be what you DO, but it may not be who you are. Podcasting allows you to reinvent who you are. To be your true self. Today we talk with Scot McCarthy of the Podcast. Scott joined the military when he was 18 and will be retiring soon, so he is using podcasting to reinvent himself and help establish himself in the space of leadership. I love that Scott knows it's not easy to start a business and that why I brought him on. You need to dig the well BEFORE your thirsty. Scott doesn't have a month-week plan, he has a five YEAR plan. He constantly researching to work smarter, to better understand his audience (through Facebook groups), and hiring people for those things he needs help with. He's not talking into a phone set on speaker and looking for money to fall from heaven. Can I Play Music in My Podcast? When it comes to legal questions in the entertainment space there is one (and only one name) and that is Gordon helps answer that question along with a new spin on that question. What if they perform the song live on my podcast (or for those older DJ's they did on your show) can I play that recording (it's a different recording than the one on the record). What about fair use? Keep in mind that fair use is the defense you use when you go to court. Check out Gordon's book, For more information check out Gordon at Do We Need Your Guests Backstory? Nobody asked about the Lone Ranger until after he saved the day. How Did You Find Your Co-Host? This is the question of the month (due by April 23rd, 2021). Record your answer (and be sure to mention your podcast and website) on how you found your co-host. Go to Ready To Start Your Podcast? The School of Podcasting is the best place for anyone looking to learn how to make podcasts. We have step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, and a private Facebook group for networking. Join today with our 30-day money-back guarantee! You'll be able to create your own show in no time at all. Our team of experts will teach you everything from A-Z so that you can get started on your first episode right away. And if it's not for you, we offer a 100% money-back guarantee on your membership fee! It doesn't matter what skill level or experience you have - we've got something for everyone here at The School of Podcasting! This is episode 769 of the School of Podcasting. You can subscribe/follow the show at or just text " sop " to 31996
It's the last week of the month which means, "Question of the Month" where YOU get to be on the show. This month's question is "What do you wish you had known when you started your podcast." SPONSOR: The School of Podcasting Learn to plan, launch, grow, and monetize your show. You'll sound great, organized, and create GREAT content. Take advantage of our step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, and private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. Because of My Podcast: Fred Castaneda The No Agenda streaming service found Fred's show the and added it to their schedule. What I Wish I Had Known 04:31 : Audacity At Zero Crossing 07:13 Kurt from : The Importance of Editors 08:21 James from - The Amount of Time 09:21 Kim Newlove from - Fitting Podcasting Into Life 11:18 Jill - It Takes a LOT of Time 12:06 Paul from : Episode Length 13:30 York from : The Evil of Comparison 15:11 Bill from : Stats Are Useless 17:32 Paul from :: Do Whatever You Want 18:47 Carrie from It is EASY to Get Guests 20:11 Craig from - Cohosts Makes Things Better 21:00 Arnie - More Networking 22:49 Kim from - Reaching Your Target Audience is Hard 23:20 Seth - Plugins For WordPress 25:30 Anthony from - Post vs Pages 26:16 27:14 Kris from the Show - How Podcasts Work 29:19 Joe - Writing Good Titles 30:22 Jeff - The Power of the Niche 32:10 Glenn from - Started Side Hustles 32:58 Dave (me) - Do ONE GOOD Podcast 34:29 Kim from Impostor Syndrome 35:25 Pashup from the - Be Yourself 36:13 : Finding Co-Hosts 37:53 Fixing a Mistake 43:17 Bloopers Mentioned In This Episode
Quick Notes: Apple Update: Apple is changing the wording in their app from "Subscribe" to "Follow" so stop telling your audience to subscribe (and if you do, mention that it's free) and instead tell them to follow you. The new version of the app will be out in a few weeks. I was listening to the podcast and heard where my friend Harry Durran from , and , hard obtained a sponsor for a show that had not been published. I had to hear how he did it. Question of the Month Deadline is This Friday What one thing do you wish you knew when you started your podcast? You can leave your answer at (be sure to mention your show and your website slowly). Win Rewards for Sharing the Show Speaking of followers/subscribers if you share the show you can win rewards when your friends subscribe/follow. See Full show notes at For More Information on Harry Durran Check out his "Done for you" podcast agency at Check out the Check out Twitter: Mentioned In This Episode Join the School of Podcasting and get access to step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, and an awesome private Facebook group for networking and brainstorming. See Sam Kinison's "." Harry Durran on Dave Jackson on Podcast Junkies: Question of the month: Share The Show Check out Fullcast Harry's "Done for you" podcast agency at Check out the Check out Like the show?
Who is Kristin Molenaar? Kristin is an entrepreneur-enthusiast who lives by the mantra "work less + make more". She enjoys helping entrepreneurs ditch vanity metrics for true, profitable connections. She's the CEO of , an agency that helps 2b2 entrepreneurs increase their visibility and credibility through profitable podcast guest features. Kristin Molenaar's Tips For Getting Booked on Podcasts There are almost 2 million podcasts. Where do you begin? Find someone in your niche, and use a tool like , , Google, or any podcast app and search for their interviews. This may lead you to podcasts that would also be interested in interviewing you. Kristin likes to pitch a show with the question, "Are you open to being pitched." Another strategy is looking for hashtags. When looking for a show to appear on, look further than the interview. Kristin looks for someone that can be a partner, and develop a long-term strategy. Sending a "look how great I am" email is not a good strategy. The True Power of Podcasting One of the biggest complaints I hear from people that have been a guest on podcasts is "it has never produced any results for me." They will say, "I've been invited to be a guest on people's podcast. I showed up and I talked about what I knew and it didn't go anywhere. I didn't get any traffic or business from it. It felt like a waste of my time." This is what Kristin says that people need to remember when they're becoming a podcast guest. The biggest benefit you're going to get out of podcast guesting is the relationship with the podcast host. I think that there are a lot of false hopes or false narratives around what I'm calling one-hit wonders. I think people think, "If I go after the biggest podcast that I possibly can, it's going to change my business. Here's the thing about being a podcast guest just like every other marketing strategy, just like every other networking strategy, it snowballs on itself. But you have to treat people, like people. Your job as a podcast guest is to show up and be in service to the objective of the podcast host. You need to show the podcast host, "Hey, I appreciate you allowing me to show up in your space. I am here to really provide as much benefit as I can to you. I want this to last beyond a recording." When people come in without that mentality. I think that the benefits are just severely limited. Being a podcast guest has tons and tons of benefits. But you're just missing out if you're not looking at this as an opportunity to meet really incredible people who are connected to other really incredible people and building a business that you can have fun together. That's what I love about podcasting and I wish more people came into it with that frame of mind because I think out of that we would get better pitches. We would get better research. We would get better conversations. We would get better results on the back end. Want More Tips On Getting Being a Guest and Booking Guests? See this episode Podcast Rewind: The Show Business Show I appeared on episode 2 of the with Billy and Simon for a marathon session on my book Need Help With Your Podcast? Join the School of Podcasting? Are you afraid of sounding bad (or stupid)? Worried about buying a bunch of stuff you don't need? Feeling overwhelmed swimming in a sea of jargon? Join the School of Podcasting and get access to: Step by step tutorials Live group coaching Private Facebook group filled with Join worry-free with my 30-day money-back Guarantee Go to
You might be thinking, "I'm not a business, what do I care about branding? Well, if you have one download, congratulations you are a brand. Today I talk with Dr. Andrea Wojnicki from the Talk About Talk Podcast about developing and implementing your personal brand (and how it can help grow your audience) Sponsor: The School of Podcasting Join the School of Podcasting and never worry about sounding bad, spending too much money on gear, and being all alone to be frustrated and angry. When you join the School of Podcasting you get: Step by step tutorials A Private Networking Group Live group coaching Priority email support Join today worry-free with my 30-day money-back guarantee. What is a Personal Brand? Your personal brand is your identity or your reputation. A definition that Dr. Andrea loves is, “Your personal brand is what others think and say about you when you're not in the room.” to get the workbook to walk you through the exercises discussed in today's episode. Step 1: What differentiates you? Step 2: Email 10 People Step 3: Where Your Brand Appears in Your Podcast Your podcast brand includes:● What people read (show notes). Your emails (and have ONE thing in your email signature). ● What people hear (your episodes, and the quality of audio). ● What people see (artwork). Come up with a color scheme (for example two colors) and two fonts that you use consistently and it will build your brand How This All Works: Identifying your strengths, and a personal positive message that has deep personal meaning to you, delivered in a unique way allows you to BE YOU. It will come naturally. Leaning on your strengths can help reduce burnout as you’re not doing things that don’t come naturally. It can clear up situations by identifying what you can and can’t do. When you identify the verbiage you want to use, and how you want to appear and deliver your message, you provide your audience with the tools to tell their friends. If their friends ask, “What podcasts are you listening to, they can easily explain what your show is about, who it’s for, and what the benefit it. They also can explain the motivation of the show. Connect with Dr. Andrea Wojnicki Podcast: Website:
In talking with new and seasoned podcasters I often hear questions that lead me to believe that people think they can "break" their podcast. Today I talk about a few questions I've heard and how 99% of the time you're not going to break your show. We also have a The Separate Track Challenge I have recommended for years. The ease of use and the ability to have separate tracks of you and your guest makes it my go-to choice for remote recordings. then later I got a which ( Along with the , and the ) allow you to record separate tracks. I can be on track one, and my guest can be on a separate track. The question then is: Does the separate track recorded locally on the guest's computer (and uploaded to ) sound that much better than the same track that has traveled over the internet? I also had my guest join me on Zoom as I know a lot of people are using Zoom to record interviews. Nuts and Bolts of Remote Recording The zoom recording is sampled at 32 kHz where Squadcast records at 48 khz. (This is how many times per second a picture is taken of your audio - the higher the number the better the sound). For me, the zoom recording while listenable sounds "fuzzy" compared to the recording (which makes sense as it has a higher sample rate. Also, Squdcast provides a WAV file that is better than the m4a (variable bit rate - another "no-no" for podcasting) from Zoom. If you're going to use the m4a from Zoom, be sure to edit it, and export as an mp3 with a contact bit rate. When I compared the original Squadcast file to the one I recorded (after coming across the Internet) and there again was a slight degradation of the file (not quite as crisp). Another Benefit of Squadcast In my test, as my guest was talking the Internet slightly broke up the audio is it made its way to me. If I had been using the recording on the Rodecaster this "Glitch" would be in the recording. With the original Squdcast fie, the glitch is not there (as that recording goes from their microphone to their hard drive, and then uploaded to Squadcast. Always Have a Backup Recording Of Your Interview The other advantage of using a tool like Squadcast is in the event the recording has an issue with the Rodecaster I have as a backup. If there is a glitch with Squadcast, I've got my hardware option as a backup. No matter what you are using to record your remote interviews, always have two systems recording. It's not a matter of if one will fail, but when. For me, Squadcast is the most reliable. School of Podcasting Moving to a New Platform Thinkific is charging me per student (and I'm not a fan of that) so I've looked at Kajabi, , and . Currently, I feel Kajabi is cool, but I'm not a fan of their limits to the number of products, and I'm learning more about as they allow you to sell digital products, membership sites, and courses. They also have an affiliate program. With if I use their affiliate program, I have to pay them 2%, and with Podia you pay your monthly fee, and that is it. No extra fees. Free Coaching Calls? I'm pondering trying something new. This would be to offer coaching calls at a deep discount that would then be used in episodes (which is why they are discounted). If you're interested, and I'll send you an application. Join the School of Podcasting Get access: Step by step tutorials Live group coaching Private brainstorming/podcasting group You don't have to worry about sounding bad, buying the wrong equipment and wasting your time. Go to Mentioned In This Episode 764 (free - no email address needed)
We've All Pushed Through Awkward Moments of Being Vulnerable Do you remember your first real kiss? I was with my first girlfriend. I was probably 14? I was scared to death. There was no internet, and for me, nobody to ask? So I went in for the kiss and kissed her in a very TV-friendly way. I stopped and said, "Let's try that again" and I figured out what to do. I tried everything I could to avoid falling in love with my first wife. I had told her over and over that I didn't want anything serious, but here we were a year later and a year later I was in love with her. Sitting in front of her house I said, "I need to tell you something," and then proceeded to tell her I liked her a lot. I backed it up, and then said, "I love you." These are scary things to do. You put yourself out there, and if you do it wrong you get some feedback, and you tweak yourself. Over the past two weeks, I've had meeting after meeting with members of my audience (one at a time). Some of them were current or past members of the School of Podcasting, and others I had never met (but they were listeners to my show). Today I talked about what I learned and why you should seriously consider it. If the Words "Focus Group" Makes You Uncomfortable, then Think of It as Coaching So many people who are experts in their field still used coaches. Hank Haney served as Tiger Woods' coach from 2004-2010. During that span, Woods won six of his 15 career major championships. The two were very close while they worked together, and Woods credits a ton of his success to Haney's teachings. Here are some more people who even after their enormous success still have coaches: Richard Branson Oprah Winfrey Tony Robbins Leonardo DiCaprio Serena Williams Metallica We all need people who give us feedback. That is how we improve. - Bill Gates Is This Just a Plug To Get Me To Hire You As A Coach? While I have the Podcast Rodeo Show which looks at your first impression and the Podcast Review Show that looks at your whole episode, website, and we have you fill out a form to discuss the goals of the show, if you want to know what content your audience wants and needs, the best place to go is your audience. I'm Still A Shy Guy at Heart People don't believe it, but underneath it all I'm fairly shy. So the thought of reaching out to my email list and asking them for their input made me a little nervous. This was especially true if someone was a current or previous member of the School of Podcasting. This is where you have to change your attitude. When I went to college for my first degree, I was a waiter. To be a good waiter, you listen to your customer and give them exactly what they ordered. As I got on zoom, I just said to myself it's like being a waiter again. I Should've Done This Years Ago I sent out an email with the subject line of, "I need your help...." and explained that I was going to rebuild the School of Podcasting from the ground up and I wanted to talk to them. Here are some of the things that I gained from doing this exercise: I have a visual of what my audience looks like. I got two people who will be future guests I got to see what was working in my show In regards to the , I'm glad to say that the things people want, are often already being delivered. I learned that I might want to reorganize some of the content in the . I heard some answer repeated. This is proof of concept that the tutorials I have are the right tutorials. I got a couple of great questions that I will be using for the "Question of the Month" in the future. There is nothing to be afraid of as these people are your listeners. If anything they might "fanboy" out a bit which is flattering. When You're Too Close to the Subject There was one comment that came up twice that in one way surprised me, and yet upon thinking about it, it makes perfect sense. When I asked if there were any lessons in the that they found confusing. Most people were so much confused,...
Are you looking to grow your audience? Get more engagement with your audience? Today I have Valerie the author of the book which is also available on Meet Valerie Geller Valerie Geller, president of Geller Media International, a broadcast consulting firm, trains broadcasters throughout the world by Creating Powerful Radio seminars, workshops, and one-on-one coaching for news, talk, information, and personality programming for radio and television. She's worked with top stations and personalities throughout the world at more than 500 stations in 27 countries. You can find Valerie's Books on her , as well as and Find her on twitter at and @vgeller on the clubhouse app (iOs only). Thre Simple Rules To Make Your Podcast Successful Tell the Truth Make it Matter Never Be Boring Questions to Help You Edit Why should you listen to this? Why would someone want to hear this? The Best Podcasts: Inform Entertain Inspire Persuade Connect The best conversations come from listening. When doing an interview listen and make the interview more of a conversation. Making Engaging Content When you are telling the truth and being transparent, you can share your opinion on a topic and ask your audience to share theirs. By asking a specific question it's easier than "send me some feedback." When delivering content you should be doing one of the following: Inform Entertain Inspire Persuade Connect Place Your Listener in the Movie Try to work visual words into your podcast. Help trigger the theater of the mind. There is a framework called the that is used by many storytellers it is: Once upon a time there was ___. Every day, ___. One day ___. Because of that, ___. Because of that, ___. (and so on) Until finally ___. And every day after that ___. For more on storytelling check out . Growing Your Podcast When you are on other platforms, be amazing and leave them wanting more. So many people go to other platforms (like Clubhouse) and tell them to come to the podcast. If you bring amazing content to the conversation those same people will ask you where to find more of you. It all starts with being Amazing. Ready To Start You Podcast If you're worried about sounding stupid, getting lost in technology, spending too much money, the School of Podcasting can help you avoid all that with: Step by step tutorials A private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcast minds willing to help Live group coaching sessions Direct access to me via email (and I often will respond with a video) Join worry-free with a 30-day Money-back Guarantee Go to and pick the plan the works best for you. Mentioned In This Episode A Communicator's Guide to the Internet Age—News, Talk, Information & Personality for Broadcasting, Podcasting, Internet, Radio The Prep, Performance & Post Production Planning Kenn Adams Story Spine Synergy Theater on See Valerie's Video from the Join the
Your brand is how your show is perceived. Perception is reality. So today I have tips on making your episode one that gets your audience coming back. I also share three tools that you can use to boost your podcast brand. Don't Leave Your Audience Hungry Can you imagine if a new restaurant opened in your neighborhood and was serving your favorite food? You get all dressed up and bring a date and go to the new place looking forward to eating some of your favorite food. You show up and the menu just mentions what will be available next week. The problem is you are there NOW and you're hungry. So often I see a first episode delivers nothing more than what amounts to be a table of contents for future episodes. I've read a lot of books but I've never highlighted the table of contents. Tidy Cal $20 Lifetime Deal Tidy Cal is a brand new scheduling tool that makes it easy to book guests or clients (your appointments can be free or you can charge). Telbee is Speakpipe on Steriods I've used Speakpipe for years, but the makers of Telbee listened to the wants of speakpipe users and developed a new, morse customizable platform. One thing that can make your podcast better is to understand your audience. Telbee makes it easy to get feedback, and create a widget that looks great. You can even direct people to a website after they leave a message. Channels are the feature that I could use when I do my "question of the month" episodes. I could have a channel where all the responses are tied and organized to that one channel. Less Annoying CRM I've been looking for a place to organize my information where my coaching clients, my audio editing clients, my guests, or hosts where I have been on their show. I can see my calendar, I see all the communication, set reminders, set up pipelines, and it's only $15/month. It truly lives up to its name. "Less Annoying CRM"
Life is going to kick you in the teeth from time to time (see 2020). Today we talk about your attitude (the only thing you have control over) and we interview Shane Whaley of the Tourpreneur podcast. Shane shares how many people in the travel space just folded up everything just going out of business. This is not the approach Shane has taken, and he not only didn't shut down in 2020, but added more sponsors to his show. Your Attitude The Longer I live, the more I realize the impact of attitude on life. Attitude, to me, is more important than facts. It is more important than the past, the education, the money, than circumstances, than failure, than successes, than what other people think or say or do. It is more important than appearance, giftedness or skill. It will make or break a company... a church... a home. The remarkable thing is we have a choice every day regarding the attitude we will embrace for that day. We cannot change our past... we cannot change the fact that people will act in a certain way. We cannot change the inevitable. The only thing we can do is play on the one string we have, and that is our attitude. I am convinced that life is 10% what happens to me and 90% of how I react to it. And so it is with you... we are in charge of our Attitudes.” ― Charles R. Swindoll Podcast Rewind I appeared on the I also appear on the . If you'd like me to appear on your show, you can contact me . Shane Whaley Tourpreneur Podcast Interview 04:55 Shane Whaley Tourpreneur.com 07:29 Shane Decided to Start Touorpreneur 10:48 The "Glenn the Geek" Strategy with Events 15:26 Take Advantage of the Extra Time COVID Created 17:50 Choosing Sponsors 19:34 Join the School of Podcasting 20:32 Going for the Win, Win, Win 22:44 Starting a Daily Email 24:37 Dealing with being a "Thought Leader" 26:58 Advice on Interviews 28:55 Dealing with a Boring Guest 30:37 Shane's hobby Podcast Spybrary 32:34 How Long Did it Take to Monetize 33:31 Getting Proof of Concept 35:09 Why he Stayed Niche 36:10 Don't Undersell Yourself 37:19 How He Came Up With Prices 38:47 Tips on Running a Community 41:00 Policing Your Group 42:28 Shane's First Podcast 44:34 Shane the Shock jock 45:43 Shiny Object Syndrome 47:30 What HASN'T Worked? 49:26 Final Advice for the "Wanna Be" podcaster Connect with Shane Whaley Ready To Start Your Podcast? If you're worried about sounding bad, planning your podcast, buying the wrong equipment, and being lost in a sea of tech, DON'T. Join the school of podcasting and get access to: A private Facebook Group for Networking Step by Step Tutorials Live Group Coaching Priority Access to Dave. Join today at
FOMO In Action I was at Social Media Marketing World in 2018 enjoying a networking event on an aircraft carrier in San Diego California. I was contacted by Michael Oneil as he and a few friends were going to go to a club called Prohibition and wanted to know if I would want to attend. Did I say it was a club? Prohibition is a speakeasy. I have never been to a speakeasy. The door that you go through shows "LAW OFFICE Eddie Onare, ESQ." When we arrived there was an actual velvet rope. We had to wait. It myself, , , and . The anticipation was mounting. How long will I have to wait? Are we going to get in at all? Finally, the bouncer unclipped the rope and let us in. I remember walking through a door and going downstairs. It was getting darker and darker as we went on. When I finally get to the bottom and look around, I see a bar in front of me. I see a bench to the left of me. I see a few chairs to the right of me. It is dimly lit, with red lights in the ceiling. I think to myself. "Someone turned their basement into a bar." Don't get me wrong, it was cool. Michael and I ended up playing and singing that night with the saxophone player from Pink Floyd. But I can't underestimate the buzz and anticipation by the scarcity. This is a tactic called Fear of Missing Out (FOMO for short), and today we are going to talk about Clubhouse. This is an app (currently only available for iOs) and one of the things that is fueling the buzz about this app is their use of FOMO. Clubhouse: Drop-in audio chat Don't get me wrong, this app is cool. However, it's zoom without video and better moderation. Why is it so popular? You have to be invited in (OOOOOH!). It is only on iOs (sorry android people) so here again, only certain people can get in, and for those on the outside when you hear others talking about it, you have fear of missing out. Does it work? I'm doing an episode about it knowing that 75% of my audience can't use it. What Clubhouse is Good For Why I like clubhouse is I'm finding my target audience, and more importantly, my target audience who doesn't know me yet. Then I can LISTEN, and take notes of what is being discussed and take notes as these might be future episodes. I have found a few people I want to connect with due to the details in their profiles, and the value they brought if they actually spoke. Mistakes in Clubhouse If you don't have an answer to a question and someone asks you, just say, "That's a good question that I don't have an answer to." If you don't, often the answer you spew is not helpful and makes you look like an idiot in love with their own voice. Not filling out your profile with your website, your interests, and keywords to help you get found. Ask ing a question that is three seconds long followed by self-promotion that is three minutes long. Most of the true networking happens outside of the app so be sure to check your Twitter and Instagram for DMs. I'm on Android - I Feel Left Out If you look at what clubhouse is at its core is its a group of people (in rooms) that are joining hoping to talk about their favorite subject, meet people, and learn new insights. So do it on zoom. Reach out to other podcasts like yours and pick a date to all get together on Zoom. Assign a moderator, and promote for weeks in advance. Everyone and their brother knows how to connect to zoom. The goal here is not to get podcast ready quality (cause the quality on Clubhouse is "ok"), but more the connection. There are also other tools like , There are tools like Mastodon where you can setup your own social media network. There will be Copycats - There Always Is The issue with Android (from what I understand) is while all the different phones are running Android operating systems, there is enough differences between phone manufacturers to create headaches for app developers. Android Apps Like Clubhouse ( maybe? it...
Would you like 300,000 downloads per episode? Are you willing to work for three weeks to get media exposure in 2% of the outlets you contact? Are you willing to work for months on your first episodes and ask others to give you HONEST feedback on your show? Are you willing to ask questions that might potentially show you that your show is boring? Jack has, and he has created a great show. Today on episode 758 of the School of Podcasting I have the honor of looking into how Jack has grown his podcast. Jack was looking for a podcast about hackers/hacking and couldn't find any (especially in a narrative format). The solution? Create the podcast YOU want to hear and see if anyone else would be interested in listening to your podcast. Jack Rhysider's Favorite Marketing Books - Seth Godin -Gabriel Wineberg - Pat Flynn Dave added: Pat Flynn Connect with Jack Podcast Blog Jack's Dog Podcast Network Final Week Before Launch The is launching a new show on their network called "" and today we talk with James Jacobson about the final preparations. You can earn money sharing stories that include dogs. TIMELINE 00:03:34 How Many Downloads Does Jack Get 00:04:44 Jack's Launch 00:07:04 Jack Sent Out a Survey 00:08:03 What Part is Boring? 00:08:37 Why Did You Use a Survey? 00:10:01 Negative Feedback 00:10:30 Do have any kind of focus group? 00:10:59 How do you find these stories? 00:12:58 Your Podcast On Auto Pilot 00:15:03 How did your early listeners find you? 00:16:36 10,000 Stickers in a day 00:17:30 Reaching Out to the Media 00:20:10 How long did this strategy take? 00:21:33 How Long Had You Been Blogging? 00:22:34 Secret Weapon: Your Attitude 00:23:06 Marketing Strategies 00:23:57 Early Monetization 00:25:32 How Long Did it Take to Go Full Time 00:26:16 How Did You Grow Your Numbers 00:26:54 Don't Gloss Over Your Ask 00:27:16 How Did You Know It Was Time to Start a Patreon? 00:27:56 Deep Dive Into Patreon 00:32:20 Using Castbox as a Benchmark 00:34:29 The Curiosity Headline Approach 00:37:52 He Has Good Descriptions 00:40:03 A Deep Dive Into The Apple Charts 00:43:20 Favorite Marketing Books 00:45:49 Is there any Downside to a large audience? 00:48:57 Jack Got Tracked 00:50:53 Meeting Fans With Divulging Your Identity 00:51:51 Advice For Wanna Be Podcasters 00:56:19 Dog Podcast Network 01:02:02 Please Share The Show Mentioned In This Episode - See how much people are making on Podcas Podcast (free)
If Ron Howard Uses Focus Groups... Ron Howard has been in the entertainment industry since he was a little boy on the Andy Griffith Show, Later he was on Happy Days and since then has been making phenomenal movies. He's been nominated for 114 awards and won 39 times for a percentage of 34%, In 2002 he won with A Beautiful Mind for Best Picture and Best Director. One might say, "Not too shabby." Rob was on the true stories show on Satelite radio talking about always screens his movies and checks in with the audience to see how the content is connecting with his audience. In the interview, he said, "We did our first previews, and I was so defensive about it and against it, and I wound up learning so many important truths about our story, that to this day, even the Beatles documentary, even though I have Final Cut, I screened the movies and I know how to ask the questions and I ask people to fill out questionnaires. I find it very, very useful. It's difficult but I always think that it's like the playwright getting to see the show out of town before you take it to Broadway. I don't think it's really any different than that. I have the confidence of having done it a lot, and the power of Final Cut, so that this is about me understanding how the movie works. It's comforting on the one hand, but I think it's really important to understand how the movie is communicating with an audience. That's what entertainment is: Is something is communicated to you and do you enjoy it? Why Podcasters Skip The Focus Group If this is your first podcast, you probably spent much more time on their episodes than they originally planned, so the last thing you want to hear is that you need to go back and do some work. While understandable, if the goal is to grow your podcast, constructive feedback is something that is essential to growing your podcast. Most of us are familiar with the story of Thomas Edison doing 1000 attempts at the light bulb that didn't work. When asked about it these "failures" Edison replied, "I didn’t fail 1,000 times. The light bulb was an invention with 1,000 steps." In some cases, people see their episode as art. If that is you, then skip this episode. Your goal is to not grow your audience but to just put the podcast out there. The podcast is not for your audience. It's for you. Just Like Your Podcast, Creating Your Survey Starts With Why Today you will hear from Glenn the Geek who runs the Horse Radio Network. His primary income is sponsorship and a membership site. We will hear from Scott Johnson from the What Was That Like? podcast that has been steadily growing since it launched. Scott was looking for feedback on his content. The Process of Creating a Survey Identify why you're doing your survey (and what you're trying to learn) Choose your questions Deliver your survey Collect your feedback Organize your data and look for trends Implement changes based on feedback. Follow up to ensure you've achieved your goal. Potential Questions Demographics: This is where you ask age, sex, income. Where they hang out: Where else do they get information like yours? What other podcasts, forums, magazines, etc do they consume? By knowing where your audience is you can go to where they are and make friends. Content Questions: How long do they listen? Favorite parts of the show? Parts they wish would be different? Audio quality? The top thing they've gained from listening? Advertising Questions: Have you purchased any products from sponsors on this show? Who do you think would be a good sponsor? Do you skip the ads? What was the last thing you purchased? If You're Just Launching Take the episode you feel is ready for the public and get specific. As about the audio quality, and how far people listened. If they say they listened to the whole thing, give them a quiz to prove it. If they didn't listen far found out why. There is no sense going any further until you get your content resonating with your audience. Special Thanks to:...
It's the first episode of the years and in the same that I have the last episode of the year look at why people listen, today we talk about how to start. Ten Years ago I did an episode called "27 steps to launch a podcast and today I am going to update it. As you might imagine things have changed in 10 years. If you already have a podcast I have some items for you. Over the years there have been some ingredients of podcasting that we know add value, but like any recipe, if you use an ingredient in the wrong way you can ruin the final product. Keep it Real I hear the phrase, "Keep it real." This should stay authentic. You should be talking from your heart and your beliefs. Don't say what people want to hear because it's popular, if your opinion differs let's hear it. Let's also hear why you believe those thoughts. We just might learn something. How this phrase is abused is when "keeping it real" means I'm not going to edit my podcast at all. There are editors who work in movies, television, books, magazines, and newspapers. However, your podcast is perfect with no room for improvement. There is always room for improvement. I read on Facebook where someone took 26 minutes to answer ONE question. The final version of the podcast had that answer trimmed to four minutes. Fishing is Boring I haven't fished in 20 years. If you're into fishing check out the show with Clay Groves. For me, half the fun was getting to play with a boat and get out on a lake. In some cases, if the boat had a motor it was even more fun. Then you bait your hook, throw your line in and wait. Then you wait some more. This part of fishing is really boring. Every time I hear someone start off an interview with "Tell me a little bit about yourself," the person is fishing. They are listening just like watching their bobber float on the lake, looking for a nibble. Reeling in a Fish is Exciting I don't watch fishing on TV, but if I'm clicking through the channels and a fishing show is on, they don't show two people in a boat watching their bobber. They show someone standing up with excitement as they have caught a great fish and they are bringing it into the boat. When you have a guest and you find something that YOU KNOW is going to RESONATE with your audience that's exciting and in the same the fisherman does everything they can to get the fish into the boat, you do everything you can to get that content into your recording. Stories are Great Half the time we ask, "tell me a little bit about yourself" we are fishing for a story. Somehow we are lead to believe that knowing someone's back story is going to help us. If I started my podcast with "Today we are going to interview Gern Blanston who has a proven strategy of growing your audience by 200%, but first, let's find out what his parents did for a living..." you would be yelling at your device to get to the good stuff. Stories are great when someone shares a story that we can learn from, or it makes you laugh, cry, think, groan, or educates us or entertains us. When I was sixteen years one night I was trying to look cool in front of a girl and climbed a sign at the front of the mall that showed the names of the movies in its three theaters. We figured out that we could change the title "Desperately Seeking Susan" to Desperately Sucking Suzan. As I was a hard rock fan, I was not a fan of Madonna and thought this would be hilarious. It took some effort to get up there, and once up there changing letters was not as easy as it looked. In the end, the sign read Desperately Seeting Susan. Is this real? Yes. Is it a story? Yes. Does it help you with your podcast? No. Just because something is real and it's a story, doesn't mean it's good. It might be really boring. The story of Glenn the Geek from the Horse Radio Network asking to get a booth at the largest Horsing Event was a great story as it has helped many people grow their podcast. Fishing Takes Patience - And We Live in a Microwave Society...
Every year I ask my audience what their favorite podcast is and why it is their favorite. They can also plug their website. This exercise then helps us understand why people tune in, as well as hear about some great podcasts. In general, I say good content will make us: Laugh Cry Think Groan Educate Entertain So pay attention and here how most of these shows are not just doing one of those, but multiple emotions and strategies. Timeline 01:26 Dave love 03:16 from the loves the Show (Steve was just on Episode 752 talking about his Podcast Editor Academy) 05:59 Joe Saul Sehy from loves the 09:10 Shane from the Podcast loves the show 11:03 Anthony from the loves the 13:32 - 16:10 Brandon from Podcast - 17:18 Craig from loves 20:02 Glen from loves the 21:00 CG from the Rocketry Show also loves and with Roman Mars 23:49 Harris from love 25:20 Gary from Loves the 26:24 Kevin from loves 27:27 Patrick from the podcast loves 28:26 Letitia from loves 29:27 Geoge loves 30:17 Effie Parks from loves the 32:51 Louis loves 33:57 Scott from loves 35:52 Scott from podcast loves the podcast. 37:31 Scott from loves 40:11 Sufeah loves the 41:04 Greg from loves 42:53 Kim from loves 44:30 Zita from loves the Homework: Pretend Your A Listener 46:43 In some cases I had to go looking for these podcasts and in some of those cases it wasn't easy. My advice for you is to go to Google and search for the name of your show "podcast." In many cases people sign up and their media host (because they don't know your website) will use the built in website that comes with their hosting. Look for the "website" field and make sure it points at your website. If you don't have a website (one of these shows had a .podwits address - classy) the go buy a domain at www.coolerwebsites.com and point it the site you are using (and preserve your first impression). Dog Podcast Network Update 48:55 I'm following the launch of the podcast network. In the past they have solicited stories for their contest, hired a producer. In this segment, we hear their trailer and learn about their press release. Check them out at End of Show 52:36 Let Me Help You 53:58 Bloopers
We know that when you give value, your audience can feel like they "owe you" and when you give them the opportunity they will return the favor. Today we hear about a covert operation pulled off to deliver a box of presents to Glenn the Geek Hebert of the Horse Radio Network as he was recovering from not one but TWO surgeries. The story is amazing. We also have a tool to reward your superfans for sharing your show with their friends. We also catch up with the Dog Podcast Network. Glenn the Geek's Audience Comes to the Rescue Glenn had cancer removed from his colon (and needs to kemo - get your colonoscopy), and ended up getting an infection in his body that got very, very, serious. He ended up having his gallbladder removed and was down for the count (losing thirty pounds in four weeks). 01:32 Gleen The Geek Got Really Sick 04:05 Glenn's Supporters Came to the Rescue 06:27 How They Organized The Surprise 07:51 Let People Return the Favor 09:33 Have a Backup Plan 14:21 You Audience Feels Like They Know You Another Example of Building and Audience Taking Three Years 15:37 Erik Johnson of bumblecast.fm shares on the "" podcast how his already famous client with a social following still took three years to build their audience. SPONSOR: School of Podcasting 16:45 Join today and be worry-free. Learn to sound great, create great content, and join the free mastermind with other brilliant podcasters as you go through the step by step tutorials, and get your questions answered at the Live Group Coaching calls. Go to If you just have a few questions, . Build Your Own Ambassador Program With Refer.fm 17:40 Today we talk with Amira Valliani of Glow the makers of a tool where you get to pick your own rewards, and you get a landing page where people can get their own unique link and refer.fm tracks the number of people they refer to your podcast. You get notified with the name and email person of the “super fan” who wants to refer their friends (they are stored in a spreadsheet making it easy to import into your system) and when they reach a goal you are notified. You can see my page for the School of Podcasting at Dog Podcast Network Update: A Producer has been hired James Jacobson has hired a producer to help put his ideas into action as he is still collecting dog stories at and he hopes to have a great trailer next week to start promoting his flagship show launching in January. Keep in mind that you can always change your trailer (description, artwork, and more) any time you want with no consequences. Mentioned In This Episode Earn points referring the School of Podcasting
When I searched for the word "Random" in a podcast directory, there were over 50 shows, with many of them talking about "whatever." Today I'm going to share why I think this is a bad idea and how being focused has help Carey Green get 8000+ downloads per episode for his Morning Mindset Daily Christian Devotional podcast. How I've Seen Random Fail As a teacher for decades, I can say I've seen how humans are not fans of change. They like things to stay the same and be predictable. As a musician, I saw establishments that had comedy on Monday, Metal on Tuesday, Country on Wednesday.... in trying to have something for everyone, they alienated everyone as you never know what night it was. I had a dog for 14 years, and for many years all of my friends made up their own nickname. The dog heard random name after random name. Consequently, he wouldn't come when you called him as he had not connected with his actual name. The Power of the Niche On the Podcast Review Show (where you can get TWO consultants' insights for the price of one), Jason Sacco from the show shared how this podcast is attracting people who have this disease. This brings HUGE relief as many people have nobody to talk to who truly understands what it's like to have this pain-causing disease. Jaspon has a focused niche, but that doesn't stamp out all creativity. He has been trying some live roundtables and hopes to continue to grow his audience as he moves forward. While Jason would like to monetize his show, currently building the community and the lack of feeling alone is quite a bonus already. He has also been getting some press for his show. Carey Green Gets to 8600 Downloads Per Episode Carey Green hosts . When I hear about people with large amounts of downloads in just a few years (Carey is just under three years), I typically wonder if they had a large social following, email list, or built-in audience. In Carey's case, he had none of those. Here are some key points we covered in our interview: 20:10 Carey Green Getting 8600 Per Episode 21:43 Why Carey Started His Show 23:17 Daily Podcast Tips 24:34 Dealing With Haters 25:36 Polarizing People 25:59 Feedback From the Audience 26:58 Giving Your Audience What They Want 27:43 What Makes His Show Different 28:21 Starting a Premium Podcast 29:56 How is He Marketing His Show? 31:20 A Better Call To Action 32:05 Your Back Episodes in Stats 32:33 The One Different Thing 33:11 Teach Your Audience Your Slogan 35:43 Promoting the Show is Key 37:31 Carey Starts a Non-Profit 40:00 The Importance of Integrity What About Jordan Harbinger? Isn't His Show Filled With Random Guests? 40:54 If you listen to Jordan Harbinger's show opening, it sounds like he's just interviewing random interesting people. He mentions, "astronauts and entrepreneurs, spies in psychologists," which sounds like many random people. However, all those people are used to cover the topic of becoming a better critical thinker. You Can Have Predictable Randomness Both Carey and Jordan do something different on Friday. While this is a different format than other episodes, by doing it in a consistent, predictable fashion, the audience can adapt. Jordan has mentioned that his "Feedback Friday" episodes are top-rated, and Carey's longer Prayer episodes were built on his audience's requests. Getting Your Audience Subscribing and Returning For More When you deliver a message that the audience can identify with and say, oh, wow, that person really gets me, or I can use this information to transform myself and achieve that success. They're going to connect with you, and when they hear the call of a new episode, unlike my lovable little shi-Tzu Dudley, they are going to come running back to subscribe for more. The Launch of the Dog Podcast Network 12:15 I will be interviewing James Jacobson (a consulting client of mine) who is launching the Dog Podcast Network. Currently, James is running the 101 Dog...
Today we talk with Mark and Steve from the . While there are other resources that dive deep into audio, this website covers audio editing and goes deep into the "growing your editing business" side. If you're wondering how you get clients? They have sales scripts and insights from over 6000 editors. You don't have to know everything there is to know about audio to be an editor, and this website can help you start and grow a podcast editing service. My Favorite Podcast Is - DEADLINE December 14th, 2020 02:30 Every year the last episode of the year is made up of listeners (like you) sharing what their favorite podcast is and why (and be sure to mention your podcast as well). The deadline is December 14th, 2020 (next Monday) as it takes me some time to edit them all together. Go to Podcast Editor Academy Founders Steve Stewart and Mark Deal Mark Deal has been helping businesses (especially lawyers) out of Atlanta and is the head of Podcast Atlanta (a HUGE group of podcasters). Steve Stewart started a financial podcast and started editing his friend's podcasts. This lead to another friend, and another friend which lead to Steve putting his podcast on pause and doing editing full time. He wanted a Facebook group that only talked about post-production so he created one (see ). Please note that the power of this group is it is clearly defined what they will (and more importantly will not ) talk about in the group. This makes it stand out from other groups, and it is growing at a rapid rate. started with a conference of editors and continues to grow with special speakers, presentations, and roundtables. When I logged in, I was impressed with the smooth transition of content and resources. If your not sure if you should join the Podcast Editor Academy or Podcast Engineering School. as there is a HUGE discount for the Podcast Engineering School that will pay for the price of the Academy. So you could start with the Academy, and then if needed take a deep dive into audio using the discount for the Engineering School (along with many other discounts). If you want to start small, join the Facebook group and see what the discussions are like, and then joined the Academy when you're ready and keep up to date by signing up for their newsletter. Audio Editing Survey I'm thinking of launching my own editing service (or maybe include it as part of a package). As I always talk about giving your audience what they want, I need to know what you want when it comes to an audio editor (so I can decide if I want to pursue this or not). There is a chance to win a $25 Amazon gift card. Go to YouTube Video: Set it and Regret it? If you're using a "show player" from your media host, did you know you're not using blog posts for episodes you are missing a TON of Google Juice and SEO? Podpage Updates I interviewed Breden from Podpage back on and since then there have been some new features added: Added a "host section" that sows bios of host(s) Added a guest(s) feature so you can see all the guests who have been on the show Added a store to sell products from different resources Added episode signature where you can add text/images/links that appear at the end of every episode. Update it in one place and it updates your website everywhere. Want to see more tutorials on Podpage? Join my free class at Start Podcasting Join the School of Podcasting and get access to step by step tutorials, a mastermind of brilliant podcasting minds, live group coaching, and priority email access to me. Go to Podcast Mentorship Program Looking to get started quickly check out with full access to the School of Podcasting with additional one on one consulting. see Got Podcast Questions? and get your questions answered quickly, and get going in the right direction.
Is Your Podcast Future Proof? I was asked by one of my editing clients to go back and edit some of their episodes and remove discussions that were about specific events at a specific time. In listening to their episodes there are a couple of strategies you can do to make your show future-proof. Always Use the Year The deadline for the question of the month is December 14th, 2020. By adding the year into the discussion, a listener knows that the episode has passed. But what about outdated information? If the episode consists of nothing but information that is outdated you can always delete that episode form your host and within 24 hours it will be removed from most apps. When I watch a movie and one of the characters says, "Why didn't you page me?" I can figure out that the movie is from the 1980's. I don't hold the movie studio responsible for outdated references. (Just my opinion). As always if you are delivering value to your audience, then keep it up and available. Use Timeless Landing Pages For example, I could say, "I'll have a link to the question of the month in today's episode at schoolofpodcasting.com/XXX, or just go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question. Every month when I do a question of the month I always have the same landing page. This way if someone goes to answer an older question that is outdated, while they are too late to answer the question from two months ago, they are in the right place to answer the current question. Another example of this is from . Jordan gets mountains of downloads and makes a living with ads on his podcast. Jordan often has pages on the manufacturer's site such as hostgator.com/jordan but he also mentions that you can find more by going to jordanharbinger.com and clicking on the deals page. Here again, if there was a time-sensitive deal in place for the sponsor it may be too late, but you are now in the right place to find a deal from another sponsor that will help Jordan. If you're doing webinars you can say something like, "My webinar on the perfect gear is at schoolofpodcasting.com/perfectgear or just see the schedule for all of your webinars at schoolofpodcasting.com/webinars (where you would use your website - not mine.... :) I realize you might say, "But I only have the one webinar. While this is true TODAY, in the future you might be doing one a week." When Glenn Hebert of the Horse Radio Network started it was a network with one show, but Glenn knew there would be more so he founded the Horse Radio Network. Reinforce Your Band By using your website you reinforce your brand, and you keep control of your content. For example, I have a Patreon account that I promote on the Ask the Podcast Coach where you can be an Awesome Supporter. Do I tell people to go to ? No. Why? Because what if something better comes along? Then I have a bunch of podcasts with mentions of a website I don't use. An example of this is web hosting. Over the years I've used Hostgator, Siteground, and Cooler Websites. Did I promote that company by mentioning their website? No, I told people to go to , and in the early days of my show that link went to Hostgator, and for years it went to Siteground, and then Cooler Websites. I might direct that at Podpage in the future. While this might confuse someone expecting a Hostgator link, but in the end, if the person is looking for hosting and you direct them to a hosting page, I feel (again an opinion) they should trust you, and if they have questions they can always contact you. Tools To Make Redirects If you are using WordPress, you can use the There is a free version and the premium version starts at $49/year. It's been downloaded over 2.5 million times. is a very similar plugin for about the same price ($49/year). If you're using , redirects are one of the many features. (Check out the free "" course ) While some people use bit.ly, I prefer . Tools To Help Follow Your Money In the past I used Freshbooks, but they charged their pricing...
Today we talk about the 1.7 billion dollar mistake that was Quibi and how we can learn from their mistake. We also take a look at the power of follow up questions, and the best place to buy gear. Table of Contents 01:22 Your Favorite Podcast - 02:56 Now That's A Good Question: Howard Stern and Wolfgang Van Halen 06:35 07:33 Lessons From Quibi 13:24 They Blew Their Launch 16:12 Big Name Celebrities 19:02 Make It Easy To Share Your Content 21:05 It's Not the Tech 23:28 Clueless About the Competition 29:49 Who is the Audience? 33:29 The Best Place to Buy Gear: 36:07 Your Audience Awaits Exercise How to Avoid the 1.7 Billion Dollar Mistake that Was Quibi Quibi is an over-the-top American short-form streaming platform that generates content for viewing on mobile devices. It was founded in Los Angeles in August 2018 as NewTV by Jeffrey Katzenberg (chairman of Walt Disney Studios from 1984 to 1994) and is led by Meg Whitman ( She is a board member of Procter & Gamble and Dropbox. Whitman was previously president and CEO of Hewlett Packard Enterprise), its CEO. In 2019 that Quibi had secured 100 million dollars in advertising before the service had even launched. On February 2, 2020, they spent $5.6 million for 30 seconds on an ad in the Super Bowl that was seen by a reported 99.9 million viewers. That is $18 per person if you round up. This for a service where subscribers can get the service for $5 per month with ads, or $8 per month without them. That $5.6 million was a drop in the bucket. The commercial was really stupid and didn't really answer or explain what the heck it was. You just knew it was less than 10 minutes. They explained what is was, but not so much why it was or how you would benefit. It raised $1.75 billion from investors. It had a variety of shows featuring originals with Jennifer Lopez, Chrissy Teigen, Chance the Rapper, Liam Hemsworth, Sophie Turner, Lena Waithe, Nicole Richie, Reese Witherspoon. Quibi offered a 90-day free trial to those who sign up on its website before April 6. Overall, it plans to release 175 original shows and 8,500 episodes in the first year. It launched on April 6, 2020. It is set to shut down "on or about" December 1, 2020. December 1 is 239 days. That is $7,322,175.73 a day. Here is my thoughts on why this was such an epic fail. They Blew Their Launch When you spend $5.6 million dollars on a Super Bowl ad, they should have an idea what you do and what is in it for them. In the event, the ad inspired people to check out the service (it didn't), you should be able to go check it out and not have to wait four months. Yes, you can build buzz, but for me, I never heard from quibi again. Putting All Their Faith in Celebrities Here are some of the names that appear on shows: Jennifer Lopez, Kristen Bell, Nick Jonas, Tracy Morgan, Aaron Rodgers, Yara Shahidi, Gabriel Iglesias, Anthony Davis, Kevin Hart and Karlie Kloss. Cardi B, Chance the Rapper, Dapper Dan, Jay Leno, and Wolfgang Puck (and that's just some). The people involved had experience Phil Abraham has directed the Sopranos, Madmen, Daredevil, Ozark. No Compelling Content Yet, there was no breakout show that inspired the people who had found Quibi to tell a friend about Quibi. Nobody was compelled to tell a friend. They did recaps of the previous days news or sports updates. WOW what revolutionary content! They Made it Hard To Share According to Media Analyst Josh Consine there was no sharing capability (no screenshots) which limited your ability to go viral. When it first launched you could only watch it on your phone. There were no apps, not Fire TV, Chromecast. They made it "hard" to consume. They took away choices from the consumer. They Put Their Faith in the Tech One thing that set them apart was a feature called Turnstyle. This meant that if you rotate the phone horizontal to verticle, you would get a different camera angle. Neat? Sure. Something so cool I had to tell my friends? Apparently not as...
The show is filled with "Because of My Podcast" stories. We also have a great example of a good question, and a reminder that Apple is going on Holiday soon (very important if you wanted a podcast ready to go in January 20201). SPONSOR: SCHOOL OF PODCASTING Ready to start your podcast? Got a podcast and you need to grow it? Join the School of podcasting and get instant access to: Step by step tutorials Live group coaching Access to a private (spam-free) Facebook Group filled with other brilliant podcasting minds Premium access to Dave. Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee. Go to Because of My Podcast, I Got a Book Published, that Inspired a Podcast I was contacted by a publisher to write the book and it took a lot of work, but it's getting very good reviews. This lead David Hooper (author of the book , and host of and ) along with of the () got together to create a series called Podcast Profits which promotes my book. The podcast is called Podcast Profits: Dave called me to let me know what he was planning, and to make sure it was OK to have "Because of My Podcast" stories. As they were talking about me, I was fine with that. I was really surprised that they didn't mention/plug their podcasts or their company until the last episode (and it was very minimal). Because of My Podcast, Leslie Eiler Thompson Got to Participate in the Iditarod Dog Race in Alaska 05:39 Leslie is a in Nashville, and she shares the story of not only being able to interview one of the top champions in Sled Dog Racing, but she eventually ended up as part of his team and participated in the race. Rick Coste Interview: Audio Drama Podcast Leads to Bigger Things Because of His Podcast, Rick Coste Got to Work with Marvel approached me with a "Because of My Podcast" story. He's got an agent who wants to turn his podcast into a book. He's been on TV and got to work with Marvel on their This Week in Marvel podcast as well as their Women of Marvel podcast. He does sound design and post-production as well as producing other shows (see https://www.rickcoste.com/podcast-production/ ) His first crack at audio drama is still getting very impressive downloads. Rick shares how he creates his soundscapes, his technology, and insights into sound effects. 17:12 Rick Coste Interview 17:54 When did Rick get into podcasting? 19:39 Getting into audio dramas 20:50 How did you find actors? 22:25 Impressive Downloads 24:10 Getting to work with Marvel 26:40 Tips for Starting an Audiodrama 28:27 What software Rick Uses 28:45 Sound effects resources 29:21 Struggling with perfection 30:53 Giving notes to actors 34:06 Passion Project? Check Out Rick at: Now That's a Good Question 08:53 This is a new segment I am adding today. While I hear people say "That's a good question" when IT'S JUST NOT. So now, when I hear an actual good question, I thought I would spotlight it. This example is from an interview by Lars Ulrich (the drummer for Metallica) who is interviewing Noel Gallagher (of Oasis) and Lars asks him how he feels about doing some of the older songs that were mammoth hits in the 90's when he has his own solo songs now. Noel starts to answer the question on how it makes his audience feel, Lars interrupts and asks, "But what do they mean to YOU." Lars then does something brilliant and Noel takes a deep breath. He shuts up and lets him think. The longer he lets him think - the better the answer. Eventually, Noel explains how those songs mean the world to him. Noel wasn't really answering the question, and Lars pointed him in the right direction. Catch the who interview on Thanks to Wayne Henderson of for his awesome tones. Podcast Rewind: Where I've Been 13:58 I appeared on talking about listening to your audience and the book 16:26 I appear on talking about the book What Is Your Favorite Podcast and Why? Every year the last episode is you answering the question, "What is your favorite podcast and why." Now I want to know about...
I had someone ask me about starting a podcast. They wanted to "Stand Out" without "Niching Down." The easiest way to stand out is to Niche down. When you do a show like We Have Cancer, Adoptees On, or the Chameleon Breeder, you get providing information that people can't get anyplace else. You end up with a smaller audience size, but a more engaged audience. Podcasting is Closer to Cable Television Than Radio In this clip of "," you will hear actor Russel Crowe as Roger Ailes explains how he doesn't want a wide audience. He's is going to purposely make content for a demographic that is being underserved. Roger went on the grow Fox news which dominated cable news for decades. When you turn on cable, you get channels on cooking, animal sports, outdoors, and none of the channels will get anywhere near the audience of the major networks. However, you will have people like my ex-wife who watch HGTV like her life depended on it. COVID Took Natalie Kennedy's Job - Podcasting Delivered Her Dream Today I talk with Natalie Kennedy who is the host of . The podcast is where Natalie covers relationship anxiety, ROCD, and upgrading love partnerships-- how to go from DOUBTING your relationship to LOVING it and gushing about your man. You can see where she already has gone from the wide topics of relationships and she niched down. Just like a cable channel. The show is for women. The show is for women having an issue with their relationships. The show is for women who are doubting their relationships and worried about commitment. Today you will hear: 00:58 Podcasting is Closer To Cable TV Than Radio 06:09 Natalie Kennedy Interview 07:13 Natalie Knows Her Niche 09:53 How She Picked Her Niche 11:07 Natalie's Transparency and how she describes her services 12:03 Dealing with Impostor Syndrome 13:37 Proof Of Concept - She had people asking for her services before she offered them. 15:45 Starting Her Podcast 16:41 How Many Episodes Does She Have? - This all happened really fast. 16:55 Is the Podcast Bringing in Clients? - ( spoiler - yes it is !) 17:21 Coaching Insights - How she gets people to open up. 18:45 You Don't Have to Know Everything - Just more than your clients. 19:37 How is Her Business Doing? 20:19 Pivots Don't Kill You 21:00 When Your Message Differs From Mainstream ( this is how you stand out). Find Natalie at 23:05 Apple Holiday Break November 22 to December 2 December 23 to January 2 Mistakes Breed Confidence 24:20 If you wait until things are 100% perfect, you'll never launch. Mistakes (are still something we want to avoid) leave to growth. I just moved, and the house is old, and I learned how to fix holes in walls. I hired a contractor who makes a mistake. Did I freak out? No. My experience with fixing previous holes help me stay calm, and I knew what to do. When you make a mistake, realizing you are growing as a person (or you can hire a mentor to help you avoid them, and learn that way). How Long Does it Take To Make Money with a Podcast? 25:22 I get this question all the time. In my travels, I started seeing an answer that start to appear, and reappear over and over. That answer is three years. Obviously Natalie today beat that record. Why do I tell people three years? I started making snippets every time I hear that answer. I forgot to write down who the first clip is. The other three are from Dave from , on What To Do When You are Face to Face with Your Audience 28:33 Just a quick clip showing that I practice what I preach, and when you have a listener in front of you take advantage. Zoom Podtrak P8 Follow Up 30:23 I talked about the in my . I had mentioned that there was an issue with a noise in the headphones. That is definitely an issue. Also, there is no timer count down for the jingle buttons. This makes "talking up" any kind of music a real challenge. Join the School of Podcasting Worry Free 33:20 You can try the private Facebook group, go through the step-by-step videos,...
Your Podcast is A Steam Train I often say that when you start out, your show is rolling slow. As it keeps moving, it gets faster and faster. It just takes time, consistency (of schedule, and value). Kim Kajci of pointed me toward this from . This video shows who has a hilarious series of and how one video in that series went viral and her back episodes starting taking off with the original video. More Cool Podcast Gear For Podcasters One of the great things about podcasting getting more and more popular, is more and more products are coming to the marketing Specifically for podcasters. Zoom Recently came out with the Podtrak P4 (for me this is THE go-to piece of equipment). Now they've come out with the Podtrak P8 which is a direct competitor of the Rodecaster Pro from Rode. Neither one of these units is a bad purchase. They both make it easier to create great sounding podcasts. Who Is This For? The Zoom Podtrak P8 (and the Rodecaster Pro) allow you to: Record up to six people in the same room. Report a remote interview via SB Connect and record a smartphone Play live sounds via touch buttons. Comparing Different Features of the Units. For me, I am always connected to my computer via a USB cable. This is for zoom calls, or recording directing into software. Keep this in mind when I talk about different tests. I do one live show on Saturday morning where I record to the internal card, or if I'm doing an interview (I use it as a back up). Power Both the Zoom and Rode can be operated via batteries (The Rodecaster has an optional cable that enables you to plug in a USB battery). The Zoom P8 uses double-A batteries or can be powered via a USB cable. So with the Rode, you will have a USB and a power cable. With the Zoom P8, you can power it with just your USB cable. Advantage Zoom P8 Price The Rodecaster Pro currently lists for $599. USB Power Cable for RODECaster Pro $20 Total: $619 The Zoom P8 is listing for $499. Zoom BTA-2 Bluetooth Adapter $49 Total: $548 Advantage Zoom P8 Input Channels ZOOM P8 This is an interesting one, as the Zoom P8 has six XLR inputs. It has a dedicated channel to the phone input. This means you have a total of seven inputs. The USB interface on the zoom is used in place of one of the XLR inputs. You could have five XLR inputs, one USB, and One phone. Rodcaster Pro The rodecaster pro has four XLR inputs. Then it has a dedicated channel for a phone. It has a dedicated channel for the USB interface. It has another channel for Bluetooth. This means you have a total of seven inputs. You could have four XLR, one USB, One Phone and one bluetooth. Comments: The blue tooth is built into the Rodecaster, and the P8 has the ability to have one more XLR input. Advantage? Tie. Number of Outputs The Zoom has six headphone outputs, and a stereo output. The Rodecaster has four headphone outputs and a stereo output. The plugs are on the back of the Rodecaster where the inputs on the Zoom are on the face. Advantage: Zoom. Marker Feature Both units have the ability to add markers. Advantage? Tie Normalization While there is no normalization in the hardware of the Rodecaster, using the additional software on your computer you can have the files normalized with multiple settings with presets for Apple, Audible. The P8 has a normalizing feature built into the unit. There are no details on if this is peak normalization or loudness normalization. It appeared to be peak. Advantage Rodecaster Recording Mode Both units provide each individual tracks along with a stereo mixdown of the whole recording. The Rodecaster provides the ability to turn off the individual track recording and just provide the stereo mixdown. This enables you to not have a ton of extra tracks when you don't want them, which doesn't take up as much storage on your storage card. Advantage: Rodecaster Effects Both units provide effects for each track. Zoom P8: The Zoom provides bass and treble controls. It was one combination...
, I interview Matthew Dicks who is the author of the book Storyworthy. I am a HUGE fan of Matthew and was very excited when he agreed to come on the show. After the episode was published I get email after email. I saw comments on Facebook all stating, "WOW, That was a great interview." There will be times when you get feedback, and no matter if it's positive or negative you want to investigate why (so you can do more about it). I've received more than average feedback on episodes like , , but the feedback I got about was "way more than usual." One of the things I help people do is figure out what they are doing correctly with their podcast so they can do more of that type of content. With this in mind, I went back and looked at "Why did this connect with my audience?" Step 1: Start with someone interesting Getting entertaining stories out of Matthew Dicks is like shooting fish in a barrel. Step 2: Ignore the Back Story Matthew has an AMAZING back story. He took enormous steps to avoid telling his first story. While that's a nice story, I was looking for something my audience could take away. Ask yourself what is more helpful their backstory, or what they can do for your audience NOW? Step 3: Have a Goal Why was I bringing in Matthew Dicks? Because his book is filled with strategies. I wanted to focus on strategies. I wanted to boost the skills of my listeners, and I wanted to sell books more Matthew. Step 4: Know your Guest I really wanted to get this interview going in the right direction. The minute I knew he was coming on the show, I was focused on coming up with the best questions. I especially wanted that first question to lead to a story, and to help people understand that words matter. Every night I would walk around my neighborhood listening to Storyworthy on Audible. I've already listened to this book, but I was now looking at topics that I would want to expand on. This would allow me to mention the book, and to get the content I was looking for my audience. Step 5: Don't Test Their Powers of Improv I had decided that the opening question would be, "When did you realize the power of words?" I really liked that question. It would lead to a story, and let my audience knowing we were going to be talking about words, and story crafting. However, I also realized that this question might need some thought on Matthew's part. Consequently, I let him know the topics we would be covering. That would be: When did realize words had power? (the actual question) Editing (such as where to start a story). Homework for life (this is Matthew's Freebird). Normally I don't give my guests the exact questions. I typically let them know why I'm bringing them on, and the subjects we will be covering. Step 6: Get the Best Audio You Can When we connected via Squadcast, I was hearing Matthew through his camera's microphone. I tested this by having him tap his microphone. When he tapped it, and I didn't hear the tapping, I knew Squadcast was using the wrong microphone. When he switched away from his camera's microphone, it was like night and day. Step 7: Prove You've Done Your Homework When we first connected and got the microphones configured, I wanted to show Matthew I was a fanboy without being a fanboy. I know he is a HUGE fan of the New England Patriots football team. They recently made a quarterback change, so I asked him how they thought they would do. My questions also showed I had actually read the book. Step 8: Ask and Shut Up When I do an interview I had my list of questions on a pad to my left and a blank pad in front of me with a pen that doesn't click. When I was would ask a question I would then shut up and listen. I didn't "um, hmm" and I listened for potential opportunities to ask a follow-up question. Step 9: Follow Up Questions When he was talking about things that had happened because of his podcast he mentioned how at one event that he was asked to tell a story, his daughter...
I have had the voice of in my head more than any other person this year. I heard him on a podcast, bought his audiobook , and listened to it. When I was done with the book I wanted more and found his . Unlike other books on Storytelling that have brilliant messages like "Stories are good," and "You should learn how to tell stories," I was THRILLED that I had finally found a book that explained HOW to tell better stories. It is an AMAZING book, and I feel it will benefit anyone who reads or listens to it. Today I am honored to have the author on my show. Here are some key points: Start with a thesis. I use to think something, and then something (the story) happened, and now I think something else. I would prefer to be entertaining than lengthy and boring. Always serve the story (not yourself). I think about what I want my audience to feel in certain parts of the story. I make those decisions before I begin crafting my story. "How about making the first thing you say something that's actually engaging and interesting? Because those first 30 seconds to 60 seconds of a story that is such fertile ground, that is your opportunity to either convince the audience that what is to come is worth listening to, or I don't know what the hell I'm doing. Because I've just bored you for 30 to 60 seconds, and essentially told you nothing." Our questions that we asked people like in a podcast, the more specific they are, the more helpful they are to our guests. Ready To Start Your Podcast? Are you worried about spending too much money on equipment? Sounding unprofessional? Not sure what software to use? How to shape your content? Join the school of podcasting and enjoy the step by step tutorials along with a private Facebook group filled with other brilliant podcasting minds. You can join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. Go to TIME TABLE 01:22 Introduction 03:50 When Did You realize Stories Had Power? 08:38 Do Stories HAVE to show vulnerability? 10:14 Is vulnerability Magic? 12:38 How do you know what to keep and what to delete? 15:27 The Importance of Location 19:30 Homework For Life 23:44 Can you Tell a Story "By Numbers" 26:40 The Power of But and Therefore VS And 30:16 Story Telling Peeves 33:52 3-2-1 Game 36:23 When Did Mathew Know He Wanted to Podcast? 37:58 Because of My Podcast ______ 40:58 Watching Your Daughter Tell a Story 42:13 Where to Find Matthew's Workshops 44:33 Storytelling is More Than Just Stories 45:40 How Storytelling Helps 47:36 Matthew Has Other Books Profit From Your Podcast is Available Pick up any book on podcast monetization, and you will find 90 percent of it only covers how to launch a podcast. If you already have a podcast, you have that information; you’re ready for the next step. Profit from Your Podcast provides top strategies and real-life examples of podcast monetization. This book is more than what to do. It also tells you how to do it. Chapters cover such topics as: How to Grow Your Audience How to Set Your Pricing Understanding Advertising Jargon How to Find Sponsors Best Strategies for Making Money as an Affiliate Master Strategies for Crowdfunding Harnessing the Power of Webinars and Events The Top Tools to Make Your Job Easy Built on the author’s fifteen years of experience in podcasting, this action-packed guide will benefit new and veteran podcasters. Get clear on who your audience is and what they want, deliver value, and build an engaged audience that wants to give you money. Leverage your relationships and the integrity you have built through your podcast to create multiple streams of income. gives you the tools to do it all. Mentioned In This Episode Website Get the Audiobook for free if you're new to
This week rock guitar God Eddie Van Halen died after a long battle with throat cancer. As a guitar who was 13 when Van Halen's first album was released, and whose band provided the soundtrack to my adolescent years this hit me hard. With this in mind, I wanted to talk about things podcasters can learn from Eddie Van Halen. Sponsor - Methods and Advice for Making the Most of Your Podcast—Pricing, Sponsors, Crowdfunding, and More Pick up any book on podcast monetization, and you will find 90 percent of it only covers how to launch a podcast. If you already have a podcast, you have that information; you’re ready for the next step. Profit from Your Podcast provides top strategies and real-life examples of podcast monetization. This book is more than what to do. It also tells you how to do it. Chapters cover such topics as: How to Grow Your Audience How to Set Your Pricing Understanding Advertising Jargon How to Find Sponsors Best Strategies for Making Money as an Affiliate Master Strategies for Crowdfunding Harnessing the Power of Webinars and Events The Top Tools to Make Your Job Easy Built on the author’s fifteen years of experience in podcasting, this action-packed guide will benefit new and veteran podcasters. Get clear on who your audience is and what they want, deliver value, and build an engaged audience that wants to give you money. Leverage your relationships and the integrity you have built through your podcast to create multiple streams of income. Profit from Your Podcast gives you the tools to do it all. Van Halen Took Years to Build Their Audience The band was formed in 1972. Some of the top songs in 1972 were Saturday in the park in Chicago, Brandy (You're a fine girl), I'll take you there (the staple singers). Not exactly a thriving time of high energy, guitar-oriented hard rock. They played clubs for years. In 1976 (four years later) Gene Simmons of Kiss financed a demo tape, and arranged a performance in front of Kiss's management and was told that "they had no chance of making it" and that they wouldn't take them. Gene then removed himself from further involvement. A year later when they were playing the famed "Starwood: club Ted Templeman of Warner Brother saw the band and they were offered a contract. Good Planning Leads to Less Editing As they had been playing clubs for years, the band was well-rehearsed and ready to go. Their first album was recorded in three weeks with almost no overdubs. You Don't Need to Spend a Ton of Cash There are two popular guitars in rock music. A Stratocaster has a thin sound and used by blues players and it had a whammy bar. A Les Paul has a thicker, chunkier sound. Eddie took the guts of a Less Paul and put them into the Stratocaster (called the ). He made the guitar himself using a guitar body that cost fifty dollars and a guitar neck that cost eighty. He ended up with a thicker, chunkier guitar tone that had a whammy bar. The guitar that cost $130 to make has a replica that now goes for . He stated that because he was poor he had to find ways to make the noises on the guitar. He Learned Through Trial And Error In the process of creating his own guitar, Eddie states, "I ruined a bunch of stuff." The bottom line he never stopped experimenting. In the song , you hear Eddie creating bizarre sounds on his guitar. It turns out that some of those sounds were Eddie Swiping a Schlitz beer can up and down the neck. In the song , Eddie uses an electric drill. The bizarre noise on is Eddie running the side of his hands up and down the strings. He was always looking for ways to make different noises (like an ) with his guitar. The strange wooshing noise in the middle of the song Panama is Eddie's Lamborgini. He had an endless curiosity and was constantly experimenting. He Never Learned How To Read Music He would watch his teacher's fingers and then play whatever he just saw. His parents forced him to play the piano and won contests when he was ages 9-11. After...
School of Podcasting Win Best Technology Podcast People's Choice Podcast Award I am thrilled and humbled to be named the winner of People's Choice Podcast Award for best Technology podcasts (beating out seven other podcasts). Thanks to Todd Cochrane and everyone at for all you do and thank YOU for voting for me. I had one this award back in 2017, and now I will have an awesome set of bookend for my bookcase. THANK YOU!. Profit From Your Podcast Is Now Available I spent months researching podcasters who are making money with their podcasts and assembled all the insights and strategies for you to follow. I announced that I was available for speaking on different podcasts, and I was lucky enough to have listeners who felt I would be a good fit for their show (I'm still available if you think I'm a good fit). By appearing on these different shows, the book was rated the #1 New Release in the blogging category. I was honored to be on the following shows, and look forward to appearing on yours. 06:02 I appeared with Ross Brand of on his which will be replaced in the future. 08:21 I appeared on the show. I mention Jeff in the book on how Jeff won't take sponsors that he wouldn't use, and how you really need to guard your integrity as a podcaster. Jeff has appeared on this show back in 12:11 I appeared on the "" podcast with Carrie Barret who is a podcast producer and talks about overcoming fears. We talk about how to find sponsors. 18:45 I appeared on Dealcster with Jeff and Chris. This was on so in addition to affiliate marketing we talked about Amazon getting into the podcasting space. 23:34 I will be appearing the show with Billy Samoa Saleebey talking about you need to look at negative feedback as an opportunity to improve. What To Do With the "Wrong Audience" In the book I talk about Daniel J. Lewis who designed websites for people. His show "The Audacity to Podcast" attracted people looking for information about the free software titled "Audacity." This was not who Daniel wanted to attract. What did he do? Instead of trying to talk them into a product they didn't want (a website) he listened to what they wanted, and then gave it to them. He creates products like an , My Podcast Reviews (to track reviews in Apple, Stitcher, and others) as well as the . He recently added a "Love this Podcast" feature to that provides one link to provide to your audience and helps them get to the right directories/apps for their device. You can test this by going to www.lovethispodcast.com/sop Sign up for My Podcast Reviews at Table of Contents 06:02 Dave with Ross Brand 08:21 Dave with Jeff Sanders 12:11 Dave with Carie Barrett 17:15 Join the School of Podcasting 18:45 Dave on Dealcasters 23:34 Dave on For the Love of Podcasting 26:11 What To Do With the "Wrong" Audience 31:41 Because of My Podcast: Ross Brand Mentioned In This Episode Book by Jeff Sanders also available on , Zita Christian from David Hooper of Check out the Link and subscribe to the show. This is episode of the which is part of the Network.
If you want to hold someone's attention you first need to know who they are and what they need. Then we hear that people's attention span keeps getting smaller. Is it? Today I look into attention spans, and what makes things interesting. I asked my audience what thought made things interesting. Thanks to everyone who contributed including: Craig From Thomas from Harris from Orlando from Carey from Andres from Brandon from Bill from the Kim from Sean Whaley from , and Full show notes at Conclusion It's not that attention spans are getting smaller (they are not) but more our ability to know what we want and identify when we are NOT going to get it has grown. Know your audience, and give them what you want. Be your honest, transparent, vulnerable self to hold their attention. Use tools like your voice, your pacing, to grab their attention. Never stop your passion from coming out. Let people hear your passion. Keep in mind you are somewhat doomed. If you stay 100% consistent, your audience may get bored. If you branch out and try new things, you may upset those who want the show to never change. I know... so be ready to embrace that no matter what you do - some people will leave. Include any of these six to be more interesting: Tone of voice Pacing Passion Stories Autonomy Vulnerability Start Your Podcast Today - Join the School of Podcasting When you you can immediately start taking the online courses and: Enjoy step by step tutorials Live group coaching Private Facebook group filled with other brilliant podcasting minds. Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee. Mentioned In This Podcast
Elizabeth Benton is known as a health and nutrition guru, but to me, she is more of a "mindset guru." She is someone who has dug herself out of being $130,000 in debt, and has lost (and kept off )150 lbs. My audience from the Logical Weight Loss podcast told me I HAD to read her book, (get it for free on ), and once I finished her book, I checked out her Primal Potential podcast and downloaded all of her episodes. I was thrilled when she agreed to come on the show and explain how podcasting has boosted her business. SPONSOR: School of Podcasting Get access to step by step tutorials, a private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and live group coaching and access to me. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. Topics With Elizabeth Benton 7:16 How Long Did You Run Your Business Without a Podcast? 8:31 Did you hesitate to start your podcast? 9:11 People have STONG Feelings about Eating Healthy 11:24 How has your podcast impacted your business? 12:53 Because of her podcast ______. 14:01 Have you interviewed your clients on your podcast? 14:32 How do you keep going? 16:29 Favorite Piece of Feedback 17:36 Elizabeth shares about expectations in relationships 20:43 Advice for a new podcaster 22:20 You attract people who are like you. My Favorite Takeaways I want to be challenged because in that I learn. If you don't want to roll an ankle don't play basketball if you don't want people to disagree with you Don't ever say anything out in public. The advantage over email is people can listen to episode four. They can't read your fourth email. If you're having fun, stay in the game. Stay consistent. Don't just do podcasting because podcasting is hot. It's only hot if you're really good at it. Podcast Rewind I appeared on podcast with Heather Vickery talking about some of my biggest fears and how I overcome them. The show features people living courageously. I also appeared on the show with Charley Valher. We talked about taking steps to make sure your podcast connects with your audience. Without a connection, you won't be able to monetize your show. Profit From Your Podcast Pre-Order 30:29 Dave's book "" is being released 9/28. You can pre-order today. The book contains oroven strategies to turn listeners into a livelihood. I Need Your Thoughts in Interesting 31:48 Right now, I'm obsessed with the word, Interesting. When you hear the word interesting, what comes to your mind? If someone who spoke another language and asked you to explain what Interesting mean, how would you describe it. Feel free to “riff” on your thoughts of interesting, and explain any examples of content you feel is interesting. I need your answer by September 25th, 2020. Go to Mentioned In This Podcast Elizabeth Benton on the Elizabeth Benton's Book "Chasing Cupcakes" on and Elizabeth Benton's website and Primal Potential Start Your Podcast at the Amazon Music adds Podcasting on Got podcast questions? Today Just want to support the show? Consider becoming a .
started a podcast and was "swinging for the fences" and after hiring a team, and putting 50,000 into a marketing budget he realized after a year that the show just wasn't producing the results he needed. Today he shares the mistakes he made, and how he came back to podcasting with new strategies and insights that resulted in his podcast () being the number one way her is driving customers to his business at . Topics Include: 02:41 Charlie's Services 05:14 Charlies Hired a Team for His First Podcast 07:59 What Was Missing? 10:44 How did you come up with the new formula? 12:19 Position Yourself as the Expert 14:45 Can You Niche Down Too Far? 15:54 Three Ingredients of a Niche 16:40 Charlie's Original Call to Action 18:07 Having the Right Topics 22:11 Was it Hard To Try Again? 25:13 How Long Until You Saw Results? 26:57 How do you pick topics? 29:32 Interviewing Potential Clients 33:22 Did You Make Any Technology Mistakes 34:59 Most Memorable Feedback 39:55 What's Working Now? 40:41 How Do You Grow Your Podcast? 43:04 Insights Into Charlie's Prices Great Takeaways Position yourself as an expert I want to talk to my audience so they feel like I've been watching them. When creating a niche, consider the demographic, the service/industry, and if this is for Beginners/Intermediates/Experts His audience is now quoting the podcast in his approval form. They say things like, "This podcast was made for me." The 5o,00 budget did not result in success. You can't buy an audience if your content doesn't connect. Question of the Month DeadLine 9/25 Right now, I'm obsessed with the word, Interesting. When you hear the word interesting, what comes to your mind? If someone who spoke another language and asked you to explain what Interesting mean, how would you describe it. Feel free to “riff” on your thoughts of interesting, and explain any examples of content you feel is interesting. I need your answer by September 25th, 2020. Submit your answer at Mentioned In This Podcast Show and USB Microphone. Join the
As I continue (as a middle-aged white dude) to attempt to learn more about Black History, Culture, and issues, a friend of mine suggested I watch the TV show Black AF on Netflix as there is always a hidden history lesson. (a writer and producer) plays a television writer and producer (named Kenya Berris). In one episode the main character (who is a movie and television creator) is worried about giving feedback to a fellow black creator, and also is worried about what others might think about his films and content. In sone scene, Kenya meets Tyler Perry who might know from his movies feature Madea. This is a character played by Perry. She is a tough, elderly African-American woman. She 6'2" and 365 lbs. Diary of a Mad Black Woman—2005 Madea's Family Reunion—2006 Meet the Browns (cameo)—2008 Madea Goes to Jail—2009 I Can Do Bad All by Myself—2009 Madea's Big Happy Family—2011 Madea's Witness Protection—2012 A Madea Christmas—2013 Boo! A Madea Halloween—2016 Boo 2! A Madea Halloween—2017 A Madea Family Funeral—2019 Transcript from Black AF Featuring Tyler Perry In the episode, Kenya asks about the website Rotten Tomatoes. ---- Kenya Barris: Go to Rotten Tomatoes. Tyler Perry: But let me just tell you about the tomatoes. I don't fuck with 'em. Kenya Barris: No tomatoes? Tyler Perry: I don't give a damn about a rotten or a fresh none of that means shit to me. Kenya Barris: That's amazing. What about critics? Tyler Perry: I don't give a fuck Kenya Barris: I guess that's amazing. Tyler Perry: Can I just tell you why? Listen, man, I know that I'm telling stories that my folks want to see. I'm talking from our point of view. We're speaking a language. We're speaking a shorthand that we get, and that white people don't necessarily get. Nina Simone said this and I never forgot that she said, "You will use up everything you got trying to give everybody what they want." You got to focus man you know what I do? I super serve my niche. We speak like we're talking we know each other - we get it. There's a lot of times I see shit that wins Oscars and I be like, what is this shit? I walked out halfway through it. I don't get it. I feel like they feel the same way about my work. They don't get it, which is all cool. My mother born in Jim Crow South In Louisiana, right down the street from Mississippi where was murdered. She told me the value of being who I am of my blackness. She said, "Don't you ever let anybody tell you who you are, you know who you are, you know where you come from." I watched her stories, I watched her struggles and that's what I'm telling. I'm telling the stories that I come from, and that's why they're winning. Because people are recognizing themselves in these stories, no matter how crass that people think they are, no matter what the critics are saying, Oh, I don't get this shit. I don't understand what is. I don't give a fuck because I'm talking to us. That's why millions of people are watching my shows every week. That's why people keep showing up and sending the movies to number one. I'm talking to us connecting with us. You know, I'm saying? Let me tell you what you're doing, you're trying to get them to approve you. That's when I don't get why niggas run around trying to get white folks, "Please tell me I'm special. Oh, give me your Oscar. Oh, let me know I'm all of these things that you want me.." Fuck that. Tell your story. Live in your own life in your own culture. Tell your own experience. Ain't nobody gonna tell you how to be you. You hear what I'm saying? Kenya Barris: I do man. I really fucking do. Tyler Perry: Good. ---- Now keep in mind that this is Kenya Berris playing himself and the same for Tyler Perry, but the more I got into researching Tyler Perry the move I loved his message. It's Not How You Start - It's How you Finish Tyler grew up in Louisiana with his mother and an alcoholic father who would beat both he and his mother. His Success Didn't Come...
It's to know what is working for your audience. Sure you can look at your downloads but there are other ways to look at engagement. Today in episode 738 I dig deeper. Website Traffic How many website visitors are you getting? You may be surprised that your top ten pages on your website are the same as the top ten episodes of your podcast? Why, you might have more keywords in your notes that attract google. People may be linking to your episode which can boost "Google Juice" (your rankings). WHAT ABOUT TRANSCRIPTS? I was listening to a great podcast with Charlie Valher from Valher media (Charlie will be on this show in the future), and he was interview Stephan Spencer who is one THE SEO people on the planet. While we often say, "This person wrote the book on..." Stephen actually wrote the book on SEO (Search Engine Optimization) . It's 994 pages. Here is what he had to say about transcripts: But the key thing here is you're creating something in an audio format and although Google is getting better at taking that audio and doing something amazing with it, like turning that into searchable content on its own, you can't just rely on that. A lot of people don't have time to listen to podcasts and they like to just scan through articles, but nobody wants to read a transcript. Who's gonna get excited about reading a transcript with a bunch of the back and forth banter and not cutting to the chase? Having an article made out of the transcript, however, is a very powerful strategy and if you have an hour-long show or a half-hour-long show, that's a lot of textual content. -. Transcribed by Google Analytics Google Analytics is a great free tool that enables you to pull insights about your website visitors. The best part is its free. It is very robust. There are ways you can flatten the learning curve with Google Analytics. One is to take the . One of my favorite tools that takes that data and creates easy to understand reports is . Check out Tracking Clicks In WordPress, many people use a plugin that is free/premium called . There is a free version and the premium version starts at $49/year. It's been downloaded over 2.5 million times. is a very similar plugin for about the same price ($49/year). If you want something even more powerful (especially for affiliate links) check out which can even check the stock at Amazon for your links, and much more. It starts at $19/month. is only $19. The advantage of these plugins is they enable you to reinforce your brand's website while making an easy to remember. For example, will take you to my subscription page. If someone asks me where to subscribe, I have one link with all the apps. If someone asks about the service, they can go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/podpage. For my Patreon account that I promote on the Ask the Podcast Coach show I use What if you don't use WordPress? How Do You Track Clicks? bit.ly Many people use bit.ly which I did, but I found something that really changed my opinion of bit.ly. While you can setup a bit.ly link to point at a long URL that makes it easier to remember if later you want to change that link - you can't. This is why I started researching this topic. Then on August 13th, they added the feature to update a link . However, you have to pay for this feature ($35/month). Rebrandly One company called Rebrandly was started based on the pain point of "I can't change my destination URL in Bitly." With Rebrandly you can have up to 500 links and have up to 5000 clicks per month for free. You can have up to 5 custom domains. If you're looking for a free tool to track clicks this seems to be the tool. They have 550,000 happy customers. If You Want to Do More Track Clicks (Marketing?) Click.org allows you to do A/B Split testing, and you can have one link for people in one part of the world, and another link used for others in a different part. For marketing people it adds the tracking pixel. So now when you send someone to a website that is not...
HOUSEKEEPING: My book, UPDATE. If you're asked to confirm your sale, please say yes. Podcasts are continuing to get more and more popular with millions of listeners worldwide. In some (few from what I've seen) cases, people with very popular or very niche shows can charge what some people call a "Guest Appearance Fee." While I understand that some of us are trying to at least pay for the cost of production with our podcasts, but there are some things to think about before you go charging people to be on your show. SUPPLY AND DEMAND I know some people were charging to be on your show (in some cases four figures) to be a guest. The law of supply and demand can be summarized as the smaller the supply for something the more your can charge as long as it has value (or perceived value). Why? Because you can't get it anyplace else. If you show has a HUGE audience and people are banging on your door to be on your show, this might indicate a high demand for people to be on your show. If your show is super niche, it may be the only podcast on the topic. If a potential guest wants to do a deep dive on , there may not be that many podcasts to contact. Remember when sponsors are paying you money it is to get in front of your audience. If a guest thinks you have a large chunk of the audience they may be willing to pay to get in front of them. MANAGING DEMAND WITH YOUR PRICE When you have too much demand on a product as you can't keep up, one strategy is to raise the price. When I was a working musician some of the bars I played had a $5 cover charge. Why? Because if you were willing to pay $5 just to get in the door there was a good chance those people had disposable money to buy food and drinks. This way your bar was full of your target audience. If you have a TON of people BEGGING to be on your show, charging for an appearance might slow the demand. It might shorten the line to get into the guest chair, and only those who KNOW that you have their target audience will bust out the cash to sit in that seat. If this sounds like a good idea, lets take a second and look at this a little deeper. Take a Long Look in the Mirror If you were to go to Google is your show one of less than five other podcasts on your subject? Are you the only pigmy pony podcast? Do you have a large audience? Not many people can say they have a super-niche podcast with a large audience. Here are some other things to consider: Enjoying the Extra Money This Would Bring In TV Talk shows (due to the union) pay their guests to appear on the show ( per episode by some accounts) but that is for a show with millions of viewers. According to some reports 30% of adults have no emergency savings at all (if you make 50,000 a year). If you go up to $150,000 a year 25% of people are still living paycheck to paycheck. My point is without some discipline, there were always be more month at the end of the money. What might happen is you have an extra $1000 a month and you get those braces for the kid, or even worse have a second child (and those little boogers are expensive). Now what was extra money to put into your savings, or add some breathing room, is now being spent every week. It is no longer "extra"money. Now You NEED Guests to Pay When your back is up against the wall you do things you may not be proud of. Now you start to accept any guest as long as they pay. I've been there done that. While I had a job when I graduate from college I still took a job as a janitor at my church to help pay the bills. I had student loans to pay, and I needed to save up money to move into an apartment. My Dad (who had a degree in computers) took a job as a convenient store manager working the night shift. You do what have to do not because you want to, but because you have to. This Could Cause a Negative Spiral If your guests don't fit your audience, and they don't deliver value, you might lose your audience (and remember that is what people are paying for - to get in...
Patreon is having what appears to be some serious legal issues created by a loophole in their terms of services. Today I talk about seven different options each with their own strength. Full Details, videos, and more at
There are those that are going to be surprised by today’s content. Why? Because I’m going to admit to making one of the biggest mistakes (if not THE biggest mistake) you can make in podcasting. This deals with your podcast feed. When you learn to shave, you have to learn how to hold the razor properly. The Radio Analogy Let’s start with some analogies. Radio is broadcasted on a frequency. That frequency is then deciphered by a radio receiver, which turns it into music. Podcasting is syndicated via your feed and is deciphered via an app. So you had DJ to Frequency to Radio. Now you have podcasters to feed to app. In radio, you had to make sure your radio tower was always operational. If the tower had an issue, you were no longer broadcasting, and your station went dead. With podcasting everything, I mean EVERYTHING is tied to your feed. Guard it with your life. Change of Address Forms The other analogy I want to bring here is the change of address form. I’m going to be moving later this year, and when I am finished set up,at my apartment, I’m going to fill out a change of address form with the US Post office that says,”Any mail going to Dave Jackson at his apartment should now be delivered to his house.” Here is the problem you want to avoid. What if your favorite pizza place was at 123 Main Street, and they moved. They had no website, and when you dialed their phone number it said it was disconnected. You LOVED their food, but you had no idea where to get it. If a radio station moved from 98.7 to 100.2 and didn’t let their audience know, you would have to scan the dial searching for your favorite station. When you move from one feed to another without doing a 301 redirect you strand your audience who is still looking at your old (dead) feed. How Did This Happen? So how did the guy who warns everyone to be careful when dealing with feeds shoot himself in the foot? I did this late at night (post-midnight right before I was heading to bed). Looking back we always have 20/20 vision, but I’m pretty sure this not when I’m at my sharpest. You might say I got, "Too comfortable with the knife." What I mean by this is if you do something dangerous over and over, after a while, you get comfortable, confident, and potentially end up cutting yourself. If this had been a client’s account I was working on, I would’ve shut off all distractions, double and tripled checked my steps, and things would’ve been fine. In my case, I knew the procedure, logged in, copied, and pasted and was getting ready to head to bed. I was too comfortable with the knife. In looking at my stats, it appears I came away with a bruise instead of needing stitches. I Appeared on the Krisk and Kristine Show You can check out my appearance on episode 48 of the . Update on Conferences is doing and online conference while trying to set a Guinness World Record. I will speak at that event. will be in person in 2021 in Nashville, and in 2020 they have moved to an online event. Ready To Start Your Podcast? Join the School of Podcasting worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee. You get access to: A private Facebook mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasters. Step by step tutorials to get you from idea to world domination. Live group coaching several times a month in different times zones. Go to
Today we revisit the topic of Impostor Syndrome (something we talked about in episode 627), as you won't believe who has impostor syndrome (the whole, "Why would anyone listen to me???). We also share what your favorite episode is and why (some pretty amazing answers thanks to all who participated). Join the School of Podcasting Worry Free Worry about sounding bad or unprofessional? Worried about buying equipment you don't need? Worried you'll make all those common mistakes that podcasters make? Then quit worrying and join the School of Podcasting. You get step by steps tutorials, live group coaching, a private mastermind group, and priority email support. You also get a 30-day money-back guarantee (so you can join worry-free). see Because of My Podcast - I Got to Interview Tony Danza Willam shares the hoops he had to jump through to get Tony Danza on his podcast. Listen to the episode at Garth Brooks and Impostor Syndrome In the docuseries Garth Brooks - The Road I'm On there is a great segment where you learn Garth is the top-selling solo artist of all time, and at the same time is hiding in his hotel room afraid nobody will show up to his concert in central park (they did, almost 1 million people did - making it the largest concert in central park). Nothing you start ends up where you thought it would. (think about that and I believe you'll find it is true). We worry about failure. I'm listening to a book on Audible called by Philip M Jones. He makes a great point about failure and mistakes. First, understand the difference between a failure and a mistake. A mistake is incorrectly doing something that you knew specifically how you were supposed to do. A failure is trying something you've not tried before, and it working out differently than you hoped for. Seeing these differences instantly empowers a difference in your acceptance between the two and possibly helps you become more excited about your future failures. - Philip M Jones Exactly Where to Start Take a second and list all of the hard things (or things you perceived as hard at the time) that you have accomplished. You've done more than you think. What Is Your Favorite Episode and Why? While this wasn't planned, I love that many of these episodes involved people trying something new, or stepping out of their comfort zone. Thanks to all who participated: Veronica - Anthony - Dan Arnie Dave - Curtis - York - Scott Bill Monroe - Matt - Dave - August Question of the Month With so many people answering this month's question who have been doing this a while, How do you keep going? (or why haven't you quit)? For those who have NOT started a podcast yet, What is holding you back? Go to to answer before August 28th, 2020. Mentioned In This Episode Table of Contents 00:56 Because of My Podcast - 03:20 Join the School of Podcasting Worry Free 04:21 You Won't Believe Who Has impostor Syndrome 10:09 Overcoming Impostor Syndrome 13:05 Mistakes vs Failure 15:39 What is your favorite episode of your podcast 40:26 August Question of the Month 43:00 pod.events 44:09 What is coming 45:13 Bloopers
Glenn "The Geek" Hebert and Jamie Jennings have been doing a ninety-minute daily show since 2010. If you listened to the show 24 hours a day it would take you 150 days to listen to all the episodes. That is a HUGE amount of work along with finding sponsors, booking over 6000 guests, facilitating contents and more. Today they share their secrets to longevity while keeping their sanity. Horses in the Morning is part of the . Quick Housekeeping 01:07 Answers for the Question of the Month 01:30 Vote For School of Podcasting at Podcastawards.com Surviving and Thriving After 2500 Episodes 06:54 How Did You Find Each Other 08:01 Shaping the Concept 10:54 What have you tried that didn't work? 12:29 6000 Guests Over the Years 16:10 Radio vs Podcasting 18:16 Handing Bad Days 20:43 How do you keep finding new content? 24:25 Because of My Podcast Story 25:58 Interacting With Patons 28:19 How Have You Gone This Long and Stayed Sane? 33:43 Glenn Knows Where the Episode is Going 34:41 Bring Your Passion 35:38 Don't Quit on a Bad Day 37:11 Tips for Wanna Be Podcasters 41:25 Bloopers Main Take-Aways Glenn and Jamie only promote products that they would use. Consequently, 98.5% of their listeners buy those products. They use the account to allow their listeners to get closer (and appear) on the show. They put hours into show prep and know exactly where the show is going. They keep trying new things to keep the show fresh. Some of their best segments "just happened." They never talk except on the show so they don't have to recreate conversations in their episodes. Question of the Month What is your favorite episode of your podcast and why? Answer by 7/24/20 at Ready to Start Your Podcast? Join the School of Podcasting worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee and get access to step by step tutorials, live group coaching, and a private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. You also get direct access to Hall of Fame podcaster, Dave Jackson via priority email support and when needed video conferencing. Join today at Need Some Honest Feedback on Your Show? Get your show reviewed by 30-year radio veteran Erik K Johnson, and 15-year podcasting veteran Dave Jackson in addition to getting exposure on the . We go over every inch of your podcast, your website, your goals, and make sure they are in alignment with your content to deliver maximum results.
I've been asked this questions in a few interviews. As there are no rules and you can do anything you want in a podcast, are there are any Podcasting Best Practices? Well as we all see podcasting through many different lenses I thought I would share my opinion on the best practices. Have a Topic You Are Passionate About, as in REALLY Passionate about. Next week you will hear Jamie from Horses in the morning talk about her L O V E of horses. In the past I have said you need the passion that a sixteen year old boy has for getting his driver's license. WHY: Because when you first start out, it will be awkward, and you will still be getting comfortable behind the mic. You will have next to no audience and it is soul crushing to put that much work into something and have next to nobody listen to it. When you have that passion, you will talk about it even if nobody is listening. Know Your Target Audience I know, "But Dave you just said I don't have an audience." I know, but who is the person that should love this content. Also, I don't mean "34-48 year old Women. That is identify who they are. I mean KNOW THEM. Go hang out with them, and find out what makes them tick. WHY: One of the biggest fears is sounding stupid. How do you avoid this? By knowing what your audience needs (we cover this in the planning your content course, as well as "Content is King" course). Know WHY You're Podcasting Every podcaster says "It takes more time than I thought" when you start a podcast (for the record it takes more time than you thought for many things if you think about it). Starting a podcast is easy. Start is GOOD podcast can tricky. You've identified who your audience is, and what your topic is, but the why can help shape the content. If you're trying to keep your brand in front of your potential customer you might do three five minute podcasts a week. If you want to be seen as an expert, maybe you do a weekly 20-minute show where you answer a question. If you're trying to grow your network, maybe you do interviews with other people in your field. WHY: When you start to achieve your goal, it puts gas in your tank. If you are NOT achieving your goal you know you need to adjust the content or turn up the marketing. Get The Best Equipment You Can Afford I typically say you can sound pretty good for the price of an Xbox (about $300). By the time you get a microphone and some sort of interface, etc. You're looking between $70-$300 depending on how many co-hosts you have, etc. WHY: Look at the top 200 shows in Apple and see how many were recorded using their phone (although you can make "OK" recording with your phone when used correctly). Have A General Idea Of How a Podcast Works I've been driving since I was 16. While I don't know enough about my car to work on it. I do know enough to do some basic troubleshooting. WHY: By understanding the mechanics of a podcast you can avoid a lot of unnecessary panic when your episode doesn't appear in an app a few minutes after you press publish. It's YOUR Show Aisha Tyler said at Podcast Movement one of the biggest reason she loved her podcast was because it was HERS. Don't interview people if you're not sure they are a good fit. If you don't want to talk about a topic, don't. If you do want to talk about a topic - do. It's your show. Make Yourself Available Everywhere I talked about this in the episode about growing your downloads, WHY: A boss walks into the board room and says, "I just heard this (insert name) podcast on the way in it was great. Everyone pulls out their phone but some people subscribe on Apple, Google, Spotify, Overcast, Stitcher, etc. Don't Pick a Release Date Until Your In All the Apps I had this happen to me. My new show Grow Your Community was in Apple, but NOT in Overcast (even though Overcast pulls from Apple). In the same way that bands in the 80's wouldn't pick a date for their CD release...
I hear so many podcasts that do interviews and they start their podcast by pulling a clip from the interview. Today we talk about why this may not be the best strategy. The interview snippet should build anticipation Piques the curiosity and makes them want to know more Some people pull clips that make people go WHAT WAS THAT? Many times these clips are long (I wouldn't make then any long than 10-15 seconds if not shorter) and just leave the listener confused. ROLL THE CLIP If you think about it movies use trailers to motivate people to come see the movie. They also send the starts on talks shows who often have a clip of the show. When the hosts ask, "Does this need setup?" the answer is almost always yes. Some back story is needed to have the clip make sense. In some cases podcasters are creating a clip, placing it at the very beginning of the episode and there is no "setup" and the clip leads to confusion. SPONSOR: Start Your Podcast Worry-Free at the School of Podcasting You're worried you'll sound stupid. You won't as I show you how to know exactly what your audience wants. You're worried about the technology? Don't be as I have step by step tutorials to walk you through the whole podcasting process. Need some help along the way? I do live group coaching multiple times per month, you have priority email support, and a private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. You also have a 30-day money-back guarantee so if you're not happy you can get your money back. Go to Mentioned In This Episode Start your podcast worry-free at Kim from Kim from (get the beginning of your show reviewed). - Full Review - Coming Soon
Today we hear stories of different people who have had doors open due to their podcast. Your podcast typically is not a business. It is a business card. Your podcast can be used to network with other people and companies, help you get employment, and help secure opportunities. Mentioned in This Episode Joe Rogan and he was interviewing Emly Prokop from getting Moxie LaBouche of the got a My book comes out in August David Hooper got a radio show when he mentioned he could turn it in a podcast. ( a program he still does and produces as a podcast along with , and ). Dave shares this story as part of the bonus content for the audio version of this book . SPONSOR: FOCUSRITE Check out the that helps you pick the right model for you . Ready to Start Your Podcast? You can join the School of Podcasting on a , , or a . If you need feedback on your show sign up for a Join worry-free as there is a 30-day MOney-back Guarantee. Full show notes at
If you hate WordPress but want something a little more powerful than the built-in website that comes with your media host then you might want to check out Podpage. Today I interview the create Brenden Mulligan Learn Podpage for Free Sign up at Want to play with it for free? Check out Question of the Month: Who Is Your Dream Guest? 03:10 05:15 06:04 07:30 10:03 Profit From Your Podcast Now Available for Pre-Order Dave's new book "" is now available for Pre-Order. He is looking to get as much word out about it as possible. If you think I'd be a good guest for your show, I'd love to be on your show and help promote my appearance. Sponsor: Focusrite * Scarlett, now in its 3rd Generation, is the world’s best-selling USB interface range with over 3 million units sold worldwide * Choose from 6 different interfaces with 1, 4, or 8 microphone inputs depending on the number of hosts and guests on your show * Superior sound quality makes sure you sound your best * Works with the recording software you’re already using * Works with any type of XLR microphone * Loopback on select units allows you to record Skype or Zoom calls directly into your recording software with no workarounds * New unique Air feature adds brightness and presence to your voice Check out the that helps you pick the right model for you .
As a Marine Biologist, Andrew Lewin from podcast (available in directories like , and ) just wanted to talk about treating the ocean better and keeping it safe. That was less than 10 years ago, now he's a key figure at Ocean Related events, and is becoming THE podcast about ocean conservation. Today we will hear parts of Andrew's story. SPONSOR: FOCUSRITE * Scarlett, now in its 3rd Generation, is the world’s best-selling USB interface range with over 3 million units sold worldwide * Choose from 6 different interfaces with 1, 4, or 8 microphone inputs depending on the number of hosts and guests on your show * Superior sound quality makes sure you sound your best * Works with the recording software you’re already using * Works with any type of XLR microphone * Loopback on select units allows you to record Skype or Zoom calls directly into your recording software with no workarounds * New unique Air feature adds brightness and presence to your voice Check out the that helps you pick the right model for you . Start Your Podcast Today Go to Andrew Lewin Opens Doors With His Podcast 03:12 When did you get the podcast bug? 03:56 When did he start his podcast? 05:40 What kept him going when he first started his podcast? 07:08 Why he didn't tell anyone he was podcasting? 08:25 Andrew gets invited to a conference. 10:50 Andrew was worried about negative feedback. 12:56 Andrew's relationship with Duke University. 14:02 Are these conferences for his job? 17:47 Changing your publishing schedule, what did your audience think? 20:27 Work-Life Balance? 21:38 Did his audience comment on his schedule changes? 23:10 How does his day job feel about his podcast? 24:24 The Toronto Zoo Podcast opportunity. 25:06 TV Show opportunity. 26:19 How do you promote your show? 29:10 Advice for new podcasters Andrew has even begun helping people podcasts on his own site Dave is Speaking This Weekend 35:15 I'll be speaking at and the . Question of the Month 37:04 Who would you like to have on your show and why? Be sure to tell us about your show and your website at Homework For White People 37:51 If you are not a person of color please, its time to get educated. Watch the documentary called on Youtube. Listen to "." You will be amazed at what you learn. Corrupt politicians have not gone away at the local, state, and federal governments. We need to pay attention and vote them out. Rent the movie an Amazon. We need to vote these corrupt people out of office who don't do what we want. We need serious prison and justice reform in this country.
had a typo, and a mistake in the audio ( I said the deadline for June's question of the month was in February). Today we're going to talk about how to fix things when you make a mistake in your podcast. SPONSOR: Focusrite * Scarlett, now in its 3rd Generation, is the world’s best-selling USB interface range with over 3 million units sold worldwide * Choose from 6 different interfaces with 1, 4, or 8 microphone inputs depending on the number of hosts and guests on your show * Superior sound quality makes sure you sound your best * Works with the recording software you’re already using * Works with any type of XLR microphone * Loopback on select units allows you to record Skype or Zoom calls directly into your recording software with no workarounds * New unique Air feature adds brightness and presence to your voice Check out the that helps you pick the right model for you . How to Fix a Mistake In Your Podcast You publish an episode, and you're listening back to it in Apple Podcasts and then OH NO! You hear a mistake. What do you do? Go back to the software you used to create the file and fix the mistake (re-record, eliminate silence, whatever the mistake was). Then export the file using the exact same file name as the original. Then replace the file on your media host (video below). How to Fix A Typo in Your Podcast Show Notes To fix a typo go to whatever tool you use to create your feed and remove the typo and save your changes. It will take up to 24 hours for the update to appear in the Apps. What Happens if You Upload a Repaired Episode with a Different File Name? If you upload your new "updated" file with a different file name, it will take up to 24 hours for Apple (and other apps) to update to see the new file (which means it won't work in the app). Learn from Your Mistakes Once you fix your mistake, don't just move on. Take a second and assess why this happened? Is there anything you can do to avoid this in the future. I always listen to the episode (speeded up) before publishing it. Every time I don't - those are the episodes with the issues. Do you have too much on your plate? Are you trying to hit a self-inflicted deadline that may not be super important to your audience? We all make mistakes, but smart people learn from their mistakes. REALLY SMART people learn from other people's mistakes. Because of My Podcast - I Got to Meet Gary V 23:05 I've said in the past your podcast is not your business, but it can be your business card. Today Mike Simmons from podcast explains how his podcast lead to him meeting Gary Vaynerchuck. If you have a "Because of my podcast " story, . Question of the Month 25:11 What guest would you LOVE to get on your show? (and Why). Go to to answer by June 26th. Don't forget to mention your show, and where we can find it (website). The Truth About Transcripts 25:43 I've been saying that Transcripts are not the best solution for "show notes" as we don't talk like we write and we don't write like we talk. Yet some people preach how "more words equals more visitors." I was listening to the show and Neil Patel (a SERIOUS SEO GURU) and Eric Siu (Major Marketer) explained how they paid to have really good transcriptions and it didn't do anything for their show. It's better to take the transcripts and work them into a blog. ID3 TAGS and SEO? 27:23 ID3 tags are stored inside your mp3 file. People keep obsessing over them and the reason I've heard is they feel it affects their SEO. While apps are transcribing the content of the show for better search, to the best of my knowledge they are not looking at ID3 tags. ID3 tags are only used if someone pulls a file out of the feed (for example they download your episode off your website and listen on their computer. ID3 tags used to have a much more significant place in podcasting, but this has diminished over the years. However, I still add ID3 tags to my files as it takes all of 10 seconds. My Take on Joe Rogan Joe Rogan got...
Question of the Month: Focus Groups 01:43 Currently, I'm obsessed with focus groups. Why? Because every time I hear someone talking about growing their audience the absolute last thing they mention is their content. So I asked my audience if they had ever used a focus group and Max from Avaiant News talk and Sharon from God's Women both share how they had got some feedback and both feel they benefitted from it. Recently I did some market research that had me way out of my comfort zone but the information I received was worth the discomfort. 02:26 Max from Aviation News Talk 04:34 Sharon From All God's Women 06:02 We All Benefit from Constructive Feedback Facebook Vs Mighty Networks On a previous episode, the hosts of the Wealth Without Wall Street were interviewed and mentioned how they had . One of its key ingredients was a Mighty Network. When I looked into this tool, I found it to be the swiss army knife of building communities (and if you want it - revenue). With Facebook losing15 million in the last two years and trust getting lower and lower why not move a separate mobile-friendly location where YOU are in control of your community. Jessica Shamora is the Head of Brand and Growth at Mighty Networks and came to answer my questions: Jessica Shambora and talk about and how you can use them to build community. We talk about why a Mighty Network is better than Facebook and more (see chapter markers for more details). Check out Get Some Feedback on Your Show Two experts with over 40 years of combined experience go over your podcast, your website, your goals, and help promote your show. Go to: June Question of the Month 47:16 This month's question is "Who would be your #1 guest you want on your show?" I need your answer by June 26th. Go to Start Your Podcast Today Join the School of Podcasting Step by step tutorials Live group coaching (get your questions asked) Private Facebook filled with other brilliant podcasting minds Priority email support with private instructional videos (ask a question expect a video answer) 30-day money-back Guarantee Go to
While many podcasters create content as a hobby, today we talk with Daryl Grove (who along with his cohost Taylor Rockwell) create the Toal Soccer Show. Today we talk with Daryl to go over how they make their show, how they interact with their audience, and how they developed the relationships with advertisers and their private membership. 01:35 Why is This Good? I came across the trailer of the show Once upon a Gene and was floored by the emotions that bubbled up to the service. It makes you laugh, cry, and think. The vulnerability of the host sharing her thoughts sucks you in. Her courage to share her disappointments, I found it amazing. Check out the show at Also, Effie was on the latest episode of the 07:16 Introduction to Daryl Grove Delivering Content You Can't Get Any Place Else to a Niche Audience 09:03 Interview with Daryl Grove Sponsor: Before you go promoting your show, shouldn't you get some honest feedback on what is and what is not working with your show? When you order a podcast review you get TWO consultants with over 40 years of combined experience in radio and podcasting. We look at your episodes, audio quality, the flow of content, alignment fo content with your goals, your website, and more. You also appear on the Podcast Review show (for added exposure). Get reviewed today at 42:33 Question of the Month 44:09 Tonight at 7 PM ET 45:18 Webinar Mentioned in This Episode - Once upon a Gene Tonight at 7 PM ET Webinar
You hear alot about LinkedIn (and other social networks) and you may be wondering, should I be using LinkedIn to help grow my podcast? Today I talk with LinkedIn Guru Karen Yankovich who is also a podcaster. If you're new to LinkedIn here are some fun facts: LinkedIn started on May 5, 2003 LinkedIn has 332 million members 2 new users join every second 42 million unique mobile visitors per month. This stat is up from 29 million a year before (This is a 45% increase in just 12 months ) 107 million users are in the USA alone The average time a user spends on LinkedIn is 17 minutes per month 25 million LinkedIn profiles are viewed every day One in three professionals on the planet are on LinkedIn You can increase your LinkedIn views by 11 times by including a photo 41% of users visit Linkedin via mobile 56% of members are male 44% of members are female 30,000 long-form posts are published on Linkedin every week 13% of LinkedIn users don’t have a Facebook account 59% of Linkedin users don’t visit Twitter LinkedIn users spend 26% of their time on LinkedIn using the mobile app source Interview With Karen Yankovich Karen built her multiple 6-figure businesses by learning how to blend high-touch relationship-based marketing with practical business online savvy, and she brings that success to her clients as well. Her mission is to empower entrepreneurs to build highly profitable businesses doing what they love, all while making an impact. Connect with Karen on Check out her Check out her free training at 07:04 Karen Yankovich Interview 08:00 Facebook vs LinkedIn - The Difference? 09:00 Connect or Not Connect with Everyone? 11:01 Top LinkedIn Mistakes 13:24 What Can Podcasters Use LinkedIn For? 15:00 Your LinkedIn Profile 16:55 Articles Vs Posts 18:13 LinkedIn Sales Navigator 20:52 What Does LinkedIn Mean By Active? 21:25 How much time does it take to see results? 25:03 Who is Your Audience? 26:30 The benefits of clarity 28:35 What was the thing that stopped you from publishing? 29:19 Best Feedback from your podcast 30:18 Best LinkedIn Story 32:30 What Does Karen Offer? 38:03 Question of the Month My Main Takeaways Here again, we hear how Karen has a clear idea of WHO she is talking to and trying to reach. LinkedIn is not magic, but it helps you build relationships. Relationships can be magic Don't just contact people and connect to make your numbers grow. You should have a plan. Start a conversation. Do your homework and know who you are contacting so that first impression is a little warmer. Get Some Honest Feedback on Your Podcast Dave Jackson (15 years in podcasting) and Erik K. Johnson (30 Years in radio) will listen to your show, listen to the goals of your show, evaluated your website, audio quality, flow on content and let you know what you're doing right (so you can do more of that) and give you tips on how you can "polish" some parts of your podcast. For more information see Check out previous shows in and We Are Podcast Online Event Question of the Month I'm becoming obsessed with focus groups thanks to watching the TV Show The Profit on CNBC. I see people who are starting to market their show (or wonder why it may not be growing as fast as they want) and it always appears there has been a lack of honest feedback from people you feed would enjoy your show (your target audience). For May the question is again somewhat open-ended. The topic? Focus groups. Did you assemble any feedback? Would you be interested in getting feedback on your show? If you were to start one, do you have any ideas or insights? Send in your answer by May 22nd, 2020 at be sure to mention your podcast and website. Dave's Podcast Half Time Newsletter Get insights into new tools, podcast news and more (unsubscribe any time) See Ready to Start Your Podcast? Check out
Last year I met Brent Besham and She Podcast Live and hear about Poddit. In this interview, you'll learn what Poddit is, and how you can use it. Full show notes at Time Table 03:03 Poddit Interview - Brent Basham 14:43 A Guest Questionnaire 22:11 What Podcasters Can Learn From Michael Jordan 24:22 Focus Groups Tips 27:47 Website Webinar May 20th 28:13 Descript is Pretty Cool 31:16 SOP Housekeeping What is Poddit? People are using email, they're using Google forms, and we're moving a direction to really try to solve that pain point for podcasters where they can push everything to our platform, use our platform. To coordinate and integrate, like the scheduling and all the different parts of it. It could be the central place for coordination of the interview and all the details and reminders, and there's a lot of things. The Goal of Poddit? Poddit wants to be the best way to connect for your next podcast interview. There's a lot of facets to that on each side of the mic and they are exploring and expanding on both sides. Poddit Preview Video to watch the Poddit Preview Video Your Podcast Website Webinar This free webinar will cover what you can do on your website, best practices, and some new tools you can use to create a great looking, highly functional website. Go to Question of the Month Did you use any kind of focus group for your podcast? If you did what did you learn, if not why not? I need your answers by May 22nd, 2020. Be sure to mention your podcast and website (slowly) see Mentioned In This Episode Other Resources For Finding Guests from from School of Podcasting Start Your Podcast Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee go to
Because of My Podcast Kevin from the Check out Kevin's book "." Check out Kevin on the Contributors Arnie Chapman _ Joan Wheeler - Darwyn Dave - David Oliver Kling and Kris from Clay Groves From Zoe and Sammy From the York From Dennis Trumpy - Stephen Indrisano - Kim Newlove - Timothy Kimo Brien - & Mike Thomas - Links to All Items at the Website Time Table 00:43 Because of my Podcast 05:09 What Do You Use to Make Your Podcast 06:07 Arnie Chapman Football History Dude 08:30 Joan Wheeler Culture Rich Podcast 12:09 Darwyn Dave Delling with My Grief 16:37 Dave - Sacimental Whine - MidGaurd Interactive 18:37 Kris - Kris and Kristine Show 21:04 Clay Groves - Fish Nerds 23:44 Zoe & Sammy The Daily Chicken 25:06 York - Poetic Earthlings 26:10 Dennis Trumpy - Sleep to Healthy 28:05 Steven Indrisano - Steven King Boo! Club 32:59 Kim Newlove - The Pharmacists Voice 39:46 Tim From Create Art 42:55 Mike Thomas - Innopsis Podcasts 46:19 Dave - School of Podcasting 50:41 May Question of the Month Become a Paton
Podcasting Goes Over 1 Million Active Podcasts According to the Site My Podcast Reviews, there are now over 1 million active podcasts. They define “active” as any podcast that has published at least one episode in the last 90 days, and “inactive” as any podcast that has not published any episode in that same time." So what does this mean? Podcasting is not a fad Podcasting works Podcasting is continuing to grow Does this mean you are too late. NO! Really podcasting is just getting warmed up. There is still 30% percent of the US that hasn't listened to a podcast yet. Wealth Without Walstreet's Russ and Joey Discuss How Podcasting Boosted Their Business Today we are joined by Russ Morgan and Joey Mure from . This interview was done during a pandemic, children were home from school so my guests Joey and Russ retreated to their closet and to their car to find a quiet place. You have to use what is available and if that is a phone line- that's what you use. This had some great takeaways 07:27 Starting with no real plan 08:44 The Original Community 10:14 Community Tools () 11:26 Podcasting Enhanced Their Services 13:03 Behind the Scenes of the Community 16:10 How their business has changed 17:58 Their Prospects are Better Educated 19:39 How do you know your podcast is good? 22:15 How Do They Choose Their Topics 25:57 Because of My Podcast 29:31 Things That Didn't Work 34:32 Special Deal from Russ and Joey 38:06 Question of the Month Reminder 39:31 Ready To Start You Podcast? 44:04 Bloopers I love that they built a place for their community to find out what they needed (using Might Networks) and they invited their guests to do open Q&A and invited them into their community. You can join their community and take charge of your finances by going to Podcast Quick Launch Back Open As I only allow so many people in the mentoring program at the same time, it was not available for a little while. Those people have gone through the program and it is not available. Click for more information. This Month's Question For April, “What do you use to create your podcast?” This could be hardware, software, business tracking, organizational if you use it in some capacity with the creation of your podcast.” We need your answer by April 24th, 2020. Go to More Detailed Notes at
As a podcast consultant and coach, my biggest struggle is not getting people to pick a name, or artwork, or finding the right gear. Those are all a walk in the park. My hardest part is getting people to start. First I need them to press record, and then I need them (after a few practice runs) to press publish. Then once I get them to publish, you have to be ready to pivot and tweak your podcast unless you think you got it 100% perfect on the very first try. Today I share stories and insights from Danny Elfman Kevin Smith Jeff Dunham Matthew Dicks Bouncecast Software Review See the video podcast review Podcaster Happy Hour Need a place to come hang out and chill. Looking for a place to come and just have some conversations and relax? Check out Question of the Month What do you use to create your show? Answer at Ready To Start Your Podcast? Start Your Podcast Today Join the School of Podcasting Step by step tutorials Live group coaching (get your questions asked) Private Facebook filled with other brilliant podcasting minds Priority email support with private instructional videos (ask a question expect a video answer) 30-day money-back Guarantee Mentioned in this Episode
The Train Wreck That is the Tiger King is in the Top 10 of Netflix After the fourth person had asked me if I had watched the Tiger King on Netflix I decided to give it a try. It's not good. I got about halfway through and only watched the second half looking for closure. It's bad people behaving badly. I was on a Zoom call with my family and my brother had not seen it yet, and as he put it "everybody is talking about it." The whole family said the same thing, "it's awful, its a waste of time." I'm pretty sure he's going to start watching it. Why? Well here are some things podcasters can gleam from Joe Exotic (i.e. The "Tiger King"). Table of Contents: 01:27 I'm in Facebook Jail 21:53 Focusrite Studio Makeover 23:17 Misty Phillip from Spark Christian Podcast Conference 37:23 Podcast Rodeo Show Promo 39:00 Consulting with Dave 39:45 Danny Pena Connects with His Audience 42:19 Question of the Month Promo 43:08 Get On the Podcast 44:32 Bloopers Joe Exoctic is Unique Joe lives in the middle of nowhere Oklahoma. Even by "Florida Man" (home of bizarre behavior) standards Joe Exotic is very unique. I'm going to kind of spoil the show, so if you haven't watched and it and plan on doing so, now is the time to stop reading. Joe is a gun-toting, country music singing, gay, polygamist, Youtuber, who likes to blow things up at his zoo where he has tigers, alligators, and other exotic animals while he manages his campaigns for President and Governor. He is what some people might call "a character." I could go on, but I think I've made my point. Joe Had a Unique Product That Solved a Problem Joe would breed tigers and take the cubs on tours to small where people could pet them and get their picture taken. It's like Santa with claws and teeth. Much like Santa, Joe was taking in the cash because he was providing something you can't get anyplace else. Consequently, he was making some serious cash. Joe Lost Sight of His Audience Joe's arch-nemesis is Carol Baskins who is also "unique" in that her very rich husband disappeared a few years ago making her rich and they never found his body. Carol runs a large cat "Rescue" that looks a lot like a zoo. She has an army of volunteers who work for her. She is basically doing the same thing Joe is (has a large plot of land where people can see large Cats in cages) but Carol has a WHY. Some people become fans of what you do, other people become fans of people because of why they do it. Carol helped Joe's mall tour get shut down. Instead of looking for another solution, another product, or another animal, Joe got distracted. Instead of talking to his audience and asking them what else they might want, he became 100% obsessed with competition. Joe Started To Compare Himself to Others Joe did some things right. He reached out to other large cat owners (who are also living "differently" than most people) and attempted to mimic their success. However, as time goes on you see Joe simply go from hating Carol Baskins, to obsessing over her. His only "TV Show" seemed to be him talking about Carol and what a bad person she was, and how she couldn't bring him down, etc. Joe forgot he was the Tiger King, and became the Carol Baskins King. Comparison is the Thief of Joy The more Joe obsessed over what Carol was up to, the less he focused on his audience. You don't see him looking into adding creating better environments for the cats that might also get the audience closer to the cats. I once lead classes on Microsoft Office to the staff of the Akron Zoo. That is their whole purpose. Making an exhibit that made life enjoyable for the animals while getting the audience as close as possible and keeping both the animal and audience safe. Over the years their audience has grown and their prices have risen as well as you get a great experience and don't have to spend an hour driving to Cleveland. Surround Yourself with Good People The part of the story that tugged at my heart more than the Tigers, was one of Joe's...
I thought it would be a good idea for Radio Personalities (DJs) to have a podcast. I know that they often lose their jobs due to the consolidation of stations, automation, genre changes, and more. However, I only thought it was a good idea. I didn't know because I only know to podcast, Erik K. Johnson is the Podcast Talent Coach and co-host of The Podcast Review show and he's been in radio 30 years and is a program director for iHeart Media. So I asked Erik for his opinion and he gave me three reasons radio personalities should have a podcast Note: Most of this post was transcribed from the recording, so when you read "We" it's Erik and iHeart (not Erik and myself). Three Reasons Radio DJs Should Have Their Own Podcast Built-in Demo Freedom To Talk About Whatever You Want Develop a Deeper Brand Be sure to read the contract and know what you're signing. Mentioned in this Episode Thanks to: Arnie from Steve Stewart from Brande Ushio from Table of Contents 1:43 Focusrite Studio Makeover 3:46 Revisit Bad Audio 5:26 Three Reasons Radio Personalities Should Have a Podcast 17:07 Say No to Puke Voice 19:53 Question of the Month Ready to Start Your Podcast See
What do people mean when they say "Bad Audio" well I made some. You will hear where some strategies DO create bad audio and others (using your phone may not be horrible). SPONSOR: Focusrite Focusrite is giving away a $2300 studio makeover. This includes the Scarlett 18i8, a Heil PR40, headphones, Hindenburg software, a deep discount on Squadcast, consulting and more (I wish I could enter). To enter the contest go to Mentioned in this Episode Start Podcasting Worry Free Join the School of Podcasting and get access to: Step by step tutorials Private Facebook group filled with great podcasting minds Live group coaching sessions Priority Email support Go to 30-Day Money-Back Guarantee Table of Contents 01:30 Focusrite Studio Makeover 03:31 Defining what Bad Audio Sounds Like 03:54 Built-in Camera Mic 04:42 Built-in Laptop Mic 05:36 Recording into Voicememo on My iPhone 06:12 Samson Q2U in the Bathroom 07:29 Using Blankets 08:09 Dave in His Closet 09:01 Blue Yeti in the Bathroom 10:34 Blue Yeti under Blankets 11:01 Blue Yeti in the Closet 12:26 Blue Yeti on a Desk 12:55 Q2U in the Closet 14:31 Trying to Clean Bad Audio 16:16 Do Portable Audio Booths Work? 20:15 Noise Gate Example 21:56 EQ Settings to Try 24:59 EQ Examples 26:38 Podcast Rewind 29:44 Some Light Reading 31:30 March Question of the Month 32:02 schoolofpodcasting.com/725
The Corona Virus Closed My School and I Need a Podcast NOW Across the US (and the world) schools are closed to try to reduce the number of people spreading the Carona Virus. This makes it very hard for teachers who still need to deliver lesson plans. With this in mind, I've made a video that shows you how to turn your lesson plans into a podcast. It's free, and the strategy uses free tools. Sponsor: Focusrite Focusrite is giving away a $2300 studio makeover. This includes the Scarlett 18i8, a Heil PR40, headphones, Hindenburg software, a deep discount on Squadcast, consulting and more (I wish I could enter). To enter the contest go to Free Video Set Up Your Podcast in 20 Minutes Click to get access to video Wait, am I giving away the School of Podcasting stuff? No. Starting a podcast is easy. Starting a GOOD podcast is not. There is no "define your audience," and "define or why" or "check your band alignment" here, this is simply putting content (that may or may not sound great) on the internet for people to listen. Tips for Working From Home Avoid working in a room with a television. I've got tips on in a . In some cases, close the door to "block out" the rest of your home (to avoid distractions). What Does The Caronoavirus Mean For Podcasting? In some cases, your audience may be bored. They may find themselves with "Free time." I believe in one of Michael Hyatt's books he says when situations like this arise look around and say "what does this enable me to do that I normally don't do." Spend more time with your spouse and children. Read a book (or listen to a podcast) Clean your house (that's my plan this weekend) See who can use the smallest amount of squares to wipe their butt. Watch some cooking videos and cook from home. I made a dish last night called "Not Chipotle" that was chicken, rice, lettuce, cheese, and a bit of french salad dressing. Create an online mastermind Jump rope, push-ups, dust off the treadmill. Watch Saturday Night Live (it's still on) (or even better) Go to bed early. Eat all those things in the fridge and freezer that you bought by accident (asparagus! what?). New food is exciting (and often freezer burnt). There is a feature on your phone that if I understand this correctly you can "Call" (Whatever that is ) people and talk to them in real-time. When I was married and things would go left of center, my wife and I would look at each other and say "Well, this is going to be a fun adventure..." Remember where there is a shadow, there is a light. You'll be able to look back and say "I lived through that." Because of My Podcast: Jim Harold has Met a TON of Childhood Heroes has been on this show a few times. He is the man behind the Paranormal Podcast, and recently launch a podcast where he talks to other podcasters called "." In a he stated, "You know, I've done different podcasts over the years, some of them have, "caught on," and they are part of my business and I make money on them. There were other shows that haven't caught on as much, but we're just cool to do. Jim did a show called "" and it's still available. Jim loves classic TV ( TV from the 60s and 70s). Jim did the Great TV Podcast and he got to talk to Ed Asner who Mary Tyler Moore Show. He got to talk to Marianne from Gilligan's Island. He got to talk to the late Richard Hatch from Battlestar Galactica. Oher interviews were Donnie Most from happy days ( he played Ralph M). Judy Norton from the Waltons. That is the power of podcasting as Jim put it, "If I had called up Ed as an agent and said, you know, I'd like to talk to Ed Asner for a half-hour about his career. I just think it would be cool. Well, that's not gonna happen. I've got a podcast. He has a new play coming out. Can I talk to him? I certainly know that is the opportunity. The people I've gotten to talk to who I would have never had a chance to get that alone aside from being my job has been a great reward. So, I mean, the opportunity, aside from money...
Today I am recording from Podfest Multimedia Expo 2020 and I capture a conversation with in the hallway after he shares an amazing story about listener loyalty. Sometimes we are our own worst enemy. When we don't give ourselves credit, this belief limits our success. Focusrite Studio Makeover Focusrite wants to help remove any barriers to your creativity by outfitting your podcast studio with products from some of the best brands in content creation. We’ve partnered with them to award three podcasters with a complete studio makeover valued at over $2300 each and the chance for you and your podcast to be featured in a video project produced by Focusrite! For more information and a list of prizes see Enter the competition today! Timeline 00:00 Focusrite Giveaway 03:20 Table of Contents 04:33 Because of My Podcast Ronsley Vaz 17:22. Recorded Using an iPhone 18:17. Give Yourself Credit Mentioned In this Episode Book: Amplify: Start Your Podcast Today Step by step tutorials Live group coaching (get your questions asked) Private Facebook filled with other brilliant podcasting minds Priority email support with private instructional videos (ask a question expect a video answer) 30-day money-back Guarantee
Descript is software that transcribes your episode and then you can go to the transcript and when you removed it from your transcript, it removes it from the audio. You can fade in and cuts that are a little rough to smooth them out. You can mix in music, have multiple mics go into two different tracks so you can edit the "cough" out from person number two while person number one was talking. Enjoy the live demo of Descript in this episode 712 of the School of Podcasting. Table of Contents 01:09 What is Descript? 08:16 Descript Demo 19:20 How Much Is It? 20:02 Descript vs Otter.ai 22:40 My Podcast Reviews Free Month Dela Extended 24:12 #podrevday March 8th 25:03 Because of My Podcast- Carey Green 29:56 schoolofpodcasting.com/start 30:29 Robin Chsitopherson loved the Glow Episode 33:07 March Podcasting Events 37:57 Bloopers Descript Live Demo - Transcripts are more than just words While many people take the lazy way to show descriptions by thinking transcripts are the golden ticket. In my opinion, transcripts are hard to read and I often click away (which means this is the opposite of what people were hoping for, and Google calls this "bouncing" coming to one page and leaving). A transcript can speed up editing by making it easy to see the parts that definitely need edit, and you will be able to see your crutch words. That is where descript has a very interesting feature. , you see me right-click and erase 14 "ums." Were all the edits perfect? No, but you can use additional tools like fading into a word to smooth out and roughs edit. The price is $10 a month for up to 10 hours of transcription (which is lightning fast). We have a coupon code pec2020 through the end of March 2020 you can get 10% off a yearly subscription. Thanks to Steve Stewart and the , and the for allowing us to borrow their coupon. My Podcast Reviews - Get A Free Month Deal Extended 22:40 I interviewed Daniel J Lewis back on talking about My Podcast Reviews which scans all of the apple stores and emails you copies of your reviews (or your competitors) where you can then share them, add them to your media kit, etc. Originally the offer of a free month was to end in February but the free month offer has been extended until March 7,2020. Go to to get your free month Podcast Review Day March 8 #podrevday 24:12 Steph Fuccio has started a tradition of picking one day out of the month to review at least one podcast. You can join in on Twitter and Instagram by using #podrevday -. Because of My Podcast - Carey Green Carey Green is a podcast editor (see ) and does a podcast about podcasting at but his show has been growing very quickly, and he is having meetups with listeners, and now he is frequently receiving prayer requests. Carey is now doing one episode where it is Carey praying for multiple people on one episode. Think about the comfort and closeness one must feel to ask someone "Will you pray for me?" Check out Carey's Morning Mindset podcast at Robin Christopherson loved the Glow Episode Robin does a daily show about Amazon skills. He has a large audience but was looking for a new way to monetize his show. He heard my interview with and loved it. You can hear it at If you want to check out my Glow page see March Podcasting Events March 3: Podcast Portland Meetup March 4: The Publisher Podcast Awards March 6-8: Podfest Multimedia Expo March 6: Podcast Editors Club, Spots Podcon and others) March 7: Podfest Cairo March 9-11: New Media Summit March 11: Podup Virtual Summit March 16: Northeast Ohio Podcasters Meetup March 17: California Podcasters Association (Oakland) March 17 Virginia Podcasters Association Meetup March 19-20 Become a Podcaster in One Day March 19: Podcast Cracking the Code March 19: Phoenix Podcast Club Social March 31: Columbus Podcasters Meetup For more information see Ready to Start Your Podcast? Step by step tutorials Live group coaching (get your questions asked) Private Facebook filled with other...
I was in Houston for the Spark Christian Podcast Conference where I was speaking. It was a great event for the first time out of the gate and I met some really cool people. My buddy Sunny from the IPN asked me if I wanted to go see Joel Osteen who runs the largest church in America and is also an author and someone I refer to as "Happy Jesus Man." Jole is incredibly successful (his church is the building where the Houston Rockets professional basketball team played. It's a stadium that holds 16,800 people). I have listened to Joel on and off over the years. I went to feed my spiritually, but I was also there to observe and look for the clues of his success. You don't get this big without doing something right. Time Codes 01:08 Spark Christian Podcast Conference Review 02:38 What Podcasters Can Learn from Joel Osteen 30:52 How did you get over your self Doubt? 41:10 Free Webinar on Equipment 42:19 Have you surveyed your audience? Joel Started As A Geek Joel was the technical person in his church working with his father. He was the lighting tech and worked for his Dad. Joel Did Something Different There is a style of preaching in the church known as "Hellfire and brimstone." This is where you explain to your audience that if you don't accept Jesus you are going to Hell where there will be weeping and gnashing of teeth. Instead of peaching about the horrors of Hell, Joel went to the bible and found all sorts of scriptures that point out how God wants you to prosper. Some have deemed this the prosperity Gospel, and because it's different than what people previously did, this has its critics. This has not swayed Joel from his message. He is covering the bible the way he wants to. He Makes it Easy for First Time Visitors Sunny and I had walked into what appeared to be a side door, and weren't exactly sure where to go. It was easy to identify who the staff was and we just walked up and said, "Hi this is our first time here." The worker knew exactly what to do and before I could blink I was given to a person who was giving me a tour of the building and explaining that there was a book store and if I wanted to buy anything Joel would sign it at the end of the night. He then escorted us to fourth-row center stage seats. I felt lucky. I felt special. The sanctuary was beautiful. They had cool lights in the ceiling and an amazing backdrop behind the band, and a choir made of people of every shape, size, and color. He Honored The Heritage of the Church and What They Believed in He played clips of his father who started the church and acknowledged those who came before him. Oh, I'm sorry this isn't for you... It's for the academy of podcasters. Let's move on. It Was a Well Oiled Machine There were no lags in the presentation. You didn't see the praise band ask, "He should we move on to the missing thing" and then someone says "Yeah, let's do the missing thing. Let's roll the mission intro." When the song was over, the mission people came out, the spoke about a conference that had just wrapped up. They introduced the video about how they were helping with Ebola in Africa and the video clip came on. Everyone knows what was next. They Through in a Curve Ball Their band did two praise songs (very upbeat - very easy to sing along) that engaged the audience. Then one of the soloists on the stage snuck into the audience at the end of the song. She then launched into an old Christian classic "Nothing but the blood" from the back of the auditorium so the people in the back now get the same view as those in the front. Most music performers pull this trick in concerts. They went back to singing more songs from the front of the stage. Pacing and Anticipation This is a great tip for those narrative style storytellers. They kept the service moving with the music, but about five songs into their performance their backdrop which looked like the galaxy with millions of stars started to reveal the word JESUS in big bright letters as the band hit a...
Table of Contents 01:29 How Do You Compete Against Large Networks? 06:44 25 People Vs 1 09:42 Two Things That Kill Podcasts 11:52 Buying an Audience 15:32 Life Without the School of Podcasting 17:01 So How Do You Compete? 19:24 Jet Ski vs Cruise Ship 21:53 Downloads are only ONE way of measuring Success 24:28 Free Webinar 2/26 25:01 Golden Mic Announcement 34:23 Where I Will Be 34:45 Question of the Month I hear this question a lot: How am I supposed to compete? It'll be something like I've been podcasting for three years. There are these other podcasters who I'm pretty sure are buying their audience. They're spouting their numbers, and they're gigantic. How am I supposed to compete with somebody like that? I totally understand that question. Here are some things to consider: You Can't Compete Because its a good visual. How would a seventeen-year-old boxer compete against the champion who has held the title for six years? You don't put that kid in the ring. He's going to get killed. The experience, the stamina, he just isn't ready. He is completely out of his league. But I've Been Podcasting For Three Years But Dave, I've been podcasting for three years. You say that in some cases, you know people who are really starting to make a difference with their podcast at three years mark. To this I say"Uh-huh," but here are some things that we need to think about. We never know what's going on behind the scenes with a podcast. You might have a job (or two) and a spouse and some kids. The other podcast may not have any of those. Can you imagine how much free time you would have to promote if you didn't have any other activities and could focus on your podcast 100% of the time? So if you look at podcasters from the outside, there's a person with a podcast here, and another podcaster over there and you think they are the same and they are not. We have no idea what is going on behind the scenes. They might have a background in selling and your background is in teaching. thanked 25 people at the end of their show. I am an army of one. Can I compete? In 2015ish I was up for a Podcast Movement Podcast Award and one of the shows in my category was Reply All. I was competing against them. I've also had my Logical Weight Loss podcast compete against Jillian Michaels. Can we compete? Yes. The minute you turn on the microphone you are competing. Some of the things these teams of 25 use you don't need (original music?). While great production is like icing on a cupcake, if its all icing (and no cupcake) that doesn't work (see serial season two). The Two Things That Kill a Podcast BABIES Babies are so selfish. It's all about them. All they scream is feed me, wipe my butt, I want a nap. That can really get on your nerves (kidding). COMPARTING YOUR PODCAST TO OTHERS When you say "how do I compete" at the hear you are comparing your show to others, and that can seriously do nasty things to your content. If you ever feel yourself comparing yourself - STOP. STOP COMPARING YOUR SHOW TO OTHERS. You need three things to create good content: Your attitude Your health The support of those around you ( for a deep dive into this subject). There is no competition I am a co-host on the Podcasters Roundtable with Daniel J. Lewis and Ray Ortega. Technically both of these people are my "competition" but they are not. Why? Because you can listen to me on Monday, Daniel on Tuesday, and Ray on Wednesday. As long as you deliver value, you're safe and don't have to worry. You Can't Buy An Audience You can buy an opportunity for people to hear your show, but you can't pay them to listen. Your podcast needs to provide value so they will come back because they want more. Holly Barey is beautiful. In 2004 they put her in a Catwoman suit, spent a million dollars to my $82 million (a loss of 18 million). On Rotten Tomatoes the with 197 people voting. In 2009 Disney worked on a movie called John Carter based on a popular book. According to Wikipedia...
If you're listening to this it means you're a subscriber so thanks for being a subscriber. It's here the logo from Tell Mark that Dave sent ya. See you Monday.
Audience Engagement In a previous episode about Glow.fm I talked about how hard it is to obtain an engaged audience and you might be lucky if you get 5% engagement. This week on the finale of The Good Place they mentioned the Podcast , and on a previous episode of Radio Lab they mentioned how 29,000 people are helping to pay for the production of the podcast. The interesting thing is due to their massive audience 29,000 is not even 1% of their audience. I bring this up not to depress you, but so we can all move forward making informed decisions. Eric Nuzum Eric Nuzum is the cofounder of Magnificent Noise and creator of iconic podcasts. Over the past 14 years, he has made podcasts that routinely top the charts, appear in yearly “best of” lists, win awards, and generate hundreds of millions of downloads. He started NPR’s podcasting efforts in 2005 and remained that effort’s chief creative and strategic force for the following decade, leading NPR to become the largest distributor of podcasts in the world. Eric developed some of NPR’s most successful podcasts, and continued that record of success during his tenure as Audible’s leader for short-form content and podcasting. In 2019, he co-founded Magnificent Noise, a podcast production and creative consulting company based in New York City. Eric’s book on audio and podcast creation, titled Make Noise: A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling. Today we talk to Eric and talk about 03:56 Eric Nuzum Interview 15:39 How do you estimate the size of an audience 18:08 The 10 Word Challenge 25:57 How do Indies Compete with NPR? 29:32 Fixing a Flat Stats Issue 31:23 Lessons from Taylor Swift 33:22 The History of Podcasting Mentioned in this Episode
Every month we have a "question of the month" and this month it's what are you going to do differently in 2020 with your podcast? Because of My Podcast Lee from the podcast was trying to speak at a panel. He was sensing a little pushback until he mentioned he had a podcast ( and got the speaking gig). He also got some "street cred" from his kids who were impressed the "old guy" was doing something so hip as a podcast. What Are You Going to Different? As 2020 is upon us what are you going to try? Thanks for What is Stopping You From Starting Your Podcast? Nobody wants my opinion Technology Anxiety Time Perfectionism Overwhelm Equipment Co-hosts Question of the Month How did you overcome thinking "Nobody would listen to me" thinking or worrying about negative feedback? Go to Glow Follow Up Some of my audience had issues (but to their credit they fixed any issues. In the end, I had 1.06% of my audience went to So this is why I say some people get UP TO 3% of their audience engaging with their content. Options. (here is my page) You can also use a paypal donation link. Check out Subscribe to the show at Full show notes at Mentioned in This Episode Table of Contents 00:01:19 Because of My Podcast 00:03:22 What are you going to do differently in 2020 00:04:33 Author Inside You 00:05:25 Talk about Talk 00:06:56 Radio Fire Radio 00:10:04 Gather Geeks Podcast 00:11:28 Repurpose Your Career Podcast 00:14:53 Uncommon Life 00:15:53 Kids Health !01 00:17:02 Brew Roots Podcasts 00:18:47 Games From Folk Tales 00:22:41 What is Stopping You From Starting a Podcast 00:31:06 Feb. Question of the Month 00:32:42 Where I Will Be 00:33:46 Glow .FM Follow Up 00:40:30 Bloopers
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00:00:58 Slow Down When You Talk About Yourself 00:03:08 Podcast Magazine 00:08:50 Glow.fm Interview 00:31:38 Fun with Math 00:42:28 Question of the Month 00:43:26 Podcasting Events 00:45:33 schoolofpodcasting.com/start Different Ways of Accepting Money From Your Podcast Today I talk with Amira Valliani the CEO of If you can make it EASY for your audience to give you money in either a one time, monthly, or yearly format. You can provide suggested amounts but they can change it (if you let them). The key is you want to make it easy for people to sign up. The easier it is to give you money, the less value that needs to be present. Patreon.com This is a website and app that allows you to create tiers of support. Think of it as a crowdfunding site like Kickstarter that keeps on going. You can also upload audio directly to Patreon and provide a private RSS feed for the use. If they cancel their subscription they lose access. Patreon 8% for their pro plan (does not include processing fees which are typically around 3%). This means the podcaster keeps 89%. MyLibsyn.com This is a website and custom app where you can have public and private information. You can set your podcast to have the latest (X amount) of episodes for free and then the older episodes you need to pay to hear. This is a "Set it and forget it" system. The podcaster keeps 70-80% based on the number of members you have. Glow.fm For those who just want to accept donations/payments (one time, monthly, or yearly) you only pay the processing fees (as they use stripe that would be 2.9% + 30¢). If you want to have bonus content or private content, they charge .55 per user. If someone pays you $2 that means you keep 73%. Keep in mind the more people pay, the higher the percentage. For example, if someone pays $5 a month that means you keep 89% Never Forget the Rule of 3% While it would be great to get 50% or 30% or even 10% of your audience, most people find that 3% is based in reality with 5% being a really good example. How is Glow Different? There are tools like Paypal that allow you to make branded landing pages see or With the cash.app you need to download an app and create an account. With Paypal you need to provide an email address to pay with a credit card (you can pay without having a paypal account). They all seem to take the same 3%. With Glow after you pay a podcast it will ask you if you want to complete your setup (optional), but if you continue you choose a password and now you have a Glow.fm account. I could be missing something, but I'm not seeing a ton of difference except glow.fm gives you a little more control over your brand (although I wish companies would tell you what size of the image to use instead of letting up guess). Premium Plans If you have a listener pay you $5/month you would Keep $4.30 with Glow.fm (5 - (.55+.15)) Keep $4.45 with Patreon (5 - (.4+.15) In doing the math, you don't make more money selling bonus/private content until you charge $13/month. In that instance, you would keep $11.36 with Glow, and $11.28 with Patreon. Also, keep in mind with Patreon you can upload audio (and get ZERO stats on downloads). With Glow.fm you can use most media hosts to provide private feed for your bonus content. Buy Dave a Coffee If you've like to support the show as well as see Glow in action or go to Podcast Magazine Launching in January I will be appearing in the inaugural edition of . In having some email back and forth with Editor in Chief Seve Olsher he said there are three reasons for starting this magazine. 1) We are passionate about podcasting and want to do our part to support its growth. Podcasting has, we believe, reached an important tipping point for either attaining critical mass or returning to its roots as a compelling tool for hobbyists. We are unabashedly committed to doing whatever we can to ensure that podcasting’s current status reflects its embryonic stages rather than the maturation of the medium. 2)...
Today we talk about creating great content that people will share, and take a slightly deeper dive into the topic by looking at WTF by Marc Maron. When I reverse engineered the content I consumed, I noticed that no matter if its a book, magazine, TV show, or movie, whatever I'm consuming: Made me laugh Made me cry Made me think Made groan Educated me Entertained me. Ingredients in a Good Podcast When I look at other elements that make a good podcast they: Allow you to see the vulnerable side of the host or guest. Have a host with great listening skills. Include "Behind the Scenes" information that you can get anyplace else. Include great follow up questions that reflect what the listener would ask. Know your audience. Create a focus group of listeners who will provide honest feedback. The courage to say things that will draw them closer to their target while separating them from some. Make me wonder what is going to happen next? Table of Contents for Episode 705 00:00:45.775 Boston Reflections 00:02:23.525 Because of My Podcast 00:07:29.325 If You Content Is Shunned By the Media 00:14:07.300 schoolofpodcasting.com/start 00:15:35.900 Question of the Month 00:16:09.500 What Made This Episode Good? 00:25:49.150 Being Vulnerable 00:29:20.175 Adding A Tease 00:29:59.475 Sharing Stories 00:31:16.225 What Was That Like? 00:32:50.800 Raw Emotion is Moving 00:34:43.875 A Great First Question 00:37:20.550 Technology Issues 00:38:28.850 Why Did They Leave it In? 00:39:17.700 Podcasting Boost Your Confidence 00:39:57.783 Great Follow Up Questions 00:40:49.291 Know Your Guest - Know The Show 00:44:33.712 Bloopers Because Of My Podcast: Fred Castenada Fred from the Podcast Reporter podcast heard about with a military background and podcast and reached out. Because Fred has a podcast they've connected and found out they both served in the 82nd airborne. Question Of the Month NOT PODCASTING YET? What do you feel is stopping you from starting your podcast? ALREADY PODCASTING? What are you going to do differently this year and why? I need the answers in by January 24th, 2020. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question to leave your answer. Mentioned In this Episode Join the School of Podcasting Erik K. Johnson's episode on creating a good tease. Robbie Samuels On the Schmooze Podcast ( great first question) Marc Maron's WTF Podcast. The episode with BRAD PITT & LEONARDO DICAPRIO Ed Sullivan's Sonic Cupcake Audio Editing The Cigar Authority Podcast. Which Dave uses to promote 2 Guys Cigars Check out the Studio 21 Cafe where they record the podcast. AMAZING
Every January I get people who want to start a podcast and I am glad to help them, but there are some people who have absolutely unrealistic expectations. Today I want to talk about what to expect. Every podcaster starts with the same two things: A) No audience B) Integrity I Can't Make the Podcast Filled with Lies 00:00:19.728 Podcast Piggy Bank Can You Answer the Question? 00:02:52.782 The Scariest Podcast Question 00:04:51.045 Who Are You Talking To? 00:06:47.223 Targeting Your Audience How Many Download Should I Expect When I launch? I asked many different groups of podcasters and asked them how many downloads did they get for their first episode after one week. It wasn't 1000, or 500. It wasn't 100 or even 50. From what I've seen and heard very few people I talked to got more than twenty downloads to their first podcast after the first week. While you typically measure a podcast episode after a month of downloads, I wanted to let people know what to expect after a week. 00:09:58.450 How many downloads to episode 1? How Can I Make the Most While Working the least? 00:12:53.681 First of the year problems 00:15:22.916 How long does it take to be profitable? 00:17:18.811 Why Businesses Fail 00:18:27.966 Do any businesses succeed? If All You Can Aford is Free - You Have Other Issues That Need Your Attention 00:21:48.925 If Free is the Only Option - Then Pause is the Solution Because of My Podcast 00:28:47.815 Paul explains how he got to meet one of his podcasting heroes. January Question of the Month 00:32:12.381 This month we have two versions of the question. If you don't have a podcast, what is holding you back? If you DO have a podcast, what do you plan on doing differently in 2020? Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question I need your answers by 1/24/20. Where I Will Be 00:33:09.268 January 11th National Speakers Association Waltham, MA Ready to Get Your Message Out There? I'm ready to help you and look forward to working with you. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start Mentioned in This Episode Make Noise: A Creator's Guide To Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling How long does it take to make money Another example of how long it takes Beyond Powerful Radio: Valerie Geller
Every year I ask my audience: 1. What is their favorite podcast 2. Why is it their favorite? I also want to know about their podcast if they have one, and where we can find these shows. Time Table: This episode has been created with chapters. Your app may skip to the next chapter by clicking the right arrow button. 00:01:13 Focusrite Scarlet Interfaces 00:05:00 Emily Prokop 00:07:23 Scott Johnson 00:10:59 Randy Cantrell 00:12:23 Joan Wheeler 00:14:00 Arnie Chapman 00:15:52 Clayton Allen 00:18:06 Charles McFall 00:20:57 Ed Sullivan 00:22:00 Chris Curran 00:23:43 Clay Groves 00:25:31 Donald Winn 00:27:21 Fred Castenda 00:28:58 Terry Nords 00:32:13 Daniel J Lewis 00:35:57 Kim Kracji 00:38:47 Wayne Henderson 00:42:13 Jennifer Longworth 00:43:28 Jason Bryant 00:46:39 The Rafferties 00:47:55 Seth 00:50:25 York 00:51:38 Shane Whaley 00:53:33 Veronica Hugger 00:54:52 Steve Stewart 00:57:01 Timothy Brien 00:58:20 Troy Price 01:00:04 Dave Jackson's Favorite 01:01:50 Where am I going? 01:02:43 January Question of the Month 01:04:14 Bloopers 01:05:20 Easter Egg Full links at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/703 Ready To Start Your Podcast? Visit www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start
01:39 Because of My Podcast 06:33 Focusrite Scarlet USB Interfaces 08:35 Is it Too Late To Start a Podcast? 24:16 Great Podcasts Lead to Binge Listening 26:08 Question of the Month 28:09 Hindenburg Chapters Trick 30:45 The Importance of File Management 35:51 Podcastingevents.net 38:59 Bloopers Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/702 Sponsor: Focusrite Ready to Podcast? www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start
Today I take a lesson from my nine-year-old niece who goes crazy about a Christmas toy that makes absolutely no sense at all. I also have a great conversation with Cole River of Podchaser to explain what it is, where it's going and how you can use it in your podcasting effort. See the School of Podcasting at https://www.podchaser.com/podcasts/school-of-podcasting-64937 Here is my profile on Podchaser Table of Contents: 00:01:11.850 Question of the Month 00:02:19.600 Focusrite USB Interfaces 00:04:13.957 Different is Better Than Better 00:13:13.993 Cole Raven From Podchaser.com 00:35:01.521 How I Might Use Podchaser 00:36:56.585 Apple Podcasts Now on Alexa 00:41:09.000 Blooper Mentioned in this Show Sally Hogshead author of the book Fascinate Your Podcast Consultant Podcast Squdcast for Recording Interviews Ready to Start and Grow Your Podcast? www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start
Today I spend a small amount of time remember the past 700 episodes. Then I launch into a "Lightning Round" if you're a new podcaster or seasoned veterans you should get something out of this show. Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/700
Clay Groves is one of the nicest guys on the planet. I always smile when I see him at an event. I know I'm going to be smiling and laughing soon. He is the host of Fish Nerds, and over the years when I saw him in person he would tell me a "Because of My podcast" Story and when I heard his last one, I said, "I need to have you come on the show and share these stories. In today's interview you will hear: 6:44 Clay sold some of these stories 12:11 Clay has been paid to speak 14:59 His relationships have lead to more and more opportunities 16:09 Clay launches a business doing fishing tours 20:28 What equipment does Clay use to record on a boat? 22:51 Clay builds a path to radio 28:54 Clay gets the call 39:20 Clay quits his day job. 43:24 Clay's 12-Year-old daughter is podcasting Podcasting is Like Fishing 46:58 Question of the Month for December I do this every year. Please record your response and include the following: Your name and the name of your podcast Your website where we can find your podcast A brief synopsis of what your podcast is about (who it's for, and what to expect) What is your favorite podcast from 2019? Why is it your favorite? What is the website of this podcast? I need the answers in by December 27th, 2019 so it can be heard on December 30th. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question (I really need these in audio format) Mentioned In This Episode Fish Nerds Podcast Clays Equipment: Zoom H4n ATR 2100 Microphone 93.5 WMVW National Podcast Publishing Month Join the School of Podcasting Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start and get access to the courses, group coaching, and private network. Put your worries about getting the wrong equipment, sounding stupid, and shaping your show behind you. Join worry-free with a 30 day money-back guarantee www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start
Today we are talking about Plugins. Plugins are things you add to your audio editing software to make it better, more efficient, etc. The best way to avoid buying these (or using these) is to record good audio in the first place. That is not always an option (especially with interview shows with guests) so there is a company that has a bundle on sale 72% off and I put it through some tests. Please note this is an affiliate link (but also note - some of these are not great). For videos and more information see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/era Videos and more at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/698 Question of the Month 20:00 What is bugging you? Brandy Henry from engaging on social media with Brandy Henry Karrie Bond from the Keywest Perspective Podcast Jason Sacco from The Ankylosing Spondylitis Podcast Libsyn and Spotify Changes Spotify no longers makes a copy of your file and puts it on their website (they serve it directly from Libsyn). This makes it much easier to replace a file. This also means your stats are going to shift in the Libsyn dashboard. Instead of being in a separate section, the Spotify stats will go under the "normal" Libsyn stats (so don't panic). Question of the Month for December I do this every year. Please record your response and include the following: Your name and the name of your podcast Your website where we can find your podcast A brief synopsis of what your podcast is about (who its for, and what to expect) What is your favorite podcast from 2019? Why is it your favorite? What is the website of this podcast? I need the answers in by December 27th, 2019 so it can be heard on December 30th. Mentioned In This Episode First Things First (Book by Steven Covey) The Stephen R. Covey Interactive Reader - 4 Books in 1 (includes audio and video) Audphonic Levelizing and Noise Removal Tool Start Your Podcast - Grow Your Influence (and numbers) Join the School of Podcasting and quit worrying about buying the right equipment, sounding stupid, unprofessional, etc. We take you from idea to influencer and offer a 30-day money-back guarantee. Sign up for a monthly or yearly subscription.
So many people jump to podcast advertising when they think of making money with their podcast. This may be partially due to listening to the radio which makes its money via advertising. About Heather Osgood She started her career in advertising sales and quickly learned the valuable lessons in what it meant to be a business owner. Additionally, she has served as a business coach to hundreds of small business owners. With a background in radio advertising and a love for podcasting, Heather was in a unique position to start an agency that could help both advertisers get better results as well as assist podcasters in finding sponsors. She founded True Native Media in January of 2016 with the hopes of helping everyone find a bigger piece of that advertising pie, and acquired j/k media agency in the fall of 2017 to further those goals. Check out the Market Success with Podcast Advertising show. Podcast Advertising Insights In this episode with Heather Osgood we learn: What expectations both the podcaster and advertiser should have in place. How many downloads advertisers are looking for in a podcast. The best stat to measure your podcast in regards to advertising. What the current CPM rates are. The different types of advertising. How long you should run an advertisement Why dynamic ad insertion may be a way to get enough downloads to meet the advertiser download requirements. Key Points Going forward it may be more important when someone listens instead of when the show was published (especially for evergreen content). If you use programmatic advertising (which pays from what I've calculated .0017 cents per download) why would an advertiser agree to pay more when they know you will accept less? Check out the Market Success with Podcast Advertising [click_to_tweet tweet="Everything you wanted to know about podcast advertising" quote=" Everything you wanted to know about podcast advertising" theme="style3"] Mentioned in This Podcast Spark Christian Podcast Conference February 21-20, 2020 Houston Texas Podcast Movement Evolutions February 12-15, 2020 Los Angelas, Ca Book Me to Speak at Your Event. I'd love to hear from you Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
In the same way that kids on Halloween want candy, podcasters want downloads. How much? MORE is the only answer. Should your list your show in (insert directory name)? Well, will it help you potentially grow your audience? Then the answer is yes. Yes, Stitcher and Luminary both run ads in between your episodes (and you get none of that revenue), but for me the potential of more listeners outweighs it. Luminary has also burned through 100 million and has received another 30 million to burn through. Links Mentioned In This Episode Social Subscribe and Follow Plugin Podlords Text Expander Karen Jackson A long look Slow Art Your Podcast Consultant School of Podcasting Podcasting Resources More Information There are tutorials, videos, and links to directories at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/696
From time to time I see people in Facebook groups announcing "Hey I got my first 1000 download episode!" or "I just got (insane amount of money)" for my podcast. When you are just starting out, or even if you've been podcasting for a while if you're just looking at downloads or dollars, the inspiration to keep going can be hard to come by. Today we are going to examine the other ways your podcast is a success. SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School Be equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee. Program Includes: LIVE Interactive Online Training Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran Major Discounts on Software and Plugins Lifetime Access to the PES closed community Certificate of Completion Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP. Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com Other Ways To Count Podcast Success If your goal was to find like-minded people (cause your spouse said they would not participate in any more conversations around Batman) and you've found some people online to have the conversations you've been longing to have - your podcast is a success. If you had no luck getting in touch with certain people - but the minute they said yes to being interviewed on your podcast - it was a success If your goal was to be seen as an expert and someone sends you an email asking you for your opinion - your podcast is a success If your goal was to "get the message out there" and your podcast has a number that is higher than zero - your podcast is a success. If your goal was to get something off your chest, you want to put your thoughts out into the universe - so you don't feel so invisible - and someone hears it - you're not invisible. Glenn the Geek has people write Christmas songs about his podcast at the horseradionetwork.com Theracasts can be audio journals that can help you more than your audience in some cases, but they are much less expensive than therapy. Some might say you should do these in a private journal (and you can do that) but sometimes you need someone to hear you - even if its a complete stranger. When someone in your audience chimes in on a conversation that helps you save money or time - that is a bonus to your life. Binders Can Be a Good Thing When I asked Uncle Google what blinders are, I see that blinder "attach to a horse's bridle or hood and prevent a horse from seeing behind and beside him." I mention this alot because its important. Comparing your show to another show is one of the worst things you can do. Blinder can stop you from looking at your past (cause there may be regrets) and they help you focus on your future. Your current value is not based on your mistakes of the past. Keep focused on your audience and answer every email, tweet, etc and keep the conversation going (don't just answer the question). It Might Take a Bit To Get Some Feedback I started a show called Your Podcast Consultant ( small lessons with big value) for those who like a shorter podcast. I've been doing it for nine months, and finally just got some feedback. The Power of Relationships Jen Briney doest the Congressional Dish podcast that every American should be subscribed to and she recently did an episode on Suprise Medical Bills in America and did a touching tribute to a listener who died. Jen monetizes the show on the "Value for Value" model (meaning it is 100% listener supported) and Jen explains how listeners are a bit like pen pals. It really shows the kind of relationships you build online. Likewise, when I heard Jen cry on her show remembering her listener I wanted to crawl through my phone and give her a giant hug. Why? Because of the relationship, I feel I have with her as a listener. While Jen will blow off and poke fun of herself for crying on the show, what it is - is courageous. She went 100% vulnerable on her show. This also helps build relationships with your audience. The No Agenda Show with John C Dvorak and Adam Curry do...
How do I come up with an idea for episodes? This show just celebrated 14 years in podcasting, and I would be lying if I said it was easy to come up with ideas for an episode every week. I will say this. There are some episodes that I feel are great, and I get no feedback on, and others that I feel I took out of the oven a little early and maybe were not quite ready to go to the public, and I get tons of feedback. I've also had a few shows that finding new ideas for episodes took all the fun out of doing the podcast, and so I shut the showdown. Think Twice When Setting Your Schedule I always advise my clients to record a few episodes so they can make an educated decision. Once you see how long it takes to create an episode you can look at your current obligations and schedule and figure out where you are going to squeeze in your podcast. While you don't have to have a consistent schedule, I feel it really helps. Why? Because when you release on a predictable schedule, you become part of their routine. How To Never Run Out of Ideas For Your Episode You know I have to start with value. I can put out episodes every day and not have a problem if I don't care about delivering value. However, I deeply care about delivering value so it can be a struggle. Here are some ideas: Facebook Groups If there are Facebook groups around your genre, you can join these and just listen. By seeing what people are talking about you can create content that you know will resonate with your audience. How do you do this? Go to Facebook.com and in the search bar at the top of the Facebook screen type in whatever your show is about and see if there are any Facebook groups. Google Alerts Google Alerts is a tool where you put in a topic, it scours the web, and emails you links to stories with that word or phrase. It's not a bad idea to setup an alert for the name of your show so you can track if anyone is talking about you, or infringing on your trademark. Subscribe to Blogs on Your Topic You can use a tool like Feedly or InoReader so you can login to one place and see what is happening in your space. Following Conversations on Twitter Using Tweet Deck you can do a search for a topic and then take that search and add it as a column of information. Consuming More Content If you use Chrome there is an extension creatively named "Video Speed Controller" that allows you to watch videos faster. New Releases on Amazon You can go to Amazon and look at new releases in your category and then have that information sent to you in an RSS feed. (which you can use in Feedly or inoreader). Search Engine Keyword/Idea Suggestion Ubdersuggest is a free tool that has TONS of used, but it does have a Content Ideas tool where you enter a subject and it will spit out ideas, and show you how popular they are. Answer the Public is a very creative tool that you type in a subject and it gives you a list of questions that people may be searching for (that you can export as a CSV file). Both these tools are free. What is Popular on YouTube? YouTube is the second largest search engine. You may have heard of it. With this in mind, you can search for your topic at YouTube. Find a channel that primarily covers your topic and then click on videos, and on the right-hand side click on Sort by > Most Popular. If you do this on my channel you will see my top videos are How to record Skype the easy way Anchor.fm Review Watch Before Using Why you should NOT use Soundcloud as a media host What is a podcast? Understanding the mechanics of podcasting. The idea here is not to steal someone's content. The idea is to see what is popular and then see if you have an opinion, insight, or story about that topic. Maybe there are a couple of topics you could combine to create a new look on an old subject. Resources For Interviews Check out the Guest Booking resources at https://podcastingresources.com/listing-category/podcast-guest-booking/ What if Someone Else Has...
We har about the benefits of podcasting on this show, and I attempt to get people to start their podcast and often ask, "What is the worst thing that could happen?" I wanted to hear what was the worst thing that happened to you by starting a podcast, what was the biggest regret? The Positive Side of Podcasting Here are some of the things people have reported happening "Because of my podcast:" I was able to get a dream trip to a Lambo field and watch my beloved Green Bay packers I improved my conversational skills I was asked to write a book People went to an event to meet me My face is on the cover of a comic book I raced in the Baja 1000 I got free bottles of wine I got a job I now work in media communications for the Federal Government I get to chat with my brothers on a weekly basis I get passes to the college world series They sent a Maserati to pick me up I've got to meet people I have no business meeting I have a new purpose in life I have more customers Biggest Podcast Regrets: People have gone from obsessing over starting their podcast to obsessing over the next episode(s). Dan from Podcasters Kit Clay from Fish Nerds Craig from Ingles Podcast is considering the time it takes to create a podcast Jonathon from Weekly Awesome is concerned about the time it takes to create episodes. Doug Payton from Consider This! podcast had some negative comments and a weird situation where someone sent an unpaid pizza to his house (spooky) One person is regretful about not remember the names and faces of people they meet. Question of the Month for November In honor of my first CEO that I ever worked for ( Richard Jusseaume ) who would tack on the question, "What's bugging you?" on to the employee survey, I ask you, "What's bugging you?" Leave your answer at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question Mentioned In This Podcast Focus is more important than microphones Podcast Review Show Next Week: 8 Tools to Help You Generate Ideas For Your Podcast. Subscribe to the show and get access as soon as the episodes is available. Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
Today we are going to take the phrase "Value Proposition" which is typically used in business and apply it to podcast. In the past few months, I've attended a fair amount of conferences and I ask people about their podcast. In most cases, people explain their show and I can see if I want to listen or not (or decide if I'm their target audience). I want to identify what people feel is valuable, and then help you shape that into your message. I learned about some of this in Tim Schmoyer's Video Creators course. The one that caught my eye was the Value Pyramid. The Things That You Should Ensure You Are Doing Before Pressing Record On Your Podcast I always say if you are not going to make your audience : Laugh Cry Think Groan If you are not educating or entertaining them, then don't press record. There is no value. The value pyramid from Harvard Research takes it even deeper. What is Value? Value is when the benefit of consuming your content is worth the time and effort it takes to consume it. This is Why It Needs to be EASY to Consume Your Content If you make someone dig for your play button, or only put a subscribe button for Apple Podcasts and completely ignore the Android side of life, the android users are likely to say "Never mind" and give up trying to get your content on your phone. This always means that if you make it easy to consume your content, they might give you a "pass" with your content if they didn't have to dig to get the content. Functional Value Do you help your audience by making things easier? Do you save them time? Do you save them money? Does it provide a way for people to connect? Emotional Value How does your podcast make people feel? Does your podcast reduce anxiety? Do you reward your audience? Does the design tweak their emotions? Does it boost their wellness? Is there a badge people could wear to show their loyalty? Life-Changing Value These values promise a personal transformation of some kind. If you can provide life-changing value, your audience will LOVE your show. If you have a community where they can belong. Can you make them feel like they've achieved a goal? Can you motivate them? Can you provide hope? Social Impact Value Are you impacting more than your audience? How Do You Tell People You Deliver Value? A value proposition explains how your audience benefits from your show. It may point out who your audience is. Why you are a better fit than other podcasts. How your podcast will help solve your audience's issues. Different Pieces of a Value Proposition Have a short but powerful headline that helps summarize a key aspect of your UVP (in less than 10 words). Have a supporting sub-headline or short paragraph to help explain or clarify your UVP. Have a short bulleted list of the benefits/advantages of using your product/service, with supporting visual imagery (for example, icons, badges, or a hero shot). Show all of the elements above the page fold (the area that visitors can see initially without having to scroll). Make It "No Thinking Involved" Clear In one article it mentions how you need to make it CLEAR to the person hearing or reading it. Here are some examples: Stripe: “Web and mobile payments, built for developers Lyft: “Rides in Minutes” Zapier: “Connect Your Apps and Automate Workflows” By looking at this, I understand what each company does. Here are some more: Stripe: “Web and mobile payments, built for developers” Lyft: “Rides in Minutes” Target: “Expect More, Pay Less” Skillshare: “Learn a New Skill Each Day” Evernote: “Remember Everything” Zapier: “Connect Your Apps and Automate Workflows” Bitly - shorten, share, measure. Spotify: “Music for Everyone” What Value Do YOU Bring Why should your ideal listener listen to YOU. What do you do differently than other podcasts on your topic? Not So Good Value Propositions Epson says, “Where there’s business, there’s Epson.” - Very generic HP says, “HP: everywhere you do business.” -...
I'm back from She Podcasts Live 2019 with some insights from an all women's podcast conference. It was great fun, great conversations and LOTS of laughs. Elise and Jess put on a great event, and everyone walked out with lots of actionable items to put into their podcast. 1:57 Because of My Podcast Jonathan Bloom from Weekly Awesome 3:00 Listeners WILL BINGE YOUR SHOW with Kimberly Sumpter from Sistahs Connect 5:41 You are NOT alone - with Jason from 7:59 Because of THIS podcast 11:54 Your Voice Can Make a Difference 16:41 Speakup Story Telling Podcast with Matthew Dicks - Women need to speak up 19:51 She Podcasts Live was Safe for Women 27:05 NaPodPoMo - 30 podcasts in 30 days 32:25 question of the Month (answer here ) 33:11 Book Update 33:47 DC Podfest - use the coupon code DJPALS 34:26 podcastingevents.net 35:52 My favorite quote from She Podcasts Live Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
The International Podcast Association was launched at Podcast Movement 2019. Today I talk with two members of the executive board Liz Covart of Ben Franklin's World and Glenn Hebert from the Horse Radio Network. Because of Our Podcast - We Lost 100 lbs 1:11 Emily Prokop and John Jominzu of the Hate to Weight Podcast announced on a recent episode that together they have lost a combined weight of 100lbs. Both say the support form their private Facebook group who cheer them on when they do good, and lift them up when they have a bad week has been a determining force in their weight loss success. I love this clip for: Showing the courage each week that reveals their success or failures The honest tears of joy that can't be faked The humble thanking of the group instead of taking credit for themselves. Check out their show at www.hatetoweight.com The International Podcast Association 06:10 We are joined by Liz and Glenn from the International Podcast Association who help explain: What is it? Why do we need it? Who is shaping it? What do they need from you? What do you need from them? How long will board members be active? How much does it cost? What is their first order of business? Why they chose to only use board members with no corporate ties at this point. If you haven't already, please visit www.internatinalpodcastassociation.org/survey 22: 55 Why podcasters are better communicators 28:14 What about the podcast puppies? 29:42 No Question of the month in September Podcast Review Show Prices are Going Up in October 33:24 If you want some honest feedback on every inch of your show, you need to move fast at www.podcastreviewshow.com as prices are going up in October. Currently, you get: Two on one consulting (two consultants Dave Jackson of the School of Podcasting and Erik K Johnson from Podcast Talent Coach) Review of your audio quality, your flow of content, your goals, your website, artwork, - everything Exposure on the Podcast Review Show podcast Exposure on the School of Podcasting YouTube Channel Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
Two reasons people might share things are that they are interesting and that they are useful. Emotions also play into why people share items. When you have something in common with the host it can boost the chance of us sharing the content. Emotions such as laughter or anger. Marketing messages tend to focus on information. But many times information is not enough. They need something more. And that is where emotion comes in. Rather than harping on features or facts, we need to focus on feelings; the underlying emotions that motivate people to action. In the book Contagious: Why Things Catch On by Jonan Berger they mention six principles of social currency: Social Currency: How does it make people look to talk about a product or idea? Triggers: Peanut butter makes us think of jelly. If our content can harness trigger emotions, or tie into an environment. Emotion: Some emotions increate sharing and others decrease it. In some cases, negative emotions can be useful. Public: Making our ideas more public. Practical Value: If your podcast helps people, people love to be helpful and spread the word. Stories: People don't just share information and facts, they tell stories. People prefer sharing things that make them seem entertaining rather than boring, clever rather than dumb, and hip rather than dull. My audience member said she groups these into four categories: Helpful Social Reciprosity Ego What Was The Last Thing You Shared and Why? Adrea from the Talk about Talk Podcast Steve Stewart gives some strategies of how he using sharing to grow your social media following to promote and upcoming event. Steph Fuccio shared the Smarty Pants Podcast New Media Show had some breaking news about Pandora Tom Tinker Taylor Soldier Sponge Productions shared Shufflecasts cause it made him laugh Paul from the Fighting Through Podcast (WWII) shared a photograph of the Queen Mary to his audience that had been updated to be in color. Sarah Mikutel shared Food Heroes Erik K John shared the School of Podcasting and the Audacity to Podcast as people wanted things a bit more technical than he was comfortable talking about. September Question of the Month How do you decide what's worth spending money on for your podcast? We all obviously have different budgets and needs but what's essential vs what do we aspire to have or use? Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question Mentioned On This Episode vacuumpodcast.com Podcast Review Show (prices going up)
I was at Podcast Movement last week. I've attended all six Podcast Movement eventss and it's been a blast to watch it grow. This year the venue was HUGE and it was weird as the number of people also grew so it was hard to tell just how much bigger it was compared to the previous year. As always this is a class act all the way around. The checking procedure, swag, were all super professional. As a speaker, I would also say I LOVE the tool they use to track my session. If I had one thing that I wish would change (and I say this every year) having loud, live music at a networking event doesn't work. Last year they had multiple rooms so those that wanted to dance could dance and drink. Those that wanted to drink and talk could go into another room. This year all the free beer was in the very loud room (it does seem wrong to complain about free beer). It was a great year, and even over the loud music the networking was great, and from what I hear Tom Webster from Edison Research had one of the best/controversial sessions which showed that listeners don't seem to care if a "podcast" has an RSS feed or not. Podcast Music Announcement While Doug and the team at podcastmusic.com have taken a step getting sound exchange into the game, you can't play your favorite music - yet. It will take some time, but we are headed (slowly) in the right directions. Pandora to Pay Podcasters? A representative fro Pandora stated that Pandora has planned on sharing revenue with Podcasters. This was said during the live taping of the New Media Show. Question of the Month What was the last thing you shared (that wasn't yours) and why did you share it? Be sure to mention your podcast and website. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question Mentioned In This Show Join the School of Podcasting Ask the Podcast Coach The Average Guy Network Podcast Rodeo Show
Last week an announcement from Google stated that podcast episodes will now appear in Google Search Results: Starting today, when you’re searching for a podcast about a topic on Google, such as “podcasts about Awkwafina” or “Instant Pot recipe podcasts,” we’ll show you playable episodes in Search results alongside web pages, news, images and videos. We’ll surface these episodes based on Google’s understanding of what’s being talked about on a podcast, so you can find even more relevant information about a topic in audio form. Soon, you won’t necessarily need the term “podcast” in your search to see episodes, making podcast discovery simpler across Search. Where Do You Think People Search More Apple of Google? With Google adding episodes to search results we need to ask the question, where are people going to find my podcast? According to a Jacobe media report, 70% of people find shows via word of mouth and only 11% search in an app. Another study from Edison Research and prominent podcast producer WNYC Studios states that: 84% of WNYC Studios listeners report having recommended a podcast to a friend, while 78% overall report having recommended a podcast to a friend. And one in three WNYC Studios listeners share podcasts on social media, at 32%. Podcast listeners also report having discovered the medium in the following ways: 17% via their smartphone, 15% via public radio programming, and 13% from an article or program. Getting a Grip on SEO The minute I heard Google was taking podcasting more seriously, (and that the Apple search was not great) I started studying SEO. Here is my limited knowledge after a few months. Always write for humans. You need to know where your site ranks Find some keywords that fit your audience, and your website ranks high enough to show up in search results. Showing up for less popular keywords gets you more results in Google which can lead to higher rankings. SEO is like Bowling or Golf, LOTS of moving pieces and trying to master it us exhausting. Some resources I've used: SEO for Podcasters from Daniel J Lewis ( $199) SEO Marketing from Juergen Berkesse of Polymash Skillshare has two classes (and intro and advanced) by Rand Fishkin who started SEO MOZ (one of the top if not THE top sites on SEO) Mangools is a Suite of Tools to help you determine the best keywords and track your progress (free/paid) Ubersuggest from Neil Patel (a free tool that gives you tons of data). WPCRafter has a tutorial that walks you through it. Yoast SEO Plugin For Wordpress Monster Insights Plugin For Wordpress (Google Analytics) Because of My Podcast, I Got a Press Pass To Comicon Seth/ZAndrex from Geekville Radio (who I just reviewed on the Podcast Rodeo Show) explains how his podcast was enough of a credential to get him a press pass to the Comicon event in Chicago. Check out his podcast at geekvilleradio.com For more "Because of My Podcast Stories, check out www.becauseofmypodcast.com Are You Making ANY Money With Your Podcast? I'm working on the book "More Podcast Money" and conducting more interviews for the book. If you are making ANY money with your podcast, I'm trying to interview more podcasters to better identify strategies, and what is and is not working. If you'd like to be considered for the book please contact me Question of the Month What was the last thing you shared (that wasn't yours) and why did you share it? Be sure to mention your podcast and website. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question
I was lucky enough to meet Kristen Meizner last year and the On-Air fest, and I heard her speak. I knew immediately I wanted to her come on the show. She was working on her new book So You Want to Start a Podcast: Finding Your Voice, Telling Your Story, and Building a Community That Will Listen (also available as an audiobook ). If you're new to audible you can get the book for free. So You Want To Start a Podcast When I started reading this book you might think, "Oh great, a radio person telling us how to podcast" but she even mentions in the book that we should be looking outside of radio for inspiration. We need to rev up our creativity and take advantage of the ability to make any format you want. The book is chock full of ideas to get you to think outside the box, and really fine-tune not just the first five minutes of your show but your entire show. I really liked this book a lot. In today's interview, Kristen talks about The right reason to start a podcast The two questions every podcaster needs to answer What she did for four months to get her format correct Why movies are a topic and not a show How one format idea fell flat on its face You can grab the attention of a larger audience with diversity How long a podcast should be Her feelings toward holiday movies The top thing that makes her tune out of a podcast How introverts can overcome their shyness and reveal their personality How she integrated a story into her podcast Buy the Book Why you need to embrace feedback for your podcast Working with a network The importance of focus groups What she feels is a good length for podcasting How she uses scripts in her show The importance of being yourself How to go "outside the box" with an "Inspirational story" podcast How a podcast is like going to a show where you don't know anyone Contact Kristen Meinzer https://www.kristenmeinzer.com Twitter: @kristenmeinzer Instagram @k10meinzer Buy the Book "So You Want to Start a Podcast" Mentioned in This Episode Buy the Book "So You Want to Start a Podcast" Get the Book For Free on Audible Work with Me Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
I had not "take the temperature" of my audience in a while so I put together a quick survey. I use Google Forms, and did some number crunching in Excel, and made a report using Mail Merge in Microsoft word so I could easily consume the data. SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School Be equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee. Program Includes: LIVE Interactive Online Training Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran Major Discounts on Software and Plugins Lifetime Access to the PES closed community Certificate of Completion Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP. Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com What My Audience Let Me Know Audience: Audience 80% Male 20% Female Age: 31-40 41% 41-50 41% 61-70 18% How far they listen 7% Listen to at least 75% 93% listen to all of it Do You Currently Have a Podcast? Yes - 90% No - 10% Perfect Length of Podcast? 0-29 3% 30-45 59% 46-60 28% Have you ever told a friend about the School of Podcasting? Yes - 90% No - 10% What Do You Like About the Show: Question of the month and your knowledge of podcasting Learning the best ways to podcast The up to date changes that would affect the day to day podcaster. You consistently provide concise, actionable advice to help podcasters be successful. Interviews with interesting podcasters and how-to content Multiple topics and specialized guests this way I can identify with other podcasters who’ve encountered the same trials & tribulations in connecting with their audience I really like the real-world examples you cite of how people have made (or are making) their podcasts successful. The high-quality production, how much you assuage my concerns about podcasting, identify speech patterns that drive me crazy, and overall the feeling that you're actually talking to me. General updates on how and with what to create, manage, and grow your podcast and audience I like your honesty and transparency most. The topics I enjoy are tips on creating content and marketing content. Honest Information about growing audience and sponsors I like the honesty, the fact you'll tell the truth and also aren't afraid to give your opinion. Specific sections, I like when you do anecdote, which is odd as I didn't when I first started listening. Just goes to show not to change your format. The interviews, also gear talk when you have it. Just listening to Dave talk with excitement about what's important to him. I always enjoy the Because-Of-My-Podcast stories. You think about the person who is just starting out and the people who have been at it a while. (so helps me learn as a newbie, but also stretches me to research other things). Love how you use sound effects. Think it captures attention well! Expert interviews, and Last Five in Five (bring it back!) The analogies, which helps anyone at any level understand the picture you are trying to paint (even the painting with peanut butter) The interviews with industry personalities and gear/service reviews. But most of all, it's just your personality that keeps me listening. Your humor, varied topics, pace, transitions, and awesome ideas and content. I love the end of episode bloopers. What you'd Like to Change: The same podcasters on all the time, how about some variety? For example, if the horse podcasting guy is on, I turn the show-off, sorry, but it's just not my thing. Other than that, I love everything else about the show! Email responses seemed to shorten then stop altogether after a while. Keep emailing/engaging consistently. While it doesn't bother me, I think too often you reference "old" movies, songs etc. and go with your "back in the day" quote which may not resonate with a younger audience. For example, for me, I don’t need to hear all the steps of math to get to an hourly rate for $60,000 a year. You could just tell me you did the math and give me the bottom line number. Not this show, but your Rodeo...
From time to time I see people in Facebook groups announcing "Hey I got my first 1000 download episode!" or "I just got (insane amount of money)" for my podcast. When you are just starting out, or even if you've been podcasting for a while if you're just looking at downloads or dollars, the inspiration to keep going can be hard to come by. Today we are going to examine the other ways your podcast is a success. SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School Be equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee. Program Includes: LIVE Interactive Online Training Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran Major Discounts on Software and Plugins Lifetime Access to the PES closed community Certificate of Completion Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP. Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com Other Ways To Count Podcast Success If your goal was to find like-minded people (cause your spouse said they would not participate in any more conversations around Batman) and you've found some people online to have the conversations you've been longing to have - your podcast is a success. If you had no luck getting in touch with certain people - but the minute they said yes to being interviewed on your podcast - it was a success If your goal was to be seen as an expert and someone sends you an email asking you for your opinion - your podcast is a success If your goal was to "get the message out there" and your podcast has a number that is higher than zero - your podcast is a success. If your goal was to get something off your chest, you want to put your thoughts out into the universe - so you don't feel so invisible - and someone hears it - you're not invisible. Glenn the Geek has people write Christmas songs about his podcast at the horseradionetwork.com Theracasts can be audio journals that can help you more than your audience in some cases, but they are much less expensive than therapy. Some might say you should do these in a private journal (and you can do that) but sometimes you need someone to hear you - even if its a complete stranger. When someone in your audience chimes in on a conversation that helps you save money or time - that is a bonus to your life. Binders Can Be a Good Thing When I asked Uncle Google what blinders are, I see that blinder "attach to a horse's bridle or hood and prevent a horse from seeing behind and beside him." I mention this alot because its important. Comparing your show to another show is one of the worst things you can do. Blinder can stop you from looking at your past (cause there may be regrets) and they help you focus on your future. Your current value is not based on your mistakes of the past. Keep focused on your audience and answer every email, tweet, etc and keep the conversation going (don't just answer the question). It Might Take a Bit To Get Some Feedback I started a show called Your Podcast Consultant ( small lessons with big value) for those who like a shorter podcast. I've been doing it for nine months, and finally just got some feedback. The Power of Relationships Jen Briney doest the Congressional Dish podcast that every American should be subscribed to and she recently did an episode on Suprise Medical Bills in America and did a touching tribute to a listener who died. Jen monetizes the show on the "Value for Value" model (meaning it is 100% listener supported) and Jen explains how listeners are a bit like pen pals. It really shows the kind of relationships you build online. Likewise, when I heard Jen cry on her show remembering her listener I wanted to crawl through my phone and give her a giant hug. Why? Because of the relationship, I feel I have with her as a listener. While Jen will blow off and poke fun of herself for crying on the show, what it is - is courageous. She went 100% vulnerable on her show. This also helps build relationships with your audience. The No Agenda Show with John C Dvorak and Adam...
SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School Be equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee. Program Includes: LIVE Interactive Online Training Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran Major Discounts on Software and Plugins Lifetime Access to the PES closed community Certificate of Completion Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP. Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com What Do I Need To Start A Podcast? I recently appeared at a local meetup for a group in Alabama. The question, "what do I need to start a podcast" came up. I've talked about this in the past and hit different aspects, and I'm going to try to hit all aspects in this episode. Things Everyone Needs No Matter What A Pop filter for your microphone. This could be a foam ball to put over the end, or a mesh shield that goes between you and the microphone. I'm a fan of the Nady SSPF-3 if you're using an ATR2100 or a Samson Q2U. If you are using something like an Electrovoice RE320 you might consider a foam shield with a shock mount or this "repop" filter only available at BSW Your Topic Your topic should be something that you can't help but talk about. You would be willing to talk about it for free for HOURS (cause you are). It's a topic that needs to hold the attention of your target audience and inspire them to tell a friend. It also needs to be in alignment with your goals for the podcast. It Depends... From there you get the most used answer in podcasting, "It depends." While this is true, you often don't get the pros and cons of your options so that is what I'm going to try to do here - make you away of your options. What Microphone Should I Use for My Podcast? Why it Depends: Option 1: Traveling Podcaster If you're going to be traveling alot and need something a little more durable, you might use the Audio Technica Atr2100 as it has a lifetime warranty. Option 2: Stationary Podcaster I like the sound of the SamsonQ2U a little better than the ATR2100. It doesn't have a lifetime warranty, but you're not moving it much. Another option for the stationary podcaster on a semi-professional level is the mic I use the Electrovoice RE320 What Microphone Stand Should I Get for the Microphone? If you are stationary (meaning you're using a room as your studio) check out the Samson MBA38 boom arm that can clamp on to a desk. If you need to take down your gear or if you're traveling, check out the On Stage Combo Stand Recording Co-Hosts or Interviews What Do I Need? Why it Depends: If they are in the room with you I like the Focusrite 2i2 for two people or the Focusrite 8i8 for four people. You could also purchase a Zoom H6 (and be able to record anywhere) If you're on a budget, then see the Behringer U-PHORIA UMC202HD (for two people), or the UMC404HD for four people Another option for recording up to four people in the room with you is the Rode Rodcaster pro Shouldn't I Use a Mixer? When it comes to mixer vs interface, a mixer allows you to adjust the audio (add bass, treble) where an interface you would do this in software later. Some people prefer interfaces as they are less confusing due to a generally smaller number of knobs. If you want a mixer, one of the best values I feel is the Presonus AR8 USB 8 as it has up to four people, connects to your computer, AND it has a built-in recorder. If you are on a budget then you could check out Mackie PROFX8V2 Do I Need a Portable Recorder? If you're traveling yes. My favorite is the Zoom H6 as it is super versatile. If all you need is a recording, you might check out the Zoom H1 I'm Going to Do All My Episodes on the Road If you're traveling and only going to be recording you and a guest you might check out the Tascam DR-10X that you plug your microphone into. In this situation, you might look into the Rode Interview Microphone My Guests/Co-hosts Are In Another Location If you're on a budget you can use Skype and Ecam call recorder on the Mac,...
I've performed over a hundred interviews, and I've been interviewed over 130 times on different podcasts. Today I wanted to make an episode to answer ALL the questions about podcast interviews. Free Podcast Interview Guide There is SO MUCH information in this episode, I've combined it into a Free Interview Guide. Click Here to Get the Guide For Full Show Notes go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/678 Topics Include: 3:15 Appreciating your audience 7:29 Don't get blinded by resumes 10:40 Connect the Dots 16:13 How to turn down someone who wants to be on your show 18:38 Where to find Guests 20:20 Interviewing Celebrities 21:20 The Ask 25:37 Pre-Interviews 28:08 DO THE WORK 32:11 Be Vulnerable 34:08 Tag Team Interviews 41:02 Setting Guest Expectations 44:12 Shaping the Interview Questions 46:36 The Day of the Interview 49:23 Introducing the Guest 50:36 Get them to tell stories 54:15 The NPR Formula 56:54 the Importance of Shutting Up 01:01:00 Gear for conducting interviews on the road face to face 01:06:47 Proper Mic Technique 01:07:16 Recording "in the studio" 01:08:14 Recording podcast interviews remotely 01:14:10 Controlling the Interview 01:17:25 The End of the Interview 01:18:15 Getting your guests to share your podcast 01:23:22 Editing the Interview 01:26:17 Being a guest on podcasts 01:27:13 Do the work 01:30:12 The Golden Rule Guest If you'd like the full show notes for this episode you can get them as a PDF SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School Be equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee. Program Includes: LIVE Interactive Online Training Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran Major Discounts on Software and Plugins Lifetime Access to the PES closed community Certificate of Completion Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP. Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
I keep seeing statements like, "Well, I've done this podcast for 2 years and it's time to start monetizing." With this type of mindset, I can see many podcasters getting discouraged or even burned out. I played music in local bars from the age of 16 to 50. 34 years I played music, but I never fell delusional enough to think I would make the big time playing local bars in Northeast Ohio. If I wanted a career I would've had to move to a city like Los Angelas, Nashville, or anything that wasn't Akron, Ohio. While it's commendable to commit to something for a long period, it's not the longevity that inspires people to share your episodes. It's the content. Nobody has ever said, "Hey Dave you have to listen to this show!" and when I ask why they say, "They've been podcasting since 2014!" With that said, as I write the updated version to my book More Podcast Money, here are the ways you make money with podcasting. SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School Be equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee. Program Includes: LIVE Interactive Online Training Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran Major Discounts on Software and Plugins Lifetime Access to the PES closed community Certificate of Completion Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP. Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com [click_to_tweet tweet="The Top Five Ways to Make Money With a Podcast @davejackson " quote=" The Top Five Ways To Make Money With a Podcast" theme="style3"] The Top Ways to Make Money With Your Podcast Sell Your Own Products or Services This is the top way to make money with your podcast. You harness the power of influence. As you have lived and breathed in your target audience for a while, you should know what they need or want. I was amazed at a WordCamp I attended recently that the documentation for the new Gutenberg is sparse at best. Everyone hates it. Nobody understands it. That is one learning curve that needs to be flattened and if I had time I would dive into it myself. Why some of your audience will buy from you is due to you bringing value on a consistent basis. This triggers the law of reciprocity. You've done something nice for them, and now your audience feels a need to do something nice for you. If you've shared a little about yourself then they probably like you (if they didn't they wouldn't be listening). If the information you provide is solid then they trust you. When you are known, liked, and trusted the buzz phrase for this is you are an "influencer." When you launch a product or service you can influence them to purchase your product. This could be a book, a course, a membership site, a crowdfunding campaign, a live webinar, etc. These products should fill a need in your space, or entertain them. Sell Other People's Products or Services (affiliate sales) Affiliate sales are when you sign up with a company to promote its products. You are given a link (or a code) that proves the traffic/customer came from you. If a sale is made, you earn a commission. When you match the right product with the right audience, you can make decent money. I once made hundreds of dollars a month promoting fitness cards on my weight loss show. The commission was $1.50 per deck. This product fit my audience. I later would do the same when the Fitbit first came on the scene. I bought one and loved it. This is a great place to start. Find a product that you love that your audience ( a weight loss show in this case) would love. I was able to openly and honestly talk about how I loved my Fitbit and ever since I bought it I was more active. Again, I was earning hundreds of dollars per month when the commission was $9 per sale. Pat Flynn makes a TON of money with Affiliate sales. He created a video tutorial showing how easy it was to install WordPress on a web hosting company. The video was short. It made building a website look super easy, and his affiliate link was right beneath the video. Find the...
Thanks to everyone who chimed in with an answer: Melanie from the Beer with an Engineer show likes to throw a party for her listeners Brad from the Cinema Guys loves milestone shows - loves where people take small clips from past shows (or breaking format to do something special) Terry Noorda from the Discovering America podcast brought his family on the show Brian from Engaging Missions hasn't really done any kind of special episodes Kim from Toastmasters 101 is going to pass on anything special Stuart from the Great Escape is going to have a special Scott Johnson of the What was that like? show doesn't do anything special and prefers to focus on the audience Seth from Geekville Radio has done clip shows. Thomas from Multiverse Tonight made a special graphics and is changing his format Because of My Podcast Craig from Ingles Podcast did a study on podcasting and was able to present it at the largest event in his industry. Check out his show at https://www.inglespodcast.com/ Question of the Month For July Take the full survey at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/survey19 I haven't taken the temperature of my audience in a while, and you should do that. So we are going to do this in audio format What do you like about the show? What do you fast forward through (dislike - I have thick skin) What is your perfect length for an episode? What would you like to hear in the future? Use the tools at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
I Have A Fear of Heights True or False: Starting a Podcast is Hard Start a Podcast May Require Your To Overcome Fear Hiking in Utah is Different than Hiking in Ohio Get a Guide/Mentor To Help You Avoid Mistakes Everything Was Cool Until the Last Hike Getting Control of Your Mind The View From the Top Was Amazing The Confidence-Competence Loop Mentioned In This Episode Utah Podcast Summit Travel Gluten Free Podcast Shirts That Provide UV Protection TETON Sports Oasis 1100 Hydration Pack 3 Month Podcast Quick Start Package Your Podcast Consultant Ask the Podcast Coach Podcast Review Show Podcast Rodeo Show Power of Podcasting Network Spybrary, Tourpreneur, and Radio GDR FULL SHOW NOTES Full Show Notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/675
You picked a name for your podcast (need help with picking a name, check out this episode of Your Podcast Consultant) and you've decided that maybe you went a little too "inside baseball" and you want to change the name of your podcast without losing your subscribers. How To Change Your Podcast Name Step one would be to let your audience know what is happening (you might even get them involved in voting for a new name). By letting them know ahead of time they don't freak out when they go to listen to your show and can't find it under the old name. 4:00 Rebranding your podcast is not that hard. In its most primitive steps you: Change your artwork (making sure to use a different file name for your new artwork) Change your categories (if you want to) Change the email address (if you want to) Change your website address (if you want to) Change the author name (if you want to) Keep in mind may take up to 24 hours for the changes to appear in the apps In Libsyn.com the steps are: Go to Settings > edit show settings and here you can update your show name, website, and artwork (as well as the description for the Libsyn directory). If you are uploading new artwork, make sure the file name is different than the current artwork ( for example, logo.jpg needs to be logo2.jpg ) and click save Then go to destinations > edit > Libsyn classic feed and adjust your categories, summaries, owner/author/email information and click Save With 24 hours any directories using your feed should update. Kentucky Fried Chicken to KFC Your podcast is a recipe - not a statue. So similar to the time when the Kentucky Fried Chicken Restaurants changed their name to KFC (hoping people would forget their name had the word FRIED in the middle of their name). There might be a new coat of paint on the outside. There might be a new sign out front. Inside you have the same food (an in this case they added a new menu item that still fit in with the other items) So when the audience went to the same location, they saw a new sign, a new menu item, but really nothing much changed When a podcast listener fires up their app it goes to the same location (your feed) and sees a few new things, but really nothing much has changed. They don't have to do anything. Because of My Podcast Kenn Blanchard Kenn Blanchard of the Black Man with a Gun show has been asked to share 100 episodes for a new Black Podcast Project for the Society of American Archivists Journal. Check out at www.blackmanwithagun.com Homework: Question of the Month What ideas do you have for a podcaster celebrating a milestone episode (50, 100, 200, etc)? Watch to Watch: My Next Guest Needs No Introduction The new season of David Letterman's My Next Guest Needs No Introduction has two great examples of SHUTTING UP. When he is interviewing Ellen Degenerous he gets to the subject of her stepfather who he describes as a bad man and then SHUTS UP. Ellen is uncomfortable and not sure if she should share, and he DIDN'T SAY A PEEP. In a different episode, he is interviewing Tiffany Hadish who is explaining how good it felt to get her first suitcase so she didn't feel "like a piece of garbage." Here again, Dave SHUTS UP, and lets her share he insights and feelings. He doesn't chime in. He lets his guest share, and at the end, all he said was "Beautiful." Remember when you're interviewing someone the goal is to make your guest comfortable, and free to share anything in a judge free zone. It's about THEM not you. Apple Announcements: What It Means For You Apple announced that they will be transcribing your episodes in the future and using that transcription to boost search. There isn't anything for you to do besides make great content. They will be adding new categories and taking some away. This is good news, but not everyone will be happy (of course). This will be coming "in the future" but no time frame. Once Apple announces their backend is ready then the podcast media hosts will update their...
There are so many things that are changing in podcasting that can cause stress as you worry. Some things you have no control over. You may need to take some steps, but after that it is out of your control. Being Seen in Google Podcasts If you've followed the directions to set up your website, or you are using a media host like Libsyn.com or Blubrry you are good to go. From there, you just have to wait on Google. Being Found In Apps I have had people contact me about Apple, Spotify, iHeart and sure its only a matter of time until radio.com gets added to the list. Search in these apps is poor at best. Apple searches the name of your show, the name of your episode and the author title. If you have your target words in those areas, that is all you can do. Having Google Put Play Buttons In Search Results At this point, I've done some research, and it sounded like if your show was in Google Podcasts, our show should appear with play buttons if someone did a search for your show. This (at this point ) only works about 50% of the time for me. As Google is still somewhat new to podcasting and this is a new feature, there isn't much for us to do. Should I Change My Intro? As people may be clicking play on any episodes that appear in search results I don't tink ANY podcaster will have the answer they are looking for at the very beginning of the show. What you want your show to do is pull people in by letting people know what is coming. If they see where you are going, the audience is more likely to get on board. Mentioned In This Show Evo Terra of Podcast Pontifications Podcasters Roundtable Giving Up the Ghost Podcast Get Your Podcast Started www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme
Starting a podcast is not hard. Starting a GOOD podcast takes time, dedication, talent, etc and today I asked my audience, "What is the biggest pain in starting and creating a podcast." Here is what they answered: Your Biggest Pain in Podcasting 01:23 Thanks to everyone who contributed Positioning My Podcast - from Timothy of kdoipodcasting.com Running Out of Content - Chris Nesi from the House of Ed Tech Scheduling - Todd from the Trucker Dump The Abundance of Choice - Stephanie from the Virtual Ex-Pats Mouth Noises - Moxie Your Brain On Facts Thumbnails - Bandrew from the Bandrew Says Show Notes - Matt from the Author Inside You Show Notes - Seth from Geekville Radio Running Out of Content - Dave Logical Weight Loss Question of the Month How do you celebrate a milestone episode? I need your answer by June 22, 2019. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact Because of My Podcast I Was Hired For an Event 33:28 Jas from Giving Up The Ghost podcast was asked to do a live recording of Ghost Stories at an AKIA store for a private sleepover party after only four episodes! Here is the description of their show: Podcasting LIVE from one of the MOST haunted cities located DEAD center in North America - Winnipeg, MB Canada. Join us as we explore the unknown! Welcome to Giving Up The Ghost Each week we will cover, explore and share our research of unexplained paranormal phenomena in Winnipeg and surrounding areas! Join your AudioCurators Jas and Sherrie as they discover the dark side of local history, Urban legends and their haunting origins as well as everything that goes bump in the night. Are you afraid of the dark? well, you should be. For more information on Sherrie’s Art and Gallery please view her talent at https://www.facebook.com/ChicAndTique/ For more information on Jas’s publications and fiction writing, please visit her website www.jnflamand.com and her FB page https://www.facebook.com/jnflamand/ The Memory of Creating a Podcast Will Be With You Forever 35:18 When you start a podcast it will change your life for better or worse, and you won't be able to take it away. I recently drove 12 hours in a car with my brother and sister-in-law to see my cousin's oldest child graduate from High School. Yes, 24 hours (round trip) in a car is not a great time, but it is a memory I have with my family that we will always have. To have that memory I had to say Yes to taking the trip. Let Me Help You Start Your Podcast Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor Mentioned on This Show Acuity Scheduling Calendly Scheduling Tool Ivy Envy Episode 624 Is Anyone Reading Show Notes? Episode 400 of the School of Podcasting Gordon Firemark episode about Podcast Trademarks Terry Gross book "All I Did Was Ask" Howard Stern Comes Again Book
Thinking Outside the Box Today's talk about Podcast Trademarks was inspired by a Facebook post. As a tech support person for Libsyn I see a large number of podcasts on a weekly basis (get a free month at Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree ). I always find it interesting when people are launching a NEW show and when I go to look up their account, I see that there is another show with the same name. One of my favorite examples is the name "Outside the box" If only there was a tool where you could search the Internet to see if anyone is using the name? Podcast Honeymoons Sometimes we skip steps like this because we are so excited, and we just can't hide it, and we move forward without doing something like a quick Google Search or a search in Apple. This can also continue as you enter what I'm calling Podcast Honeymoon. This about when you find someone to date, and HOLY COW they just check every box. You do fun things like celebrating your one-month anniversary. You celebrate the anniversary of anything and everything (your first email, phone call, first date, first kiss). You are what my mother use to call GAGA (way before Lady Gaga). You think about the time Fast forward nine months later and that awesome accent that was so quaint is now like nails on a chalkboard. I recently went to watch my ex-step-son graduate from Perdue University with my ex-wife. My ex-wife is a person who must examine ALL options before making a decision and I was like, "Oh, I remember this as she tried to decide the t-shirt or hoodie, and black vs white." What does this have to do with podcasting? When you first start a podcast you may be thinking about it all the time. You may start to have issues at work. You may be working at your podcast at work (not recommended). You might be thinking about your podcast when you are with your family. I'm reading Howard Stern's new book Howard Stern Comes Again, and he talks about how he was obsessed with ratings and consequently, was not a great husband or father. I did the same thing. While both my ex-wife and I will admit "we probably shouldn't have got married in the first place" podcasting was a source of tension. I know of people who edit their podcast on the clock at their job. I'm here to remind you that is not an option. If it has been a while since you did a job search. Before I worked at Libsyn, the last teaching job I got took a while to get hired even though I had decades of experience and a degree. It is easier said than done, but jumping off a cliff and building the plane on the way down may not be the best choice you've ever been [click_to_tweet tweet="Everything you need to know about your podcast and Trademarks #davejackson" quote="Everything you need to know about your podcast and Trademarks" theme="style3"] Talking Podcast Trademarks with Gordon Firemark Gordon is the producer and host of Entertainment Law Update., a podcast for artists and professionals in the entertainment industries. His practice also covers intellectual property, cyberspace, new media and business/corporate matters for clients in the entertainment industry. He is the author of The Podcast, Blog and New Media Producer's Legal Survival Guide. Copyright vs Trademarks Do I need one for my show? How do they protect me? How much do they cost? Check out all things Gordon Firemark at Firemark.com Check out his Podcast Law Book Check out the Podcast Release Form Mentioned In This Episode Question of the Month: "What is your biggest pain in creating a podcast?" Deliver your answer via our contact page (don't forget to mention your show and website) Utah Podcast Summit (use coupon code sop ) Wordpress Kent Podcast Baby Steps ( Brand New To Podcasting> Start here) Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
There is more money coming into Podcasting and Geoff and David Cook are hoping to get some of it by building a podcast app that focuses on helping you find new podcasts, integrate social ingredients (likes, etc), and pay you one podcoin (1-4 cents) for every 10 minutes. I wanted to find out more about this app. Podcoin was created by David Cook who credited the idea to a speech his brother Geoff Cook gave to Princeton University in April 2018. It’s not the first time they’ve been business partners. David and Geoff previously co-founded myYearbook with their sister Catherine in 2005. The trio then sold the company to Quepasa for $100 million in 2011. It's been around since January of 2019 and currently has 15 million users that are consuming 1,500,000+ Listening Minutes PER DAY For more information see https://www.podcoin.com/audience Find the app on Apple and Android Fixing Mistakes In Your Podcast You are listening back to your podcast and there is a mistake you HAVE to fix. Here are your options when using Libsyn Thank you for contacting Libsyn Support It gets tricky with Spotify, and Google Play Music. If you upload a file with the same file name, all the other directories and apps up EXCEPT the two above. There are two options Strategy 1 If you go to content > previously published > edit the episode Then click on the Scheduling Tab and go to the advanced sub-tab You will see the destinations. Uncheck Spotify, Google Play Music and click Publish (which acts as a save button). Then rename your episode file, go to content > add new episode Then click on the Scheduling Tab and go to the advanced sub-tab You will see the destinations. Make sure to UNCHECK ALL of the destinations EXCEPT Spotify, Google Play Music and click Publish (which acts as a save button). 670 This will create a version of that episode just for those destinations, and the original version never goes offline. Strategy 2 Go to Content > Previously Published > Edit Rename your original file and use the replace option and click Publish (which acts as a save button). The current apps will have a small amount of time when the file will not play (as the apps update they will see the new file name, but there may be people who go to play the file and it won't work (as it's still looking at the old name). This can take up to 24 hours. But the episode will update on all platforms. What If I'm Not Using Libsyn? The bottom line is if you upload the new file with the same name, then it won't update on Spotify or Google Play Music because they make Question of the Month What is your biggest pain in podcasting? Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and upload your file or use the speakpipe button by 5/24/19 Start Your Podcast Today www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start
I came across Kent Convington's Fast Lane Podcast University Podcast and I liked the content I was hearing. I was lucky enough to have Kent ask me to be on his show. Then he did something only one other person has done. He asked for a pre-interview. He started off by asking about any stories in my life and my career in podcasting. If I wasn't so long winded it would've lasted about 15 minutes, but because I rambled on a bit, it probably lasted 34. Kent was looking to craft a story. Not just have me rattle of stats. He was looking not just for facts and stories, but interesting stories. This also got me thinking about what my "best material" is, and a few days later when we recorded the interview I was prepared. Today I return the favor and ask Ken to "pull back the curtain" and explain what is going through his mind when he does a pre-interview. Behind My Podcast Curtain You will hear what little I do as a "Pre-interview" (something I may change in the future). I typically tell people who they are talking to, why I brought them on the show, and what I plan on asking them about. With Kent, there isn't much information about him online so I had to do some digging into his background to see how he got into podcasting. How Kent Does a Pre-Interview Kent is on the lookout for stories, and things to enable the audience to not only get to know the guest but to find entertaining stories. He is looking for items that will help paint the mental image, the vivid pictures inside the "Theater of the Mind." What are the biggest hurdles? What is the most memorable moment? Tell me about a time when _____ happened. You are looking for the challenge and conflict. Polishing the Stories using The Ladder of Abstraction S. I. Hayakaw ( explanation ) When to do a Pre-Interview Profile Interviews: Designed to help tell the story of the guest Advice Podcasts: Where an expert is on to share tips and insights. Across the Table Interview: You are looking for the truth. Less of a team approach. So Many People Have a Podcast About _____ If you're worried about starting a podcast because "so and so" is "sooooo popular" and "owns" the niche. That is like telling the Quarterback in High School to quit because they will never be as good as Tom. Well if Tom quit because he would never be as good as Joe Montana, then we wouldn't have Tom Brady today. Don't obsess over what other people are doing and instead focus on your audience. Realize we all have different strengths and different passions. Mentioned in this Episode Fast Lane Podcast University Roy H Williams "Wizard of Ads" The Ladder of Abstraction Chris Curran Podcast Engineering School Natalie at Bizchix Dan O Day Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
Back on episode 655, we talked about how do you know if your show connects with your audience? That focused on making sure your content was great. Your podcast is a presentation of information. As someone who speaks at conferences, and use to teach in the corporate world there are always three presentations. The presentation you planned The presentation you delivered The presentation you wish you had delivered. The way to avoid those regrets is through planning, but also by learning from your past mistakes. I was asked by Ed Ryan who is the Editor of the Podcast Business Journal to write an article address how to "Air Check" yourself (and can you?). Here is the article. Podcast Air Check Tips: My buddy Erik K Johnson of the Podcast Talent Coach podcast says, "Nobody is getting on a bus without knowing where it's going." If you stop your show at the 1-minute mark do you feel like you know enough to get on the bus? Do you know where it's going? We are assuming your headline is in great shape (if not see my free guide to help you write better episode titles). Speaking of episode titles, does this title accurately reflect what is being covered in this episode? If you stop your show at the three-minute mark are you into some content (or are you still in chit chat mode). You know your crutch words. We all have them. How are they in his episode? Do you have advertising on your show? You might have a "30-second" spot. Take out your phone and time how long your 30-second spot. For me, I often find typos in my show notes when I read the post with a fresh set of eyes. If You Are Doing Interviews I have a cheat sheet that you can use for this. Looking back at your interview answer these questions: What are the strengths of the guest? Why did you bring them on? What did you get out of this interview? What were the takeaways? Then listen to the interview and take out a notepad (or open your favorite note-taking app) and use two columns. In the first column label in questions and in the second column put "Answer." When I listen to Harry Durran of Podcast Junkies, Harry does a great job of asking the questions I would ask if I was interviewing the guest. So as you listen to this episode, did you miss any opportunities for follow up questions? Did you promote the guest’s website/products/services? If so, was it enough, too much, too little? Did you find yourself repeating what the guest said (ME TOO!). We heard it the first time. Looking at why you brought the guest on, did you achieve what you set out to do? Did you get the expected takeaways? If so, what did you do to get to those answers? If not, what do you feel you could do differently next time. Final Conclusions What do you think you did well in this episode? What was the best take away? ( maybe turn that into a social media post) What lessons can be learned from this episode? How was your call to action? Did you have ONE or twelve? While a self-evaluation is hard to do (and just not as good as getting someone else’s opinion). If you do find yourself face to face with an actual listener, THIS IS HUGE. Ask them what they like (and they will tell you). Then ask you what they dislike (and often they will say nothing). Explain that you have thick skin and can take it, and then shut up. The awkward silence might nudge them to give you a pointer or two. If you really want to give them a “Safe” environment, when they start to give you notes state, “Do you care if I write this down?” and jot it down on paper or in your phone. This shows the person their opinion is important and might lead to more feedback. Lastly, don’t get defensive and start explaining why you do something. JUST LISTEN and thank them for their feedback. Keep in mind, you are 100% in control and what you do with this feedback is entirely up to you. Here Are Some Resources to Get Your Podcast Reviewed: Podcast Review Show The Podcast Whisperer Podcast Rodeo show If you know of others leave them in the...
Every podcaster has one thing in common: they all have 24 hours in the day. Today I'm going to share a ton of research and strategies to get your more productive. Last week I talked about five things that you think will grow your audience but don't. This is continuing on with that theme of determining what you want to do, and then getting it done. One of my favorite quotes from Abraham Lincoln is “Give me six hours to chop down a tree and I will spend the first four sharpening the axe.” If you have no focus, it doesn't matter what microphone you have if you can't get it together. My Own Personal Struggles Growing up I was what some might call "A weird little boy." I remember driving my Mom nuts as I would be in the kitchen talking on the phone. We had a bunch of 16 oz coke glasses that I would fill up with water and tune and then play as I was talking on the phone. I always described myself as "Creative" but I'm sure if I was in elementary school today that would pump me with enough Ritalin to put a Rhino to sleep. As an adult, I tried going on some medication but the more focus I achieved was washed away by the energy that was sucked out of me. With this in mind when I get my creative juices flowing, I can be hyper-focused and lose all sense of time. To me I define that as "fun," but when you look up at the clock and it's 3 AM, and you have a big presentation the next day that is a problem. For the most part, much like many programs, admitting you have an issue is step one. I have a clear indicator and that is my desk. The more messy it is, the better the chance I need to pump the breaks. Pumping the Breaks Slowing down seems backward, but when you find yourself behind in tasks, etc and everything in your mind and body is saying "Push through" and you want to throw on your Superman or Wonder Woman outfit and start writing checks your body can cash. The result is you become more purposeful, focused, and you get more stuff done. What Do You Want To Be When You Grow Up? 6:24 Whatever the goal is, you need to know it. I would recommend writing it down (more tools later). Take some time to think about it. If you don't know where you want to go, how will you know when you get there? If you aim at nothing you will hit it every time. Setting Priorities The book First Things First by Steven Covey he talks about Important VS Urgent Important activities have an outcome that leads to us achieving our goals, whether these are professional or personal. Urgent activities demand immediate attention and are usually associated with achieving someone else's goals. They are often the ones we concentrate on and they demand attention because the consequences of not dealing with them are immediate. Something that is urgent and important is a crisis. It's pressing problems with deadlines. Something that is important but NOT urgent would be things such as exercise, relationship building, personal growth. If you ignore these important things, they later become important AND urgent. Some things that are urgent but NOT important might be interruptions, phone calls (some of them), some email, some meetings Some things that are not important and NOT urgent would be busy work, time wasters, some pleasant activities. How to Know When To Delegate? 9:02 In episode 159 of the Resourceful Designer, Mark had some great questions you can use to make this simple. First, you have to identify all the things you do in your podcast/life. He suggests using post-it notes or an index card, but you're going to need a place for two piles. Then take each task and answer the following questions Go from task to task and ask yourself, Does this bring me joy or Do I like doing this one particular task? Am I good at this particular thing? If you answered yes to BOTH questions, put it in pile number one. If you cannot respond yes to both questions, put it into pile number two. Separate your collection into these two piles. Pile Number 1: Things that I like...
We only have so many hours in a day, and today I'm starting a two-part series on being more productive. The first thing you need to identify is activities that take up your time and provide no benefits. Today I have five. Asking For Subscriptions Before You Deliver Value 2:11 The podcast audience may see this as a commitment. In the same way that I have test driven every car I've ever purchased, I think people need more than two minutes of your show before we start begging them to subscribe. Next week I'll be talking about some new software tools to help you be more productive and all of them have a free trial. They want you to see the value before asking you to spend any money. When you start off a show asking people to subscribe before they hear any content of value, you are more than likely wasting your time. Have you ever subscribed to a show because the host asked you to? Not me. I subscribe when I get really good content. Sending People to the Haystack That is Apple Podcasts 6:15 As a support person for Libsyn.com ( get a free month using the coupon code sopfree ) I have people asking why their show doesn't come up in a search. Some of it is the fact that there are over (as I write this in April of 2019) 700,000 shows in Apple Podcasts. Another thing to keep in mind is that Apple appears to display somewhere between 100-300 results and if there already 300 golf podcasts, or real estate, your show may not appear for the term "Golf." In some cases, your show may not appear at all. Example: The podcast "The Feed" by Libsyn doesn't show up when you type in the phrase "The feed" into Apple iTunes. The show does not appear. If you type Libsyn it does. Most directories give you a link to your show on their platform. Instead of sending people to Apple (and now Spotify) send them to YOUR WEBSITE where instead of sifting through 700,000 podcasts they have one to choose from and the only choice is if they should Asking for Reviews to “Help Us Be Found in Apple” 10:39 Reviews are social proof. That's it. They do not boost you in search results. Obsessing Over Chart Position 11:05 One of the things that made me worry about chartable.com when it came out is it would lead to people obsessing over chart position. It did. Instead of taking time to make WOW content, you're trying to figure out why you dropped two positions in the Brazilian charts. Focus on your audience, make great content, and make it easy to share and subscribe. Then do that consistently and you will end up on the charts. Upgrading Your Podcast Equipment 13:41 If it ain't broke don't fix it. If your audio sounds OK, and your audience doesn't have to keep grabbing the volume knob, chances are your audio is OK. While some podcasters obsess over boosting certain frequencies and talking about gear, for upgrading equipment to boost your audience would mean your audio was so bad that people tuned out. Most of us are not in that situation. Here are some examples of what can lead to really bad audio: Using the built-in microphone in your laptop Incorrectly using a blue yeti microphone (not a bad mic, it is overpriced, and without using properly can lead to really bad audio) Using one microphone to record multiple people. Audio that causes people to keep grabbing the volume knob. Check out My Gear Page Podcast Rewind 21:17 I appeared on Podlords with Jim Harold and My Perfect Podcast with Ryan Jackson Because of My Podcast 23:59 Brand from Florida Focus podcast shares how he used a voicemail from his Mother into his podcast that has now been shared with family and friends NAB Reflections I attended NAB last week with the Libsyn.com team and podcasting has radio's attention. While I was there I picked up a Samson MBa38 boom stand. This is about half the price of a Heil PL2T and still less expensive than the Rode PSA1 Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
So many people fear they will sound stupid or unprofessional but this is not something you need to worry about as even a show that is recorded live can be edited before being sent to your audience. Today I share some examples of the theories I used to edit my show Because of My Podcast: I'm Up For A Webby Award 1:49 Emily Prokop from The Story Behind podcast has been on the show before as she got a book deal "Because of her podcast" and how she has been nominated for a Webby award. PLEASE VOTE HERE Editing Your Podcast Will Make it Better 3:33 Mount Rushmore was once a mountain built of rock. Then someone editing it, and it is now a national memorial. There are movie editors, newspaper editors, book editors, etc. For me, I believe every podcast can benefit from editing. Today I share some examples and theories behind my editing decisions. Everything About Editing is An Opinion Some people do no editing, and some people will "over edit." Today I talk about my philosophies which are: Always remove low hanging fruit (and Um, or crutch word that isn't near any other words) ALWAYS Listen through the ears of your audience and ask if whatever you are listening to delivers value. Be careful about the curse of knowledge as it can leave your audience in the dark Most of my editing is me shaping my rambling questions into something a bit more focused In some cases, if a point is made late in the episode, you don't need it twice. If I have to zoom in to a very, very, very magnified level to edit the audio ( I call this "busting out a scalpel) I let it go. The goal of an interview is to make your guest sound good. In some cases, a backstory is given that is not needed. A pregnant pause can add additional emphasis to the communication Nobody wants to know how the sausage was made Editing Your Podcast Intro To Give You Clarity and Authority 22:30 Morgan Cole is a client of mine who does the Brightline Podcast. He gave me permission to let you listen to a call we did where we shaped his intro. You will hear where we shaved off quite of his into while still explaining what the show is about and who Morgan is (and why you should listen) Check out his show at https://brightlinepodcast.com/ Are you duplicating any content? Is your purpose and description clear (and jargon-free) You don't have to cram all of your details in the intro. Run Everything Through Your Target Audience 30:12 My church wanted to have a slogan "where the word is important." I explain how I felt this didn't connect. How Long Does it Take to Edit an Hour Long Episode? 31:30 I asked the Podcast Editors Club how long it would take to "De-Um" hour-long episodes. While it obviously depends based on how much a person um, says, um, and ya know, um, is an um machine. The quickest ranged from 90 minutes to three or four hours. Mentioned on the Show Big Podcast Book Big Podcast Website Red Podcast Podcast Talent Coach Podcast Review Show Podcast Rodeo Show (I can't believe what I heard episode) Podcast Editors Club She Podcast Kickstarter Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
David Hooper has a background in the music and entertainment business, the music business, and has spent the last four years writing the Big Podcast – Grow Your Podcast Audience, Build Listener Loyalty, and Get Everybody Talking About Your Show. It's one of the best books I've read on podcasting (and I'm only about 50% of the way through the book). David and I go back to 2006 when I was doing the Musicians Cyber Cooler podcast (later renamed the Marketing Musician) and he was doing Music Business Radio (a radio show syndicated across the nation that David turned into a podcast). I've been listening to updates about his book on his marketing podcast RED Podcast, as well as his Big Podcast show. Today it was great to talk to him now that the book is published. SPONSOR: NAB SHOW 1:27 Have a passion for podcasting? Attend the NAB (National Association of Broadcasters) Show April 8-11, 2019 to meet, collaborate and strategize with the world's most renowned storytellers. Learn how to grow audiences and revenue, create captivating content and meet with those who can take your vision to new heights. Register today at www.nabshow.com with code VEGAS for a Free Exhibits Pass. Your story will never be the same. A Talk With David Hooper Author of the Book Big Podcast 2:50 A fun conversation 4:55 Has Dave always been this curious? (Dave and David went to a very special location in Florida at Podfest) 8:13 The politics of getting guests 11:25 The power of the pre-interview 15:54 How do you get guests when you are new 17:22 How do you handle the "Dance in your head" when you are doing an interview 20:45 Dave recommends launching with 25 episodes, and I disagree 26:20 Are podcasters open to adjusting their show? 32:56 How long should my podcast be? 36:09 What was the thinking behind the RED Podcast? It's just so different... 39:07 Does he get flack for being so non-judgemental, or occasionally "Pushing the envelope." 41:03 Jeff Christy was a horrible TOP 40 DJ (hear his aircheck) 43:35 Media Training that Dave does with some television shows. 45:33 What other media training does Dave do? How to avoid the puke voice 50:00 The hardest and easiest parts of the book to write 52:00 The incestuous nature of podcasting 53:50 Did Dave have any imposter syndrome? Mentioned In This Episode Building a Better Dave Podcast Big Podcast Music Business Radio 28 Day Podcast Jumpstart Podcast Interviewing School Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
What is Your Crutch Word - How Did You Get Rid of It? Crutch words are we words we use when our brain can't come up with something to say. They are used to fill up silence that some feel is awkward. We all have them, and they are only an issue when they are used so much that it becomes distracting/annoying. Please realize that never having a crutch word may be impossible. Often we don't even hear them. So we have to start with identifying that we have a crutch word. When I asked you about your crutch words, here are the ones you are trying to avoid: Craig from Ingles Podcast is "So" and has lots of examples of what to avoid. Brad from The Cinema Guys podcast is "Like" as well as "So Anway..." Brenda from the My Tech Toolbelt Podcast "Is a Big Fan of..." as well as "Right" Darwin Dave from the Dealing with My Grief podcast "So" Tim From the He Said She Said Movie Reviews Podcast Arnie at the Football History Dude Podcast says "Dude..." Nina from Farm Food Health has lots of ums... Mark from the Resourceful Designer and Podcast Branding had a listener let him know he was saying Basically a ton. Mel From Beer with an Engineer has lots of ums, and so.... but turned it into a drinking game. Mike Dell from Podcast Help Desk and Podcast Help Desk News crutch words is "Anyway...." and he's just been pausing instead. Stephanie from the Expat Rewind has "soooo many..." Lee from This is Rammy finds himself saying "Obviously" Win from Ask Win finds herself saying "Like" Kim Krajci from Toastmasters 101 has some tips on how to avoid crutch words. SPONSOR: Alitu Web Based Podcast Maker It's a web app, where people can log in on their web browser and then use it to edit and produce their podcast episodes. Mobile app coming soon too. Podcasters record their show as normal, then upload their recordings to Alitu. Alitu then processes, levels, converts them all, pieces the clips together, adds your theme music automatically, and publishes the episode, direct to your podcast host. If you need to edit out any mistakes, then you can use Alitu's custom podcast editing tool to do just that, before creating your finished episode. The idea behind Alitu is to make Podcasting and quick and simple as possible, removing a bunch of the tech barriers and to let you concentrate on the bit you do best – talking about something you love! It can take an interview where each person records their side of the conversation, and it will combine them together (how cool is that?) Check it out at www.alitu.com check out this video How To Get Rid of Crutch Words Identify them Monitor your use of them Practice NOT Using them. This may include getting use to silence (that you can edit out) Try to figure out what is going on when you use it. Try to determine why you chose to use that word at that time. Next Month's Question: Are you paying for any part of your podcast process? If so how much, and on what? (not so much who you are using). I need your answers by 4/27/19 see my contact page for more information (you can upload pre-recorded files) Mentioned in This Episode Alitu web-based podcast Creator You Wanna Do What Podcast "You Can't Read the Label from the Inside of the Bottle." Where I Will Be April 6-11 National Association of Broadcasters Las Vegas June 8th Utah Podcast Summit Sandy, Utah August 13-16 Podcast Movement Orlando Florida September 8-10 Military Influencer Conference Washington DC October 17 – 18 DOYO Live Youngstown Ohio. Other Events You Might Want to Check Out She Podcasts Live: The Women's Podcasting Experience Podcast MidAtlantic September 6-7 Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
I got an email from someone struggling to start their podcast, "The biggest issue I’m dealing with is psychological: the show is not coming together in the format that I really wanted—and at this point there seems to be nothing I can do about that— but that, combined with fear, uncertainty, and doubt, and the inevitable self-comparisons to what others are doing as well as my own personal expectations has quite frankly got me a little bit paralyzed. It’s like I’m on the firing line, I’m locked and loaded and I’ve got a good site picture, but I just can’t get myself to pull the trigger because I’m afraid of the kickback." I've mentioned in the past how to Overcoming Imposter Syndrome and the story of Monica Rivera, and today I want to talk about how it feels to podcast. What Does it Feel Like to be a Podcaster? Excited By the possibilities Frustrated When computers decide to be, well, computers. Smarter When you figure things out Nervous As you are learning new things, and getting outside of your comfort zone. Confident When you publish your first episode Frightened When you realize everyone can hear your show. Humbled / Shocked When we inspire someone or affect someone. Normal When you find out you’re not the only one who thinks this way. Safe Because you are surrounded by people similar to you Amazed At the opportunities to that come your way, the people you get to speak Mentioned in This Show Overcoming Imposter Syndrome Episode Monica Rivera The Nudge You Need Podcasting in America The latest edition the Edison Research Infinite Dial was published. Here are some insights: 70% are familiar with the word podcasting ( 197 Million people) 51% have listened to at least one podcast ( a 7% jump) 32% listen on a monthly basis (up from 26%) 22% listen on a weekly basis (up from 17%) 17 million more people are monthly listeners than last year. 14 million more podcast are listening Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
Podcast Industry Leaders Gather in NYC I attended the On Air Festival in NYC in New York City where what some might describe as "Procasters" were in attendance. When I went to talk to people instead of finding people who spoke into microphones I found: Producers Editors Writers and I was amazed to find that: Some episodes of Radiolab take up to two years for ONE episode Missing Richards Simmons took one year to produce You can create an entire season of a podcast using 5% of the budget of a TV pilot. Advertisers want more stats even though podcasting is providing more data than they've ever received. Start With the Story Dan from Sporkful had a great talk and explained how it took him nine years to make his podcast his full-time job. Kristen Meinzer from By the Book podcast (which reviews self-help books) explained how she took a book review and worked a story into it. Special thanks to Monica Rivera from the You Wanna Do What Podcast for being my tour guide SPONSOR: Alitu Web Based Podcast Maker It's a web app, where people can log in on their web browser and then use it to edit and produce their podcast episodes. Mobile app coming soon too. Podcasters record their show as normal, then upload their recordings to Alitu. Alitu then processes, levels, converts them all, pieces the clips together, adds your theme music automatically, and publishes the episode, direct to your podcast host. If you need to edit out any mistakes, then you can use Alitu's custom podcast editing tool to do just that, before creating your finished episode. The idea behind Alitu is to make Podcasting and quick and simple as possible, removing a bunch of the tech barriers and to let you concentrate on the bit you do best – talking about something you love! It can take an interview where each person records their side of the conversation, and it will combine them together (how cool is that?) Check it out at www.alitu.com check out this video Mp3 Chapter Marks I mentioned how I started adding chapter marks in the mp3 file, and I wasn't sure if any apps even used these chapters. It turns out there are more software titles that recognize these than I originally thought Overcast used them (and not much else). It turns out that MP3 chapters can be displayed with Instacast, Overcast, Downcast, Podcat, Pocket Casts and iCatcher!. On Android you can use Podcast Addict, which supports chapters in all file formats (MP3, M4A/MP4, Opus, Ogg, etc.), uPod to display chapter marks with URLs and images in MP3 and MP4 files, the open source AntennaPod supports chapter titles with URLs in MP3, Opus and Ogg Vorbis files and Pocket Casts supports MP3 chapters. Apple Has Too Much Power? With Apple threatening (and then rescinding) to pull people from Apple podcasts some people were really upset and stated we should take steps to remove Apple of it's power. I've been around long enough to remember podcasting before Apple added podcasts to iTunes, and that gave podcasting a boost in the arm. When they added the podcast app to be native to their operating system. Yahoo, Microsoft, Odeo, Google (multiple times) have created and deleted a podcast directory. With Spotify spending a TON of money, I say if you want to "topple" Apple I have a two-word plan: STEP UP. Don't create software that doesn't have half the power of the current leading titles step up and provide all the current features AND THEN SOME. Create something that makes it easier for the listener (Which is what Apple did). For those that think Apple has too much power, feel free to remove your show from their directory if you hate it so much. Apple is giving best practices on how to get the most out of their software and they are complaining. Back in 2012 some consultants came up with a "file for download only" strategy that was REALLY STUPID in 2012 (and just Hideous in today's...
I was on the Podcasters roundtable with Ray, Bandrew talking burnout. We talk about The Signs of Burnout The Sources of Burnout Solutions to Burnout SPONSOR: Alitu Web Based Podcast Maker It's a web app, where people can log in on their web browser and then use it to edit and produce their podcast episodes. Mobile app coming soon too. Podcasters record their show as normal, then upload their recordings to Alitu. Alitu then processes, levels, converts them all, pieces the clips together, adds your theme music automatically, and publishes the episode, direct to your podcast host. If you need to edit out any mistakes, then you can use Alitu's custom podcast editing tool to do just that, before creating your finished episode. The idea behind Alitu is to make Podcasting and quick and simple as possible, removing a bunch of the tech barriers and to let you concentrate on the bit you do best - talking about something you love! Check it out at www.alitu.com Mentioned in this Episode 660 Video of A Star is Born being filmed Bandrew's YouTube Channel Ray's Podcasters Studio Podcast Podcasters Roundtable Podcast Bandrew Says Podcast
Podcast Pet Peeves 2019 06:13 A peeve is defined as "a source of annoyance or irritation." Today we are talking Podcasting Pet peeves, but not just pet peeves but your TOP pet peeves. When you listen to a podcast and you hear this you reach for the unsubscribe button. Contributors: Stephanie - Ex Pat Rewind at stephfuccio.weebly.com Jonathan - Weekly Awesome Scott McCarthy - Moving Forward Leadership Bill from Youth with a Mission Trish - Honest Nurse Podcast Scott - What Was That Like? Issa Fears and Desires Brian - Conspiracy Theoryology Emmanuel Laroche - Flavors Unknown Anna Seawalt - Authentic Parenting Podcast Marc - Resourceful Designer Justin - Optimal Living Daily Laura Reviews and Randomness Matt - The Author Inside You Brian - Engaging Missions Ryan - My Perfect Podcast Win Charles - Ask Win C.L. - Plantrama Your Podcast Consultant - NEW SHOW 2:00 I launched a new show in January for those who want to learn about podcasting in bite-sized chunks. It's called "Your Podcast Consultant" and you can find it at www.podcastconsultant.com you can subscribe to the show in Apple or Google, Spotify Episodes include: Why start a podcast How long should my podcast be? How to overcome your fear of technology Starter Podcast Microphones How do I pick my subject? 9 Strategies to get on other podcasts Update on Anchor Advertisers 43:24 In the past when I created three test shows on Anchor, the only sponsor I was offered was Anchor (so what was described as a way for Anchor to make money, seemed to be yet another way for Anchor to lose more money). I mentioned this in an article and video I created. When I logged into my Anchor Sucks (IMHO) show, I was surprised to see that Squarespace and the Black Tux wanted to sponsor a show that only had 70 downloads. Black Tux is .02 per downloads. Squarespace is .0175 per download and Anchor is .01 per download. If I included all three (which would mean a minute of 90 seconds of ads in my show) I would make almost .05 per download. Assuming an audience would sit through so many commercials. A show with 150 downloads would make $7.13 per episode. Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
As valentines was this week so we have a special edition of "Because of My Podcast," and speaking of finding things, today we talk about some tools to help you be found in Google. Because of My Podcast We Found Love: John Bukenas from Audio Editing Solutions is dating Samantha from I Shake My Head With Lisa and Sam Chris and Krissie from I Am Salt Lake share their story of dating, marriage, and BABIES! Jeremy from Podcast We Listen To and Dina Marie from the Twisted Philly podcast Podcast Rewind: Podcasts We Listen To I appeared on the Podcast We Listen To podcast talking about my show and the early days of podcasting. This podcast also has a great Facebook group filled with podcast listeners, but it's NOT A PLACE TO PROMOTE YOUR SHOW (this group does that). I Was Wrong About M4a Files 13:57 I published an article on the Podcasting Busines Journal website and mentioned how mp3 files are more reliable then m4a when it comes to pressing play. In the past, I've seen m4a files just spin and spin and not play in Apple Podcasts. When I went back to see if this is still true, it's not. Free SEO Tools To Help You Be Found in Google 18:11 As the search in the podcasts app chokes on the huge amount of shows coming into the podcasting space, there are times when it seems you just can't be found. So if you've done all there is to do, another strategy is to make sure you can be found in this other tool that helps people be found called Google. I've taken SEO For Podcasting by Daniel J Lewis SEO Courses from Yoast Podcast SEO Marketing from Ploymash (Juergen Berkessel ) Tools I've Added and Started Using Monster Insights Wordpress Plugin that allows you to see Google Analytics in Wordpress. Neil Patel's Ubersuggest Domain Authority Checker Another great suite of tools is Mongools SEO Suite Question of the Month: What is your TOP Pet Peeve? You can only pick one. Please send them in by 2/22/19 Alexacast For Sale 31:26 I've come to the conclusion that I can't continue (or in this case bring back) the Alexacast. This is a show about the Amazon world, and especially what is happening with Alexa. If you'd like to take this show over, please contact me. You'll need to pay for your media hosting and web hosting. I prefer you host it at www.coolerwebsites.com Podcasting For Fun 34:00 Just a reminder you can podcast for fun. You do NOT have to make money with a podcast. Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
Spotify Buys the Best and Worst in Podcasting Spotify bought Gimlet and Anchor. Does this have any effect on "Joe Independent podcaster?" not immediately, but it is a big company, with big pockets, who will spend money to promote podcasting (and that's is a good thing). As for Anchor, I will be making a video to explain the many things wrong with that system in the future. Spotify my want their money back. She Almost Quit Her Podcast 8:39 For nearly two decades, Carolyn Cole was a Fortune 100 and Fortune 200 Senior Company Trial Attorney. In that role, she worked with over 10,000 clients, witnesses, and experts, for over 25,000 collective hours. Today, Carolyn make the case on behalf of your life, business or career dreams – happiness too. A while ago Carolyn contacted me for some one on one coaching. She was ready to quit. She had heard that the way to have podcast success is to launch with a boatload of episodes, ask people for rating and reviews, and get into New and Noteworthy. She had followed the "recipe" but it hadn't worked and she was ready to quit. I told her not to quit, that podcasting takes time to build up her audience. It's a marathon - not a sprint. She didn't quit. Check out her show at www.boomtank.com In our talk you will hear: How she almost missed an opportunity with Steve Harvey How her show and tagline have changed since she started How she used her podcast to boost her business How networking with your local chamber of commerce can help you How 250 Devoted people can work. How "being small" allows you to do things "bigger" shows don't do. Behind the scenes of working with larger companies The Lessons of editing your own stuff How her audience has changed over the years Why Millenials should be podcasting There is no such thing as a "small" podcast The best and worst parts of podcasting The book "How to be a Power Connector" help to change her life Rode Is Giving Away 150,000 in Podcasting Prizes 43:41 Submit a 2-minute podcast and enter a chance to win 150,000 worth of podcast equipment. Check it out at www.myrodecast.com Question of the Month: What is Your TOP Podcasting Pet Peeve? Record your answer and email it to dave@schoolofpodcasting.com Or go to my contact page (please put "February Question" in the subject line). I need your answer by February 22nd, 2019. Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
Friday was my 54th birthday. This weekend I ran a special for six people on my Three Month Mentoring Program ( Podcast Quick Start) You get: My 14 years of podcasting experience along with my Hall of Fame insights. Three-month access to ALL the courses at the School of Podcasting ($49) The WEEKLY live group coaching and extended office hours ($800) The Private Facebook group for networking and brainstorming (priceless) PLUS WEEKLY ONE-ON-ONE Planning and accountability call ($1200) Over $2100 in value. I'm making this available for 54% percent off so your price isn't $2147, it's not the normal price of $697 (which is a steal already) it's only $320. Right now go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/birthday and use the coupon code " birthday " I look forward to working with you
Last week we spoke about making sure you have great content, today we have tips on building your community. Because of My Podcast - I've Got press Passes to the On Air Festival On-Air Fest is advancing the culture of audio. We bring together an expansive range of emerging and established voices to explore the creative possibilities of sound. Across multiple spaces in Brooklyn's Wythe Hotel, over 100 talent will share innovative ideas and showcase new work. Join us for a weekend of intimate conversations, performances, art installations, listening parties and live podcasts. FEB 28-MAR 3 2019 BROOKLYN, NYC Building Community - Starts Slow, Takes Work, and Then You Have 1000 Members Jeremy Enns is the Storyteller In Chief of podcast agency Counterweight Creative, fearless leader of the Cut The Bullshit Podcasting Community, and creator of the Podcast Power Pack. He loves the outdoors, long distance cycle touring, and will always look back on the day he finally saved up enough money to buy the Millennium Falcon Lego set as one of his proudest achievements. Is there BS in the podcast Space? How do you grow your community? There hasn't been much moderation needed in his group Set rules and ensure people follow them He was working with Women's health world and noticed how well this niche networks together Podcast Power Pack A collection of 20_ contributors who are combining all their products and selling them at 90% off on February 25th - Friday, March 1 The Podcast Power Pack is a collection of some of the best online courses, eBooks, membership communities, digital products, and software. The pack is designed to help you refine your process and grow your podcast in 4 key areas. check it out at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/podcastpowerpack Mentioned in this Episode Join the Newsletter for bonus content and automatic show note delivery School of Podcasting Newsletter Podfest Multimedia Export in March Win 150,000 worth of Podcasting Gear From Rode See https://www.rode.com/myrodecast This interview was recorded using Squadcast the best way to record remote interviews Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor
Before you start promoting your show, how do you know if it's good? How do you know if it will connect with your audience? Ready to Start Podcasting? Imagine you want to start a lawn mowing business and the only way you know how to cut the grass is one blade at a time. That's how I felt about my podcast until the coaching session I had last night with Dave Jackson. I'm Zita Christian host of Ritual Recipes. A podcast filled with practical magic to nourish your inner life. I had a coaching session with Dave Jackson last night. He used a screen sharing technique to walk me through the problems I had with my podcast and with my gear and with my website. I am not technically savvy, and that's putting it mildly. But with Dave, that's not a problem. The man is a born teacher. His approach is clear. His attitude is always encouraging and above all, and at least for me, he's patient. So I asked you do you want to start a podcast? Do you want to fix the one you have? If you answered yes to either one. Get the kind of help that will make a difference. Work with Dave Jackson. Give your podcast a real chance to succeed. Zita Christian Ritual Recipes moonriverrituals.com How Do You Know Your Show is Good? According to Jay Soderberg, great content contains the "Three E's" Entertain, Educate, and Emotional (leads to engagement). I've always said contact that you can't get any place else is always a boost (which I guess would fit in under educational) I posed this question to a few people: Participants Jay "Podvader" Soderberg from Next Fan Up Jayson Sacco: The Ankylosing Spondylitis Podcast Lee Silverstein: We Have Cancer Andrea Klunder: The Creative Impostor Natalie Eckdahl: Biz Chix Super Joe Pardo: Business with Super Joe Pardo David Steele: Steele Empire Gene Monterastelli: Tapping Q and A Podcast Jeremy Ends: Podcast Powerpack Darwyn Dave: Dealing with My Grief You NEED to connect with your audience wherever they are. Quit staring at the Apple podcast charts and focus on your audience (which leads to you moving into the charts if done consistently). Realize what works for one podcast does not mean this will work for your show, so you may need the courage to try something new. Natalie uses coaching calls as part of her show. Lee changed the name of his show from The Colon Cancer Podcast to "We Have podcast." Gene and Natalie have VERY SPECIFIC ideas of who they want listening, and how they will gauge success (and it has nothing to do with rankings and reviews). Jeremy has helped clients who are happy they tried surveys. Andrea helps people define who their target audience is. When you know who your target audience is, and you understand the goal of your show, you can start to chart a path between the two. Mentioned in this podcast Google Forms Type Form
2019 Prediction I see more and more people getting into podcasting who Want to spend zero money Spend very little time on creating content Make large amounts of money - quickly My prediction is 98% of the people who get into podcasting for the SOLE reason of making money fast will quit and say podcasting does not work. This episode is to educate you with knowledge so you can make an educated decision. Keep mind, you DO NOT have to make money with your podcast. Many, many, many podcasters do it for the love of the topic. Because of My Podcast: Emily Prokop Will Be on TV 1:50 Emily Prokop from The Story Behind Podcast and EPodcast Productions has had "Because of My Podcast" Stories in the past (as she got a book deal). Now because of her podcast (which brought her a book deal), she is going to be on Inside Edition. How cool is that? Congrats Emily Update on Rode Rodecaster Pro 4:10 Last week we had three people share their insights into the Rode Rodecaster Pro, and I had not tied the unit into Skype yet. I agree when you use the phone, it sounds like, the phone. I had Jonathan Bloom from Weekly Awesome and Miss Ileane Smith join me on Ask the Podcast Coach via the wired TRRS cable, using Skype and out sounded much better. Johnathan was on Skype in his phone and Ileane was using an ATR2100 and sounded awesome. The Potential Harm of Launching Your Podcast With a Patreon 7:28 While I realize that starting to promote a patreon account the minute you start podcasting may seem like a great idea, my worry is this is another criteria (like your download stats) to gauge your process. I'm not saying it's wrong, but I want you to go into this with your eyes wide open. How Do We Get Sucked In? There are people on patreon making thousands of dollars a month. In the same way that ice skaters, musicians, comedians, and athletes make their craft look easy, so do these podcasters. You talk into a mic, ask people for money, and watch the cash roll in. Nothing could be further from the truth How Do You Feel About PDS Pledge Drives? Think about how you feel when watching a PBS pledge drive. You’re enjoying the smooth tones of James Taylor as you reminisce about the first time you heard this song on the radio. The memories make you feel warm and then BOOM! We need some money. If you don’t have a relationship with PBS, (and found this while channel surfing) I’m going to bet these interruptions are quite annoying. Without a relationship, pledge drives make you want to change the channel (at least for me it does). So does this mean that your pledge drives in the early days of your podcast is a bad idea? I guess it all depends on how entertaining and creative you are in asking for support. Things To Consider As a New Podcaster While launching with a Patreon campaign allows you to practice your pitch, and gets your audience used to hearing your pledge drive in episodes, there are a few things to consider: You may find yourself focusing more on your Patreon rewards instead of focusing on making great content that inspires your audience to tell a friend. You can practice your pledge drive pitch in the basement. You don’t have a relationship with these your audience and yet you're asking for a favor. Unless you organized a focus group, you may not be delivering value (and yet you are asking for value in return). Your Mom is not a focus group. If you are doing great you can expect 3% of your audience to join your campaign. If you have 100 listeners this means you MIGHT get 3. According to graphtreon.com in January of 2019: 704,041 creators received a total of $1,512,275. That's a little over $2 per patron. The lack of patrons can damage your attitude and make you want to quit your podcast. If your sole reason for starting your podcast was for quickly getting money, you should stop. The Pressure of Patreon 20:20 Jordan Harbinger gave up being a lawyer to do a podcast where he interviews people and talks about communications and...
The Rode Rodecaster Pro has caught the attention of many podcasters, and some have pulled the trigger. Jim Harold (Paranormal podcast) and Jeff Bradury from Teachercast have purchased the unit. I want to thank Rode for shipping me a unit to play with. Their first impression was amazing. Is It Worth the Money? If purchased a four channel mixer a popular mixer is the Behringer Q1202USB is $119 A Mackie Headphone Amplifier is $40 A Jingle pallet can cost you $10 (Backpack Studio on iOs) but you'll need a phone or a tablet A portable recorder at its cheapest is $119 for a Zoom H1N The Aphex processing would cost you $345. Total Price: That would be $120+40+10+120+345 = $635 The Rodecaster Pro clocks in at $599 and you avoid all the cabling all over the place. You don't have to learn about "Gain staging" and if you're using a half decent microphone, you're going to sound great. Spec Sheet PDF Quick Start Guide Jeff Bradbury of Teachercast 9:51 Jeff Bradbury from the Teachercast loves his Rodecaster Pro Jeff had a situation where he needed to interview someone over the phone and it turned out great. Jeff points out that if you're using something external for mix-minus, you might hit a snag He also wishes it came with a Micro SD card. He has worked with it on Skype and Zoom. Jeff is using a Mac If you're a teacher, check out everything Jeff has to offer at www.teachercast.net Jim Harold From the Paranormal Podcast 14:21 Jim Harold has been podcasting since 2005 and produces the Paranormal Podcast, Campfire, Crime Scene along with being the author of many books (all available at www.jimharold.com ) Jim loves the ease of use and enjoys having a noise gate to cut out room noise when he's not talking. He really loves the sound the unit is producing. At the time of the recording, Jim had used it for 4-6 new episodes. Jim has used a Sound Devices Mixpre-3, and a Zoom L12, but really loves the sound he is producing with the Rodecaster. Jim also records a show with his wife called Soulmate Stories and it makes it super easy to pull in people who want to share their stories check it out at http://www.soulmatestoriespodcast.com Jim also hopes in the future there is a way to access recording without having to take the micro SD card out. Jim is also on a Mac. Jim also feels that while he doesn't miss having separate tracks for each person, it would be nice to offer this option in the future. Dave Jackson's Rodecaster Review First of all, I was blown away by the package that was sent to me from the Rode people. This was my first interaction with this company, and I'm not sure I've experienced such a great first impression. I love that you can configure this in minutes. You simply pair the unit with your phone and you're off and running. I used it on Saturday for a live show using Google Hangouts and also on a Group Coaching call using zoom.us and while Rode says it's not set up for the USB to be "mix minus" it appears to work. I like that you can reset the timer if you make a flub and want to start again without stopping the recording. I love the built-in headphone amplifier (don't miss the 3.5mm on the front if you are flying solo). I have my headphones plugged into one, and my studio monitors into another. I am having a slight playback issue (I'm the only one of the three using a new Windows machine). I also hate the MicroSD Card and would love to drag and drop the files to my computer without having to take the card out. I wish there was a pause button so if something goes wrong you could pause the recording. I also wish there was a pause on the jingle buttons so if you wanted to stop and comment on something and then resume your could. In my tests using the TRRS cable made myself sound better to the caller, but decreased their volume. The blue tooth option made the caller louder, but I sounded "not as good" to the caller (but still usable) While Dave doesn't miss separate tracks (but admittedly he is interviewing...
This is another episode where I share some of the "mistakes" that I see people are making in the podcasting space. We need to focus on our audience, not the technology. There are times when we focus on the technology because you are using the wrong tool. Here are things some thing that may be burning you out, wasting your time, and stopping your podcast from being successful. Sometimes Obsess Over Details that Don't Effect Our Episode As a tech support person, I see people obsess over details that will have little or no effect on their episode or podcast growth. I want to know how many people listened in Mongolia on December 12, 2017. Unless you're going on tour, why? The music in my add is of beat The video on Facebook that NOBODY is watching more than 2 seconds. Using The Wrong Software to Create Your Podcast I often refer to this as painting with peanut butter. When you use the tool for the job, you make creating your podcast a hassle and you are likely to get burned out and quit. If the tool you are using to create your audio doesn't allow you to create an mp3 - it's the wrong tool as you will have to use a different program. I see people who use the wrong software go to Facebook groups trying, and trying to make a square peg fit in a round hole. I recommend Hindenburg Journalist (I use Pro), Audacity, and Adobe Audition. I'm not saying all video programs are bad, but they need to be able to export as an mp3. If you need help turning a WAV or AAC file into an mp3 I've got a free tutorial for you. Troubleshooting Trying to Get Something Bright and Shiny For whatever reason, I could not use Belive.tv. My computer would lock up. I had tried a couple of things, but it would always lock up. Again, this was not their problem, it was a problem with my machine. I could have wiped my computer clean, and reloaded all my software, backed up all my files and spent a TON of time. This is where you need to ask FOR WHAT? Lower thirds on my video, and video switching. This is where you need to ask a question, has my audience asked for the feature I'm trying to add? Is this really something that is going to help me grow my audience? Missing the Off-Ramp to Happy Town There are times when you want technology to work, and it doesn't. Then someone alerts to a solution, but you don't like it. Instead, you decide to go back and bang your head against a wall. Different platforms like Facebook, LinkedIn change how they handle podcasts on a somewhat frequent basis. You want it to work one way, but it doesn't. You can manually post to any of these places taking the same steps. You found success - follow it. Maybe you're trying to do something and it won't work with Safari, but it would work with chrome. Instead of using Chrome you decide to band your head against the wall using Safari. You just discovered a solution. You can move forward using a new tool, or troubleshoot Apple's product for free. Working Outside Your Zone of Genius I spent some time playing with the Divi WordPress theme on one of my sites, and I hit some issues that is probably with the Media host. It might be a problem with some plugins. I am working with the tech support team, but web design, in general, is not my best skill, and it might make more sense to let an actual web designer take over, and then let me maintain. Confusing Activity with Productivity I was spending hours listening to podcasts about podcasting that were not bad shows. However, I am blessed with my students, my audience, and lots of contacts in the podcasting space. With this in mind, I'm not learning anything from these show. For the investment in time, I'm not learning anything that I can share with you. Meanwhile, I'm reading books that have me thinking, and coming up with new ideas for episodes. Creating Garbage Audio to be Cleaned Up Later If you are doing a podcast with Interview is have the potential guest record something and send it to you. This will help separate...
Sponsor: Focusrite [1;23] I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy to get your microphone into your computer (and have the option to have a co-host as well) without having to look at a TON of knobs, check out the Focusrite 2i2. As I'm on a PC, I downloaded a driver, plugged in the unit, and was ready to record. If you're on a Mac computer, you just plug it in. If you want a backup copy of your recording, plug a cable into the monitor out and send the signal to your portable recorder. It's built like a tank and is a lovely shade of red. Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website. My Favorite Podcast Is 2018 Thanks to everyone who sent in their submissions. These are in no apparent order: 2:57 My Dad wrote a Porno - Sent in from Anna Seewald from Authentic Parenting - Parenting From the Heart 4:44 Assumptions Podcast (with an Atheist and Christian co-host a show ). Sent in from Alexander from Dear Subjects (help Alexander build the new nation 5:32 Hardcore History Sent in from Arnie Chapman the Football History dude. Learn about the history of foot 6:57 Films on Trial (which has great debates, and is very unique) -Sent in from Brad of the Cinema Guys (they love movies!) 8:13 The Nolecast: Florida State football analysis - Sent in from of the Brandon of the Florida Focus Podcast ( A College Football Podcast) 9:26 The Art of Manliness - Sent in from Chris Nesi of the House of Ed Tech Podcast (changing the way teachers teach ) 10:43 Imaginary Worlds ( Sci-fi genre narrative ) Sent in from Dave of the DC Onscreen podcast (A podcast about the DC Universe, specifically on screen) 11:49 Meet the Holifields ( a great, fun, entertaining behind the scenes of a married couple) Sent in from Eliquitie of the Travel Gluten Free Podcast (Enjoy Food, Enjoy Travel, Enjoy Life ) 13:29 The Model Health Show (variety topics in addition to fitness)- Sent in from Ernie of the Snooks and Lovey podcast (insights into a new married couple) 15:10 Crime Writers On (cause Haley just wanted more Serial talk) - Sent in from Haley Radke of the Adoptees On Podcast (Where Adoptees Discuss the Adoption Experience ) 17:49 Cliff Ravenscraft Show Sent in from Josh of the Corner Cutters Podcast (all about Solving the Rubik's Cube in record time 19:04 Dave predicts Cliff will be a life coach back in 2014 20:00 The Remnant with Jonah Goldberg Sent in from Josh of the Saving Elephants Podcast ( conservative values with a mercifully modern twist ) 21:39 Bill Bur's Monday Morning Podcast (it makes Josh laugh, best ad reads ) - Sent in from Josh Liston of the On the Bubble Podcast 23:39 Jody Mayberry Sent in from Josh Rivers of the Podcast Experiments Podcast 25:28 The Feed the Official Libyn Podcast -Sent in from Justin of the Optimal Living Daily (The Best Blogs Narrated for You Daily) 26:27 The Big Story ( In Depth look on Canada, in quick chunks) Sent from Mark Des Cotes of the Resourceful Designer Podcast (helping graphic artists/ web designers) 27:28 Uncivil Podcast ( an amazing mix of storytelling and conversation) Sent in from Mark Shapiro MD of the Explore the Space Podcast (Examining the interface between healthcare & society) 28:52 The Newsworthy (a great short podcast with the latest news) Sent in from Matt Rafferty of The Author Inside You Podcast (encourage authors to write and publish their first book). Hear Erica on Podcast Junkies 29:58 Reply All (a show about the Internet) Sent in by Max Prescott from of the Aviation News Talk Podcast (General aviation podcast) 31:11 Free Field training - Sent in from Mike Wilkerson of the What Cops Watch Podcast (Go behind the badge). Hear the review of What Cops Watch...
Dave Chessen is known as the Kindlepreneur and is the host of the Book Marking Show and has turned his blog into a podcast. His show has a great format as he talks about a strategy in his show and then interviews someone who is using that strategy. Where I've Been: 2 Minute Tips Podcast 1:40 I was interviewed on the 2 Minute Tips podcast where we talk about my experience as a presenter and my 20 years as a corporate trainer and any tips on making good presentations. Check it out at http://2minutetalktips.com/davewhen My Favorite Podcast Question of the Month 2:37 If you'd like some exposure for your show it's super easy. Send in your answer and give the following information You #1 favorite podcast (only 1) Where can I find it (website) Why is it your favorite Your podcast (if you have one) Where can we find your show? What is it about? See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact Deve Chessen Behind the Scenes of Launching a Book 4:16 I interviewed Dave Chessen for my More Podcast Money podcast, and in listening to the episode I felt you would appreciate it because: Many podcasters at events have mentioned writing a book There are plenty of strategies that align in both launching a podcast and launching a book In this interview, you will hear: Planning with the end in mind Tips on getting good artwork/book cover on a budget The importance of editing How podcasting has helped his brand How much you can expect to spend on launching a book Check out Dave at Kindlepreneur.com and his Book Marketing Show amscourse.com ( SELL MORE BOOKS WITH AMAZON BOOK ADS) Kindle Keywords article Great Podcast Starter Kit Q2U Podcast Pack 28:28 If you are looking to start a podcast, this is a great package. Cardioid polar pattern is effective in minimizing noise and off-axis audio that can cause feedback. Frequency response of 44.1 / 48 kHz, 16-bit resolution. Low-latency headphone monitoring w/ a level control. XLR and USB outputs to record to Mac or Windows-based computer while at the same time connect to a mixer, preamplifier, or PA system. On/Off switch controls both USB and XLR audio outputs. Microphone is plug and play requiring no driver installation. Practical & necessary accessories like a mic boom arm that offers 28" of arms reach, a pop filter that softens explosive sounds, & more in the bundle. All this for $105. If you bought similar items Samson Q2U Microphone $59 Boom Arm $54 Headphones $35 Windscreen $3 Pop Filter $10 Total would be $161 (You save $56) Check it out As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases The Software on Dave's Computer 32:02 Adobe Audition Hindenburg Journalist Pro Evernote Chrome Firefox Camtasia Podcast I Will Be Loading On My New computer Audacity Mp3 tag Skype Zoom iTunes Droplr Izotope Media Info Backblaze MP3 Skype Recorder Reflector 3 Rescue Time Sony Sound Forge Spotify Title Analyzer Headlinr Pro Auphonic Mentioned In This Episode Kindlepreneur.com amscourse.com ( SELL MORE BOOKS WITH AMAZON BOOK ADS) Long Tail Pro Software Beaver Builder Software Divi Theme Free Baby Steps Podcast Course Jim Harold Free Headline Tools Work With Me If you are ready to start a podcast www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start If you need a podcast mentor see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwith me
Today we hear from Try Heinritz of the Blacklist Exposed reveal what it was like to see Dax Shepard record his podcast in a sold-out Chicago Theater. Sponsor: Focusrite 2:53 I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy to get your microphone into your computer (and have the option to have a co-host as well) without having to look at a TON of knobs, check out the Focusrite 2i2. As I'm on a PC, I downloaded a driver, plugged in the unit, and was ready to record. If you're on a Mac computer, you just plug it in. If you want a backup copy of your recording, plug a cable into the monitor out and send the signal to your portable recorder. It's built like a tank and is a lovely shade of red. Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website. Dax Shepard is Selling Out Theaters so People Can Watch Him Record His Podcast Dax Shepard is the man behind the Arm Chair Expert podcast (voted best one of the best of in Apple Podcasts). He has taken his show on the road. Here is what it shows when you go to buy Dax Shepperd Tickets: Hi, I'm Dax Shepard, and I love talking to people. I am endlessly fascinated by the messiness of being human, and I find people who are vulnerable and honest about their struggles and shortcomings to be incredibly sexy. I invite you to join me as I explore other people’s stories. We will celebrate, above all, the challenges and setbacks that ultimately lead to growth and betterment. What qualifies me for such an endeavor? More than a decade of sobriety, a degree in Anthropology and four years of improv training. I will attempt to discover human truths without any laboratory work, clinical trials or data collection. I will be, in the great tradition of 16th-century scientists, an Armchair Expert. His event in Los Angelas at The Theatre at Ace Hotel (1600 capacity) in January is also sold out. Tips and insights from Troy 4:37 Start on time Maybe have some sort of playbill so people know what to expect The warm-up act was great It was cool that the band customized the music basic on the location Dax was uber-prepared and next lost control of the conversation He provided a story that he told the audience he won't include in the podcast You Could Do an Online Event With Two Simple Tools Yes, people may not travel to come to your event, and for those people, you can do an online event using Zoom.us (up to 100 people for $15) and Eventbrite. Eventbrite pricing is 2% + $0.79. If you want to be paid before your event, then the pricing is 3.5% + $1.59. If you want a free event, there are no charges (so if you wanted to sell 100 tickets you could do it for free). Ticketleap is another option for ticketing Holding a Local Event 17:55 David Hooper has a history in the music marketing business and held many events. I love both his Big Podcast and Red Podcast. He recently has stepped into the podcast world and has already held two events for podcasters (and has a 93,000-word book coming out in 2019). I've known Dave over a decade (and have appeared on his Music Business Radio show on the radio/podcast). Here are some tips from Dave Early bird sales can boost sales Make sure the event fits in with your brand especially when choosing a venue Ask your network for suggestions on a venue Some places you may get for free on off nights (like Tuesday) You need an agenda. Don't "Wing it." You will probably bring in a PA system sooner than you think. Make sure there is plenty of time to give attendees a break (food, bathroom, etc) if its a full day event People appreciate a slower pace than cramming too much content into the vent. Behind the scenes of his Nashville event. Lots of good bloopers at the end of the show from out talk The Question of the Month: What is Your (ONE) Favorite Podcast And WHY? 44:30 I do this every year for the last episode of the year. It's a great way to discover...
Today we are joined from Dr. Ryan Gray from the Medical School Headquarters and he shares his philosophy of starting and growing his podcasts. The question of the Month What is your ONE favorite podcast for 2018? Why is it your favorite, and where can I find it (then tell us about your show and where we can find it) For more information see www.schooolofpodcastin.com/contact Dr. Ryan Gray of the Medical School Headquarters Podcast 4:17 Ryan is currently publishing seven different shows 6:55 Start a website with a positive vibe to help medical students 7:55 He was nervous about starting and waiting six months to launch 9:30 How by starting too broad he rebranded his show 11:00 What enabled him to transition from Doctor to Podcaster? 13:45 How he sought out companies that had content that fit his audience 15:28 How he goes about adding a show to his network 17:40 How his sales pitch is not a sales pitch 21:34 How many shows is he planning on launching 23:13 How much of the day to day stuff is he doing? 24:58 What are his first two employees are doing? 26:14 How he had made lifestyle choices to make this work A family that podcasts together stays together 28:10 Ryan also has three books and he shares how he put them together and worked with Morgan James Publishing 30:10 Ryan's Advice to people wanting to follow in his footsteps but in their niche 32:00 Ryan's Experience with NFC Chips (Dave had found some on Moo.com, there are programmable card on Amazon) 33:40 Promoting his podcast at events 35:50 His biggest success and his biggest failure 37:50 Biggest mistakes new podcasters make How do you build an audience - one person at a time 39:25 Has he ever missed an episode? Main Takeaways He start by first providing value to his audience - not money, not downloads He does things other people don't (engages people at his booth instead of staring at his phone) His wife supports his plan, and now he is supporting hers. For more on this needing support see the "Three Things Every Podcaster Needs" episode My WordPress Updated to 5.0 HELP! 43:20 If you're website updates automatically you can install a plugin called "Classic Editor" that makes the new version of Wordpress look like the old version of your website Work With Me
Because of My Podcast: I Get to Talk to NFL Players 1:30 Chris Husby shares how his show devoted to discussing Special Teams topics and interviewing some of the biggest special teams names in the NFL and beyond! has allowed him to talk to some of his favorite NFL players. Check it out the 4th Down Experience Sponsor: Focusrite 3:34 I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy to get your microphone into your computer (and have the option to have a co-host as well) without having to look at a TON of knobs, check out the Focusrite 2i2. As I'm on a PC, I downloaded a driver, plugged in the unit, and was ready to record. If you're on a Mac computer, you just plug it in. If you want a backup copy of your recording, plug a cable into the monitor out and send the signal to your portable recorder. It's built like a tank and is a lovely shade of red. Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website. The Question of the Month: What is Your (ONE) Favorite Podcast And WHY? I do this every year for the last episode of the year. It's a great way to discover new shows, and it also gives us insights into WHY people like podcasts. Please provide the following: The name of the show The website of the show What it's about Why you like it Then provide the same about your show (name, location, and what it's about). I need the answer by 12/28/18. Go to the contact page. If you want to record and email it in, please put "December question: in the title How to Grow Your Podcast Audience 1. Give Your Audience What They Want 7:14 Know who your target audience. Some things you’ll want to have to create your target client avatar are: Name Age Occupation Brands They Use + Purchase From What Kind Of Language They Use Where They Spend Their Time Their Pain Points What They Hope To Achieve + Accomplish STALK your target audience. Participate in online groups to listen to what they are talking Use something like Google Forms to create an audience survey (see this episode on creating surveys) Get some constructive feedback from your show. This needs to come from someone who you feel is your target audience Go to Amazon and look at books and see what is in the table of contents Kindle Unlimited has access to magazines (see what the magazines are writing about) Check your stats and look for trends Have good audio quality. If you use a Yetti, make sure you are using it properly. Do not use the built-in microphone of your laptop 2. Make Your Titles Count 14:03 The titles of your episodes can boost the number of downloads. Do NOT name your show NAME OF PODCAST EPISODE 16 Try to have at least 300 words for your show notes Make sure your listing in Apple podcasts has the proper link to your website 3. Get Your Podcast On Their Device 16:55 Have subscribed buttons for Apple and Google Podcasts, Stitcher, TuneIn, Spotify Have directions with a screenshot on how to subscribe Show them how to subscribe on Facebook and YouTube Get an app if your audience isn't too technical I use the Subscribe and Follow Plugin for my Subscribe Page 4. Make It Easy To Share Your Show 23:00 My favorite plugin for this is Social Warfare Click to tweet (free) NFC Business Card ( from Moo $22 for 20). NFC Business Cards should work with most Android devices and newer iPhones. Digital Business Cards work with any NFC-enabled mobile device. Here is a video https://youtu.be/tn3rHz9JR5I Sadly Apple aren’t playing ball right now. That’s not to say things won’t change in the future though – and we’ll certainly keep a spot warm for them on Team NFC! Create Show notes worth Sharing 5 Get On Other Shows 26:55 Others shows have podcast listeners Do your research Do you bring value to their audience? Be personal - no form letters Help a Reporter Out PodcastGuests.com Be the guest you'd want to have on your show 6...
SPONSOR: Focusrite USB Interfaces 2:40 I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy to get your microphone into your computer (and have the option to have a co-host as well) without having to look at a TON of knobs, check out the Focusrite 2i2. As I'm on a PC, I downloaded a driver, plugged in the unit, and was ready to record. If you're on a Mac computer, you just plug it in. If you want a backup copy of your recording, plug a cable into the monitor out and send the signal to your portable recorder. It's built like a tank and is a lovely shade of red. Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website. Libsyn.com Rolls Out Custom Tracking Codes 3:21 Libsyn.com recently rolled out custom tracking codes for those on their advanced stats. This allows you to enter a code(s) for an episode so you can track where your podcast comes from. Most podcast hosting platforms give you access to geographic data, and insight into what apps people are using as well as the number of downloads. The good news is anybody can share your podcast. I've known people who had giant boosts in downloads by having a popular blog link to their website. If you had a tracking code for that episode on your website, you would get more than "A player" or "A browser" you would be able to see the source of your downloads. In doing a quick test I made a link for my newsletter, and more my website so I could see that yes, both of those sources had people listening to my episode. Get a free month at Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree What If I Don't Have a Libsyn Account? You can use what are called UTM (Urchin Tracking Module) which is a format used by Google to track things. You can go to https://ga-dev-tools.appspot.com/campaign-url-builder/ to create a campaign. Here is a link to a video that explains it (from Google) Steph Taylor From the Socialite Podcast Sheds Some Light on UTMs 7:48 I met Steph at We Are Podcast 2018 in Melbourne Australia. She is awesome, and once saved me from a giant cockroach (a long story for another time). She's only been podcasting for around six months and is having huge success (thousands of downloads). Check out her show "Socialite" at https://stephtaylor.co/ Much like the Libsyn Custom Link, you can use a UTM to track where your show is being heard (the source). Some other takeaways from my talk with Stephanie: How to know what social media platform to use The social network that you may not be using She uses Recur Post to automate some of her postings She uses a Pinterest template from Creative Market How she uses automationagency.com to trim down her publishing stress Because of her podcast, she got to speak at We Are Podcast Her strategy to maximize her launch The Question of the Month: What is the Book You Refer to People the Most? 28:29 Jonathan Bloom from the Weekly Awesome Podcast- The Bible Paul from the Fight Through Podcast like the Fighting Through Book (his Dad is the author) Dennis Looney from the Gridlock MBA - All Marketers Are Liars By Seth Godin Josh Liston On the Bubble Podcast - A Man Called Ove (Fiction), H is for Hawk (non Fiction), The Halo Effect (business) Stephanie from the Virtual Ex Pat - Global Soul Todd Brant from the Why Urology podcast - Quiet the Power of Introverts Win from Ask Win - Big Magic and her own book I, Win (about her journey with Cerebral Palsy) John Friedl (Professor Slots) - Persuasion (only 200 years old) and The Deed of Paksenarrion (fantasy literature trilogy) The Question of the Month For December 43:32 For December it is time for your yearly tradition of answering the question, "What is the ONE podcast (if you can only pick one) podcast (your favorite). Where can we find it? And WHY is it your favorite. Lastly, where can we find...
Cathy Heller is a talented musician. She's been signed by two major record labels, but unfortunately, she's also been dropped by two record labels. I've always told podcasters to go to their potential audience and find out what kind of content they need. That is exactly what Cathy did, and it worked. She found out what type of music was being licensed into commercials, TV, and movies. When she created the type of music her audience (producers) needed it worked to the tune of hundreds of thousands of dollars. When things were going great, how did she pour gasoline on her success? She started a podcast (Don't Keep Your Day Job). A Podcast Started in the Closet Now Has Three Million Downloads Here are some points from my talk with Cathy Heller: People are thirsty to hear what is really going on their life as social media shows a filtered view Cathy shares how as a musician she got a record deal twice and was dropped twice - how she pushed through She was making a decent amount of cash working a job that didn't fit her purpose She looked into what was working in the music business and the politely persistent She created 30 mediocre songs as she worked on making the type of music that would work in commercials, movie, TV, etc and threw them away. The difference between a hobby and a business is when you think of doing something for other people. Everyone has to start off being mediocre. It takes time and courage to start mediocre and then work on polishing your craft. Her success was in an area that she never planned on, but people starting asking, "How do I do this?" She said, "What the heck, let's see what happens with this." Her music leads to licenses which lead to her agency, which lead to her course, which leads to live events and all of these item fed each other. She started her podcast 21 months ago in a close and now has over 3 million downloads She had to do something that made her stand out. She did what she said she would do. For more information check out her website at www.dontkeepyourdayjob.com How To Go “All In” on your Dream Job Tim Paige has done what many podcasters have dreamed of, he quit his day job. In a podcast on Facebook, he shared how he did it. Some people feel that the one thing keeping them from “Making it” is this really inconvenient thing called their day job. Their “side hustle” is currently bringing in $34 a month, but for some reason they think that if they only quit their job the pressure of seeing your life's savings being caught on fire will inspire you to leap into action to find a way anyway to make a living “Doing what they love.” So I love this report from the front lines on how Tim actually quit his day job. Check out Tim at thevoiceoftimpaige.com or www.makemyintro.com Here are some key points: Don't quit your day job until it is costing you more money than keeping your day job. So if you turned down 40,000 worth of work because it conflicted with your 30,000 jobs, then it's time to quit your day job. This was the case for Tim. Tim also has a TREMENDOUSLY SUPPORTIVE Spouse. For more on this check out my last episode, The Three Things Every Podcast Needs (positioning yourself for the long haul). Tim got out of debt so that his expenses were minimal after quitting his job. He had three jobs doing anything he could to get out of debt and it took him three years. For the first three years of his side hustle, he reinvested in his business. Be open to opportunity. He didn't turn down jobs – even if he didn't want to do it. This makes him appreciate it when “dream jobs” come along. Get your mind right. When he panics, finds himself envious of others, he is not doing his best work. This hurts his business. Mentioned In This Episode Episode 100 of Cathy's show Podcast Mentorship Program Monthly Membership to Start Your Podcast
How do I do so many podcasts? I get that question all the time. How do I stay consistent? How do I set my podcast up for the Long Haul? I'm fresh back from Speaking at DC Podfest, and I did a new version of the presentation called "3 Things Your Podcast Needs That Have Nothing With Microphones, Downloads, Or Hosting" and this is a revamped version of an episode I did years ago (with new information and new insights). 2:45 How podcasting is like an iceberg, and today we are talking about the part of the iceberg that is under the water, but still important Podcast Mentorship and Launching Pad I have a mentoring program where I work with you, but as the new year is right around the corner I wanted to create a limited time program with limited access. Here are the details We meet for six weeks to get your podcast up and running. These calls will be recorded. I will help you research your topic to help ensure you contact impacts and inspires your audience You will have clearly defined goals for your show You will have the best podcasting gear that fits your budget You will have instant Access to me during this six weeks. With this in mind, I'm offering this to a very few people. Our coaching calls will be used to produce a new podcast spotlighting the making of your show, and giving your more promotion. You also get a year of membership at the School of Podcasting (which includes more group coaching, private Facebook group, and courses) If you are interested, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/youpodcastlaunch Homework: Question of the Month 5:55 At the end of the month, I like to feature a podcast with your voice in it. I ask a question, and we all learn together. This month's question is "What is the book you refer the most?" I'd love to hear your answer. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and submit your answer (put "November Question" if you email me). I need the answer by November 23rd, 2018 Also, if you have found love via podcasting, I am working on the question of the month for February. 3 Things Your Podcast Needs That Have Nothing With Microphones, Downloads, Or Hosting (2018 Version) 7:52 The three things you need are Attitude This is the "I think I can, I think I can." It does take some time to get your podcast momentum going (your podcast is a bit like a Locomotive - not a race car) It's not all about downloads, and think about being in front of a room of "only 200" people 11:55 Why monthly download stats are crap (or at least misleading) 14:25 What podcasters can learn from Oprah 16:10 How to calculate how many downloads you should be getting Health We are going to dig down, work longer, work harder, and go, go, go, and we end up burning ourselves out 21:05 Robby Tonins the great motivational speaker who loves to push you to sleep when you're dead 23:00 The suicide rate has risen 30% since 1999 in America. Podcasters/Entrepreneurs may be more prone to become depressed 25:15 There is no such thing as "multitasking." 26:20 Avoid the drive-through 26:50 Dave's new wife Alexa Support 28:30 Relationships can cause Stress 30:15 Marriage Advice from the Divorced Guy 31:05 Be sure you know what your partner is thinking instead of guessing 33:30 How much time do you have a day to devote to your podcast? 35:15 Generalities of Men and Women 37:05 The Crazy Cycle 38:20 How to respond to Zingers 39:18 Handling Stalemates 39:50 Date Night on Steroids Final Thoughts 41:43 Fast food is Not Fast 43:05 I love Evernote 44:05 I love Todoist 44:30 Do not read your email first thing in the morning Mentioned in this Show DC Podfest Love and Respect Book The Seven Habits of Highly Productive People Get Free month a Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree School of Podcasting Your Podcast Launch Mentorship Program
We all want more listeners. We feel we have tried everything (have we?) and one option that all the "big" shows seem to have in common is they are part of a Podcast Network. Many of these require large amounts of download that your show may not achieve. You may be thinking of starting your own Podcast Network. I've interviewed some friends of mine recently (and some over the years) about their networks and assembled all that information into this episode. If creating a podcast network is not for you (it is a lot of work) you may be thinking that joining a network is a better choice. I share some things you might consider before joining. Sponsor: Focusrite I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy to get your microphone into your computer (and have the option to have a co-host as well) without having to look at a TON of knobs, check out the Focusrite 2i2. As I'm on a PC, I downloaded a driver, plugged in the unit, and was ready to record. If you're on a Mac computer, you just plug it in. If you want a backup copy of your recording, plug a cable into the monitor out and send the signal to your portable recorder. It's built like a tank and is a lovely shade of red. Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website. Podcast Network Interviews: Glen Hebbert - Horse Radio Network Daniel J Lewis - Noodle.mx Network Mignon Fogarty - Quick and Dirty Tips Christopher Brian Jones - Trek.fm Stephen Jondrew - Gonna Geek Chris Nesi - Education Podcast Network So You Want to Start Your Own Podcast Network 5:10 You need to be able to answer the question, "Why do you want to start a podcast" There are two type of networks. One is run as a business, and the other is focused more on cross-promotion (or a mixture of both). 14: 40 A network where the shows are around a single niche (Horses, hiking, dancing, education, microbrews, etc) are easier to monetize, easier to optimize on the web. Naming your network should be obvious. A cryptic name will slow the growth of your network. 16:17 Create two logos (square and rectangle) and keep it simple. Make sure it looks good small, or huge. Don't make the logo yourself unless you're a designer. Check out podcastdesigns.com (tell them the School of Podcasting sent you) and there are other services like Kappa 99, 99 Designs, where many artists create your artwork and you select the best. I recently used Kappa99 for my Six Shooter podcast and used their "one time jobs" (under the More menu) to have my artwork done for $49. 20: 40 Define what your podcast network's purpose is. Define what your network will do for the members of the network. 23:00 How to add a show to your network. Start off with a general show, and then expand out and niche out. Have your criteria in place to help you decide if a podcast fits. For example, Daniel J Lewis only wants clean shows on his network. 26:58 How to add hosts to your network. Glenn and Christopher audition their hosts by bringing them on the podcasts as a guest. Most hosts don't want to work with a brand new show as you are not bringing anything to the network ( they are looking for a win-win situation). 34:15 Create a contract between the network and the hosts. This defines what is expected, how people get paid, what will get you fired, and every other situation you can think of that may happen. By having these (at times) awkward conversations you avoid really awkward conversations in the future. When people know what will happen if they want to leave, they can plan accordingly, and expectations are set, and you can go through that situation without sacrificing the personal relationship because the business relationship didn't work. 40:36 Paying hosts a percentage of the advertisement (in some cases based on downloads) is a nightmare you want to avoid. Glenn pays his hosts a flat rate. Daniel also bills primarily using a flate rate. 43:26...
This week I'm going to give you some lessons I learned from Speaking at We Are Podcast 2018 in Brisbane Australia. We also talk about the effectiveness of Audiograms. Sponsor: PodcastGuests.com – Get More Guests -Be Featured on More Podcasts PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its over 6,500 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements You can also find 200 expert guests anytime in the directory at podcastguests.com/directory Sign up at PodcastGuests.com/sop Get a Mentor - Ask For Help I know a few people who love to travel. Monica Rivera from the You Wanna Do What? podcast gave me a great tip to download any episodes from Netflix to my iPad. George Hrab from the Geologic podcast (who gets to go to all sorts of cool stuff because of his podcast) gave me some heads up on a voltage converter. It's Rarely as Bad as It Seems When I heard the phrase "17 hours on a plane (along with some shorter flights for a total of 20 hours)" I thought it sounded like a horror story. I pictured some little punk behind me kicking my kidneys while their parents order another jack and coke from the flight attendant. In the end, even in coach, I was able to stretch my legs. I had two seats between my fellow passenger in my row and slept off and on. There were probably 3-5 small children who would occasionally cry, but it was not the nightmare I had envisioned. When I think of things that I have dreaded in the past, they are rarely as bad as you think you're going to be. Erode Your Comfort Zone I can be shy. When I go to a restaurant I'm not looking to think outside the box. When I was told that a large chunk of my schedule was planned for me, I got nervous. I didn't know where I was going, and except for a few people, I didn't know who I was with, what we were doing, and what I needed to be ready. We had assigned seats both days including assignments on who to go to lunch with. One day, Sean Desouza was going to cook authentic Indian food (I have never had Indian food). The Know Like a Trust Factor I talk about this all the time. When you create valuable content on a consistent basis, your audience trusts you and likes you. If you can share a bit of yourself, they get to know you. When people know, like, and trust you then you have influence. I know Ronsley Vaz from his "Should I Start a Podcast" show. We may have bumped into each other. I finally got to talk to him at Social Media Marketing World where I was speaking. He asked me if I would speak at We Are Podcast. I said yes on the spot. Who doesn't want to go to Australia? I saved up my pennies (and busted out a charge card) and made it happen. As I mentioned above, I was nervous. This was a new country, a new conference (for me), with new people. The first day was very good. I got to meet a lot of people. It was somewhat of the "warm up act" for the main event happening the next two days. Every speaker at this event was awesome. Every person I met was super friendly and shared my love of podcasting. The hotel I stayed at was great. By the end of day one, you could color me impressed, and I was ready for day two. By the end of day two, I believe I had met about 95% of the people there including Jules from Hong Kong Confidential. By the end of day two, where I once felt uncomfortable I now felt relaxed. The Speakers Retreat When I realized that I was going to be living with a bunch of people I had never met, previously this would have put me way outside my comfort zone. By this point, Ronsley had not let me down and I just went with the flow. Here again, it was not as bad as it seemed and was actually kind of fun (in the end we just slept here, and all the speakers hung out at a second house). I would start the day with some sort of healthy pancakes made from buckwheat and for toppings I had some sort of berries instead...
Today on episode 641, I'm in Australia at a conference but I'm still here giving you ideas and insights to help you with your podcast. I've been spending a fair amount of time on Netflix, and I've noticed something. Sponsor: PodcastGuests.com – Get More Guests -Be Featured on More Podcasts [1:36] PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its over 6,500 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements You can also find 200 expert guests anytime in the directory at podcastguests.com/directory Sign up at PodcastGuests.com You Should Run Your Podcast Like Netflix 3:45 130 Million Worldwide 4.2 million are still shipping DVDs Projected to pay 7 billion for content 11 Billion in Revenue in 2017 23% of Us adults stream daily 70% of users binge-watch shows A user avoid 160 hours of ads per year 6.7 days 6:38 They make it easy to get to the content and skip how the sausage is made 9:30 Many of their episodes leave you wanting more, and tease the next episode (see Making Oprah ) 9:53 They aren't doing typical content, and they are being creative 11:47 They changed their format to fit their audience and their business plan 14:08 You should watch your industry and niche and see if there is a place for your show 17:35 They seems to be easy to work, they aren't jerks, with which is attracting talented people 18:55 They monitor what their audience is viewing and make similar content (including a teenage tangent) 22:41 You can get Netflix on ANY device. 23:10 Don't hire pedophiles and alleged rapists 23: 20 It doesn't always work. 24:14 They put out content to see if it works BONUS LESSON: They charge for their service. Media hosts like anchor are doomed to fail as bandwidth is not free. Ready To Launch and Grow Your Podcast? Join the School of Podcasting at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start Work with me as your podcast mentor at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme Never Miss an Episode Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/subscribe to get the next episode the minute it is released
Today on episode 640 of the School of Podcasting we are looking at Facebook Consumption and how it stacks up against YouTube and Podcasting. Paul Colligan has a new report and it's fascinating. Because of his Podcast: Troy Heinritz had his name in the Blacklist TV Show Troy Heinritz has been mentioned on this show many times and today on episode 640 is another time. I was getting caught up on the Blacklist Television show on Netflix and in the "Nicholas T Moore" episode they are looking at the background of a "bad guy" and explain how at one point he had stayed at the Heinritz Psychiatric Center in Concord. Troy also explain how they had mixed in a fan's name into an episode who had died of cancer. If you have a "Because of my Podcast" Story, please go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and share it. Sponsor: PodcastGuests.com - Get More Guests -Be Featured on More Podcasts 3:18 PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its over 6,500 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements You can also find 200 expert guests anytime in the directory at podcastguests.com/directory Sign up at PodcastGuests.com Podcast Consumption Trounces YouTube and Facebook Consumption 4:40 Today we talk about a report that Paul Colligan (of the Podcast Report) did on consumption metrics comparing Facebook Live against YouTube and Podcasting. In looking at a video he did live on Facebook he found that "The average watch time of my 11 minute and 37-second broadcast was only 22 seconds — just 3% of the video. " Later he put the exact same content on YouTube and "YouTube was 36% Facebook’s 3%. On YouTube, viewers tuned in over 11 times longer on average than they did on Facebook." He again took the exact same content and put it out as an audio podcast. He checked his stats in Appel's Podcasts Connect and found, "On Apple Podcasts, the audience listened to a whopping average of 94% of the episode … more than 31 times the percentage on Facebook and slightly less than 3 times the percent on YouTube." While Facebook consumption was much lower than the other platforms, Paul is not saying Facebook is bad. It just may be that this is not the place where people go for long-form content. It seems like it is the place consumers go for "quick hit" information while they are waiting in line or taking a quick break. He approached other people and they all had similar results. Read the full story here. What Facebook is for Me I know for me, I saw where Dan Klass was going to record an episode of the Bitterest Pill live. I was excited and had planned on watching it live. I forgot to write it down and listened to the content when it came out as his latest episode. I often start a video as I'm on Facebook, but as I scroll down it becomes distracting. I'm looking for quick updates from friends, family, and colleagues. In Conclusion It is hard to argue with the data. Granted this is a very small sample, but enough data to spot some trends. If you have a large following on these platforms you need to look and see what your consumption analytics show. You may be very, very surprised. How do You Find Facebook Stats? To access Facebook video metrics, click Insights at the top of your Facebook Page and navigate to the Videos tab. The Video Views graph shows you the number of times people viewed videos for longer than 3 seconds (as shown below). More information on understanding Facebook stats can be found here. How Do I See My Consumption Stats on Apple Podcasts? Apple has a tutorial on this topic at https://itunespartner.apple.com/en/podcasts/videos#podcast-analytics Podcast Rewind 39:34 I was featured on the Computer Tutor show on a special International Podcast Day episode (great podcasting 101 stuff and some stories I've never talked about) Listen Here I was featured on a...
Today I share the story of some pretty harsh criticism I received, and how I had to deal with the fact that my listener had a point. Welcome to episode 639 of the School of Podcasting Sponsor: Podcastguests.com 3:47 PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its over 6,500 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements You can also find 200 expert guests anytime in the directory at podcastguests.com/directory Today I'm talking about branding, and I could've invited Greg Corey (Corey says, I love to talk to audiences about how creating better branding for themselves and their products can skyrocket their sales). It took all of three seconds to find Greg, and we know he's looking to get on podcasts. Sign up at PodcastGuests.com/sop Fat Fingers Can Cause More Them Embarrassment 5:06 In the last episode, I mentioned that I had brought up a controversial subject (Collin Kaepernick) and that people might tune out (the subject was controlling the conversation). What is offending is not the episode but rather your poor grasp on basic spelling and grammar throughout many pages on this website.. By the way, if you want to sound like an authority, please learn basic spelling and grammar or hire someone (fiverr) to do it for you.. How do you have an education degree when this is how you write and communicate? By the way, in the sub-title, “Freedom of Speach is Not Freedom from Consequences”- The word “speach” is spelled Speech. Any sixth grader knows that and certainly a g college graduate should know that as well.. It is not that hard. At least have your written copy proof read by someone who does know how to spell and write decently before publishing it to the world. Geez! I think that is pretty basic.. How again can you confidently charge $200 an hour for consulting when you have such poor spelling and grammar skills in your written web copy? You are a joke sir! What college granted you a degree when you consistently cannot write legibly? and you are tying to sell yourself as an expert? Please! I will say again.. Please! At least hire someone to cover your mistakes and not try to promote yourself as some sort of “expert” – You look like a damn fool sir So I sent Mark Doyle and Email Dear Mark, Thanks for the comment. My Apologies for the typos. You're right I'm a damn fool and a joke of a human being... Dave Mark Sent Me a Reply Mr. Jackson I would like to take a moment and apologize for my comments and harsh criticisms. It was unwarranted and uncalled for and not like me at all to post something like that Please accept my apologies Best of luck to you sir Mark Made a Really Good Point in a Really Crappy Way I hold no ill will toward Mark. Mark may have had a really bad day, and I have forgiven him. He did get me to check into why these typos got through (I was using two spell checkers, and Grammarly does a GREAT job). In a nutshell, I had logged out of Grammarly and it no longer was checking everything I typed. There is Probably More Than One Way To Fix Your Issue I had typed my show notes about an hour before I published them. I did this to "flush out" ideas before I pressed record. Then I thought, would this not work a day or two (or a week) in advance so I could come and look at the copy with "Fresh eyes." Yes, this could be done. Another option would be to type shorter notes. This makes sense to a certain extent. I always want to have at least 300 words. I am currently at 1591. If I pushed thing back even further than a few days, I could hire someone to look over my posts. This is not an unsolvable issue. It just means I can't keep doing what I've always been doing. Your Podcast Is Your Brand In looking up different items about what makes a good brand, I kept seeing things that I saw that I had dropped the ball on. Neglecting Public Perception: The public’s...
Today on episode 638 I am talking about controlling a conversation from two different angles. Why Squadcast is the Best Tool for Recording Interviews I speak with Zach Moreno one of the founders of Squadcast (save 50% off using the coupon code sopfans ) who explains Why he (a programmer) and his brother (an audio engineer) started Squadcast How they had an issue, but it has been solved and they may have their solution patented What is coming in the future Squadcast is super easy. You put in the email address, the date and time of the interview and it does everything else. The big key is your guest(s) need to use chrome to use the system. The system prompts them to use chrome if they are not. It records their side of the conversation locally to their computer and then QUICKLY uploads it when the conversation is done. If there were any glitches where the speaking was cut out during the call, the local recording does not have any of those glitches. Squadcast is currently $20 a month. You get save 50% using the coupon code sopfans at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/squadcast How To Ensure Everyone Knows Your Intent I was watching Comedian in Cars Getting Coffe with Jerry Seinfeld and Bill Bur. Bill voiced his fear of how people are having careers taken away becomes someone took something you said as a joke seriously and they are now TELLING YOU what YOUR intent was. As Bill put it, "You don't get to decide that you're in my head and you know my intent." One example of a company who ensures you understand their intent is American Airlines who has a podcast called "Tell Me Why." For example, one episode an American Airline representative explains the changes in their policy regarding support animals. I think this is an awesome job as a lazy journalist (where people just Google a subject, do no research and copy and paste an answer - even it is entirely untrue). could easily spin this as "American Airlines hates all animals." The good news is American Airlines through their podcast has a DIRECT CONNECTION with their audience (their customers). They don't have to worry about anyone from the mainstream media putting a spin on it. I personally found it strange when people began burning their own shoes in protest to Colin Kaepernick is a new spokesperson for Nike. So I did something people use to do called "Journalism." I listened to Colin's first press conference. It turns out. He doesn't hate the troops the flag, or the country. What he hates is the alarming rate of police brutality that he sees and hears about, and yet it is never covered on the news, and there seems to be no justice for the victims. In fact, the news just kept repeating how it was disrespectful for the troops and the flag. Even though in his press conference later he said, "People thought it was about the flag or the troops and it's not." So when you go through the mainstream media, your message has a potential to get very distorted. This is why Colin Kaepernick needs his own podcast. Then people could go directly to the source and here what his intentions are, why he is doing what he is doing, and maybe get a better understanding. For me, I urge all white people who group up around white people (you're not racist, but it just so happens there were no black people in your neighborhood to watch the documentary movie 13th on Netflix Freedom of Speach is Not Freedom from Consequences Just because you can say it, doesn't mean there weren't be consequences. For example, I believe it is illegal to scream "FIRE" in a theater. You are free to say it, but you will go to jail. Keep this in mind that stating your intentions and opinion will exercise your right to free speech. It may also introduce you to the law of consequences. One A Side Note There was a time when you were allowed to have a difference of opinion. You might actually have a "dialogue" so you and another person could examine both viewpoints to...
Because Of My Podcast - The Family Travel Podcast Michael, He is on podcast number two, and this one is allowing him to make some money http://abigpeacheyadventure.com.au/family-travel-podcast/ Question of the Month: Where Are you With Podcasting? 6:28 Clay from the Fish Nerds Podcast is a 4 7:30 Paul from the Fighting Through Podcast is a 1 8:48 Andrea from Union Podcastera is a 1 12:18 Darwyn Dave from Dealing with My Grief is 1 13:59 Brad from The Cinema Guys is a 1 15:23 Jared from The Fire Rescue is a 3 16:52 Micah and Dustin from Tales From Bedlum -5 17:55 Jonathon Bloom from the Weekly Awesome Podcast- 1 19:07 Kim from Teachers Need Teachers is a 1 23:21 Josh from the Corner Cutters Podcast (about the Rubik's cube) - 1 25:10 Ryan Nelson - Conspiracy Theoryology is a 1 27:27 Master Kuldryn's from Kuldryn's Krypt is a - 1 28:28 Seth from Geekville Radio, www.twbpodcast.com and Classic Wrestling Memories is a 1 31:01 Timothy kdoipodcasting.com was at a 5 and is now at a 3 34:52 Vanessa from Vanessa's View is at a 1 (or UNO) 39:41 Win Charles is a 6 Check Out Joe Today in Orlando Tuesday (this coming Tuesday...September 25th) The Improv Orlando Florida Doors open at 6:30 - Show starts at 7:30 $10 LOTS of people in the cast. We EVEN have an opening act, the awesome 15-minute long Popcorn Finance podcast (up for a personal finance Plutus Award for Best New Podcast in that space) at next week's award show. http://stackingbenjamins.com/tour Update on Michael Stelzner and Social Media Marketing World In episode 635 (Logic and Emotion) I had mentioned how Social Media Marketing World has pulled their podcasting track. I wanted to clarify while Leo Laporte at one point had said "podcasting is dead" and then later took it back, Michael Stelzner never said podcasting is dead. He simply said his statistics show that his socials media crowd that attends his audience is less interested in the subject of podcasting. Michael still uses podcasting to promote Social Media Marketing world. If you can't afford the trip, some of the top experts are speaking at this event, and you can purchase a virtual ticket I just got done binging on Michael's YouTube series "The Journey" as the second season has just started (so I have to binge the first episode) and this once again proves that "behind the scenes" information is often "not boring." Check it out at journey.show Sue Jennett Your chat about choosing words that evoke emotion was interesting for me, as I like to choose my words carefully for both my podcasts and my blog. I hadn’t before thought about trying to evoke any emotion, but more to inform in an easy-to-listen-to manner. As often happens when I hear your podcasts, I’m at that time working on something to which I can apply your advice. I was, last night, ready to record my speaking portions and edit a podcast about the sacrament of communion for those on a ggluten-freediet. Earlier in the evening ,I chaired a meeting of our local celiac support group, and out of the blue, someone stopped me before I left to ask if I knew any solutions for this exact problem. She didn’t know I had researched it, and spoken to a guest about it. I felt good that I could impart some useful information to her, but what was more impactful on me was her emotional investment in the issue. I left the meeting and came home to “infuse” my podcast with small tugs on the emotional fabric of my listeners. I also used the same strategy to write my social media for today. Small changes, small words, strategically placed to evoke emotion, when the subject is suitable is something I now have in my arsenal of podcasting tools. Thanks Dave – BTW my social posts are getting more comments and interaction than I have ever had on any particular podcast – and guess what – they are mostly emotionally driven! PS – I started a second podcast over the summer on gluten free weight loss/management so you’ll...
You want to launch a podcast, and in the past, I've talked about how there are 27 steps to launch a podcast (you might want to read that first). Today I want to cover this episode from a new angle and address some of the mistakes I am seeing on episode 636 of the School of Podcasting. If you missed the previous list it was Step 1: Pick Your Topic Step 2: Decide if you're podcasting solo or with cohost(s). Step 3: Pick how you will podcast. Step 4: Pick where will you podcast? Step 5: Pick a name. Step 6. Buy the Hardware Step 7. Buy Software Step 8 is purchasing web hosting Step 9 is installing WordPress Step 10 is to get your WordPress installation ready to podcast Step 11 is making your website look good. 12. Domain Name 13. Graphics 14. Intro Music. (optional) 15. Media Hosting (for your mp3 files) 16. Organize Your Content 17. Record Your Content 18. Edit Your Content 19. Assemble Your Episode 20. Add ID3 Tags 21. Upload your media 22. Write Your Show Notes 23. Copy the Media URL and Paste It Into Your Post (optional) 24. Click Publish 25. Set Up Tags for iTunes 26> Make Sure your Feed is Valid 27. Submit Your Podcast to Apple Podcasts Today's show is more about a person who has a finished media file, and they are ready to do a "big" launch. What is the Goal of Your Podcast? You need to know this. How will know if it's successful? Is it a certain number of downloads? Is it a certain number of sales? Is it to position you as an expert? Does Your Podcast Move You Toward Your Goal? So if the goal of your show is to help build an email list, did you remember to tell people about your list. If it's to build your consulting clients, did you mention you are available for consulting? Has Someone Who Is Your Target Audience Given You Honest Feedback? Have You Checked to See If You Are Unique? There are at least five shows named "outside the box", and six shows named, "The Feed." If you name your show identical to another show, not only may you be opening the door to legal action, but these people have a head start and you will have a hard time ranking for that phrase. What you NEED to Launch a Podcast Artwork: The artwork is SQUARE with a minimum dimension of 1400X1400 and a maximum dimension of 3000X3000. The FILE SIZE needs to be less than 500 kb. Failure to meet these specifications can get you rejected, and cause your show not to update, and in some cases get removed from Apple. A Valid RSS feed. That feed will have a description of your show. Along with the author/hosts(s) of the show, categories, and an email address. This is typically entered into your media host (more on that later) or whatever tool you are using to create an RSS feed A media host. I was a Libsyn customer for 10 years before being a customer, but I feel Libsyn.com is the best. For other thoughts on podcast media hosting see this post A quick note: Stay away from Anchor or any other free media hosts. I've seen multiple attempts at free media hosting over the years and it always ends badly One published episode. You can't upload a bunch of episodes as drafts, submit your show to Apple and other directories, and the flip a switch. While many people will tell you to launch with 3, 4, 10, 30 episodes, I'm here to tell you that you can launch with as many as you want (please note they DO NOT automatically download when someone subscribes, your audience needs to manually download them) but you only NEED one. The Podcast Launch Schedule I see so many people picking a launch date and then trying to fit their podcast into it. This is like picking a time for Thanksgiving dinner and you've never cooked a turkey before. You need to have a knowledge of how long it takes to cook the bird, and likewise, you wouldn't call everyone to the table if the meal wasn't done. They would all come running to the table and ask, "Hey, where's the food?" I spent last week with Rob Walch the VP of Podcaster Relations...
Podcast Question Of the Month If there is a slider between 1 I LOVE PODCASTING and 10 is I HATE Podcasting, where are you? Are you feeling like a three? Seven? Lets us know and WHY you are feeling the way you are. If you want to record something and attach it be sure to put September question in the subject line and send it to dave “at” schoolofpodcasting.com (trying to avoid spam with the spelling), or go to our Contact page for more options. I need your answer by 9/21/18 Slick Text Update 3:09 In a previous episode, I talked about testing Slick Text. This is a texting tool that creates an autoresponder. So when you text " sop " to 31996 you get an autoresponder from me with a link to my show in Apple Podcasts as well as a link to my show on Google Podcasts. I did a presentation for an "intimate" group at Podcast Midatlantic (probably 80 people) and I had five people sign up on the spot. With a month behind me, I've had 38 people sign up. You can try their free program, or upgrade to their $29 plan and save 15% off when you sign up for a paid plan using the coupon sop15. For more information check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/slicktext What is LibsynPro Libsyn.com is a great solution for the independent podcasters (with pricing starting at $5 per month, with the most popular plans being $15 or $20 a month). This week I spent time at Content Marketing World (an event with 4000+ attendees) where most of the clients were companies (not individuals) who were looking for enterprise solutions (and in some cases used by marketing agencies or networks). Here are some of the features of LibsynPro. You can have different levels of access for multiple users. Stats per show or for your whole NetWork A higher monthly fee and you pay for your bandwidth (see VP of Podcaster Relations at rob@libsyn.com) Dynamic ad insertion Addition Podcast Configurations You can also have a private podcast. This means you can set up a podcast for your company, add the users, and have an app created for your podcast. This also gives you the ability to see if your employees are listening to episodes, and in the event, you terminate an employee you can remove their access to any files. Social Media Marketing World Dumps Podcasting Due to Slow Growth 11:05 Recently Tom Webster wrote an article on Medium what podcasting needs to spur more growth. Michael Stelzner replied to the post and stated, "Great read Tom. Your data seems to backup what I have noticed over the last 6 years since I have been in podcasting. I was very excited and there was pretty nice growth about 5 or 6 years ago. Then I noticed a shift that started maybe 3 or 4 years ago. I noticed the NPR style shows coming on the scene, in force. And of course Gimlet. My first concern was that people who already listened to “other” podcasts would go over to the high production shows and slow their listening of shows “like ours.” I was concerned it would send a signal to new podcasters that “you have be like those guys if you wanna get in this space, forget about it!” I also noticed a significant number of podcasting evangelists starting to “podfade,” and no one filled the gap. I started to notice my own numbers stop growing (but still be very healthy and stay that way for years) despite my other media properties growing. I started to notice less interest in podcasting sessions at my conference, less interest in podcasting articles on my site, etc. So all the data came together and made it very clear. Podcasting was not growing. We made the strategic decision to eliminate the podcasting track from Social Media Marketing World a few months ago. So what I saw happening through my lens in my industry is also happening in the entire podcasting industry it seems. And I am not sure it’s a language issue (as you suggested towards the 52). I actually think it’s a social media issue. People spend a ton of time consuming content with audio. It’s called video. And...
Today I talk with Noah Tetzner who starts the History of Vikings five months ago, and when the average podcaster is getting a little under 2,000 downloads per episodes, Noah is getting 10,000 downloads per episodes. I wanted to know what he's doing to grow his audience so fast. Noah Tetzner Wanted a Show About Vikings But Couldn't Fine One He Liked 1:58 Like many podcasters, Noah found some podcasts that weren't bad, but they didn't really fit 100% of what he was looking for. What did Noah do? He started one of his own. Is he a big tech nerd? No. Did he come with a pre-made audience? No. He found guests that had more than a heartbeat (like some shows) he found guests who could bring value. In this interview you will also hear how: Noah is buying ads on other history shows to promote his show How much Noah is spending per show How reviews seem to be boosting his chart position, but may not do much for downloads How he appears on shows as a guest even if they are not about history He is building relationships with fellow podcasters and his audience His strategy is to do your research and be genuine Not everything he tried worked How he overcame Imposter Syndrome to start his show How he is now pursuing monetization His main priority is growing his audience. Check out his show at www.thehistoryofvikings.com Mentioned: www.newandnoteworthy.info Podcast Rewind: Where Has Dave Been? 19:15 Big Podcast: Podcast Longevity, Failures, And How To Know If You'll Make It In Podcasting Podcast Envy: Dave Jackson, School of Podcasting, on Impostor Syndrome and Podcasters Hall of Fame Unstructured Podcast: Dave Jackson The Word From Mouth: SEARCH, ADOPTION, AND MOVING THE NEEDLE IN PODCASTING – WITH DAVE JACKSON Want to interview me on your show? Contact Me What I Learned From My Podcast Focus Group 24:54 I am in a "Mastermind" with a graphics person, a lawyer, audio editors, and more. We are all podcasters and share our opinions on how to grow each other's podcast. It's free (you don't need to spend 5,000 a day to be in a mastermind - start one today). Here are some of the things I learned: I don't expand enough on what people get so they see the value My bullet points were out of order and I put the best bullet point at the bottom of the list You're not really saying what people are getting I had too many options to choose from I need to take my testimonials and sprinkle them through the sales copy So What's This Have to Do With Your Show? Sometimes you need an OUTSIDE opinion to find things that are RIGHT IN FRONT OF YOU. We Need To Talk: Setting Your Podcast Expectations 31:30 There are people with 10 downloads who want to monetize their show. There are people with five episodes that want to quit their day job. Here is another way to think about this and set expectations A musician has written their first five songs. Can they make a living? An actor has gone on five auditions and might have a lead on a commercial. Can they make a living acting? An author has five manuscripts and an agent. Can they make a living as an author? The answer? It depends. The odds are not in your favor, but it's going to take TIME. Many "overnight successes" took YEARS to get their big break. If your sole reason is to make QUICK MONEY, and you are bringing NO AUDIENCE, the odds are stacked against you. STEP ONE OF MAKING MONEY WITH YOUR PODCAST So many people hear crowdfunding and focus on the funding, and forget that step is one is create a crowd. They put the cart before the horse. How do you build your audience? In a nutshell, it boils down to this. 1. Identify who your audience is 2. Listen to them and determine what content they want to hear. 3. Create content that will inspire them to tell a friend (in other words, its good). I refer to this is "deliver value." 4. Go to where your target audience is 5. Make friends with them, and bring value to every conversation, listen for...
In episode 633 of the School of Podcasting, we are looking at Podcasting Events and asking, "is it worth attending?" We also touch base with Danny Peña who has created a movie about his story and his show Gamer tag Radio (that is now winning awards at Movie Festivals) to help introduce people to podcasting and to his show. Danny can point to one thing for his success, "Community." We first spoke with Danny back on episode 506 (definitely check it out) Sponsor: Podcast Engineering School 3:45 Podcast Engineering School – next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information Today I did a quick search on Indeed.com for “podcast engineer” and saw quite a few options Program Includes: LIVE Interactive Online Training Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran Major Discounts on Software and Plugins Lifetime Access to the PES closed community Certificate of Completion EARLY BIRD PRICING IS NOW – SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG https://podcastengineeringschool.com/ Danny Peña is a Walking Make a Wish Foundation for His Fans 5:36 Danny first appeared on the School of Podcasting back on episode 506 and he has ALWAYs been about his audience and building community (he still is). I drove down to Columbus to Ohio to hang out with him (along with Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast). Danny met some of his audience and brought them backstage at the event and introduced them to some of their favorite gamers. Think about how huge that is for the audience members. Think about going backstage at the Super Bowl to meet Tom Brady. In this conversation you will hear: Danny put together an award-winning movie about his story and the rise of Gamertag Radio using iMovie. How he taking steps to embrace those who are not currently listening to podcasts and to help them understand how to start listening ( www.learntosubscribe.com is something I put together) Danny has multiple revenue streams in addition to his sponsors His relationships lead him to leave CBS Radio when things got a little shaky. For more information see www.gamertagradio.com Mentioned: Edison Research Danny's first appearance on the School of Podcasting on episode 506 Daniel J Lewis from www.theaudacitytopodcast.com Are Podcast Conferences Worth It? 34:53 I asked you, "Are podcasting conferences worth it?" and today I play answers from Ed Ryan from Podcasting For Radio Dummies is starting a magazine for podcasters, was inspired to start TWO podcasts and has already received a three-figure boost of support for his Beach talk Radio show that he does with his wife 33:22 Emily from The Story Behind and E Podcast Productions (check out her Book) 40:54 Marco from marcobernard.ca got to meet all sort of people at PM18, and has been inspired to start THREE new podcasts 42:58 Jennifer from Podcast With Jennifer as a podcast editor she has picked up clients and boosted relationships 44:10 Win Charles will attend when she can finance it. She looks forward to having the loving support of the community 45:13 Michael Delany from Caregiving for Dementia got direction and focus for his show, and met a lot of great people. Hear his appearance on the Podcast Review Show 47:50 Hilda from Wise Traditions Podcast has attended two events and came away with practical tips, and relationships. It's super encouraging. 50:03 My thoughts on podcast events 51:13 I got a shout out on the Podcasting For Radio Dummies (Thanks Ed!) Question of the Month 55:00 If there is a slider between 1 I LOVE PODCASTING and 10 is I HATE Podcasting, where are you? Are you feeling like a three? Seven? Lets us know and WHY you are feeling the way you are. If you want to record something and attach it be sure to put September question in the subject line and send it to dave "at" schoolofpodcasting.com (trying to...
Today we are looking at not taking no for an answer. We are looking at trying new strategies for old problems. My friend Marcus Couch heard "No" multiple times every year when he tried to start a Chicago Bulls fan cast. He didn't give up. He tried and tried again. We hear his story of asking a sponsor to help. We all want more subscribers, will using a text tool like slicktext.com help by putting your subscription one click away? Speaking of new strategies, should you put together a focus group to see if your show is headed in the right direction? All of this is covered in this episode 632 of the School of Podcasting Sponsor: Podcast Engineering School 1:35 Podcast Engineering School – next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information Today I did a quick search on Indeed.com for “podcast engineer” and saw quite a few options Program Includes: LIVE Interactive Online Training Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran Major Discounts on Software and Plugins Lifetime Access to the PES closed community Certificate of Completion EARLY BIRD PRICING IS NOW – SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG https://podcastengineeringschool.com/ I'm Playing with Slick Text To Grow My Subscriber List 3:39 They even have a whole tutorial on growing your list via text Pros: I can try it, or revert back to a free account (and I don't have to worry about codes in an episode years later) I can capture email addresses (and birthdays) I can upgrade to a paid program and my un-used messages roll over to the next month You can upgrade and downgrade any time you like Your listeners can unsubscribe from your message by texting " stop " Cons: Only works in the US and Canada (for me that is 76% of my audience based on my Libsyn stats) Some people listen in the car (or other activities) can't text immediately. See Slick Text In Action Text " sop " to 31996 to get links to follow me in Apple Podcasts or Google Podcasts. Then when a new episode is published it will be available in those apps. Here is a video of the backend of Slick Text https://schoolofpodcasting.wistia.com/medias/u9dzehifr0 For more information see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/slicktext Marcus Couch Heard "NO" 20 Times But Didn't Give Up This is a conversation that I had on my Ask the Podcast Coach show which I do with co-host Jim Collison of www.theaverageguy.tv 11:21 I've known Marcus Couch since 2005 back when he lived in Chicago. He now lives in California where writes, coaches, and podcasts (see Marcus Couach.com ). Marcus wanted to do THE OFFICIAL FAN podcast for the Chicago Bulls. He's had the domain bulllspodcasts.com for years. He asked the team, and they said "No." He asked the next year and the year after that. This went on a while. Marcus reached out to one of the Bulls Sponsors. Marcus was now part of the Sponsor's package. He turned a No, into a yes. He saw where one way was blocked, and kept looking for another path. He also used the strategy that bands do when trying to find a band member, he went to YouTube and found someone who had an audience on YouTube talking about the bulls. Marcus had the podcasting knowledge, a sponsor, and a passion, and his co-host Wyse Black had an audience. The two worked out a deal and now have launched the podcast with a sponsor, fan giveaways, and an audience. Check it out at www.bullspodcast.com Check out Marcus on his other podcasts: WordPress Plugins A to Z WordPress Weekly Industry Night Question of the Month 22:49 Have you attended a podcasting event? Was it worth it? I need the answer by 8/24 Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact if you use email, please use the subject line, "August Question." Why Your Podcast Needs a Focus Group 24:45 Rob Walch often uses this story of Marketing your podcast and how marketing will not save bad content (The Lone Ranger vs The Sixth Sense...
In the past, I've talked about transcriptions. The fun part of transcriptions is you still have to end up with something that is easy to read and brings value. I've mentioned temi.com and revs.com but the one thing I didn't think about is how you can use it as an editing tool But What if Things Go Wrong? I drove to Nashville this week to attend two events. One was the Nashville podcasters meetup, and the other was the launch party of Without Warning by Sheila Wysocki which had a room full of private investigators who are thinking about starting a podcast, and music business people looking to start podcasts. When I first thought about it, I went to hotels.com and did a search for cheap hotels. I normally don't look at reviews, but as I was choosing the cheapest hotel I could find, I saw some reviews with words like "bed bugs," "Drug Deals," and "Cockroaches." It made me very nervous. I thought of getting bed bugs into my luggage and bringing them home. I thought of my last trip to Nashville where I ended up hitting a dear on the way home and totaled my car. But What if Things Go Right? I met some great people and strengthened the relationships I already had. I was interviewed, and it turns out that the Ramada Hotel I stayed at was the same one I chose the last time I was in Franklin Tenessee. By the time I left many more people knew who I was, what I do, and how to contact me. What I Learned If you get a bunch of private investigators together they are just as talkative as podcasters. Why? Becuase much like podcasters, the only people who understand what it's like to be a Private Investigator are other private investigators. My comfort zone is 7 hours in a car, but if I'm driving home I can go 8.5 and be wide awake at 3 AM. You can use transcriptions to help with editing. The two I mentioned are temi.com and rev.com More and more people are assembling teams to create a podcast (and I'm not sure people know there is an alternative) People often follow the guidelines based on their environment (so people in Nashville think you need to go to a professional studio to record - you don't) Danny Ozment of Emerald City Productions ( speaking of studios) has a great mixing room, and David Hooper of Big Podcast and Red Podcast converted his walk-in closet into a studio How Podcasting Is Like Show Shopping I was so excited to go to Podcast Movement I forgot my shoes and I realized this when I was about 4 hours into the 7-hour drive. I stopped and bought a new pair. There are all sorts of dress shoes with colors, materials, heals, souls, etc. Some are shiny, and some have a texture. In the end, you need shoes to protect and provide comfort for your feet. With this in mind, it doesn't matter what they look like, the texture, etc. Fashion is what dictates those types of guidelines and those are not really NEED, but more WANTS. For me I needed a black pair, that didn't pinch my feet, let my feet breathe, and had a soul that wasn't' going to have me sliding. I looked around, found a few that fit the criteria, and then bought the pair that fit my budget. I could've looked a lot longer, but I found shoes that fit what I needed, and I moved on and continued driving to Philadelphia. Sometimes you just need to decide, put on the shoes and go. Usually the first day, your f00t need to kind of get used to the shoe, but over time the show adapts to the foot and all is well. So Man Varieties of Show Openings Jeff Brown from Lead to Read will be coming on the show in the future to discuss this further (as we did a talk on this at Podcast Movement), but we share the opinion that the show should let people know what the show is about, what the episode is about, why we should listen to you, and then get to the content. We will dive into that deeper in the future. The Perfect Podcast Intro I'm going to play samples of podcast intros from many shows today and let you know that you don't HAVE to do an intro...
In the age of social media is email still relvant? If so, how do you grow your list? What makes a good lead magnet? Do I need a lead magnet? This is all discussed in episode 630 of the School of Podcasting Sponsor: Podcast Engineering School [1:38] Podcast Engineering School – next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information Today I did a quick search on Indeed.com for “podcast engineer” and saw quite a few options Program Includes: LIVE Interactive Online Training Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran Major Discounts on Software and Plugins Lifetime Access to the PES closed community Certificate of Completion EARLY BIRD PRICING IS NOW – SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG https://podcastengineeringschool.com/ What Makes a Good Lead Magnet? 3:23 Thanks to Win Charles from the Ask Win show, Matt Rafferty from the Author Inside You podcast, and Jerry Williams from the FBI Retired podcast for contributing Ryan Deiss at Digital Marketer defines a lead magnet as “a small chunk of value that solves a specific problem for a specific market that is offered in exchange for an opt-in. My buddy (and co-host of the Podcast Review Show) Erik K Johnston did a whole episode about lead magnets. Today we talk about email lists and why you might want to start using one. OptinMonster (which is a great tool/plugin for capturing leads) breaks it into seven parts: Solves a real problem – if your lead magnet doesn’t solve a real problem that your customer avatar has, or if it doesn’t give them something they really want, it won’t work at all. Promises one quick win – your lead magnet should promise (and deliver) one quick win for your avatar. In other words, it should help them to easily achieve something. Super specific – don’t create a lead magnet about something general. The more specific you are about the benefit of your lead magnet, the better it will convert leads. Quick to digest – PDF checklists tend to convert really well because they are so quick and easy to digest. eBooks or lengthy reports may make your prospects feel overwhelmed. High value – your lead magnet should have both high perceived value and high actual value. Instantly accessible – your lead magnet will work best if it is something that can be delivered right away. People love instant gratification. Demonstrates your expertise or Universal Value Proposition – when someone consumes your lead magnet, it should demonstrate your expertise or your unique value proposition. This helps turn leads into customers down the road. Here is a list of 69 effective lead magnets (no email required) Advantages of an Email List? 17:44 The biggest advantage of an email list is you are one click away from your desired call to action, and more than likely you have someone's undivided attention. Most people (hopefully) are not reading their email while driving, etc. You can email your list directly and not have the information appear on your website. You are in contact with your engaged audience. 2000 Facebook followers is not the same as 2000 email subscribers According to a 2015 study, 3.57% is the average open rate. So if you have 1000 subscribers, 35 will open your email Derek Halpern of Social Triggers sent his latest post to his email list and his twitter account Here are the results he got: 50 people clicked on his link from Twitter 1,200 people clicked on his link from his email list His email list might be twice as large as his Twitter following but it still generated about 24 times more clicks. Even your grandma has email. Where To Start? 21:38 Mailchimp is many times the place you start. Why? It' starts free (but if your list grows can be expensive). There are many, many companies out there. I've used Aweber before moving to Convert kit. Aweber is $19/month for 500 subscribers or .038 cents per...
Sponsor: Podcast Engineering School 2:42 Podcast Engineering School – next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information Today I did a quick search on Indeed.com for "podcast engineer" and saw quite a few options Program Includes: LIVE Interactive Online Training Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran Major Discounts on Software and Plugins Lifetime Access to the PES closed community Certificate of Completion EARLY BIRD PRICING IS NOW – SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG https://podcastengineeringschool.com/ My Induction Into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame This past week I was inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame. I am honored to be in such good company, and deeply grateful for all the kind words. In looking back at my 13 years I noticed a pattern: How Podcasting Works Valuable content leads to relationships that lead to opportunities. The key word is VALUABLE content. Then you have to work at relationships, and you need to take advantage of every opportunity. Look back I see how: 6:00 Who are Dave's influences? Dave Barry, David Letterman, and Dan Klass 7:59 Thank God I was bullied? 9:25 Hope for all the introverts 10:05 You learn from all your failures 11:00 Content - Relationships - Opportunities 12:50 Dave's first podcast attracts Marcus Couch 14:45 Dave gets to go on the radio to explain podcasting to Music Business Radio 16:30 Marcus Couch invites me to get involved with Podshow. The Internet's first free podcast media hosting 17:25 Why it's not the tech 17:55 Dave tries to sound like Scott Fletcher of Podcheck Review 20:33 Why free media hosting drives me nuts Podshow/Mevio 8/2005 – 4/2014 (116 months – 38.8 million dollars spent) Podango 9/2006 – 12/2008 (27 Months) wildvoice.com 7/2006 – 7/2009 (36 months) mypodcasts.com 2007 – 2011 (estimated 48 months) Audiometric.io 11/ 2012 – 8/2014 (21 months before being purchased by panoply and taken off the market). Opinion Podcasting 11/2015-10/2017 (23 months) The average is 45 months. Take Podshow and the 38 million out of the picture and that drops to 31 (which is close to my typical answer of three years or 36 months) Anchor.fm was started in August of 2015. If they make it 45 months that is May of 2019. If they go 31 months that would be May of 2018. So far Anchor has burned through 14.4 M already (see https://www.crunchbase.com/organization/anchor-fm#section-locked-charts ) 24:00 How I got the job as the director of the New Media Expo 25:57 Podcasters Roundtable shows embracing your competition 26:30 Podcasters Roundtable leads to me interviewing Jordan Harbinger 27:11 My relationship with Daniel J Lewis leads to me getting involved with the Membership Guys 27:48 Talking to Mike Morrison leads to me speaking at Social Media Marketing World 30:11 Podcast Movement and Steve Stewart leads to me meeting Glenn the Geek Hebert 32:50 Glenn invites me to speak at Podfest 34:22 Jared Easley introduces me to Danny Pena 36:16 My second trip to Podfest leads to me being interviewed 37:10 My interview, leads to me being featured in the Messengers a Podcast Documentary 38:16 My speaking resume made it easier to get more speaking gigs 39:20 Podcasting is like farming. You plant, fertilize, and harvest. 38:50 It's not all about downloads. How my audience helped me through tough times. 42:48 Are you ready to work with Dave? 44:45 The one memory that bugs me from PM18 46:50 Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast and Podcasters Society inducts Dave Jackson into the Podcaster's Hall of Fame 53:20 Dave Jackson's acceptance speech.
Becuase of My Podcast: 1:30 Haley Radke from http://www.adopteeson.com/ shares how the only people who can understand what it's like to be adopted, and more importantly how to deal with a reunion with your biological parents. Nobody knows what that is like except those who have lived it. You might feel alone, but by creating her podcasts she is how building a community and actually had a meetup when she was traveling. People able came from out of state to come to meet her, and to be part of the community SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School 9:22 Podcast Engineering School – next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information Program Includes: LIVE Interactive Online Training Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran Major Discounts on Software and Plugins Lifetime Access to the PES closed community Certificate of Completion If you're looking to start your own audio editing service, or just want to make your show sound better. This course is for you. EARLY BIRD PRICING ENDS VERY SOON – SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG https://podcastengineeringschool.com/ Imposter Syndrom Continued 12:15 Last week we looked at what is Imposter syndrome, and how to overcome it. I was listening to the Dennis Miller Option and he shared some insights into how he feels when he is at a party with "celebrities." If you are new to Dennis Miller, here are some facts from his Wikipedia page. Dennis Miller: Saturday Night Live 1985 to 1991 Dennis Miller show (last seven month ) in 1992 Dennis Miller Show Live 1995- 2002 winning five Emmys for HBO Hosted three-hour radio show on westwood one from 2007 to 2015 He also had shows on CNBC, and has done featured spots on many television shows. He is listed as #21 on the great comedians of all time top 100 chart from Comedy Central This is paraphrased from this show, " As far as being a celebrity, I'm complete "wobbliness." The moment I'm with some people who are famous I can do my little patter. I can make them laugh, and we can have the exchange that they want to have and I want to have. At the end (of the night), if they say, "Here is my number call me," when I get home and I'm alone, I don't tare it up, I keep them and think I'll call them someday. I NEVER get to those calls. I just think they didn't mean it. I would feel like I was cold calling them to sell them encyclopedias. It's a weird thing. " More Common Podcasting Mistakes 16:05 Are you ONLY putting a "jukebox" or "show player" for your podcast? This is where you have one page with all your episodes. For an example see http://becausepodcast.libsyn.com/category/Binge+Listen PROS This makes it easy to go to one page and click listen and let it play all of your episodes. Cons Ther are now show notes on your page. Any shows notes that appear are actually on your media hosts website (and the player is served in what is called an iframe, so technically while this appears on your site, it's like someone cut a hole in your site and you are looking through to the original site). It makes it very hard to share the episode Do You Have Extra Words In Your Podcast Name That Are Not Needed in Apple? In this example, I'm not talking about the title of your episodes but the title of your show. Try to avoid having people "Search for the show in Apple podcasts." If you do, you need to tell them EXACTLY what to search for. EXAMPLE The kookcast is a podcast with a very unique name. I would deeply doubt there are two shows with that name. If you go to Apple podcasts and search for kookcast it comes right up. However, if you enter "The kookcast" even with its SUPER UNIQUE name it does not appear in the top 300 results. From what I can see when you add "The" your show is ranked against all the other shows that have the word "the" in the title and it doesn't appear. So in your case you might need to have them...
Seventy percent of people have impostor syndrome. While an interesting stat, that doesn't really help people who have impostor syndrome get over it. Today I have 12 strategies to help overcome Impostor syndrome Because of My Podcast: I Got A Custom Wrestling Mat 01:26 Jason Bryan of www.mattalkonline.com shares the story how one of the top manufacturers of wrestling mats made a custom wrestling mat with Jason's Logo and microphone. HOW COOL IS THAT? You can hear more about how Jason is now doing podcasting as a career at http://schoolofpodcasting.com/jason-bryant-turned-his-experience-into-a-career-in-podcasting/ SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School Podcast Engineering School - next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information Program Includes: LIVE Interactive Online Training Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran Major Discounts on Software and Plugins Lifetime Access to the PES closed community Certificate of Completion EARLY BIRD PRICING IS NOW - SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG https://podcastengineeringschool.com/ We All Feed Like Imposters Seth Godin wrote in The Icarus Deception that after a dozen bestsellers he still feels like a fraud all the time "The beauty of the impostor syndrome is you vacillate between extreme egomania and a complete feeling of: 'I'm a fraud! Oh God, they're on to me! I'm a fraud!' So you just try to ride the egomania when it comes and enjoy it, and then slide through the idea of fraud." – Tina Fey "Sometimes I wake up in the morning before going off to a shoot, and I think, I can't do this. I'm a fraud." – Kate Winslett "I have written eleven books, but each time I think, 'uh oh, they're going to find out now. I've run a game on everybody, and they're going to find me out.' " – Maya Angelou Jodie Foster was interviewed for the television show ‘60 Minutes’ she revealed how she feared she'd have to give back her Oscar after being voted best actor for her role in ‘The Accused’. “I thought it was a fluke,” she said in the interview. “I thought everybody would find out and they'd take the Oscar back. They'd come to my house, knocking on the door, ‘Excuse me, we meant to give that to someone else. That was going to Meryl Streep.'” Ken Burns interviewed Meryl Streep, the most frequently nominated Academy Award and Golden Globe actor in history, she revealed her own insecurities "You think, ‘Why would anyone want to see me again in a movie? And I don't know how to act anyway, so why am I doing this?’” If We are All Imposters - Than None of Us Are Imposters I had a niece who for a while started to dress in a "Goth" style. The idea was she didn't want to look like everyone else. The problem was, "Goth" started to be cool. Soon, everybody started dressing Goth, and the result of "standing out" no longer was a byproduct of dressing Goth. If you are sitting there thinking, "I could never be like _____," guess what? That person is sitting there thinking the same thing too. The only thing that separates you from anyone else in the world is time and effort. Anything that anyone else can do, you can do. It’s impossible to feel like an impostor once you accept that everyone else is an impostor too. Imposter Syndrome Cycle In the book, The Imposter Syndrome Remedy Dr. Estcio talks about an Imposter Syndrom Cycle. This cycle shows often that imposter syndrome leads to two responses: Crippling Fear Overworking You are either crippled by fear which leads you to procrastinate. The second possibility is you are driven by fear of failure and you overwork. When you complete the task it may bring temporary relief. However, when it is time to evaluate performance, limiting beliefs associated with Imposter Syndrome may arise: If procrastination led to a successful outcome, then success is considered a fluke (“I was lucky things worked out in the end!”). If over-preparation...
Interviewing a Very Loyal Listener Today we talk with "Carie P" who is a mega fan of the Geologic Podcast (www.geologicpodcast.com ) hosted by creative genius George Hrab. How funny is George? He's an atheist and I (a lifelong Christian) am a regular listener. Carie got together a bunch of fans of the show to create a podcast for the host (both on his 50th episode and 100th episode). In addition to being a fan, Carie has also purchased every one of George's products. Podcast Secrets 2009 Podcast secrets has a TON of information this year, and it has a "Faculty" of podcast consultants (including ME) that will be contributing. Paul Colligan and Alex Mandossian always bring quality information that it would take months to find (let alone figure out how to use). To find out about the Preview call on April 9th click here. To sign up for the seminar go to www.secretswithdave.com Listener Feedback Daniel Johnson Jr of www.journeyinsidemymind.com answers the question, "Why did you unsubscribe to that podcast?" He says: 1. Lost his closeness with the host. 2. If the shows are too long he can't keep up. 3. Finding alternative methods (like pandora.com) New BONUS For Members of the School of Podcasting Now when you sign up at the School of Podcasting you get copy of the Ultimate Footer Ad FOR FREE as a bonus gift for signing up. Boost your podcast subscriptions with this great tool. ($47 value).
The Podcast Awards Are Open You can nominate the School of Podcasting in the Technology category at the Podcast Awards https://www.podcastawards.com/app/signup I won last year, and it would be cool to start a streak. If I have ever entertained you, helped you, inspired you, saved you money or headaches, I would DEEPLY appreciate your nomination for the School of Podcasting in the Technology category SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School Early Bird Pricing Podcast Engineering School start September 18th. What is Podcast Engineering School? This is an online course created in 2016 by Chris Curran who has TONS of experience as an audio engineer and has worked on some famous albums that you would recognize. Now he is bringing that experience to podcasting. The class is for those who want their show to sound more professional, but also for those who want to make money as a podcast editor and producer. Program Includes: LIVE Interactive Online Training Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran Major Discounts on Software and Plugins Lifetime Access to the PES closed community Certificate of Completion The "Super Early Bird Pricing" is in effect NOW see www.podcastenginerringschool.com Where Do I Put the "Good Stuff" in My Podcast? In the recent episode of the Podcast Review Show that I do with Erik K Johnson of PodcastTalentCoach.com we discuss how long you should make a person wait to get to the "good stuff" and where you should put "the good stuff." check out the full review at www.podcastreviewshow.com/74
My First Test of Radio Public You can get your podcast on the Radio Public platform at https://podcasters.radiopublic.com/. Once you’ve been approved at Radio Public, they send a weekly email summary to your email with details about your Paid Listens activity on RadioPublic. Once your podcast earns $25 it will be eligible for payout, and we’ll send an email with information about how to configure the payment step Earnings are a combination of your Paid Listens (at a rate of $20 per 1000 listens of your episodes in the RadioPublicapp) and for every new listener that hears three episodes of your show in the RadioPublic app, you’ll earn a Loyal Listener bonus of an additional (one-time) $1 - and yes, this bonus layers on top of your Paid Listens rate. What Is the Criteria For a Listen? We define a Paid Listen as a listener hearing at least 60% or 30 minutes of an episode, whichever is shorter. For now, only listens in the native RadioPublic mobile apps for iOS and Android count. Multiple listens to a given episode by the same user’s device/account will count as a single listen. Also, it is important to understand that a download does not necessarily equal a listen. On all podcast apps, including RadioPublic, a given episode's audio file might be downloaded multiple times: the user could have deleted it before listening; a user’s local network error can occur and the file needs to be downloaded again; a podcast hosting provider can have an issue that initiates another download, etc.RadioPublic measures when an episode is actually heard, so you should not always expect a 1:1 download to listen ratio in your hosting provider’s metrics or dashboard. What to Do If Your Episode Already Has Ads? Depending on your current approach to ads, you have a few options for providing ad-free episodes to RadioPublic: Remove the ads from your older episodes in your existing RSS feed by reuploading newly edited audio files to your podcast host. Create another RSS feed that contains ad-free episodes and provide that feed to RadioPublic. Contact your ad sales team and podcast hosting company, as they may have the ability to turn off dynamically inserted ads when episodes are requested from RadioPublic. Where Do The Ads Go? RadioPublic will place audio ads before and/or after episodes participating in Paid Listens, and the ads will be clearly demarcated with audio and visual cues as distinct from your show, not part of it. Where's the Catch? The catch is to get credit for the play it HAS to be in the Radio Public app. You will need 1250 downloads (the amount you need to make $25) to get paid on their app. While they supply a player, it does not count that download as one to be paid for. You get $1 bonus if you get a new person to try the app and listen to three of your episodes. For me, I'm not sure I can look at my audience and say, "Please go listen on this app where I can better advertise to you." Patreon Vs Radio Public Last month on Ask the Podcast Coach I had 3, 852 downloads. If we play in fantasy land and says EVERYBODY heard it on Radio Public, I would make $76. What I do on that show is I do an extra 30 minutes of show with my co-host Jim Collison from www.theaverageguy.tv and put it behind a paywall using Patreon. Last month I'm made $398 (as someone took the option to pay $125/month and receive an hour of one on one coaching) if we removed that (as that slot is not always full that would be $248. (or 3.2 times the amount of money from Radio Public). Pennies Make Dollars If you're trying to do podcasting full time, you need multiple streams of income. As with other services I've used that inserted ads paid $1.5 for 1000 listens, Radio Public is a much better solution. But as the average podcaster get around 1500 downloads per episode (source:libsyn.com) I'm not going to retire on the $30 (again that would be if EVERY SINGLE ONE of your listeners was using the Radio Public app) Improvements...
Today we have a conversation with Kyle Gray author of the book The Story Engine: An entrepreneur's guide to content strategy and brand storytelling without spending all day writing. He has helped hundreds of startups and small businesses create scalable content marketing strategies. His book The Story Engine outlines his process for making content marketing and brand storytelling easy and effective. Because Of My Podcast: I'm Working with NPR 1:22 Monica Rivera hosts the "You Wanna Do What" podcast (giving you the nudge you need) and she recently celebrated her one year anniversary and shared how she was selected to take part in an NPR program where she will go to Seattle to work side by side with NPR on a story. The best part of Monica's story is her attitude and how she took the negative of rejection and turned it around and used it for success. Check out her one-year "13 Lessons Learned" anniversary show. Kyle Gray Gives You Action Steps to Make Great Content 3:54 In today's conversation, Kyles shares some of his favorite tools to create content and explains strategies to identify problems and create actionable content with lead magnets to grow your list, enhance your network, and move forward toward building your business. Kyle has worked with many well-known brands and businesses like AdEspresso, Advance Your Reach, WP Curve and Self-Publishing School. 5:23 What is Good Content? 09:08 What are realistic expectations for traffic? 12:50 How long does it take to make great content. 16:20 How important are keywords? 19:55 What examples can you share of covering a problem from multiple angles? 21:05 If you could only pick three tools to help with your content, what would you pick? The content strategy template Trello Co-Schedule Key Take Aways You need consistency He was talking about blog posts, and we are talking about podcasts but we still have nuggets. In the end, we are all content creators. So you heard in this interview where he is not winging it; there is planning. He does things other people may not be doing like finding graphics to go with the episode. He said that even if you spend hours on your content, it may take months before you start seeing any measurable traffic. So if you're looking to get rich in six weeks, this is not for you. I love that good content helps your audience. You may think that all of this discussion is for business, but if you're doing a comedy podcast your audience's problem may be that they just watched the news or had a bad day at work, and it's your job to find a way to make them smile. He talked about identifying some key problems for your audience and making a lead magnet to give away that helps solve them. This is a great strategy that not everyone does, but that's because it takes time. A cool graphic could be a picture of your guest with a quote you pulled from the interview. Focus on the relationships. It is these relationships that help on the way up, and also if things go the other way. Jordan Harbinger utilized to rebuild his show with his network. Check out the Story Engine on Audible at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/freebook July Question of the Month 27:59 Do you have an email list, if so how big is it, and how did you grow it? I need your answers (preferably in audio) by July 27th. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and if you send email, please use "July question" as the subject line Top Five Questions About the New Google Podcasts App 28:45 How do I know if my podcast in the Google Podcast App? Go to https://search.google.com/devtools/podcast/preview and enter your RSS feed What If I'm Not in the App? Then see this post Do I Need to Be In Both Google Podcasts and Google Play Music? Yes. I personally don't see Google Play Music makes it to 2019. I have no information, but it's just a feeling. What Kind of Features are in the App?Almost none. You can speed up and slow down, and that is it for now. It doesn't even automatically...
I received 360 responses to this question, and if you do read show notes (better known as a description of what is in the podcast) what are you looking for. Comments? 888-563-32228 Because of My Podcast I Got to Appear on TV 1:45 Edward Schmitz from www.vidanostrilhos.com.br was featured on a TV show in Brazil. Make Money as a School of Podcasting Affiliate 4:30 Kim Kraji ( from www.toastmasters101.net ) explains why she became a School of Podcating Affiliate (and I set up www.schoolofpodcasting.com/kim for her to send her traffic). If someone signs up she earns a commission for every month they stay subscribed. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates and sign up today. [spp-tweet tweet="Only 38 percent of people may be reading podcast show notes"] Your Podcast Show Notes: What To Include, How Long, and is Anybody Reading Them? 6:35 I put up some polls and ask you to send in your responses to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/coontact and here is what I got Out of 360 responses, 136 (38%) look at show notes, and 224 (62% fo not 8:33 Carey Green of podcastfasttrack.com feels show notes are important. He is surprised how many people don't put their social links in their show notes. 12:22 John from the Hate to Weight Show ( www.hatetoweight.com ) also wants social links and links to anything (like a video) mentioned in the episode. 14:38 Eliquite from the Travel Gluten Free Podcast (www.travelglutenfree.me ) is looking for resources. She hates show notes with one giant paragraph. 17:11 John from www.professorslots.com (a podcast about how to win at gambling) also looks at show notes and is deeply disappointed when you say you will put it in the show notes and you don't. 18:34 Win Charles from Ask Win hates it when you put a link to your website. She loves the show notes from www.todayinios.com 19:55 Shawn from Stories For Starters (www.storiesofstarters.com ) is looking for things that he wants to follow up (links, etc) 22:58 (Live from Books a Million ) Jill From http://becomingelli.com/ likes show notes to go back and review 24:49 The host of the new podcast www.cozycrib.com actually would rather read than listen 25:53 Kim from www.toastmasters101.net will read the show notes when they are emailed to her. 27:26 Tim from the www.hesaidshesaidmovies.com doesn't really look at them, but when he does he's looking links 28:49 Lee from www.covertnerd.net loves to use show notes for a resource. 30:34 James from www.podnews.not does NOT look at show notes. I interviewed James a few episodes ago. James wrote a great article called How podcast show notes display in 19 different apps ( https://podnews.net/article/how-podcast-show-notes-display ) In that article he recommends: Always show links with the URL visible. These links will be clickable in Apple Podcasts and will be visible - if not clickable - in every app. Using word links won't always work. Formatting, like using of the strong tag, may be ignored by many podcast apps. Ensure your show notes don't require this to be faithfully shown. Be aware that accented characters may not display correctly. [spp-tweet tweet="Top recommended items to put in your podcast show notes"] Recommended Things to Include in Your Show Notes The name of the person/guest Links to the guest site ANY website mentioned Links to videos or any resources mentioned Social Media Links for people to connect with you Readability (use subheadings to break up lots of texts) July Question of the Month: Email List and Tools 41:50 Do you have an email list? If so how big is it? What system/tools do you use? Any tricks on growing your list. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and use "July Question" if you want to record something and send it in via email (I do prefer audio over email) The Importance of Your Episode Title / Headline 42:31 I read an article that said 8 out of 10 people will actually read your headline, but only two out...
Comments? 8888-563-3228 Today on episode 623 we talk with Cody Gough of the Curiosity podcast. Cody had a podcast that was successful, and based on the goals of the podcast decided to make a radical change to their publishing schedule. Because of My Podcast 2:20 Brenda from My Tech Toolbelt shares the story of being able to score media passes for one of the top educational events that would've cost her $650 but she's going for free Because of her podcast. Sponsorship Update 5:08 Every month we have one episode based on listener feedback, and somehow Todd's from the Trucker Dump podcast (www.abouttruckdriving.com ) went to spam. Todd shares an idea he may be turning into a podcast, and how he was able to get some sponsors for his podcast. Perfect is the Enemy of Good 9:00 I can't think of anything that was perfect right out of the gate. Yet, people will not start a podcast because it is "not right." In a recent interview on the "My guest needs no introduction" Howard Stern talks about how he has changed over the years because he went to therapy, and isn't as insecure as he used to be. He states, "I think that bad radio is when you don't somehow change it up constantly." In another interview, Jerry Seinfeld interview David Letterman and he explained how Johnny Carson had all sorts of stipulations on how Dave could do his show, and as Dave put it, "I picked up the crumbs and try to make something out of it." That lead to Dave being super creative, and doing something you couldn't find on the TV anyplace and brought him a super loyal audience. So what can you do with your podcast if you took away some of the segments, some of the format, and had to come up with something new? How Do You Know Your Audience Hates Something if You Don't Let Them Taste It 15:30 Cody shares how he got a gig on LinkedIn to produce a podcast He inherited a huge audience from Curiosity.com How he had to set expectations with his boss on what to expect in regards to production Their show was weekly for a year before deciding to change the format His audience gave him feedback when he switched formats He lost a small amount of his audience before he downloads starting growing As his content is evergreen, his back catalog is still getting downloaded He shares some podcast promotion ideas (www.gretta.com ) and now is focusing on email and the Amazon Briefing His Amazon Briefing is different than most "standard" briefings How the assets at the company are changing with the new format How advertisers are more interested in the US audience in some cases A great story about he had a HUGE guest on his show and his audience could not have been less interested 36:40 How he got a huge guest on his show (it was super easy) 40:05 Tips for creating a daily show 42:55 How often he checks stats, and takes the temperature of the audience 46:00 The only way to know what your audience wants 48:20 Who he is using for sponsors What If There Was No Social Media? 52:00 I was listening to the New Media Show and Todd Cohran brought up an interesting question, "What is there wasn't social media, how would you promote your show? That may be something we think about, and start doing. We can easily rely on promoting ourselves sitting in front of a computer screen, but there are other strategies that require you to get out from behind the desk. Ready To Start Your Podcast? See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme I look forward to working with you
Because of My Podcast: Free Tickets 2:00 Brad from the Cinema Guys ( www.wearethecinemaguys.com ) explains how he was approached by a small local Cinema Chain who listens to his podcast. Brad worked a deal that enables him to get tickets to movies. Brad (being the cool guy he is) is using them as a give away for his audience. He has also worked to do a screening of Brad's all-time favorite horror movie, "John Carpenter's The Thing." They get to introduce the movie and then do a Q&A afterward. Earn Money Referring People to the School of Podcasting 7:20 As a podcaster, people may approach you about how you started your show. You may be thinking of creating an online course, or an ebook. Instead of spending all that time and resources, you can signup to be a School of Podcasting affiliate and earn a commission when they subscribe and also for every month when they stay subscribed. For more information go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates Why Knowing Your Why Matters 8:00 It keeps you focused. You are no longer distracted by things that don't help you achieve your goal. If you know why you're doing something, you can see the results clearer. This enables you to spot the small victories that then motivate you to keep going. It is then the motivation that enables you to try again. When another small victory comes along, you get another dose of motivation, and a pinch of this thing called confidence. How My "Why" Gave Me Super Powers I had been wanting to lose weight, and over the last year, I have been going up and down. I would get down to maybe 218 lbs, and then go up to 221 or 222. I wanted to get up and go to the gym in the morning. I knew to drink lots of water, and get plenty of sleep. I knew what to do. However, when I listed my priorities I wrote down things like rewriting my book More Podcast Money, I needed to update some tutorials at the School of Podcasting, and take a class on SEO. Nowhere in there is anything about my health. That's when I realized why I wasn't losing weight. It simply was not a priority. I got a call from letting me know that I was being inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame. The minute I hung up the phone, I said out loud, "Well somebody's getting up early tomorrow." While it is somewhat weird, as I normally try not to care what people think of me, I knew there would be lots of pictures. I even hired a photographer to take pictures during my presentation. Suddenly, like a light switch, I had willpower. I had focus. I had a purpose. No longer did I need to watch TV. I realized that most of the taped TV shows I use to watch rarely delivered any real value. I could take that time and use it at the gym, or walk around, or cook healthy food, and THAT would deliver value to my goal of losing weight. When You Know Your Why You Can Make it Through the How “He who has a why to live can bear almost any how.” -Friedrich Nietzsche The two most important days of your life are the day you were born and the day you discover why you were born.– Mark Twain Apple Podcasts hits 550,000 Podcasts I listened to my first episode, and in it, I mention in April of 2005, there were maybe "4000" podcasts. This article says in 2005 there were 3000 podcats, now there are 550,000 and according to this TechCrunch article, there have been Fifty billion episodes have been streamed/downloaded since launch. The new numbers include 18.5 million individual episodes representing 155 countries, in more than 100 languages. So in 2005 when I was explaining to people how cool podcasting was, and how awesome it was that you could "teel the software to watch this site" (better known today as a subscription) and that you didn't ' need a Mac, and you didn't need an iPod to listen. IT WAS PAINFUL as many people just didn't get it (it took a while for me to get it). But I knew the potential power of podcasting, and I had quit listening to radio, and I wanted people to experience...
Have you ever thought, "Oh someone is already doing a podcast about my subject." If so you need to listen to today's show with James Cridland of podnews.net who saw there were other sites and newsletters featuring podcast news, but he thought they were missing something. He had been doing newsletters and working in the radio industry for years, so he decided to start a newsletter (that became a podcast, and an Amazon Flash Briefing) and has really come out ahead of the pack. Today James peels back the curtain on what planning went into the show, and what tools he's using to pull off a daily show. Table of Contents Because of My Podcast: I'm Going to be Inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame James Cridland Shares What it Takes to Make A Daily Show That Knocks it Out of the Park Isn't Email Dead? What Makes a Good Lead Magnet? Need Help Getting Your Podcast Going? Because of My Podcast: I'm Going to be Inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame 1:34 I got a call last week from Gary Leland was surprised to hear that my peers have selected me to be inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame. I am humbled, honored, and a whole lot of other emotions that I can't quite digest yet. Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate and Earn Money Referring People 3:57 You can earn money referring people to the School of podcasting and earn commissions each month they stay subscribed Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates James Cridland Shares What it Takes to Make A Daily Show That Knocks it Out of the Park 5:41 I brought James on as he is just crushing it with his newsletter on Podcasting. He seemed to just appear and is just crushing it. So in this interview, we hear: His planning and how he practiced first before launching He realized his environment changes as he travels and he needed to be able to produce it from any computer How he emersed himself in his niche as step one, and he uses https://www.inoreader.com/ as his freed reader (tutorial on inoreader) How does he choose which stories to spotlight How he uses newsletter analytics to understand his audience What stories are the most popular He codes his own website and uses Sendy to manage the email list What advice does he have for someone wanting to be an expert in their field As a person with a radio background, what do you think radio feels about podcasting? His thoughts on people buying their way up the Apple Rankings Marketing your podcast, and explaining it to future listeners What percentage of his downloads come from his Amazon Daily Briefing His thoughts on editing and the optimum length of a podcast He loves to listen to Death in Ice Valley, Hamish, and Andy, Reasons to be Cheerful Check out James Daily Podcast News Show at www.podnews.net [click_to_tweet tweet="I knew consistency would win in the end" quote="I knew consistency would win in the end"] Isn't Email Dead? 42:40 But wait, isn't email dead? According to some studies, email is four times more effective at reaching your audience than Facebook. (source) If you are looking for outreach, that may be social, if you're looking to boost sales, or get your audience to click on Something than email is still the king. An article that just came out a few days ago explains how 58% of people "check their email first in the morning vs 11% Facebook and 2% Twitter. 2.6 billion people have email vs 1.7 billion for Facebook. The article states that "It turns out that 77% of consumers prefer email over social media for permission-based promotional messages." (source). The only problem I have with the article is that it's from option monster who helps you get email sign-ups. What Makes a Good Lead Magnet? 44:16 The best lead magnet ideas typically come from your audience. It's a question someone asks, and it's a really good question. What problems can you help them solve? What would lessen their stress, save them time, or help them reach a goal? Here...
Two Podcast Growth Strategies and Dynamic Podcast Sponsorship with Ad Insertion Today in episode 620 you will learn two strategies to grow your audience and your subscriptions and you will learn how other podcasters got podcast sponsor. Keep in mind, if you are doing a show for fun, you can do a podcast with no intention of making money and that is 100% fine. I see podcasters who are now choosing media hosts based on their host's ability to get them paid. New media hosts are popping up selling Dynamic Ad Insertion. This is not where you do a host read advertisement. This is where you have ads that that sponsor often had recorded, and then insert them into your show (you pick where they appear). In my example, the recorded ad was at a much lower volume. Growing Your Podcast Through Print 1:50 Mark Miller from the Repurpose Your Career shares how his podcast was featured in an actual paper Magazine, but not only a Magazine AARP. Now one might think that podcast listeners are not reading AARP but it turns out some of them are and now his numbers have taken a sizable jump. So the lesson here is you never know what will bring you more listeners. Today's Podcast Sponsor: PodcastGuests.com 3:49 A great way to grow your audience is to be interviewed on other podcasts (as they have podcast listeners). Many podcasters love to boost their network by doing an interview show, but maybe you're having a hard time finding guests. PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its more than 4,000 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements Podcastguests.com helps you become featured on other shows and helps you find guests for your show. Tim “Kimo” Brien from http://kdoipodcasting.com Growing Your Podcast with Face to Face Meetings 5:15 Way back on episode 474 of the School of Podcasting Glenn "the Geek" Hebert (of the Horse Radio Network ) made his first appearance and explained how he had gone to trade shows. Elikqitie from the Travel Gluten Free podcast tried this, and while she didn't get the booth for free (she did get it at a reduced rate). She had tons of interviews and grew her network. One company emailed her after the conference and reached out to be interviewed. Another boost came when someone she met at the event shared an image of them on Instagram and she could see where this was adding to the number of downloads for that episode. Then another contact from the event asked her to host a webinar they are running. Siri Can Subscribe You Audience to Your Podcast 16: 02 Did you know if you have an iPhone you can say, "Hey Siri, Subscribe to the (name of your show ) podcast" and she will ask you to confirm your decision and the subscribe to your show in the Apple Podcasts app. You can do this on Facebook live and share it with your audience. Question(s) of the Month 16:58 This month I asked, If you got a sponsor how did you get it? I also asked, Do you planned on launching a new show this year?" Here are the answers" Win Charles from "Ask Win" does plan on starting a podcast after she graduates from College in 2019. 20:47 She did have a sponsor who found her. 21:50 Cale Nelson from the Modern Christian Men podcast had a sponsor for his Ham Radio 360 show before he even had one episode published. He got a second sponsor who approached him. He does plan on launching two new shows both involving members of his family (Sistercast, and Our Podcast ) 25:34 Tim “Kimo” Brien from http://kdoipodcasting.com will plan on releasing a new show Gray Heroes soon (July) 2734 Luke from the Triangle Tactical Podcast (about competitive shooting). His first sponsor fit his niche and sells bullets for competitive shooting. He got them as a sponsor by reaching out and asking, "Would you like to be a sponsor of my show?" and they did. The second sponsor came to Luke and asked to be a...
Today I talk with Harry Duran of Podcast Junkies. I've known Harry for quite some time (hear my interview on his show). He has a great sense of humor and makes me laugh. I love to be around people who make me laugh. At last years Podfest, myself Harry, Michael Oneil, and Natalie Jenkins had a blast. Throw in Dr. Ryan Gray and Jennifer Briney, and Master Kuldrin, and you've got memories to last a lifetime. I started listening to Podcast Junkies thinking it was going to be yet another "Podcast About Podcasting" but Harry is Different. He talks a little about the guests' show and then peels down the layers to find their best stories. Comments? 888-563-3228 Sponsor: Podcast Guests A great way to grow your audience is to be interviewed on other podcasts (as they have podcast listeners). Many podcasters love to boost their network by doing an interview show, but maybe you're having a hard time finding guests. PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its more than 4,000 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements PodcastGuests.com helps you become featured on other shows and helps you find guests for your show. The First Ever School of Podcasting LIGHTNING ROUND 4:10 I'm going to play questions from Harry interview with Travis Chappel and you figure out what do all these questions do? Behind the Scenes of a how the lead Podcast Junky Harry Duran Performs an Interview 6:40 I interviewed Harry a few months ago, but I hadn't cracked the code. I kept asking myself, "Why do I listen to Harry's show?" Here are some reasons I know most of his guests (and learn things about them I didn't know) He always asks the questions I would ask He gets great stories out of his guests. So then I wanted to know HOW does Harry do this? How does he shape his show? So I was listening to Harry interview Travis Chappell. Now I don't know Travis, but I still listened to the whole interview. So again, I reversed engineered it. I went about halfway through the episode and shifted my focus from Travis to Harry. Then the light bulb came on. It's not really earth-shattering, but Harry asked questions that left the door WIDE OPEN for a story. He also LISTENS and asks great follow up questions. One great example, the first question to Travis was, to sum up, his podcast experience in three words. Travis answered, "Amazing, Hard, Unexpected." To this Harry then asked him to dig in deeper into what is hard. It's not rocket science. But losing weight is simple as well. You eat less and exercise more. Simple it is. Easy it is not, and doing interviews is very similar. It's simple but not easy. Today we find out How he selected his guests How he prepares for the interview How he chooses his next question As a podcaster and listener, what are some of the common mistakes podcaster make? How nervous he was interviewing Marc Maron's producer How the same "recipe" for good content is the same recipe he used to launch Fullcast his podcast production company His philosophy on handling guests Behind the scenes of his retention hashtag Why he now outsources his editing His history of making a six-figure income in the "corporate world" and why he left. What are the common mistakes podcasters make? You can check out Harry's show Podcast Junkies at www.podcastjunkies.com and his production company at www.fullcast.co Podcasting News In an article by Insideradio.com Audio Boom may be having serious financial issues as they had to call off their acquisition of Triton Digital. In the article, it states, “In announcing the withdrawal, Audioboom said it only has enough working capital to continue operations for four weeks. Shares in Audioboom remain suspended on the London Stock Exchange (AIM) pending further fundraising.” If you are looking for a new media host, check out my favorite media host Libsyn.com use the coupon code...
Comments? 888-563-3228 Becuase of My Podcast, I'm Married 1:26 Jordan Harbinger explains how his podcast lead to him meeting his wife. Sponsor: Podcast Guests 2:23 A great way to grow your audience is to be interviewed on other podcasts (as they have podcast listeners). Many podcasters love to boost their network by doing an interview show, but maybe you're having a hard time finding guests. PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its more than 4,000 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements Podcastguests.com helps you become featured on other shows and helps you find guests for your show. Sign up at PodcastGuests.com/sop Who is Jordan Harbinger? 4:08 He is the host of the Jordan Harbinger show. He is a podcast veteran (been around more than 11 years) and I like Jordan because of the "three I's" Interesting A former Wall Street attorney, Jordan speaks five languages and spent several years abroad in Europe and the developing world, including South America, Eastern Europe, and the Middle East. He has also worked for various governments and NGOs overseas, traveled through war zones, and been kidnapped -- twice. He'll tell you the only reason he's still alive and kicking is because of his ability to talk his way into (and out of) just about any type of situation. Integrity Jordan will call BS on anybody. I once saw him correct a person who was introducing him at an event, and I've heard him ask some tough questions on his podcast The Jordan Harbinger Show Influence At Social Media Marketing World I saw Jordan speak (I HIGHLY recommend seeing him if you get a chance) and when he got done and greeting some people (like most people do) about 90% of the room followed him into the hall. I don't see this with other speakers. I originally interviewed Jordan back in 2014 when things were going great (he had his podcast and was also on Satelite radio) fast forward to 2018, and Jordan was removed from a podcast he co-founded. What impressed me the most when I met Jordan in San Diego was his attitude. He was looking at the bright side. Instead of "why did this happen to me?" he had a "What does this all me to do differently that I couldn't do before" attitude. He is a guy that puts in the work, and when the rug was pulled out from under him, it was his network of friends that he had built for 11 years that have come to help the world know he is back and better than ever at www.jordanharbinger.com and Advanced Human Dynamics In this episode we learn: 6:38 What happened - a deeper explanation. 8:55 An example of how his old brand was holding him back 11:08 How his new events will differ from the past 12:16 Who his target audience is for the events 14:24How he handles tough questions from his audience 16:35 Why its worth "Doing the work." 19:45 How he finds the time to do all his research. 22:08 How did he find out he was fired? 24:16 How his wife and listeners helped him cope with the situation. 25:25 What's the difference between the "old" and "new" Jordan Harbinger? 26:45 How do you balancing work/life/wife? 28:33 How do you avoid this scenario in the future for new podcasters? 35:10 Do you consider your podcast topic broad or niche? 36:35 How do I attend your event? For more information about Jordan check out www.jordanharbinger.com and Advanced Human Dynamics or email Jordan at jodran@jordanharbinger.com Check out his show in Apple Podcasts or on Castbox on Android (other options available at his website) Grading Your Own Interview 37:58 As my background is in training (20 years as a corporate trainer). Here is an exercise you can do to grade your interview. Go back and write down all the questions you asked (see above). Then look for: Yes/No Questions (and see if there is a way to ask them in a more open format that would lead to a story). Are these the...
Feedback From Previous Show Randal Black is an educator and heard our episode where we revealed some things that didn't go quite right. Randall has a saying that he learned from a Fortune Cookie, "Failure is feedback, and feedback is the breakfast of champions."Check out Randall at www.randallblack.com Sponsor: Podcasts Guests A great way to grow your audience is to be interviewed on other podcasts (as they have podcast listeners). Many podcasters love to boost their network by doing an interview show, but maybe you're having a hard time finding guests. PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its more than 4,000 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements Podcastsguests.com helps you be featured on other shows and helps you find guests for your show. Sign up at PodcastGuests.com/sop Podcast SEO with Transcripts Many people feel that if they put a transcript of your show as your blog you have found the easy way to create "show notes." This is often spurred on by a John Mueller (John Mueller - Senior Webmaster Trends Analyst - Google ) stating, "So having some kind of textual information on that page helps us as well, so that we can actually rank that page appropriately. Then when someone brought up transcripts he said, "If you have a transcription of the podcast, that’s even better, because then all of that information is available for us to actually index." Source. An article on Seach Engine People's website stated that "After transcribing all their audio content, the radio show This American Life (TAL) found that 6.68% of search traffic is attributable to transcripts" So who do they do this? Each transcript is published on a separate web page that is linked to the main episode page (see example). Read full report Two more studies found that pages that added transcripts earned on average 16% more revenue than those without; meanwhile, Youtube videos that added captions gained 7.32% more views overall. If transcripts are hard to read, then this can increase your bounce rate. A bounce rate is when someone comes to one page on your site and then leaves. Google can see this and (it was thought) to hurt your Google Rankings. However, in an article from Search Engine Journal from Gillam Hunter, it stated, "Don’t worry, despite the “professional opinion” of many SEO cowboys, bounce rate isn’t part of Google’s algorithm.No, having a low bounce rate won’t give you “ranking benefits.” In that same article, it stats that one way to boost your rankings is through better copywriting. So the question is a transcript better copywriting? I guess it depends on your current copy. For me, we don't write like we talk and we don't talk like we write so when I start to read a word for word transcription my mind gets stressed and I leave. What do you do in that situation? I've love to hear 888-563-3228 If you want to have transcriptions on your site, but somewhat put that "backstage" there is a cool plugin called Simple Podcast Press that allows you to copy and paste your transcripts and yet have then only appear when a website visitors clicks on them. He refers to them as Clutter-Free Transcripts, and if I was going to implement the transcripts, I would probably use this plugin. I already use it on my Ask the Podcast Coach website Transcriptions Tools Rev.com If you don't mind paying $1/monute rev.com has great quality (a human is doing the transcription service) Temi.com Temi is $6 an hour (or 10 cents a minute) and for a robot, not half bad. I've used it, and if you have the time to proof it a bit it's cool. I liked that you can enter the name of the speakers, and export as a word doc. You can also listen back at faster speeds. Reportex.io Reportext.io is an interesting twist. They sync the transcript and the audio. When you delete the word out the...
Becuase of My Podcast Twin Spin with Aaron Peterson 1:04 Aaron does a number of podcast including the Blacklist Exposed, Remake the Movie Right, Smirk, and the Hollywood Outsider Becuase of his podcast(s) Aaron was asked to Officiate the wedding of two listeners who met through the Hollywood Outsider podcast. 3:45 Aaron and his co-host Troy Heinritz (from the Black List Exposed) were one of six media companies asked to attend the 100th episode of the Black List Exposed. Wavve, Audiogram and Sparemin Reviewed 6:33 There are tools that you can use to make a snippet of your podcast. These tools turn them into a video file to paste on social sites like Twiter, Facebook, and Instagram. This is not the first tool to be based on sharing audio snippets. Clammr was a tool intended for you to be able to easily create a clip and those clips were then easy to share. Clammr lasted about three years (2014-2017). I had a lot of great press, and was mentioned on a regular basis. Now a year later, other companies have come to fill the void. My scenario: I looked at the services for what I would use. I want four episode each with a different design. Click Here to get a free video on how to use these tools Headliner (Sparemin) This is a free tool that allows you to make a video out of audio. In theory it can transcribe your audio. The few times I tried the transcription, it was pretty awful. It does give you the ability to have more than one image, as well as text. You can easily make a copy of a project and edit it to be new. There is an image search tool so you can find images to use in your video. BE SURE to read the terms of service as one of the services is Getty Images (who will take you to court for using their images if you didn't obtain a license. You can't beat the price (free). There are videos along the way to help you through the learning curve. Audiogram I liked that Audiogram actually gives you a live animated preview of your finished file. You didn't have to compile it and think, "Oh wait, I don't like that." You can see it before you turn it into a video. They have a bunch of premade designs. You have much more control over things like titles and positions of animations. You can even load an existing design from a previous movie to save time. Audiogram also shows your social sites (if you want) at the end of the video. These are not clickable. When you are done creating your video. you can download it or email it to your phone for easy sharing on Instagram. For me to do four videos a month would be $19. I can do two videos for free. Wavve Wavve the most set of elaborate tools. You can drag and drop exactly where you want things to appear. You have more fonts, etc. When you are done you can post your video to Facebook and Twitter right from your account (and like the others send the video to your phone for Instagram). Wavve does give the ability to do a few free videos per month (depending on the length). They have some video tutorials to walk you through the system. If you are looking to make super cool looking graphics, this is the tool. For my scenerio, it would cost $18/month BUDGET CHOICE If you're looking for free, Sparemin/Headliner is free. While not as versatilscenarioll give you something to share. Again for my scenario (4 shows a month, each video with a new design), Audiogram is $19 a month, and Wavve is $18 Different Features Audiogram has the ability to save your design choices and use them over and over. Wavve has the ability to post to Facebook and Twitter right from your Wavve account Sparemin has an image search capability (again, check their TOS) You will see that you can turn these into a giant time suck choosing the right font, the right etc. If you have access to something that makes...
Comments? 888-563-3228 My Week On The Road I spent Wednesday with the Cincinnati Podcasters meetup which was a great time of sharing information about what is and isn't working in podcasting. If you are in the Cincinnati area, you should make the trip. From there I went to Nashville for the first ever Podfecta event which was organized by my friend David Hooper. This event used my favorite format which is one track, one room, so all participants get the same information. It's a great way to build community. Then I went to Craft Content Nashville which was an "unconference" (much like the old days of Podcamps). This had over 50 speakers with TONS of tracks. while not all the sessions I attended were stellar, I did walk away with some great info, and got to network and answer some questions. Both events brought in food which made networking very easy. What is a Valuable Show? Jennifer Briney does the congressional dish podcast and did a presentation and the put up a slide that asked, "What is a Valuable Show?" and for Jennifer, it is "An Impressive display of public Entertainment that is useful or important. So Good They Can't Ignore You I listened to the Book "So Good They Can't Ignore Your (Why Skills Trump Passion in the Quest for Work You Love) and he goes hard against the strategy of "Following your passion and the money will come." It's a very interesting book and I agree with some of it. He talks about to move forward you need to develop skills that are rare and valuable. This leads to more jobs where you start to control more of your destiny. He also points out and gives many different illustrations on how few (if any) people can say exactly what they want to be when they grow up. Most people talk small steps (doing rare and valuable work) which leads to more opportunities that lead to you having more control over your life (when you are rare and valuable, you control and call more of the shots). The Law of Remarkability: The law of an idea remarkability. Your podcast inspires people to remark about it and if it has the ability to be spread in a venue that supports these remarks. He also talks about having a goal of acquiring skills that are rare and valuable. I want to take this idea and use it as criteria for your podcast. Jennifer Brinery read a bill going through Congress that was over 2000 pages. I'm pretty sure it's rare that anybody would read that (the Senators receive a summary that was four pages) and in regards to really getting a good picture of what is going on in Congress, Jennifer provides a ton of value. Podcast Monetization I got to meet in person Jeff Sanders who is the author of the 5 AM Miracle and The Free-Time Formula (Hear my interview with Jeff Here) did a great job of giving some great insights into having advertising on your show (for the 10% that have enough downloads to support CPM models) and Jennifer Briney of Congressional Dish (hear my interview with Jen)provided a stellar presentation on creating a podcast that is 100% listener supported. In both presentations, Jeff and Jennifer pointed out that it took YEARS to build the audience big enough to be able to do this full time. Don't Quit Your Day Job We have seen people who are super successful. Their pitch goes something like this, "I can show you how to make a million dollars and not pay taxes. Step one, give me a million dollars." In his book So Good They Can't Ignore You author Cal Newport tells the story of a young blogger who was "fed up with living the conventional life working nine to five for the man with little or no time and little money to pursue my true passions so I've embarked on a crusade to show you and the rest of the world how an avergae Joe can build a business from scratch to support a life devoted to living the dream. The business he referenced (as is the case with most Lifestyle designers) is his blog about being a...
Comments? 888-563-3228 Today is episode 614 of the School of podcasting and we are talking about the most important question a new podcaster should answer before they start. We also have a cool resource for royalty free music. I also share my thought in podcast sponsor markets. The Three Questions I Ask Every Podcast Client 2:29 Tyler Primavera asked me, "I discovered your SOP and ATPC shows and I really appreciate them! I'm slowly working my way through them, sorry to hear about Bernie the cat. I really want to start a podcast in veterinary school (starting in the fall), but I'm afraid of the time commitment. I really think podcasting is a great idea (I wrote in depth about it here at my blog https://wp.me/p9MJTj-1U), but I'm afraid of the commitment. How do I decide to podcast or not? Thank you for your time, Tyler" 1. Why Do You Want to Podcast? If you can't answer this, then don't spend a dime on any equipment. To this Tyler says Through my podcast, I hope to speak (and live) the message that personal well-being is an absolute must during veterinary school, and that no vet student is ever truly alone. He also says: I want my podcast to improve the lives of veterinary students first, and the veterinary field second. I want to do my little part in tackling the big problem of veterinary mental maladies. 2. How Will You Know if It is Successful? While I realize this can change. By answering this question as a consultant I can steer the podcast in the right direction. I can shape the call to action, etc. I can also see if the topic is in alignment with the goal of the show (cause that is not always the case). 3. What are You Going to Quit Doing to Make Time For Your Podcast? This is my main point of this episode. Unless you have a large budget and are farming this out, your podcast s going take more time than you think. While I normally say use a four to one rule (a one hour podcast will take four hours to create start to finish), that number could easily be five to one when you're new. With this in mind, unless you have a time machine there are still only 24 hours in a day. Most of us do not start a podcast because we are sitting around watching Dr. Phil and being bored. It is typically quite the opposite. In the article Tyler says this, "Right now, I have plenty of time to make a podcast, because I am not in veterinary school. How will I be able to attend school for 40 hours a week, study, workout, maintain a long distance relationship, and do a podcast? I have no idea. But supposedly, if there is a will, there is a way." This is not always true Chances are you are going to be likely giving up something. Will it be: TV Video games Sleep Family time Exercise Work other hobbies If you have no margin in your life, then you are going to have to stop doing something to make time for podcasting. This is not an opinion, it is a fact that there are only 24 hours in a day. The Three Things You Need to Podcast I've mentioned this before. You need your attitude, your health, and support of your family. When you stop sleeping, you health fails which may lead to a bad attitude. If you don't have the support of your family, then that also kills your attitude (and the stress can lead to health issues). If you don't have the right attitude, it may come across the microphone, and overall kill the motivation to put out great content. With this in mind, what are you going to give up to podcast? When I was in my 20's I was on a few bowling leagues. I gave up time watching TV (but I was with my family). When I was in a band, I gave up time with my family to go to practice. Being in a band also made me give up sleep as I often didn't get home until 3 am. Podcasting is no different, so when you are excited to start a podcast you need to look at the amount of margin in your life and see if you have the time to create a podcast, or the budget to farm it out. Where I Will Be This Week 16:03 Cincinnati...
Question of the Month As I record this it is April 1. The first quarter of 2018 is over. What had you planned on doing in that first quarter that didn't, and what are you going to do differently to make it happen in this quarter. You can leave your answer using the options on the contact page Because of My Podcast: I've overcome the fear of failure, perfection, and I'm Growing a Community - Brodie Sharpe Brodie Sharp from Everyday Running Legends interviews everyday average runners to inspire other runners. Becuase of his podcast he has overcome the fear of failure. He read in the book The Success Principles by Jack Canfield and in it, he quotes Oliver Wendell Holmes who said, "Many people die with their music still in them. Too often it is because they are always getting ready to live. Before they know it time runs out." Brodie said his podcast has helped him overcome the fear of perfection. His brother (who is a life coach) said, "All you need to start is produce B minus content. If you strive for A+ it will never be good enough and it will never be done." Also, because of my podcast, I've been able to build a community. Check out Brodie at https://everydayrunninglegends.com/ Before they know it time runs out Today I want to dedicate this effort to my Aunt Shirley Steinmetz. She died of lung Cancer on 4/7/18. What is weird about this is my Dad died on April 5th, 2014. Hist sister Sandra died on April 6th 2016. Then yesterday on April 7th, another sister (Aunt Shirley) joined them. I say this not to bring you down or look for sympathy, but to just remind you that our time here is limited, and our time here is short. Don't die with a great podcast inside of you. Speaking of time running out... I was on Episode 105 of the Dealing with My Grief Podcast with Darwyn Dave talking about Unresolved Grief. Check it out at http://www.dealingwithmygrief.com/podcast/episode-105 You Don't Have to Worry About These Things in Your Podcast I might sound bad. Podcasting is not live. You only release it when you're done with it. I'm afraid of technology. You said that about the fax machine and the VCR, and your smartphone. If you've ever attached a picture to Facebook or email, then you can upload a file to Libsyn.com (using coupon code sopfree). If you ever pressed record on a VCR then you can press record on Audacity. If you've ever lowered the radio in the car so you can talk on the phone, then you know how to mix volume levels. I'm afraid of buying the wrong equipment. - Join the School of podcasting or set up a consulting call. I'm worried nobody will listen. I recently interviewed JJ virgin who is a hall of fame fitness trainer and nutritionist. In her book The Miracle Mindset, she explains her insecurities. Yet she has been on Dr. Phil, Dr. Oz. Rachel Ray, the Doctors and been a New York Times bestselling author feels the same way. As a tech support person at Libsyn.com, I often get people who send in a support ticket because their podcast is having a surge in downloads, and they can't believe it when people actually do listen. I Don't Have Two Thousand Dollars to Spend on Equipment - Most people can launch a podcast for around $300, and then a monthly fee of around $30. Please don't spend two thousand dollars on equipment. I'm Afraid Of Negative Reviews - Most podcasters don't get a lot of bad reviews. You will get them eventually, but many podcasters don't feel you are a real podcaster until you get your first one-star review in Apple Podcasts. You can't please everyone, and people who do make very bland content. Monica Rivera Helps Give You The Nudge You Need Monica River is the host of the You Wanna Do What? Podcast. I've met her at two events, and started listening to her show. Like we've heard over and over on this show, when someone finds a show they like they often download the entire back catalog and that is exactly what I did. the further back into her catalog I got I...
Comments? 888-563-3228 Question of the Month As I record this it is April 1. The first quarter of 2018 is over. What had you planned on doing in that first quarter that didn't, and what are you going to do differently to make it happen in this quarter. You can leave your answer using the options on the contact page I need your answer by April 26th. Defining Ego: The Good Side of Ego The Freudian definition of “ego” is simply, according to Wiktionary, “the most central part of the mind, which mediates with one’s surroundings.” So many people think that if you have an Ego, you're a narcissist. If you have an ego than you are conceited. You think you are better than others. Ego literally means a person’s sense of self-esteem or self-worth. Doing anything new, like starting a podcast, or going against the norm, is directly proportional to how confident you are of yourselves and your abilities. As long as you are in control of your ego, it will work for you. But as soon as your ego starts controlling you, it will hurt you. When ego controls you, it can make the truth look false and the false look true. How To Identify Negative Sides of Your Ego When you are overwhelmed by your ego, you will say words you will regret, take actions you will repent later on, and hurt the people you love most. Your inflated ego can also make people lose trust and respect for you There is a quote by Deepak Chopra to sum it up – “If you want to reach a state of bliss, then go beyond your ego and the internal dialogue. Make a decision to relinquish the need to control, the need to be approved, and the need to judge. Those are the three things the ego is doing all the time. It’s very important to be aware of them every time they come up.” If you find yourself defending yourself, this may be due to a couple of reasons. You may actually be right (and you're trying to educate someone about your point of view) or your wrong and you are defending yourself as you are afraid of the ramifications if it is found out you are wrong. There is the old saying, you can be right or you can be married. I found this to be true. My ex-wife (note the ex) here are and I would battle for days because one wouldn't drop it, and the other wouldn't admit when they were wrong. The opposite of defensiveness is openness, and that means being open to new ideas. When you're not willing to even ponder another point of view, you may want to check yourself. If you do a solo show, you may want to take all of the adulations but that's just not true. Case in point, I record, edit, and post this show. I am the producer, host, editor, web designer, graphic designer. I do this show by myself. That appears true (it is), but I get feedback in the form of emails, speakpipe messages, Facebook likes, etc that help me steer this podcast in a direction that allows it to connect DEEPER with the people who find it. Thanks to my audience who when they hear someone talking podcasting say, "You need to listen to the School of Podcasting, " or "You need to join the School of Podcasting." I would be a fool to say the success of this show is 100% because of me. What Can Happen When You Put Your Ego Aside This episode was inspired by my going to a Michael Schenker concert. Who is Michael Shenker? Well, unless you are a guitar player of 30 you've probably never heard the name. To give you something to frame this in you probably have heard of Metallica (one of the most popular Heavy Metal bands of all time) their guitar player went 100% "Fanboy" upon meeting him and pulled strings (no pun intended) to play with him (see video). Michael is touring under the name Michael Schenker Fest. Why? Because he is touring with four different singers. To all of you nonmusicians, there is a disease in music called LSD. It stands for Lead Singers Disease. As I look back at my 30 years of playing in (I started when I was 15) I can say the best singers...
Comments? 888-563-3228 Today we talk about file formats. We also talk about getting good skype recordings. Becuase Of My Podcast: Jim Harold 1:15 Jim Harold has been on one of the top syndicated radio shows (Coast to Coast AM) in America 8 times. This show is syndicated to over 600 radio stations. Check out Jim's shows at www.jimarold.com he's THE GUY for paranormal podcasting (listen with the lights on) check out his podcasts and books at www.jimharlold.com Understanding Audio Formats What is stereo? What is Mono. What is kbps mean? What bitrate should I use? Here are some things to know To figure out how much space you need, you need to know: 1. How often you will publish 2. How long your shows will be 3. What format The formats have some general numbers you can use. For example: If you publish at 128 kbps stereo, your file will take up (roughly) 1M minute If you publish at 64 kbps mono, your file will take up (roughly) .5 M a minute (and sound the "same" but won't have stereo separation). So if you do a weekly show that is 30 minutes long that is 30 minutes multiplied by four weeks. So monthly you create 120 minutes of content. At 128 kbps Stereo, you would need 120 Megabytes per month. If you went 64 kbps mono you would need 64 megabytes per month (roughly on all of these estimates). In today's show, we listen to files encoded both ways as well as mp3 files encoded using the LAME encoder and the Fraunhofer and see if there truly is a difference? Need a Media Host? Check out Libsyn.com and get a free month using the coupon code sopfree Don't Buy a Bette Skype Recorder - Upgrade Your Internet Thanks to Tory from www.theblacklistexposed.com and www.packersfanpodcast.com Skype Requirements Your processor (on a PC) needs to be at least 1 Ghz with 512 MB (so double both of those at least) See More Your process on a Mac needs to be at least 1 Ghz (core 2 duo) and at least 1 GB of Ram How much Bandwidth does Skype need? I currently use Spectrum and I have 162 Mbps down, and 23.78 Mbps Up. I rarely have a serious skype issue. It' is typically myself and one other person, but I have been on chats with five people and no issues. What About Squadcast.fm, Zencastr.com, and all the other options? While it's true these devices record local, so if there is a weird audio glitch, in theory, they don't record the glitch. Something Zencastr states you need at least 1.5 Down, but recommend 5 mbps see more For the record, I've use Zencasr and Squadcast and never had an issue with either. I've also used Ringr which is a cool app for your phone Free Tips For Making Your Guests Sound Good On Skype This comes from Kim from www.toastmasters101.net who explains if someone is going to use their built-in microphone on a laptop, she will have them download skype to their phone and use it over wi-fi. I like this idea, and here is a twist to make it easier. All it takes to create a free Skype account is an email address. You can create a free Gmail account, sign up at skype.com and make a second account. You provide the login and password to your guest, now they don't have to create a skype account. You don't have to ask for their skype ID (as it's yours). Afte the conversation have your guest I Need to Move if I Want Free TV I tried using a digital over the air antenna to receive free channels. I've tried three different versions of these. Most of them you sparking pictures of TV stations that are involved with shopping and/or Jesus. Couldn't I get NBC? Why because I live in Akron (about 50-60 miles from the nearest NBC signal). So any solution that starts with, "get an HDTV Antanea isn't going to work because of where I live. So Skype may not work for you because you Internet blows. Swapping to a new system (much like switch antennas for me) didn't help. Michael Delaney from Baby Mountain Radio (Care Giving for Dementia) let me know about Silicon Dust about the HD Home Run ($66) but it requires...
Got Comments? 888-563-3228 Today we have insights from Diana McCallum from the Talk From Super Heroes show, Lou Mongello from WDW Radio and Gordo from Those Conspiracy Guys on how they are designing T-Shirts that actually sell. Neil then shares some insights into what he's doing to create a show that allows him to do podcasting full time, and how insights into his Patreon Account. Jim Harold from the Paranormal Podcast has a "Just a Podcaster" T-shirt on Amazon Marc from the Resourceful Designer podcast has quite a few cool shirts for sale on Amazon I created a store and a t-shirt in about 10 minutes at https://www.teepublic.com/stores/podcast-clothes You can hire a designer at the site SPONSOR: Podcast Movement Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way – Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more – The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show. – The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out It's July 23 – 26th in Philadelphia PA. Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com and get $50 off any level of registration Access and Exclusivity: The Power of Patreon Neil Rochford explains how he is working with his audience using Patreon to go deeper with his Super Fans. This includes: Live video chats Extra content Early content Behind the scenes "What is happening in my life" content. Patreon has the ability to have an RSS feed for each person (so if they leave they lose access) Butt Stuff Neil is working on a trip to the US via a Crowdfunding Goal He wants to come to the US to interview the people instead of using Google. The goal is to film the trip and turn the trip into a dozen documentary type segments See https://www.gofundme.com/tcgtv Where I'm Heading I'll be at Podfecta in Nashville on April 20th Nashville Craft Content Event on April 21st Ready To Start Podcasting? Work with me, I have multiple options to support many budgets
Got a Comment? Call it in 888-563-3228 Social Media Marketing World Reflections Looking back on social media marketing world, I wanted to share my thoughts as this was the first time I was there and there are some things we can learn from this mammoth event. The first impression was WOA. I walked in and got my badge and as they started to hand me a swag bag (you know the thing you throw on your bed, leaf through once and then ditch) and they asked what gift I would like. One was a cool cable organizer, and the other was a battery backup pack to charge my phone or tablet. This wasn't a cheap bottom of the food chain device. For me, this was awesome as I was going to buy one at Best Buy before leaving and ran out of time. To me, this shows they know their audience. Either gift was valuable. Becuase Of My Podcast Becuase of my podcast, I know Paul Colligan, and Paul Colligan knows JJ Virgin who is now coming on my weight loss show (and I got to sample some cool stuff) SPONSOR: Podcast Movement Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way – Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more – The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show. – The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out It's July 23 – 26th in Philadelphia PA. Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com and get $50 off any level of registration Look at All The Icing At first glance, one might say that the major draw of SMMW is icing. For example, the opening night you have a networking event on an aircraft carrier. This is not something I had ever done. It made the event unique. Now, you might say, but in the end, you still have a bunch of people talking, drinking, and networking. I see that point of view, but every corner had a sense of adventure. I toured the top of the ship with Ray Ortega and Lou Mongello. If this had been in a restaurant back room, I was still hanging out with Ray and Lou. If I was doing this at another conference, it would be an event. I great event, but throw in that we are talking to a veteran about planes and now this is not only an event - it's an experience. It is a stronger memory than hanging out in the hotel bar. The second networking event was at a club that had a live band playing Karaoke. It was very loud, but I was walking in with somewhat of a "What am I walking into? experience." I was with Ray so we ventured further into the club and found ourselves on what looked like an outdoor patio except we were inside. This again brought on kind of a "What is this place?" feeling. We then walked through a hallway of white Chrismas lights into a room with booths lit up with neon green. We picked up some awesome cake in a cup and enjoyed our sugar rush. We walked over to one station where they were making some sort of dessert that was part ice cream cone meets cinnamon roll, meets strawberries and chocolate, meets, WHAT THE HECK IS THAT THING. You could even walk into the giant vault. Did we need an exotic building? No, but did it add to the experience? Sure, as now Ray and I felt like we were in a live dungeons and dragons game waiting to see what the next room would bring. Their networking room was categorized by subject. There were three tables for podcasters, more tables for YouTubers, etc. It made it very easy to meet your tribe, and then introduce yourself to a new one. The one that was really above an beyond, I was in the speaker's room (a lovely quiet place to go with...
This is our first Podcast, and Dave explains a little about what to expect from the Official Podcast of the School of Podcasting the "Morning Announcements."
We are joined by Glenn "The Geek" Hebert from the Horse Radio Network. Glenn has appeared on the show many times and always brings gold. Today he is sharing insights into choosing and working with co-hosts. He also talks about a new podcast he is working on and how he is getting to do TONS of free adventures for free - because of his podcast. Because of His Podcast - He Went on a Cruise Glenn was able to get enough of his audience to join him on a cruise. He thought it would be hard with everyone trying to talk to him, but they had a great time networking together. He used one of his guests to help others who had never gone on a cruise (and she got a free ticket). In addition to that free ticket, Glenn had two additional free tickets. Glenn shares some tips on having a cruise with your audience. 5:00 Glenn also was also asked to do a presentation for media people They Never Asked About His Downloads and He Got Free Hotels and Passes 7:50 Gleen is doing a new show called Finding Florida 9:30 They asked for press passes and got a whole lot more. Tourist bureaus are arranging everything - he just needs to show up They use a Tascam DR-40 to record and use an app on their Android phone called hi-q recorder for his android phone Choosing and Working With Co-Hosts 15:30 Glenn had a co-host leave for a better job 17:45 You have to like each other Get someone better than you 23:40 Prepare, Prepare, Prepare But don't prepare too much 26:25 Compromise is not a dirty word 27:00 Don't be afraid to try new things 28:30 If you're not excited to work with them, it's time for them to go. The Wake-Up Test... 31:30 Glenn's most targeted audience is also his most profitable Why You Shouldn't Always Put a Ton of Emphasis on Stats Danica Patrick did not finish (wreck?) in 16% of her races She was in 191 races and won 0 She only lead any of her races .12 percent of the time Best finish was 24th in 2016 Monster Energy NASCAR Cup Series She has a strong fan base and has been voted the IndyCar Series Most Popular Driver from 2005 to 2010, and the NASCAR Nationwide Series Most Popular Driver in 2012 Patrick was voted the Favorite Female Athlete at the Kids Choice Award in 2008, 2012 and 2013. One more thing.... #3 Top earning female athletes in 2017 coming in at 9.2 million Mentioned in This Show Harry Durran Podcast Junkies Michael O’Neal's Solopreneur hour Natalie Jennings Photography Social Media Marketing World John Lee Dumas - eofire.com Kare Erickson Finding Florida Horse Radio Network
Got comments? Call them in at 888-563-3228 The School of Podcasting is Now Available as an Amazon Skill Just ask Alexa "Enable School of Podcasting." I got this through Libsyn.com (use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month). To hear what you need to do to get your own Amazon Skill listen to this episode of the feed (go to this post - it starts at the 48:00 mark) My Opinion On The New Anchor.fm Yes they are adding more features Yes, they still make it way too easy to add your show to Apple under their login and password (BOO+++!!!) Their business model is not a business model. It's free 100% unlimited hosting. There is a name for companies that use that business model: CLOSED - stay away using this for your "main" podcast. See my full insights into this Is This Adulting? My Interview with Chris and Steven I love that this show is unlike any other show. they combine discussion on mental illness with comedy. I love that they put some time and effort into the show and both come to the microphones with ideas (and not just "turn on the microphone and wing it). Today we talk about: Their struggles with mental illness and why they started a podcast to debunk the stigma's What goes into an episode - combining mental illness and comedy Why they call their listener base is "Best Friends" Who is Karen? How starting a podcast has affected their life How the podcast has affected their listener's lives. How their podcast enables them to see their progress Their podcast is saving lives How being vulnerable is powerful to the audience What are the biggest stigmas? Have they ever gone too far? Why Steve walked away from his job to do the podcast Who they use for merch (teepublic.com) Advice for new podcasters Dealing with Haters SPONSOR: Podcast Movement Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way – Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more – The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show. – The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out It's July 23 – 26th in Philadelphia PA. Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com and get $50 off any level of registration
Do you have comments on this episode? Call them in and we will play them on the show (unless you specify not to). Call 888-563-3228 (courtesy of podcastvoicemail.com ) Great Content To Consume Capturing the ears and hearts of hundreds of thousands of monthly podcast listeners doesn't happen overnight. But once you know Danny Peña's story, you'll understand it was inevitable. Sunday, 2/25 is going to be an important day for the Gamertag Team. Gamertag Radio turns 13 years old AND Twitch is going to feature my first film on the front page for the world premiere. The first event of its kind on Twitch's front page. Watch it live and help them make history. http://twitch.tv/gamertagradio If you listened to the podcast Startup, the first season was all About Alex Blumberg and quest to start a podcast company. That has now been made into a TV show on ABC called, "Alex Inc. It stars Zach Braff who you might know from the scrubs TV show. He is also the executive producer. WEDNESDAY, MARCH 28th at 8:30|7:30c on ABC! Set you DVRs as hopefully, this will get more people asking, "What is this thing called podcasting?" Podcasting Is Grooming People For the Big Time In a recent article on mediapost, it stated that "Oxygen sourced Missing Maura Murray, the true crime podcast, for a six-episode television series, which featured the podcast’s hosts. In Britain, No Such Thing As A Fish, a fun talk-show podcast, was made into a BBC Television show. Lore, the podcast that explores frightening history folklore, became an Amazon original series, and Gimlet media’s Homecoming is also being developed into an Amazon TV show for Amazon. This trend isn’t just exclusive to television, says the report. Blink Publishing in the UK turned Untold: The Daniel Morgan Murder podcast into a book. Los Angeles talent management agencies are getting involved in podcasting, and are helping podcasters break into TV and publishing, says the report." I've already reported on Emily Prokop wh does the story behind podcast getting a book deal. Quick Lesson on Apple Earbuds I had an audio technica plugged into a Zoom H1 using a special cable and it sounded fine. To make a long story short, I ran it through auphonic.com which always seems to fix everything, but it still sounded bad. The issue? I was plugging my Apple earbuds into the laptop and Apple earbuds should not cause an issue, but either the laptop didn't like the earbuds or vice versa, but in my ears the audio was unreleasable. It turns out it was fine. The bottom line is you need to use the right tool for the job and monitor through a "regular" set of headphones. Squadcast.fm - Recording Great Sounding Interviews This is a tool that records you and your guest (up to three people total) and gives you a recording of each person that you can then stitch together in your software (which makes it easy to mute the dog barking on one track). It's $20/month for unlimited recording (it's BETA - brand new so use at your own risk). The interface is super simple, and it records in WAV Format (Sample rage 48 khz 32 bt). When someone joins your call they are prompted to pick their microphone to connect the service to the microphone they have plugged in, and then connect the system to their headphones. It's super simple. They have a calendar that you can choose to pick a time (although I was bummed I couldn't manually pick a time like 10:45, I only had 10:00 or 10:30). At first, I had a hard time to getting back into a previous session, but when you first login it prompts you to start a new session, and you can choose to go back to an older session from that screen (and then get access to the previous session) Squadcast can dominate this area by doing one very simple thing: JUST WORK. Tools like tryca.st and zencastr.com have had some issues over time. Podcasters are not very forgiving, so all you have to do is make a system that we...
So this week I spent some time this week at the Podfest Multimedia expo in Orlando Florida. This was a fantastic event. Today we hear: A Podcast One Year After Launch Carol from speakingyourbrand.com explains what life has been like after starting her podcast at last years Podfest 2017. The first 6-12 months are really tough due to lack of feedback. While the podcast numbers are growing slowly, the engagement in her community is going up Because of my Podcast: Kyle from Merchants of Dirt and Gagglepod explained how he landed as a speaker at Podfest. Rent Before Your Buy Podcast Microphones Dave interviews Stephen Arruda from MicRentals.com This is an interesting service that could be used to help you test a microphone for less than $100 and avoid making a $300-$500 mistake. Sponsor: Podcast Movement 50% of what you paid to rent the mic will be used if you decide to buy one. Use the coupon code rent15 to save on your rental Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way – Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more – The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show. – The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out It's Jule 23 – 26th in Philadelphia PA. Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com and get $50 off any level of registration Mentioned In This Episode Podcasters Survivor Guide
Welcome to episode 604 of the School of Podcasting Listen here Update on the PreSonus StudioLive AR12 USB Mixer The last episode I explained how I had purchased at PreSonus StudioLive AR12 USB Mixer. It's not cheap ($499) but there is an AR8 that is $150 ($350) less. The problem I had was when I record to the built-in SD card, there was a very faint (but noticeable) high pitch whine. In working with tech support that has been resolved and after updating the driver, it seems to have quit freezing up the audio on my computer. All in all, I'm happy with it. This is partially due to me having a DBX 286 which adds extra gain. I am using an Electrovice RE320, and it just seemed odd that I needed to really turn every (almost) all the way up to get things to peak. The fact that these units have built-in SD records can save you from buying a Zoom H1 (or any portable recorder) to get the recording off the computer. The Zoom H1 is typically around $100. Look for the price of the Zoom H1 to go down (more on that later) as they just announced a new Zoom H1n which will be available soon (that unit is geared a bit more towards musicians) Sponsor: Podcast Movement I am so looking forward to Podcast Movement. This is the largest Podcast Event that is solely geared toward podcasting. Being face to face with people is the best way to grow your network, and take advantage of all the opportunities. Starting a podcast is a great way to build your network, and coming to an event is like building your network on steroids. I got to talk to Marc Maron a couple of years ago. He just showed up to one of the networking parties, and I said hello and started talking. I can't do that sitting in my chair in my office. - Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way - Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more - The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show. - The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out It's Jule 23 - 26th in Philadelphia PA. Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com and get $50 off any level of registration Getting Productive With Jess Sanders I've been listening to The 5 AM Miracle by Jeff Sanders and I'm already taking steps to get more things done. Jeff is been nominated five times for a podcast award and comes highly recommended by some friends. I started listening to his podcast and soon bought his book the 5 AM Miracle on Audible (also available on Amazon) How long did it take him to get his sponsor The difference between his blog audience vs his podcast audience What goes into making an episode How does he pick his subjects Does he make more money selling his own products or sponsorship? Jeff shares how his podcast brought him a book publisher - TWICE Does Jeff have any radio experience? How Jeff inspired his mail carrier who is now a giant fan of his show Why he decided to kill his first podcast What got him hooked on his subject Does he really get up at 5 AM? Jeff's Tips on Getting Focused A simple tip for starting your day in the right direction What is the difference between his first book the 5 AM Miracle and his new Book The Free Time Formula How does he achieve work/life balance? What if you don't have time to write all this stuff down? How do you make yourself go to bed? Jeff has been using wavve to share his podcast, but that's not the thing that's been delivering more listeners How did he approach popular websites to get his show mentioned?...
Last week we talk about media hosts, this week we are talking about your Web Host, and what to do if you hate yours. Sponsor: Podcast Movement I am so looking forward to Podcast Movement. This is the largest Podcast Event that is solely geared toward podcasting. Being face to face with people is the best way to grow your network, and take advantage of all the opportunities. Starting a podcast is a great way to build your network, and coming to an event is like building your network on steroids. I got to talk to Marc Maron a couple of years ago. He just showed up to one of the networking parties, and I said hello and started talking. I can't do that sitting in my chair in my office. - Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way - Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more - The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show. - The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out It's Jule 23 - 26th in Philadelphia PA. Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com Do You Need a Podcast Website? After all, can't I just use a media host and a Facebook page? To this I say, would you buy a car from a person selling them out of a tent? If you ever plan on telling people where to find something, you NEED a website. Case in point, if you do a real estate podcast and say "Find me in Apple Podcasts" you have a very good chance of not being found. Not because the search tools bad (it could be improved) but because there are so many real estate shows. The same goes for Entrepreneur shows. The solution is instead of saying "Find me in (whatever) app" is to say go to mywebsite.com/subscribe and I've got a tutorial that will walk you through the process. You Can Get A Website For Free Of the media hosts I recommend (Libsyn.com, Blubrry.com, Podbean.com) they all have a basic website that comes with your plan. How basic is basic? You can listen and have people subscribe to your show. If you're looking to add products, newsletters, scripts to see what they click on, etc, then you need your own website. You can do some of that with their basic site. For example, while you can't put a MailChimp sign up form on a site that doesn't' allows javascript, you can use the link they provide to link to your sign up form that mailchimp provides. With this in mind, there are ways to work around some of the things that are out of bounds. What Do You Need On Your Podcast Website? A Play button. An About page A Contact page A subscribe page A Play Button You need a play button because asking someone to subscribe to a show they've never heard is like asking someone to pay for a sandwich they've never eaten. Your play button is like the person at the mall who gives out samples of chicken at the food court. They give you a sample and hope your purchase. With podcasts, you make it easy to play and hope they subscribe. One other note, there are still some people who do not have smartphones. An About Page Your About page should explain how your audience is going to benefit from listening to your show. Think of your target listener looking at your listing. What are you going to say to convince them? I recently look at my description of the School of Podcasting and it needs work. In the first sentence, I mention that I've been podcasting since 2005. I often introduce myself that way is it speaks to my experience, but I'm not sure that is the first thing to lead with. In general, most people don't' care...
If you're using OLDER equipment (ipods, Apple iTunes DESKTOP) you may want to check your settings. I'm working on some things with my feed, and if you have it set to "Download all" it may re-download episodes. I'm looking into this, and I'll explain more on Monday.
As a podcast consultant, I like to try all sorts of technology to stay informed with what is going in the space. Today I'm going to talk about things to keep in mind when you move, how to move, and why or why not you should move. I also have a resource if you're moving your entire website without learning any code. First the disclosure. I was a customer of Libsyn.com for 10 years before becoming an employee almost two years ago. So when I talk about Libsyn competition, I do my best to keep my Libsyn employee hat off, and keep the Dave Jackson School of Podcasting hat on. I also have taken extra effort to base my comments on what happens. Now what I think should happen. I will be sure to tell you when something is an opinion and when something is a fact (as I know it). Here are my Updated Criteria for Podcast Media Hosting Don't mess with my file name Don't mess with my file format (bit rate, ID3 tags) Give me the ability to have an unlimited back catalog (unlimited storage) Don't limit my audience size (unlimited bandwidth) Don't control my feed, and make it easy to leave if I choose to do so. I need to be able to put in a 301 redirect. Give me support. Preferably within 24 hours. Charge me for your service so you can stay in business Give me stats so I can see what's working. It would be nice if they were accurate. Support the iTunes Serial, Episodic, Season, and Episode Numbers Be IAB Compliant (please note as of 1/2017 certification is not in place, when it is, I want me Podcast Media Host Certified) Some media hosts offer to inject your mp3 file with an advertisement and in those instances, they get a pass on this criteria. So if I look at the following media hosts Amazon S3 Buzzsprout.com Podomatic.com Libsyn.com Blubrry.com Podbean.com Spreaker.com Soundcloud.com Simplecast.com Podmio.com Pinecast.com Whooska.com Here are the ones who made the cut Libsyn.com Blubrry.com Podbean.com Use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month at any of these services. Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/602
Because Of My Podcast - I Got To Hang With Rock Royalty Paul Colligan has a client who invited him to comes to a charity event run by Alic Cooper where he got to meet Ace Frehley (Kiss) Slash (Guns and Rose) Edgar Winter, Rob Halford (Judas Priest), Alice Cooper and his wife Cheryl (WHO COOL IS THAT???!!!) Find Paul at paulcolligan.com and check out The Podcast Report podcast. BONUS We previously reported how Emily form the Story Behind Podcast got a book offer, we can now say she has a book DEAL (the offer was approved). Check out Emily at www.thestorybehindpodcast.com SPONSOR: Are you going to Podcast Movement? Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way - Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 24 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more - The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show. - The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out Use the code sop when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com Find a Guest - Be a Guest at Podcastguests.com I signed up at podcastsguests.com and I've already been asked to be a guest on a podcast after signing up as an expert. Today we talk with Andrew Alleman the creator of Podcastguests.com I love this story as Andrew started it using free services, and has grown with a lot of blood, sweat, and money to build up the email list. Sign up for free and get a list of potential guests who are available to be on your show Sign up as an expert and be featured in their email list that goes out to thousands of people (currently only $29) Some people are getting 20-30 responses to your call for guests (depending on how niche your show is) The beauty of this story is Andrew did wait until he had everything in place. He started it an improved it over time based on user feedback. Your podcasts can do the same. Within two years Andrew now has 3000 people on his email list. Andrew's wife (Stacey Higginbotham) also has a very popular podcast Internet of Things Podcast and Andrew handles the sponsorships for that show. Andrew explains how the typical podcaster should avoid using the CPM (price per thousands downloads) model as their pricing model as it doesn't work for the average podcast. Andrew also do a show about the domain world at DomainNameWire.com How Being a Guest Can Help Your Show One of the things we need as podcast producers is more podcast listeners. When you appear on a podcast you are in front of people who already know how to listen to a podcast. Most podcast listeners say they hear about other podcasts on other shows. Go listen to the show you're going to be on. This way you can have a better understanding of their audience. Make sure your bio is up to date and provide a headshot for them to use and your podcast artwork. Always confirm the day of the interview the data, time etc of the interview When you are a guest, be a good guest and help promote the show you appeared on. How Using Guests Can Help Your Show When you have guests that appear on your show (that bring value) you get insights and experiences that you may not have. They have stories to share, and strategies to help your audience. While many people feel a guest will tell their audience to listen. That is not always the case (so don't count on it), but as a podcaster you need to make sure the guest has everything they need to share your show (give them a pre-written tweet with an image, give them the link, make it a no-brainer to share). Make sure to take...
Every 100 episodes, I break my format. Today I completely broke it and decided to try something I've heard others do and that is an "Ask Me Anything" episode. It was hard as people sent in some questions that were very hard. If you're a new listener looking for podcast help - this is not the episode for you, please go listen to any of the other episodes (Except episode 400, and 500). Here are the questions: 00:38 A Quick Look Back 2:06 Binky and the Whiz 03:10 Craig from Ingles podcast and Kim From http://activetraveladventures.com/ want to know where I would travel too if money was not an issue. 06:16 Zack from Rasing Rents (pa Rents that is) want to know if I have Any Regrets in Life? 8:38 How Do I Win At Slot Machines? - Easy go to www.professorslots.com (I told Jon to Send this in so I could Plug his show). 09:21 Bobby from Live Nude Puppets wants to know if I believe in Bigfoot, If I have a Favorite Old Testament Character and my thoughts on a handmade guitar pick 13:25 Worst and First Concerts I've attended from Jason Bryant from Mat Talk Online (college wrestling shows) 17:56 Lee From the Covert Nerd Podcast wants to know what video games I played back in the day 20:31 Chris Hache (Noshing Nova Scotians) if I could put a billboard anywhere in the world, where would you put it, and what would it say? 22:14 Dave Got Shot at, at Point Blank Rank and Lived. Scott From the Computer Tutor Show (great computer tips) and Ron want the details. 31:04 Johnathon from Weekly Awesome wants to know if my childhood fueled a passion for podcasting? 34:32 Brad from the Cinema Guys wants to know my top three movies and bottom three? 37:47 Marc from the Talk Star Wars Toybox Daily Show wants to know if I have any Star Wars collectibles? 38:55 Win from Butterflies of Wisdom wants to know the Origins of Bernie the Cat and How I ended up with him? 42:48 Binky wants to know what its like to whack your cat. 43:47 The Ghost of Bernie 44:05 Darren from www.donkeytells.com wants to know about my Favorite High School Moment. Where I Will Be Pofest Multimedia Expo Feb 8-1 Social Media Marketing World Feb 28- March 2 Ready To Start Your Podcast I can help you with One on One Coaching, or you can join the School of Podcasting Subscribe to the School of Podcasting on iTunes
Every year I read/listen to the book Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World. For me, this is the same as a football go saying, We need to get back to the basics. It reminds me of what my goals are as a content creator. In the book, Michael talks about making good content isn't really good enough anymore if you really want to get noticed. You need to make content that makes people go WOW. Then this response is followed by them telling a friend. Two Podcasts Episodes That Made Me Go WOW! Episode 100 of the Story Behind Podcast - Emily Create this Episode as a Musical. I had numerous people ask me if I had heard it. This episode too more than four days to assemble. Carey Green on episode 81 of Podcastification did an episode comparing Skype, Ringr, Zencastr, Zoom, and Cleenfeed. Carey said that including research, recording, setup, editing, show notes, probably 8 to 12-ish hours, all done in chunks over the course of a month. Carey also runs Podcast Fast Track (audio editing and show notes) Seth Resler who works for Jabs Media did an article on if there is or isn't a discovery problem in podcasting (read it here). While he had to do a little work to take all the answers and put them into an article that was easily read, he also pointed out, "It took years, because the only reason that the podcasting leaders that are quoted in that article responded to me at all is because I've invested years in the podcasting space, not just learning about the craft, but also building relationships at conferences and trade shows, and establishing my own credibility by writing, speaking, and hosting webinars about podcasting. This Doesn't Mean Your Next Episode Should Take 14 hours Please dont read this and think, "I need to spend at least 10 hours per episode. That's not my point. My point is that it takes some planning, it takes some strategy, it takes knowing your audience, and it takes some practice to create WOW content. Here are the ingredients to wow content ( Adapted for podcasting from Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World). Surprise. Wow content should exceed expectations. - The Stacking Benjamins has great information but also is pretty funny. Anticipation. Anticipating a wow experience is almost as good as the experience. David Hooper's latest episode of the Red podcast had a huge teaser at the end. Resonance. A wow experience touches the heart. It resonates at a deep level. It might even cause goosebumps or tears. Dictionary.com shows resonate as "to produce a positive feeling, emotional response, or opinion." Transcendence. A wow experience connects you to something transcendent. Michael states, "You experience purpose, meaning, or even God. " Dictionary.com shows, "to rise above or go beyond; overpass; exceed," and "to outdo or exceed in excellence, elevation, extent, degree, etc. ; surpass; excel." Clarity. A wow experience creates a moment when you see things with more clarity than ever before. I've had people tell me I do a really good job of explaining things. Presence. A wow experience has you experiencing the NOW. You are fully present. Universality. A wow experience is experienced by everyone in the same way. Evangelism. A wow experience has to be shared. The minutes the content is done, you're already thinking of the people you need to tell. Longevity. You can experience it time and time again without growing tired of it. Privilege. You're glad to be associated with it. I wanted to add a few things of my own. Scarcity/Uniqueness. You can't get it any place else Bravery. People that have the courage to stand up and tell the truth Intimacy. When someone shares intimate details of their life, this somewhat ties into Michaels surprise, but it makes people uncomfortable. Other Things To Consider With Your Content...
Every year I wind up the year by asking you what your favorite podcast is (if you could only listen to one sh0w) and more importantly why is it your favorite show. Here are the responses: 2:53 Kit from Active Travel Adventures Podcast - She Loves StoryBrand as she learns things she can use in every show 3:36 Adam from Dark Knight Minute loves Digital Dads. He loves the inspiring message. 4:43 Anna Authentic Moments loves The Good Life Project by Jonathan Fields for the in-depth conversations 5:46 Darwyn Dave -Dealing with My Grief podcast enjoys the Grief Dreams as it has similar views on the subject. Dave and Josh have bonded over the subject. 8:21 Ben from Modern Self Protection likes the Survival Podcast with Jack Spirko. He enjoys to tips to help you in your life every day (not just end of the world stuff) 9:42 Abby from A time for Horses loves the Wooden Overcoats podcast because it's really Really Funny 10:47 Brian from Engaging Missions likes The School of Podcasting for the interviews and engaging stories wrap up in a professional production 11:56 Clay from Fishnerds loves the Beyond Data podcast due to the Uber geeky information about Fish 13:14 Daniel Everybody's National Parks loves the Wow in the World podcast as she can listen with the kids 14:28 Paul - Fighting Through Podcast (Great unpublished History) love Dan Carlin's Hardcore History - The Storyteller's Storyteller, Content is just Awesome 18:32 Justin from Optimal Living Daily loves the Feed from Libsyn. They answer his questions and he gets information that is so good he needs to write it down. 19:28 Kim from Toastmasters 101 she loves the Clifton Strengths Coaching Blog Theme Thursdays. They even have notes and worksheets you can print out 21:34 Matt from The Author Inside You Podcast really enjoys Ask Drone U Matt has recently got into Drones and the info is informative and fun. They are also the perfect length. 22:19 Steve Stewart is still listening to Stacking Benjamins (for the fourth year in a row). It's informative, super creative, and very helpful for managing your finances 23:05 Randy Cantrell from the Peer Advantage - His favorite podcast is the last one he listened to as he changes topics all the time. 24:09 Patrick and Aaron from the Broken Line Podcast loves the in-depth information provided by the Meat Eater Podcast 25:03 Scott From the Computer Tutor Podcast loves the Podcast Rodeo Show for its honest, entertaining reviews of different podcasts. 28:30 Seth From geekvillradio.com and classicwrestingmemories.com loves the Rebel Force Radio and considers it the best Stars Wars podcast for its great production. 29:29 Cheri from the Creation Science 4 Kids Podcast just found and loves The Story Grid podcast. It's great for helping people who write non-fiction write fiction. She feels deeply connected to the hosts and has purchased Shawn Coyne's book The Story Grid Book 31:59 Win Charles Butterflies of Wisdom like the Dreams in Drive podcast 32:38 Zack Raising Rents (as in paRENTS) love the Based on a True Story Its where History meets Hollywood. I love history books, but don't have alot of time. He educates while he entertains me. 35:30 Erik K Johnson from the Podcast Talent Coach show likes Flippedlifestyle.com as they provide real-life strategies for making and selling products. They are real people, and they deliver more than theory. 39:09 I've created the ultimate Because of My Podcast Mega Mix spotlighting the many ways people have benefitted from launching their podcast. This includes: Attending a taping of a TV show Speaking to celebrities, athletes, supreme justices, and others people we have no business speaking to.. Getting paid to travel to different places (in some cases by 220%) Getting millions in sales from billion-dollar clients...
This weekend I had "Christmas" with most of my family as my brother goes to Florida for Christmas with his in-laws. We bought my nieces and nephews who are ages 8 and under some of the toys we grew up playing. I noticed that these games are often very simplistic. What does this have to do with podcasting? Becuase sometimes we make things harder than they need to be. Because Of My Podcast - I'm Getting to Talk to Some Very Cool People Darryl E. McCullough Darryl hosts the Full Circle Podcast and helped launch National Podcast Power conference. Daryl has met actors, authors, politicians, YouTube Stars and more. If you want to get doors opened, start a podcast today. Keeping Simple Is Sometimes All You Need I spent the weekend playing with my great-nieces and nephew. We brought out some classc board games. Battling Tops My entire family ended up playing this game by the end of the day. What makes it a great game is that it is easy to learn and the action is fast and furious. The tops come out the gate very fast and often one or two of the tops go flying out of the arena. You pull a "string" (now a plastic tie with teeth) and the tops go into what amounts to a bowl and bounce off each other. The last one in the bowl spinning wins. Simple. Checkers This is another game that takes very little skill, and you get to the action fairly quickly. It takes some thought and strategy. Hide and Go Seek This game requires the ability to count to ten Mississippi. There is suspense, and tension as you wait to see if you can get home without being caught. Here again, it requires a good hiding spot and strategy to determine when you would try to "go home." I love helping people understand the best path to get to your podcast going in the right direction. There are times when people ask a question and they expect a simple answer, but the absolute truth about podcasting is there are very few absolute truths. The other thing I want to talk about today is letting your personality shine. So many people make podcasting harder than it is. Don't get me wrong there is still a learning curve, but some time we make the curve much higher than it needs to be. Sometimes Too Much Technology Can Take the Fun Out of Things I do a show called "Ask the Podcast Coach" and at one point I had a cohost located in another state, a phone line coming in (with a screen where I could put people on hold and see my callers), and I had a chat room. I streamed it live on Google Hangouts (now YouTube live), as well as mixlr.com and spreaker.com When I started the show I needed eight arms to start everything. My co-host and I Jim Collison (from theaverageguy.tv) noticed that most of our questions come in via chat. We still offer the ability to join the Google Hangout, but I would say 98% of our questions come in via chat. We also stream the show via Google Hangout and based on audience feedback, only stream via mixlr.com (for those who want an audio only). Simple Can Work and Sound Great My friend Cale Nelson from the Modern Christian Men show (and previously Ham Radio 360) got an email from a listener. In it, they said, " You have always sounded great! Better than some national broadcasts/podcasts." So what equipment does Cale Use? Did he spend thousands of dollars? He is using an ATR2100 Microphone, Yamaha MG12XU Mixer, Zoom H2n Digital Recorder. Record Locally to Zoom, then Edit in Audacity. Bernie The Cat Wishes Everyone Happy Holidays 13:44 Bernie from the Bernie the Cat Show stops by to wish everyone Happy Holidays. New Statistics From Apple inside PodcastsConnect. Apple.com 14:45 See Video https://youtu.be/VmSDwb3iU9s New Stats From Blubrry and Libsyn 20:28 Libsyn.com launched a new stats interface that works on your phone. The backend of the stats system now provides IAB compliant (once the IAB launches their certification) stats. Blubrry Statistics just got better, with the introduction of regional...
I attended the first ever PodCon in Seattle this weekend. It was cofounder by Hank and John Green who are You tubers who have a successful Dear Hank and John show, Joseph Fink from Welcome to Nightvale, Justin and Travis McElroy (My brother, My brother and Me). I went to the opening ceremonies with close to 1000 people in the room that reported any of these people came on the stage. They had other podcasters as well. They were asked questions and were all very witty. When asked about any weird jobs they had done in the past one person answered “Youth Pastor” and the audiences erupted into laughter with people falling out of their seats. I stood there grinning. I realized that there was an inside joke but I was not inside to get it. The only way to get inside is to talk to as many people as I could. Lollapalooza for Podcasting As the music business is having a hard time, many bands now tour together as a festival. These bands may not bring enough people out to support a solo show, but combine them together you have enough people to warrant the expense of the tour. You then get the added cross-promotion benefits. Cosplay? I found out that ar events like ComicCon and DragonCon people dress up like their favorite characters. This was happening at PodcCon. What some might call “Weird,” is actually called cosplay as many people dressed as characters (especially from the Adventure Zone show, and Welcome to Nightvale ). Community One of the great things about a podcast event like podcast movement or Podfest multi media nations expo is everyone there wants to learn podcasting. When I attend these, I am with my people. When the people with elf ears walked in, I’m sure they felt the same. Speakers The sessions I attended were not awful, except one. I was surprised at the lack of experience on some of the panels. The panel on monetization announced they had a combined level of 2.5 years. This probably explains why the only two ways they listed to make money from your podcast was sponsors and Patreon. There are also affiliates, selling your own products, donations. Because Of My Podcast - I'm Talking To People Who I Thought Would Never Talk to Me 17:17 Kira and Kenza are on episode four and have had their podcast open doors to people they never thought would talk to them. Check them out at https://www.tellmeeverythingpodcast.com A Quick Tip To Grow Your Audience from Drew Ackerman of the Sleep With My Podcast 32:40 When you reply to an email, tweet, comment, thank everyone for listening, and then ask them how they found your show. If it was from another person (word of mouth) find that person and thank them and ask them how they found your show. Check out Drew at www.sleepwithmepodcast.com and check out Drew's interview with Dave. Mentioned In This Show tellemeeverythingpodcast.com My brother, My brother and Me Dear Hank and John show Welcome to Nightvale Adventure Zone show Sleep With My Podcast Podfest Portable Media Expo (in Florida) Blue Yeti Microphones (Best Podcasting Gear) Social Media Marketing World Ready to Start Your Podcast? Check out Podcasting in Six Weeks or Join the School of Podcasting and learn at your own pace.
Because of My Podcast - My Band Sold Out Our Kickstarter 1:30 Matt from the band EleventySeven tells how his band had "taken a break" for the better part of four years. They decided to get the band back together, but how are we going to get the word out about the band reforming, and reconnecting with their audience? By starting a podcast! They connected with their audience and reached their Kickstarter goal in just a few days Check out the band's music and podcast at http://www.eleventysevenisalive.com/ How To Flatten Your Podcast Learning Curve 14:07 As someone with 20+ years in the education field, one of the things I do when I learn a new subject was to take a ton of notes on ANY question that came across my mind as I consumed content as a student. This week, I got into a subject that I had not dabbled in the early 1990's. To go from playing techmo bowl on the first nintendo to playing Madden 2018 on an Xbox One is a bit of a culture shock. This is a good thing. I'm WAAAY out of my comfort zone with a huge learning curve in front of me. So here are some tips on overcoming and managing learning curves. Define Your Goal It's not enough to join the School of Podcasting, your goal is to launch your podcast. I'm going to through in here that you need to Define Your Why. For example, if you're doing a solo show with no guests. There is no need to read up on creating a mix minus. Some might even say you don't even need to read up on a mixer. When you are first starting out, keep things simple. The problem is you don't know what you don't know. This leads me to point number two. 2. Talk to someone who is doing what you are doing. As you don't know what you don't know, you need to find someone who can help you define the area you need to investigate and those you don't. There is one statement that I have seen from my chair and I believe to be very true. You will pay for your podcast in one of two currencies. You will pay with time searching for your answers, or you will pay with money paying someone to help you get to where you want to go. 3. Make Sure You're Using Good Resource Material There is a ton of GREAT material for FREE on YouTube. There is also a TON of outdated material that can steer you in the wrong direction. So when you do a search on YouTube currently there is a filter option in the upper right-hand corner that allows you to sort by upload date to have the latest videos at the top. There are tons of Facebook Groups, and other resources (meetup.com) where you can find a community of people who can answer some questions. However, be sure to check out who is answering your question. Every week I see tons of articles on the subject of podcasting written by people who apparently have no podcast. Check out this video Also when you do find a good resource, use it. I've worked in different tech support departments, and I know we are in a hurry to get going but ask anyone and they will tell you that most companies put a tremendous amount of effort into the "on-boarding" process (getting your customer setup). This typically includes some sort of welcome email, and in many cases a video. You need to read more than the email title, and if you are given resources, use them. 4. Break Your Goals into Tasks As the old saying goes, "How do you eat an elephant?" The answer is one bit at a time. So once you understand where you want to go, you break your goal into smaller tasks. So you can take the goal of identifying your podcast and break it into the tasks of creating a list of five potential names, check domain availability, and perform a Google search to see if the name is in use. 5. Don't Try to Learn it All In One Sitting While you may be excited, when you try to do too much in too little a time, you can burn yourself out 6. Give Yourself a Timeline, but Don't Bite Off Your Face Timelines can help you see the plan, and give you an idea of when your goal will be met....
Every now and then I do an episode where you provide an answer to a question and we all learn together. This episode we asked the question, "What will you be doing differently in 2018?" Here are the people and their answers (in Alphabetical order) Here is Who Contributed to the Episode 1:50 Abby From atimeforhorses.com - is going to keep podcasting because she is having fun. 3:22 Anna from Authentic Parenting has planned her entire 2018, is going to do deep dives based on audience feedback, and create a form for potential guests. 6:18 Ben from http://modernselfprotection.com/ will be more consistent and is adding a blog to his site, and create some online courses to deliver this content. Dave uses Thinkific to manage the School of Podcasting membership area. 8:50 Brad- wearethecinemaguys.com 11:04 Bryan - engagingmissions.com 13:45 Clay - Fishnerds.com 16:24 Daniel Everybody's National Parks 18:22 Erik K Johnson from Podcast Talent Coach and the Podcast Review Show 20:06 Kim from Toastmasters 101 21:34 Kit from Active Travel Adventures Podcast 22:57 Landen from Calling All Platforms 25:08 Randy Cantrel from Peer Advantage Groups 26:18 Scott from the Computer Tutor podcast (plus a big announcement about Podfest.us) 29:16 Seth from Geekville Radio 31:17 Todd From Trucker Dump Podcast 35:29 Darwyn from Dealing with My Grief Podcast 37:59 Win from Butterflies of Wisdom 39:38 Zack from Rasing (pa)Rents Summary Some people are adjusting their schedules (wanting to be more consistent, most are planning on doing fewer episodes to avoid burnout, and to provide more time to promote Some listeners are planning on focusing on running their show like a business and attempt to bring in some income with their podcast Some are updating their platform by trying interviews (if they were solo) and vice versa (doing solo shows if they were doing primarily interviews) Some are looking to find ways to engage their audience more by attending events, creating Facebook Groups, and ramping up their social media presence. Some are having fun doing their show, and because of that, they aren't going to change a thing The bottom line is your show is just that YOUR SHOW and you can do whatever you want. If things are going great, then don't change a thing. If you want to try something, then you can. There is only one way to know if it will work. That is to get it in front of your audience. This can be in the form of an email or Facebook looking for feedback, or by just trying something in your show and seeing what kind of feedback you get. Next Question Episode For episode 600 I am breaking format. I am doing what is called an "Ask Me Anything" episode (AMA). I am throwing in one more bit of criteria. You can ask me about anything EXCEPT podcasting. So if you've ever wanted to know the person behind the microphone, now is the time. This feels a little narcissistic, but the people I passed this idea by thought it would be a good way to let people get to know me (just this one time). I need your questions by January 1st, 2018 (preferably in audio format). Episode 600 is January 8th, 2018. There are different formats you can contact me on my contact page How Can I Help You With Your Podcast? One on One Consulting? Self Paced Tutorials and Membership at the School of Podcasting? Six Week Group Coaching Podcast Course I've been podcasting since 2005, and my background is in Technical Education. I'm an award-winning podcaster ( and trainer) and would love to help you with your podcast.
Last week I explained how I learned of a strategy from Doug Sandler of the Good Guys on Business show where the goal is to bring on guests who would be a good client for you (assuming you're podcasting as part of your business). There is little focus on your audience and more emphasis on your guest. The presenter also requires that their potential guest subscribes, to their podcast and gives them a five-star review to be considered. This was the part that I thought was a little "black hat." Until I heard his side of the story, I wanted to reserve my judgment. Today I have Doug Sandler on the show to share his insights into his strategy. Because Of My Podcast I'm Much Better at Public Speaking: Bill Huchison 1:45 Bill Hutchison is a full-time missionary and has a podcast every now and then Bill is asked to speak in churches. Today Bill shares how he had to think on the fly when he hit a technical snag, anbecausese of his podcast he was able to pull it off. Preparing for Episode 600 4:55 I'm doing an "Ask Dave Anything (except podcasting questions)" will be the topic for episode 600. Send in your questions (with the title Episode 600) by January 1st, 2018 Your Target Customer as Your Guest Part II Doug Sandler Interview 7:00 Feedback from last week's show In today's discussion you hear: 9:23 Doug did his podcast for 16 months without making a dime. He went from 20,000 downloads to 1.2 million in the second 16 months. His guests are his target clients How does his stop his guests from being boring? Why his potential guests MUST give him a five-star review and subscribe to the show Does having guests on your show ensure 1.2 million downloads? Doug didn't get into podcasting to make friends Summary: There are no rules in podcasting? Will I look into using my podcast to get clients? I already do. The whole point of the School of Podcasting is to exhibit my expertise, and show you I know how to create a show that engages your audience. I might try this strategy in the future and do something like Natalie Ectal from BizChix.com where she records coaching calls and uses them as episodes. While I force potential guests to subscribe, rate, and provide a five-star review? No. Where Is Dave Going? 35:09 Podcon in Seatle Dec 9-10 Podfest in Florida Feb 8-10 Social Media Marketing World 2/28- 3 /2 San Diego Fixing a Podcast Episode After Your Published It 36:07 There is nothing worse than waking up to an inbox full of emails from listeners letting you know there is a mistake in your latest episode. This could be silence, or an edit point that you thought you took out (but didn't). You panick. Oh No! What do I do? Here is what you do. Do NOT Create a New Episode If you're using Libsyn.com go to Content > Previously Published and edit the Episode. There you can use the replace option to upload the repaired version of the episode. I strongly suggest you use the exact same file name. This way you don't have to wait for your episode to propagate across the Internet. Your feed has the name of the file, and when someone who didn't download the episode with the mistake presses download, they get the repaired version. If you're using Blubrry, you can go into PowerPress and upload your repaired file (and it will replace the old file). Again, I strongly urge you to use the exact same file name. Who Gets the File? When someone gets the first (wrong) version of your file, the app they use doesn't know there is an issue. Consequently, the app won't download the new version (because to the app, it's the same file). But I Want Everyone to Get the New Version! The only way to have all of your audience to get new version is to create a completely new episode (and delete the old episode). This might annoy your subscribers (who typically are the people who get your episode first as it's automated). They may have already listened to and delete the episode, and then all the sudden here it comes...
Today I'm back from Speaking at DC Podfest (what a great event) and I went to a session that had some interesting points that I wanted to share. The session was titled, "Size Doesn’t Matter: Build a Monetization Program with Any Size Audience with Doug Sandler and Strickland Bonner. Doung and Strickland host the Nice Guys on Business show. Their website states they have over 1 million downloads, and they showed proof in their session, and I can verify they are not lying. They explained a new strategy to grow your customers using your podcast. Because Of My Podcast: Stephanie Logan 8:35 Stephanie does the DC Diary show (sharing stories of DC Professionals) and she explains how Because of her podcast she was able to transition from a job that was more policy to now working in Media and communications Interviewing Your Potential Customers - The Power Of Podcasting 11:05 I have said one of the benefits of starting a podcast is people who would normally not give you the time of day, now will sit down to talk with you on a podcast. We've seen people use the power of being part of the media to partner with events and get access to vendors. Interviewing people that you want to start a partnership with is a solid way of breaking the ice. Doug repeated his main point, You have to reverse your thinking and focus on the guest, and identify people who would be a good client for your business. This was an interesting idea. One example in the session was someone who did a show about visiting the national parks. This is a hard show to monetize outside of a guidebook, or maybe mosquito spray. Doug said you should find the person who is in charge of the national parks budget, and have them on as a guest. They would know alot about the National Parks. When the interview is done you could mention that the show takes a lot of effort, and to keep going needs to find a sponsor and see if they would be interested in sponsoring the show (I would twist that and ask them if they knew anybody who would be interested in sponsoring the show). Again, interesting. I know consultants Natalie Echtal and Katie Krimitsos who have offered discounted coaching calls with the knowledge that the call may be used on the podcast. This provides content for the audience (as you help to solve the problems of your target audience) and shows off your expertise. So Doug pointed out that if you were a coach, you might interview people who need a coach. This does get a little confusing. If someone needs a coach, then one might think they aren't that successful (cause they need a coach), and with that in mind, if it's not a live coaching call, what kind of content does that create? This is where this idea goes a little south for me. It's the part where you have to put your brain on backward. What if you target customer is a prime prospect, but a horrible guest? If you've listened to my show (or Moondog Marketing) I am all about content, content, content. This is not focused on the audience, or the downloads, it is focused on getting in front of your target customer. They said their conversion rate was around 20%. For every 10 guests, they would get two new clients. This really goes against my main ideas, and I asked, "What if you guest/future client is boring?" They answered that they did their best to create good content. They then also stated there was a vetting process. They don't let "just anyone" get on the microphone. I left the session scratching my head a bit and realized I would need to listen to an episode to maybe complete my opinion. Their show is well produced and has a fair amount of comedy built in. Maybe a bit too much for my taste as I was five minutes in and they were still having a "how the sausage is made" discussion about the show's publishing schedule (which for me was boring as watching paint dry) and I never made it to their interview. Maybe I'll go back later....
Me talking with Brother love September 2006. Brother Love is now in a band called ThemVibes.com See http://www.themvibes.com/
Today we are talking with Mark Deal who has grown Podcast Atlanta to over 500 members (www.podatl.com). We get great tips on growing a local meetup, tips, and resources for better interviews, and how is creating podcasts for a living. How Long Does it Take Until Your Show Catches On? George Hrab answered this question on his Geologic podcast, and George told me a long time ago that if I ever want to use a clip I could. George's show spotlights his life as the drummer of the Philadelphia Funk Authority, but also features George's Skeptic point of view with highlights on Science as well as the "Religious Moron of the Week." George mentions that you shouldn't start a podcast to "be something" but instead make it because you can make something cool, interesting and fun. Make a podcast because you have a different point of view and it needs to be heard. It took him two years before an absolute stranger mentioned they listened to the show. As George says, "You're making something and that is more than most people." Growing Your Local Meetup Group Mark Deal runs podcast Atlanta and in 18 months his group has grown to 500+ members. In today's discussion you hear: Not all 500 show up at the same time The different formats of meeting he uses What he's doing to grow the group What didn't work in regards to growing the group How a meetup group is not exactly the same a growing a podcast How to pick a location How he offsets the price of running the meetup group How he got Gordon Firemark to come to a meetup The typical breakdown of a meeting How often they meet, and how they stay connected between meetings. The pros and cons of Meetup vs a Facebook Group The kind of "Special Events" they have Podcast Guest Experts and the Podcast Editors Facebook Groups What has happened because of hosting a podcaster's meetup (18:00) Podcast Studio Certifications, and what he feels every studio should have How he is making a living with podcasting Having Alcohol at events Other platforms he uses in addition to Faceboook, and Meetup. (Eventbrite.com ) He makes money from Podcasting not Podcasters Why he uses Steve Stewart to edit his show Check out Mark at www.podatl.com Podcasting in Six Weeks Starts January 2018 Six weeks of group coaching and personalized attention 1 Year Subscription to the School of Podcasting Private Facebook Group Be in the relevant Podcasting Directories by February Direct access to me / Priority Email Support Focus Group to Help Shape Your Idea Your Podcast will Sound Great Erase Your Fear of "Sounding Stupid" Go to www.podcastinginsixweeks.com for more information. Class Size is limited. Want a more leisurely pace, check out the School of Podcasting. Mentioned on This Show Gordon Firemark (Entertainment Lawyer) Author Inside You Podcast Eventbrite.com (ticketing for evens) Social Media Marketing World Podfest.us DC Podfest
Because of My Podcast, I Will Be Attending A Taping of the Black List Television Show - Troy Heinritz 1:58 Troy Heinritz has had story after story when it comes to his Black List Exposed show. He recently won a podcast award, and now was called by Sony to attend the taping of the 100th episode the Black List. Troy was on the Ask the Podcast Coach show and talked about he when he gets these opportunities, he prepares and delivers, and consequently keeps getting more opportunities. Check out his show at www.goldensprialmedia.com Questions of the Month 3:00 I need the answer to two questions by November 13th 2017. What will you be doing differently in 2018 with your podcast? What is your favorite podcast (if you could only pick 1)? What is it, what is it about? where is it? and most importantly WHY is your favorite? (be sure to mention your show as well). I need your answers by November 13th, 2017. For more information go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact Embracing the Experience Gap 4:52 When podcasters first start, they put a lot of thought into their launch (sometimes too much), and they get their show out and into Apple Podcasts and the other directories. Then they do one thing that can really knock the passion out of them: they compare themselves to others. They want to know how many downloads other shows get, and start to focus on other podcasters instead of focusing on their audience. Back to the Woodshed I've played the guitar since I was 11. When I got done with school I would deliver my papers to my paper route, eat dinner, and my friend would come over and we would play guitar for hours. We weren't very good. We weren't taking lessons, and I was learning to play lead by trying to recreate the sounds I heard on albums. In other words, I would study music, and then practice, practice, practice, until I could play it. The music that was produced on the path to "getting it" was not pretty. I have hours of tapes of us playing Ted Nugent's Stranglehold for hours. Each of us would take turns soloing over the top of it. I recorded these so I could evaluate my process. I never intended to release them to the public. You can do the same with your podcast. Record a couple test shows for evaluation. How Can Podcasters Get Better? Podcasters get better by podcasting. I know that sounds stupid, but there is no way to know if you're content is good unless you get it in front of your target audience. You can also study other podcasts and entertainment. You see podcasting is part of the entertainment industry. Sure some of it is educational. Then again so is Sesame Street, and it's pretty entertaining. I recently watched a documentary on Steven Spielberg. Spielberg got turned down to be in the USC film school due to grades. He would take a tour of Universal Studios, and when the bus stopped for a bathroom break he would sneak away and watch people like Alfred Hitchcock direct. One of his first films (Amblin 1968 ) was geared toward studio executives to show he was not a normal independent filmmaker. - he knew his audience, and it worked it got him hired. As the youngest director under contract, he was a bit of a novelty item, so he had to prove himself over and over. One famous director pulled Steven aside and said, "There are days you will go on the set and have no idea what you're doing. Your job is to make sure the cast doesn't know that. The film interviewed Richard Dreyfuss who sais he was hired on the third day of the Movie Jaws. He said they didn't have a script, and they didn't have a shark. Steven decided to the movie on the ocean instead of a back lot of a movie studio. In fact, the first shark doesn’t appear until one hour and 21 minutes into the two-hour film. This was partly due to the mechanical sharks they built didn't work. The cost was 225,000. So you'll notice the use of barrels moving instead of the shark. You didn't need to...
The Essential Items For Your Podcast Website Let me state, that this has nothing to do with Wordpress vs Wix vs Squarespace. These are the items that I feel should be on your website (and why) A Play Button Think of this as a free sample. If someone is going to subscribe to your show, they need to hear it first. This is why there is a guy with the chicken on a toothpick at the mall. It is the teaser, the free sample of your podcast with no commitment to buy. A Contact Button/Page I'm not making this up. I just read an article in Pod to Pod, and I read a story about a podcaster that might have a good "Because of My Podcast" story. There wasn't any contact button at the top, bottom, left, or right side of the screen. It wasn't on the about page, it wasn't there. The only way to contact the person was via twitter. Being somewhat of a geek, I pulled up his RSS feed and dug through the code to find it. Realize, nobody is going to dig through your RSS feed to get your email address. Make your contact button easy to find, and don't get cute and name it something like "Let's get coffee." Be sure to test your button/page to make sure you get the messages from your website. Your About Page There are two answers here. If your website is primarily the home of your podcast then the first paragraph should be about the show. If your website is the home of your brand (products, press, etc) then the first paragraph should be about the host. Then a second paragraph about the show. In my travels, the about page is one of the pages that receive the most traffic. If you've been podcasting for a bit and have some reviews, take some of the phrases used by your audience and use it in your about page (use the native tongue of your audience). Subscribe Buttons We all love to talk about iTunes/Apple Podcasts, as we should. They have a huge amount of the market. There are android phones as well and it's a bit of a chicken or the egg. More podcasts are consumed on Apple products than Android. Well, most podcasters talk about subscribing on Apple products (and leave the android people out to dry). If Google would get off their butt and make a native app for podcast listeners that would be great (they did just purchase the 60 db app). So make sure people can subscribe to your show. You REALLY want to avoid telling people to "Find me in iTunes." Extra Credit Don't just make a subscribe page, but add directions with screenshots. You could even do a quick presentation on YouTube Live on how to subscribe to your show, and then send people to the video on YouTube. There is more power in subscriptions than reviews. Because Of My Podcast Scott Orr is Going to the Movies for Free Scott Orr does the Code 3 Podcast and was approached by the people behind the new movie Only the Brave. Check out Scott's podcast for Firemen at code3podcast.com Not sure what is up with Scott's voice? Check out the first 30 seconds of his show at code3podcast.com Always Be Open For New Input I've heard reports from one person or another. Anything on the internet that is repeated enough becomes an undeniable fact. With this in mind, I always stay open to new feedback. I always consider the source and always allow new ideas to challenge my beliefs. If I'm going to believe something, it is typically based on things I believe to be facts. Beliefs are based on input and your ideas and feelings (your feelings can skew the input). Actions are based on beliefs. Beliefs are based on perceived facts. Facts are based on input into your brain. For example, I don't like coconut. Any candy bar with coconut, I'm not a fan. The one day someone handed me a drink. I wasn't sure what it was, it was supposed to some drink better than soda. It was white. It turned out it was some sort of vanilla coconut mix. I have input. I now can say, I don't like something that is predominantly coconut, but I don't mind it mixed with vanilla. You have to be open to someone challenging a...
I was listening to the Book Feed the Muscle Burn the Fat and he relayed the story of a man at a Tony Robbins event (Tony is a major Business Guru). He told Tony that he had done EVERYTHING to grow his audience. Since he had tried everything Tony asked him, "Tell me the last 100 things you've tried." To this, the man answered, "Well I haven't tried 100 things." Tony then stated, "Then tell me the last 50 things." The man replied, "I haven't tried 50 things" Tony replied, "Then tell me the last 10 things you've tried." It turned out the man had tried about four things. We think we've tried everything, but there are more ways to connect with your audience, many of them that require just a little bit of time to setup up some technology. Today we need to look at ourselves in the mirror and ask, "Have I really done everything I can to promote my show, connect with my audience, and increase my reach? I think if we look deep into our hearts we know there is more. Here Is The Low Hanging Fruit Social media: You should be promoting your show on the social media channels. There are plugins such as social warfare. There are automation tools like Social Jukebox. Media hosts like Spreaker and Blubrry will publish your audio file as a video on YouTube. Spreaker will tweet out about your episode. Blubrry will create a sample of your show to tweet out and paste on Facebook. Libsyn will post to Twitter, Facebook, YouTube, iHeart Radio, LinkedIn, Blogger, Tumblr. Podcast Directories: There are four main directories you should be listed in. Apple Podcasts (formerly iTunes), Stitcher, TuneIn, and Google Play Music. Do You Have Subscribe Buttons On Your Site? One way to keep your numbers going up is to get people to subscribe. This includes buttons for ANDROID. Subscribeonandroid.com is a free site from blubrry where you can point people to that site (using your RSS feed) and if they don't have any apps to subscribe they will be prompted to download one. My friend Daniel J Lewis has a great plugin call Social Subscribe and Follow that creates amazing looking subscribe buttons Do You Have Share Buttons on Your Website? There are plugins (again I love social Warfare) that make it easy for your audience to tweet out your show. There are players like the coolcast player, the Smart Podcast Player, the Simple Podcast Press player. Don't get hung up too much on players as 80% of people are listening on on portable devices. With that said, can people share your episodes from their phone? Local Meetups I've had three people sign up for the School of Podcasting and I got to be on TV all from meeting local podcasters in Ohio. If you don't have a local meetup, do what I did. I created one. In the words of my friend Glenn "the Geek" Hebert, it's not who you know, it's who knows you. Check it out at www.meetup.com I run a local podcasters group for Northeast Ohio www.neohiopodcasters.com Reach Out to Other Similar Podcasts Some of my best friends are my "Competition." Daniel J. Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast, Ray Ortega who does the Podcasters Studio, Mike Dell works for Blubrry and does the Podcast Help Desk, there are others as well. Reach out to them and see if they'd like to co-host an episode or a segment, or be interviewed, or... or ... or.. Remember there really isn't any competition in podcasting. They can listen to you on Monday and your competition on another day of the week. It's not like radio where you are both on at the exact same time. Reach out to Businesses? If I did a show about weddings, I would reach out to every dress shop in the area and see if I could put some CDs at the check out for exchange for a link to their site, or a mention in the show. Go Record People at Events You can get a portable recorder for as little as $99 for the Zoom H1 or just use your phone. Then give these people your business card, and tell them they will be on a future episode. You do have business cards right? There are...
Simply Sound Company SS1 PreAmp Review While I've never used any preamps like the Triton Audio Fethead Microphone Preamp or the Cloudlifter CL-1, I was really impressed with the amazing amount of boost to the sound. The large dose of extra gain can make help a budget microphone/preamp combination sound clean and more professional. Some microphones such as the Heil Pr-40 and the Sure SM7B are known for really low outputs. This creates a situation where you have to turn the gain up on your mixer or recording device. This can leave the door open for added hiss depending on your mixer or recording device. The Simply Sound SS1 is designed for dynamic microphones only. More Clean Gain Triton Audio Fethead provides 27 db of clean gain with a price for $89 Cloudlifter CL-1 provides 25 db of clean gain for $149 The Simply Sound SS1 - provide 27 db of gain for $99 The Simply Sound website shows the Fethead at a $149 price tag, but at BNH, I show a price of $89 My Opinion As I had said, never using any preamp (besides the one in my mixer, and I've also used the DBX 286, and the Aphex 230) even without a preamp, I never thought I sounded bad. With that said, the concept makes sense. I know that when I turn the gain up on any mixer there comes a point where noise is introduced. Using the SS1, I basically turned my gain all the way down. The construction is super rugged and resembles the Cloudlifeter all-metal casing (but cooler looking in black) you're not going to break this. You do need some phantom power (so a typical route might be to plug your microphone into the SS1. Then plug the ss1 into your mixer. The mixer would need to have the Phantom Power Turned on. For my recording today I had my EV Re320 going into the SS1 and that went directly into the Zoom H5. It was an amazing amount of boost. How I did the test. I set my levels using the H5 recorded some audio, removed the SS1 from the chain, and plugged it back into my Zoom H5 without touching any knobs. Do you NEED this? As with all things podcasting, it depends. If you're happy with your audio, no. If you struggle to get enough signal into your recorder, or the sound has a fair amount of noise, then this is well worth the money. Check it out at simplysound.co Second Line Podcasting WordPress Theme I no longer recommend Appendipity themes. This is a theme I loved and have on most of my websites. The face of the company Joey Kissimmee was last seen online in late 2016, and they are no longer replying to any support emails that I send. Unfortunately, this is not the first time I've done this. Semiologic was a cool theme until Thesis came out. Then they went from needing no knowledge of code to having to know a ton of code. I really like Appendipity themes as there was a lot of flexibility (and no need for knowledge of code). I love the Divi theme, but they come close to having too much flexibility and people can get overwhelmed because it does everything (and the learning curve can be a bit large). Divi is a well-managed theme, with a huge community and awesome support. You can join Elegant Themes (the creators of Divi) for $89 a year. I did the one time fee of $249 for lifetime access. In addition to their themes, they have some cool plugins. One thing I just discovered is when you purchase a Second Line Theme, you can only use it on one website. This puts it int the "Depends" situation. The good news there is a one time fee. On the Evanto market, it shows six months of support with extended support for $17.63 a year. If you have multiple sites (for me I have at least four) that can add up ($59 X 4 = $236). Second Line Theme Support So far Second Line support has been great answering all my questions. The theme I'm using (Dixie) is skewing my featured image. When I informed this of the problem, they told me exactly what to do if I wanted to edit some files. The means you're going to need to understand FTP, and not be afraid to edit some...
In honor of International Podcast Day, I went to the local mall (that's still open) and asked people, "Have you have of podcasting?" If they said yes I would ask, "Have you actually heard a podcast?" Many people said NO. The people who had been listening to podcasts were really into podcasting. This show originated from www.schoolofpodcasting.com/586 School of Podcasting Wins The People's Choice Podcast Award in the Technology I've been nominated NUMEROUS times for the different shows I create such a the Logical Weight Loss Podcast, Feeding My Faith, and others, but I've never won an award. The School of Podcasting won this year in the technology category. Thanks so all of my listeners. It is DEEPLY Appreciated. Because of My Podcast - Douglas 3:45 Douglas from Zerobooks.com got a job, and is now podcasting as part of this job! Check him out at www.zerobooks.com His podcast is called Zero Squared. Looking For Podcast Listeners at the Mall 5:28 I went to the mall to ask random people if they knew about podcasts? Most people had not heard of podcasting, those who had listened to a podcast, really loved them. There are some people who need some help in understanding what a podcast is. You can always send your audience to www.learntosubscribe.com Get Out Of Your Comfort Zone If took me 40 minutes to get up the nerve to talk to complete strangers. I may appear outgoing, but underneath I can be pretty shy. As I moved along, it got easier. It was funny watching people put up their guard when I would ask, "Can I talk to you for a few minutes?" You can see their defenses go up. If I do this next year I need to find people who are bored (laundromats, or maybe set up a table at an Apple store). I'm not sure if Apple would allow this, but all they can say is no. Podcasting Does Not Waste Your Time 10:45 I had a talk this week with a potential podcaster who wants to build an audience and monetize his podcast. He wanted a step by step approach that would ensure that he was making a full-time living in the future. While there are people out there who are happy to charge you $4000 to tell you to believe in yourself, get into New and Noteworthy, and your dreams can come true, I prefer a more realistic approach. That is to say Gimlet Media producers super popular shows, and yet not every show they launch makes the cut a few months later. There are great shows like Action that was on a major network with A-list celebrities making appearances and yet the show was canceled. You can follow their footsteps and do a pilot episode, get feedback and shape your content accordingly. In the same way, you can't practice comedy in a basement (you have to tell your jokes in public to know if they are funny) you need to publish your episodes to the audience to get feedback. Even if your show doesn't end up doing as well as you had hoped, you will gain new friends, you will learn new skills, and you will benefit from the experience (I've had people say they are better speakers due to creating a podcast). You can get started with a small investment of $100 - $300 for equipment. See http://www.bestpodcastinggear.com/kits/ Common Audio Issues 15:02 The podcast sounds weird on a phone or single speaker (mono) - your recording may be stereo and out of phase. The solution is to copy one of the channels and copy and paste it into a new file and save it as mono. Check out this video to better understand My podcast is not displaying properly - This is almost always a case where you are exporting your podcast using a Variable Bit Rate (VBR). This will cause the episode to not display properly, and in some cases, if you press pause, and the podcast goes back to the beginning when you press play again. My podcast doesn't display the artwork in iTunes/Apple Podcasts - iTunes/Apple Podcasts does NOT display episodic artwork. It only displays the artwork for your show Growing An...
Hello, everyone, I realized in my last episode I didn't talk about International Podcast Day. If you haven't checked out their site it is www.internationalpodcastday.com They have cool tools to help you promote the power of podcasting check them out at https://internationalpodcastday.com/promotion/ Check out the Podcast Success Summit as well
The fastest way to connect with your audience is face to face. You may be thinking of creating a meetup, or a workshop, or yearly event around your topic/show. How do you go about doing it? Today we have Chris Krimitsos who is the organizer of Podest.us, Nick Seuberling of Cincinnati Soccer Talk, and Darryl E. McCullough who just organized his first event National Podcast Power. Darryl also hosts the Full Circle Podcast. In today's episode you will hear: About Nick taking his audience on a four-hour bus trip to Pittsburgh Darry'ls reflections the day after National Podcast Power conference Chris shares his insights as someone who has organized thousands of events. The risks and deposits that may be involved with an event. How to negotiate with hotels. How to choose speakers for your event. The dangers of food around your event. How to shop for a bus. Free places for a casual meetup. What was Chris's biggest trainwreck and how he handled it What to do with negative feedback Building Routines When you create an event for your audience, you are making memories with your audience. With the right event, people can start building their schedule around your events, and you become part of their routine. Mentioned In This Episode Acuity Scheduling National Podcast Power Cincinnati Soccer Talk Full Circle Podcast Ivy Envy Podcast Podfest.us Join the School of Podcasting Sign up for a Coaching Call
The podcaster attitude can be a tricky one to juggle. You care about your content, you care about your audience, but at times you might want to try something new, and that means your audience may not like it. If you like it, should you do it? Amy Pohler says yes. Success is achieved through Ambivalence This episode originate at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/584 Because of My Podcast - Dave Jackson My podcast has opened many doors over the 12 years I've been podcast. When I got home from Podcast Movement, I got an email from Michael Stelzner from Social Media Examiner stating he wanted to talk to me about the Social Media Marketing World 2018. In talking with Michael (and I so wish I had a copy of this ) he stated that he had people involved with his conference like John Lee Dumas, Daniel J. Lewis, and he's good friends with Cliff Ravenscraft. Michael said he turned to his crew and asked "Who is missing on the podcasting end, and they all said, "Dave Jackson." So here again, it's not who you know, but who knows you. So because of my podcast, I will be speaking at Social Media Marketing World 2018. The event is February 28th - March 2nd in San Diego. Shortly after talking with Michael, I received a call from Chris Krimitsos, and I will be involved again with Podfest.us in Flordia February 8-10 in Orlando Bay. This weekend, September 23rd I will be the closing keynote of the first-ever National Podcast Power in Perrysburg Ohio. While I'm talking about speaking today (9/18) I will be running the gathering of Northeast Ohio Podcasters where we meet, talk podcasting, gear, and whatever you would like to talk about. Check it out at www.neohiopodcasters.com Podcast Gear Yellowtec iXm Microphone Recorder At Podcast Movement Shawn Park from The Be Your Own Nerd show let me play with his Yellowtex iXm microphone/recorder. Here is a little about the microphone/recorder: "iXM was designed to become the finest reporter microphone ever. One of the most challenging requirements was a perfect auto leveling. Our engineers managed to develop an excitingly innovative procedure: the LEA engine. Whether whisper or cry, you will always enjoy a perfect level. LEA lets you do amazing recordings even under stressful conditions. No AGC and no artifacts. Try it out, you will be amazed." The price is $761. (so this may not be for the hobbyist, but it's always interesting to see pro gear like this as a more affordable version is probably in the works that will hit the shelves in a few years. Check out Shawn at beyourownnerd.com Ambivalence Is the Key To Success -Amy Pohler In the past I've mentioned there are three things a podcaster needs that have nothing to do with the tech. Support of your family - without it, there is stress and pressure Your health - without it you don't function well, if at all Your attitude - You actions follow your attitude. As the old Henry Ford saying goes, whether you think you can or you think you can't, you're right. If you look at the above three, that if one is removed, the other two suffer. Today I Want to Focus On The Attitude I've mentioned in previous episodes how Jerry Seinfeld had to wait four years to get on the Tonight Show. He then kept killing it on every appearance for the next nine years before he got his own show. The television show Seinfeld did awful for the first four years of its existence. I've been reading alot of autobiographies lately (or to be honest listening to them). My most Recent were Martin Short and Amy Pohler. In both cases, they kind of knew what they wanted to do (entertain people and be in "Show Business"). They started with small theater groups and immersed themselves in their local scene. They worked with people who were better then they were, and learned. They performed in theaters that were housed under a supermarket. They were in buildings where you put things over the bathroom drains to keep the rats out. They suffered through these horrible...
Glenn the Geek Hebert (from horseradionetwork.com )shares what he learns from talking to "Radio People" from Podcast Movement. We discuss being more focused with our podcast, so I bring on Addy Saucedo who is the author of The Podcast Planner ($37.99 on Amazon) and we talk about how you have less stress and more downloads by having a better plan for your podcast. This is episode 583 of the School of Podcasting and originates from www.schoolofpodcasting.com/583 Dr. Ryan Gray Stops Practicing Medicine to Do Podcasting Full Time Dr. Ryan Gray shares how he has left his medical career after his website and podcasting that has grown over and over the years, and he is now doing consulting full time on helping people survive medical school, and he published his first book, "The Premed Playbook: Guide to the Medical School Interview: Be Prepared, Perform Well, Get Accepted." His goal is to change the culture around medical school so it's not so competitive. Check out his podcast at www.mededmedia.com and medicalschoolhw.com Glenn Hebert on What He Learned from Radio Veterans at Podcast Movement 5:44 In today's discussion with Glenn we hear how: Radio veterans are jumping into the podcast pool The current issues with automated advertising How podcasters who want to podcast for profit need to learn from radio people and be ready, be prepared before pressing record. How Glenn keeps his integrity with sponsors How Glenn uses his audience to make decisions on what happens and is featured on his show. Podcasting With Laser Sharp Focus with The Podcast Planner - Addu Saucedo Interview 22:25 Here is the description of the Podcast Planner from Amazon: The Podcast Planner: Podcasting Guide With Templates To Help Podcasters Consistently Plan, Record and Publish Finally, a planner for Podcasters! It provides everything a Podcaster needs to be organized, motivated and happily podcasting. Successful Podcasters know how to consistently plan, record, and publish their podcast, and with The Podcast Planner, you can too! Buy it at Amazon Check out Addy's website at www.thepodcastplanner.com In today's chat we learn: Addy was helping people start and edit podcasts, but they keep podfading (quitting) How podcast planning can help you ensure your content resonates with your audience. How podcasting is hard, but it can be less stressful with a plan. A podcast compass guides you to your goals and purpose What to do if you're not sure who your audience is How the podcast planner can help with an Interview show How using a podcast to promote her book has brought more sales, and more email subscribers, and more speaking gigs. The importance of reviewing past episodes Why paper may boost brainstorming activities Find her show in iTunes or on Stitcher Start Your Podcast Today The School of Podcasting Offers: Step by step tutorials that will help plan, launch, and grow your podcast. Live group coaching Private Facebook Group Priority Email Support Join Today
Every month I ask my audience a question. This month is have you ever been approached by someone who OBVIOUSLY has NO CLUE about your show? Special Thanks To: Bernie from Bernie the Cat Show Lee Silverstein from the Colon Cancer Podcast has people wanting to talk about Cancer conspiracies. Glenn Hebert from the Horse Radio Network had someone ask for a donation if he didn't want to be on the show. Matthew McClain does an audio drama (obviously no guests) but still gets solicited to have guests be on his show. His show is "A Scottish Podcast" I had someone contact me about the Healing Our Marriage show (which is defunct) and I "Played" with them, and asked why they loved my show Jason Bryant from Matt Talk Online Podcast Booking Resources Interview Valet - Find and/or be a guest Interview Connections - Rock both sides of the microphone (one of the oldest podcast booking agents) PodcastGuests.com - A free resource for finding guests Help a Reporter - Reports looking for Experts How to Get Radio Interviews (Course) More Resources at PodcastingResources.com I'll Be Speaking at: Podcast Midatlantic September 8-9 in the greater Philadelphia Area National Podcast Power September 23rd in Perrysburg, Ohio Start Podcasting Today! Get immediate access to our online courses covering Podcasting from A to Z, start to finish. Priority Email Support Live groups coaching twice a month) Private Facebook Group Join today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start
I'm back from podcast movement, and I had a blast. I also have insights from one of the hardest assignments I've done in a long time. My Impression of Podcast Movement 2017 Nothing cooler than being picked up at that airport by fellow podcasters Marcus Couch from WordPress Plugins A to Z. We haven't seen each other face to face in about 10 years. We cranked some cool metal on the way to the Marriot and it was like old times. Then I get the then Marriot and I get to meet my co-host Jim Collison from the Average Guy network, and I go over to his table and there sits the one and only Steve Stewart and Mike Dell. So for me, the Summar Camp aspect of Podcast Movement is in full effect. The coolest line I heard all week was relayed by Paul Colligan (another person' I've known for 10+ years) and it came from a Dan Klass session. Dan (who is a former comedian) shared how often at comedy clubs you will have multiple comedians perform in an evening - and yet they all use the same microphone. The point? It's not about the tech. I roomed with Erik K Johnson from podcasttalentcoach.com, and he had stated that it would be awesome if he could meet a web developer who needed help with his podcast, as he was a podcast consultant who needed help with his website. I get into the elevator, introduce myself to everyone in the elevator and it turns out that one of the people is a web designer thinking of starting a podcast. When we get out of the elevator, on of the first people who see is Erik. I felt like I was in a Christmas movie and it was going to start to snow. I saw Harry Durran from Podcast Junkies and Dr. Ryan Gray who has given up his practice to do podcasting full time and Harry introduces me to Natalie Jennings who happens to be taking head shots at a reasonable price. She shows me a few samples of people, and I'm hooked. I can't wait to see how they turn out. The few peaks I saw of what she did was amazing. See her at http://www.nataliechampajennings.com/ I found out in Paul Colligan's session that if you are in Google Play Music, you are also on the Google Home portable audio speaker. I also know of a cool double secret project that is going to make recording double-enders via a browser very cool. I was on a panel with Ray Ortega, Daniel J. Lewis, and Addy Saucedo on what is inside an RSS. This was an insanely nerdy topic, but due to the recent Apple announcements we had some interested parties and I thought we pulled it off well. The bonus is I got to hang out with some cool friends. The Coolest Thing I Saw At Podcast Movement 2017 While there were tons of great sessions at PM17, as a vendor (I work for Libsyn.com - use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month) I don't get to attend any sessions. I did see something that was way cool. I met Alissa Daire of the Maximize Your Strengths show. I see her the first night, and she is in a group of people and we get talking about Strengths Finder, and she becomes a ping pong ball bouncing off the ceiling with energy. She's super nice, and it was great to catch up with her as I had met her last year. The next night, I'm standing at the Luau event, and here she comes. She explains how "I'm done." She's tired (as many people are), and she is considerably less energetic. Pat Flynn walks over, he's very witty and a super nice guy. Then the subject changes to strengths finder results, and it was like watching a time release video of a flower blooming. Her energy came back, her smile came back, her body language completely changed. It was amazing to watch. I saw this a few more times. It's late, and people have had a few adult beverages, then I ask them about their show, and BOOM, the body language picks up, the eyes are open a bit wider, the voice is a little louder. Later, Paris from Gamertag Radio got star struck when Cara Santa Maria from the Skeptics Guide to the Universe walks by. I offered to go bring her over. He got shy, so I did my best Steve Austin (the six...
Full show notes can be seen at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/580 Why Keeping It Simple is a Good idea I do a show every Saturday call Ask the Podcast Coach with Jim Collison from theaverageguy.tv and at one point I decided to connect with Jim over Google hangouts, as well as have a Call In Number for the phone. I had to send a mix to Jim that had myself and the caller (but not Jim) while sending a mix to the caller than had myself and Jim (but not the caller). For those up on the lingo, I had to configure two mix minuses. I needed a mixer with two auxiliary outs. I found the Behringer X1832. It did the job well. I had a ton of extra channels, and effects that I never used. Then we switched and instead of using a phone (using CallinStudio.com) we went to a chat window to take questions. This was simple and free (using chatwing.com) . So now I have a giant mixer taking up half my desk, and I was looking for an alternative. I have a Yamaha MG102c Mixer (which has been replaced by the MG10XU) that would do the job. For whatever reason, I just didn't like it. It seemed like I had to crank everything up to the max. It still had a clean sound, but it seemed like I really had to push everything. I realize this is stupid (cause you should vote with your ears, not your eyes) but I've been hesitant to go back to it. The Other Problem with Recording Levels I use a Zoom H5. A great device with a giant screen. However, due to the way the studio is setup with the majority of the light coming in from Behind the Zoom H5 I cant' really get a clear reading. While there are lights to let me know when things are peaking, I tend to feel those are too sensitive. Then I heard about the Sound Devices MixPre-3. This might solve all my problems. Bad Time for a Product Review I received the Sound Devices MixPre-3 this week. It's horrible timing as I'm getting ready to run off to Podcast Movement, and I'm busy packing, buying Dramamine, recording podcasts and won't have time to do a super deep dive. So here is what I want it to do: Power my Electrovocie RE320 without a ton of his I want to do a mix minus for when I do shows with a co-host via skype or Google hangouts I want to plugin my ipad to play sound effects. First Impressions Of the Mix Pre-3 WOW IS THIS THING SMALL. I have an iPhone 6s, and it might be an inch wider, but it is the size of an iPhone on steroids. VERY COOL. At first, I was worried about the touchscreen display. But the display is super clear, and you can adjust the brightness. I had no problems reading it. I was worried about the touchscreen is small. That didn't seem to be an issue (I'm a guitar player with long fingers and not very fat). I almost didn't need the manual. I plugged in a microphone, hit record and was up and running. Using it as an Interface - WHY AM I DRUNK? I went into Hindenburg Journalist and did a recording. it was nice and clear, but I sounded slightly drunk as my voice was lower (as if the sound had been slowed down). I launched Adobe Audition and got the same issue. Hmmm. As I'm on a PC, I right-clicked on the Speaker in the bottom right-hand corner of my screen and went to the Properties of the Mix Pre-3. I had to set the recording and playback to 2 channel 24 bit, 48K. This solved the issue, and everything sounded fine. How Do I Setup a Mix Minus? I was able to set the input of Channel 2 to USB-1, and I could now hear my Skype caller. I was on Channel 3, and life was good. How do I go about making sure that the sound of the caller does not go back to the caller? I look at the output, and all the output routing is for the stereo out mix. Where do I adjust what goes back to the caller? I looked, and looked, and headed to YouTube. They have a video on the Sound Devices website, but they just said, "Set the input and out to the MixPre-3. My thought was, Yeah, but then what. Finally, I saw a video that explained you can't route what is going back to the USB output, and that you don't need...
Darren Dake of the Coroner Talk podcast started a podcast in 2013, and started a podcast, but it didn't last. He really loves being a death scene investigator so he started the Coroner Talk podcast 2014. This lead to numerous opportunities: He started to make connections with people He now gets around 15,000 download a month He was asked the be the trainer supervisor for his state. He wrote a few books that has lead him to speak at conferences multiple times He includes going to different states to talk He created online courses for his "Coroner School" and is now taking off and now he is on track to make a six figure income from his speaking and his online courses. Please Notice: This wasn't overnight This wasn't easy. Your audience must always come first. Some Thoughts On Opportunities “A pessimist sees the difficulty in every opportunity; an optimist sees the opportunity in every difficulty.” ― Winston S. Churchill “We often miss opportunity because it's dressed in overalls and looks like work” ― Thomas A. Edison “Failure is only the opportunity more intelligently to begin again.” ― Henry Ford “I believe that every single event in life happens in an opportunity to choose love over fear.” ― Oprah Winfrey Unfortunately, there seems to be far more opportunity out there than ability.... We should remember that good fortune often happens when opportunity meets with preparation. Thomas A. Edison There comes a moment in every life when the Universe presents you with an opportunity to rise to your potential. An open door that only requires the heart to walk through, seize it and hang on. The choice is never simple. It's never easy. It's not supposed to be. But those who travel this path have always looked back and realized that the test was always about the heart. ...The rest is just practice. Jaime Buckley Spend eighty percent of your time focusing on the opportunities of tomorrow rather than the problems of yesterday. Brian Tracy Missed Opportunities I do a show called the Alexacast that is all about getting the most out of your Amazon Echo, Dot, etc. So I have an audience that is tied to Amazon. One might say they are Amazon "Super Users." Yet then Amazon Prime day came, and I have an audience that is tied to Amazon, and I barely promoted it. I should've made a big deal about this, and made it an event. Know What Opportunities Are Coming Up I found two sites that show special days. These are: https://www.daysoftheyear.com https://nationaldaycalendar.com By knowing when all these special days that come up, you might be able to make a special event to encourage your audience to interact with the show. Sometimes You Need To Ask I heard Dan Klass from the Bitterest Pill is being inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame. I'm a HUGE Dan Klass fan. So I asked if I could do the induction speech to introduce Dan to an audience that may not know Dan like I feel I do. Sometimes Opportunity Are Based on Previous Actions Because Jared and Dan from Podcast Movement had called on me in the past and I delivered "the Goods," and I had acted professionally in the past when I worked with them, I was given the opportunity to induct Dan. This puts me on a big stage. If I show people that I can handle the big stage (I've been a keynote speaker at some conferences) I can show the world that I can bring value to your event. Mentioned in This Podcast Podcasters Roundtable Grammar Girl Podcast Philip Keller from Blind Faith Live (here Phillip on last week's show) Podcast Awards Order the Messengers Documentary on iTunes go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/themessengers then send me an email with the subject link "I have a message - your name " (dave "at" schoolofpodcasting.com) I will give you a coupon for 40% off your first six months (this offer expired 8/24/17)
Because of My Podcast Randy Goers of the Drone Radio Show When you start a podcast you are seen as a digital influencer and today's example of something that wouldn't have happened if it wasn't because of their podcast is from Randy Goers who produces the Drone Radio Show. He explains how he is able to make great connections, and be able to attend Drone events with a press pass. He recently was able to interview one of the senior vice presidents of Intel who is in charge of directing their drone policy and program. That all happens Because of my Podcast. How to NOT Make Money with a Podcast Today I start a new segment that will appear from time to time with Jessica Kupferman who runs the www.JKMAgency.com and helps podcasters find sponsors. This segment is to help podcasters looking to monetize their podcast by helping them avoid the mistakes other are making. Keep in mind, you do not have to monetize your show. In this first initial segment, Jessica explains that when quoting numbers to a potential sponsor the number people are interested is your episode downloads after 30 days of being available. Monthly stats don't count because in that monthly downloads are episodes in your back catalog (and the sponsor is not going to be in those episodes). While most podcasters are not crazy about the CPM Model (where you are paid a certain amount of money for a thousand downloads, such as 30 CPM would mean when your episode goes over 1000 downloads you would be paid $30). If you're creating a media kit, you need to have a dollar value in mind so that when people ask for it, you're ready. Being secretive about your pricing is not going to help you. Yes, everything is up for negotiation but you have to have a starting price. Phillip Keller (Formerly Trapper Jack on Cleveland Radio) Spotlighting a Living Saint Phillip Keller spent 25 years in Cleveland Radio. He took not one, but TWO stations to number one. His show might be seen as controversial as he interviews people who have been healed by a local Dr. Issam Nemeh. This has lead to national attention. The miracle stories became so commonplace that programs as varying as Dr. Oz and 700 club feature Dr. Nemeh. Phillip does all of his own production and editing even though he is legally blind. In today's interview he talks about: The difference between radio and podcasting and the different broadcast muscles you need to flex What kind of prep he was doing when he was on a #1 Radio Station (and going to work at 3 AM) How he was treated when he got to #1 is amazing. Why he doesn't miss radio. Besides radio, what other things have gone away in his life? How long should your podcast be? How being featured got his numbers to jump How his first podcast was awful. Where did the name Trapper Jack come from? How he turning his podcast into a book using rev.com What is his favorite miracle story (Episode 210) Check out Phillips show at www.blindfatihlive.com and subscribe to them in Apple iTunes Support his show on Patreon Mentioned In This Show Ham Radio 360 The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary Preorder in iTunes after pre-ordering the documentary (see the trailer) and you can get 40% off the School of Podcasting for the first 6 months (send an email with the subject line "I have a message - your name) I will show you how you can also get entered into drawing to get free items like a Heil Pro 40 Microphone, digital recorder and more I will be speaking at the National Podcasting Power Event in Perrysburg Ohio on September 23, 2017. See http://www.nationalpodcastpower.com/ I will also be speaking at Podcast Movement (use the coupon code sop10) in August. I will also be at Podcast MidAtlantic in September Join the School of Podcasting Join worry free with a 30-day Money-back-guarantee Private Facebook Group For Networking Live Group Coaching ($400 value) 16 Online Podcast Courses Covering All Aspects of Podcasting Join Today
Each month I ask my audience a question and they answer and we all learn together. This month I asked, "What have you changed about your show and why?" Some people added/removed co-hosts. Some people updated artwork and intro music. Others start/stopped writing out their podcasts. Some adjusted their attitude, or cut back on some of the podcast promotion. The following people contributed Win from buterfliesofwisdom.weebly.comBrad from wearethecinemaguys.com Anna From Authentic Moments authenticparenting.com Cheri from www.christianscienceforkids.com Dads Spotlight Lawschool Insider Emily from thestorybehindpodcast.com Craig from Inglespodcast Gabe Guys and food podcast Gary and Margaret from Kiwi Mana - Bee Keeping PodcastJenny K From Studio ChaoticJohn The Wired home SchoolKim from toastmaters101.net and onthetablepodcasts.comMark King (Venture Captial) http://markwking.com/Paul from http://www.trinitydigitalmedia.com/Scott from the Computer Tutor Podcast Sean from Slept in Government ClassBryan From Engaging MissionsRandy Cantrel From Pear Advisory GroupZack from Raising Rents (as in Parents) In the end, this shows you can change your podcast. Your podcast is not a statue, it's a recipe. If you want to change it you can. If you're happy with it, keep doing it, but there is nothing stopping you from throwing something out there, seeing the feedback, and go from there. Buy the Messengers and Save 40% on the School of Podcasting You can get 40% the first six months at the School of Podcasting. Just preorder the Messengers on iTunes, take a screenshot, or a selfie with the screen in the background (you know, prove to me you bought it, I trust you) and I will send you a coupon for 40% off your monthly subscription. Just email me and in the subject line put "I have a message - your name" and I will send you the coupon. To preorder go to http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/themessengers The Power Of Distraction I had an awkward moment this weekend. My ex-father-in-law passed away. I wanted to be there for my ex-wife and my ex-step-children. I remember when my Mom died how weird it is to be in a room with your loved one in a box. My goal was to distract them from their Grandfather in the casket. I wanted to make them laugh (if possible) and get them talking about anything. While people alway say, "Thank you so much for coming.." when my oldest step daughter came up and gave me a hug and said, "I'm so glad you came" it seemed a little more heartfelt. It made me feel so good to be there for people in need. WHAT DOES THIS HAVE TO DO WITH PODCASTING? There are times when people have bad days, weeks, maybe bad months, and YOUR SHOW can be the distraction that helps them get through the day. Your show's ability to make them laugh, cry, think, grown, educated, or entertain, can take them away from whatever is bugging them. I saw that today face to face, and it can be huge. So if you're not getting feedback, or you're not selling a course, realize you can be doing a ton of service to people and never know it.
Because of My Podcast Danny Peña’ is Now on Twitch.tv Danny is a Hall of Fame podcaster who shared his story about how he started off with a cassette deck (see episode 506), and ended up playing video games with Bill Gates, and getting a spot on CBS Radio. Well, he has some more good news. He is not partnered with Twitch.tv Twitch.tv has evolved its reputation as the world’s leading social video platform and community for video game culture to now encompass an array of emerging content surfaced by its users. As a result, 10 million visitors gather each day to watch and talk about video games, music, the creative arts, themselves, and other beyond gaming topics with more than 2 million streamers. So in other words, Danny is going to get to record his podcast live in front of millions of people who happen to be his target audience. You will see when you go to http://twitch.tv/gamertagradio that there is a way for people to tip Danny as his crew, and Danny also gets a piece of the $5.99 subscription fee (which gives you more access, and the ability to watch the video on demand). Check out Danny's Show at www.gamertagradio.com The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary Now Available for Pre Order - Very Special Deal I was asked to work with the crew that created the movie, The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary. I created a podcast to give you the behind the scenes view of making the documentary. Well, the movie is now available for Pre-Order. We want it to be #1 when it is released. If you've ever wanted to support the show now is the time. This is a time when independent podcasters can ban together to show the true power of podcasting. It will be released August 23rd. From now until then I'm doing a special deal. I will give you a coupon for 40% off your first 6 months at the School of Podcasting. Just send forward the email of your purchase, take a self with your confirmation, in general, prove to me you purchased the film, and I'll send you a coupon. Make the subject line, "I have a message - Your Name" so in my case it would be "I have a message - Dave Jackson". The price is only $5.99, and you'll save $20 a month or $120 over the six months (before it goes back to your regular price of $49/month) Purchase the movie and get inspired when it comes out and start your podcast today. Here is the link Congrats to Niel, Willie, Ralph, Chris, and John for a job well done. Order the Movie Here Nominate the School of Podcasting for the People's Choice Podcast Awards I've been so busy working on finding good content for you each week, I have failed to announce that you can now nominate the School of Podcasting for a Podcast Award. I would deeply appreciate it www.podcastawards.com as the voting is different this year (no more having the vote every day). So if you ever got any value out of the School of Podcasting or this podcast, please go to and nominate the School of Podcasting in the Technology category Alexandra Harbushka May Be the Most Courageous Woman in Podcasting While all podcasters have to deal with hating their voice the first time they hear it, as well as worry about if anyone would listen or like the show. Alexandra had all those and one more BIG distinction. Her show is about Herpes, and yes Alexandra has Herpes. Her show is called Life With Herpes, and her first episode was one of the most insanely personal podcasts I've ever heard. She reveals how she found out, how she felt, and how scared she was. I couldn't believe what I was hearing. I wanted to have her on the show for a few reasons: If someone can do a podcast and stand up and say, "Hi I'm Alexandra and I have herpes" surely you can find the courage to start your podcast about your hobby or business She is building a community that is super connected because only people with this disease can truly understand what it is like to deal with this disease. As much as there is a stigma around this disease, she hasn't received any...
King of the Niche Podcasts Bill Strand of Chameleonbreeder.com In this 20 minute interview we hear how: Bill has been involved with Chameleon's For Over 40 Years His Podcast Has Lead His Audience to Trust Him and Engage with him on Social Media This trust has to lead to more sales than when he produced an Ezine (back in the day) His supplier can't keep up with the orders and Bill no longer mentions his Chameleon Cages on his show How Bill keeps his family supporting his show His audience loyalty results in them freely paying more for his products so they can support him. Bill is nice enough to share his numbers, and he is getting WAY MORE than the median 200 downloads (he had more than that in one day) Bill's commitment is to delivering value. 2017 Is More Than Half Way Done, How Are Your Goals? It's July, last month the year was 50% 0ver. My plans for this year had two big projects. Revamp the School of Podcasting Update my book, "More Podcast Money." I have not made any serious strides in either of these. Let's not panic. What did I do instead? I launched a few shows testing different hosting platforms (including a show for my cat). I started a Patreon group my weight loss show. I added a "Baby Steps" free video course to drive leads to the School of Podcasting. While learning about more platforms keep me well rounded in what is available for podcasters, it's kind of like knowing about Coke, Pepsi, and DR. Pepper. Do you really need more cola choices? OK, fine, we'll add RC cola. The Patreon experiment is for the book as was having a sponsor earlier in the year. Free Resources You Might Want to Check Out If you're looking for a way to get the word out (and you somewhat have an audience of friends, etc) there is a free tool called thunderclap.it where you pick a day when you send out a tweet (that you create) and it goes out everyone's twitter at the same time (and Facebook, and Tumblr) . You need a minimum of 100 people (according to their video) or it won't go out (the free version let's you choose how many people you need to share. The smallest paid plan is $55 per campaign. I've added this to the Podcasting Resources area. Sometimes reading books will give you an idea for a new episode. While there are resources like Audibible.com (where you can get a free book for joining), you may have heard of this thing called the Library (which I recently got to visit when we had a thunderstorm, and I had no power or the Internet and they did). On a recent taping of the Ask the Podcast Coach show, Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast informed me of Overdrive.com which works with your library card to enable you to download audiobooks and ebooks for free. Kim Krachi from Toastmasters 101 also mentioned Hoopla Digital which is a similar service. Becuase of My Podcast I'm Going All over the World Talking About a Subject I Love Hilda from the Wise Traditions Podcast and her own site holistichilda.com started this podcast by contacting a company where she enjoyed their newsletter but thought it needed a kick in the pants (and she loves the topic). She get involved and now hosts their podcasts. She is doing such a great job they are now sending her all over the globe to talk about the show and be an ambassador. Check out at holistichilda.com and the podcast is at http://westonaprice.org/ Libsyn and Blubrry ready for New iTunes Tags As Soundcloud continues to plummet (and they hope Chance the wrapper saves them the way Justin Timberlake save Myspace?), Libsyn.com and Blubrry.com have already stated (and demonstrated in some cases) how the new iTunes Tags are in place. You can see Libsyn's new layout and demonstration here Mentioned in this Show Happy 100th Episode to The Feed (the official podcast from Libsyn.com Hero of the week Jessica Kupferman from the jkmagency.com for telling advertisers to stick their $6 per episode offers where the sun doesn't shine. Jimmy Iovine says it takes...
I went to two concerts this weekend and underneath all the education and information, podcasters are entertainers. If you're not entertaining your audience, you're losing them. Dictionary.com defines entertain as, "to hold the attention of pleasantly or agreeably; divert; amuse." We need to hold people's attention. The concerts I saw this weekend were Jonny Lang and King's X. Two Concerts by musicians with track records going all the way back to 1980 (King's X) and 1995 (Lang). Jonny Lang released his major label debut when he was 15 years old. Both bands had music in the rotation on MTV (for those that remember MTV) So what does this have to do with Podcasting? Well as both of these bands are now "Indie" we can learn from them. Have a Crappy Opening Act In both instances, the promoters of these shows picked HORRENDOUS opening acts. While the bands have little if nothing at all to do with this, it does make them sound better. Know what you're going to say Both of these bands have what are called set lists. This lists the songs in the order. It's only game plan and can be changed, but when they hit the stage they have a pretty idea of what is going to happen in the next 60-90 minutes. As a podcaster you should have a pretty good idea of where you are going when you press record. I know this seems common sense, but I often here shows start with what should be pregame chatter, "Did you want to talk about _____?" This should've been decided before the microphone was turned on. It's not like the guys in King's X have a big "LADIES AND GENTLEMEN KING'S X" and then Doug and Ty look at each other and ask, "Should we do Groove Machine?" I recently read a book about Van Halen, and bands of this caliber practice the same set for months to make sure everything is smooth. For the Love of God put the good stuff first There is a reason the news often starts with the phrase "Our top story tonight." Both bands came out with great up-tempo songs to get the crowd engaged. 3. Be Original Jonny Lang sounded like he was 15 going on 48 when he came out of the gate. He has a voice that is very distinct, and you know its him. Kings X has a very distinct sound. Did they do something way outside the box? Yes and No. They tune their guitars lower than what is considered standard, and they use a slightly different tuning (for the musicians they tune to C instead of E, and they use Drop D (not C) tuning). So while a little outside the box, all they did was twist a few knobs. These small twists (combined with awesome musicianship) makes them very identifiable. 4. Listen to Your Audience During one song Jonny was playing and singing with his guitar. This is called "Scat singing" and it was pretty cool (and I hate scat singing). The crowd really came alive. Sure enough later in the evening he brought it back. All night King's X fans were shouting requests (they have quite a few albums). One song is called, "King" and one person kept screaming, "Are you going to play King?" Well, they weren't because I was in the front row leaning on the stage and could read their set list (and I took after the convert). Before their first encore, they swapped added it. 5. You Can't Make Everyone Happy One dufas at the Kings X show wrote a note with a song request and was very persistent. Eventually, the lead singer stated they had a set list, and they are prepared to play and some they are not. 6. Have a Cool Logo if You Want to Sell Merchandise Jonny Lang's t-shirt was boring. They pictured his latest album cover which has his picture on it. With the music business in a mess, musicians make a fair amount of money from merchandise sales. For those who want to keepsake from the concert, the traditional "Album cover" t-shirt will do. King's X has a cool logo, with the phrase "First Church of Rock and Roll" with the saying "May the Groove...
Today I talk with Drew Ackerman of the Sleep with Me Podcast. I met him at Podfest.us and I was amazed at the amount of detail he puts into a show that has a singular goal of putting you to sleep. In the interview you will hear: How Drew started his show with not the best of equipment His "Let's See What Happens" attitude How he picks the not too boring, not too entertaining topics. How he pushed through when he thought about quitting What inspired him to start the podcast How he takes it seriously, but not too seriously. What countries just don't get his show. The listener email that left him humbled. His massive amount of downloads reported in the Washington Post Check out Drew's Sleep With Me Podcast at www.sleepwithmepodcast.com Anchor.fm Trying Hard to Be Everything and Succeeding at.... I took another look at Anchor.fm now that you can create a podcast for free. This is another great example of a company knowing NOTHING about podcasting and jumping into the space. Leading people who are uninformed into situations that they are going to hate in a few months. They are going to control your feed if you let them submit your podcast feed "for you" which means later you won't be able to see your Apple stats. As a feedback mechanism, it's easy to receive feedback, but impossible to get it off your phone (and if they knew anything about podcasting they would know this). For now, I'm going to play with it for a week, but getting these files into a podcast (not using their horrible system) is not easy. Ready To Start a Podcast? Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start You get step by step tutorials on 16 courses Private Facebook group to pick the brains of other podcasters Priority email support and Live Group Coaching 30 Day Money Back Guarantee Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start
Even though I asked, "How many strikes do you give a podcast before turning out?" nobody answered with a number. Instead, the answers were "it depends." It sounds that you are going to get more strikes if you are delivering Contributors to the show Cliff from www.podcastanswerman.com Tim From the Sled Dog Podcast Jenny from Studiochaotic.com (personal journal podcast) Kyle from Reckoneer.com Reckoneer is your #1 resource for the race promoter who didn't major in business. Darren from coronertalk.com (thanks for the shirt!) Haley from Adopteeson.com a podcast where Adoptees talk about the adoption experience Larry from goinglinux.com Sean from Slept in Government Class Dennis from Evil Podcast The CUB Approach to Podcast Reviews CUB stands for is it Confusing, Unbelievable, or Boring. If you have any of these, it's time to edit the show. Because of My Podcast: Ray Edwards I attend Ray's copywriting Academy and Ray mentioned how he had a client hire him for a $10,000 job from a podcast Ray puts out for free. This was part two of episode 572, and originated at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/572 July's Question What has changed about your show since you started, and why did you make the change? Contact me, and be sure to mention 577 Ready to start Podcasting? Join the School of Podcasting.com using the coupon listener
We seem to think we don't know what to do, when in truth we don't do what we know. This week I attended Ray Edwards copyrighting academy, and it was pretty cool. I went there as I will be updating the School of Podcasting's website later this year. Also, people that are learning to write copy, probably have a product. People who have a product need customers, a great way to attract customers is via a podcast. So when you hear me say go to where your target audience is, make friends with them, then tell them about your show, I did that repeatedly this weekend. Success is sequential, not simultaneous. Your calendar shows your priorities or your distractions? Everyone has a excuse as to way they didn't succeed. If everything you do is an experiment, then nothing is a failure If it does everything, it does nothing well. Part 2 coming later this week after I take care of my car.
Becuase of my Podcast: Clay From Fish Nerds Clay has had some very cool things happen on his Fish Nerds Show including having a touring opera singer invite clay to do a show at a theater. Check out Clay at www.fishnreds.com The Sometimes Condescending Nature of Radio People Towards Podcasting There are some really cool people from the radio industry that get podcasting. People like Eric K Johnson from Podcast Talent Coach and the Podcast Review Show, Michael Sharkey from the Talent Show, Jeff Brown From Read to Lead, Tim Sinclair from Ringr and My Worst Interview Ever, and Phillip Keller from Blind Faith live GET PODCASTING. I don't want to lump all radio people together. There are times when someone comes across with a condescending tone of voice. It comes across like "Podcasting is a fad, or not "Real Broadcasting." They seem to think that now that the "Real" broadcasters are here and it's time to step aside and let the "real" broadcasters take over. I recently listened to The Sound Off Show with Matt Cundill. In the episode, he was talking about how a recent professional survey company had polled listeners in Canda.Matt asks, "Is the hype on podcasting just a lot of noise and it takes a study like this one to figure out where it really ranks?" What a douchebag. AS if study after study showing podcasting's slow but steady growth, and radio's slow and steady decline aren't enough. This is what I say "Radio People" with a negative slant. This is what I'm basing my opinion on, and when I say "Some radio people have a bias," this is why. How Improv Skills Can Help Your Podcast Today I have Chad Elliot from the Off the Cuff Comedy Improv Podcast, and http://seattleimprovclasses.com/ I appeared on episode 7 and was SUPER nervous as I didn't get this I would be doing improv on his show. I have never done improv. Luckily Chad sent me his book Improv Manifesto: 7 Easy Steps to Confidence, Creativity, and Charisma - Even If You're Shy! (Think On Your Feet Under Pressure with Tools of Improvisational Theater & Improv Comedy.) which helped me get ready. Here are some things I learned. Talk with confidence, even when you're not confident about your answer. You will be amazed at how your brain "Fills in the blank" when you start talking. The key to improv is listening to every word of the person you are working with. If things horrible, it is a learning experience and you will handle it better next time, and will build skills to help get through it better. You can see results when you start doing one improve exercise What Does This Do With Podcasting? When you are 100% focused on what your guest/co-host is saying you are better prepared to ask a better follow up question (than if you had a premade lit of questions). If you have a bad interview, living through this experience shows you that you will survive and equips you to handle it better in the future You can contemplate different stories to pull from an idea (see The Story Factor: Inspiration, Influence, and Persuasion through the Art of Storytelling by Annette Simmons) It builds confidence and can get you our of your comfort zone. This way when podcasting opens the doors to new relationships, you will have the confidence to walk through Face Your Podcasting Fears Chad had a client who said, "You know what I want to do this because I'm scared of it, but I don't want to do it because I'm scared of it." The pros of podcasting outweigh any negatives and if you can make it through the learning curve, you will be so happy you made it through (see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start to start your podcast today) This Month's Podcast Question How many "strikes" do you give a podcast before you unsubscribe (if you have subscribed) or if you don't subscribe how many strikes do they get before you quit streaming their show. Got to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and use the information there. You can send...
New Apple Specs Coming In the future, Apple Podcasts app will support some new features including: One the podcast level you will have Seasons Serial and Episodic podcast types On the Episode level Title, episode number, and season number Summary and episode notes Trailers and bonus content GUID (don’t change it!) I am worried when I read the text, "New subscribers will receive the first episode in their Library, or the current season if using seasons. " As we don't know what "will receive" means. Does this mean it will automatically download an entire season? We don't know. If it does, I can see people abusing this to get more downloads. There are already people sending old content back to their audience just to juice their download numbers. They also mention not to change the GUID. The GUID is a unique number that identifies your episode. Changing this number will have the app seeing the episode as new. You should never change this number. Apple is saying "Don't change this." This is kind of like saying "Don't stick that knife in the outlet" to a two-year-old. In my opinion, this is a bad idea to even give people access to this. New Listener Stats Apple will provide statistics on how many listeners you have, minutes per listener, Abandonment Point, and Average Completion. The statistics are "Launching this year." The other thing I'm worried about is currently people OBSESS over their podcast numbers. They release an episode, FREAK OUT that it's not in their iTunes listing, and want to know why they don't have download number immediately. This will give podcasters more stats to obsess over. Also, you may not be ready for the shock when you find out that only 48% of your audience is listening to the entire of your episode. None of This Matters Yet If I told you there was a new audio format and it was going to sound great and do all sorts of new fun stuff, but there aren't any players that can play it yet the news wouldn't mean anything. You can't experience any of the new stuff until players are available. These new features won't come into play until iOS11 is available (that will have the new Podcasts App). So it's exciting, but the time to celebrate and figure out how to get these new tags into our RSS feeds should be something we worry about later. I'm sure Libsyn, Blubrry, and Speaker (and any other Podcast Media hosts worth anything) will have systems in place shortly. I know patience is not a characteristic of some podcasters, but for now, know things are going to get better later this year. Here are the details from Apple. Becuase of My Podcast: I Got a Gig as an Audio Editor Jeff Perry has had multiple version of shows about podcasting. He has really enjoyed editing them into different forms. He recently landed a job working for Emerald City Productions as an audio editor. Check out Jeff's show at https://podcastingspark.com/ Great Follow Up Questions Make Great Podcasts Your homework for today is to reach out to a podcast you listen to, and let them know you enjoy their show (I call this "putting gas in their tank). For me I did this after listening to Lee Silverstein on Podcast Junkies What Podcasters Can Learn From Kevin Hart I remember watching the comedy special I'm a Grown Little Man and he was hilarious as he shared stories about his family. At the end, he said, "I want to show you why I do this," and brought out his two little children. It was touching, and transparent. I've seen copier salesmen drag their kids around as a gimmick. This just seemed genuine. I've seen every one of his specials since then, and when his book came out, I instantly got the audio version (read by Kevin) on Audible. (you can get it for free if you're new to audible). I always if you can make me laugh, cry, think, groan, educate, or entertain me I'm in. This book did all of that, but the things that podcasters can take away from this story is Kevin's relentless pursuit of getting better at his craft. You...
Understand Before Being Understood About a month ago I left a comment on the Spreaker Live show, and this comment resulted in a response from the host that in a conversation he had with me was "Disproportional." So after we both hissed at each I set up a time when we could talk about this and see how we pushed each other's buttons. We did and it was a great interview. The bad news is my SD Card ran out of room, and my backup (mp3 skype recorder) didn't get it either. I could call Alex back on, but at this point, so much water is under the bridge, I thought I would just paraphrase what really happened. In my comment, there were times when I used ALL CAPS to make a point. Alex is used to dealing with comments from YouTube which are much crueler, and personal that the average podcast comment This was the first time he had been challenged on the podcast side of this content (vs the YouTube side) and it caught him off guard. He apologized for calling me a schmuck, and I explained that when he made a joke about me not having any listeners (because I don't use Spreaker), and that I wasn't up front with people about the fact that I work for Libsyn, and we chatted about that. I explained how I wasn't trying to push his buttons, and then we did something that most people miss out on. We had some cool conversation about topics we have in common. For example, Chris Cornell had just died. Neither one of use quite gets while World Trade Center Tower Number 7 went down. In the end, I look forward to meeting Alex at Podcast Movement. If I had not taken a second to step back, and wonder if there was something I DID to create such a reaction (instead of just condemning the other person) then I would've lost out on an opportunity to learn something (be careful using caps in comments), and Alex wouldn't have been able to see his reaction. Lastly, I think we both gained a new friend. So instead of being so set on proving somebody wrong, instead maybe ask, "Why did you say that?" or "What were you feeling when you said that?" and try to understand before being understood (Which is a lesson I learned from the 7 Habits of Highly Effective People) Seriously, How Do I Grow My Audience? Devlin Wilder posted in a Facebook Group, "Please, for the love of all that's good and pure, someone please help me WITH REAL INFO on how I get the numbers. I don't want to hear I need to have my show out for years or I need to get to 200 episodes or what not. And I've had no luck with Fiverr. I need to know the real deal" This is like saying, "I want to know about making a baby, but I don't want to hear about ovaries, sperm, or having to wait 9 months." THERE ARE NO SHORTCUTS In her book Beyond Powerful Radio Radio Consultant Vallerie Geller states, "in my experience, with few exceptions it takes about three years to build a talk station." She points out that the original Star Trek Series was canceled after three seasons and it was re-runs where the audience found the show. Jerry Seinfeld has framed a memo stating that his show has a poor supporting cast, and most people who saw the test pilot would not watch it again. Gary Vaynrchuck says nobody watched his show for the first 19 months Rand Fishkin tells about his wife, Geraldine, and her travel blog, Everywhereist. For two years she never broke 100 visitors a day (she does a blog). Five years later she gets 1000,000 visitors a month. Source Success comes from feedback, and the ability to look at yourself and ask "Can I Improve This?" Growing up I had a basketball hoop in my backyard. Every time I shot a basket and it bounced off the rim and back at me.... that was feedback. I watched Kareem Abdul Jabar and his sky hooks shot. It was unblockable. I practiced my skyhook over and over and over. Eventually, I could shoot it with my eyes shut. That took time. If you want to quit your job in six weeks, I would recommend that you not even start podcasting. This is like someone wanting to lose 40...
I asked the question: Are you podcasting? If so where and why? If you quit podcasting, why? If you haven't started yet, why? Matt from the Author Inside You Sleep Whispers Podcast Simple Money Solutions Steve Stewart Podcast Editor Jeff had a blog that didn't get traction (for every 2000 blogs there is ONE podcast), he wants his show to be perfect (if you miss perfect you land on really good), is it viable to spend more money (we spend money on bowling, golfing), and what about Web Hosting? I like Site Ground and Cooler Websites. For media hosting use Libsyn and use the coupon sopfree to get a free month Jenny from Studio Chaotic Derek From Life after Sight Loss Darwyn from Dealing with My Grief David from the Magic and Steele (he's the guy taking all the missing E's) Chris from Dad Spotlight Gabe from Guys and Food Brad from Cinema Guys Sean Slept in Government Class Hilda From Wise Traditions Cheri From Creation Science for Kids Jonathan from Trivial Warfare Bill from the Chameleon Breeder Ready to Start a Podcast? What do you get at the School of Podcasting? Step by step tutorials to guide yo through ever aspect of planning, launching and growing your podcast Priority email support Access to the School of Podcasting Private Facebook Group a 30-Day Money-Back Guarantee Just go to Schoolofpodcasting.com/start and sign up today
Comments? 888-56-33228 Podcasting Microphone Shootout Microphone 1 - Audio Technica ATR2100 $59 (Here is Bundle with Boom arm) Microphone 2 - Audio Technica ATR2005 $79 Microphone 3 - Samson Q2U $54 (with headphones) Microphone 4 - Knox Dynamic USB Microphone $39 (here is a bundle with boom arm) Microphone 5 - Audi Technica 3035 $179 Microphone 6 - Heil Pr40 $327 Engage, Listen, and Grow Your Audience with Jonathan Oakes Jonathan Oakes has been producing the Trivial Warfare for two years he has had some great adventures with his audience including participating in some really big trivia contests. Jonathan has always had a love for trivia. He participated in those TV shows where high school teams go against each other. He has taken on entries bars of people (AND WON). Jonathan's audience loves to learn, and love the ability to show their memory skills. You can find his show at www.trivialwarfare.com Today in episode 567 we hear: How Jonathan worked with his co-hosts to set expectations when it comes to dividing any money. He brought on co-hosts that brought in different viewpoints He listened to what his audience wanted (to be on the show) and found a way so that both the show and the listener benefit. He has incorporated giveaways into his Patreon to increase patron in the higher support tiers He uses a Facebook Group to gather feedback on ideas to Check out Jonathan's Show at www.trivialwarfare.com and check out his Patreon Account at https://www.patreon.com/TWA Ready To Start Podcasting? Join the School of Podcasting at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start 30-Day Money-back Guarantee Access to all of our courses Live group coaching sessions Priority Email Support Find out more at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start Next Week is the Audience Poll Episode Are you podcasting? If so why? Did you post and quit? If so why? Have you never launched a podcast but want to? What's stopping you? Call 888-563-3228 or use any of the contact options at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact answer the question by 5/26/17 (be sure to mention your show if you have one) Mentioned in This Show Jonathan's Appearance on "Harry's Show" Podcast Junkies Jessica Kupferman's JKM Agency helps podcasters get sponsors Podcasting 101
Because of My Podcast: Lee Silverstein Lee Silverstein is the man behind the Colon Cancer Podcast and the Color Cancer Network was able to get press passes to a very cool event in his area. Cool Image Tools For Your Podcast I've been working on rebuilding PodcastingResources.com and in the process finding that some resources are gone, and other have been updated. Also in the process of moving items, I've had podcaster inform me of new sources. Today I want to talk about some resources you might know and a few might not when it comes to creating graphics and images. Canva.com Canva.com was my favorite tool for a simple but powerful tool. It included photographs you could include for free, or in some cases $1. It has a set of tutorials to get you up to speed and you can create some great looking images for free (or next to fo free) Pixlr.com Pixlr.com is another graphic program in the cloud. It doesn't have access to photos and such, but it can edit the photos you have, and it's a great tool if you need to resize an image, especially if your artwork for Apple Podcasts is the right dimensions, but the file size is too big as you can have pixlr.com compress it. Vectr.com Vectr.com is a new program to me, and from I've seen is the most powerful graphics program that is 100% free. It works on any platform, and it also has a cloud version. As it is super powerful there is a bit of a learning curve, but if you took the time to go through the tutorials (and they have quite a few) you could make some great looking graphics. Adobe Spark Adobe Spark is my new favorite tool. It has one drawback that I will hit on in a minute. You simply click on what you are trying to make (twitter, facebook, Instagram, etc) and pick a design, choose some colors, spin a wheel to scroll through some fonts, and share your image. So what is the one drawback? Most of these other tools allow you specify custom sizes, but from what I've seen there is no way to specify a file size. So what I do is if I need a square image, I go into adobe spark, create an Instagram image, and then resize it using Pixlr.com New Twists on Old Tools Ecamm Call Recorder is a great tool for Recording Skype, they recently launched Ecamm Live which is meant to record Facebook Live broadcasts that costs $29.95 and has some of the same features as wirecast (but that costs $500). This cost $29.95. Here is a tutorial. A New Podcasting Microphone For Half the Price I've been a huge fan of the Audio Technica ATR2100 microphone. It sounds great. It has both USB and XLR inputs (so it can plug directly into the computer or into a mixer) and it has a lifetime warranty. As I write this, that microphone is $67 the ATR2005 is a slightly more stylish version for $79 Well SP on the Better Podcasting Show found the Knox Cardoid USB Microphone for $40. This microphone looks and sounds very much like the 2100/2005 (it looks like a 2005 with the 2100 switch). There is even a bundle where you get the microphone and a boom arm for $69. When You Step on A Listener's Toes In my twelve years of podcasting, I may have had someone send a nastygram once or twice. This is why I was so surprised to get a nasty email calling me a piece of garbage, and another podcaster resorting to name calling and saying how I had no listeners and other false statements. So what do you do? Well, you could load up your anger and hurt and go out attitude a blazin'. From my experience, this typically does not end well. or Reach out to them and attempt to get an understanding of how your words offended them. Realize this is NOT saying they were wrong for feeling hurt or offended. Everyone is allowed to feel what they feel. Many times when two people are involved in a conversation and someone gets offended chances are the person who did the offended didn't know what they said was so lethal. My Offensive Words On my Logical Weight Loss podcast, I was reading a story about how Americans are giving up...
I Just Launched My Podcast, How Many Downloads Should I Have? This question has no "Set" answer. It depends on a couple of things: How much value do your episodes bring to your audience? (is it any good) How much promotion do you do? What is your niche (a podcast like this - about podcasting - will never have 5000 downloads) Right no 50% of podcasts get less than 200 downloads per episode after 30 days (and 50% get more) with the average being around 2000 (listen to The Feed Podcast for updated stats) Think of Your Podcast Like A Train A steam locomotive has an engine. The engine has to go to where the other boxcars are an connect. So do you. You need to go to where your audience is, and connect. A train announces where it is via the whistle, you need to promote your show to let people know you exist. A train starts off slow, very slow, and build momentum over TIME. So they are slow to start, but once started, hard to stop. My Dad drove a truck, and once had a wreck where the momentum of a couple of tons on his trailer went off the road (he blew a tire) and he was knocking over giant tree's like they were toothpicks, so momentum can do great things. However, it takes time. Today we have Katie Krimitsos on the show, and he is doing great with her show that she has been producing three years. So when you start your podcast, the more you focus on your audience (not the tech, not the stats on an hourly basis) you will build up momentum in your show. Katie Krimistsos on Building a Community With a Facebook Group Katie has been running the Tampa Bay Business Owners group for five years. Together with her husband Chris Krimitsos, they help business owners grow their businesses and connect with the right people. Katie has been podcasting for three years at http://bizwomenrock.com In today's interview, we learn the following with Katie: How to avoid the common mistakes of creating a Facebook Group The Different types of groups and what each type offers. How she makes her Facebook group feel special How she maintains control of her group and keeps them engaged. Why she had a successful relationship with a sponsor, and quit using them. How she grew her coaching business with a strategy that anyone can use. How her podcast fuels her Facebook Group, the Facebook group fuels the podcast, and they both fuel her coaching. Why she almost quit, and what stopped her from walking away from podcasting. Check out Katie's tools for growing your community with a Facebook group, taking that group on a retreat, as well as her private coaching to help you grow your business by going to www.bizwomenrock.com and check out her podcast on iTunes (as well as on her site) Mentioned in this Show Banner Poll - Are you Interested in a Banner Exchange for Podcasters? Ready to Start Podcasting? Join the School of Podcasting Podcast Movement - Use the Coupon Code sop10 to save 10%
Because of My Podcast: Katie Krimitsos Katie is the host of the Biz Women Rock show, and when I asked her how she would finish the "Becuase of my podcast ____" she answered, "Everything" She feels her business, her consulting, courses, and coaching are all based on the relationships she has fostered through her podcast. Bridge Ratings Podcast Report is a Bit Hit or Miss Bridge Ratings continues its coverage of the podcasting space with this latest update which provides never before insight and best practices learned from a three-month study conducted between January 23, 2017 and April 10, 2017. A panel of 2000 persons ages 13 and older were contacted by random digit dialing phone method to both landlines (45%) and mobile phones (55%) in the continental U.S. Phone interviews, on-line questionnaires, and daily diaries were utilized to gauge the consumption behavior of current podcast listeners and potential listeners. The margin of Error for this study is +/- 2.2%. Here are some items I wanted to address Trends in time-spent-listening shown in the following chart reflect a significant reduction in the average time spent per listening session falling by a third between August 2015 and April 2017. "Listening Session" is defined as the portion of each podcast listened to during individual sessions. 56% of our panelists listened to podcasts in multiple sessions. When they mentioned how people find podcasts, their answer was What are the most popular methods of discovering podcasts of interest? 1. Social Media 2. Search 3. Word of Mouth 4. Other Podcasts 5. Streaming Channels 6. Radio Hosts In their conclusion they stated, "“For broadcasters seeking to increase listenership to podcasts by their talent, a significant increase in promotion - both on-air and through social media - would be the primary strategy.”" In their Best Practices Section, they listed the following 1. Producers of podcasts should have a clear idea of the prospect or audience - the target market. Knowing who is the target will help producers stay focused on the topics covered. Audience knowledge lays the foundation for all of the other items on this list. To this I say AMEN. I'm doing a show right now as a test called "Podcast Rodeo Show" where I pick random podcasts and give my first impressions. 2. Be organized and know where the podcast is going. Be considerate of your audience's time and don't ramble. Get to the point. The average time spent with podcasts is 22 minutes with listeners who commit beyond the first five minutes. Podcast abandonment continues to plague non-focused hosts with no clear understanding of how to capture their listeners' attention. The “session” average of 22 minutes also reflects partial podcast consumption, i.e. podcasts of longer length are often listened to in 2 or more “sessions”. This is the point that I want to make sure people don't get wrong. THIS DOES NOT MEAN YOUR PODCAST NEEDS TO BE 22 MINUTES. Libsyn.com (a podcast media hosting company) reports that 84% of the podcasts with more than 100,000 downloads per episode are longer than 51 minutes. Listening to a podcast “in its entirety” often means listening to it in multiple sessions. No Kidding. Really? In a world where both parents are working, taking kids to school, soccer practice before going to their second job, you mean they don't have multiple unlimited hours to sit and listen to a show uninterrupted? I've quoted her before Valerie Geller in her book Beyond Powerful Radio has said, "There is no such thing as too long, only too boring." I recently listened to episode 301 from Daniel J Lewis. It was 3.5 hours long. In spans of 10-20 minutes, I listened to that show over two days. Why? Because I find it interesting. 3. Edit. Edit. Edit. It is easy to start a podcast recording only to find the host and/or guests have rambled for 45 minutes or an hour. Before posting podcasts on-line, producers would be best...
Welcome to episode 563 of the School of Podcasting Have you ever had a problem with something, and then when you stated your problem out loud the answer came to you as you were saying it? You can use that exercise to help your podcast. I recently read about 80% of the book Out on the Wire: The Storytelling Secrets of the New Masters of Radio by Jessica Abel. Jessica went DEEP INSIDE NPR and the creators of This American Life and took lots of notes and shared them. One strategy they use to shape a story is to say out loud, "I'm doing a story about X, and what is interesting about it is Y. They say it's important to do this out loud to a real person. Then to shape your story you use this tool, Somebody does something because of ____(their motivation) but _____(a challenge). If you can't answer the but, then ask yourself, "What do I have?" They have another exercise where their focus setting may be something like. "This happened _______, then this ____, then this ____, and you would #$%&! believe it but ____. And the reason that is interesting to every single person walking on the face of the earth is ______. This is where I draw the line. Sure we want everyone to like our episode, but that is NOT going to happen. If you try to make a podcast that is interesting to every single person, you will go crazy. Keep in mind these people are telling stories, and stories are powerful, but in certain circumstances, they don't really fit. For example, Many podcasters want to make money with their podcast (motivation) but only 10% of podcasters get enough downloads to get big named sponsors. Then this guy start a podcast about horses, and you won't believe it but he got a sponsor when he had less than 100 downloads per episode. He added more and more shows and called it a network, and ignored the CPM model brought over by radio, and now he is making a full-time living with his podcast. The reason this is important is dynamic ad insertion is paying very low rates and uninformed podcasters may take those fees because they feel they can't get a sponsor without huge downloads. If I'm interviewing technology, it may be a piece of technology that eliminates the challenge. Some podcasters have a hard time sharing promotional material with their guests, but podhero.io makes it easy. Your intro Can Make or Break Your Podcast This is from the Book Ted Talk by Chris Anderson Zak Ebrahim did a TED Talk, and he originally was going to start his talk with this paragraph: I was born in Pittsburgh Pennsylvania in 1983 to a loving American Mother and an Egyptian Father who tried their best to create a happy childhood for me. It wasn't until I was seven years old that our family dynamic started to change. My father exposed me to a side if Islam that few people (including the majority of Muslims) get to see but in fact when people take the time to interact with one another it doesn't take long to realize that for the most part, we all want the same things out of life The folks at TED brainstormed and help him come up with this opening Paragraph: On November 5th 1990 a man named El Sayyid Nosair walked into a hotel in Manhattan and assassinated Rabbi Meir Kahanethe leader of the Jewish Defense league. Nosair was found not guilty of the murder, but while serving time on lesser charges he and other men started planning attacks on a dozen New York City landmarks including tunnels, synagogues, and the united Nations Headquarters. Thankfully those plans were foiled by an FBI informant. Sadly the 1993 bombing of the World Trade Center was not. Nosair would eventually be convicted for his involvement in the plot. El Sayyid Nosair is my father. The audience was riveted See video https://youtu.be/lyR-K2CZIHQ Leave Out Stuff That You Don't Need Here is an example from the TED Talks book byChris Anderson(also available on Audible) Once, when I was eight years old, my father took me fishing. We were in a tiny boat, five miles from shore,...
Today on episode 562 Joe Saul Sehy of the Stacking Benjamins podcast explains how he changed his podcast format, and lost 30% of his audience but now is working on his fifth sponsor. Joe Saul-Sehy is the creator and co-host of the Stacking Benjamins podcast. Kiplinger magazine listed it as Best Podcast 2016 and The Art of Manliness listed it in their list of their top podcasts for 2016 (although the show isn't specifically aimed at men). Stacking Benjamins is a light, magazine-style podcast about money, where the goal isn't to teach as much as it's about entertaining people enough that they learn. Over the last four years Joe had to rebrand the podcast twice and after Podcast Movement 2015 completely blew up his format and changed everything. He has five different sponsors and the show comes out three times a week. Today on episode 562 we have a long talk with Joe with some great nuggets. Lessons From Steve Martin (so Far) You're probably going to hear more about this in the future, but I purchased the Steve Martin master class and it is CHOCK FULL of great content (and we haven't' even got to the comedy part yet). Here are some takeaways: Steve went from being on the end of an old movement to the front of a new movement. instead of talking about the same old stuff, he asked, "What hasn't been talked about?" All movies are cult movies. Steve wanted to be funny without telling jokes. When you decide on a bit, you are defining your taste, and your audience is waiting for your taste as you are the authority. They want to know what YOU think. Apple Updates Their Brand - What it Means To You Apple has updated their branding and to change the name of the podcast directory from Podcasts to Apple Podcasts (which ties in with the Apple Watch, Apple iPad, etc) What I'm seeing as a support person from Libsyn is a more than average amount of people where there show does not update (it takes 24 hours to update anyway, and your subscribers get the episode almost instantly). So if it's been longer than 24 hours and your show is still not showing in your Apple Podcasts listing then you might want to check your artwork (I know it seems unrelated, but out of spec artwork causes all sorts of issues). Here are the specifications: 1400x1400px (minimum) 3000x3000px (maximum) Under 500kb Use rGB color space Be a JPG, JPEG, or a PNG file If you need an online tool to help resize or compress your file check out pixlr.com Get 10% off Podcast Movement with the Discount Code SOP10 Podcast Movement is in August and it's going to be a great time. Use the coupon code sop10 to get 10% off your ticket. Staying True to Your Format Joe knows he doesn't want to be another "talking head" about finance talking 401ks. He wanted to be entertaining and also talk about finance. When Joe gets a review that says he's not funny, instead of changing his format, Joe takes that as a cue to work on being funny. Here are some other topics we talk about: Instead of choosing a solo show or an interview show, Joe does both. Joe knew the first version of the show was going to be a test, and purposely made 13 episodes The second version of his show made it 69 episodes before Joe changed his format again. Joe makes sure his intro lets his audience know that this is NOT The typical finance show. He starts working on a show five weeks in advance using the Promo Republic service You have the ranking that you deserve. How he decided to bleep out or leave in swearing How he handles negative reviews How he drew a "line in the sand" with his intro to let people know if this is for them or not. How he used affiliate links as a "sponsor" How he gave his first sponsor a sweet deal to have a big company sponsor his show (which made him look bigger than he was at the time) How he chooses sponsors and the criteria he uses. How he keeps people tuned in during midroll advertisements. Book Mentioned: Steel Like an Artist and the Steel...
Podcasting in the Media: Teen Titans I want to thank Caine Door of the Adventure Frequency for letting me know that: "In the newly released animated film: Teen Titans the Judas contract (Warner Brothers) Kevin Smith is in the movie as himself interviewing a member of the team on his podcast and it's good. He's a known fanboy so he has great questions and brings some levity to the end of the movie after the big final battle scene. I think it says something that they make time for podcasting in the movie." This is just another example of podcasting being more and more mainstream. Thanks to Caine for the heads up. Thress Years Into Podcasting, She's Not Where She Thought's She's Be, She's in an Event Better Place Natalie Echdahl Almost Quit Podcasting - She's Glad She Didn't Natalie Eckdahl, MBA, is a business coach, professional facilitator, keynote speaker and the host of the Biz Chix Podcast which iTunes featured as a top New Business Podcast in March 2014. Three years ago she went to social media marketing world, she joined John Lee Dumas' Podcaster's Paradise and started following "the formula" that everyone at the time did. However, it didn't reap the results that she expected. At one point Natalie launched a mastermind group, and not a single listener signed up. As she unfolds her story today, you will hear how Natalie handles disappointments and turns them into learning experiences. You will learn: I love Natalie's opening. In less than a minute you understand what the show is about, where it's going, and who it's for. My guess is she used Music Radio Creative I also love her closing call to action which uses her two young sons. It makes it memorable and makes her even more human. When to do an interview show, and when to do a solo show How breaking away from "podcasting best practices" had her numbers go through the roof How to get your audience involved with your show. The importance of timing with your podcast Is your podcast in a Blue Ocean, or Red Ocean (see the book Blue Ocean Strategy, Expanded Edition: How to Create Uncontested Market Space and Make the Competition Irrelevant) Personal connections lead to her sponsorship with Aweber How she went from being an attendee to a speaker at Social Media Marketing World How she is promoting her show on social media Starting a business? Work with Natalie by going to www.bizchix.com/workwithme Mentioned In This Episode Bizchix.com She Podcasts Biz Women Rock Stop Chasing Influencers book by Jared Easley Music Radio Creative Aweber Need Some One on One Podcast Consulting? Book a coaching call with Dave (as short as 15 minutes) go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule Start Podcasting Today Tap into Dave's 12 Years of Podcast experience and enjoy: Step by Step Tutorials Private Facebook Group Live Group Coaching Priority Email Support 30 Money Back Guarantee Start podcasting today by going to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start
Chuck Berry died last month at the age of 90. I saw him four years ago at a special event that honored him with tons of musicians (Merle Haggard, Ronnie Hawkins, Darryl "DMC" McDaniels, Joe Bonamassa and Lemmy Kilmister) coming to play his music and honor him. At the end of the night, Berry accepted the Rock and Roll Hall of Fame's American Masters of Music Award, wrapping the Hall of Fame's weeklong celebration of Berry's life. In the end, they brought Chuck out with a band consisting of a lot of his children who knew how to follow their father's (at times) unpredictable behavior (Chuck got confused in the middle of song two, and restarted it). Chuck got us smiling from the very first moment. He said, "It's great to be here. Then again, I'm 86; I'm glad to be anywhere." So here are some things, on Episode 560, that podcasters can learn from Chuck Berry. Now as a guitar player myself, you start playing the guitar hoping to play Stairway to Heaven, Iron Man, Smoke on the Water, you want to be Van Halen, but you don't start there. You start with Chuck Berry, and you start with Johnny B Goode. In the same way that every band has to learn Mustang Sally and Brown Eyed Girl, every guitar player has to learn how to play Johnny B Good. I am no exception. It's not about the tech. Keep it Simple Other musicians had pedalboard were made of technology on top of technology. They could do the river dance as they changed the tone of their guitar with each tap of their foot. Chuck came out with his trusty guitar and plugged into a single amplifier. He hit the opening riff of Roll Over Beethoven, and you could not help but smile. Chuck had one tone, it was Chuck Berry. This was not a drill, this was not a test, right there in front of my was Chuck Berry. He had a smile on his face, and by the third beat, the whole place was clapping along to the music, dancing, or both. 2. Give the People What They Want. Chuck Berry had many styles. Some of his songs had remnants of country music. He played slow blues., You probably don't know most of those songs. If you wanted airplay, you had to play something kids (teenagers) wanted, and could dance to. One other thing, the teenagers were the ones buying the music. Rock and Roll music was new. It was a great way for being rebellious, and the fact that this was Rock and Roll from a BLACK MAN, made it even more revolutionary (this was the 1950s). You will notice that Roll Over Beethoven, Johnny B Goode, Rock and Roll Music and many other Berry titles are pretty much the same song. When he appeared on the Johnny Carson show, he said to the band leader, "It's the same as the last song" as they prepared to play another song. However, those songs like Sweet Little Sixteen, School Days, and others were instantly relatable to his audience. He also had suggestive lyrics which probably made parents offended. Here is a verse from Roll Over Beethoven: Well, if you feel and like it Go get your lover, then reel and rock it Roll it over and move on up just A trifle further and reel and rock with one another, Roll over Beethoven dig these rhythm and blues. 3. Chuck Was Engaging Chuck made sure you were looking at him. in the early days of his career he usually wore black or white suits, but his eyes, mouth, and hands, and especially his legs demanded attention. He would strum his guitar in a way that has hand moved from the back to guitar toward to top. As a guitar player, I can tell you it makes almost no difference where you strum an electric guitar, but it looks cool (and yes, I've borrowed that move). His "Duck Walk" he said in a CBS interview was a mistake. He had slipped and fallen and the "Duck Walk" happened as he was trying to get back up. He noticed the ovation and worked it into his act. Chuck paid attention to what made the audience go wild. 4. Charge What Your Worth There is only one Chuck Berry. Sure everyone from the Beatles, Stones, Elvis, Duan Alman, The...
When you create a recipe for food, you serve it to someone and ask them "What do you think?' They might say, "it needs more salt" or some other suggestion. It is then up to you like the chef to decide if you want to implement that recommendation or not. It's not any different in podcasting, but I feel we don't take the time to ask out audience, "What do you think?" So I decided to do this, and bring you along. I asked two simple questions (thanks to Lee Silverstein of the Colon Cancer Podcast who did this first) and saw what kind of feedback I got. You Think You're Going to Get Butchered, But You're Not If you are asking your audience, if they are your audience - they like you. If they have any negative comments, they will probably attempt to deliver them with kid gloves. By Know What Works, You Can Do More I feel like a bit of an egomaniac today, as much of the show it telling me how much people like my show, but I was more interested in WHY they like my show, and I learned: I make things easy to understand (which is my #1 priority) I am a likable guy I make people laugh I get to the point I'm willing to speak my mind People understand my intentions to help people I'm not judgemental I'm encouraging I share insights into my life and do a great job of relating those stories to podcasting Here are some great ideas on how I can improve my show (from listener feedback): Put episode numbers in your posts for easier searching Try not to repeat the same content on the School of Podcasting as I do on my Ask the Podcast Coach show. (some people listen to both) Mention that I have a newsletter more often Be more confident in my sales pitch. Maybe not so many appearances of my cat. Here are some suggestions from my audience that I'm not going to implement One person said that the phrase "Tackle the technology" was not entirely correct. I like the "Theater of the mind of that phrase, so it's staying. One person doesn't like the "Ladies" that sing my jingle. For now, I love my jingle in the same way I loved the theme music for Johnny Carson. I know much more people who LOVE the ladies. You're Not Going to Please Everyone Some people like my cat and other could live without the "Bernie blooper real." Some people like my intro and other do not. With this in mind, you're not going to please everyone. Follow your heart, and remember a few things: It's your show There is a fast forward button Making An Audience Survey There are all sorts of tools for feedback. You can use speakpipe, voicemail, email, and forms. Here is a quick tutorial to show you how you can use a free tool that allows unlimited forms, unlimited questions, and unlimited responses. https://youtu.be/BvYihe3tah4 Don't Be Afraid To Look in the Mirror Somewhere in your life, you had someone give you feedback, or maybe you made a mistake, but it leads to you becoming better at that task. Constant improvement has been a mantra of mine for many years. You just spent all that time in the kitchen slaving over your podcast. Shouldn't you take the time to ask people what they think? Are You Ready To Launch a Podcast? Join the School of Podcasting and: Get step by step tutorials A private Facebook group for networking Live group coaching (a $400 value) Priority Email support A 30-day money back guarantee Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start Episode 559 first appeared at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/559 Contributors to this Episode J Cleveland Payne - Theinternettoolbox.net Darwin -dealingwithmygrief.com Amanda greatbeetadventure.com Anna - authenticparenting.com Cale- hamradio360.com Randy growgreat.com Carolyn carbonbasedpodcast.com Chris podcastengineeringschool.com themysticshow.net Connie positivelylifeafterfifty.com Craig from ingleaspodcast.com Daniel- theaudacitytopodcast.com Jessica -interviewconnections.com Jeff -http://genealogypodcast.com/ Geoff - dealtalkpodcast.com Jessica -shepodcasts.com - jkmagency.com Juan...
Steve Martin is going to have a class on comedy on masterclass.com, and he said that so many people are asking "How do I get an Agent, or "How do I get a Manager" when they should be asking, "How do I get good." So today I'm going to try and answer the question, what makes a good podcast. I realize that podcasting is subjective, so I'm going to try and put some facts on my opinion. Enjoy episode 558 Becuase of My Podcast: Gary Leland enjoys "Gary Leland" Day in Texas Gary Leland is the king of Women's Fast Pitch Softball, and thanks to his podcast, Arlington Texas named MArch 1 Gary Leland Day. See all things Gary at https://garyleland.com/ Characteristic's of Good Content Have Something To Say Have something to say before you turn on the microphone. After listening to your audience or using your experiences, you have determined you can create content worth listening to. Keep your message in mind. What is the key point you are are trying to make? Make sure all the other points back up your main idea. Be Engaging Engaging by definition is "to occupy the attention or efforts of (a person or persons)." So how do you do that? It all starts in the first few moments of the show. Let your audience know where they're going, and what they are going to see. Let them know how they are going to benefit. If you can use stories to illustrate a point, that's a great strategy. When you have hit all your points and said what you need to say, then you should stop talking. Let your passion come through. Don't try to be someone you're not. If you want your audience to be enthusiastic about something, you have to let your enthusiasm shine through. Be Original. Many moons ago there are ezine articles, and there would be sites that ranked well in Google. So everyone wrote an article and put it on an ezine list. It didn't last. Why? Be most of these sites didn't' have any original material. It was the same stuff over and over. Be Stuff You Can't Get Any Place Else Some of my favorite podcasts are the No Agenda Show, The Bitterest Pill, the Rock And Roll Geek Show. The No Agenda Show does this stuff I call "journalism" where they scour the news and then decipher it. The Rock and Roll Geek show talks music, and (illegally I might add) plays new music on his show. The Bitterest Pill is the story of a stay at home Dad who is trying to make it in acting and stand up. Good Content Isn't Easy or Cheap The first thing that comes to mind when people get into content creation is, "How do I do this quick and cheap" and still make it good. There is a saying that I first heard on Profitcast. You have three things Good, Quick, Cheap, but you can only choose two. I recently had a horrible experience with a web host where I had put multiple domains on one hosting account. One got malware, and they took down ALL of my sites. Sure I was saving 30 a month, but now ten years later when I have an audience, my reputation is taking a hit, and I'm paying hundreds of dollars to clean up the mess. You get what you pay for. Be Authentic Get emotional. A study in the New York Times that show the most-shared content garnered a strong connection in the reader, igniting one of six key emotions: surprise, fear, joy, sadness, anger, or disgust. If you disagree, draw your line in the sand and explain why. Can You Answer A Question? In doing this episode, I typed in the question into google "What makes good content." Can You Answer That Question Quickly? Keep in mind that people don't just want answers. When someone comes in and in a passionate tone asks the question, "Where is your bathroom?!" they want an answer fast. Be Accurate All podcasters start with two things in common. They have no listeners and a handful of integrity. When I listen to the No Agenda Show, and I hear a story that is kind of "out there" they always quote their sources. I trust the words that are coming out of their mouths. When Emily from the Story...
Because of My Podcast I'm on the Cover of a Comic Book Jeremy Dennis explains how he was able to commission a custom comic book cover thanks to his supporters. New Edison Research on Podcasting Edison Research did a telephone survey of 2000 people ages 12 and older. Here are some of the results related to podcasting: 81% of the respondents own a smartphone (up from 76%). It's actually gone up 22% in two years. 50% of people have a Netflix account (more on that later) 60% of people (168 million) are familiar with podcasting (up from 55% last year) 40% have ever listened to a podcast (up from 35% last year). 10 Years ago is was 13% 24% listen to a podcast in the last month (up from 21%) 15% listen weekly (up from 13%) The people who listened weekly average five episodes per week. Their data shows 65% is mobile (Libsyn says this is closer to 80%) 40% listen to the whole thing. 45% listen to most of it. 10% listen to less than half. 5% listen to just the beginning. 77% Click on and listen immediately (stream). 41% download and listen later. 2&% subscribe and listen later People that subscribe, are subscribed to an average of six podcasts. Each year since 2004 these numbers have gone up every single year. Get the slides and see the presentation at http://www.edisonresearch.com/infinite-dial-2017/ One More Thing.. 50% of people have a Netflix account, and 43% of them use it on a weekly basis 60% of people are familiar with a podcast. 40% have listened to one, but 24% listen monthly, and 15% listen weekly. Why? In my opinion, you have a better chance at finding quality programming in Netflix than you do in iTunes. I'm going to do some random experiments on this going forward. Pinecast is a new "Free" media hosting service. It is founded by Matt Basta who is an engineer for Uber. It was founded in August of 2015 (per his LinkedIn profile). Their free hosting has the following features: Demo accounts are limited to three podcasts per account. The podcast import tool is not available for demo accounts. An unlimited number of episodes may be added, but only the most recent ten episodes will be available to view in the podcast dashboard and the podcast RSS feed.* Episode audio is limited to 48MB (per episode). You are free, however, to split episodes into smaller episodes. Only a small subset of the basic analytics will be available. This includes subscriber and listener counts. Episode descriptions will contain a link to Pinecast. Episodes older than the most recent ten are not deleted, but they are not available to view or edit. Upgrading your plan will make them available again. Upgrading to a plan will remove the link to Pinecast from the show's episode descriptions. All analytics data that is collected for higher-tier plans will always be collected for all podcasts (even ones owned by demo accounts), meaning analytics data will retroactively be provided if the account is upgraded. Unavailable Features The following features are not available to demo accounts: Feedback Geo analytics Import tool Ability to create networks Embeddable (HTML5) player Bittorrent downloads Podcast website or blog They have a demo (free) account, Starter ($5/month) and Pro ($50) a month. The pro plans allow you to create a network, and allow you to receive comments on your page, as well as have multiple users on your account. Their free (known as "Community" plans meet the following requirements: These plans may not be used exclusively for marketing, evangelical, or other promotional purposes of any sort. The user's content must provide unique creative or informational value. Things that seem cool but aren't Subscriber counts are pointless. If I subscribe on my phone, my tablet and iTunes it's going to potentially show me as three separate subscribers. I do give them credit for being blatantly honest. On their website it states,...
You can be the media. In a world where what is and is not true, you have the power and distribution to be your own media outlet. I have known Emily Prokop (of the Story Behind Podcast) as we run in the same circles, but I was unaware of her background in Journalism. So when I heard she had a degree in Journalism, I asked to come on and share some Journalism 101 insights. These include: The importance of headlines Getting to the point. How to structure your podcast using the Inverted Pyramid Give people an idea of where they are going Show notes broken into small sections using Subheadings are more informative than giant blocks of text. How she got over "going solo." How to write out your show script that won't results in tons of editing What websites are good resources. Extra steps you can take to make sure your source is trustworthy. Her thoughts on using a Libsyn Podcast Page #podernfamily hashtag The importance of not inflating your numbers Interview tips, and making sure you get the most out of your guest. Talking about sensitive subjects. How long does it take to produce a well researched 10 minute podcast? Her early days of podcasting with a microphone from the Rock band video game. Behind the Scenes of Podfading Emily's first show didn't end well, so she shares some insights into how they didn't set expectations, and in the end it didn't end well. So if you are starting a podcast with a co-host, be sure to make sure everyone knows what is and is not expected. This way you can get back to making content, and not worry about what happens if..... with your podcast as you've already set your expectations. About the Story Behind The extraordinary history of the ordinary. Do you like trivia and fun facts? Have you lost hours to Wikipedia rabbit holes? Do you ever wonder about the history of everyday things in your world? The Story Behind ... is the show for you!. Check it out on iTunes, TuneIn, Stitcher, Google Play Music or on her website at www.thestorybehindpodcast.com Final Thoughts Unlike newspapers and radio, we don't have those MUST HIT deadlines. While you want to publish on a regular basis, we can make sure that the episode is right before we publish it. You can get the best resources (see podcastingresources.com), whip up a great headline, and come out of the gate with great content. Mentioned In This Podcast The Story Behind Podcast How to Male Great Headlines Podcasting Resources Join the School of Podcasting
Today I'm back from Podfest in Orlando Florida. What a great show, there were tons of brand new podcasters looking to jump into the space. This week we share if you had one podcast episode that sticks in your brain, if so why. Joining the Podcast Family 4:28 I share how the Podcast Family came to my rescue when I had a device fail when I got to Florida. Special thanks to Marc Johanssen of the Podcast Gear Facebook Group, and Michael O'Neal of the Solopreneur Hour who let me borrow gear to make my session happen when things broke during travel. My Favorite Episode Is 09:35 Gabe from Guys and Food said his favorite episode(s) were from The Sporkful http://www.sporkful.com/calls-a-root-beer-float-to-cure-the-cancer-blues/ and http://www.sporkful.com/margaret-chos-eating-disorder-advice-to-a-teenage-girl/ Both were poignant and heartfelt depictions of people who are going through pain and the ways that they try to handle it. Their stories are told in an authentic and human way. These episodes stand on their own because of that. However, they especially stand out when juxtaposed to the other, more lighthearted episodes. It reminds me of the TV show MASH in this way. 11:42 Lee From This is Rammy loved and episode of the Social Media Examiner and one of the things he does't is recommend it to his friends. 14:12 Zack Demopoulos of the Rasing Rants Podcast loved the Story of Monty Roberts on the Relaunch Show with Joel Boggess 18:12 Kuldryn from Kuldrin's Krypt loved the emotion behind episode three of the Messengers Podcast 21:30 Emily from the Story Behind Podcast loved the story of Charles Manson's Hollywood. The Dave Jackson Two Question Challenge 25:36 The first question is what do you like about my show, the second question is what you wish I would change. Write and email with the title of "559" and send in a voicemail, or audio by 3/24 Behind the Scenes of My Podfest Presentation My presentation got off to a rocky start, this lead to many voice in my head filled with panic. Things weren't turning out the way I wanted. When I was done, as things had not gone the way I wanted, I assumed it was awful. Yet I was approached by people who told me it was a great presentation. I've said this before, if you aim at perfect and miss, you'll land on really, really good. Quit Obsessing Over Things That Don't Matter People are failing to launch their podcast because they are obsessed over things that don't really matter (color of website, the player your are using). I don't recommend a podcast based on the player or color of the website. Mentioned in the Show Grow Great Podcast Lee Silverstein's Colon Cancer Podcast Horse Radio Network Ham Radio 360 Podcast Kenn Blanchard - Black Man with a Gun Kenn Blanchard Show Join the School of Podcasting
Today I share some insights after talking with Jason Norris of Podcast Logical Chris Holifield of I Am Salt Lake Lee of This is Rammy Ken Blannchard from Upper Marlboro (and black man with a gun) We hear what it is like to start a local podcast including: The struggles to interview local "Mom an Pop" businesses Is it easier/harder to get a local sponsor? How they developed their format How they are promoting the show. Ready To Start Podcasting? The School of Podcasting features: Step by Step tutorials Live group coaching Private Facebook Group Join the School of Podcasting
Comments? Call them in 888-563-3228 Today we talk with Glenn Rubenstein who is the author of the book Podcast Advertising Works. Glenn worked at the TWIT podcast network in both ad sales and as the company’s Director of Marketing. He is also the founder of Adopter Media (https://adopter.media/) World Radio Day Get Hindenburgh Journalist For $1.90 You can purchase Hindenburg Journalist for $1.90 (Not a typo, typically $95) and help fight hunger. You can upgrade to their pro version for $215 (usually over $300). Need help learning the software? Check out the School of Podcasting's Hindenburgh Journalist for Podcasting Course Because of My Podcast - I'm Going to Spring Training for Free Corey Fineran hosts the Ivy Envy Podcast, and shares how his audience is paying for him, his co-host (and their families) to go to the Chicago Cubs spring training in Arizona (in addition to making some great keepsakes for their studio). Podcast Advertising Works - Glenn Rubenstein Interview Glenn has been working in Ad Sales in podcasting for many years and today he shares some insights into: What mistakes podcasters are making What a future of dynamic advertising could look like How to overcome common objections when trying to sell advertising The book Podcast Advertising Works is great for someone who is trying to sell advertisements on their show. If you want more about advertising and monetizing your show. Check out the Episodes with Jessica Kupferman, and Glenn The Geek Hebert What Do You Mean When You Say Edit Your Podcast? Today I'm going to play some clips of a podcast (friend of mine, who has come and said he should've edited) to help demonstrate things you should consider editing out of your show. Michael Butler knows his episode was going down a dark path (he has spoken about this on his show). Luckily for those who know Michael and the Rock and Roll Geek show, we found it funny. Mentioned In This Episode Podcast Advertising Works Rock and Roll Geek show The Bitterest Pill Check out Dan Klass' book Podcasting Solutions Adopter Media Hindenburg Journalist Radio Day Promotion Join the School of Podcasting Risk Free www.schoolofpodcasitng.com/start
Today we have a serious subject that isn't so much about getting more downloads, and new cool gear, but the fact that your podcast can make a difference. I've helped people save money on fear, and help them launch podcasts. I've helped them find ways to grow their audience, and give them insights into creating better content on the Podcast Review Show. I've helped a listener of my Logical Weight Loss podcast lose 100 lbs. None of those compare to the email I received from the producer of Kuldryn's Krypt podcast. Honestly, in September of last year, 2016, I had resolved get my affairs in order and to end my life on Halloween night, the greatest day of the year. I was introduced by complete chance to you. I was on Spreaker, did a search for podcasting and you came up. I chose to listen to you because my birth name is Ryan Jackson and I have a brother name David. Keep in mind I had never heard a podcast prior to this and I have no idea how I or why I was even on Spreaker's website...but I was and there was you were. I am a Patron because you gave me the tools to start my own podcast but more importantly you, YES! YOU! "The Dave Jackson, provided me with something to live for. My podcast isn't great, it isn't even good, BUT IT IS MINE and it provides me with the outlet I need to help other's and once again have a purpose in this world. It is just a very simple fact-if I had not found YOUR podcast when I did, on October 31st, 2017 11:55p.m. a bullet from a Taurus .38 Special would be ending my life. Thank you for never giving up and fighting through...I'm sure through your divorce and the issues with your family it hasn't been easy but Dave, I am will continue to be literal living proof that it's been worth it. Thank you! So today we are going to talk about setting expectations, and crushing it, etc. Suicide Among Entrepreneurs is a Problem We Should Talk About 30% of all entrepreneurs experience depression, according to a study by Dr. Michael Freeman, a clinical professor at the University of California, San Francisco. Depression among entrepreneurs is way higher than depression among Americans in general, which is estimated at about 7% — although that number could be even higher because of the stigma associated with talking about it. Of the 242 entrepreneurs surveyed, 49% reported having a mental-health condition. Depression was the No. 1 reported condition among them and was present in 30% of all entrepreneurs, followed by ADHD (29%) and anxiety problems (27%). That's a much higher percentage than the US population at large, where only about 7% identify as depressed. Here are just some examples In May 2015, 31 year old Austen Heinz, CEO of Cambrian Genomics took his own life. In July, 29 year old Faigy Mayer, CEO of Appton jumped off a New York rooftop. 26 year old Aaron Schwartz, a partner at Reddit, hung himself in 2013. 47 year old Jody Sherman, founder of Ecomom shot himself that year. One of his colleagues, 24 year old Ovik Banerjee, followed a year later. 22 year old Ilya Zhitomirskiy, CEO of Diaspora, took his life in 2011. In Las Vegas one project had three suicides. In an article The Downtown Project Suicides: Can the Pursuit of Happiness Kill You? they mention Jody Sherman (4/13), Ovik Banerjee (1/14), and Matt Berman (4/14) – all people involved in the Vegas Tech phenomenon. Some people are smart enough to see the writing on the wall. Rand Fishkin stepped down as CEO of Moz in part because of his depression.Rand Fishkin In 2010, suicide was the highest cause of death for people aged 15-49, in the developed world. That’s way above death from lung cancer and murder. In 2013 Newsweek pointed out that the suicide rate in America had been increasing since 1999. Why Is This Happening? We get caught up in the should philosophy. I should have more downloads, more sponsors, more whatever. The bad news is your comparing yourself to someone's numbers who are potentially altered. We look...
Once a month this year, I'm going ask you a question and use those answers for an episode. I want to get to under you more, and in general get a better understand of what you like and dislike. This month I asked, "What are those things that make your go "Uggh" when listening to a podcast. They might make your even unsubscribe. SPONSOR: Emerald City Productions Get your first four episodes edited for $15 each (and only $40 after that – for shows up to 30 minutes). Just go to www.emeraldcitypro.com/sop(other companies are charging $99 an episode) What Makes You Unsubscribe From a Podcast? Failure to Get to the Point 4:10 Haley Redke (Adopteeson.com) is not a fan of not getting to the point, and people that interrupt their guests. 5:33 Tracie Bonnick also hates when the podcast hosts hates it when the host of the podcast doesn't let the guest talk 6:05 Glenn the Geek Hebert of Horse Radio Network was on Podcast Junkies and said he hates it when the podcast hosts just runs down a list of questions 6:39 Brian Weber (bartenderjourney.net) hates it when people don't get to the point 7:15 Ishamael Colderon - Hates long intro 7:43 John Wilkerson (www.strugglingforpurpose.com ) hates a super long intro 10:00 Daryl hates a ton of ads at the beginning (Joe Rogan?) as in three minutes of nothing but ads. 11:00 James Aaron of https://2middleageddudes.wordpress.com/ hates people talking to hear themselves talk. 11:53 From new Father Daniel J Lewis (YEAH NOODLE BABY) from the Audacity to Podcast said, "I go "ugh" when a conversation with a guest starts with "getting to know you" stuff. I don't care about the guest's background until after I care about their message." 12:40 Riding the Volume Knob 13:10 Kathe Kline from Rock Your Retirement goes nuts when she has to keep adjusting the volume 14:30 John Hilman hates it when the hosts and guest have WAY different volume levels. 15:50 Emily from The Story Behind Podcast - Four People Around One Microphone makes her turn off the show immediately. 17:20 Kuldrin Fire (kuldrinskrypt.com ) hates the word, "Right" and having to ride the volume knob, and he hates when hosts put down other hosts. 19:50 Inside Jokes 20:15 Emily from The Story Behind Podcast when they forget they have new listeners and talk about things from past episodes 20:53 Mark Des Cotes from the Resourceful Designer (and http://solotalkmedia.com/)hates it when TV Show podcasts refer to the actress name only (and not the character) 22:23 Emily from The Story Behind Podcast hates people who are note authentic and giant commercials. Experts Who Don't Know What They're Talking About 24:00 Connie From the Small Business 101 Podcast couldn't believe the advice she heard about starting a business 27:00 Hall of Fame Podcaster Danny Peña from Gamer Tag Radio hates it when Podcasts about Podcasting promote the importance of New and Noteworthy (see newandnoteworthy.info ) 27:30 Cedric Green hates it when people Curse.(cookingwithceddy.ws - coming soon). It unprofessional and you can't listen to it with kids in the car. 28:35 Emily from The Story Behind Podcast judges harshly when easy to remove ums are not removed. 30.17 Michael Blakston (Road Noises Podcast) hates mouth noises 32:00 Boomy Room Noise 33:14 Cheri Fields (Christian Science 4 Kids) had some show that were so boomy she couldn't understand the podcasters due to the room noise 35:07 Nivek Thompson of Real Democracy Now Podcast - hates when the host sounds like they are in a barn. 35:50 Chris Hache (chrishache.com) - If your podcast is not pleasing to my ears you are gone! 36:25 Things You Say That Drive Me Crazy Try Price (Completely Comics) hates when a podcaster will "be right back." 37:12 Rob Kerns from Living the Vet Life - When a podcast is filled with complaints, but there are no solutions proposed. 38:55 Steve Stewart - hates it when people don't edit, and when people kinda, sort...
Today I want to share what I do to put together an episode. My example will be the the latest episode of the Logical Weight Loss Podcast. I also do a podcast microphone shootout with microphones in the $300 range (last week we did a shootout with microphones that are under $100) This Week's Sponsor: Emerald City Productions This week's show is sponsored by Emerald City Productions. Get your podcast edited and sounding great with this awesome special. Your first four episodes will be $15 each (after that they go to the regular price of $40). Check them out at www.emeraldcitypro.com/sop Because of My Podcast I Got A New Job: Super Joe Pardo Joe Pardo is the man behind the Dreamers Podcast, and also the organizer of Podcast MidAtlantic. Today Joe shares how his podcast got him invited to an event. At that event he got to meet some influencial people. Those people got to know Joe, and through his podcast they knew what his credentials were, and offered him a job. Find Joe at SuperJoePardo.com Being the Scenes Of Making a Podcast Episode So I had someone who was surprised at the amount of work that might go into a podcast. So this week as I prepared to publish an episode of the Logical Weight Loss Podcast, I took notes. There is one key point here. Length of time spent on and episode does NOT equal more downloads. You can spend all day working on content that doesn't connect with you audience. So here is what I did. First based on the ideas in the book [easyazon_link identifier="0849921902" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Secrets of Dynamic Communications: Prepare with Focus, Deliver with Clarity, Speak with Power[/easyazon_link] I came up with my main idea. Which is, "Based on mainstream media, it is easy to feel out of place if you are alone for the holidays. This along with the numerous activities of the holidays can lead to stress, and stress can lead to emotional eating." That is where I started. Here is a little confession. Last year I was "Alone" for the holidays. It turned out it wasn't that bad. Different? Sure. Bad? Nope. I wanted to help anyone who might be feeling down for the holidays. So I set out for strategies and insights for those who are alone on the holidays. I started with Google. I looked through about 10 articles, and ended up reading five. I pulled from my own experiences. I looked into resources for people who really were in a bad place and then made sure they were legit. I then went down a rabbit hole, when I found iPrevail. A pretty cool website that offers live chat for those who need to talk, and for those who want to go deeper, the offer some online courses. Intrigued, I signed up and took one. Note: This wasn't needed to complete the episode, but I always go with the thought "If it interests me, it probably interests my audience." I then looked at the holidays, and tried to find things that might be entertaining. I injected some humor to stop the episode from being so dark. I found examples I thought people could relate to (overly gushy Jewelry commercials), decorating a Christmas Tree, and weird family members. All of these to point out that the holidays are not a world of splendor filled with Rainbows and Lollipops. I took some time to figure out what topics I wanted to hit first. In other words, I tried to take the smattering of ideas and organize them into a stream of ideas that flowed nicely. I also through in a quick segment on an egg cooker I recently purchased. Finally I recorded it. My show notes were pretty done as I now make my show notes first to organize my thoughts. I recorded directly into my [easyazon_link identifier="B00KCXMBES" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Zoom H5 Four-Track Portable Recorder[/easyazon_link] , and then took that recording and put it into Hindenburg Journalist ,and added the intro and outro music along with some transition music. If you need music check out podcastingresources.com. I uploaded the file to Libsyn.com and copied and...
Today we are going to get our gear on. All you gear heads are going to love this. We are going to talk about some of the best places to purchase gear, we are going to talk about mixers, and we are going to compare three microphones that are under $100 Because of My Podcast - I Had to Quit My Podcast John Dennis is the co-organizer of the Thrive Make Money Matter conference, and the moderator of the Podcasters hangout Facebook group. He is also a podcaster with with smart time online, or he was until his podcast brought him so much business he had to stop podcasting to take care of his customers. AMAZING! Best Places To Shop For Podcast Gear Isn't the quick answer, "Amazon, DUH"? Not always. Here are some places to check out. Amazon When it comes to shopping for selection and price, it is hard to beat Amazon.com Now for the record, I am an affiliate for Amazon. However, you will hear where this may not always be the best place to purchase your gear. If you want to shop via Amazon, please use our affiliate shop at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/shop The other advantage Amazon has is if you are an Amazon Prime member, you can get free two day shipping Same Day Music If you were going to purchase an Electrovoice RE320 Microphone you might be tempted to go to Amazon where the price is $279. Did you know that Same Day Musichas the Electrovoice RE320 microphone for $299 and they have non-new versions for $269 AND you don’t have to pay tax on your purchased unless you live in New Jersey. BSW BSW (www.bswusa.com ) is all about audio and broadcasting so they have some niche items that you may not find in some places. They also run specials and have bundles that you won’t find at some places. For example if you wanted to go totally pro and buy an Elecrovoice RE20 Mic, 309A Shockmount, BSW Broadcast Microphone cable & REPop Filter Package it would be $479. If you bought the equivalent at Amazon. B & H Photo Their prices are typically about the same as others (occasionally more expensive), but if you can’t find it in another place, chances are you find it at BNH. For example they have a package for the RE2o that has a cloud lifter.. The other thing you will find at BNH (and you will have this at BSW) is a knowledgeable staff. For example one package with the RE20 comes with a cloud lifter which boosts your signal (which is a pretty good idea). They have another package that has the RE20 and the DBX 286 preamp (a totally pro setup) Podcast Stock Test If you were using a microphone like the Heil Pro40, or a Sure SM7B, these need a lot of gain to work properly. One Solution is a piece of equipment called a "Fethead" so I went to the above mentioned place. BNH – Yes $89 Same Day Music – No Amazon – No (suggested a cloud lifter) BSWUSA – No So like I said, it helps to know where to shop based on what you are looking for. Do I Need a Mixer What is an Audio Mixer? If you and your co-host are in the same room, and you are playing music in your podcast the purpose of the mixer is to allow you to adjust (mix) the audio levels of you, your guest(s), and the music so the listener does not have to ride the volume knob and make constant adjustments. Key Word Here is NEED When I say NEED here, I mean “Can’t do it without it.” You can always find a use for a mixer, but I’ll explain when you NEED one, and when you WANT one (there is a big difference). Keep in mind that the simpler you keep it, the less headaches. The more you add, the more things that can go wrong. When You Need a Mixer? If you have multiple people in the same room. Everyone should have their own microphone, and that should go into a mixer. If you are mixing in live music and sound effects. When You DON’T NEED an Audio Mixer If you are recording a solo podcast and you are going to add any music or sounds in later. When You DON’T NEED a Mixer, but Probably Could Use One If you are doing a show with a co-host or guests who are remote. You...
Lee Silverstein got a call on New years Eve to let him know he had cancer and needed Chemotherapy. Lee is the man that gave "The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary" film it's name. He is a messenger for his audience. He delivers stories that provide hope, information, and inspiration. Check him at out www.thecolorcancerpoddcast.com Today's Show it brought to you buy Emerald City Productions SPECIAL DEAL: Four episodes edited for $15/each. Then after that, it's only $40. They will edit out ums, etc. remove noise, adjust volumes, and make you sound fantastic. For more information go to http://www.emeraldcitypro.com/sop [powerpress] Lee Silverstein Delivers Hope With His Podcast Lee Silverstein started a podcast that he wish he had when he was told he had stage four colon cancer. Lee has been battling cancer since he was five years old, and he considers himself more than "A podcaster," but a messenger. He delivers hope, information, and inspiration. Today we hear: Feedback from his audience that brought Lee to tears How Lee has secured three sponsors by finding products that fits his niche perfectly How Lee had strict criteria for his sponsors What pitch Lee uses to get sponsors. A "Because of my podcast" story that you HAVE to hear. Podcast Glossary "E" Episode zero Episode zero is a podcast episode that is often a simple introduction episode used as a placeholder as you need one live podcast in iTunes. In my opinion, I would do more than introduce yourself. We always want to deliver value in our podcast episodes, and right now your audience doesn't know you, and probably (to be honest) doesn't care who are what you are. They are asking, "What is in it for me?" Be sure to give them something that makes them wish there were more episodes. Why My Eleven Years of Podcasting Sets Me Apart I recently discovered another "Podcast About Podcasting," and was checking it out. I'm sure the host is a fine person that loves their family and wants to help their audience. Some people come into the space, and only repeat the favorite memes at the time and never go about checking if they are true. So I threw up in my mouth a bit when I heard them perpetuating the same old podcasting tips that are just wrong. This included The Blue Yetis is a great microphone (it is if you are in a very, very, very, quiet room - which 99.9% of podcasters are not - so it's NOT a great microphone) You only get 8 weeks to be in new and noteworthy (TV show podcasts go in and out of New and Noteworthy all the time) You should launch with at least three episodes so when people subscribe you get three downloads (this is false. It does not happen automatically. Your listen would have to choose to download the back catalog) My friend Ravi from Digital Access Pass as well as two podcasts (subscribeme.fm about membership websites, and Cut to the Chase )has a new book out called Confessions of a Wanna Be Podcast Star that goes over many of the myths that a puked out over and over. In the book he covers these myths and much more. Now for the record, Ravi uses a Blu Yeti, but thankfully in his book explains how you need a really quiet room (which he has). I was quoted quite a bit in the book, as well as other podcast consultants. In some cases, Ravi did his own investigation and provided screenshots to show the results of his research. I read it over two nights and found it an easy read, will be pointing people to it in the future when I see they have been sucked into the bad advice train that comes through the Internet on a regular basis. Take Aways From DC Podfest This was a great event for me. I met so many people who I had never met and were brand new to podcasting. The event was run very professional, and all the speakers were great in keeping to their time slots. One of the coolest phrases to describe what we do as podcasters. We are digital influencers. Put that on your business card. I heard about Amolto from...
Hindenburg Journalist Noise Reduction The latest version of Hindenburg Journalist Software (slowly becoming one of my favorites for people who "Aren't too technical"). They have a new noise reduction feature that is super easy to use, and actually not bad. Here is a video of it in action Grow Your Audience Using the KFC Approach If you live in the US, and maybe outside you are familiar with a certain Colonel Sanders who started Kentucky Fried Chicken. You also notice that over the years they have introduced grilled chicken and changed their name to KFC. This name change provides less emphasis on the word FRIED which in the world that is becoming somewhat more educated on better food choices might serve their sales better. Today I'm going to share what KFC stands for based on a book I'm listening to How to Make People Like You in 90 Seconds or Less by Nicholas Boothman. You can get the audiobook for free by going to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/audibletrial (If you want to be an affiliate for audible, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/audible ) The part is Know what you want out of podcasting. I've said before that you need to know WHY you're getting into podcasting. If you don't, you'll never make it through the how. Are you looking to be seen as an expert? Then maybe you should do some Q & A. Are you looking to get people to know and like you, then maybe it's time to ditch the interview format and talk directly to your audience. If you're trying to get a message out, then come up with a hashtag so you can track your progress. The other thing this does is it helps you know if you're being successful or not, or if you're even on track. The F in this instance stands for find what you are getting. When I get feedback from people, they seem to like my style. They say I seem laid back, and I break things down into easy bite size chunks. They appreciate the fact that I occasionally try to get your to laugh. In the past, I've told you about surveymonkey.com and polldaddy.com and how I've used those services for surveys. My favorite tool for this now is Google Sheets (sheets.google.com). You can easily take this spreadsheet tool, and with a few mouse clicks turn it into a survey for your audience. Unlike the previous tools I mentioned, it is free, and there are unlimited questions and unlimited responses. But what if the feedback you're getting isn't what you were expecting. What if things are going in the wrong direction. You've heard me quote Ryan K Parker of Foodcrafstmen.com for years. I quote it because it's true. No one will punch you in the face if you change your podcast. In fact, look at any long running series on TV, and you will see how things evolved. Many times that was because what they found out was that their ratings were going the wrong way. Not it takes courage to be able to have people leave your feedback. If you go back to the beginning, when you KNOW what you want out of podcasting, you will be willing to tweak it to get what you want, as you give your audience what they want. Many Streams Make Up A River Launching my New Godaddy Reseller Account Recently we've been talking a fair amount of about sponsorship, so I want to restate something. YOU DO NOT HAVE TO MAKE MONEY WITH YOUR PODCAST. If you are looking to have some income one of the things you might consider is instead of trying to get a big giant paycheck, get a lot of small checks. Earlier this year I added some features to the School of Podcasting and raised the prices quite a bit. It turned out those features weren't exactly what people were looking for. So, I tweaked some things, and adjusted the pricing. I also looked at the financials of the SOP. Part of the expenses for the School of Podcasting is my ongoing addiction to buying domain names. Yes they are only $9.99 a year at www.coolerwebsites.com (more on that in a second), but when you have over 100 domains, that adds up. My solution was to eliminate the middle...
Today I share my story on how I secured a sponsor for my show. I'm doing this as an experiment as I prepare to update my book More Podcast Money Next year. I also share the behind the scenes of what it was like to take on a sponsor. There are some things that I have to tackle mentally. Emerald City Productions - Our Sponsor 1:15 Emerald City is running a special go to www.emeraldcitypro.com and tell them you are from the School of Podcasting and have your first four podcasts done for $15 an episode. My Favorite Podcast Is 2:50 I'm working on the last episode of the year where we all share what our favorite podcast is (you can only pick one, and no, it can't be yours). Then be sure to tells us a little about it, and WHY you like it. Also, be sure to tell us a little bit about your show and where we can find it. So its free promotion for your show, and later I get these transcribed and turn them into a book. The deadline is October 31. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/favorite16 Getting A Sponsor For Your Show 4:30 Today I share my story on how I secured a sponsor for my show. I'm doing this as an experiment as I prepare to update my book More Podcast Money Next year. I also share the behind the scenes of what it was like to take on a sponsor. There are some things that I have to tackle mentally. Getting A Sponsor For Your Show Today I talk with Jessica Kupferman who has been selling advertising for a very long time (back in the day on banner advertising) and has been podcasting since 2013. I know her best for her Shepodcasts.com show which she does with Elsie Escobar (it's a fascinating take on podcasting from a Women's point of view). Jessica just launched jkmagency.com an add agency that helps sponsors find podcasters, and podcasters find sponsors. Here are some of the insights from today's discussion You need to know how many downloads you get per month If you don't have a ton of downloads, but you have an active community, that may enable you to secure a sponsor You don't need a media kit if you don't have one. Jessica can create one for you. If you're pricing per episode, you might as well flush your money down the toilet. The smallest contract/campaign she sells is three months. She will go two months if there are no other options. Podcasters should be open to having the sponsor on the show to help create content. In regards to platforms, sponsors are looking at Twitter and Instagram followers. You just need to create a report once a month Never lie about your stats. Not only does it make you look bad, but it also makes podcasting, in general, look bad. How do you figure out what to charge for your podcast? The current standards for CPM is $15-$100 which is why it doesn't work for most podcasters and is the worst way to sell your show Can unique genres get a sponsor? (i.e. Science Fiction movie reviews) To be considered for adds go to jkmagency.com/considerme She also is a co-host for She Podcasts The Mental Side of Podcast Advertising 34:00 When you take on an advertiser, you have a couple of things to consider. You need to make sure your sponsor fits your audience and is something you can talk about honestly. When you promote something that you don't believe in, that is (in my opinion) the definition of selling out. Make sure you are aware what you will be delivering, and then deliver it. Remember who your TRUE audience is. Having multiple audiences can be a struggle. My audience is you. You've been with me for almost 12 years. If I pay too much attention to promoting the sponsor, I lose the true audience (again, you). If I don't pay enough attention to the sponsor, I lose the sponsor. The problem is I'm being paid for a 15-second spot. I recorded the spot four times last night, and the first one went over two minutes long. I figured out what I needed to say, and figured out how to see it as quickly as possible. This first ad was a bit longer as I needed to introduce you to the sponsor. I've always liked he way...
Comments" Call 888-563-3228 I've spoken about Corey Fineran before and how his Chicago Cubs podcast Ivy Envy helped get a rule changed in Major League Baseball. Corey's boss saw the impact podcasting creates and talked Corey into starting a podcast for his job. Corey's podcast helps high school students with special needs transition into the workplace. It went over well. It lead to him starting Next Up (His own business) Here are some key points: They tried it to see if it would work. They got feedback from their audience, and listened to it, and acted on it. They updated their equipment after they proved the concept. Corey's goal is to help as many students as possible. His niche (students with special needs) is often overlooked, or has no budget. So he created the content that was needed. One night it was speaking with his brother in law (who is well versed in running a business) and they realized that he could reach more students and have a larger impact if he did this on his own, and start his own company. So Corey: Used his brother as a resource to launch the business Converted his current employer into his first customer Used his mother (an accountant) to help with taxes Growing His Business Corey found that educators are not used to being "pitched." The tried and true strategies of mass emails, cold calling, etc were not going to work. So he did what any good podcaster would do: He went to where his audience was. He started attending events where he could talk face to face about his products and services. Common Podcast Lessons and Truths Translate to Business Listen to your audience and be open to suggestions When you have a great podcast people will spread the word about your show When you can, the best way to get feedback from your audience is face to face. It is also the best way to start building those relationships. While your audience can become your brand advocates, so can your family (so make sure they know what you are up to). Save at Podfest Us the coupon code earlybird at www.podfest.us Mentioned In This Show www.dcpodfest.com Submit Your My Favorite Podcast Is Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/favorite16 MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE Membership Guys Podcast Marketing School Podcast Audio Technica 2100 (Dave's Preferred Microphone) Launch Your Own Podcast 30 day Money Back Gaurentee go to http://www.theschoolofpodcasting.com
Today we have some lessons from fast food that apply to podcasting, and I talk about zagging when everyone is zigging. Comments? Call them in at 888-563-3228 Bernie's Greatest Hits 1:58 My cat is pretty popular on this show as he chimes in all the time. When I went to Pittsburgh last week apparently he got a record deal. He's releasing "Bernie sings the hits" Someone Is Doing a Show Like Mine - So I Didn't Start my Show 3:07 One of the most frustrating parts of being a consultant is seeing someone who has the right stuff to create a podcast, but they are more skilled at finding reasons not to press record than actually pressing record. Today I have two points I want to make Someone will come to me and say, “I want to do a podcast about ______” but someone is already doing a show like that. The first thing I say is to go to iTunes and see when their last episode was published. Many times the person has already hung up their microphone. But what if they haven’t? Let’s look at McDonald’s. Here are some interesting facts (well facts according to Wikipedia). McDonald’s was not the first hamburger chain. A&W was first in 1919 followed by White Castle in 1921. McDonald’s didn’t come about until 1940. Fun facts: McDonald’s started as a barbecue joint. They found that hamburgers were more profitable. So they started in one direction, and then followed what their audience wanted. I always say your podcast is a recipe not a statue. You can change it any time you want. White Castle developed the supply chain and automation to have a nationwide food chain way before McDonald’s did. But when McDonald’s did, they didn’t recreate the wheel. They looked at what others were doing, and borrowed the best, and tweaked the rest. Now when burger king came along in 1953 did they say, “I would open a restaurant but someone else is doing “Assembly line” hamburgers? No. They didn’t recreate the wheel, and they tweaked it (adding flame broiling and “have it your way” at Burger King). What is the one thing that is common here? Well in the US apparently we can’t get enough of hamburgers. If you throw some meat on a bun and squirt some ketchup on it, we will eat it. In America I think if you put enough ketchup on anything we will eat it. They saw their competition and looked at ways to innovate. Breakfast was introduced. Bigger hamburgers like the Big Mac were introduced in 1967. Later the innovation of the drive through window. So if someone is doing a show like yours, WHO CARES, if you think it will be fun, if you think people will enjoy it, DO IT. The WORST thing you can do for yourself in podcasting is COMPARE YOURSELF TO OTHERS. Podcasting is like golf, while there is competition, you are really only competing against yourself. Now to my second point, and this build on innovation. Todd Cochran recently launched a new Podcast Legends show and it is interviewing podcast pioneers (people from 2004 - sorry Chris Hardwick is not a Pioneer) and one of the things I forgot about (I started in 2005) was the WHACKY shows that just had you go WHOA!?! Yeast Radio was by Madge Weinstein and was one of the most subscribed to podcast in 2005. Madge would say outrageous things about the government, about her hygiene (she was often bloated), and in general said things often people only think. She was an angry, jewish, fat, Lesbian. There was one other small twist. Madge was a dude (Richard Bluestein ). One other thing, if you could handle the language, Madge was pretty darn funny. Madge was the queen of tuning in because you didn’t know what to expect. The really cool thing was there was NO WAY that this would EVER be on radio or TV. It’s kind of what made podcasting special, unique, and intimate. Madge is still going strong at yeastradio.com One person did a show called the daily download where he recorded his thoughts while using the bathroom... Dave Slusher from the Evil Genius Chronicles mentioned how one podcaster...
Today we in this episode: We have a great because of my podcast story that has someone getting paid to do something they would do for free We tackle some of the podcast jargon starting with the A's We revisit the File For Download debate in a podcast smack down! A tale of sleazy guests And we remind you that you never know who is listening. Because of My Podcast Lucas Apps Podcast leads to relationships, and those relationships lead to opportunities. Those opportunities can lead to more relationships (you get the idea). Lucas ended up getting paid to do something that he loves - because of his podcast. Check out Lucas’s show at triangletactical.com Can I Podcast With a Built-in Microphone? 8: 53 If someone invites you to go golfing. The host shows up with their golf club, and another friend shows up with a pool stick, and you show up with a hockey stick. Sure you can attempt to golf with a hockey stick and a pool stick, but compared to the other people who are using the proper equipment it is going to be obvious that you are not using the right equipment. This doesn't mean you need to spend $1600 on equipment. You can start with an Audio Technica 2100 with a pop filter and mic stand for $93 (full disclosure bestpodcastinggear.com is my amazon affiliate site). The Wrong Podcast Gear Can Mess With Your Head I did an hour session for International Podcast Day and to make a long story short, I brought along a microphone (as I was on the road) and then locked it in an office. I HAD to use my built in microphone. I was embarrassed. While I think most of my presentation was OK, I would be the first to admit that this was not my best presentation. I had notes in front of my, but in my head, I just kept hearing a voice in my head shouting that I sounded like a hack using a built-in microphone. Had I had access to the Audio Technica 2100 with a pop filter, I would've been relaxed and more focused. I Can't Believe ____ Is Listening to my Podcast! 14:20 Try not to use the word "only" when talking about your audience. I "only have" 20 downloads. Check out Podcast Legends by Todd Cochrane Here is the Episode where he talks about his phone call with Steve Jobs. I share a story about talking with Michael Hyatt at the New Media Expo and finding out Michael Hyatt listens to my show. Check out Michael's Book Platform Sting explained on the Tonight Show how he had three people in the audience of a "the Police" show. He interacted with them and made it very intimate. It turns out two of them were DJs who started playing their music. Cal Nelson of Ham Radio 360 had Adam Curry (one of the people who helped invent podcasting) listens to his show. The Libsyn File For Download "Discussion" 24: 15 A few episodes ago Mike Dell (a friend of mine who I've known for years) stated my advice about when and when not to use "File for Download" on the Libysn platform was "bad advice." Mike is a great guy, and we are going to have to agree to disagree on this. The fact that I work for Libsyn as a support person and he works in support for blubrry.com is probably not a coincidence. Two years ago (roughly) I had severe problems with my Wordpress install. One of the things I did was move my RSS feed (which was getting pounded at the time). Luckily at the time I had been publishing my episodes on Libsyn (and copying and pasting the link) into Powepress. Now because I set these episodes up using the "Add New Episodes" in Libsyn, when I switched my feed from PowerPress to Libsyn, my Libsyn feed looked just like my PowerPress feed. Last week I talked about how using File For Download option in PowerPress is not a great idea. People Like Pat Flynn and Cliff Ravenscraft have recommended that strategy. That makes sense for them as they have multiple podcasts and they are using ONE libsyn account and using their Powerpress. But they are missing out on some automation that would not hurt their WordPress install. So here is my point, if you...
Becuase of My Podcast - Rick Seizemore of VRStudio Workforce Rick Seizemore from VRStudio Workforce shares how your podcast will help you land guests, and those guests can then point people to your website. Your site then becomes an audio business card that can capture people’s attention. This is what the VR Workforce Studio Podcast Does Is Podcasting A Ponzi Scheme? I got an email from a friend of mine who has kind of "had it" with podcasting. He said, " I have recently done some calculations and have come to the conclusion that the hours spent podcasting would be better spent doing other things, like narrating audio books and maybe even some work around the house. I am doing a weekly video show via Skype, being streamed live on YouTube. I use Wirecast to make it look professional, and I have been releasing the audio as a podcast. I stopped the podcast side this week. I said when I started podcasting a couple of years ago, I would do a serious review at the two-year mark, and have concluded that while I have learned much I will be using for audiobooks, and am glad I did it, to continue would be a waste of time. Here's the part you probably won't agree with: In the 80's Amway came through this area, and a lot of people joined and got hyped up (me included). After a while, it became clear that a lot of people at the top were making money, but it depended on a constant supply of fresh "believers" to fuel their incomes. People who started early were making money, but the thousands below were being Nickle and dimed and were doing nothing but financing those above. It worked as long as everyone believed they could make it. Podcasting today is a similar type of pyramid structure, where everyone who started before 2007 or 2008 are making an income off of the believers below. (I find your motives pure, and I appreciate that.) It is VERY important for those below the median numbers (Around 120 according to Rob), to believe there is no discovery problem. That way they keep paying their $20 a month to Libsyn, buying books, Wordpress plugins, and tools for podcasting and going to conferences. No matter how good your content is, the average basement independent has about 0% chance of ever being heard the first time by hardly anyone who doesn't know them already or is only 1 or 2 degrees separated. This is simply due to saturation. The main people who make it now either are famous already, are starting a full-time business that happens to involve podcasting and has 6 figures to invest, like JLD, or are part of the corporate invasion. There may be an isolated incident here and there where it happens, but it so rare it doesn't bear mentioning. It is simply too late for the average independent show by a person working a full-time job to make an impact beyond a few niche listeners. I was also dismayed to find the same "entrepreneurs," using many of the same books, and the same hype milking the same types of people. There is a sucker born every minute. They find them, use them, discard them, and move one since there are always more suckers on the internet. An example: a well-known personality in podcasting who was putting out yet another book solicited all of us to submit articles for it. We of course, had to buy the book to see if were in it. We weren't. Not one of us. The book had already been written and included older interviews that happened long before he solicited for articles. He simply lied to get us to buy the book. It worked, and we were the suckers. Well, fool me once, shame on you, fool me twice, shame on me. I calculated how many listeners I would have if gained one new one each month, and how many hours I would spend editing and putting out the content I already have from the video show. My conclusion: I hope to retire in 3 years or so. 36 new listeners. Over 600 hours of podcast editing during that time. BTW, I am not getting 1 new listener a...
Today I'm fresh back from a trip to Podcast Midatlantic where I spoke on a panel about podcasting. On Sunday I had some time before I flew home so Rob Greenlee and I Went to see the Liberty Bell in Independence Hall in Philadelphia. There are some things that learned in this visit that I thought we could apply to podcast. - When there is no great entertainment, people will flock to ANYTHING. Case in point the Liberty Bell, an old large bell with a giant crack use to go on tour and people would FLOCK to see it. In today's society, the bar is set pretty low in regards to content so you can stand out pretty easy - The Liberty Bell was flawed. Yet, people came out in droves to see it Did it sound impressive? No, I watched a video, and no it didn't but what it did do was stand for something. People came to the event, but more importantly, wanted to pay tribute to it's ideals. The ideals of the liberty bell is what is strong and stirs emotions. It's not the technology. The creators of the Liberty Bell has never made a bell so large. It shows, x-rays show how there are cracks throughout the bell (and that's why you won't here it ring) when you ring the bell you only make it worse. The lack of knowledge didn't stop the creators from doing their best. In the end, I'm sure they felt they failed, but by creating something, they gave their audience a gift. - After a tour of independence hall (where a large amount of the early forming of America occurred), I learned how they all collaborated together to put together the declaration of independence. Article Five of the United States Constitution detailed the two-step process for amending the nation's frame of government. The constitution was put into place on March 4, 1789. If they had waited until it was perfect, the Constitution wouldn't have been adopted t until May 7 1992 (the date of the last amendments). As of 12/2014 approximately 11,539 proposals to amend the Constitution have been introduced in Congress since 1789. The point being you can "Amend" your podcastwhenever you want. - The bell first cracked when rung after its arrival in Philadelphia, and was twice recast by local workmen John Pass and John Stow, whose last names appear on the bell. When I was there on 9/11/16 reflecting on 9/11 there were people there all over the world. There are probably millions of bells across the world. Some of them are bigger, sound better, and yet here people flock to see an old broken bell because of what itstood for Liberty. More Great Take Aways From Podcast Mid Atlantic I was greeted by Heather from Craflit who presented me with a custom t-shirt that has *psbs and my logo. What does PSBS stand for? Podcasting since before serial. Heather was just as cool in person as she is online. The fact that someone would go out of their way to make me a custom t-shirt was amazing. It these tings that leave me speechless. Heather is a truly amazing person. A mind like hers you don't find often in this world. Mich O'Neil from the solopreneur hour had a great top for interviewing people. How do you avoid having a seasoned guest come on your show and NOT spew the same lame answers? You put their answers in your introduction. You disarm them. Now they can't reference those "traditional answers" and they have to dig deeper into their bag of answers for something new. Mark Asquith from podcastwebsites.com took what I've been saying, "Ask your audience what that want" and sharpened it. Ask them what they NEED. Awesome. Jessica Kupfeman of She Podcasts who help people get sponsors through her www.jkmagency.com showed that people love an underdog. Poor Jess had lost her voice, but we were all pulling for her as she tried to present with her lack of pipes. Her content made up for the lack of tone and quality of voice. This works in person, I'm not sure it would work as a podcast. Your might have a perspective that nobody else has. On Sunday 9/11/16 I had breakfast with Rob Greenlee...
I can handle some people explaining their strategies of launching a podcast, but there are some things that are just blatantly WRONG. Here are a couple that get my goat. Episodes Get Downloaded When People Subscribe If you simply launch with only one episode on your first day, and someone subscribes to your podcast, then you only get one download. BUT, if you launch with five episodes and they subscribe, then you get five downloads, which will help to raise your rankings within iTunes. This is not true, and easy to test. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/itunes and subscribe and see if my back catalog automatically downloads. You Only Get 8 Weeks to be in New and Noteworthy Podcasts based on TV shows go in and out of New and Noteworthy all the time 50+ Honest Reviews Will Get You Into New and Noteworthy Nope. It's subscribers that really count. Not that reviews don't mean anything, but subscribers appear to carry more weight. Also boosting people to the top of the charts before they have found their own voice doesn't work. Case in point Philip Phillips. Who? Exactly (season 11 winner of American Idol). They talk about generating buzz, and getting people to talk about your show. You want to do this every week you are podcasting. You want to bring value on a consistent basis. Here is a video that explains why I know these are not true https://youtu.be/gp1T4aj3ucw Rob Walch at Podcast Movement said the following things about New and Noteworthy His KC Startup podcast was featured (front page) of iTunes and saw a bump of about 300 His son's podcast Porter's podcast saw a bump of about 1000 He said a front page listing will get a bump of anywhere from 200-a couple thousand. Podcasters who game the system to be #2 in the Education category and rarely got over 200 downloads per episode (most were around 100ish). The sad thing is people are never launching because they can't get the recommended number of podcasts (3,5,8, 30) ready to launch. Just launch. Losing Your Audience in Jargon and Inside Jokes We are all too close to the trees to see the forest and depending on who you audience is, we need to remember that we get new listeners all the time. When we start using jargon (words that only people with experience in you field, or potentially an inside joke ) you can leave them confused. This makes them feel like an outsider, and potentially tune out. Recently on an episode of the Podcast Review show both myself and my co-host Erik K. Johnson were lost in the hosts use of big words and inside jargon. Now, maybe we aren't their target audience but it really took away from the experience. Being a person who grew up in the church Christian people who are trying to reach the world when they start spouting things like "Lion of Judah, Bathed in Blood, Alpha and Omega, evangelical, Holy Ghost, born again, unspoken prayer requests (which just means someone in my family messed up again). Be a "Proverbs 31 woman". The list goes on. I asked my buddy Cale Nelson from HamRadio360 to come in and share some jargon. Tascam US-32 Tascam MiNiSTUDIO Personal US-32 Audio Interface for Online Broadcasts is a brand new interface for podcasters who are looking to broadcast live and have the ability to mix in (up to) three sounds. There is also the ability to add effects. Most of the effects are pointless (make your voice deeper, higher, reverb, echo, distortion). This is kind of exciting as this particular https://www.bhphotovideo.com/c/product/1263856-REG/tascam_ministudio_personal_us_32.html/BI/5223/KBID/5977 Mentioned On This Episode Podcasters Roundtable Round 76 State of Live Streaming Hamradio360.com Black List Exposed Milaminthemiddle.com Book a Podcast Coaching Call With Dave Jackson Sessions start at 15 minutes and go up. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule for availability
Episode 4 of the Messengers Podcast explains how getting through customs isn't the only hurdle the crew faces. Support the documentary at www.supportthemeseengers.com
How Do I Grow My Audience? Know Who Your Audience Is Know What They Want Go Where They Are Make Friends With Them and Bring Value to Your Conversations Tell them About Your Show Make it Is To Find, Share, and Remember How Long Should My Podcast Be? Don't do the "Dave Jackson Power Hour" if you only have 18 minutes of content. There is no such thing as too long , only too boring (Valeria Geller - Beyond Powerful Radio) How Do You Handle Headlines When You Have Multiple Topics in a Show? For me, I've just been taking the topic that I think reached my audience the best and use that as the "Main" Headline Do I Have Any Tips For Doing a Live Show? If you're worried about looking stupid don't go live I use firetalk.com to stream live. Realize you will have people who want to ruin you show. You MIGHT get 5% of your audience live. Live is addicting because it's instant feedback If you are looking for your audience to provide the content, remember when you start you don't have an audience. Should I put My Face Out There? If you are the brand it might be a good idea I might think twice if I was a woman as guys are creepy What Do You Think About Regional Podcast? I would love to start a local podcast I think getting local advertisers would be easy What is the Biggest Mistake When it Comes to Making Content? Guessing What Your Audience Wants Including personal family details You need to know WHY you are doing your podcast. You can talk about what your audience, but if that topic doesn't line up with your goal it could cause issues. What Are the Beginning Stages of Podcasting Like - What Can I expect? You can answer every email, every comment, every tweet You are "the host" and that carries weight when you reach out to your audience 50% of people get more than 150ish downloads and 50% get more. The average is around 2000. Mentioned The 27 Steps to start a Podcast What I Started a Podcast About Topic A, and Your Audience Wants to Hear About Topic B? If you want to talk about that subject, and that topic aligns with your goal then follow your audience If the topic is something you DON'T Want to talk about then don't. It will come through to your audience, and if you're not excited about the subject it will come through. When you try to do something that is not yourself it is hard, and you will start dreading creating your podcast. I'm an Accountant, and sometimes People Don't Want To Hear What They Need to Hear... Not everyone can handle the truth. Those people who like you will like you, and those that don't won't. When delivering not so great information back it up with your research, and facts that you are using to shape your opinion. How Do I Come Back After a Long Hiatus? The same way you started. Know what your audience wants, and press record. Don't start off your show with an apology. Troubleshooting Your Podcast Sound - Separate Your Gear Into Pieces I have not been happy with my sound for the last few months. I seemed to pick up some hiss along the way. I went direct into my Zoom H5 recorder and the his was reduced. I then knew it was something in the mixer. From there tried using a different channel (it didn't fix it). I then switched the cabled from going to the 1/4" out of my Behringer Xeynx 1832 mixer (into the line in of the recorder) to the XLR out of the mixer into the xlr in of m mixer. I'm going to be slimming down my mixer as I don't need anything that beefy anymore (I used a big chunk of it when I have the live phone call in show). What is it Like To Have a Film Crew Come to Your House The crew from the Messengers Documentary came to my apartment to interview me. It was pretty crazy. The crew is so professional. They hit a snag when their flight got delayed, but they came through running on fumes. These guys have full time jobs and are fitting this movie into their schedule by (more or less) not sleeping at all. They got done filming here and drove to Kansas City to do more...
A small clip of episode 400 from the School of podcasting poking fun and morning zoo radio.
A clip from the School of Podcasting talking about being yourself and that you can deliver your podcast in whatever style you choose
Today shares his thought on Podcamp Pittsburgh, the death of blab.im, and what geese, Ringo Star, and Michael Phelps can teach podcasters. The Messengers Are Coming! If you live within driving distance of Akron, Ohio you might want to make a trip this Saturday the 20th of August as the Film Crew of The Messengers (a documentary about podcasting) will be joining our Northeast Ohio Podcasters Meetup group from 3-4:30. They are going to share their story, some cool footage, and film out meeting as well. For more information go to www.neohiopodcasters.com If you haven't heard the behind the scenes podcast about the making of the movie, check out www.themessengersdoc.com/podcast Here is a recent write up about the podcast and movie (and it's not done yet). Attention Podcasters' Hangout Family... I'd like to take a moment and recognize Dave Jackson from The School of Podcasting for spending what has to be an ENORMOUS amount of time editing and producing a podcast that highlights "behind the scenes" for an upcoming film called The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary. The film is the brainchild of Executive Producer Chris Krimitsos and I also serve as Executive Producer myself. This film has taken us and the crew - Director Niel Guilarte, D.P. Willie L. Harper, and Lead Film Editor Saulo Zayas - literally into other countries to highlight the stories of how podcasters have used this medium to make a MAJOR impact in their communities and/or through their audience. This episode chronicles the back-story of our experience flying down to Guatemala to support and film mobile podcaster Shawn Smith's Now Is The Time Mission, where the organization serves villages living in extreme poverty through building and installing high efficiency stoves, laying down concrete floors inside homes, donating tremendous amounts of clothing, school supplies and other goods as well as lead a daily VBS program for all the kids of the villages they serve in... Shawn has been doing this every single year for over TEN years. At the end of each day, Shawn sits down to interview the volunteers about their experience and as you can imagine, these conversations get raw and emotional. These podcast episodes are then uploaded and shared with loved ones back home. This episode of our podcast for The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary highlights this trip and some our own experiences -- and emotions. I hope you take the time to listen to it and enjoy it, and also enjoy the level of production podcasting PRO Dave Jackson has poured into this. Thanks Dave, you are freaking amazingly talented. Join the email list and get access to behind the scenes footage by going to www.themessengersdoc.com Podcamp Pittsburgh In a slide show of the previous 11 years of Podcamp Pittsburgh, you could see where this event was well attended in the past. This year they had approximately 50 people. NOW HOLD ON, before you judging things just by numbers. For me, my goal is to find individuals who want to launch a podcast. I started off my opening keynote speech asking the intimate crowd how many of them already had podcasts. Very few hands went up. When I asked how many people didn't have a podcast yet, TONS of hands went up. So while this was an intimate group, it was a perfect group for me. So judging things by numbers only goes back to people looking at producers who love to share their huge numbers. They might think, "I wish I had those numbers" but what you don't know is how engaged that audience is. While there is no spam in podcasting, some people may not be that engaged with the host. For example, I get very little interaction from my Weekly Web Tools podcast. I love the show, and I love my listeners, but it's a fact that my School of Podcasting Audience is more engaged than the Weekly Web Tools audience. As always I go to events to network with some folks, Saturday night I got to meet some very cool people. I also got to hang out with some of my awesome Libsyn people...
Today in episode three we hear about the trip to Guatemala. Support the movie at www.supportthemessengers.com
Today I'm going to share three things your podcast needs to be successful, I'm also going to share some podcasting news, and a product review on a blab.im replacement. Call the Show at 888-563-3228 Blubrry Launches Adverting Partner Plan If you are looking for an advertiser for your show, Blubrry was one of the first companies to try to pool a bunch of smaller shows together to attract sponsors. They recently launched a partner plan. Here are a couple of things about the plan It's for someone who is serious about getting a sponsor It's for someone who check's their email and values communication In the past Todd and crew would setup an advertising campaign only to have podcasters pull out at the last minute, or they forgot to let Todd known they had already sold their own spots. For more information go to https://create.blubrry.com/resources/blubrry-podcast-advertising/blubrry-advertising-priority-list/ Ask the Podcast Coach Moves to a New Platform After blab.im waved it's middle finger at podcasters, this week we waved back (after last week it just stopped working). The platform I am using is firetalk.com which has the same functionality (give or take) as blab, and its free. You don't get the audio file (just the video). You can always "rip" the audio out of the video file. So far I like it, and will continue to use it going forward. Because of His Podcast Michael O'Connell Got a Book Deal. I was interviewed for a future episode of It's All Journalism by Michael O'Connell and he shared that due to his podcast he now has a book deal about podcasting. The Messengers Documentary Team will be in Akron Ohio on August 2oth The Messengers Documentary team (doing a film on podcasting) will be in Akron Ohio (Cuyahoga Falls to be exact) on August 20th to film me, and to share some video and film the Northeast Ohio Podcasters Meetup (normally the third Monday of the month, but moved to Saturday this month). The exact location and time will be announced later (more than likely 2-5ish in Cuyahoga Falls - location to be determined very soon). For more information go to www.themessengersdoc.com to check out Dave's podcast about the project go to www.themessengerspodcast.com/podcast Podcast Rewind The Biz Chix Podcast episode 26 had a super frank talk about sex after children. Gentlemen if you want to know what women think and feel about sex, now is you chance it starts at the 27 minute mark. http://bizchix.com/226/ Another new show I've been listening to is the Rhoades to Success Podcast with Jessica Rhoades who has great tips on getting and being interviewed. The Three Things Your Podcast Needs That Have Nothing to Do With Microphones, Downloads, or Hosting Today I want to talk about podcast success and the things you need to achieve. Here is the fun part I’m not talking about microphones, downloads, or hosting. While those are ingredients that you need to podcast, without these you are doomed. They are attitude, health, and support. The first thing is your expectations and/or attitude. I have people contact me weekly with dreams of getting into Apple’s New and Noteworthy and “making it big” (whatever that means). Per Rob Walch of Libsyn, fifty percent of podcasters get less than 160 downloads, and fifty percent get above. I feel this is mainly due to the thousand plus podcasts launching every week. They are just starting to build their audience. I come from a training background where if I had twenty students in my class, my hands were going to be full. When you have 160 listeners, that would equal eight classrooms. In the last building I worked in, that would be an entire floor of classrooms filled with people who want to listen to you. People who could consume AM, FM, CD, Sirius, Local and Cable channels, HBO, Netflix, Hulu, Audible, etc. They choose to listen to you. So how do you get your attitude straight? You have to be able to answer the question, “Why are you starting a podcast?” For...
Driveway moments are podcasts that have you so captivated that when you get to home instead of going in to be with your family, you sit in the driveway to finish the episode. This week I had such a moment with episode 206 of the RED podcast hosted by David Hooper. I wanted to get Dave on the line to see what went on behind the scenes of this episode. Follow Upon on Troy Heinritz - The Story Isn't Over Troy called me this week (you'll hear the call) to let me know that he has been asked to fly to LA to host a show where he gets to interview the two creators of the television show The Blacklist (Troy does the blacklist exposed). They wanted a "super fan" to interview "the Two Johns" (the creators) about season four. So Troy gets to fly to LA, stay in a hotel, and feel the promotion power Sony Pictures as they promote him on a global level. If you missed Troy's story, you could click here to listen (or subscribe and never miss another show). Great Content Has These Ingredients I tell people that you want your podcast to make people laugh, cry, think, or groan. You want it to educate or entertain (or both). Today we are looking at some of the ingredients that you can use to inspire those results in your audience. Great content: Is content you can't get in other places Is unpredictable - not sure what you’re going to get (as long as its relevant). Is a dialogue, an open discussion. Is educational Is entertaining It’s often well thought out Has relevant personal stories Has a tease to get you engaged to stay or come back. Always Brings Value Beware of Inside Jokes The hurdle I have to get over with this episode is Dave has heard this episode (obviously) and I have heard it, but you haven't (maybe). So I need to give you enough information, so you don't feel left out, but not too much information to be a spoiler. Dave had an automated phone call that pretends to be from the IRS and threatens to throw him in jail. Dave knew this was a scam and turned on his skype recorder and called them back to investigate the situation (you can hear this at www.redpodcast.com/scam) his first attempt kept the person on the line for more than an hour (and he was not happy when he figured out that Dave was playing with him). Eventually, Dave was able to get someone to "put their guard down" and explain their operation (at the risk of getting in trouble). This intimacy was fascinating. Dave wasn't yelling at the worker but just wanted information. It made for a very intriguing episode. Then in true David Hooper fashion, he used the experience as a lesson to learn about growing your business. Episode 206 of the RED Podcast David Hooper has a very wide skill set. He spent many years doing marketing for musicians (at one point managed his own event for musicians). Dave is the author of NUMEROUS books on Amazon. He has been doing his Music Business Radio program on Lightning 100 WRLT in Nashville (and subsequent podcast) where he has interviewed some pretty big names. He recently started shifting his focus to include other types of marketing outside of music. His RED Podcast is NOT another podcast that interviews entrepreneurs about escaping their dreadful lives into the world of six-figure incomes etc., etc. It's not named RED Podcast On Fire. Instead, Dave has a solo show where he uses his life's travels and ties them to lessons you can use to grow your business. Just to make it easy, here is the link to Episode 206 to hear the whole "Scam" call go to www.redpodcast.com/scam In this interview you will hear: How it took multiple calls to get this hard to believe interview. Dave ended up with lots of content, but it would need editing before putting it before his audience. By not judging his guest, the person felt safe to open up and reveal inside information. Dave stuck to his guns and didn't take advertisers that didn't fit his show, or advertisers that wanted to pay him peanuts to get in front of his audience. Dave puts thought into his...
Comments about the show? Call 888-563-3228 At Podcast Movement Kevin Smith said to forget hanging around people who would answer, "Why?" when you said you wanted to try something, and instead hang around people who said, "Why not!" Troy Heinritz is a why not kind of guy. He had spent some time in radio, and start a podcast. In today's episode you will hear how his story has grown and grown, but it started with a single tweet. It started by reaching out to someone on twitter because the guy had a bible verse That lead to ABC PR calling to see how they could help the new podcast Get an IMDB pro account and get all the contact info for people you want to talk down. Through building a relationship with his audience. someone in his audience knew one of the writers. Relationships with PR people lead to interviews with more writers Troy is now seen as the "voice of the audience" He has received free "Shwag" from companies to promote He is having a blast. How he balances Marriage, Children, Work, and Podcasting He co-hosts the Packer's Fan Podcast and just got a sponsor for the show. Check out Troy's Podcasts at: www.theblacklistexposed.com www.packersfanpodcast.com 112263 Golden Spiral Media Mentioned in this Episode www.clammr.com The Blacklist, Season 1 - The Blacklist Wordswag App Spreaker.com (use the coupon sopfree) Noodle.mx Network Podcast Player Survey (two questions - take the survey) Ready to Start a Podcast? Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com
What I've Learned From One Episode of a Storytelling NPR styled Podcast I recently started a podcast in a narrative fashion about a documentary called the Messengers, as I've never done this style of podcasting before. Here is what I've learned. You have to know what story you are going to tell so you can add some intrigue, inspiration, comedy, etc. You need to catalog everything. The Sooner the better. So if I make a phone call, get audio from a video, I catalog everything. Identify your plot. For my first episode I wanted to tell the story of how and why everyone got involved, with a subplot of some behind the scenes. Then I wanted to build interest in future episodes. Looking back, it might've been better to keep it short and precise. It takes A LOT of time. This is why shows like Reply All have a team of 15 working on their show. Right now, I'm a team of one. The first 20 minute episode took around 4 hours. That is roughly a 12:1 ratio. My tool of choice here is the software Hindenburg Journalist. It's $99, and works on both Mac or PC, and you can drag in a bunch of files, cut them into pieces and then drag and drop them into the order you want them. It also auto levels the audio, and in this case I have all sorts of audio. Get the best audio you can. This is true for every podcast. In my case I had some phone conversations that sounded horrendous next to a skype call. I always judge if a clip is helping the story. Beware of the creep. What I mean by this is as I'm creating an episode about things that have already happened, there are things happening NOW. You have to think through the ears of your audience. They only know what you have given them. I'm reading Out on the Wire: The Storytelling Secrets of the New masters of Radio which I realize is a bit backwards. I should've read it before I started, but sometimes you just got to jump into the pool. When is a Remake Better Than the Original 15:15 I saw Ghostbuster this week, and found it very "Meh." It didn't scare me, or make me laugh. It was a shame as there are some really talented people in it. When we try to recreate someone else's magic, it typically doesn't work. I'm sure if we said some old show from the 1920's compared to a show in 1983, I'm not sure of movies that were better than the original. Typically a copy/remake of something isn't as good. With this in mind, don't try to copy someone else's show. Be yourself. Your audience will thank you for it The Only Thing Stopping You - is You 18:03 Is this you? You know you're a nice person. You're a good person. You're not perfect, but you always do your best. You have things you are proud of, and things you might wish to forget. Does this sound familiar? I'm going to share something I did this week. I talked at the beginning of the year how 2016 was going to be me getting out of my comfort zone. So I'm going to share a bit about my life, what goes in my head, and how I pushed through, and how you can too. In the end I'm glad I did, and you will be too. Here is some back story. I was in training to be a Pastor of a small church. I was brought in to bring in a younger crowd. The church was about 15 years old and over the last 10 years had completely lost touch with their youth at the church. After filling in for the Pastor I was approached to be an assistant pastor with the end goal of becoming the pastor when he retired. I thought about it. Prayed about it, and came on board. To keep this brief, they wanted me to attract younger people doing the exact same thing they had been doing that drove them away. Every idea I had was shot down. They were stuck in the "that's not how we do it" mode, and eventually I got frustrated and I could see how this wasn't going to work. I love those people and rather than lose those relationships, I stepped down. The bottom line was my ego took a hit. My self esteem got a quick uppercut to the jaw. When my first wife and I had accepted the fact that we would never have...
Comments? Call 888-563-3228 Join the School of Podcasting today Podcast Movement is Next Week I will be working Libsyn booth all week except for my Q & A Season on Friday at 10:15-11:00 on the Solutions Stage. Please find me and say hello. I would love to meet you. Have fresh batteries in your portable recorder Have your business cards Clean of the SD card Comfy shoes and breathe mints are a must. If you have a conflict between a session and a discussion, stay in the hallway and continue the discussion and listen to the recording. Glenn Hebert likes to Hang Out With Journalists 8:13 Today is this third appearance of "Glenn the Geek" from the horse radio network. Glenn is making a living through his podcast, and a lot of hard work. Today we find out. What mistake Glenn feels he has done, and wishes he could go back and change it What equipment he is using the create his live show including callers. He gives some insights into selling ads on your show. His insights from Magazines, and how Glenn is now helping magazines in his niche get into podcasting. Not only does the magazine bring over their audience, but they also bring over their sponsors. His biggest hurdle is booking guests Why you should look at every problem as an opportunity. Glenn is using Mixlr, Call in Studio, Google Sites, Audio Hijack Pro, Auphonic, and he uses three separate computers. You can see when you add "live" to your podcast, your technical skills need to go up. Glenn embraces the pressure that live brings, and he likes the feel. Check out Glenn's Network at www.horseradionetwork.com Couch Cushion Experiment 43:50 An easy way to cut down on "room noise" grab the cushion from your couch. You could purchase Milk Crate, Egg Carton Foam or you can just order one already built and save the time and effort. New and Noteworthy Experiment 51:42 If you go to www.becauseofmypodcast.com/itunes Please rate, review, and most improbably subscribe to the Because of my podcast show. I now have 65 ratings. I have a total of 559 downloads over six episodes with the highest episode being 171 and the lowest being 58 I'm on row 91 of the Technology > Podcasting category. I am still not listed in the "main" new and noteworthy. But I'm noticing a trend on who is. Jim Norton - comedian Kathy Smith - "famous" health expert Chris Hardwick The Dallas Morning News Gimlet Media - Ebay podcast that's not about eBay Michael Kosta- Comedian E! Network. Mentioned in this Episode The Messengers Documentary
Answering Audience Questions Is a podcast a good way to promote a multi-level marketing (MLM) business? If your sole goal of a podcast is to generate income, you need to realize a few things: Nobody tunes into an infomercial on purpose (usually it's that there is nothing else on) You make money from your podcast by delivering value. This helps people like you because you're helpful. When people trust you, they may purchase something you recommend or provide. It takes time to develop the relationship between you and your audience. So whatever your product is, your industry, if you have tips on running that business, using that product, news about that industry, then it might be helpful. Figure out who your target audience is and make the information that they want to consume. Starting a Podcast With My Child Dave, On the second leg of a trip home from VT to TN, I spent 8 hours in the car listening to your voice yesterday. And enjoyed it thoroughly. Thanks for the great content! I've been listening to podcasts for years and am thinking of starting one with my 11 year old son. We have a concept and I'm going to put him through the paces of evaluating and starting a business (I've had an online business for 20 years) with the intention that he'd be doing this for the next 8 years at least until he leaves home. So, it's a long term strategy for us (we're doing the project whether we broadcast it or not, so we may as well). And I'm sort of tagging on the biz training for him and see if we can develop it into a part time job for him (I'm launching on another biz that this coincides with as well). My question for you is this...there's plenty of info out there on the tech side of the equation and plenty of courses like SOP on getting started (which we may do in a few months) and marketing info, etc., but either I'm not seeing or just not looking in the right places for resources on the broadcasting skills side. Obviously, just doing it is a huge bit of it. But, I'd like to be able to talk him through the skills needed and how to get them in a general way. We're interviewing a radio friend about interviewing next week, but I thought I would ask you...Do you have any resources that you could point us to on developing the broadcast skills needed to make a great show (assuming the content is great and the tech is listenable)? Thanks for any direction you could give, I appreciate your time! Michelle - cornerstonepromos.com Marketing Minutes - Brandi Young Brandi Young is a software developer who has been working with podcasters on some software. Though interviews she has found that many podcasters are relying too much on iTunes when there is a whole other world of tools to Market your Podcast. Check out her website at www.bigactiveaudience.com slideshare.net meetup.com Pinterest.com New Features Coming to Podcasting Blubrry will be launching Podcast Sites. This is a free website based on Wordpress. Libsyn has destination stats, audio files to YouTube, Episode Defaults, Entranced ID3 tags Spreaker is coming out with a new CMS Use the coupon sopfree at any of these companies to get a free month (full discloser I work for Libsyn). Podcast Rewind I appeared on round 73 of the Podcasters Rountable talking about branding your podcast I appeared on Episode two of the Membership Coach show with Marcus Couch talking about the Burden and the Benefit of Membership sites. Check out Paul Colligan's Look back at 10 years of Video with Lauria Petrucci (Cali Lewis) Last 5 in 5 Cale Nelson Cale Neslon from the Ham Radio 360 Show shares the last 5 podcasts he listened to. Everything Ham Radio Linux in the Ham Shack School of Podcasting (this show) Black Man with a Gun Kenn Blanchard Show Wealth Steading (howto invest) Mentioned in this Episode Feeding My Faith - Does God Have Brain Damage? Podcast Movement Almost Sold Out. Use the coupon code sop40 Join the School of Podcasting Step by Step tutorials Priority Email Support Live Podcast...
Because of My Podcast - I Got to Go To The Largest Event in My Niche 2:05 Cale Nelson from hamradio360.com wanted to go to world's largest Ham Radio event. He wanted to go, but had these pesky things called kids that need silly things like food, clothes, and shelter. So this didn't leave Cale with money to spend on his hobby of podcasting. Well a few listeners said he should try putting together a funding campaign, and so he did. Did he get the money he needed? Well he didn't get the 100% needed. He got 220% he needed! He did this providing VALUE for shirts, hats, shipping, etc. The cool thing is Cale had the courage to try a crowd funding. It could've blown up in his face. Instead his audience came through and he got to attend with all of his expenses paid. Why You Should Attend Events I went to Podcast Movement last year. I went to a session to support my friend Steve Stewart. After his session some guy named Glenn Hebert got up to speak. You may heave heard me mention Glenn the Geek from the Horse Radio Network (Glenn has 20+ advertisers on his network). I saw Glenn do an impromptu speach. That lead to me asking him to come on the show. That lead to a relationship where Glenn asked me to speak at Podfest last year. That lead to me being interviewed for a documentary about podcasting. Which has now lead me to being asked to help with the film. The film is going to be AWESOME. I will be setting creating relationships with people who you will hear on this show. I have found co-hosts. Here are come cool places to go Podcast Movement - July 5-6 Chicago, (use the coupon sop40) Podcast MidAtlantic September 9-10 NJ New Media Europe - June 18, 19 Podcast Success Summit - Online 89 Speakers Podfest February 23-25 Orlando Podcast Bingeing 22:54 The Moose Falulence Podcast (joke) I found a new podcast that I'm really loving. It does the two things that I really like. As a teacher, I love to learn. As a human, I love to laugh. When you can have me doing both, I'm a fan for life. I discovered a show called the Pub from "the Current" (itunes). The host is Adam Ragusea and he takes current news, and dissects it uses it as a learning tool. The latest episode had him picking apart an interview of Donald Trump. This wasn't for the content, but to look at the strategy of how the interviewer approached the subject. He is not afraid to bite the hands that feed him (the media) and backs up his opinion with great insights. He's a Journalist in Residence and Visiting Assistant Professor of Journalism at the Center for Collaborative Journalism at Mercer University in Macon, Ga. He’s also reported for public radio shows including Morning Edition, All Things Considered, Here & Now, Marketplace and The Takeaway. Before becoming a journalist, Adam studied music composition, and he creates all the music for The Pub. If you want to keep up with the media, or if you're tired of all the "Podcasts about podcasting" (but still want to improve your show), you might give this a listen. Finding Your Audience - Tools 27:10 Don't just Google, go and advanced Google search where you can exclude things you don't want at https://www.google.com/advanced_search Check out barndi Youn'gs article on advanced Google Searches Find People on twitter, but use the advanced twitter. https://twitter.com/search-advanced?lang=en You can use a tool like http://buzzsumo.com/ You type in keywords and it'll show you what's being read in your space in the last year, two years, etc. 30Cast.com Helps Podcasters 30Cast is a new service launching next month to help podcasters find music to use in your podcast. :30cast offers fully produced tracks that fit any theme, topic, vibe, or feel.Each piece of music is 30 seconds long (not my favorite part of this idea). This is not for a person who wants to be a DJ and play the entire song. Pricing will be 9.99 for a one time use 24.99 for a month 49.99 for three months...
This week I am saddened by the lost of my champ Muhammad Ali. When I was growing up there were two things that were constant in my life. Richard Nixon was President Muhammad Ali was the Greatest Boxer of All Time Today there are lesson I feel we can learn from Muhmmad Ali as podcasters. When I hear name Muhammad Ali there is so much more to a guy that was good in the ring. He Know Both Sides of Boxing There are two ways to win in boxing Don't get hit. He ounce dodged 21 punches in 10 seconds. Hit the other guy. As a child Muhammad would have his brother throw rocks at his head. As I was watching old clips of his fights today, one of his strengths was the ability to not get hit. He also had incredibly fast hands. He punched before you even saw it coming. The Two Ways to Win in Podcasting Create content that positively impacts your audience Intelligently promote it to that audience My equation for downloads is: Value in the episode multiplied by the amount of effort put into promotion = Total Downloads. He Never Stopped Moving As I mentioned her was very hard to hit. Especially early in his career he never stopped dancing around the ring. If he did, it meant you were about to get hit with a ton of punches. Podcasters Need to Keep Moving If we are to keep up with all the other forms of entertainment that are fighting for the attention of our audience, we need to keep moving, and always looking to be better. He Was New Muhammad Ali won the gold medal in the 1964 Olympics (known then as Cassius Clay). He then did something most boxers didn't do. He spoke. He not only spoke, he made poems and boasted about how he was going to to beat his opponent. When most boxers didn't have the intelligent to put together a full sentence, here was one that was fighting to get a microphone in his fave. He Was Noteworthy He won his fist championship fighting Sunny Liston. Sunny Liston was a huge favorite with of 8 to 1. Nobody thought Ali had a chance. When he beat the champ, that was truly noteworthy, and people did indeed take note. By the way, Ali later admitted that he feared Liston, but acted so crazy to intimidate him (and he did). Podcasters: If you truly want to be New and Noteworthy, you need to come up with something new (it's not easy) and create content that is noteworthy. Something that will get your audience. If you want to be New and Noteworthy, be, um, New and Truly Noteworthy. He Was A Man of Integrity When he was drafted he refused. It went against his religious beliefs. The consequences, they stripped him of his title, banned him from boxing for three years (during the prime of his career). Later it was overturned by a unanimous decision by the Supreme Court. Integrity as a podcaster: We need to stand up for what we believe in. Can you imagine if someone said "Do this, or we are removing you from iTunes, and every other directory, we are disabling your RSS feed, and we're taking your microphone? We can't sell out to bad sponsors that don't fit our show, and to strategies that are less than transparent. You have integrity when you start podcasting, once you lose it, it is very hard, if not impossible, to get back. He Used His Authority For Good He could've taken his money, and retired. Instead he had one of his biggest fights in Africa? Why because he wanted to boost the economy. When he was banned from boxing her was a speaker at colleges. He embraced diversity. Giving Back as a Podcaster We can give back by supporting causes like the Podcast Awards, New Media Europe (which are currently struggling). We can use our microphone to help people, and to spotlight those things that need to be in the spotlight. He Apologized For Crossing the Line Ali was famous for calling his opponents names. Leading up to one fight he called Joe Frazier a Gorilla. While Ali did this to rile up his appointment and increase ticket sales (and it worked in both cases) he later would apologize to Joe's son, and...
Podcast Rewind: Podcasts on Jeopardy This week PODCASTS was a category on Jeopardy. This again shows how podcasting is growing and becoming more and more main stream.Awareness over the last year has gone from 48% to 49 % now it jumped to 55%. The percentage of people who have listened to a podcast is up to 36% (90 million people in the US) up from 33% the previous year and 30% the previous year. It's OK, You'll Be Fine So I've been holding these "Podcasting Puzzle" webinars that feature podcasting 101 information. I love talking to people about why they haven't started. You know all the reason why you should start, all the ways you can benefit from a podcast, and yet here you are... no podcast. Well I know how you feel. Now you might be thinking, "Dave you have been podcasting for 11 years, no you don't." Well, I'm here to tell you I do. Here is why. I've been planning on using Facebook Ads to promote the School of Podcasting. I watched countless videos. I know all the pros. I know not to promote a post and to use the Power Editor. I have videos that pretty much walk me through the process and yet here I am ... no Ads. Why? It's new, and I don't want to waste my money. I don't want to waste my time. I don't know what I'm doing. There have been things I've waste money on (exercise equipment over the years, guitars, etc), there have been things that I've wasted my time on (marriage, diet), but when I look back on those items they aren't really a waste. Here is why: I came out a better person with a better understanding of my strengths and weaknesses. I learned that some things that work for others won't work for me. It got my toe in the water of a new thing, that allowed me to carry on. It was the price of a launch Rebranding Your Podcast Today we talk with Kathy Kelly of the Special Mouse Podcast. She's been doing it for years, and feels she has said all there is to say on the subject, and is having a hard time recommending Disney due to the rising cost of just attending the park, and they seem to care less and less about people with special needs (way to have integrity!), but she didn't want to quit podcasting. She enjoys her Facebook group, and the relationships she has built with her audience. So what is she going to do? She is going to create a show for mothers of autistic children. She will keep enjoying the relationships she has built, and quick talking about things she doesn't want to talk about (Disney). Because her new podcast is very similar to her old podcast she can rebrand (change the name and artwork) and keep her old audience, reviews, and subscribers. She will make a new feed for her old show (Special mouse) and keep her audience with the new show. Where I Will Be Speaking Podcast Movement July 6-8 in Chicago (use the coupon code sop40 to save) Podcast Mid Atlantic Septemeber 9-10 in New Jersey use http://podcastmidatlantic.com/sop to save 10% Because of His Podcast: Michael Butler Gets a New Computer! When Michael Butler found out his old computer needed $600 worth of parts, he turned to his audience who had someone who was able to get him a computer for free. Michael was down to recording his show on his Phone using the Bossjock app.
Because of his Podcast: He Discovered a Niche Who Needed A Product Got a note from Corey Fineran I just handed my boss my resignation letter! This podcasting journey started 7 1/2 years ago and it's now allowed me to leave my job and start my own business! You've probably heard me talk about Ivy Envy (my podcast on the Chicago Cubs) more than the one I did for my employer. Since 2012, I've been able to call myself a "professional podcast producer" as my employer created a new position for me to do video podcasts for teachers to play in their classrooms to help high school students with disabilities in their transition from high school to life after high school (primarily through work/employment). Well, there is a huge need for this type of curriculum and schools all over the state of Illinois have started using that podcast. I saw a need and last summer, I started working on starting my own business, creating innovative and interactive online transition curriculum and marketing it to schools all over the country. After receiving contracts from school districts and cooperatives, I'm able to leave my job at the end of this school year. Many of the people in this group have influenced me (whether they know it or not) to take this scary jump. +Bob Zerull +Ray Ortega +Daniel Hayes +Nick Seuberling +David Jackson and of course, +Tawny Fineran who has been insanely supportive over the last year as I've worked on building this. If you're curious to check out what I've been working on, you can find it here: http://transitioncurriculum.com Another Problem with Your Show's Title Headline As I now work for Libsyn (where you can get a free month using the coupon code sopfree), and I get to see some mistakes that people are making. Now I'm doing a bit of a repeat, and that is people make horrible headlines. In the past I've talked about starting off a headline with the date. What I am seeing now is people putting the name of their show at the beginning of the headline. Why this makes no sens, is any place you can see the headline (your website, a listing in iTunes) you already see the name of the show. Also here is another thing to keep in mind, on the podcasts app from Apple, you can only see 45 characters of the headline if you're not subscribed to it. Once you subscribe you see the entire headline. However, would you subscribe if every headline was: School of Podcasting - How to Podcast Today w School of Podcasting - How to Podcast Today w School of Podcasting - How to Podcast Today w You're wasting really, really valuable space. Why do we care? I had a client who had a respected media outlet that wanted to put their RSS feed on their site. They tested it and the headlines were horrible, and they wanted the producer to change all of their headlines. Want to make great Headlines, check out my Free Headlines Resources Multiple Websites Question Revisited Paul said, " Heard your comments about updating multiple websites. I have 7 x WordPress sites, have used ManageWP for a couple of years now, love it! VERY easy to update all sites at once, gives you immediate admin access to all sites without login and very simple to add and take new WP installations, with dynamic pricing. Daniel said, " I use iThemes Sync. ]But you should also check out JetPack’s built-in module for plugin updates. Then, you can login to wordpress.com/plugins (I think) and update all your plugins from there. It’s not as thorough as Sync or others. But it’s free with no limit on sites. Is Blab.Im Going Away? The quick answer is no. However, the CEO stated this week "Blab is not doubling down on broadcaster tools.” They want to focus more on equipping people to hang out. We talked about this on the Ask the Podcast Coach show that I do every Saturday at 10:30 AM EST and here are some theories of what this might really mean. They can't make it reliable Podcasters are...
Today on the School of Podcasting we talk content marketing, why podcasting is a perfect tool for this strategy, and how to overcome one of the biggest hurdles for those needing interaction on their website. Podcast Rewind 2:15 I appeared on the Maximize Excellence show with Joe Hicks. Joe walks you through an Ideology of the four pillars of excellence. I really liked the show, and Joe (a graduate of the School of Podcasting) is doing a great job. Check it out at www.maximizeexcellence.com or subscribe in iTunes. Because of Podcasting 5:20 I have read the book, Epic Content Marketing: How to Tell a Different Story, Break through the Clutter, and Win More Customers by Marketing Less: How to Tell a Different Story, ... and Win More Customers by Marketing Less and it had some great stories of content marketing. There was a blacksmith that worked with farmers. He would listen to them complain about how mud would get stuck on their plow. He later invented a plow made of steel that the mud didn't stick to. He listened to his audience and gave them what they needed. In 1885, he started a magazine called The Furrow. The purpose of the magazine was to educate farmers on new technology and how they could be more successful business owners and farmers (thus, content marketing). The Furrow was not filled with promotional messages and self-serving content. It was developed by thoughtful journalists, storytellers, and designers, and covered topics that farmers cared about deeply. The goal of the content was to help farmers become more prosperous and, of course, profitable. Now, 120 years later, The Furrow is still going strong. It is the largest circulated farming magazine in the world, delivered monthly to over 1.5 million farmers, in 12 languages to 40 different countries. Who was this blacksmith? John Deere, he was quite an inventor. You may have heard of his tractors. 1900: Michelin develops The Michelin Guide. This 400-page guide, now with its iconic red cover, helps drivers maintain their cars and find decent lodging. In its first edition, 35,000 copies were distributed for free. 1904: Jell-O recipe book pays off. Jell-O distributes free copies of a recipe book that contributes to sales of over $ 1 million by 1906. 1913: Burns & McDonnell Engineering launch BenchMark. This Kansas City engineering and consulting firm still produces its award-winning BenchMark magazine to this day. 1930's Proctor and Gamble started making radio dramas. This was an extremely successful strategy. It often would feature ads for Duz and Oxydol detergents. Later these would move to Television. Many people refer to them as Soap Operas. Your podcast could be the next Furrow. You use your podcast to build your brand. You use it to gain the trust of your audience. You build a relationship with your audience. Then later you can capitalize on that relationship. So content marketing is not new, but it can be tricky Podcasting Boosts Grades 12: 52 Craig from Ingleaspodcast.com shared a story on the Ask the Podcast Coach on how he had students do extra homework by listening to podcasts. The other in the class did not. Those who reinforced their learning with podcasting had better grades. He did have one student who originally did not listen to the podcasts (but his grades had improved). Later, he confessed he had been listening to the podcasts. Using Content Upgrades In Your Podcast 19:08 A content upgrade offers extra value on the initial article or content. It typically is a downloadable, email-gated piece that strikes while the proverbial iron is hot. For podcasters maybe the price of admission is not an email address, but simply a click to get back to your site, where you can then get them to subscribe, click, etc. Great Example Scott Johnson does the Computer Tutor Podcast. It is one of my favorites. It's around 5 minutes, and Scott brings cool tips that even as someone who was teaching software...
In this episode we are joined by Lawyer Gordon Firemark who produces multiple podcasts that include, Entertainment Industry Insights, Entertainment Law Update, and The Law Podcasting as well as his own course that teachers lawyers how to podcast at Lawpodcasting.com. He is the author of the book The Podcast, Blog & New Media Producer's Legal Survival Guide: An essential resource for content creators (amazon) or if you want the pdf of the book go to http://www.podcastlawbook.com/ Today we talk about: How Gordon got into entertainment law How to register a trademark. How a trademark is your brand. Here is the US Patent and Trademark Office Website www.uspto.gov Understanding Copyright When is it OK to play music in your podcast? How do you avoid being sued for slander? Fair Use (Gordan has a great video about this on YouTube) Tips on Negotiating contacts Dave explains how he got fined for using an image from images.google.com (so yes, you can get busted) How to avoid "Defaming" someone. Release forms. podcastrelease.com is a free example (email address required). How he found his co-host. How lawyers are using podcasting to get more clients. Affiliate links. copyright.gov dmca agent Gordon (like Dave) recommends the Audio Technica 2100 microphone Because of My Podcast Dave Hooper of Red Podcast- I am Much Smoother on the Microphone when I'm doing promos for my radio show Ryan K park of Foodcraftsmen.com was much more confident when he appeared on the local news Question For the Audience I've heard about Manage WP and CMS Commander, InfiniteWP, WPRemote, iContrlWP, iThemes Sync, but I've never used any. If you have any insights I would love to hear them. If you have any insights that would allow you to update multiple sites from one location (and I'm not looking to get into WordPress Multi-site ). Free Podcasting Puzzle Webinars The Ultimate Podcasting 101 Live Webinar I will be holding three webinars as we prepare for registration to open at the School of Podcasting June 1. It's call "Understanding the Podcasting Puzzle" and you can sign up to get the links to the LIVE not pre-recorded) webinars. Here are the dates to attend: Saturday May 21 1 - 2 PM EST Wednesday May 25th 8-9 PM EST Saturday May 28th 1 -2 PM EST Go to podcastingpuzzle.com for more information on attending.
Because of My Podcast: A Veteran Got a Home Robert Kerns produces the Living the Vet life. He had a mortgage specialist on his show. He was contacted by someone in another state (again, podcasting is global) and the mortgage specialist was able to get the listener in contact with another specialist and the veteran was able to get his loan with a special VA Home Loan rate. None of this would have happened, but it did because of hist podcast. Check out Rob at livingthevetlife.com If Podcasting Was A Sport. I live in Cleveland. A fairly famous sports town. Famous, for not quite being good enough. We were 1 pitch away from winning the world series. Two yards away from going to the Super Bowl. Over the years the Cleveland Browns Football team has taken over leading the pack of bad sports teams in Cleveland. Every few years we fire our coaches and their staffs. Our players get suspended. Our coaches stink when they are here, we fire them, and they win mutliple super bowls. What does this have to do with podcasting? Stick with me. In 2014 after having a miserable year the owners of the Cleveland Browns decided to work on the stadium. They installed: Massive, uniquely shaped video boards, Escalators that helped eliminate congestion and a cranked-up audio system The quote was they hoped these items "Improved the fan experience." The next year they added more concessions and better lighting. The cost over two years? $125 million Again they stated they wanted an "improved fan experience." The best way to improve the fan experience is to put a WINNING FOOTBALL TEAM TOGETHER. The last two years our combined record is 11-21. HOW DOES THIS APPLY TO PODCASTING? At the core of the stadium is the team. A team we come to root for, and a team we expect to win. When they win, the fans brave insane temperatures to pack the stadium in the winter. Everyone is talking about the game on Monday morning. When the team stinks, they don't. I don't care if I can take an escalator to my seat. If the team has no shot at winning, I'm not going. I'm not watching from home, and nobody is talking about it at work, because it is horrible. Well, we see people investing in a better microphone (when their original microphone was fine). They invest in a new theme for their website (that most of their audience never visits). They switch email list providers. They switch media hosting companies. They get a new player for their website. In a sense they are sprucing up the stadium of a losing team. They need to put a winning team on the field. They need to create content that will impact their audience. We need to focus on our audience, that leads to great content, and the finally we need to promote that content (and hopefully get our audience to promote it as well). How Do Sports Teams Get Better? They prepare. They watch film of both their opponent as well as watch tapes of their own games and look for mistakes they made to help avoid them. They Listen Good players are open to feedback. They listen to their coaches. They listen to their fellow players. They have a mindset of constant improvement. They might take a week off when the season is over, but then it is back to the gym to prepare for next season They Trade Players That Didn't Work When a player doesn't meet expectations (Johnny Manzel in my case) and you gave him a chance, you cut your losses. They Bring in A New Set of Eyes Tiger Woods has had numerous coaches over the years. The Browns hired a guy from BASEBALL who has a completely new perspective and strategy on choosing players. How Do Podcasters Get Better? They Prepare They Prepare. They think about what they want to say before they hit record. I am writing these notes way before I press record (it's the way I do it, and I find I get better content). They listen to other podcasts. Not to rip off the content, examine why a show works (and what they can learn from it) and what doesn't work (and how they can avoid it). Realize this is all...
Because of My Podcast: I'm Getting Married Today Matthew Cox from Brunch with the Brits explains how he went to a podcast event who eventually became his wife. Why I Turned Down My First Podcast Sponsor I had been contacted by a sponsor at advertisecast.com. I decided to low ball my pricing ($10 an episode) just to see if anyone would jump. An advertiser did. They wanted 10 episodes of my Weekly Web Tools podcast. That would be almost three months and the advertising would pay for my hosting (minus the 20% that advertisecast take). I would take home $96. My hosting will cost me $45 for three months. I might have some gas money. Here are some of the bullet points: To get started and receive a $50 signup bonus You’ll earn $1 for every new email lead and up to $200 for every new member you refer from your computer Has already generated millions of dollars for over 200,000 happy entrepreneurs My audience is predominant male, and I know I have some entrepreneurs in my audience. So far this sounds like a great fit. Then I went to see what I was promoting. It turns out the product was a video chat and dating service. Hmmm, that doesn't really fit, but maybe I would do this as an experiment. Then I dug a little deeper. You see this wasn't some ordinary video chat/dating service. It was porn, oh I wait I mean adult chat. Can we just call it what it is? Porn. Beside my religious beliefs there are lots of non-religious reasons that porn is a cancer that most people feel is "not a problem." Well I disagree. It's an opinion, and we're not here to talk about that. Let's get back to podcasting. I will not have a sponsor on my show that I can't go to bed at night feeling I served my audience by sending them toward a product I fully endorse. So I turned them down. I also contacted advertisecasts.com and suggested they put in a way for podcasters to save people time so I can say, "No porn, cigarette, alcohol, etc) Every podcasters starts with two things in common. Zero listeners, and they have integrity. When you lose your integrity, you may not ever get it back. Don't Be Afraid To Start Your Podcast and Find Your Voice When I started college I thought I wanted to "Fix stuff" so I went to an electronics school and got a degree in electronic engineering. The other thing I got was a clear understanding that I wasn't very good at fixing stuff. I fixed copiers, but luckily got an opportunity (based on relationships I had formed in the company) to go out and set up the equipment and train the users. I was a customer service rep. Had I not gone to college to be a technician, I never would've ended up in training. I later would go back to School to get a Bachelor's Degree in Education. My dream job was to get back to training people on Microsoft Products. I had the most fun doing that in the past, and I was good at it. I could be funny and educational. Because of my knowledge of computers I start to dabble in building websites, and the Internet. That lead to me a guy who had come back from a conference who told me about podcasting. I started podcasting, and got to know people in the industry. Using my strongest skills of serving and teaching, I created value. I developed relationships with all of the podcasting companies. I remember one day about a year and a half ago when a student asked me a question about combining two features in Microsoft Excel. I explained I had never tried those two features together, to which he pulled out his iPhone and asked Siri. Right in front of my eyes, the phone solved my customers problem. I thought, I'm going to be replaced by a phone. A year and a half later what was once a staff of five trainers, what cut down to one (and it wasn't me). However, because I had been playing with computers, and playing with the Internet, that lead me to podcasting. Those relationships I built over ten years lead me to being employed by Libsyn.com (A podcast media company). Now I would never have though my...
The Podcast Award Are Open If you've ever benefitted from this podcast, do please take the time and nominate the show (school of podcasting) in the EDUCATION category. The Two Most Important Parts of Your Podcast I was watching an episode of Live From Daryl's House (Daryl Hall of Hall and Oats Fame). He has all sorts of musicians of different styles and genres. There is always a small segment where you hear them getting ready. They have had time to prepare. They know the music, but there are two things you always need to figure out and this is no different in podcasting. How to start a segment. How to end a segment. Why because the first part is your first impression. A bad first impression can really lose your audience for the rest of the song (podcast in our case). A bad last impression and we've just blown all the positive mojo we just created. We talked a couple of weeks ago about the Podcast Interview Wizard software and how it helps you get to the point quicker. It gets you focused on the meat of the interview. One strategy is to pick your main point, the one that really inspires people to laugh, cry, think, or groan and come back to that with a tone that signals to the audience that we're moving on, we are done, this is the final thought. Unless you're Jerry Springer, you don't need to announce "here are my final thoughts," you can just say them. Likewise if you are transitioning to another segment, just transition. Get yourself some royalty free music, fade it, etc, (or just leave a pause of silence). There was only one person who could get away with announcing a transition and his name was James Brown. Why did he do this? Because his band would launch into a groove, and just repeat it over James's singing. So James would be in the middle of the song and ask "Can we take it to the bridge?" and eventually they would take it to the bridge. In other cases James would "hit it and quit it." Announcing a transition is about as stupid as someone asking, "Can I ask you a question?" (cause they just did). At least that is my opinion. Because of My Podcast Troy Henritz & Nick Seuberling Troy does the blacklist exposed (theblacklistexposed.com), and recently he's been getting flooded with swag. He got an album (as in an LP) and a Blacklist encyclopedia. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/510 to see swag Nick Seuberling - First Advertiser Check for Minor League Soccer Podcast I was able to seal my first podcast/website sponsor. I've been podcasting for 11 years now and this is my very first sponsor. On a podcast that only has 8 episodes produced. I recently launched a new podcast that covers FC Cincinnati (http://cincinnatisoccertalk.com ), the newest soccer team in Cincy and I approached them about marketing their team store and ticket sales on my podcast. They immediately jumped at it. Today I received my first check in the mail, and I don't even have a signed agreement yet with the team. I'd say they're eager. Just goes to show, if you're in the right niche, you can sell it to anyone no matter how many episodes you've produced - Nick Seuberling New and Noteworthy Update - Corey Finneran Corey did a push for iTunes reviews for Ivy Envy. He gained 56 reviews this week. He now has 226 ratings and 191 reviews. He did not budge from #3 when you search "Chicago Cubs" in iTunes. The two that rank ahead of us?#1 - 150 ratings, 128 reviews and the last published episode was 11/11/2010.#2 - 7 ratings, 4 reviews.
Promote your show like iTunes doesn't exist. Use it. It's a tool. But I wouldn't put all my eggs in that basket.
Wordpress as a Free Website Option John Wilkerson comments on last week's show and wondered why I didn't mention Wordpress. BTW, I have a new favorite podcast because of your "favorite podcast" episode at year end. Never heard of No Agenda until I heard someone mention it on your end year end show, actually it was last years show...
Feedback from Last Week's Show About Video Podcasting Hey there! I checked out your podcast today where you spoke about video podcasting. I think the way you explained it makes perfect sense. I was actually looking for a way to upload videos faster to YouTube and found a specific way to do it where you compress the file. There is free software called Handbrake that people suggest. (I think it has been used in the past to rip DVDs illegally, but that is not what I am using it for.) Basically, once you create the HD file (which is usually about 1GB for videos I have made that are about 5-7 minutes at 1080p) and then use Handbrake to compress the file. I can usually get it down to around around 100-150mb (yes...MB) and less if the file is smaller. I was wondering if you thought this was a good option so you can have HD on all platforms. It doesn't seem to lose in quality especially with simple "blog" type videos.
Anyway, just thought I would check in on that. Thanks for all the hard work! -Derek Daniel
Free Websites For Those Podcasting on a Budget I had someone contact me this week. They were on SoundCloud, they didn't have a website, and yet, they wanted to end up making a living from their podcast. Their topic was "talking about movies and video games with my friends." Not to say that you it is impossible to do this, but without hearing your show it I would say it is highly unlikely. Why do you need a website to do a podcast? 1. Easy Clicks If you are going to force people to search for the item that will bring your revenue, you're making it too hard. It has to be easy - peasy. 2. Email List Growth IF you want to build an email list (and as they say the money is in the list, why? Easy Clicks) you have to have a sign up form. No website- no form. 3. Reputation It's $10 a month if you go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/hosting and go with the cheapest plans it's around $9. If you drink 5 20 oz bottle of Mountain Dew a month, you have spend close to $10 on soda. Switch to water, and you have the money. Would you buy a car from someone selling it out of a tent (and it looked like they were going to bolt the minute they got your money). You don't date someone who is going to leave it two weeks. You get the point. In a nutshell If you don't have $10 a month (.03 a day) then don't start a podcast expecting it to pay your mortgage. Seriously. In the immortal words of Mick Jagger, "You can't always get what you want." 4. Ease of Listener Subscriptions When you have a website, you can put a link to your iTunes listing, and make it easier for people to subscribe in iTunes, Stitcher, etc. Without a website, you're saying things like "Find my show in iTunes." Have you tried the iTunes search? I've typed in the exact name of someone's show and still had zero results. 5. Easy Contact The one page you need on a website is a contact page and and about page. We all want interaction with our audience. While you can say your phone number and email address in your podcast, when it is a clickable link on your websites, it's super easy and requires no memorization. I Am Always Open To Other Points of View So when a client told me they were using Tumblr as their website I thought, "Really?" Then I looked at the website notold-better.com and yeah, that's a free tumblr website. Now to be honest, he had his graphics made by a graphic designer, and that graphic matches the artwork of his podcast. So if you have 2-3 hours to learn how to adjust a tumblr site, check out their themes, and go from there. Keep in mind, you won't have all the flexibility of a Wordpress site, but you will be saving $9 a month. You can even put Google Analytics code into a tumblr site for stats. So if someone is really pushed for a budget, or they just wanted to test the waters, I would Tumblr is a platform I would recommend. Time Saving Tip Using Libsyn If you decide that you are going to...
Because of My Podcast: My Audience Fixed My Website Cale from Fotimepodcast.com was having a problem with his website (using Wordpress) when an audience member offered to help out. It turns out the audience member works for the creators of Wordpress. The DBS 286X vs Aphex 230 Master Channel Before I even start, you do NOT need either one of these to start podcast. It's a nice piece of icing on the cake. It makes you sound better, but you will not gain a single subscriber by using these. If you have poor content, great sounding garbage is still garbage. I've got the older version of the DBX 286 (I have a 286A which has now been replaced by the 286S). Likewise I recently picked up a used Aphex 230 Master Voice Channel (which is now replaced by the Aphex Channel Master What's the difference? Cost: The Aphex is 999, the DBX is 199. So you are looking at $800 in difference. The Aphex's gives you more options in regards to inverting polarity, changing the phase polarity. It also offers a low cut filter. The Aphex noise gate is super easy to set and sounds great. You simply talk and turn the dial until a red light illuminates, and then turn the other knob to scale back any background noise. I love the sound of the gate more than the DBX. Anytime I set the DBX to be aggressive, the cutting in and out was a bit more noticeable. Yes you can hear the Aphex's gate, but to me it's less noticeable. With the DBX you have low and high enhancers. You have the same thing on the Aphex, but you can choose what frequency to boost. You also have a parametrix equalizer so you can find a frequency that you either want to boost or cut from your voice and the determine how much you want to cut/boost. This is the same for the Aural Exciter on the Aphex. It does what the DBX does with more control. You can "tune" what frequencies you want to boost on the high end. I never will get de-essers. I know what they are supposed to do, I don't hear any difference on either unit. I swear this is a feature that manufacturers build into units so they can charge more. While appreciate what the unit does, for the money, I would recommend the 286 for most people unless you really, really want total control.
Video Podcasting? How Would I Go About Doing This? I currently don't do any video podcasts, but that doesn't mean I don't think they are worth doing. I just know they take more time. So how would I do it if I did? Video Podcasting Software If you're on a mac, try Screenflow or even iMovie. If you're on a PC check out Sony Vegas or Camtasia. What Format? I would create my video for my podcast (downloads) you are exporting a "LD" version for phones, so you could go 640X480. You can do this in QuickTime if you want to as there are tons of presets. I would try to stick with mp4 if possible as it seems to have less conflicts. You take this format and put it in your RSS feed, so it goes to subscribers. You might put at the begining of the video that to see ah HD version go to your website (and provide a pretty link so they don't have to search for it) The Format For Your Website Now you create an HD version (1280X720) that you can upload it to YouTube (it's free, let them eat the bandwidth) and put that video on your website. Now your subscribers don't hate you for sending a 5 gig file to their phone, and your visitors get an HD version that also happens to be on the #4 search engine. Podcasting Lessons I've Learned From My Cat I'm a dog person. Always have been. I inherited a cat in my recent divorce, and I love Bernie, but I do hate cleaning the litter box. I actually hurt my back cause I was leaning over so much, and for an extended period of time. I just hate, hate, hate, cleaning the litter box. I did it about once every 5-7 days. I thought to myself, "Dogs are so much easier as I don't have to deal with this." Then it came to me. What a pain it would be if my dog only got to "do his business" once every 5-7 days. In...
Today I look at tools available for podcasters to help them produce a better show. Podcast Interview Wizard and Who is Jim Edwards Jim Edwards is a guy I've known online for years. I loved his "I Gotta Tell you" email list. We are talking back in the day when I was teaching people how to make websites with Microsoft Front page, and making videos with camcorder. I bought one of Jim's products he made with Mike Stewart and I thought they delivered value. I had bought some stuff from other "Internet Marketers" at the time, and thought this was better than some. I've always liked Jim's style as he takes his topic seriously, but always dishes it with a good helping of sarcasm. In a nutshell, Jim has been writing ebooks and making products for over 20+ years. According to his bio: Jim Edwards, founder of Guaranteed Response Marketing, LLC, is an Internet expert, marketing entrepreneur, newspaper columnist, author, motivational speaker and elite mentor and coach.Having gained personal and financial freedom, he shares his proven strategies with self-motivated, hard-working people to help them attain personal and financial independence. He has written and published dozens of ebooks, several print books and hundreds of articles. Through his company, Jim has produced some 40 informational products on DVD and many more available in the latest electronic formats downloadable from the Internet. Jim produces and hosts webinars on a weekly basis and has been a frequent guest speaker at numerous international Internet marketing seminars. What is the podcast interview wizard? It's a software that works on mac or PC that walks you through planning your interview. It does this by having you figure out what you want to talk about before the interview. It walks you through 16 questions .These questions are then used in a series of tools used by the software. These include: Email templates to help get the interview Email messages to setup and remind the guest for the interview. Later you can use it to create an email that you can send to the guest post interview as well. Email templates for Referrals Email Templates to say Thank You Quick or Full Show Templates (complete with intro / outro ext and questions) Audience Handouts - A worksheet for people to fill out as they listen to your episode. Show Bullets - Custom Sales Copy for Each Interview There are 12 different types of interview types It will generate show notes for your episode It will generate multiple Titles for your show and let you pick the best one. Build Ads to help promote the show on Facebook, Twitter, etc. Putting it Through It's Paces So I took the interview from last week and added the information about my guest Danny Peña to see if I had used the software last week would the interview had been different. The closest interview style would be the "How the Expert Got Started" style. Now last week's show was different. I already knew the answers to the questions. I knew Danny's story and I wanted to walk him through the parts that focused on building his audience. Using the PIW I did some interesting questions that I could've asked but didn't:
What roadblocks did you face early on and how did you overcome them? Did you have any early mentors or did you have to figure it all out on your own? If you had to start all over again with audience growth in today's world, with today's tools, time constraints and other factors, what would you do:a. Differently?b. More of?c. Less of?d. Faster?e. Not at all?
Under the "Myths and Misconceptions" style of interview I saw "Where are the big opportunities in audience growth that many podcasters might be missing?" or "What are the best audience growth tools every podcaster needs to use and know about?" Brainstorming By Yourself Now I realize that the software is meant for you to use ONE style of interview, but if you're looking to come up with good questions, I can see where spitting out...
Danny Peña got his first video game console from his Grandmother and his life was forever changed. Little did Danny know (who goes by the name of Godfree on his show) that he would someday be getting paid to fly around the world and play video games on his podcast Gamertag Radio. Did he think he would end up working for CBS and be featured next to podcasts like 60 minutes on play.it? Probably not. Today you will learn how Danny started building his audience before there was podcasting. Danny continued building his audience before there was iTunes. Through everything he does, Danny cares about one thing: the audience. There are sooooooo many lessons to be learned today. Interview starts at 3:38 Free Doesn't Last: Danny got his first check from mp3.com a site that was "Too big to fail" just like MySpace (and who knows some day Facebook?). The party of the year took a year of planning: You don't get these kind of results by "winging it." Check out this video of the party and you can read how the Miami New Times called it the Best Super Bowl party in South FL. Know more about your audience than their age and sex: Danny brought in musicians who his audience liked. The musicians brought in their audience who probably liked to play games. Be straight with your audience: Any perks Danny and his crew have received has always been communicated to their audience. TRUST is everything: It takes a long time to earn it. It's very powerful, and can be lost with one bad decision. Let your audience be part of your journey: Anywhere Danny goes he invites his audience to come along. Ten years to get on CBS Radio: Patience ins a virtue, and it took Danny 10 years to get to where he is. He took advantage of every opportunity he saw. Time Management Tips: Set a schedule and stick to it. Danny has a full time job, a girlfriend, and his podcast. Having the right people on your team is essential and keep everything transparent so you are all on the same page. Danny is real. When Danny says, that's a good question, that's because its a good question. Some people on my show do it just to stroke my ego. Danny's Community Created Events That Drew the Attention of Main Stream Media Check out Danny's Commercial on the Discovery Channel https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=l5oKqp-sZA0 Watch his acceptance speech as he is inducted into the Podcaster's Hall of Fame ttps://www.youtube.com/watch?v=K64TXMuYNlY Here, Danny made the news by accidentally spilling the beans on the Microsoft release. In this article, Gamertag radio is mentioned in Forbes magazine. Save $40 Off Podcast Movement If you plan on attending Podcast Movement, you can save $40 off your ticket when you use the coupon code sop40. This is THE podcast event. I will be holding a Q& A session and I am really looking forward to it. Coming Next Week I have a on of people ask me about Podcast Interview Wizard from Jim Edwards. Well I'm going to buy it and play with and let you know what I think. If you want to check it out, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/piw (affiliate link) I will also be talking about the Cool Cast Player which makes really pretty players for your website Ready To Start Your Podcast? The School of Podcasting is OPEN NOW. Get in before 4/1 (doors close ). Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start Step by Step tutorials (that are not outdated like the one on the Internet) BONUSES Private Facebook group for Networking Email support for all your podcast questions. Live Q & A Webinars - ask whatever you want. Sign up before we close the doors 4/1 www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start
I went to Podfest.us a couple of weeks ago and I saw a person do a presentation that offered to help people launch their podcast for $8999. Just for that weekend there was a sale and they would only charge you $3990. This is America and if you can get people to pay for $4,000 for your advice, then GO CAPITALISM. I feel bad for your customers, because without an intimate knowledge of your product, my gut instinct says they over-paid. A couple of episode ago I said the snake-oil sales people are coming, and now I'm here to tell you they are here. So get your boots on cause the poop is getting deep. Podcast Review Swap - Trying to Cut in Line in the Apple Charts is Bad For Podcasting I was in a private Facebook group when the owner of the group (the same guy selling a $9,000 podcast course) places this post: RATE AND REVIEW SWAP - POST YOUR SHOW BELOW (LET'S GET A LONG THREAD GOING)Is it ok to post your show via iTunes link? and ask for rate and review swaps?I HIGHLY ENCOURAGE TO DO THISsomething like hey everyone, wanna do rate and review swap? Here's my show --show link removed by Dave--Let me know when you've done it and I'll go do the same. Extra points for screenshots or copy paste of review smile emoticonWHAT I DON'T ENCOURAGE'Hey guys check out the most bomb, amazing spectacular show on the planet - insert link. and subscribe please...NOPE!example #2Hey guys this week we talk about how we are the real deal, and we discuss it in such an amazing way. ARen't we awesome! - link to youtube. **Please don't F'ing do this! I am considering kicking you out if you do this more than 1x. and I won't tell you, so don't do it at all.BEST PRACTICE FOR ASKING FOR RATE AND REVIEWS"Anyone opne for rate and review swap: here's my show""Just left review for TAG PERSON - great show, here's what I wrote - insert message - THEN say - here's my show can you hit me back too" The people lined up DROVES. The post was growing like a weed. This was like a unicorn. I had heard of them, but had never seen one, and it was depressing. After no less than 20 people I had put in their link I chimed in as asked why we were asking people who had never heard your show to give us a give star review. As always, I'm open to other sides of the story so I asked, "Why are you doing this? If you can't get your audience (who has heard your show) to review it, that is a red flag that your content is not resonating with your audience. Please shed some light on this. He repled: The idea here is that people can listen, rate, and review and not be stranger. As artists we need a place to be ale to get feedback to share on our show, and this is a thread for people to be able to do that. We are not encouraging people to be strangers here and in a podcasting group it only makes sense to have a place where people can openly asks for reviews and feedback. There is a place for podcasters to get feedback and share it on your show. It's called your audience. It's called comments on your website, facebook, email, voicemail from people who can help shape your content for the better. They are called YOUR AUDIENCE. The answer is a lie. They are trying to game the system, jump up the charts, and boost their downloads. I get that. Who doesn't want a bigger audience? Do you remember William Hung from American Idol. This poor kid couldn't sing or dance, but he was so bad we shot him on the charts. William produced an album, and that's the last I heard of him. He doesn't have the talent to remain on that stage. More and more professional content creators are getting into podcasting (radio people). They have paid their dues, and they have had lots of practice. They have found their voice, and they know what their audience wants. So now when we shoot your inexperienced probably not great podcast to the top of the charts, you look like William Hung. Your audience doesn't stay, and your career is over. Don't be a Flash in the Pan Never week Danny...
You will notice that I am in pursuit of people who have been able to make a living with their podcast. Today we interview Jim Harold who does the Paranormal Podcastt and the Campfire Podcast. Podcasting News In a nutshell, use podcastsconnect.apple.com to submit your podcast to iTunes, but don't mess with anything else in that platform for now (you can really shoot yourself in the foot). Understanding iTunes and Podcasting iTunes is somewhat confusing. You submit an iTunes RSS feed to iTunes and in return, they give you a link to your listing in iTunes. iTunes is like a giant phone book of podcasts. The interesting thing is when someone goes to iTunes and subscribes to your show, iTunes sets the original feed you submitted in their software. This can create confusing. When you publish a new show it will not show up in the iTunes Store immediately because they have to refreshed your listing. However, anyone who is subscribed to your show gets that show because they are looking at your original feed. My advice here is to subscribe to your own show. This way when you think there is a problem because your show is not "showing up" in iTunes, check your show using whatever app you use. If the show appears, then it just means the iTunes store has not refreshed your listing yet. Wait at least 24 hours. Jim Harold's Paranormal Podcast is Paying the Bills (interview starts at 9:51 - recorded with a Zoom H5 recorder and two Audio Technica ATR2005usb microphones ) Here are some bullet points from our conversation with Jim Harold from the Paranormal Podcast Jim wanted to be on the radio, but ended up in radio sales. Jim loved reading about the Paranormal growing up. He sputtered at the beginning of his show, but his fans wanted more. Why? Because nobody was talking about this like Jim was, and he delivered value. After 6 months , Jim was offered a sponsorship from Audible, and that helped him get more serious about his show. Jim has multiple streams of income. He has a plus club (membership site), he has multiple books, and he has advertisers. Jim uses Wishlist member to manage his membership site Jim's first book was "traditionally" published. It was cool to see it in Barns and Noble, but Jim later purchased the rights to that book and sold it on his own. Check out Jim's books at Amazon.com Podcasting has opened door for Jim His podcast grows about 10% every year. His podcast is named well. It's called the "paranormal podcast." He went with the obvious name for his show. When people Google "Paranormal Podcast' his show comes up. There is a difference between radio ads and podcast ads. Jim explains how he feels like he knows me because he listens to my show. Podcasting advertising has great impact because we care about your audience. Jim has rejected ads that didn't fit his audience, or that he couldn't endorse. Jim is currently using a Heil Pr40, a Mackie Mixer, and a Behringer Processor. Check out Jim's shows at Jimharold.com as well as his TV You Grew Up With podcast. Mentioned in this Show Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast Steve Stewart from SteveStewart.me Stargate Pioneer from the Gonna Geek Network Danny Pena from Gamer Tag Radio Auphonic Audio Tool Show 503 on Compelling Podcasts School of Podcasting Newsletter
Podfest hapned this weekend in tamp Florida. Wow was it fun. I got to hang out with Hall of Fame podcasters like Danny Pena, and meet some people who are trying to get their podcast off the ground. I love, love, love, the podcast community. It's filled with helpful, loving ,caring people. I got to catch up with Dan and Jared from Podcast Movement, Glenn the Geek, some members of the School of Podcasting. I'd write more names, but I'm still in a coma from the Dramamine. Cool Things About Podfest Being a new event (this was year two) they had one track. This meant that all the attendees sat in the same room and the speakers would rotate in and out. We were strongly encouraged to network on breaks and sit in new locations. It was cool. I ran out of business cards, an luckily had a box of "stand by" business cards. One of the coolest things were did was like Speed Networking. You had a time keeper at the table, and each person had 90 seconds to share their name, their podcast, and their target audience. Then each round you would go to a new table and meet more people. By the end of the session, you had pretty much met everyone in the room. This was one of the coolest things I've ever seen. They had a schedule flowed nicely together. This lead to speakers often referring to something mentioned previously in the conference. Great speakers. Simple. All brought value. Relative sponsors: Audio editing services, marketing, interviewing, trademark, conferences, hosting, all were relevant to the audience. I saw, felt, and participated in Content Marketing. I met Katie Krimitsos the night before. I saw her presentation on Facebook Goups, and she showed me how much more I could be doing. I will be a customer. When Will The School of Podcasting Open? As God as my witness, ready or not, it will open next weekend 3/5 What am I doing? I'm reshot many of the videos. I've added quite a few videos, and I'm restructuring how I will do business. At this point (subject to change) I want to let a certain amount of people in at one point, and the close the doors so we can all kind of be "on the same page." Then I can help, encourage, and guide you through your process, while still providing value to current members through additional videos and live office hour webinars. Creating Compelling Podcasts Adjective: having a powerful and irresistible effect; requiring acute admiration, attention, or respect How Podcasts are like Potatoes You have instant potatoes out of a box. These are quick, easy, and cheap. The end result? Bland. You can make mashed potatoes from scratch. They take longer, it takes more effort, and they are more expensive to create. The result? They are delicious and your recipients want more. It's Not About the Audio Quality If you record with your laptop microphone, that's bad. I think we all can recognize audio that is distracting (if you make me adjust the volume during your podcast, we have a problem). You can purchase an Audio Technica 2100 for around $60 and have great audio. Be sure to get a pop filter (check out this package with a swing arm). Once you have that, MOVE ON. I would listen to an 8-track tape of the Beatles because the content is good. My friend Paul Colligan from the Podcast Report records in all sorts of fun locations. Some are better than others. One time it sounded like Paul was recording fro ma submarine. I listened to every minute. Why? Because Paul makes me think. On the other hand, Metallica put out and album with Lou Reed. Van Halen Put out an album with Gary Cherone. One of more of the following need to happen:
Laugh Cry Think Grown Entertain Educate
If none of the above is happening then don't press record. Identify Your Audience If you have a "Secret Santa" at your job and you get someone's name that you don't know you have two choices:
Gift Card (quick, easy, fast - bland) Go ask someone who knows the person and get them a gift they want
Which one...
Because of my Podcast: I'm Working For Libsyn - Dave Jackson A couple of weeks ago I let you know that my "Day job" had gone away. A little update on the story, I reached out to the head of HR only to find she no longer works there, and I got an email stating that payroll would be postponed two days. So there I was, thinking about getting into training and support. So I asked myself. What do I want to do for a living? I love podcasting. So in a nutshell. I want to help people in the podcasting space. Who is the biggest player in the podcast space? Libsyn.com I reached out to a person I knew (remember how it's all about relationships) and just let them know I was available if they needed someone. A little over two weeks later I was given a proposal to join their team. I gladly accepted. I can still do consulting, but you will now hear me give out a disclaimer that I am an employee of Libsyn. You will hear me give out my promo code of sopfree for Libsyn on this show, but not at a trade show where I'm acting as a Libsyn employee. For those who are new to my show, I've been a big fan of Libsyn as well as Blubrry, and Spreaker for years. I think the insights I get from working in support will help me created better content for you on this show, as well as additional documentation for Libsyn. I've always wanted to make a living around podcasting, and now I can. I can do podcasting as my full-time gig, and my night time hobby. Wait, that's Ray's line. Because of My Podcast I Quit My Day Job - Jim Harold Every Saturday at 10:30 AM I do a live call-in show called "Ask the Podcast Coach" at www.askthepdocastcoach.com/live and this week Jim asked a question about the controversy over measuring podcasts (see this episode of the Podcasters Roundtable ) and once he came on I got to talk to him and found out.
Jim previously a sales guy for radio Jim now does a podcasting full time at jimharold.com
I've already reached out to Jim and we will be doing a deep dive on next week's show. Anchor.fm Vs Voxer Vs Clammr Vs Speakpipe Vs Voicemail Today we are joined by Chris Nesi (www.chrisnesi.com) from the House of Ed Tech podcast. Chris is well versed in Voxer. As a member of the School of Podcasting Chris has shown me he really enjoys voxer. So when this new tool (Anchor) came on the scene and everyone was going nuts over it, I wanted to get Chris's opinion. In the end, they are different tools for different audiences who are looking for different results. The world is all a flutter over the Anchor app for iOs. This is an app that allows you to sign in via your twitter account and create audio. People can follow you, and you can follow them. You can record a "wave" and people can reply. This is all public. You can them embed your wav on your website, like this. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/502 Speakpipe.com Originally I wasn't going to include Speakpipe in this discussion, but if we are talking about getting feedback from your audience, I would look like a fool not to include it. Speakpipe is a way for you to put a button on your website for people to click on it, and using their microphone leave a message. When you get the message you can listen to it, download it, or click reply and send a message back to the audience member. It's free, with a premium version for more storage. Check out speakpipe.com Anchor.fm I can see this being used to get feedback from your audience. While this is already easy with tools like speakpipe, when someone leaves a message with speakpipe, you can reply to them as well. This is all public. With Anchor, the conversation is public so everyone can hear the conversation and bring their point of view. The bad news for podcasters is once you get the audio, there is no download option. Now you are stuck with hitting play on your phone and recording it with another device. For me, I shared a link to myself, played the wave on the web, and recorded it using...
With so many people focusing on New and Noteworthy, I wanted to see how many people use New and Noteworthy. So I asked people how they found new podcasts and here is what they said. The number one way was hearing the podcaster being interviewed on another podcast. This data is from 100 respondents from my email list, and from social media. So it order with the number one answer first it was I heard them interviewed on another podcast I searched the app for my topic I heard about it from a friend (word of mouth) Other The Internet (Google, Bing) Search The "other" responses were (and I'm summarizing) more or less "Word of mouth." Meaning the podcast host they were listening to mentioned them, or they heard about it on Twitter, Pinterest, etc. So if one of the top ways to grow your audience is to appear on other podcasts, how do you get booked on other shows? Well, we are going to dig into a smart way of setting yourself up to be booked on other podcasts. How To Get Booked as A Guest On a Podcast? OK, there must be some new course, or guru telling people how to contact people to be potential guests. Here is the format
Tell people how much you love the show Tell them your story Tell them what topic you can talk about and how much my audience is going to benefit. Kiss the butt of the host and tell them what an honor it would be on the show. Drop a hint about the book or course you have, and how my audience would benefit. Promise to promote.
They are missing one key ingredient GO AND LISTEN TO THE SHOW When you start off the email with “I have heard some fantastic things about your radio show, congratulations on your success!” Again, do some homework, or better yet, go by the book Stop Chasing Influencers: The True Path To Building Your Business and Living Your Dream
Strategies For Securing a Guest Spot on Other Podcasts Search for your topic in iTunes, Google, etc. the idea is to see who is in the space. Who is the leader in your space? Search for their name in iTunes and see what podcasts they have appeared. You could search for New and Noteworthy as these people are probably more New than Noteworthy (and hungry for guests) Realize your interview will be evergreen. So if someone goes back to get the back catalog, you will be included. Find influencers in your niche: Look for books on your topic in Amazon, and in Amazon there is a "Customers also bought these items" area. You should probably see other authors names who are also involved with your topic. Make a list and check it twice When you find a podcast, look and see the date of their last episode. If they have podfaded, you might consider contacting them to see if you could take over the show. In general, people who haven't put out a show in months, are more than likely not coming back. Start a spreadsheet with the following information
Website Address Twitter Handle e-mail address
The average Twitter followers per user is 208. According to an article on Sumome you can look at Twitter followers using the following scale:
H = Huge = 100k+ Followers L = Large = 10K+ Followers M = Medium = 1k+ Followers S = Getting Started = less than 1k followers
Add these people to your list and make how you found them (they will want to know). Obviously, put if they have a podcast or not. If they don't, you may still want to develop a relationship with them so they can appear on YOUR podcast. Getting Ready For the Initial Contact So to determine if you are a good fit for their show, you need to listen to it. There is no way around this if you want to do it right. Does this podcast focus on people who would enjoy your topic? If yes, then we need to get ready to contact them. If not, then we won't focus on them now. Don't Try to Close the Deal Instead of sending an email, and asking to come on the show. Why not follow them on Twitter and retweet one of their tweets? Why not leave a comment...
If you're new to the School of Podcasting, when Dave hits a milestone like 100, 200, 300, 400, he breaks format and tries to do something that is educational, entertaining, and slightly weird. Today being that it is both my 500th episode of the School of Podcasting, and my 51st birthday, (and the fact that last week was Groundhog's Day), I am taking my creativity and love of the movie Groundhog's Day (the story is a guy has to relive the same day over and over, rent it here) and joining it with the story of Jack Davidson and his friend Scooter as they try to launch a podcast. We also here snippets of past shows at the start of the show. Special thanks to Adam Curry of the No Agenda Show for loaning me their birthday jingle. Check out their awesome podcast at www.noagendashow.com Also thanks to Steve Stewart for kicking off the show, and to Kim Kracji of the onthetablepodcasts.com for being my female voice in the "podcasting commercial". I knew I could count on you both. Look Back Memory Lane 00:38 Episode 500 Begins 2:00 We cover a story about a man named Jack Davidson. It’s his birthday, he’s gone through some life changes, and he’s thinking of starting a business. He is realizing that you only have so much time on the planet, and he wants to make a difference. His biggest fear in life is being insignificant, or leaving no legacy behind. His mind is whirling today about his future. This has been spurred on by the fact that he is turning 51 today Morning Burger hit :4:00 Hey It's Your Birthday Version 1 5:01 Podcasting Commercial 5:34 First Jack tries using a free media host that limits your bandwidth - Bad idea Binky and the Whiz take over the No Agenda Show 8:44 Jack purchases blue snowball microphones only to find out these don't work good in a non-silent environment and its hard to have two usb microphone plugged into one computer. Whet Bread the Big Lie 11:55 Hey It's Your Birthday Version 2 15:15 Jack and Scooter learn that you should setup an agreement to identify who does what, and if there is any money who gets paid, etc Hey It's Your Birthday Version 3 18:50 Jack and Scooter lose their friendship after arguing over the money with their podcast. Jack goes solo, and tries multiple hosts, platforms, and equipment. Jack and Scooter come to an agreement Final Thoughts on Episode 500 23:20 What did we learn today?
Blue snowball microphones are not a great choice even though 1000 websites say so. They are not a great fit for podcasters. There are better options Copying a company that you may be talking about on twitter is a strategy you might want to try Be sure to have expectation regarding money and responsibilities in place if you have a co-host. We learned that the only thing more annoying than Binky and the Whiz is hearing the same clip of Binky and the Whiz over and over is quite annoying. We learned that the more tied Dave gets, the less he stays in character And lastly if your your episode last longer than four hours, you should always call your doctor.
The Not Ready For FM Players Podcast Sally 34:10 Mentioned in this Episode Sign up for the newsletter Steve Stewart On the Table Podcast (for toastmasters) No Agenda Show More Podcast Money Book Support This Show
Last week we talk about being a "hobby podcast" and that you can be a hero to someone. We mentioned that you do NOT have to make money with your podcast. Today we are going the other way and looking at making money with your podcast. So let's start right there. YOU DON'T MAKE MONEY WITH YOUR PODCAST. YOU MAKE MONEY WITH THE RELATIONSHIP YOU BUILD WITH YOUR PODCAST This is why it takes time. In the same way that it takes time to develop a relationship, it takes time to build an audience that will like and trust you. Things that can speed up this process:
Create content that is valuable. Come across in a way that build confidence. Deliver it on a regular basis (so people depend on you). Let them know you.
Strategies for Making Money with Your Podcast 1. Sell your own product This is by far the most lucrative because people know, like and trust you. This can be a book, a course, consulting, etc. 2. Refer to other products through affiliate links Pick a product that matches the audience. Preferably one that you actually like so you can talk open and honestly about the product. Many people use Amazon. or Audible as well. 3. Donations You can put a paypal button on your site, or websites like Patreon make it easy to build a community by rewarding them for different levels of support. Be careful with the reward and make sure you don't spread yourself too thin. 4. Sponsorship When you get over 5,000 download per episode, you can start thinking about getting a "big" sponsor (squarespace). As 92% of podcasters are nowhere near that number you are not out of luck. You can find smaller businesses that may be looking for more of a branding play. Check out my interview with Glenn The Geek who is making a living with sponsors by making sure his sponsors fit his audience and he gets them involved. Selling Digital Downloads Check out this super powerful shopping cart plugin that allows you to safely sell digital downloads Gumroad is a handy website that make's it easy to sell digital downloads if you're not using Wordpress. Selz.com is another great looking shopping cart. Monetizing With Membership Sites The School of Podcasting was founded in 2005 and I used Digital Access Pass to to make sure the general public could not access my material. I also used it to manage my affiliate program, and e-mail m members. It created coupons for discounts, and generated reports. Is is the cheapest platform? No. But the money you save using different plugins is wasted in the time you spend trying to get them all to work together. Today I interview Ravi Jayagopal from Digital Access Pass and the author of the book Subscribe Me: Making, Marketing & Monetizing Online Digital Content with Membership Sites, Online Courses and Recurring Subscriptions The biggest advantage of a membership site is you can build it once, and then sell it many times. Digital Access Pass even has a "drip" feature (now copied by many, but Ravi was the inventor) that allows you to provide your members content over a period of time (instead of giving it to them all at once ). Today we learn this about membership sites: 1. There is more than just putting up content and protecting it.2. You still have to bring value to your audience.3. You still need to promote it. It's not a "build it and they will come" world.4. You still need to provide new content to get them to stick around. Check out Ravi's podcast at www.subscribeme.fm Where Monetization Stumbles You start out not caring about money, and you turn on the microphone and just wing it. Then later you want to make money with your podcast. You topic doesn't lend itself to sponsors (too hot of a topic). This doesn't mean you can't get a sponsor, it means it may be tougher. A podcaster wants to start monetizing after 4 weeks and they haven't developed that know like and trust, or an audience. Mentioned in this Podcast Shepodcasts.com Podcaster's Studio Snider Comments
Because of my Podcast Darren Dake Darren Dake from the Coroner talk podcast has told us (about a year ago) where he was asked to do some state wide training in Missouri). Well Darren is back because now - because of his podcast - which is now over 100,000 downloads (think about how niche his topic is). Darren is using his podcast as a calling card, and now Darren has been asked to do some teaching on a NATIONAL level as the LEAD INSTRUCTOR for a course. He has made great contacts all over the world and has been asked to speak at numerous conventions. His next goal is to be asked to speak outside of the US. Check out his show at www.coronertalk.com One more point: Coroner talk was Darren's second podcast. So you don't always hit it out of the park the first time. Darren started, tweaked, learned along the way and now is seeing success. Podcast Rewind: Podcaster's Roundtable In the recent episode of the Podcaster's Roundtbale we ask, "Is your podcast paying for itself?" Check it out at podcastersroundtable.com/64 We talk about networks, patreon, and wondering if people making money with their podcast is ruining podcasting for the hobby podcast. Unleash Your Inner Hero: Defining Podcast Success A post in a Facebook Group Asked: "What is your idea or definition of a successful podcast, the one that has specific number of downloads, or subscriptions or sponsorship or something else that I might not know??" Does it make you happy? Do you love doing it every day/week? Do you have a positive impact on the lives of others? is it something you'd love to do every day as your career? You're successful. It's not about dollars and cents or downloads - it's about levels of happiness - Lou Mongello wdwradio.com All I can say is Amen. Look, I love what money can do for me. I'm up to my eyeballs in student loans, but if you OBSESS over downloads numbers, and OBSESS over New and Noteworthy you are focusing on the wrong thing. You need to focus on your audience and impacting them in a positive fashion. Example of Podcast Success 12:59 Mark Dowding from the Oh Beep Geocaching Show Not writing this to boast, or brag, just as a heads up to anyone who is getting a little jaded with their podcast. We've struggled the last few shows and have only recorded one episode in January. We've been questioning our value in our niche and what we bring to the table. Then a listener sent this e mail, which told us we've been achieving what we set out to do every episode.: "I just wanted to tell you how much I enjoy the show. I listen on my way to work and on my way home from work. My drive is around 1 1/2 hours. I have never laughed so much listening to a podcast. I sometimes have tears in my eyes from laughing so hard. An awesome father and son podcast.
So thank you" Thats all we want to do, entertain people. There are plenty of deep dive podcasts in our niche and plenty of interview podcasts. We wanted to do something different and it seems we hit the spot - no one before that listener has told us we've done that. Its worth keeping in mind that someone listening is getting value from your show, so don't give up. People Are Listening Glenn The Geek of Horse Radio Network has appeared twice on this show (cause he's that good) and check this out. He posted something in the School of Podcasting's Private Facebook Club. "I need to brag a bit, with the help of Dave Jackson getting the word out I have had four podcasters contact me this week who heard me speak on sponsorship and they all got their first sponsors this week! Rates ranged from $50 to $1500 an episode, congrats everyone. Learn more about this model in my Keynote at Podfest.us Silencing the Imposter It is amazing how if we are asked for our favorite childhood memory we may have to think about it. If someone asks for our worst memory, it comes to us without hesitation. These are the thoughts that stop us from reaching out to the world. These are the thoughts...
There are a number of things you need to be successful in podcasting.
Great Content Great Sound Great Promotion Great Attitude
No matter how great your show sound, and how much you promote it, without great content, it won't succeed. No matter how great your content is, if it is painful to listen to, or you have to constantly adjust the volume, nobody is going to listen. No matter how great you sound, and how great your content is, if you don't promote it, your growth will be slow. Without a great attitude, you won't be able to handle it when things don't go according to plan. You have to be able to roll with the punches, dodge the trolls, embrace constructive feedback, celebrate other's success, and remember to always serve your audience. It is easier said than done. Jump Starting Your Year There are a number of people who can help you launch a great year. Michael Hyatt has your best year ever. John Lee Dumas can get you where you want to go in 100 days with his Freedom Journal (and yet I bought a copy). Today we have Tarun Stevenson of leadcommunicategrow.com is hear to help us keep our attitude in check, and to make sure we set realistic goals. Avoiding Burnout When you lose hope its a very dark place to be and want to quit. Business without purpose can lead to you throwing in the towel. We look at where we want to be, and then look at where we are, and instead of feeling gratitude for what you have, you get discouraged. You have to value your current situation so your attitude can stay positive and allow you to make it to the next step. An App that Dave has been using is Gratitude Journal . Take A Look At Yourself Look at last year and figure out what worked, and what could be done better. What experiences help you grow more? When we develop small habits they can lead to giant success. Goals Be sure to have specific goals, and make sure the goals push you out of your comfort zone. Make sure they are realistic. Instead of focusing on the goal, focus on the actions that will lead to achieving the successful goal. Instead of focusing on our stats, focus on the actions that will lead to more downloads. Anything of value takes time and effort. A garden of weeds takes no time or effort. Your successful podcast will require time and effort, but it will be worth it. Becoming a Person of Influence
Operate with integrity Help other people, and deliver value. Listen to people, and be interested in other people.
Follow Tarun on twitter, Facebook, and LinkedIn Details Goal Setting & Free Audio Teaching on the 15 Laws of Growth www.leadcommunicategrow.com/growme Mentioned in this Episode How to Influence People: Make a Difference in Your World (John Maxwell) John Maxwell Books at Amazon You can also get a free John Maxwell Audio Book when you sign up at Audible. Alternatives to Recording Skype On the Ask the Podcast Coach show this week we were joined by Josh of Zencastr.com and this is a great tool that allows you to record NUMEROUS guests and all your guest has to do is click a link to join. When the call is done, their file is uploaded to Zencastr. You get a copy of each person's file, and a combined version. There are popping out of the woodwork. I also just heard about www.epishow.com/ which is basically the same thing. Both are free, with Zencastr almost ready to come out of beta and start charging. Omny Studio Media Hosting I want to upload a file and have it come down the way I uploaded it. I want a media host to support me, and provide stats. Omny studio is different as they have some of the features are radio specific. They do have some unique features as you can edit in the cloud. You can upload your intro and outro and record your podcast with your phone and it will splice the intro, your content, and your outro together. The bad news is there are no ID3 tags. While 70% of podcast listeners may not notice they are missing, anyone...
Today's episode is a special "Dual Episode" as Dave and "The Real Brian" from Profitcast take on the subject of what is needed to make money with your podcast. We got together to talk about three bullet points:
Abundant vs Poverty Mindset 8:10 Identifying the type of client or listener you want 23:50 Invest in yourself and value yourself. 29:31
In the process of going into these bullet points, I expanded the talk to include a discussion of looking at our podcast. There are two sides of podcasting
Podcast is the wild, wild West - and you can do WHATEVER you want. You need to focus on delivering value to your audience.
So this leads us into uncomfortable places as we love to be encouraging, but we need to be honest and let people know that podcasting does require work (especially if you're trying to deliver value for your audience). If your show fails to deliver value, then nobody will buy your service either. How to Overcome Negative Podcast Mindsets If you take the time so that you KNOW you are delivering value, then you are confident in your content. If you are "guessing" that your audience will enjoy/grow your content, then your confidence is not as solid. How to Identify Your Listener There is no easy way around this, and it will probably get tweaked over time. You need to go out and meet your audience. This can be online, or in person, but you need to go meet your audience and make sure they exist. When you talk to people and you hear what they need, then you can deliver the best content. How To Invest in Yourself My first piece of advice would be to turn off the television. Television delivers very little value when it comes to helping your podcast earn money (unless you're watching Shark Tank, or The Profit). There are many ways to do this that require no money: Taking time to read blogs Going to Meetup Getting books from the library Watching relevant video on YouTube All those things can benefit you in your understanding of your content, your market, and help keep you focused. There are tons of different courses. If you find one that you feel fits your needs, then take the course, and throw yourself 100% into it. Don't purchase another course, book, CDs, DVDs, until you finish that course and put those strategies into action. Ready to Start a Podcast? Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com
I recently was very concerned when I saw a video from a company call Glycast.com It stated, "“It’s a new approach to podcast advertising. This is how it works. You give us your podcast feed, and we give you a new one to distribute to your audience. ”" I could tell by the video that the person was more of a podcast listener and not an actual podcaster. I didn't think he was out to hurt podcasters. But I could see where there was a chance for people to get their RSS feed hijacked with now way to get it back if Glycast went out of business. This video explains it all. So my first reaction was to tell everyone the house was on fire, and to be careful. My second reaction was to contact the company and get their side of the story. I was BLOWN AWAY when I got this response. My name is José Pablo Fernández, I live in London, I started coding when I was 7 years old, I also started my first business around that time. I worked for Google some years ago. For the past 4 years I been running a startup I co-founded, first as CTO and then as CEO: Carousel Apps. This company is launching Glycast. I co-founded Hear a Blog, a podcasting-related product, some years ago, and we got selected and Seedcamp Paris finalists. In my video for investors I talk more about my background: https://carouselapps.wistia.com/medias/pv06qw6ap5 We have the core tech for Glycast but not everything, so, we'll build whatever is required for both parties to be happy. We want both parties to be happy, so, if you are not and you want to leave us, we won't stop you. If you require us setting up a redirect of your feed to another system, we'll implement that feature and everybody will have it. I'm thinking of actually recommending people of using Feedburner, so as to have a setup such as this: main rss -> glycast -> feedburner -> audience You give the feedburner RSS to your audience and while Glycast is there, then you have ads, if one day you want to move away, then you just switch your Feedburner account to read directly from your main rss like this: main rss -> feedburner -> audience and voila. You don't even need the redirect. Nobody will notice any difference at all. Depending on what systems people are using we may also develop plug ins. For example, we can have a WordPress plug in that makes your feed look like if it was serve from Glycast, with the ads, but on your feed on your own server. That shouldn't be that hard to implement. About who is on your show? Do you mean about which ads are played and which ones aren't? I'd love to implement something like that. It'll probably be something like this: if you don't approve any ads, then all ads are approved, if you approve enough ads to take care of your inventory, then only those ads will appear. If there are not enough ads, we'll send an email with an alert. Those ads pay for our hosting and bandwidth so we can't run without ads for long periods of time, but I don't want any podcaster ever to be unhappy about the ads they are getting. About how much money, I don't know yet. The market will define this over time. I could look at the current expenditure in podcasts but since our model is quite different, it doesn't really apply. When you buy ads in a podcast today you are most likely buying that spot forever, while with Glycast, the spot keeps passing around from advertiser to advertiser over time. Eventually, I think we'll have a bidding system, similar to Google's Adsense, so that the pricing adjusts over time automatically. About the video. I'm not here to harm anyone. I'm here to make a product to help podcasters and advertisers connect, be more efficient. I'm building whatever podcasters will need to be happy. I understand your worry and your desire to warn your audience that might not understand RSS distribution and make a bad decision now that will cost them a chunk of their audience later on. That's not something I want to do and I wouldn't be...
in no particular order) 01:25 Exponent - the nuances of tech strategy - Submitted by Max Flight of AirplaneGeeks.com, TheUAVDigest.com, and PaxExPodcast.com 2:48 Up In Your Business - brings in inspiration to help you to create a business - Submitted by Chris Lewis of www.dadspotlight.com 4:33 School of Podcasting - All Things Podcasting - Submitted by Craig from inglespodcast.com and 08:06 Kenn from blackmanwithagun.com 09:53 Ask the Podcast Coach - Your Podcast Questions Answered - Submitted by Dan Lovallo from http://headlinehistory.libsyn.com/podcast 11:18 We Choose Respect - Teaches kids to be respectful - Submitted by Erik K Johnson from www.podcasttalencoach.com 13:35 You Must Remember This - Golden Age of Hollywood - Submitted by Emily and James of www.classylittlepodcast.com 16:40 Canada Land - A deep dive into the media world in Canada - Submitted by Francis McGrogan from www.standcurious.com 19:10 The Mentee - surround yourself with heavy hitting mentors - Submitted by Gretchen from www.alwaysalesson.com 20:10 Learning Leader - focuses on leadership in every field - Submitted by Gretchen (Schultek) Bridgers from www.alwaysalesson.com 20:40 Duncan Trussell Family Hour - have a good laugh every once in a while - Submitted by Harry Duran of www.podcastjunkies.com 21:56 Mat Men - I love wrestling and this network - Jeff Bradburry from www.teachercast.net 22:30 The Morning Stream - a great mix of humor, news, music, pop culture - Submitted by Jeremy Denise of transmissionspodcast.com 23:33 Bowery Boys - New York City history - Submitted by Jessica Bailey of www.funkyfitnessnow.com 24:34 Art of Manliness - Great advice for Men - Submitted by John Overall of Wordpress Plugins A to Z 26:18 Finding Christ in Cinema - tease out the bits of movies that relate to Christ - John Wilkerson of www.thewiredhomeschool.com 28:10 Grit and Hustle - full of interviews with startups who've had overcome all kinds of obstacles - Submitted by John Livesay of www.sellingsecretsforfunding.com 28:47 The Ferderalist Radio Hour - They talk politics. They talk policy. The host is is absolutely brilliant - Submitted by John Tsarpalas of www.commonwealthy.com 30:38 48 Days to the Work You Love - shows tough love to his listeners and doesn't sugar coat things for them - Submitted by Judy Graph of www.farmandranchcountry.com 32:04 Snap Judgement - great stories, music behind it, the history, and other off the wall stuff - Submitted by Ken Kastler -of www.bountifulproductions.com 32:55 Steal the Show - the most unorthodox marketing program - Submitted by Kim Kracji of www.onthetablepodcasts.com 33:53 Mac Power Users - their recommendations have never steered me wrong - Laura McClellan of www.theproductivewoman.com 36:30 Mad at Dad - If you're married and if you have kids, you probably go through the same thing - Chiaki Hinohara of www.metalmoment.com 40:19 $100 MBA - - the perfect combination of book smarts and street smarts - Submitted by Michel Nelson 0f www.byhyu.com 41:35 Art of Likability - educational podcasts that are also entertaining - Submitted by Michel Nelson 0f www.byhyu.com 42:45 Stacking Benjamins - interesting stories around the finances - Submited by Steve Stewart of No Debt, No Credit, No Problems 44:44 Writing Excuses - really gets deep into the craft - Submitted by Maya Good of www.literaryroadhouse.com 45:50 Podcast Talent Coach - amazing information that has really helped me improve my show - Submitted by Steave Stearns of www.outsidehealthandfitness.com 47:43 Security Now! - information...
Because of My Podcast the Creator From the Blacklist Gets Interviewed on Podcast Troy produces numerous podcast, but today he is talking about the Blacklist Exposed podcast he had the creator of the hit NBC show contact Troy on twitter and ask to come on the show. While he was on the show he made announcements that were then used in Press Releases that had all the press releases pointing at Ttoy's site theblacklistexposed.com Tory point out that:
The Creator of the Show Called THEM. It took three seasons (it didn't happen over night). Make great headlines.
Evaluating Your Podcast Year My stats are basically flat from the start of the year to the end of the year. I had a bit of an upswing in the middle of the year, and I'm up a bit from last year (kind of following the trends of podcasting up about 3%). Here are some things you can look at:
See what episodes were downloaded the most See what episodes had the most comments See what pages had the most visit (check your Google Analytics) See what got shared the most ( I use Social Warfare for this) Then look at what didn't do well.
You want to do more of what seemed to resonate with your audience and less of what didn't. Seems obvious, but without a time to evaluate what is working you could be going deeper into the wrong direction. Top Ten Episodes of 2015 The Journey of Podcasting Starts with a Single Episode- Profitcast's The Real Brian Taking Phone Calls On Your Podcast What to Do If You Can't Pick a Podcast Topic What Podcasters Can Learn From David Letterman Podcasting's Most Frequently Asked Questions Making a Living Talking about Horses - Glen the Geek is Never Boring Audio Technica BP40 - Electrovoice RE320 - Audio Technica ATR2100 USB Microphone Shootout Jeff Brown Shares 26 Years Of Experience Behind the Microphone 8 Ways a Stranger Can Help You Grow Your Audience Honorable Mentions The Most Addicting Social Platform Ever What Every Podcaster Should Know About Stalkers Is Soundcloud A Legitimate Option for Podcasting? New Tools I Started Using this Year Intelliplayer is a great tool that allows you to add calls to action to YouTube Videos, as well as get more stats than you get in Youtube. Convert Kit - A great email marketing tool that gives great insights into your email subscribers Nimble - This is the tool I use to keep in touch with the members at the School of Podcasting and Consulting Clients Social Warfare - Sharing buttons on steroids for Wordpress. Simple Podcast Press - For me, the best "Advanced Player" out there. The ability to add an email sign up form AND any button I want, makes it a no brainer. Cover Genie Pro - Makes great covers, ebooks, and a whole lot more. *Note some of those links are affiliate links. Tools I Will Stop Using Soundcloud.com It may be cheap, but I'm getting zero return for my money. Lead Pages - Great tool, but the tools I'm using it for (squeeze pages) I can do with Convert Kit. I was going to use their lead digits, but I then realized that I would be marrying myself to the service as my phone number would be in my old episodes. The One Thing Other things I've noticed looking back at this year is a pile of training materials that I never went through. I bought them to "watch later" and then went on my ways doing things in a manner that I'm sure could be more efficient. I've used Asana for years. It's a great free project management tool. I've never really mastered the software and its capabilities. This will be the first thing I work on in 2016. Get organized and then identify the ONE THING that I will do next. I've heard about the book The ONE Thing: The Surprisingly Simple Truth Behind Extraordinary Results on how you should pick the NEXT thing that you will be working on and do it. Then the next, then the next. All the while making sure yo are only working on ONE THING. Don't Forget to Celebrate the...
Creative Ways to Get Your Advertisers to Promote Your Podcast Glenn made quite a splash when he was on the show earlier this year (it's the most shared episode on the site). 7:02 "Glenn the Geek" is America's Horse Husband and founder of the Horse Radio Network recently had a special holiday program where they streamed live for 12 hours. Here are some stats: 12 Hours Live20+ Hosts30 Scheduled Guests including Charlie Daniels, Robin from Disney World, Monty Roberts and American Pharoah Trainer Bob BaffertCrashed live feed during Bob Baffert, everything else worked all dayOver 100 listener voicemails with songs, poems and holiday greetings.200 calls during the day (Not all got on air)Gave away $3,000 in prizes including $1000 Grand Prize17 Sponsors Strategies For Doing a Radiothon He started planning months in advance when he was face to face with the sponsors. Sponsors who won't sponsor on a weekly basis, may be interested in doing a "one off." (who later turn into a weekly sponsor). Glenn uses Callinstudio.com to take phone calls and streams via mixlr.com He put it in the contract that the sponsors had to publish the radiothon on their Facebook page. He utilized relationships to get great guests. Glen says "It's not who you know, it's who knows YOU." He got his audience involved who sent in songs, poems, shout outs and more (it took 20 hours to edit together). They got Charlie Daniels by using the contact form on their website. They had a title sponsor who was mentioned every hour. Another advertiser sponsored the email section. Other advertisers were tied into give aways. Results of Horse Radio Holiday Radiothon He mad 50% of what he makes in a month in ONE day. It was a lot of work. He picked up new sponsor who decided to sponsor this one day, are now sponsor weekly. Proof You don't have to have huge numbers to sell advertising. You have to have huge numbers to sell to Ford and Chevy. For more information about the Horse Radio Network check out www.horseradionetwork.com Podfest Event 29:55 Podfest is in February at Tampa Florida at podfest.us For the 2nd year in a row, Podfest is the gathering place for long time podcasters, new podcasters and those who are thinking about starting podcasts. It's a special forum that brings you actionable and strategic education, unique opportunities to connect and collaborate with your fellow podcasters and speakers and access to the best podcasting resources out there! Use the coupon code earlybird before the end of the year and get $100 off. Because of my Podcast: Glenn The Geek 2:10 Glen mentioned a kickstarter program for a product that fit his audience. Glenn mentioned them on his show, and they were able to meet their funding target (with one audience member giving them $1000) and now that product is sponsoring Glenn's show. Brian From Profitcast Brian was asked to moderate a panel and interviewing the actors of his favorite TV show. I'm a Verb! 38:27 On Profitcast Brian has now made my name a Verb. As in "I'm going to Dave Jackson this..." (meaning I'm going to interrupt a voicemail to talk to the person). Streaming Radio Stations Live365 has a new tool for Podcasters to Create a streaming radio station. They are charging $89 but you get unlimited listeners. Their system is easy to use and more complex than a system using the Centova system (I currently use Listen2myradio). I do like the way you can drill down and see where people are coming from, and they have a system in place for you to make money with your stream (at the rate of $2 for every thousand ads that are played on your station). You can also make money with having people sign up to be a VIP. It's interesting, but I'm not sure the average podcaster will chip in $89 for all the bells and whistles when you can $37.50 for 50 listeners. On my live streaming station, over the last 30 days I've had 66 listeners with the highest number listening at the same time of...
The Podcast That Has More Audience Participation Than Any Podcast I've Heard Rob Walch is the VP of Podcast relations, but he started off 11 years ago as the host of Podcast411. In 2007 he started the then Today in iPhone (later changed to Today in iOs to include the iPad) and Rob has more audience interaction than any podcast I've ever heard. Here are some things I noticed about his show.
Rob mentions and ASKS for feedback and provides his email address and phone number many times through the episode. He states it, and moves on. He gets his community involved by asking them to contribute original music and artwork He offers them free apps from developers looking to promote their app to their target audience. He offers objective viewpoints (he's a fan boy, but realizes integrity easy to lose, and hard to come by) about Apple products. He uses his sponsors so he can talk about them first hand. When someone sends in feedback he religiously refers to this person by name. He reminds his audience that he is "going back to the mail bag" to remind them to e-mail in their comments/questions He doesn't pretend to know it all. If he doesn't know it, he throws it out to the audience to answer (and they do). He uses a Google community (with 2500+ members) to community outside the podcast He uses the same segments for each show, and yet every show is different due to news, apps, and upgrades. So you know what to expect, and still have no idea what to expect. Every episode is served with a side of snarkiness. Rob is sarcastic and that is the part that I love about the show. His segment "How wrong were they" is always good for a chuckle.
I play a small "behind the scenes" conversation I had with Rob back in January of this year when we were talking "Twitter bombing" 1:10 Because of My Podcast I'm on FM Radio - Mike Dell from Podcast Help Desk Mike Dell from Podcast Help Desk explains how his podcast lead to him getting a job as a regular on a local Radio show. Find Mike at podcasthelpdesk.com
Increasing Your Podcast's Audience Engagement With Better Calls To Action We love our audience, and we want to connect. We want them to take steps to deepen their level of engagement. We want them to take actions. These often include: Subscribe, Rate & Review in iTunes Follow us on Social Media Join our Email List Buy products Shop At Amazon and that's just a few. Determining Your ONE Call To Action Your call to action will be unique to you. We all have different needs, and different motives. There is no one size fits all, but in the end you need to STOP and THINK, WHAT IS THE GOAL OF THIS PODCAST. Them figure out the roadmap to get your audience from point A to point B. If you are in podcasting "Just for fun" you probably still want people to tell their friends. That is a call to action. Now if I was to honest here, I would say I want everyone to join the School of Podcasting. I need to look at this realistically. This may be the first time you've been on my website, or heard my show. That seems a bit forward don't you think? You don't ask someone to marry you on the first date, so you might not want to close the deal on the first contact with you audience. The cool thing is it is YOUR call. You want to ask someone to marry you on the first date, you can do that. But you might be less intimidating to have them sign up for your email list. From there you have another opportunity to provide value. Notice what I said here, you have an opportunity to serve your audience. Figure out where you want to go, and the figure out how you're going to get there. It sounds easy, but you might find it difficult. The bottom line is you need a plan. Tips For Creating a Call To Action
As I said before, you need to figure out what you want your audience to do Be clear and concise Be repetitive if necessary Tell them HOW (sure you know how, but they may not) Make it E A S Y (don't make them hunt for buttons, or type insane website addresses) Eliminate competitive calls to action Explain how they will benefit (not how you will benefit) Explain exactly what will happen Explain why they need to do this now Remove the Fear. Try to avoid words that might seem much of a commitment. BUY NOW vs Add to Cart. Maybe we should be asking people "Get the back catalog" instead of "Subscribe." Explain how they can cancel at any time, and it is free. Place it in two places on your post. One near the top of the page ("above the fold" and once near the bottom).
In the end, a call to action should convey value, and provide a sense of urgency. Because of my Podcast - Jeff Steinman Jeff explains that how launching a podcast boosted his book sales, brought him more traffic, and boosted his interview skills. You can find Jeff at howtoquitworking.com How To Quit Working: A Simple Plan to Leave Your Job for a Life of Freedom Podbean's CrowdFunding Platform For the sake of this argument, let's say that the bar is set at Patreon.com They are the first at an ongoing crowdfunding platform. Others have come and gone, and they are still here. Podbean (a media host) recently launched the ability to have crowdfunding. I went over to check it out. Here is what I found.
It's easy to setup, but in some cases impossible to edit. With Patreon it's super easy to create a post (think of it like a Facebook Wall) and choose who can and can't see that post. I don't see that option. With Podbean you have a comments section that doesn't seem as robust.
When I watched their video on this, I did notice that their example video shows that all the rewards are outside of the crowdfunding area (bonus content, newsletters). I have an email into Podbean for clarification. I noticed on their demo video someone asked the same question (how do I create a piece of content for a certain support level) and it hasn't been answered. Podbean does have some badges (something I wish Patreon would provide) that make it super easy to copy and paste and...
I've been talking about your podcast from TOP to Bottom over the last couple of weeks. Sometimes its good to go back to the basics and reexamine our shows. The first week we talked about Headlines (the title of your show notes), and I provided a free guide with tools to help you write better Blog Post Titles. Last week we talk about the importance of your introduction and how it is your first impression. This week we are talking about the meat and potatoes of the meal. Your content. Be Part of Our Last episode of the Year Answer the question, "My favorite podcast is.." and explain WHY leave your answers HERE (deadline 11/31) I've mentioned the book [easyazon_link identifier="0849921902" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Secrets of Dynamic Communications: Prepare with Focus, Deliver with Clarity, Speak with Power[/easyazon_link] available at Amazon which is a great book for shaping your content. I've always said that before you press record you should ask yourself, "What about this topic is going impact my listener enough to want them to tell a friend?" If you can't answer that, then maybe you shouldn't press record. Here are some questions to ask yourself: Do I have a crystal clear objective about this topic. How do you get crystal clear about a subject? By knowing your audience and what they need or want to hear. What points do I need to make to obtain my objective? Don't worry about what they think about YOU, instead think about THEM. Get To the Point With Thanksgiving right around the corner when I to my Grandmother's house it was great seeing all my cousins, it was great smelling all the food, it was great eating crackers or whatever little munchies they had out out, but for the most part I wanted the TURKEY and HOME MADE MASHED POTATOES. It was the same at Christmas. My Grandfather would read the Christmas story before we opened presents (a tradition my brother continues). Then we had to sing some Carols. THEN, FINALLY we would open presents. Your audience is here for the presents. What do you have a hard time waiting for?
Last week we talked about the importance of headlines, and I gave you a free resource to help you make better headlines. Now in Podcasting you headline is your "Show Notes" title. You can get the free resources at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/headlines Your Podcast Introduction People are busy. We hear activity like a badge of honor. How are you ding Bob? BUSY! I'm backed up. I don't get to take lunch. I'M SWAMPED! So with this in mind it is my opinion that your intro should get to the point quickly and answer the following questions: Who am I listening to? What is this? Why do I need to listen to this now? Get to the Punch Line?
Put Yourself in the Shoes Of Your Listener When they do a search in Google, or iTunes, etc they see your information and they are asking:
Should I listen to this podcast. Should I keep listening to this podcast? Will I come back to listen to this podcast
Today I play intros from the following Shows The Podcast Report Podcast Producer 5 Minutes in Church History 317 Podcast Your Intro is Important Mark Ramsey said at the new Media Expo that unlike radio, every podcast listener starts at the beginning. Make yours count, hit them hard, hit them quick, and let them know what they are going to get. [clickToTweet tweet="Does your podcast intro move people to push STOP" quote="Does your podcast intro move people to push STOP"] Get Exposure For Your Show 26:45 November is almost over. Each year I ask you to answer one question. What is your favorite podcast and WHY. Be sure to tell us where we can find your podcast (and what it's about). I'm really interested to see WHY. You can record/upload your answer at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/favorite. There may be a prize involved...... Andrew Hellmich Refused to Podcast For Free - And it's Paying Off 27:48 Andrew Hellmich is from the Photo Bizz Exposed podcast (http://photobizx.com/) and does a podcast about boosting your wedding Photography business. Andrew launched a premium version of his show - when he launched. He knew the podcast would take time away from his business, and with a family to feed he couldn't podcast for free. The other thing Andrew does well, is provide value. He knows people will not pay for horrible content. In this interview you will hear: Andrew has hundreds of people paying for his membership He didn't start in the direction where he landed. He didn't wait to get it perfect. He launched and tweaked. His current strategy is to have 5 episodes available for free, and if you want access to the back catalog you need to pay Andrew $20 a month. Passive income is not always passive. Andrew has been podcasting for three years (this didn't happen overnight) You will hear how Andrew is not afraid to try new things. Andrew loves using Hindenburg Software to edit his podcast. Do You Need a Good Podcast Introduction? If you ever wonder where I got the female singers, or who did the intro to Andrew's show check out Music Radio Creative you get the top voices from all over the world, and years of experience. They can help you shape your message (for those who are marketing challenged). It's a great service. Ready To Start Podcasting? Join the school of podcasting and avoid the common pitfalls of podcasting. You will learn
How to shape your topic What is the best equipment to choose (Without blowing a fortune) How to build your website (or resources to have someone else do it) How to record your show and get it into directories like Apple iTunes How to promote your show and get exposure
You also get access to our private facebook group, and monthly "office hour" sessions where you can get free consulting. There is a 30 day money back guarantee. If you join and are not satisfied, I will refund your money.
This is an abbreviated list of headline samples from the book "Writing Riches" by one of my favorite authors and podcaster's Ray Edwards. If you buy his book, buy some paper and pencil along with it. This topic starts at 6:35
The How To Headline (how to write headlines that will bring you more downloads) The Testimonial headline (I wish I had found Dave Jackson sooner - I could've save a lot of money) The Give Me headline (Give me 10 days, and I'll get your podcast into iTunes) The Reason Why Headline (The to 3 reasons people fail at launching a podcast - and how to over come them) The Probing Question Headline (Do you know the five things that cause people to unsubscribe podcasts?) The Dominant Emotion (Are you tired of putting out an episode and getting ZERO feedback?) The Command headline (Be the influencer that leads change in the world) The If-Then Headline (If you can upload a picture on Faceboook, then you can upload a media file your hosting). The Warning Headline (Is Soundcloud Going Out of Business?)
A headline grabs attention, draws listeners to press play, communicates the big idea, establishes credibility and joins the conversion that is already happening in your audience's head. Common Mistakes That Podcaster's Make With Episode Titles They put the phrase "Episode 123" at the BEGINNING of the headline. Nobody cares if you're on episode 6, 60, 600, or 6000. What they care about is how you are going to make them laugh, cry, think, groan, educate, or entertain them. If you MUST do this (I understand it makes it easy to search on your website) put it at the end. You can see in the image to the left that you don't get to see what the title is because half of it is EPISODE XXX. The worst offender of this is (unfortunately) the web based version of iTunes. It gives you very little room for your headline. They Put Very Little Thought Into the Podcast Episode Title This is the SECOND/THIRD thing people see when they find your listing (the first being your show artwork/Title of the Show). I know I am super guilty of waiting till I'd done recording the episode, editing, tagging it, listening to it "one more time," and writing the blog post. You're tired, you're excited (maybe), but you are "this close" to being done and you just "throw anything in there" just so you can press publish. If you think about it, from the 1890 to the 1940's they had paperboys who would shout out the headlines to entice people to purchase a paper and get the rest of the story. They weren't scream edition #417! If the podcast title is bad, the podcast will not be heard. Unheard audio impacts no one. (a twist on a John Caples quote). How To Write Good Podcast Episode Titles Typically Headlines do one of the following:
Making a promise. Drawing a picture. Stating a fact. Asking a question.
Try these steps
Start with your audience. Cosmopolitan magazine knows their audience. Write your show notes first. Then write the title. Prime the pump that is your brain. Write several headlines. If you want to read them out loud. Pick the most important benefit and include that benefit in the headlines. Include the product or problem, or guest in the headlines Often email program like Mail Chimp have A/B testing tools so use two headlines and see which one gets more clicks.
Automate the Process There are tools such as Headlinr and Freshtitle ($37) are two tools where you enter a subject and they spit out numerous examples of potential headlines/Episode titles. Freshtitle comes with Title Analyzer that rates your headlines and critiques this for you. The Yoast SEO plugin does something similar (and it's free). Headlinr is a browser extension (chrome only), and Fresh Title is software for the Mac or PC. If you're interested in knowing more about Headlines, sign up for my headline resource kit that has videos of these software titles as well as free ebooks and more. Free Headline...
Any time my podcast can get in front of more people I'm happy. From what I've heard on the Feed Podcast where a Google Rep was interviewed here is what is what we think is going to happen. Google will pull an episode and host it on their servers (but they won't be a media host) The reason for this is they have control and reliability (come some people do stupid things like put their files on a website host instead of a media host). They reserve the right to put ads after your show, and you will get nothing an like it. There will be a directory, you will be able to direct people to a location There is no set date besides "as soon as possible" It is just in the USA for starting. There are specific Google tags (just like iTunes Tags), but you can submit a feed and it will use the iTunes tags. There will be stats. They are not splitting your file into bits. They hope to feature your show when people search for it. They want to give you what you want - when you want it. This is probably why they paid $35 million for Songza (a company that generated custom playlists) back in 2014. Their artwork spec is from small to HUGE, so for now use your 1400X 1400 artwork that you use for iTunes. You can add your podcast at http://g.co/podcastprotal Here are the Terms of Service for Google Play Check out No Agenda Show for more in depth Media Analysis So How Do I Feel About Google Coming Into Podcasting? Anytime my podcast can get in front of more people, I'm very happy. As I've been online for a while, I've seen Google products come and go (Remember Google Buzz?). So while I'm excited, there is nothing for me to hold, touch, smell, and critique. Am I upset that they are going to host my files? No. Do I wish they would just pass through my files from Libsyn? Yes, but I understand why they are not. We all have our fingers crossed that they use better encoding that Stitcher (which makes you sound barely listenable). Am I upset that an advertising company is going to play ads after my show and I get none of that? No. (and I'm not surprised). As long as I can say what I want in my show and use it to direct people back to www.schoolofpodcasting.com I'm fine. Even Google has to pay the bills. So at this point, I'm "Hooray! - um, I think..." Terms of Service For Other Hosting Platforms Blubrry (use the coupon sopfree to get a free month )Content Producers agree that the content in you shows are free from speech that advocates violence or speech that promotes hate. The Company reserves the right to immediately remove any media content from its Websites that in its sole discretion is deemed to violate the restrictions of this paragraph. Libsyn.com (use the coupon sopfree to get a free month) MonetizationAny attempt to directly monetize Your Content via third-party ad networks or other outside business agreements at the expense of Libsyn without written approval from Libsyn is prohibited. If you choose to monetize, Your Content, you agree to utilize Libsyn Service to enable monetization including but not limited to in-content advertising, iPhone applications or sale of Your Content which may include additional requirements for revenue sharing or fees for use depending on the Service.. To request permission to monetize Your Content via third-party ad networks or other outside business agreements at the expense of Libsyn, please email contact@libsyn.com Spreaker (use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month) In connection with your User Submissions, you further agree that you will not: (i) publish misrepresentations that could damage Spreaker or any third party; (ii) submit material that is unlawful, defamatory, libellous, slanderous, threatening, pornographic, obscene, vulgar, harassing, harmful, hateful, abusive, racially or ethnically offensive or is otherwise inappropriate; (iii) post advertisements or solicitations of business; (v) impersonate another person or entity or falsely...
I'm going to be going over podcasting in the next few episodes. So many people think it starts with a microphone (which is a logical start), but it doesn't. It starts with an idea. It might be an idea that is fueled by a need. That need may be to help people. It may be to make them laugh, cry, think, grown, or inspire them. You want to connect with impact. This is where your podcast starts. It starts with an idea. Taking Your Podcast Inventory This topics starts at 14:21
What do you like? What are you good at? What do other people say you're good at? What do you not like?
According to the Book Secrets of Dynamic Communication you are either intending to persuade or enable people. Persuading People Everyone _______ should _____ (i.e. Every coach should podcast). Enabling People Every ____ can ______. (i.e. very coach can podcast). Even sports shows are insinuating that everyone can/should cheer for their team. A comedy show might be getting you to think about something in a different (funny) way. Why Would People Listen to Me? This is a common response. After all it's easy to focus on ourselves. We are our favorite subject after all (right?). So instead of focusing on what people will think about you, think about what you are giving them? It's usually not scary to give someone a gift they know they will love, so why should delivering content that will positively impact them be scary. Communication is about the person (singular) who you will be helping, persuading, instructing, entertaining them. So How Do You Know If Your Podcast Will Impact Your Audience? You need to live in your niche. You need to hangout where your audience hangs out. This could be Facebook groups, Google Groups, Linkedin Groups, Meetup.com, etc. You need to go to where they are, and see what they are talking about. You can read books about our subject, and read blogs as well. You can watch movies about your subject. This is one of those "simple but not always easy" kind of things. There are no shortcuts. Once you know who your podcast is for, you know WHAT to talk about. Why Are You Getting Into Podcasting? There are many reasons:
Be Seen as an Expert Reach a Global Audience Find Like Minded People Boost Sales of Your Own Products Boost speaking confidence Engage Your Community Make additional income Fun with friends and family.
The WHY is the rudder of your podcast boat. It helps direct the content in the direction that will help you achieve your goal. It your message and your goal are out of sync then you will find it harder to achieve success. The Main Hurdles of Podcasting There are many things that stop people from podcasting. Here are what are feel are the top 10 excuses.
Nobody will listen to me I hate my voice I just need "one more thing" People might say negative things I'm not a geek I don't have time
We all know that speaking in public is the #1 fear among humans. This means at a funeral, you'd rather be the person in the casket then the person delivering the eulogy. A Podcast Is A Recipe My wife makes a kick butt spaghetti sauce. To watch her make it, one might think she has no idea what she is doing. She doesn't measure anything. She has some core ingredients, but at some point she starts adding a little of this, and a little of that. She samples the sauce, and tweaks some more. In the end, it's awesome. It took her years to perfect it. Every now and then, we will be eating at the table and she will announce that it still needs _____. To her it's missing something. Meanwhile the rest of us are on our second helping as we loosen the buttons on our pants. When you aim for perfection and miss, you land on really, really good. If you never serve your sauce until it is perfect, people will starve. In a world of Kardashians and Celebrity Wife Swapping, MY GOD ARE WE STARVING FOR GOOD CONTENT. Don't Fuel The Stupidity Fire Podcasting starts with an...
Today we have a few tools to peak at. One allows you to record your podcast or go live, the other allows you to add your Blab.im sessions to your Wordpress website, Ray Edwards will teach you how to write better pages, and the last one allows you to book guests. Spreaker Studio For Windows and Mac Spreaker has been around a while, and if you are looking to do live streaming this is a great platform. They also are great if you don't want to go live. Their new Spreaker Studio software enables them to move away from the Web Based version they had before that relied on flash technology (which was not compatible with iPads, iPhones, etc). They have had Spreaker Studio apps for a while (also impressive) and now there are desktop versions to go along. Connect More Than One USB Microphone With EASE. This has been a problem that wasn't easy to solve in the past. Now if you have multiple hosts with two USB microphones you can easily connect up to three USB microphones into ONE computer. It's pretty amazing and easy to setup. It also integrates with Skype. This takes adding some additional software, but it takes just a few minutes and it worked like a charm. The best part is there is plenty of documentation so you don't have to guess what to do. You can create playlists (great for people doing podcasts of music), you can fade from one song to the next, there are buttons that you can assign sound effects to (again with plenty of documentation and tutorials). If you are person who does their show live, you also have a chat system right in the software. The only thing you need is a Spreaker account to get it to fly.You can get a free month of spreaker media hosting using the coupon code sopfree. Simple Live Press Blab Automation Tool Right now Blab.im is HOT. This is a FREE platform that makes it super easy to create a live show and have guests pop in and out. It's new and in beta, but it has promise. Hani from Simple Podcast Press (a great plugin for podcasters looking to build their e-mail list) has come up with an easy way to have your videos from Blab.im import into your Wordpress site. You can set it so you have to approve them before they are put on your website or have them automatically posted. You can add buttons again to grow your email list, your followers on blab, and more. The best thing is Hani. He is open to suggestions as the plugin has been out less than a week. My request would be to allow me to replace the blab.im video with a YouTube version later (to build my views on YouTube).For more information go to www.simplelivepress.com Here is a quick video I created showing off how easy it is. Bookly Appointlet Plugin There are tons of services like Appointlet, and Schedule Once for managing bookings. Most of these have a monthly fee (around $10). I discovered the Bookly plugin and it is super powerful. It ties in with you Google Calendar, and you can control every. This includes the color, your services, your staff, you payment options, your hours of availability, holidays and more. Here is a quick video Ray Edward Copyrighting Course I'm a HUGE Ray Edwards fan, and he is giving away a ton of free content on how to write better text on your blog. This could be to grow your business, or to grow your audience. He is a MASTER, and I always walk away feeling smarter after listening to him. To check out Ray's free tutorials go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/rayedwards Launching With Multiple Episodes Does Not Automatically Equal Downloads There are people on the Internet who are saying "If you launch with 8 episodes (or 3, or 5) you get 8 downloads when someone subscribes. This is absolutely false. Once a person is subscribed, they need to go into the Podcasts App (or iTunes or Overcast.fm) and manually download you back catalog. As podcasting gets hotter and hotter, there will be more people jumping into the space that may not giving great advice. Interview With Hanah From PodClear/Blab.im Speaking of Blab,...
Why I Switched from the Podcasts App to Overcast The last update from Apple broke their own software, and it left it there for at least a week. Never give your customers a chance to find an (alternative because they will). The creator of Overcast recently made it availabel for free (you can donate to help cover the cost $1 a month). Here are the features I love about it.
If I share something I can not only share the episode, but send people to the location I am currently at. I can listen at surprisingly fast speeds and still understand the content A 60 second skip button that when I click on it repeatedly takes giant jumps to skip through bad content. It syncs via the internet so you can listen on your iPhone, switch over to your iPad and pick right up where you left off. You can even listen on their website (overcast.fm). I can see how much storage each podcast is taking up.
In the end I love it, and according to the app I've saved 2 hours using the Smart Speed feature. VoiceStak is SpeakPipe on Steroids Let's You Capture Video Testimonials and Feedback 8:20 I love Speakpipe and I've been using it for years. This is a great tool to allow you to capture audio from your audience. You can then use it to build your email list, and you get notified via email when a new message arrives. there is a free plan for Speakpipe, and then plans start at $7/month. VoiceStak is a similar product that does everything Speakpipe does AND it allows people to send VIDEO messages (up to 5 minutes). You can integrate it to send videos straight to YouTube. It also has no limits on the number of messages you can receive a month, or how many you can store. The pricing starts at $17/month, but there is a very interesting option to purchase a lifetime option for $197 (so after 11 months you are basically using it for free). This might be handy if you have a business and you're looking to create a testimonials page. You could easily send people over to your site and using their computer, phone or tablet, they can leave a video message. You can use this on any number of sites, and you can place the widget anywhere you want. For more information check out www.schooolofpodcasting.com/voicestak Jason Bryant Turns His Passion an Expertise Into a Career with Podcasting Jason Bryant has had a goal of working as a sport commentator his whole life. Starting as a teenager in his high school he has slowly been given opportunities and taken advantage of each one. His hard work, dedication, and passion created impactful results. What results? He was asked to participate in other events. As the old saying goes, "Lather, rinser, repeat." After getting caught in the crossfire of media politics again, Jason decided he would strike out on his own. He was listening to Satelite radio and heard one coaches show, and another, and another. He thought to himself, "I could do a show like this for wrestling." Jason contacted me, and hearing of Jason's experience and history, I asked, "What's the worst that could happen?" So Jason went to his school and got his first client. Fast forward and you see Jason doing 12 shows and running at Wrestling network at www.mattalkonline.com Here are some things we learned today.
Jason knows his audience, so he had an idea of what to charge. However, it took him a year of tweaking to get it to where he is today. He didn't wait until everything was perfect. By getting his first client (going to those people you have a relationship with) it became easier to get his second and third. Jason who states, "I'm not a salesmen," has been helping potential clients see how they could run sponsors on their show and that money would pay for their podcast (and go right into his pocket). So the "non-salesmen" is helping his clients sell their podcast. So when you say, "I'm not ___" you may have those skills but no know it. Jason realized that its better to provide good content less frequently then a daily show that...
Got Feedback? Call 888-563-3228 and get your voice on the show. The top two things I heard from clients consists of:
How do I increase interaction How do I grow my audience
Increasing Interaction With Your Podcast Audience
Show up. Do you best to create a consistent schedule. If you show up, then they will make you part of their routine. This isn't mandatory (Dan Carlin is awesome and put out an episode every few months), but I would consider it best practice. Have someone who has never been to your website try and contact you. I AM AMAZED and people who do not have a page with a CONTACT link. Don't get cute and make it "buy me a cup of coffee" or "Interact" make the button/menu item say CONTACT. Why? Because it is what people are looking for. Let them choose the method of interaction. You can see if you go to my contact page that you can email me, call me (using podcastvoicemail.com ), or use the speakpipe button. You're choice. I've eliminated any reasons that you might have to contact me. One way to increase interaction is to ask for some. That's right, ask. If you want to know what they think, make it the last line of your show notes and ask them to leave a comment on your website or you can do what Michael Hyatt does and point them to his Facebook page. He who doesn't ask, doesn't get.
How Do I Grow My Podcast Audience? I've spoken about this in numerous episodes: see here, here, here , and here . You need to Make contact that impacts your audience, GO to where they are, make friends, tell them about your podcast). Today I want to throw in something I am again not seeing on websites.
A play button. If you want people to listen to your show give them a play button. This is one of the reasons I like Appendipity themes. If you want it, you can have a GIANT play button at the top of your page (see www.logicalloss.com for an example). People are not going to get hooked on your content if they can't find it. When you create content that impacts your audience, they are going to want to tell their friends. Make sure you have buttons that make it easy to do it RIGHT NOW. There are tons of plugins that can add share buttons (they are built in to the Appendipity themes). One of the best plugins is Social Warfare. This plugin is super functional and SMART. You can specify exactly how things get shared on the Internet. Another feature rich sharing plugin is Monarch from Elegant Themes if you are looking for a free tool, check out sharaholic in the Wordpress directory.
International Podcast Day Recap Today we talk with Steve Lee of Modern Life Media and the co-founder of International Podcast day (Dave Lee, Steve's son is the other co-founder). Today we hear from Steve how: We had a much more global audience with people from around the world joining in on a live 30 hour live streaming podcast. Apple was involved and was tweeting out items this year Many communities were "doing their own thing" to promote International Podcast Day. Thanks to Steve and Dave for giving us a central spot to "start the conversation" Podcast Rewind I recently appeared on the PodupPod Podcast I appeared on the Moneycast talking about my different revenue streams and my book More Podcast Money Podcast News According to a new report released by comScore, almost one-third (29%) of adults with smartphones listen to a podcast at least once a month. In the 18-34 year-old range, the figure rises to 41%. The data indicates that 18-34-year-olds are more likely than the average smartphone-owning adult to listen to podcasts on their device at least once a week, 26% vs. 18%. Ready to Start a Podcast? Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com
Are you trying to start a podcast but you can't seem to come up with something that is entirely new? Today we talk about how there are very few items that are entirely new. The iPod was just an upgrade of the Discman. The Discman was just an upgrade of the Walkman. The Walkman was just an upgrade of the 8-track tape. Typical something original is really a few items that are old that have been combined with something of yourself to make it appear original. Because of My Podcast I Was Asked to Appear on TV: Wayne Henderson Wayne Henderson deos a podcast about the Green Bay Packers, and he and his co-host were recently asked to appear on a TV show to talk some smack with some fans of the Seattle Seahawks. International Podcast Day September 30th: Get Planning Your Podcast For Free I have a fwe things going on to celebrate International Podcast Day:
My "Planning Your Podcast" course at Udemy is free from now until 10/31/15. Use the coupon code ipd15 I will be hosting an hour of live podcasting sharing "because of my podcast" stories and taking your questions
Castermind Group Podcast Coaching Now Accepting Applications If you are looking for an accountability partner/mastermind, my "Castermind" is now accepting more podcasters. Here is who this is for and what to expect
This is for the person who already has a podcast launched (if you need to launch your podcast, Join the School of Podcasting) This is a group coaching, so some of it will be answering questions, but it will also have a short lesson to help you build your audience. Each Castermind will consist of three people and myself.
If you are interested in applying, go to Castermind.com The Courage to Be Creative Keynote Session from Podcast Midatlantic I also appeared on the Podcaster's Rountable where we asked the question, "Why haven't you started podcasting?" This is similar to the talk I gave at Podcast Movement with a bit more emphasis on being creative. There are so many options when it comes to making a podcast. I look at them as ingredients. These are things you can mix together to come up with a unique show. Live/Recorded Short Term / Evergreen Solo / Co-host Mobile / Studio Short / Long Schedule Scripted / Imrov Interviews or monologue Your Delivery Stereo / Mono Fact / Fiction Gender Comedy / Serious Expert / Journey Local / Global With all these ingredients I find it frustrating when people decide to name their show Librarian's On Fire? It seems an easy way out. What's next, the On Fire Answerman? Look, that's just my onion but I think we can do better. "It is better to fail in originality, than to succeed in imitation. He who has never failed somewhere, that man can not be great. Failure is the true test of greatness. - Herman Melville Originality does not mean thinking something that was never thought before; it means putting old ideas together in new ways. The Only Way to Know How to Do a Podcast - Is To Do a Podcast! There are some truths:
It's harder than you think You will hate your own voice You will get more positive feedback than negative You will attract like minded people You will inspire, educate, and entertain people
But you can't do it without pressing record. Here is a tip I learned as amusician to take the pressure off. Record your first episode, but realize that you will NEVER release it. This takes the pressure off, and you may find that without the pressure you are aren't half bad... Start Podcasting Today www.theschoolofpodcasting.com
I was lucky enough to get to hang out with Jeff Bradburry of the Teachercast network at Podcast MidAtlantic. Jeff is helping teachers utilize technology (like Podcasting) in the classroom. I first met Jeff on a Podcaster's Roundtable and was amazed as he is doing everything LIVE. The one thing that impresses me with Jeff is he truly understands his audience. These (in some cases) are people who have struggled with technology, and are now looking to embrace it and improve the lives of students. Jeff understands that a teacher may call "audio on a podcast (no RSS feed" a "podcast" (when by definition it's not) but instead of splitting hairs, he stays focused on the goal (inspiring learning in the classroom with technology). Go Have a Baby or Three Jeff was at an event when his wife went into labor. She was three months early, and Jeff had his hold booth setup. As you can see to the right. Jeff's booth is first class (GO BIG OR GO HOME). So you might be just a little nervous about running out the door and leaving all your equipment behind. His audience knew Jeff's situation (pregnant with triplets) and told him over and over "Go, we've got you covered" (and they did). His audience trusts Jeff, and in this case he trusted his equipment to his audience. Go Inspire a Conference: Your Show Started THIS... Jeff had gone to a conference and spoke about it, and it turns out his audience was listening. They were so inspired by the idea they started an edcamp in their city. So there was no event, Jeff starts a podcast and BOOM now there is an event where there was none. Not only was their an event but a group of people enjoying it, and improving their lives. Why? Because Jeff started a podcast. Being Seen as an Expert Jeff has worked with some major brands (Microsoft, Pearson) and Jeff always bring his "A game" and takes advantage of every opportunity that comes his way and that has lead to him getting a new job and allowing him to move to a better location for his new (larger) family. I love it when the good guys win. Go check out Jeff at www.teachercast.net Voxer App Turn Your Phone Into a Walkie Talkie Jeff did a quick demo for me at Podcast Midatlantic and I was surprised how addicting Voxer is a free app that allows you to create a group "chat" where you can share audio, video, and text. It's pretty cool and I could see people making private chats for their listeners. For more information go to www.voxer.com Here is a quick video overview:
International Podcast Day Gratitude Award You have until the end of the week to nominate yourself. This is not based on voting or audience size, but how much your audience is thankful, by how much their life has been changed by YOUR show. Nominate yourself at http://internationalpodcastday.com/gratitude/ Clammr Are Super Easy to Create with Simple Podcast Press Clammr is a free app that makes it super easy to share short clips of audio (with links to your full episode). Now users of the Simple Podcast Press plugin (which already add subscribe buttons, email subscriptions and more has a clammr button which makes it SUPER easy to create a clammr from your website. This makes it super easy for your audience to share your content on the clammr. For more information check out Simple Podcast Press. Mentioned in this Show Appendipity Themes for Podcasters Ready to Start Podcasting? See www.theschoolofpodcasting.com
Quick Takeaways from Podcast MidAtlantic Patience is a gentle version of courage - Kathy Kelly Special Mouse Podcast Podcasting Changes Live - Jeff Bradburry and Scott Swanson Watch other Media Types - Jeff Bradburry and Anythony Minaya Tell great stories - everyone Being Creative is fun. Podcasting Changes Lives I'm definitely having Jeff on my show in the future. The great thing that happened this weekend is person after person would share a "because of my podcast" story and I need to have them on the show. Jeff does the teachercast, and he helps educators (as a teacher himself) utilize technology in the classroom. He was great to hang out with, and he mentioned that if you help a student that's great (1 person), if you help a teacher that might impact 20 students, if you help a superintendent, that could impact thousands. Scott from Muppetcast shared a story (I need to have him on the show) where a Jr High boy was getting beat up at school because he loved the Muppets. Scott's show showed him that he's not a freak, and it's OK to like the Muppets. What Podcaster's Can Learn from Johnny Manzel I live in Cleveland, Ohio. Out sports teams are not good. We have tremendously talented people like LeBron James and Johnny Manzel, but still we can't win. Last year out football team the Cleveland Browns draft Johnny Manzel with their first round pick. Johnny rubbed his fingers together in a way to say, "I'm going to get paid." It became his signature. It appeared in Johnny's mind that he had achieved his goal. He had maid it to the NFL. The bad news is that is not THE goal of a football player. THE GOAL is to win the Super Bowl. Johnny had a reputation as being a person who was more interested in parties than play books. He always seemed a bit unprepared. This was his first year, but Johnny was now a professional football player. In this league you either carry your weight, or you are traded. As more and more stories of Johnny (more or less) goofing off came to the surface (welcome to being famous), it really appeared that this kid had his priorities out of whack. Paul Colligan has an episode where he said, "Starting A Podcast To Hit iTunes “New And Notable” Is Like Launching A Business To Get Into The Phone Book." This is a classic, and it ties into this analogy. The goal of a podcaster is not to be in New Noteworthy, the goal is to impact your audience. Your goal is to bring value. For some, the goal is to create revenue streams that help supplement their income. When I wrote my book "More Podcast Money" getting it into Amazon was not the goal, the goal was to help people set realistic financial goals with their podcast. Amazon is a tool to help me do that. The 8 Week Myth About iTunes New and Noteworthy
In the book Podcast Launch (by John Lee Dumas) a very unfortunate paragraph states that you "Have a mere 8 weeks to be featured within the best podcast advertising real estate on the planet." This needs tweaked. It should read, "You can only be considered NEW for 8 weeks, you can be considered Noteworthy any time." Because of this unfortunate paragraph people are spending all their and effort focusing on getting into New and Noteworthy. This is very much like Johnny Manzel focusing on getting into the NFL. It's not the goal, it's a milestone. In the same way that being drafted into the NFL equals success (as many people get cut, and many first round draft picks never measure up to their potential). You can get into iTunes (I outline the 27 steps here), and to get into New and Noteworthy you pretty much need a pulse. Legal Podcast Music I was told about a new service from Mike Stewart that features a large group of music cleared to be used on your podcast. I play some clips on my show today, and you can find out more at their website. The package contains 150 – 60 second royalty free music themes with license to prove to YouTube or anyone you have my permission...
What Podcaster's Can Learn from Johnny Manzel I live in Cleveland, Ohio. Out sports teams are not good. We have tremendously talented people like LeBron James and Johnny Manzel, but still we can't win. Last year out football team the Cleveland Browns draft Johnny Manzel with their first round pick. Johnny rubbed his fingers together in a way to say, "I'm going to get paid." It became his signature. It appeared in Johnny's mind that he had achieved his goal. He had maid it to the NFL. The bad news is that is not THE goal of a football player. THE GOAL is to win the Super Bowl. Johnny had a reputation as being a person who was more interested in parties than play books. He always seemed a bit unprepared. This was his first year, but Johnny was now a professional football player. In this league you either carry your weight, or you are traded. As more and more stories of Johnny (more or less) goofing off came to the surface (welcome to being famous), it really appeared that this kid had his priorities out of whack. Paul Colligan has an episode where he said, "Starting A Podcast To Hit iTunes “New And Notable” Is Like Launching A Business To Get Into The Phone Book." This is a classic, and it ties into this analogy. The goal of a podcaster is not to be in New Noteworthy, the goal is to impact your audience. Your goal is to bring value. For some, the goal is to create revenue streams that help supplement their income. When I wrote my book "More Podcast Money" getting it into Amazon was not the goal, the goal was to help people set realistic financial goals with their podcast. Amazon is a tool to help me do that. The 8 Week Myth About iTunes New and Noteworthy In the book Podcast Launch (by John Lee Dumas) a very unfortunate paragraph states that you "Have a mere 8 weeks to be featured within the best podcast advertising real estate on the planet." This needs tweaked. It should read, "You can only be considered NEW for 8 weeks, you can be considered Noteworthy any time." Because of this unfortunate paragraph people are spending all their and effort focusing on getting into New and Noteworthy. This is very much like Johnny Manzel focusing on getting into the NFL. It's not the goal, it's a milestone. In the same way that being drafted into the NFL equals success (as many people get cut, and many first round draft picks never measure up to their potential). You can get into iTunes (I outline the 27 steps here), and to get into New and Noteworthy you pretty much need a pulse. Podcasting and Stalkers When I was growing up my sister gave too much information to a guy she met on the bus. The next thing I know, is she is getting really creepy phone calls. We eventually had to work with the phone company and the local police (and his mother) to get him to stop calling. It was creepy Talking in Generalizations Today Let's not get to tied up in being 100% accurate today? What I mean by this is most stalking situations are men stalking women. In some cases it's men who are creepy. In many cases it's the women who are being too polite. Men are from Marz and Women are from Venus is not entirely accurate. There are always exceptions to the rule. Today, let's generalize and be OK with it. Dr. Steve Albrecht Dr. Steve Albrecht has worked with the San Diego police for years where he spent six years in the Domestic Violence Unit, and he handled over 1,500 cases. He is internationally recognized for his expertise in high-risk HR issues. he has authored many books on the subject of work place violence. Check out Dr. Steve Albrecht's Books and Amazon.com The bad news about the Internet is when you put information out there, it's out there (pretty much forever). If you don't want naked pictures of yourself (celebrities) on the Internet, then don't post them. For me, I have a Facebook profile for my podcast, and one for my family and fiends. I share different items with different...
Periscope and Podcasting Periscope is a live streaming service from Twitter. It's pretty cool. My step-son is at Perdue and last week we got to see his first performance with the band via periscope. I had 36 people watching my cat in a baby's sleeping shirt. During the week I would open it up and just talk about whatever hit me. It's an interesting way to connect with your audience. In general, the video is recorded and can be viewed for 24 hours. You can download the file and upload it to YouTube or whatever service you would like to use. How Do I Get My Mixer Into Periscope? I used an iRig device originally meant for guitar players to plug their guitar into their iOs device but it works for me. You will need a 1/4" to 1/4" patch cable to go from the mixer to the iRig, and then the iRig into the phone. There is an iRig2, but it is overkill. Also when it comes to patch cables, as you will be doing this near your mixer, this is probably a case where a shorter cable is better. Like most podcast equipment questions, there are about a billion different tools you can use to do this. The bottom line is, have something to say. If you don't bring value, you won't have people coming back to hear what you have to say. It's one thing to just hop on and test it out, be sure to mention that. For me, I like firing it up and having one topic, saying it, and get out. In the immortal word of James Brown, "hit it and quit it." Blab.im - The Crack Cocaine of Social Media Blab.im is completely addicting. It also is a streaming service like Periscope except you can (if you choose) to let up to four people join you. There is a chat room where people can chime in and ask questions. They can also request to be part of the stream. I tried this last Saturday on Ask the Podcast Coach. Typically this is a call in show where my co-host and I talk and occasionally take a phone call. It's awesome as you are never sure what you are going to get . I think in the year that I've done that show we've had one caller, and one waiting twice. Last Saturday I had four people in the cue wanting to come on. You still have control over who is and is not on the stream. You can mute people, or band them from the blab. You can start a blab on your computer (so it's easy to connect your mixer or microphone)or on your mobile device. It's best to use Chrome when you are on the computer. You can choose to record it (or not). If you record it, when your blab is over, you get a link to the audio file (mp3 file - 320 kbps stereo) or the video. When I compared the audio from Blab the to the WAV file I recorded on my portable recorder, the WAV file didn't win by much. Blab.im vs Blog Talk Radio It's also not fair to judge at this time because Blab.im is free. They have tons of video and audio on their servers, and trust me, they will eventually have to charge to keep this engine rolling. Blog Talk Radio has really step up their game. Their audio is now 128 KBPS stereo. You (and your gusts) can connect directly to their system. It creates AWESOME sounding audio. You can have your audience call in via the phone. They have a chat system, and you can direct people to your show on Blog Talk Radio, you can also implement their system on your site. It is super easy for people to connect with you. With that said, the buzz on Blab.im completely smokes Blog Talk Radio. The interaction, the exposure of people tweeting, for me - in my experience - with my audience, it was like the difference between college football and the pros. Both are great, but blab.im was just a much faster pace. Blog Talk Radio has the ability to have a call screener, and that you do not have at blab.im so be ready to eject the first person who comes in screams Bobba Booee! For me, I do love being able to see the person's name, and have links to their profile on Twitter (so I may end up following you). They plan on adding the feature...
As a podcast consultant I should be telling everyone to start a podcast. I do. I believe there is a lot to be learned from starting a podcast. You learn to:
Organize your thoughts Prioritize your goals Speak with confidence Work with people from different cultures As much as podcasting is about talking, I think the top podcasters are at the top because they learned how to listen.
We Predicated Disgruntled Podcasters in December 2013 There was a time when it seemed every podcast had the term "on fire" tacked on at the end. In December of 2012 myself, Daniel J Lewis, Ray Ortega, Steve Stewart, and John Lee Dumas had a roundtable to discuss what Steve coined "The John Lee Dumas effect." People were starting a podcast, following a formula, and expecting the same six figure result as John. Part of that roundtbale was to point out the hard work, dedication, and insane work ethics that John has (and they being John Lee Dumas comes very naturally to him). John has always been super transparent about his life, his business, and his workflow, and how long his runway was when he jump into the unknown waters of podcasting (that's why I like the guy). John is an original. Here is the income from the eofire.com website
Here Comes the Next Wave of "Podcasting is Dead." Comedian Brock Wilbur made a post and said, "“Podcasts are pointless. Anyone who tells you otherwise is the literal devil. No one is going to get rich or famous or gain any level of following from this medium ever again, because it is hilariously dead. Your idea to share caustic observations about an ongoing TV show? Pointless. Your idea to interview interesting people? Laughably misguided. Your idea to discuss each individual episode of a decade-old CW show? Well… shockingly successful.” I went and listened to his podcast. Brock has around 125 downloads per episode (13,767 downloads divided by 110 episodes). If you were a teacher, that would be 5 classrooms of 20. I’m three minutes into it, and I am now finally getting into the content. You played a song with no teaser. You are hoping that people sit through some song hoping that they make it to the content. As a first time listener, I have no idea who you are, or your guests. Your audio is right on the edge of distracting. I get it. One microphone with four people, you’re going to get room noise. It's YOUR show. You can record it any way you want. At 5 minutes you finally introduce your guests. Nobody waits for 5 minutes for someone to get to the point. You then had one of your guests introduce themselves. The average attention span is around 8 seconds now (or something ridiculous like that). In my opinion 97% of the time improv blows. Brock typed a whopping 32 words that is not a huge target for Google to find. The Yoast SEO plugin recommends 300 words per post. It's YOUR show, do what you want. Nothing screams “great content” like four people talking over each other. Who am I to judge, it works for THE VIEW. In the article you say, “two years ago we started setting aside Thursday nights to have fun people get drunk around microphones in my living room.” It sounds like you’ve achieved your goal. The one thing that really confused me, is Brock has a great looking website, but instead of adding the podcast to YOUR WEBSITE, you send people to a bad Podbean site that looks like a throw back to bad MySpace page. A Farewell To Podcasting Donovan Adkisson was on my show a while ago after completing his first year. He had written a book about it, and was excited about podcasting. Three years later he had created Adkisson Digital, four podcasts and a fair amount of frustration. If you listen to his episode titled "My Farewell to Podcasting" he states the following: I'm not saying I'm ceasing my podcasting endeavors because I don't get any feedback, but its...
Today I share a story about getting outside of your comfort zone, and we talk with the Real Brian about how his podcast has lead to him getting paid to host two more. Donnie Pushed Publish On His Podcast. I got this email in my inbox: Hello Sir, I am writing this to simply introduce myself and say a big Thank You! Not long ago I was inspired to begin a daunting task of creating a podcast. I have listened to numerous ones over a varied topic span ever since the beginnings of the podcast. So I decided to bite the bullet and give this a go. With thoughts of what fun this could be and eager to learn some new skills I ventured forth into the "glamorous" world of podcasting. Your show has been a go-to for every topic I can imagine. I glean over past episodes for the struggles I am currently facing and words of encouragement along the way. Simply put, it has been indispensable in this process. With that said, I do need to mention that I already belong to JLD's Podcaster's Paradise and the information there has been helpful also, albeit a little pie in the sky- esque. I am a loyal listener now of your show along with the Podcasters Studio and Roundtable. This week I listened to the Glen the Geek almost everyday on the long drives between day job customers. All I can say is WOW. That episode really hit home. The show I have created focuses on the Craft Beer community. I am based out of Knoxville, TN so my main goal was to break into the local scene. I am around 5 episodes deep in the editing process and have just released my first show to my website and submitted to ITunes this week. I have broken the procrastination mold of not releasing due to trying to 'make it perfect'. I realize we all have to start somewhere and I have finally made that big step. Now to grow and promote, along with get much better every time I am behind the mic. -Donnie InebriatedWisdom.com My Reply Donnie, Awesome. You have done what so many people have failed to do, you hit publish. No matter what people say from this point forward, you put it out there, for better or for worse, you hit publish. I'm so glad I inspired you because this email may have just inspired me for my next episode. Do you mind if I read you e-mail on the show? Some steps you can take are to go find your beer peeps. See if there are local brewers (guessing here, not my niche), etc. Be sure to make friends before you start pimping your show (or they won't care). Congrats, and do everyone a favor and put a link to your in your signature. Dave Keeping My Integrity at Podcamp Pittsburgh. So I attended a session on basic audio editing. I could see that the audience at this event were brand new to Podcasting. At the end of day one, I asked if there were any open slots (as they just filled one) and they stated they didn't At dinner that night with Krystal, Nick, and Kim, they said I should do a session. It turns out at Podcamps, anyone can speak anywhere. I resisted. As the former director of podcasting for the new media expo, I know what goes into planning and running a show. I just pictured some guy coming up and saying I'm speaking tomorrow at 11 and my brain exploding. Chris Brogan (one the creators of PodCamps) and I asked him if adding sessions was allowed, and sure enough it was. In fact, it was encouraged. But still I resisted. There I was standing on the edge of my comfort zone. I mean that seems like such an ego move. "Hey, I'm here and I'm going to speak!." This is the wrong attitude. It's valid, based on my experience, but I needed to be open for new information. I had just seen with my own eyes how this group desperately needed a podcasting 101 type of talk. Nick continued to nudge, and I thought of my email to Donnie. This meant believing in myself (I've been doing this 10 years, and as a computer instructor I have to be light on my feet and go with the flow on a regular basis), and of course... Nobody was going to punch me in the face. (thank you Ryan K Parker of...
Glenn the geek has been podcasting since 2008. He does it full time. He grew his audience by reaching out to leaders in his field and partnering with them. He has a background in sales, and found the right sponsors for his shows. He embraces his audience, and knows that if you want people to listen you have to be entertaining. You might be thinking that if he is making a living from his podcast he must've had some huge podcast launching and rocked the top of the iTunes charts, and lived in New and Noteworthy. While that may be true, Glenn wouldn't know. You see, Glenn focuses on his audience. He focuses on making great content that entertains and educates. It wasn't until recently that he even knew to ask for reviews. He did it the old fashioned way. He earned their trust, and never lets his audience down. Consequently, they don't let him down. As a salesmen, he has made more money in the past. However, he is now making a living and having more fun talking about a topic he is addicted to (horses) and loving every minute of it. Today get a pencil ready as we interview America's Favorite Horse Husband Glenn the Geek from Horse Radio Network. Podcast Rewind (2:43) Paul Colligan lays it on the line in the Episode title The Weird Thing About Podcasting For Money Rob Walch was interviewed on Podcast Junkies on the Truth about Podcast Numbers (the stats start at the 52 minute mark). Glenn the Geek America's Horse Husband (5:47) Here are some of the top takeaways Glenn started with ONE podcast. Glenn put all his efforts into this show. He started with ONE. He got a sponsor early even though he didn't have thousands of listeners. How? By finding an advertiser who was more interested in promoting their brand than delivering a coupon. Glenn gets his sponsors involved in his show. He uses them to answer questions from his listeners. This is a great way to promote the brand, make the brand look like an expert, without having a giant commercial. Glenn KNOWS HIS AUDIENCE. They are addicted to horses and aren't the most technical bunch. You will see on horseradionetwork.com that Glenn has step by step tutorials to help his audience learn how to listen (on every single type of device). If you know you're going to have a network, promote from episode 1 (even if the network doesn't exist). This way when it DOES exist people who catch your early shows will have the same branding (Glenn was following the model of Twit.tv). Glenn is not a horse expert, but he shares a passion for horses and he plays the role of "Average Horsemen" on the show. You don't need to be an expert to start a podcast. He used Blog Talk Radio but left due to poor audio quality (Blog Talk Radio just unveiled their upgraded service which now delivers CD quality and allows you to connect directly to the service without using a phone or skype). He now uses Call In Studio, and Mixlr to stream live. Glenn does use CPM for selling ads. He sells a flat rate per episode. He advises his sponsors to purchase three months of ads to start out (he prefers 6 months). Glenn used Big Contact to make a player that can be shared on other websites. Big Contact is no longer accepting submissions. You can do this using the Libsyn Player, the Player from Blubrry.com (under conntect), Podtrac.com, or you can make your own using Wimpy Player. Glenn only lets products he uses sponsor his show. The only thing you have is your integrity, and he knows his audience trusts him and he never loses sight of how he will lose in the long run if he sells out. Find companies that are already advertising in your space (like a magazine), find out how much they are spending (call to see how much it costs to advertise) and explain how you have their target audience, and that you can put their brand in front of them for less money. Become the Official Radio Station of Your Industry (29:42) Glenn went to an...
I attended Podcast Movement last week, and I am busting at the seems to tell you about it. To keep this short, here are my top memories and take always from Podcast movement. 1. The Door Key Was Branded Yeah, you know the magnetic door key. It had their logo on it. I often lose hotel keys and have to ask for another one. I didn't this week. What a HUGE first impression. I told Dan and Jared that there was so much icing on the Podcast Movement cake that you could not get a bad piece of cake. 2. The Michelangelo Line from Lou Mongello Lou Mongello is one of my favorite people. Lou is so authentic (you will see a theme here). In his keynote he just kept saying things that made me want to stand up and go "Preach On Lou!" (his talks was on Sunday). He said a line like, "When people came in to look at a new painting from Michelangelo they didn't go, "Great Painting - What brush did you use?" 3. Ejecting Bad Guests - Jordan Harbinger Jordan is like a Lioness guarding her cubs when it comes to his show. It's HIS show, and if you try to mess with HIS show he will kick you to the curb. Try to keep pimping your stuff on his show when he explained up front that the pimping (if any) would be done at the show and he will shut down the recorder and send you home. It's HIS show. 4. Aisha Tyler - It's MINE. This one really hit home with me. How many things are truly 100% YOURS. Aisha has like 37 roles on TV, movies, etc. Yet, she records, edits, tags, uploads, and writes notes for her podcast. Why? She admitted she is an workaholic (transparent), and she said with all of her roles, her podcast is the only thing that is 100% hers. When a listener said she talked too much when interviewing a guest she advised him to get his own show (where he could be a mime for an hour). 5. Great Content - Different Angles The combination of Lou Mongello (The Dean of Disney) and Aisea Tyler (a fanatic of the F word) was a bit of a whiplash, but it was AWESOME. Why? Because they both were hitting the same topics. Why? Because they are best practices. Don't get in it for the money. Be unique. Follow your heart. Make and learn from your mistakes. 6. Nice Flip Flops - Marc Maron I'm standing in the Stockyards restaurant and in walks Marc Maron. I felt like I was on his TV show. There he was in cut off jean shorts and flip flops. Marc is Marc. He's authentically Maron. What you see is what you get. What you get is funny. I apologized for him having to be interviewed in Cleveland where the DJ had his staff vomit in the studio (Marc refused to go in the room). He laughed. 7. Embrace Your Audience - Marc Maron There were tons of podcast "Celebrities" at this event. When Marc walked in, celebrity went to a new level. I felt honored to shake his hand. Later I saw where he took photo after photo with people who know like and trust him. 8. No Recording Devices - Really Sarah Koenig? You come to a podcast event and tell us to NOT record you? This left a bad taste in my mouth. It just seemed out of place. It seemed so ....RADIO. Afraid someone might post it to YouTube and you can't do the same presentation over and over? WOW. 9. Pat Flynn - How To Top A Delorean Pat Flynn did got me. At one point I actually thought the mighty Pat Flynn had lost his place in his presentation. Then an English accent came out of the speakers. I found out later that each time the English voice (inside Pat's head) was created by Pat pressing a button. This was hugely entertaining. Once it was over, and you just realized what you saw, the magnitude of preparation had to be insane. I once saw the band Genesis. Phil Collins and Chester Thompson did a 15 minute drum solo. Both men were completely 100% in sync. The longer it went on (with the beats getting more complex) the more mind boggling it became. Once it was over, you just kept asking, "How did they do that?" Pat, how did you do that? Pat entered the room with a movie and a Delorean at the New Media...
Podcasting News: Midroll Purchased by Scripps - Another shot of legitimacy for podcasting? Ask the Double Rainbow Guy The article mentions CPM (the amount you make per 1000 downloads) of $100. This seems unrealistic to what I typically hear ($15 - $30 CPM). Honda's 2016 Accord will have the ability to have Apple Car Play, and Android Auto. Full Story Podcast Rewind: I recently was asked back on the Coachzing Show talking why podcasting is here to stay. I did a webinar with Steve Stewart on Podcast Workflow for his Audacity Workshop its only available for a limited time I started listening to the Tim Ferriss show, and the one thing that he us just AWESOME at is follow up questions. When he interviewed Rick Rubin he asked how Rick got into the 99 Problems video by Jay Z. At the end of the answer Rick says, "He is one of my favorite people." To this Tim instantly asks, "Why do you say that?". Later when he interviews Glenn Beck he asks about Glenn's dilema of having to hire a large amount of people to build his Blaze network. Glen explains who he hired first. He said he knew within the first three minutes of their initial meeting that this woman was going to be hired. To this Tim instantly asked, "What did she say to make such an impression on you." It's an interesting show, and he has interviewed so many big names, that you can "cherry pick" episodes of just those people you like. Podcast Microphone Shoot Out Audio Technica 2020 (condensor XLR/USB $99) Audio Technica 2100 (Dynamic XLR/USB $59) Audio Technica BP40 (Dynamic XLR $349) Electrovoice RE320 (Dynamic XLR $299). You will hear that all these microphones sound great. I recommend podcasters NOT use a condensor microphone (2020). In listening to the 2005 vs the BP40. The 2100 seemed to carry more bass (odd as they have the same bass frequency). There is a low cut switch on the BP40 if you want to cut frequencies below 100 (these are so low, these are almost frequencies you feel more than hear). The one thing that hit me right out of the gate is this microphone can double as a weapon. Its super solid, looks good, and just seem heavy duty. I really liked the AT8484 shock mount that is designed to be used with the microphone. It has a super slick lock that allows you to slide it in and out with ease (not that most of us will be switching microphones, but it is cool). As the shock mount is designed for the unit, it holds it well. I have a "off the shelf" shock mount for the RE320 and it seems a little strained to hold it (so here again sticking with factory stuff, even though slightly more expensive might be the way to go). Test One: Gain How much gain is coming out of the microphone? All of the microphones seemed to need the same amount of gain. It seemed like the BP40 did provide a little more (and needed less gain). Test Two: Tone The ATR2100 (for me) had the most pleasing tone. Plenty of low and high end. The RE320 was the clearest, and the BP40 had a smooth sound (but didn't have the hi end of the RE20) What is my first impression? I love the look of the BP40. It's super rugged. It's super solid. I LOVE the shock mount that is an accessory as it is SUPER EASY to snap the microphone in and out. Test Three: How much room noise does it pick up? I put a fan on in the background and turned the radio on lightly. None of the microphones (accept the 2020) would pick up a noticeable amount of room noise. Can you hear it? Yes, but only if you are in a quiet room listening through headphones. Of the 2100, the bp40, and the RE320, it seemed the BP40 seemed to pick up the most room noise (but again, the amount of noise was something you would really have to strain to hear). For me, for the money and the flexibility I still like the Audio Technica 2100. Now, the ATR2100 is not as durable as the BP40 or the RE320. These are microphones...
Today I will answer the questions that I receive on a regualr basis. Podcasting News: Popular Science has launched a Podcast caled Futuropolis Salary.com listed "On Air DJ" as one of the the top 12th jobs on the brink. Speaking of that, CBS Radio eliminated more than 200 positions in companywide layoffs this week, including an unconfirmed number in Chicago Ira Glass now owns This American Life. The interesting thing is this artcile mentions that he has 22 employees. In March 2014, This American Life ended its relationship with PRI, who had served as the show’s distributor since 1997, flexing its muscles in a way that suggested long-running intent towards independence. Speaking of employees on the latest "But wait theres more" episode of Startup, Alex Blumberg states that he has a staff of 19 people to produce three pdocasts and they are making 2 milloin dollars this year (and spending 2 million). FREQUNETLY ASKED QUESTIONS How much does it cost to start one? $91 Mic, Stand, Pop filter $60 Mixer $20 Libsyn (use the coupon sopfree) $8 Hostgator $60 Artwork $24 Intro MRC $263 Xbox One, 500GB Hard Drive $342 What Microphone The Audio technica 2100, 2005, or a Electrovoice RE320. I hear good things about the Heil PR40 as well. I like the EV RE320 as no matter where my mouth is, the tone doesn’t change (with other microphones the close you get the bassier it gets). How Long Should it Be? As long as it should be, and not a minute more. Vallery Geller in the book Beyond Powerful Radio says, “There is no such thing as too long, only too boring.” This is proven by Dan Carlin’s Hardcore history which can run around 3 or 4 hours and published irregularly. How Often Should I Publish As I previously mentioned Dan Carlin’s show, you should publish a podcast that consistently delivers value, and impacts your audience. However, if you can establish a schedule that your audience can count on, they will make you part of their routine. My advice is record a few test shows so you can fully understand the work it takes to create a podcast, THEN pick your publishing schedule. While you will hear people talk about doing multiple episodes a week, keep in mind these are multiple shows that deliver value. Where do I get Music For My Show? Podcasting-Resource.com I like Audio Jungle Can I play Music in My Podcast? No. Not Legally? Do People do it? Yes Will it get you banned from iHeart Radio? Yes What’s the Best Media Hosting? Libsyn Great stats, ease of mutli location publishing. Blubrry - Great Stats, Ease of Publishing your podcast Spreaker - Good stats, built in audience. Podbean - OK Stats, Can I Use my Web Host as My Media Host? You can, but should you? No. Listen to SDR Show. It took him 6 weeks to get shut down. How Many Downloads Should I Have? Take the value the value you provide and multiply it by the effort your put forth to promote it, and there is your number. For the average Joe, it should be between 10 and 200 downloads per episode. Here are my download numbers: Ask the Podcast Coach 250 Jillian Michaels Fan Cast 2000 Building a Better Dave around 300 Marketing Musician 600 Weekly Web Tools 325 SOP 1600 Feeding My Fatih 150 Wost Podcast Ever 10 How Do I Grow My Audience? Figure out who your audience is Make content people want to talk about that impact them Go to where they Make friends Tell them about your Podcast Make it easy to share Sounds like a lot of work. Simple, not easy. If I Write a Review for you in iTunes will you Review Me? Why are you asking a stranger to review your show, why not ask your audience? No, I mean I want you to Review my podcast? See podcastreviewshow.com Should I Buy? A Mixer? Do you have more than one...
In today's episode, (not safe for work) I share clips from a podcast I set out (as an experiment) to be the Worst Podcast Ever. It would: 1. Have F-bombs. 2. Insult the audience. 3. Deliver no value 4. Use Potty humor and be overtly immature The reason? I had two: 1. I wanted to test podbean.com (who during the test had a technical issue, and my files quit downloading). 2. I wanted to see what kind of downloads a horrible podcast would get. I've heard from Libsyn that many podcasters get around 200 downloads per episode. (get a free month at Libsyn using the coupon code sopfree ) The worst podcast ever gets about 10. Rules for Experiment: 1. I could not use my real voice. I didn't want anyone to know it was me. 2. I could not promote it at all. Not a single tweet. Doing a Podcast as a Character: This is not new. "Madge Weinstein" has been doing yeast Radio since 2004. There are people who do not use their names such as School of Podcasting student Stargate Pioneer who does the Legends of Shield podcast. Cali Lewis has always been Luria Petrucci behind the scenese of Geekslife.com You may feel more confident behind the microphone as your character then in your own skin. I say "Fake it till you make it" (you will get comfortable as yourself) but being a character is an option. People like Seth McFarland get away with tons of things on their TV show The Family Guy as the characters are cartoons. The Simpsons is another example of characters getting away with things a real person would not. But in the end Seth still takes flack for his characters. The down side of being a character is connecting with your audience. I met Paul David Peterson of Entrepreneur Explosion. Paul's show is a parody of all the Entrepreneur shows. Paul is not his real name. If I want to meet Paul at Podcast Movement or New Media Expo, I can't if he is completely incognito. In my case my character on the Worst Podcast Ever was simply named "Grumpy Old Man." What if AARP wants Grumpy to come speak at a convention? These characters don't exist in reality. The Stylizer 3000 Today I play a bit that I included in today's show to get you to think about all the different styles that you can use to create your podcast. There are SO MANY ingredients that you can use to create a completely unique podcast. I worry that people will not take me seriously as a podcast consultant if I'm too goofy on the microphone. I guess we will see. Podcast Rewind: Formats on the Podcasters Roundtable I participated on the Podcasters Roundtbale Episode 53 with +Ray Ortega,+Daniel J. Lewis +David Jackson +Colin Gray +Paul Peterson and+Doug Payton to discuss the various types of formats you can chose for your podcast. Check it out Ready To Start a Podcast? If you're ready to start a podcast SIGN UP TODAY, and rest assured you will have everything you need to learn how to launch a successful podcast.
On Episode 470 of the School of Podcasting (coming on 7/14) we will talk about doing a podcast in Character.
Podcast Rewind: Spreaker Live show with Rob Greenlee - My Appearance Darren Rowse from ProBlogger (now a podcast) on the New Rainmaker - Dareen started getting new listeners to his content less than 24 hours of launching his podcast. Startup Podcast stated that 50% of customers at Dating Ring (the company they spotlighted this season) came from the Podcast Serial Brought 341,000 New Listeners to Podcasting 6:00 Serial posted a report on their effect on podcasting Serial had a 4.6 % of their audience respond to a survey 23% of their subscribers said this was their first podcast. 90% changed their viewpoint of podcasting. 137,000 Newsletter Subscribers According to CNN (and these numbers are probably bigger by now) 3.4 million is the average number of downloads per episode (as of 12/2214) If we take the percentages from the survey results and apply it to the download numbers you get this 23% (782,00) Serial was their first podcast 90% (703,800) said it changed the way they viewed podcasting. 89% (695980) of the first time listeners tried out more podcasts. 49% (341,030) of those who tried out more podcasts are listening on a weekly basis. FULL REPORT Free Subscribe By Email Service 12:18 Blubrry Launches Subscribe By Email service. This is a free way your audience to be notified (by email) of your latest episode. So if your audience is not super tech savvy, you can give them an option (for free) to subscribe and be notified when a new episode is available. It doesn't cost you or your audience any more and there are no ads in the emails to your customer. If you are looking for a free service that will always be free, this might be an option for you. For me, if a listener of mine is giving out their e-mail that should go to ME. I can get an email list for free with a service like Mail Chimp. Eventually if you get a large list you do eventually have to pay for it. Here is what it looks like
or you can just have a text link that reads Subscribe by Email Finding Your (Captive) Target Audience 16:55 Promoting your podcast is simple, but not easy. Here are the steps: 1. Identify who your audience is. 2. Make content that impacts and inspires them. 3. Go to where they are. 4. Make friends and build relationships with them. 5. Tell them about your podcast. When you make content that impacts and/or inspires your audience they will talk about your podcast I am working on an article for Podertainment Magazine about growing your audience. This month's article will be based on some stories in the book Fizz: Harness the Power of Word of Mouth Marketing to Drive Brand Growth in the book he mentions how the Bissell swepper company had a sweeper that was quiet (no motor ) and powerful (able to suck up small toys). They needed to get this in front of their target audience (Moms with small children). They went to the mall and through pine tree needles on the group and swept them up - right in front of the line for Santa where their target audience was. The great thing is the kids got involved and took turns using the sweeper. Mom's took pictures and shared them. They told their friends about it and word of mouth marketing boosted sales by 15% the first year and 25% the second. Musicians Playing Laundromats Back in 2008 Dave interviewed a musician who had started playing gigs in Laundromats. The idea was the audience couldn't leave. He built a rapport with them, sold CDs, and eventually the audience started coming to gigs the musician did with his band. Demo CD Dave used the service Kunaki.com to make sample CDs. This was filled with small clips of audio that secured credibility of the show, and gave great tips that would impact the audience. Dave delivered these to the local Gutiar Center (where his target audience - independent musicians shopped). Not the best use of this idea. The...
Group Coaching: Castermind Group Coaching I'm starting something new and I have room for three people. I may expand this in the future, but for now as I test this out there will be three people (four including me). We will meet once a month on a Tuesday night. We will talk about where we we are, and where we want to be. We will talk strategies, measuring our progress, and sharing what works and what does not. I am running this promotion via Joyride, so you can sign up here. Seating is limited. Podcast Advertising Works In a recent article about the popular podcast Serial, "81 percent of “Serial” listeners between October and December correctly recalled a season one sponsor. And almost all of them knew it was Mailchimp and what the email-marketing service does." Podcast Advertising Pays - If You have the Numbers An article on theawl.com stated this about podcast advertising (using Midroll). The company’s ads—“integrated, native, often host-read spots”—are hugely effective compared to most internet advertising, so businesses pay good money for them. Podcasts, which tend to run one or two ads before the show and two or three ads during the show, can earn around three hundred dollars per ad if they average at least ten thousand listeners. For the elite circle of shows with over four hundred thousand listeners—generally the iTunes Top 50—a single ad spot can net over ten thousand dollars. Podcast Idol? WNYC Launches Podcast Accelerator WYNC has launched what they are calling a Podcast Accelerator. What is it? The WNYC Podcast Accelerator will give both established talent and up-and-coming storytellers the opportunity to pitch their big podcast idea and potentially win the chance to produce a pilot. The application period will run from June 25 until July 15. Five finalists will be paired with producers from top WNYC podcasts who will mentor and train the candidates, helping them hone their pitches. The winner gets the chance to produce a pilot episode with a WNYC producer. The Podcast Accelerator is open to anyone able to attend ONA and who is NOT a current employee of NYPR. The conference is $769. Finalists get one complimentary ONA badge apiece, and benefit from a six-week virtual mentoring and training period, in which leading audio producers will help you hone your pitch, including story lines, character development, sound, texture, voice. In addition, you’ll have two virtual meetups with fellow finalists, ONA’s digital director and a WNYC producer to share ideas and progress. The winner will have a chance to create one pilot episode with a WNYC producer The President Was Interviewed on Marc Maron's WTF Podcast This episode set a new record for the most downloads in a 24 hour period ( 735,063 or 30,628 and hour, or 510 downloads a minute). The previous record holder was Dan Carlin with his Hardcore History podcast that had 351,000 downloads in 24 hours) CarPlay and Android Auto Going into 14 Chevy Models. While we've heard about Apple CarPlay and Android Auto a while back, they are starting to be installed that normal people can afford. For the 2016 model year, Chevrolet will offer Android Auto and Apple CarPlay compatibility in more models than any automotive brand. The 14 Chevrolet models include the all-new 2016 Cruze compact car, which will debut on June 24. Cruze is Chevrolet’s best-selling passenger car, with more than 3 million sold since launch. Additional models are listed in a chart below. New Podcast Stats From Edison Research A new Edison research report has come out on who is listening to podcast showing how podcasting is continuing to grow. 49% have now heard of podcasting 33% have listened to podcast 17% Have listened to a podcast in the last month. Listeners are now 50/50 Men/Women The Smartphone has had a HUGE impact on podcast...
In this episode we talk about your resting hear rate. The link in this layer contains Amazon affiliate links.
There is a great saying, that those who learn from their mistakes are smart. Those who learn from other people's mistakes are wise. Marc Johansen sent in a voicemail stating how another podcasters who has been on the scene for almost to years stated that Apple created podcasting (they didn't) and many other obvious "untruths." It seems everyone who can press record has now dubbed themselves a podcast consultant. What is a person to do? Because of My Podcast: Marc Maron Marc Maron has already interviewed two of his childhood heroes in Mick Jagger and Keith Richards of the Rolling Stones and today he is releasing an episode where he go to interview The President of the United states. The President of the United States was on a podcast called WTF. Which makes me ask, WTF? Why Good Podcast Consulting is Expensive I occasionally get caught up with watching other consultants. I was listening to a Duo who just launched their podcast course explain how they had to record their episode four times due to a strange white noise they get when using Skype, I want to shout "Turn off the setting to let Skype adjust your volume." Now if they had hired me to troubleshoot their problem that call would have taken 5 minutes (and the way I work, they would billed for minutes - not 15). Currently a five minute call with me would be around $12.50. You might say, "How can that be it only took you a few minutes!" The truth is it's taken me 10 years of playing with technology and working with hundreds of people and their podcasts. My Podcast Dilemma If I start calling people out, I look like an egotistical jerk. If I say nothing, there is a chance you might fall prey to their crap. When in doubt, focus on making content that will inspire and impact your audience and let the chips fall. If you truly impact your audience, they will tell others about your show. Podcast Rewind I appeared on the Podcasters Roundtable with +Ray Ortega,+Daniel J. Lewis +David Jackson +Jerod Morris +Tawny Fineran and+Pilar Orti to discuss the ins and outs, ups and downs of having a podcast with co-hosts. You can hear it here. If you do interviews you HAVE To go listen to Erik K Johnson Podcast Talent Coach podcast. OMG! He has been doing a four part series on Interviewing that is just super cool and really gets me thinking. Check him out at www.podcasttalentcoach.com Follow Up On the Haters Episode: Last week we talked about dealing with negative comments and Max Flight had a great comment. He stated when someone sends you an email, tweet, etc that is negative. Ask them for their phone number of skype ID and ask them to have a live conversation. It will truly separate the men from the boys. In the end you may end up with a friend (who knows). Daniel J Lewis celebrated five years with his Noodle Mix network. He did an episode where he shared what he has learned in the past five years. A Strategy To Help Grow Your Audience: Say My Name I was driving to Michigan and my GPS had taken my the same way it always does. I looked up to see the see that the road I was supposed to take was closed. Oh no. I started following detour signs, but I was supposed to be going north, and instead I was going south. The sun would be going down, and I was getting stressed. Luckily, one of my favorite podcast from Moondog Marketing came across my playlist. John Buscal has been on this show, and I've been on his. I love the way John breaks down marketing concepts into wording that anyone can grasp. The bonus he was interviewing Andy "Dr. Pod" White. Both these guys rock, and to have them on the same show was like Ted Nugent doing a duet with Eddie Van Halen. The best part, was the stress of being almost lost subsided. I wasn't alone with just me and the woman in my GPS. My buddies John and Andy where with me and I didn't care if I was late getting to the hotel. Then it happened, they started talking about...
Today I have the joy of interviewing Jessica Kupferman and Elsie Escobar from the Podcast called She Podcasts and now they have launched a specific Podcasting School of Women ($997). This segregated approach lead some men going, "Do we need a special school of Women?" and the answer (according to Jessica and Elsie is yes. Podcast Rewind - Dee Snider on Radio 2:21 Today I play a small clip from Dee Snider's Snider's Comments podcast (iTunes) who explains how radio is so bad, that people PAID MONEY to NOT listen to it. Satellite radio requires more hardware in a time when everything was going to the phone. My favorite part is Dee asks, "Name me three people in their 20's that are listening to Satellite Radio."Dee's show is on Podcast One, and is available at DeeSnider.com and iTunes Why a School of Women? You may not be aware of this, but Men and Women are different. Men like to get to the point, and Women love details. In today's episode Jessica reveals a story where she asked a man about her show and his answer was to shorten the episode length and do more of them. When she shared this with her female audience, they told her "NO! Don't DO THAT!" In some cases Men "getting to the point" with their answer may come across as "salty." It may come across as impatient, and short. When a man answers a question he has good intentions (we love to fix stuff) and yet the delivery of the answer may not connect with everyone. For the record, there are plenty of women podcasters (the women who are listening need to get their friends listening to BOOST the AWARENESS of women podcasters, as well as shows geared towards women. Never Forget It's Your Show Does this mean you need to be more politically correct when you speak into the microphone? One should never knowingly, intently say things to hurt people. However, in a world that is getting more and more sensitive - you're going to offend someone. You are the best at being YOU, and if speaking a certain way doesn't come naturally it may hurt your performance. It may cause you to over think topics. One of the things I LOVE about She Podcasts is that I AM SO NOT THEIR TARGET AUDIENCE. Case in point, in one episode Elise admits she has a crush on someone. I don't think you'll hear that between Ray, Daniel, and myself on the next episode of the Podcasters Round table. And you know what? That is ABSOLUTELY OK!. You are NOT going to please everyone, and if you try your show will lose in the end. Elise and Jessica were contemplating letting dudes into their private Facebook for women only. I APPLAUD them for NOT letting men in. It's THEIR group, and they can handle it any way they want. You can always make your own group. How Did They Start? Jessica and Elsie met at a business school and often crossed each other past. When Jessica heard that Elsie was podcasting she immediately connect with her. It wasn't long until they noticed there was no "female - podcast about podcasting." So they thought, "We should make one," and they did. One Passion Different Approaches When I listen to the show, Elsie (who has a background in Yoga) and Jessica (who may across as "Feisty") compliment each other well. Jessica is always ready with a joke, and Elise has an completely infectious laugh. According to their website, "Jessica Kupferman is an online business consultant who helps small business owners and solopreneurs find their voice, create irresistible online products and design their business by their own rules. Elsie Escobar is a digital Jedi, working in the mystical paradox between tech and holistic living choosing podcasting and the magic of audio as her weapon of choice." It's a great mix. What To Expect at the Podcasting School For Women? Jessica is using her branding and marketing experience, and uses it to tie into Podcasting. Instead of "how to use Facebook" it is now "How to use Facebook for...
Congratulations on the nomination of School of Podcasting as a top podcast in the Technology category! THANK YOU SO MUCH
About the Bear Arms Show:
beararmsshowThe Bear Arms Show is your weekly source for 2nd Amendment news and commentary delivered in a fun, entertaining way. The focus is on efforts to protect, and restore, the right to keep and bear arms. Also featured are interviews with leaders and newsmakers in the 2nd Amendment community. The show is hosted by brothers, John and Michael Willett. They are veterans of the U.S Military and lifelong firearms enthusiasts. You can find them at www.beararmsshow.com/ and in iTunes and Stitcher.
The Good Parts:
The intro and outro along with some of the sound effects and production elements were great (Courtesy of Music Radio Creative). You both have great insights and experience with this topic. As brothers you have a natural chemistry. The website and the audio quality were fine. The branding with the bears is nice icing on the cake. Put that panda on a Tee Shirt!
Things That Could Be Tweaked:
It took you four minutes to introduce what was coming on the show.
You were missing the "Title" ID3 tag.
Work on your transitions. You don't need to announce that you are transitioning, just transition.
Figure out what you want to say in each topic. Then once you've hit all our points, you just figure out how to transition into the next story.
In the case of the Gabby Gifford story, lead with the story then follow it up with your main points.
Get Reviewed at www.podcastreviewshow.com
Dave Hooper joins Dave Jackson to talk a little radio, a little podcasting, and making an impact on your audience.
Does it matter where you host your media if it's an actual media host? What is Amy Schmittaur behind the camera? What kind of downloads can I expect from my first pdocast episode? If my show is really bad, what can I expect? All of these questions are answered in today's School of Podcasting's Morning Announcements episode 453.
Dave's Thoughts on Spreaker
Colin from Canada asks, "What are your thoughts on Spreaker? Is it too crowded, what do you think of their sound quality?"
I've spoken about podcast media hosts in the past, and a few years ago I was not a huge fan of Spreaker. I was contacted by the head of Spreaker, we got on Skype and since then they have continued to add more and more features to their platform. They use to rename your file, tweak your ID3 tags, and there was no way to redirect your feed. Those objections have been solved. Do I have any objections to Spreaker now? Only one (and it's a small one). Both Libsyn.com and Blubrry.com have the ability to have an unlimited back catalog. Spreaker allows you to have a HUGE back catalog, but in the end, there IS a limit (510 hours - thats a lot of episodes - for $20 a month).
Your Host Won't Get Your More Listeners
So many people thought that having their podcast on SoundCloud would bring them more audience (in my circles it brought in an additional 3%). While Spreaker does have a thriving community, in the end don't look to your media host to bring you an audience - you need to do that on your own.
What Kind of Numbers Does a New Podcast Get?
Last week I released an experiment of mind call Podcasting For Free. Episode 4 got 33 downloads in a week. Another experiment I did was trying to make the absolutely worst podcast. I think I succeeded as the first episode released in 2013 still only has 8 downloads. Downloads will always be based on your topic, genre, and background. We have tools to help you shape your content at the School of Podcasting.
Amy Schmittauer Jumps Into the Podcasting Pool (With No Makeup)
Amy Schmittaur is the force behind Savvy Social Sexy. I found Amy on YouTube and I love her sarcasm, and her content. For me, that's an unbeatable combination. In today's interview we discover:
-
Amy is actually shy when the camera is turned off
-
People give you 8 seconds on YouTube to make your first impression
-
In the end, you have to do the work. You have to at least try.
-
Amy is out on her Sexy Savvy Social LIVE tour (see info).
-
The things Amy can do in a podcast that she can't do in a YouTube video.
Here is Amy explaining the name of her brand. It makes me laugh every time I watch it (#imjustsayin')
School of Podcasting Members and Affiliates
If you are a members of the School of Podcasting and School of Podcasting Affiliates we have MOVED platforms (I am now using Value Addon for my membership site).
If you have not received your new login information, please visit the Help Desk, and let me know. If you are an affiliate, you need to sign up to continue to be an affiliate (it's free, and easy), and your old affiliate links won't work after the end of the month. https://www.jvzoo.com/b/0/148781/99
Today we talk about media host that allows you to podcast for free, and they actually pay you (very little, but hey its pay). They provide an RSS feed, and the ability to leave if you need to.
Reaching Your Audience
You need to go to where they are, make friends with them, and THEN tell them about your podcast (not go there, tell them about your podcast, and then make friends). Dave has business cards to promote the show (not him) and he hands them out and occasionally leaves them in places where his target audience is. Make sure your family and friends have them as well. They cost like .05 a piece. You need to hustle. It may be a better strategy to really focus on the audience and get them excited about your show and let them tell people about your show.
My Audio Needs Help [13:00]
My sound is not good, what can I do? The hiss is gone where we talk. Any ideas?
The caller is using condensor microphones (which pick up background noise more than dynamic microphones). Dave recommend the Audio Technica 2100 microphone (aff link).
You want your sound to be close to going over "0" without going over. Turn off the automatic settings in Skype. You can use the Echo user on Skype (its an automated robot person that is good to use as a test). Always make sure the person is wearing headphones.
Use Auphonic.com to clean out bad recordings (bad recordings can be improved, but don't expect miracles).
Practice, Practice, Practice.
You can check out Dave's podcast equipment store. (affiliate link)
Facebook Business Pages 35:33
How do you setup a business page on Facebook? Dave is not a facebook guru (I use it to keep up with family).
Can I mix mono and stereo in the same episode?[40:12]
Quick answer: no.
Trucking Podcasters UNITE! 52:49
Check out Dave at www.schoolofpodcasting.com and Jim at www.theaverageguy.tv
I am working on an episode that will have clips of people who have been on radio, and I’m still working on it. When I interviewed Jeff Brown from podcasteracademy.com and the Lead to Read Podcast (readtoleadpodcast.com) he just kept bring gold and I just couldn’t wait to share it. We talk about Tips on conducting good interviews Keep a level of intimacy with your audience How Taco Bell Almost got Jeff Fired How do you get guests for your show (when they say no the first time) We also hear the last five podcasts Jeff listened to.
Today I play a clip from the final level podcast ( icetfinallevel.com) feature Jeremy Jasta of hatebreed.com
My Favorite Podcast Is Nick Seuberling from “Inside the Jungle” who love the 606 Podcast. Its information he can’t get in the US. Ben From Modern Self Protection loves the Survival Podcast podcast because its energy, and inspiring. Bill from the Media Fiasco I would definitely pick the Mike O’Meara Show, it always puts a smile on his face. Cain from the Adventure Frequency podcast Adam Carolla show consistent, funny. Daniel J. Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast and My Podcast Reviews likes the Business of Marriage because the topics fits Daniel like a glove. Dr. Dave from Shrink Wrap Radio Psychology Podcast loves Mac Break Weekly to get up to date tips and news from experts. Al from Whats Up On Earth loves the Podcast because its funny, and appealing and keeps him up on pop culture. Erik from Podcast Talent Coach loves the Solopreneur Hour for their unique interviews that aren’t like everybody else. Fred from Skills in Screencasts and Podcast still loves the No Agenda show for its behind the scenes look at the Media James loves the PFW in Progress is where James gets in depth information about New England Patriots football. ValueJennifer from the Delightful Life podcast loves Live Your List Show because the hosts are entertaining, and its inspires you to be a better person. John from Writers Authors on Fire from Loves Entrepreneur on Fire because it keeps him positive and motivated. Johnathon loves the Moment with Brian Koppelman. He loves in the in depth interviews that make him think. Ken Casler of the Thinking Outside The Box podcast loves the Spark podcast. It entertains him and keeps him up on technology and he loves the hosts voice. Kim from On the Table podcast loves Get it Done Guy (she also loves Starve the Doubts) for the entertaining stories. Matt McWilliams from the World Changers Show loves Ray Edwards because its unique slant on business, faith, productivity, and family. Randy Cantrell of Leaning Towards Wisdom loves Serial for the excellently produced masterful story telling. (recently parodied on Saturday Night Live) Remi from the Sci-fi Movie Podcast loves the hosts from Bald Move Network who talk about numerous topics, and he follows their shows. They are fun, honest, and objective. Rick from the Evolution Talk podcast loves Mysterious Universe podcast (he pays for their premium content) it allows him to escape and relax. Scott from Karate Tournament Tips and Tricks loves The Unexplained with Howard Hughes its really interesting without being over the top. Scott from Computer Tutor Podcast loves Dave Ramsey because he knows what he is going to get, and yet you never know what you’re going to get. It’s entertaining. Stargate from the Legends of Shield podcast loves the Star Wars Minute for the behind the scenes, entertaining stories, Terry from Discovering America loves the Jefferson Hour Summary As I listened to theses clips, I listened and made notes. When I put it all together, here is how it broke down. These are the qualities that people mentioned most. These numbers indicate (according to the 50ish people who replied) how important the following topics are. If you combined funny and entertaining, that would be 47% (for me if I’m laughing I’m entertained). That would mean 49% Value (things I can use, easy to understand) 47% Entertaining/Funny 32% Personality (objective, chemistry, authentic, objective) 32% “Deep Dive” (in depth information) 15% Behind the Scenes (info you can’t get anywhere else) 11% Inspiring (encouraging, kept me positive) 11% Stories (people love stories) 9% Voice (“I love their voice”). I have said (since 2005) your podcast is not about you, it’s about the audience. If you are a radio station, your call letters are WIFT (what’s in it for them). Find out what they want and deliver it in an entertaining and encouraging fashion, and you will connect with your audience. A HUGE thank you to all my listeners, but a special thank you to everyone who called in with their responses. I hope you enjoyed this episode it took over 10 hours to edit the audio, get them transcribed, record the show, format the word doc, embrace the magic that is the Kindle format.
I ruined an Angel. I did. There was an Angel in my mother-in-laws bathroom. Its been there for years. One day while peeing, I looked up and noticed it had something (maybe a book) in its one hand, and in the other it had a candle with no wick. A candle with no wick, and the top of it slight indentation around it. It looked falic. Now there are certain words you don't use around your mother-in-law. You are still trying to help be happy that her daughter is married to you. That's the plan at least. But one word I typically do not use around my mother in law "Dildo." So on the way home I told my wife (trying to be weird, shocking and goofy) "Why is the Angel in the bathroom holding a Dildo?" To this I believe my wife just said ," David?... sigh..." My warped sense of humor that she found unique as we were dating has lost its magic. Never in my life would I think my wife (my trusted and most intimate partner) would tell her mother, "Dave thinks the Angel in the bathroom is holding a Dildo." Now for the record, I was told my mother-in-law laughed (I am very lucky in the Mother in law department), but on the other hand I ruined the Angel. Nobody can look at the "Candle" anymore without thinking Dildo. Rumor has it, I may end up with it as a present as nobody can look at it anymore.
I was thinking of all the Christmas specials and how one sided the are. In the aftermath of children getting shot by cops we are becoming a little cynical. We want to look at the other side. When I thought about it, here is what I came up with.
Frosty Was a Pedophile
Frosty the snowman could slide around without moving his feet (OK, he didn't have any) and he loved to play with Children. He sounds like Michael Jackson and that’s when it came it me. Frosty was a pedophile
Rudolph Had A Serious Coke Problem
Rudolph stayed up thinking about leading Santa's sleigh. We think this was his dream, but really he was on a three day coke binge. His nose was Red because he did lots of coke. This is why Santa didn't want him guiding his sleigh. He knew Rudolph was going to crash unexpectedly, quickly, and Santa didn't want to die.
It’s funny how different smells and sound just zap you back to certain time and places. Every time I hear "Eruption" by Van Halen its 1978 and I'm sitting in Al School's bedroom with Scott Kenepp looking at the record player (it was 1978) just baffled as to how Eddie is making that noise. When I hear the song "Linus and Lucy" (what most people consider the Peanuts theme) I think we all can flash back to sitting in front of the television, of hurrying back because the commercials were almost over and the show was coming back on, and watching a Charlie Brown Christmas.
I had a weird experience the other day. I was driving to Michigan and stopped at a rest area (the older I get I have to pee every 15 minutes). Maybe it was the smell of diesel fuel and the sound of trucks, but for a second I really felt like my Dad was standing right behind me. It’s so strange to miss someone so much you rarely saw. I didn't turn around, but it was just a very strange feeling. It was cold outside, but I was suddenly warm. I just felt his presence. It’s strange how much someone who didn't see a whole lot at the end of his life. But in a way my Dad was like a Charlie Brown Christmas. You know every year he's going to be there. How weird would it be if all of the sudden they just didn't broadcast that? Well that's how I feel this year. It's not surprising after all. The holidays always make us think of family, but for the record I miss you Dad and I'm really going to miss you telling me the same thing you told me the last time I visited you. Alzheimers sucked, but it was better than nothing. Nothing. Nothing sucks.
I will forever associate the word "home" with being wrapped in the supper thick black comforter we had after playing in the freezing snow, and having mom bring me some hot chocolate. Christmas music on the stereo, and staring at our tree. Peace, warmth, and love. The world' best combination.
Last night I was sitting in my mother in law's awesome home. I had all my kids there, we were decorating the tree. We were making fun of ornaments made long ago (Why is Santa carrying a giant green bean?). At point we were running out of room for ornaments and all the cool ornaments were on the tree so I sat down, and I pulled out my phone and plugged it into a portable speaker and started playing Harry Belefonte's Christmas album. Every year I play Harry Belefonte's Christmas album while decorating the tree and I'm right back in my living room with Mom making hot chocolate. I just wanted to suck it in. Here are my step kids. One is married, one is in college with a serious boyfriend in South Carolina, and one getting ready to go to College. Who knows how many of these we will have. Soon they all will have in-laws and it’s a crap shoot to get them all together. So I just sat there and watched my beautiful wife, my awesome kids finish decorating a tree. I told my brain to be a sponge and suck in and hold on to this memory. With my astigmatism and my glasses needing cleaned there were extra sparkles added to the lights. It was awesome. It felt like home.
Today we talk about premium RSS feeds. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/438 for more information
Replacing your iTunes Artwork 1:50
The big key when replacing your iTunes artwork is to change the name of your file. So if your original artwork was called, artwork.jpg you should name your new image artwork2.jpg (or whatever you want to name it). You want to avoid using the exact same name as iTunes won't see it as changed and it won't update. Currently the iTunes artwork is 2048X2048 jpg. The minimum size is 1400X1400 jpg.
The album artwork inside the mp3 will show up based on the player. For example it will show up if you use the Windows media player, but not in the podcasts app from Apple.
If you change the album artwork for each episode be sure to use 1400X1400 image (minimum).
Mixlr Updates their Chat 9:30
You can now see who is in the chat on mixlr. It Seems like Spreaker and Mixlr are both fighting over and over to keep their services on the cutting edge.
Turning a Hangout into a Podcast 10:25
You can do a hangout on air but don't invite the public. There is a very small chance that the general public can stumble across your show. When you use Hangout on Air its automatically recorded and you can pull the video down and pull the audio out. I record the audio of the hangout into a portable recorder to capture the best audio.
Dave no longer recommend powergramo, and is testing Pamela as a skype recorder on the PC (call recorder is the best for recording on a mac).
This Video Shows you how to extract the audio from a hangout sing Audacity
Skype Seven Update 17:45
on the mac ecam call recorder can record the audio and video, and it comes with additional tools. you can split out both side of the audio and video. It is super simple to use. Ryan Parker can be found on foodcraftsmen.com
Video Tool Vmix 19:15
If you are looking to have multiple cameras and many other options for video check out http://www.vmixhd.com/ its cheaper than some of the other titles (but still not cheap). If you are looking for video tools check out manycam (free)
Do not eject people from a hangout or the people you have ejected can't get back into the hangout.
SKype uses a lot less resources on your computer. So your computer many be straining to do everything. Skype seems to be great with Skype
Podcast One Pulls Their Content From Stitcher 25:15
Podcasternews.com has an interview with the head of Podcastone. They asked Stitcher to cut them in on the advertising that was running against their content. Stitcher didn't do that and they pulled their content. Jim pointed out that this may be fueled by Stitcher not selling to Podcastone.
We keep saying Speaker, it was STITCHER.
Podcasting Has More Influence Than Radio Show 28:40
Michael Crose is heard on 29 radio stations across the country (at 4 am on EST and 1 AM on PCT). He had some items to sell and mentioned those items on the radio show ONLY. He got next to nothing in terms of a response. He got five responses. The next week he did the opposite and did the spot on the Podcast and only kept that up for two days. He got 29 responses. You can find him and homeandgardenradio.com
Medifire Update From Jim 34:550
Media Fire is a media server that offers a fair amount of space and a lot of bandwidth for $24 year. Dave is not happy with the stats, but Jim has been using them and likes them. Dave tried them this week with some video, and it kept buffering when streaming HD video. Jim has had good success and has loaded 25 gigs of audio and video on their server. Jim says they are worth giving a look. They are not using another service behind the scenes. If you are on a super tight budget you might want to check them out. In the long run, not the best, but if you just want to try. They offer 1 TB of space. Storage is getting cheaper and cheaper. Many of these places are not a good fit for podcasting.
39:20Audiomack
Chris from house of Ed Tech told me about Audio Mack
Its another platform that you wouldn't use as you MAIN service, but another platform that you can load your content on (free).
It does mess with your file, but it has a player. It messes with your mp3 tags unfortunately, but it is free. With a very small test at this point and single digit hits on his shows. If nothing else, its worth loading. If it reaches someone who wouldn't find you before, its worth it. This is why its important to mention your website.
Having a Good Chair 47:10
Our chat room is awesome and some days they are having their own show. This week tey were talking about how important it is to have a good chair (SO TRUE!)
Black Friday Specials 50:10
There was a temporary sale at the School of Podcasting, and Jim picked up a cool Flash drive and FREE GLOVES at Radio Shack.
First things first, I'm not a lawyer and do not take this as legal advice. Always speak to a lawyer.
A few weeks ago I made a video about the service Audello. At the end of the video I saw something that really upset me. I was already somewhat upset as I can see where people are going to spend $300 for a product that is unnecessary. I took to the video camera, and the blog post with smoke coming out of my ears. My title warned people to stay away from this product and I called it a scam.
That is over line. These as Yosemite Sam would say, "Are fighting words" and you know what? He's right. I went looking for what words could get you sued and I found a great post from Deb McCalister. She has some great advice (deb has worked in PR for a long time).
Don't Be a Warning Bell
Avoid comments like
WARNING: Beware of… (or the variations: Stay away from…Don’t do business with…DO not hire…Do not buy…Do not waste money…) SCAM ALERT: (Company or individual’s name) is a con artist… (or the variations: I got taken in by…These scammers took my money…Don’t trust…) (Company or individual’s name) lied (or the variations: misrepresented…promised but did not deliver…ruined my property description by doing shoddy work…did shoddy work…is the worst company description…)
She also stated that you want to keep things personal:
Focus on your own experience, and don’t tell other people what to do. Keep your language in the first person. “I hired…” “I found…” “I paid…” “I thought…” “I feel…
You should try to avoid telling people what to do. Give them the facts that you found, and let them make a decision.
Don't Threaten
Tactics to avoid saying
I’m going to make it my business to tell everyone I meet what a crook you are. I am going to tell everyone not to do business with you. If you don’t fix the problem you caused, I am going to ruin your reputation online.
So what did I say that was so bad?
I called it a scam (it's not a scam is where you give people money and get nothing in return - you do get something in return with Audello).
I told people not to buy it. Like I said, don't tell people what to do. Give them the facts that you found, and let them decide.
Be Ready to Prove Your Claims
What Would My Updated Review Be?
I downloaded and installed Audello last week. On my computer I could never get it to launch. I didn't contact their tech support as my goal was to get an overview of the program so I could talk about it. Their web interface was really all I needed. I do my recording in other software (so I didn't need it).
Here are some of their features
Playlists
Future Dating of Shows
The Ability to see where people stop listening
Split Testing
Audio bars
Of all the features the one I feel is unique is split testing. This is geared toward having a selling proposition on a page. So if you have a page setup to collect email addresses, you could see what audio message worked best at getting people to sign up for your email list.
Playlists can be done with the free plugin powerpress. Future dating of shows can be done in Wordpress. The ability to see how long people are listening is available if you are on the Stitcher platform. All of those features are free. This is where Audello will say that the main advantage of Audello is that all these features are under one platform (and that would be true). It is also true that Audello is around $197 - $294.
When I imported my feed, not all the details came across. If you have multiple shows on Libsyn, when you upload a show through Audello it will randomly pick which show to assign the file (that is not acceptable in my opinion).
So the software has bugs (most new software does), but for $297 I expected more.
Mentioned in this segment: EFF ONline Defamation Law and Deb Mcalisiter Article
Here is the message I received
audello2
Brute Protect Plugin
Last Saturday the School of Podcasting and Ask the Podcast Coach had Brute Force attacks that made it hard for my website to stay online. It was a horrible feeling. Working with the tech support at Host gator they determined that I was under a brute force attack. I searched for a plugin to help and found the Brute Force attack plugin. This free plugin was recently purchased by Automatic (the people who make Wordpress). The idea is they are creating a giant database of attackers that it is blocking. It also will email you when your site is down (and when it comes back up). Over the last 19 hours it has blocked 20 attempts to login to my site. If your site is having an issues, this seems to be helping. You can learn more about it at https://bruteprotect.com/
My Podcast Reviews Now Includes Stitcher Reviews
I want to thank everyone who has written a review in iTunes or Stitcher. I've been using My Podcast Reviews to track these (and all the reviews I've had over the years). It's definitely worth the money as I don't have to go in and dig through all the international stores to see my reviews (i.e.e the ones from Australia, Canada, etc). It's a great way to keep up to date with what people are saying about you.
Appendipity Podcaster Pro Now Compatible with PowerPress
You can use this theme and leave Powerpress enabled, but turn of the ability for PowerPress to place a player in your post (or use both and have Appendipity at the top of the post and PowerPress on the bottom).
See www.weeklywebtools.com/269 for more for more information and links
YouTube Channel Graphics CREATOR
Last we talk about some premade graphics, this week we have a tool that makes it super easy to create your own graphics. Its from the people who make the logo creator software (which is pretty cool). They’ve just expaneded it to be YouTube and yet you can even unshackle it and it becomes a non-specific graphic creator (pretty cool). It’s $37. Here is a video:
For more information go to logocreator.com (aff link).
Brute Protect Free WordPress Theme
This is a great tool that will reduce the amount of brute force attacks on your website. It was recently acquired by Automatic the people who make WordPress. Its creating a database of people who are attacking other sites (and blocking). For more information go to www.bruteprotect.com
New Theme at Weekly Web Tools
I switched from Thesis to Podcast Pro Frrom Appendipity themes. Its a cool theme with lots of flexibility without having too many options. It’s $59 and it requires the Genesis Framework.
5:00 Stitcher Purchase
10:00 Subtle Voice Change - Kim from onthetablepodcasts.com
13:50 - Live Numbers May Be
18:00 - no Caller
19:22 CHeck your microphone
20:15 Libsyn files now will play on Facebook
21:39 Craig - Appendipity Pro Review Branding
30:00 Reverse Enginnering Your Podcast
33:45 Growing Your Audience
37:03 Podcast Directories
37:30 Making Money with Podcasting
42:30 No Caller 43:44
43:44 Cool Tools Web Up Time Robot
46:00 Podcast Release Sign Form
48:38 Doris question
53:20 Mixcloud Designed for DJs - Handle the music rights.
The step of every journey starts with a single step. You've gone to great lengths to make a good episode. Now you're ready to promote your show, and everyone says "find your audience," but how? Today I do a couple quick Google searches and show you what I came up with for a friend who has a podcast that is a book of fiction (super niche). We also talk about dealing with "trolls" who leave negative comments on your blog posts, etc.
If you are thinking about speaking at New Media Expo, you need to get your submission in BEFORE 10/24. I give some tips on what I'm looking for at my blog.
Interview With an Internet Troll [3:40]
Internet TrollThere will be people who hate everything you do. They have nothing nice to say, and in some cases will use very offensive words. But keep in mind:
-
They don't have the courage to do what you do (create content). They only tell you how bad your content is.
-
Many times they do it in an anonymous fashion (again, lack of courage).
-
They DID leave a comment. You MOVED someone to hate you. That's a plus. It doesn't seem like a plus, but it is.
Check out Daniel J Lewis's episode on handling complaints.
Check out Erik K. Johnson's Podast Talent Coach.
Ray Ortega's Podaster's Studio and Podcaster's Rountable (which often has myself and Daniel J Lewis)
Last 5 in 5 [10:50]
Todd from the conformity hazard podcast (recorded live at Podcast Movement) tells us the last 5 podcasts he listened to.
48 Days to the Work you love (Dan Miller)
School of Podcasting
Podcast Answer Man
Family From the Heart (audio journal of the host)
Smart Passive Income (Pat Flynn).
Podcast Rewind [12:38]
UK Podcasters are now New Media Europe. Thanks to Kevin Cox for the shout out.
I appeared on the Profitcast Podcast. This is a cool show that talks about growing your audience and monetizing your show. Brian is an awesome dude.
How Do I Grow My Audience When I'm Not Doing an Interview Show? [16:15]
I got an email from Caine Door who asked, "
"what kind of advice would you give to someone who's podcast was driven by fiction content (a bit like Scott Sigler but with no where near such an outgoing personality) and not interviews, or helping people, or a professional focus? It seems that a lot of advice about podcasting is more geared toward all of those things that I mentioned above that I don't really do. My latest episode has the most conversation I've done with the audience....ever and its only like seven minutes. "
My first bit of advice was to get his website address into his signature. Don't make it hard to find your show. I am the person who may not read all of your email, but I will click a link to help me determine if I should read all of your email. Then do the four steps of podcast promotion
- Figure out who the audience is
- Make content that will impact and move them.
- GO to where they are and make friends with them. Bring value with every conversation.
- Tell them about your podcast
So Caine's audience would be people looking for fiction. I typed in phrases like "Fiction Book Fans" and "Fiction Book Clubs" and I went to Google+ communities and Facebook Groups, and between a few(less than 5 searches) I had a list of places to investigate including.
http://themindofafictionbooklover.tumblr.com/me is in the top 5 of Google for this search. Go read his blog, and leave comments. When somethng strikes you send him an email and start a conversation. Later ask him if he'd like to listen to your book. Be sure to have your signature with a link to your website so when you send him an email he will see your website.
http://www.thrall.org/booklovers/ Has all sorts of things about book clubs
http://www.booktalk.org/online-reading-group.html This is a huge forum (be careful not to spam here and read the rules of posting)
Here is another search results for Google Groups https://plus.google.com/s/fiction%20books/communities
Be Careful in the Forums
The reason you have to do step three (make friends with your potential audience) is if you just show up and go "LISTEN TO MY PODCAST" people who ask, "Who is this person?' Then they will flag your for spam. I know because in 2006 this happened to me. It takes time. It's hard to do (because you know THIS is MY AUDIENCE) but be patient.
Kevin Costner is the Anti-Christ
In the movie Field of Dreams Kevin Costner says that "If you build it they will come." This is a GIANT LIE. You need to GO and find your audience. Will having a podcast being people to your site? Yes, but if you want to grow your audience faster you have to go find your audience and lead them to your show.
How Do You Define Your Success
In my book More Podcast Money, I talk about how Jeremy and Jason from Internet Business Mastery had more influence than people with email lists that were huge. Jason and Jeremy had more influence. Your success may not be measured in numbers.
Get Your Podcast Reviewed
If you have a podcast and want some unbiased feedback check out getting a podcast review. You can appear live on the show and ask questions as we go over your content and website. We also have an option to have us review your show without you being present. To have your show reviewed, go to www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme
Become a Member of the School of Podcasting
If you're looking to start a podcast, the School of Podcasting has everything you need. I have tutorials that will walk you through every step of the process. I can help shape your content during the planning process. We can make sure you don't spend too much money on equipment you don't need. I can help you build your website with free tools, and get your show listed in iTunes (and all the other popular directories). Best of all, I offer a 30 day guarantee. If you're not happy with the School of Podasting I will refund your payment with no questions asked. You can join Risk Free.
Today we talk about what makes a good presentation as Dave prepares for selecting speakers for the New Media Expo.
What Was One of the Best Presentations You've Ever Seen [4:00]
Dave wants to know what presentations stick out in your head that you've seen?
Style can play alot into what makes a good presentation.
We need people to get to the point
You need to know your audience
What are your thoughts on Panels at Conventions [10:45]
Panels enable you to find out more from different point of views.
How Do I Build My Audience When I'm not a Business? [12:45]
Google to find out where your audience is, and go there.
Make connections in the community FIRST.
Then introduce them to your podcast.
Make the best content you can so that when you do direct people to your website.
Look at facebook groups, google+ communities, linkedin groups
Check out meetup.com to build a local group.
When Do You Need a Mixer [19:10]
When you need to mix in live sounds
When you have more than one person in the same room
You don't NEED a mixer for skype
You can add bass and treble in the software
They are not NEEDED in some cases, but they are very handy.
A mixer give you more options.
Check out podcastersstudio.com for conversation on Auphonic
Put Your Website In Your Signature [27:03]
Don't make people hunt for your website.
So many people don't have your website in the signature.
Soundcloud Is Having Issues [32:41]
Financial times says Soundcloud might be having issues.
Full article
Jim is a fan of self hosting (Dave prefers Libsyn). He chews up 600 Gig of bandwidth
Jim is Moving His Live Stuff to Mixlr [41:05]
Jim needs internal RSS feed. He wants to use MIxlr for the live stuff, and spreaker for the ability to upload over.
Is it Worth Archiving Your Show [44:00]
If its evergreen, it might be worth it. Some shows that I did a few years ago still get downloads. You can check out sites like
Media Fire might be a solution
Audiometir.io
Today I talk about why I'm staying with nimble.com (a great tool for keeping up on all things social media).
I also found out that the Total Wordpress theme is kind of a consolidated package of a number of plugins packaged as a theme. Yes, alone it is a good value of $58, but you can get some of these items such as the Visual Composer for Wordpress for $28. The other thing that I find annoying is everyone is offering multiple sliders. How about picking the best one and providing it for us instead of us having to dig through three different sliders to figure out which one is the best.
Podcasters Are Taking Home Award - Because of my Podcast
Amateur Traveler Podcast wins Lowell Thomas Travel Journalism Award
Chris Christensen is a winner in the 2014 Lowell Thomas Travel Journalism Competition, taking an Honorable Mention in the Travel Broadcast — Audio category for “Amateur Traveler: Travel to Flanders in Belgium” (http://europe.amateurtraveler.com/travel-flanders-belgium-travel- podcast/) on AmateurTraveler.com. The awards are named for Lowell Thomas, acclaimed broadcast journalist, prolific author and world explorer during five decades in journalism.
This is the 30th annual competition sponsored by the Society of American Travel Writers Foundation. Winners of the awards, the most prestigious in the field of travel journalism, were announced Sept. 16 at the SATW convention, held in Iceland. The competition drew 1,177 entries and was judged by members of the faculty at the University of North Carolina-Chapel Hill School of Journalism and Mass Communication. This year, the SATW Foundation presented 90 awards in 25 categories and nearly $20,000 in prize money to journalists. Since the first competition for work in 1984, the SATW Foundation has presented more than 2,100 awards and $420,000-plus in recognition of outstanding travel journalism.
In honoring work, the judges said:
"The Amateur Traveler podcast by Chris Christensen was well done. The first episode only featured narration by Christensen, which is challenging to produce. His incorporation of natural sound was a great addition to keep the show interesting and engaging. It offered both great historical context as well as important tips for travel to Flanders. The show was well produced and interesting".
Among other winners, Jill Schensul, senior writer for The Record of northern New Jersey, earned the title of Lowell Thomas Travel Journalist of the Year for a portfolio of her work in the past year. It is the third top title for Schensul, who over the years has won 29 Lowell Thomas awards for herself, and The Record travel section has taken 39 in total. National Geographic Traveler, Islands, Travel + Leisure and AFAR magazines are top media winners in 2014.
The Foundation distributes nearly $20,000 annually in prize money to individual winners. Donations by this year’s Underwriter, the Tourist Office for Flanders-Brussels, and many other supporters helped make the prizes possible. For more information about the awards, including a full list of winners and judges’ comments, and SATW, visit www.satwf.com andwww.satw.org.
Money Plan SOS Wins Plutus Award
Steve Stewart was nominated in the Best personal finance blog, and best debt reduction blog categories. Joe Saul-Sehy won for best financial blog (Joe was on the show this year talking co-hosts), and Steve won for the best debt reduction blog. The interesting thing is Steve's blog is just his "show notes" for his podcast. Congrats to both!
Portable Recording With Zoom iQ5B
I was Podcast Movement when I met Shawn Smith who had a bunch of microphones set up and was interviewing him. I went over and introduced myself. Shawn has gone out to help people answer the question, "What is the best way to record on the road." His is actively positioning himself as THE mobile recording person at http://www.themobilepro.net/
This was recorded on my iPhone using Boss Jock Studio and using Shawn's Zoom iQ5B microphone. It is a condenser microphone so it does pick up background noise. It has adjustable settings so you can pick how wide the stereo separation is. You will here Shawn and I go through some of the settings on the microphone. It sounds good (and would work in a quiet place like any quiet place).
The FREE Ebook From Shwn:
28 pages of high-rez photos and links to all the road-tested apps and gear in each of the 5 Mobile Pro Podcast Set-Ups, pros & cons of each, best-use guide, and Mobile Pro tips plus 3 bonus set-ups. TheMobilePro.net
Question from Listeners
In a previous episode we spoke about Dragon Naturally Speaking and Ryan Parker
I just wanted to let you know that the Mac does have a dictation function and you can find that function in the system preferences file. It works pretty much just like Siri does. And yes you have to enunciate your punctuation.(It works really great!)
In fact I am voice typing this comment to you directly with no corrections. It actually works really fast. The only thing is you have to get used to using the program just like anything else. Okay I lied I did correct a few things. And you have to correct manually if you speak an incorrect word or it picks up punctuation incorrectly.
Here’s a great tutorial from YouTube for you and your audience: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lU7oiTTAxNk It does not allow you to correct by voice which is one of the advantages of dragon speaking naturally. They have a Mac version called Dragon dictate that seems to work pretty well I have use that in the past.
Have a great day keep podcasting because we I’ll love you so much ha ha!
- -
Q: What kind of advice would you give to someone who's podcast was driven by fiction content (a bit like Scott Sigler but with no where near such an outgoing personality) and not interviews, or helping people, or a professional focus? It seems that a lot of advice about podcasting is more geared toward all of those things that I mentioned above that I don't really do. My latest episode has the most conversation I've done with the audience....ever and its only like seven minutes.
Thank you for your time I love your show. Caine Dorr
A: Caine Who likes Fiction books?. I did a quick search for "fiction book lovers" and came up with a few sites.
http://themindofafictionbooklover.tumblr.com/me is in the top 5 of Google for this search. Go read his blog, and leave comments. When somethng strikes you send him an email and start a conversation. Later ask him if he'd like to listen to your book. Be sure to have your signature with a link to your website so when you send him an email he will see your website.
http://www.thrall.org/booklovers/ Has all sorts of things about book clubs
http://www.booktalk.org/online-reading-group.html This is a huge forum (be careful not to spam here and read the rules of posting)
Figure out who your audience is, go there and make friends. then tell them about or mention your book. Podcast Reviews
by Filopastry88 from Australia on October 8, 2014
Dave gives amazing value every episode . so many great action things to do. Last 5 of 5 is top idea
Thanks so much for the reivews! You can add your review at www.schoolofpodcasting.com
SodasToday I share some insights into the movie Fed Up from the people of an unconventional truth and has Katie Couric. It is a straight shooting video that points out that we are just being lied to through the media as the food industries continues to feed us information through the media that is just a bunch of lies. You find out that a calorie is not a calorie. There is a great example of 160 calories almonds and 160 calories from a soft drink. You see where the drink just gets burned through the liver and turned into fat.
Where is The Sugar Information?
When I look at a box of Raisin bran, I see the daily percentages for fiber, salt, etc, but not for sugar. That's weird. When I look at a 12 ounce can of Mountain Dew there are 46 grams of sugar. There is no clue what percentage of my daily intake it is. Well according to the World Health Organization, that's because that one can of Mountain Dew (or insert your own sot drink of choice) may have close to DOUBLE the amount of sugar you need PER DAY. That ONE CAN is DOUBLE. They recommend 25 grams (ok, so almost double).
The movie explains that sugar in these MAMMOTH amounts is toxic. Our liver can't handle it and we end up turning it into fat.
Another cool part of the movie is where they show the tobacco heads telling congress that there is no link to cigarettes and lung cancer. Then the next clip is someone from the soft drink world telling congress that (according to a study that THEY PAID FOR) there is no link to soft drinks and diabetes. Really?
Why Isn't This More Well Known?
Because industry doesn't want it known. We ran tobacco right out of the country (almost), and they don't want to be next. When the mayor of new york tried to ban 64 ounce drinks everyone said he was trying to put in a police state. They get lots of publicity about how the government is trying to put in place a "Nanny state". They don't want it know that 80% of schools take money from Coke & Pepsi. They don't want it know than Pizza is now considered a vegetable (seriously?). How does this happen? Because the company that owns 80% of the pizza marketing in schools makes billions of dollars every year.
You Can Rent The Video at Amazon
You have to see this for yourself. It's a riveting 90 minutes that shows you just how bad we have become.
See www.logicalloss.com/244 for details on books and videos.
Detailed Book About it http://www.amazon.com/gp/product/0142180432/ref=as_li_tl?ie=UTF8&camp=1789&creative=390957&creativeASIN=0142180432&linkCode=as2&tag=logweilos-20&linkId=5PKH6EWZJCVEJ2Q7
One of the doctors featured in the movie has now come out with a book called Fat Chance
You can get the fat chance book as an audio book for free http://www.audibletrack.com/click.track?CID=102175&AFID=173139&ADID=454213&SID=
I went to a band showcase this weekend. It was a marching band showcase and yet there was a lot we could learn to use in our bands to connect with our audience.
How do you take the stage?
How do yo leave the stage?
What are you do that other bands are not?
What could you do to add a little icing to your cake?
Does your music inspire you to play with passion?
Video your next gig and watch it with the sound off. Does it look like you're having fun?
I have people who want to start podcasting and they have an idea of what to talk about, they have the money to buy equipment, but still they won't start podcasting. Today we talk about why, and what you can do to get over it.
Because of My Podcast I Spoke in Front of 20,000 People [2:30]
Kenn Blanchard of the Black Man with a Gun podcast and the Motor Cycle Radio got to speak at an event in New York and got to share the stage with non other than DonaldKenn Blanchard and Donald Trumpt Trump. How cool is that? Check out Kenn's book, "Black Man with a Gun." We have spoken with Kenn before. He once helped a listener who was thinking of committing suicide.
He got to speak about the rights of people and have dinner with some millionaires. Shalom Baby!
You can find all of Kenn's podcasts at www.blanchardmediagroup.com
Last 5 in 5 [4:50]
This was recorded on the floor of Podcast Movement with Jeremy and Taylor from Final Clock Out podcast. They show that there are more ways to make money besides the 9-5.
Taylor's
Chae Jarvis Audio Podcast
Bullet Proof Radio
Smart Passive Income
London Real
Super Fast Business
Jeremy's
Ask Pat
Kick Ass Life
Achieve Your Goals
Podcast Answer Man
Marketing Lifestyle
Tim Perris
Podcast Rewind [11:45]
I appeared on The Podcast Report Talking Podcasting stats with Paul Colligan
Personal Branding show with Bernard Kelvin Clive (from Ghana )
Thanks to :
by Garrettent44614 from USA on August 28, 2014
So far I've listened to every episode in the last 4 weeks and I have to say that this podcast has it all, Audio Quality, Content Quality, and Dave Jackson definitely brings the perfect personality to the table when it comes to how the podcast is produced. Thanks a ton Dave, Keep up the good work!!! Learn podcasting and have fun doing so!
by SteveW928 from Canada on August 23, 2014
Dave not only has the heart of a teacher, but he brings his great sense of humor in to keep it fun as well. School of Podcasting is a one-of-a-kind educational experience where you'll not only learn great details about podcasting and the industry, but you'll also learn about hosting, equipment, software, hardware gadgets, etc. as Dave loves to try a bit of everything and give you his opinion on how well it really works. And, as mentioned above, he's a hoot to listen to.
For the latest iTunes Reviews. By reviewing the show and rating it, you help us get more exposure.
WRITE A REVIEW
I learned of these reviews by using My Podcast reviews
The School of Podcasting Went over 1,000,000 Downloads This Month! [18:50]
Thanks to everyone who has listened over the year. I am humbled by this number.
http://youtu.be/4BUXd2y1wEc
You can still here my first episode.
Is Fear Stopping You From Starting Your Podcast?
The answer I'm hearing more and more is how people are trying to get over their "jitters" to start recording your podcast. When we launch a podcast we go into areas that we have never gone before, and that will make us nervous. It's normal. You're going to hate your voice. That's normal. I know that fear can really become a factor so here are some thought to help you face the fears of starting a podcast.
- Its not live.
You can record it once, twice, three times before releasing it. Just because you record it doesn't mean you have to release it to the public.
- Editing is your friend
If it's not perfect, you can edit out the part that need help. And you can always record it again.
- Why Would people listen to me?
Remember you don't have to know everything, you just have to know more than your listener. Or if you don't know anything make it a journey podcast. I'm sure President Obama feels this way when he puts on his tie.
I have never felt I could sing. Mainly because my brother told me at an early age. It stung. I sing in most of the bands I play in, but its usually the really high stuff and I have to wear a size smaller underwear to hit the high notes. But I was shocked when my friend asked me to play and sing at his wedding. I did, and I got huge compliments. Everyone had heard me scream on stage, but they had never heard me sing. It turns out I'm not half bad.
- What's the worst that could happen?
If it's really bad, you can always pull it off the Internet. Remember, when you first start there won't be much of an audience (so there isn't much to be embarrassed about ).
Try this: instead of convincing yourself to believe the worst about something you fear, try imagining the best. You might make someone's day. You might inspire to change their life for the better. You might inspire a future customer .
When a podcast show fails, there are always lessons to be learned. Many very successful podcasters are on their second (third) show because the first one tanked.
Mentioned in this Show
Joe Hicks and the Above Average Show
The Creative Penn Podcast
Canva Image Editor
Nimble Organizes Your Social Stream and Allows You To Make Better Connections
I've heard about Nimble from a few folks and its pretty cool. For it to get really powerful you need to give it permission to access things like twitter, facebook, Gmail, and Google+, and your calendar (and others if you want). Then it imports all of your contact. You can then go into your contacts and have it remind you and setup tasks to stay in touch with these folks. You can go into their profiles and easily see their social media stream. You can turn an email, tweet, post, etc into a task. This will all be tied into that profile of that person. You can also send out message and delay them as well.
Nimble comes with a 14 day trial and its worth signing up just to see the view. It's hard to describe. Its like no view you've ever seen, and its uber convenient to have everything in one space.
Their mobile apps is limited compared to the web version of their program (basically an advanced contact manager). If you are a small business person, its only $15 per user. Check it out at Nimble.com
http://youtu.be/n04Qvs0OVZg
Panda Doc and Easy Way to Sign Things Digitally
Panda Doc allows you to upload your document, choose what fields need signed, and then send it to your contact. You get insights into when they open it, how long they look at each section and more. The best part is you ca try it free (you get three documents). If you refer someone, you get more free documents. If you want to pay for them, they start at free. The one thing that makes this different is it appears to tie into every imaginable system on the planet. I don't have a use for this tool (I found out about it from Nimble) but I can see where this could useful - especially the paralytics. Check it out at pandadoc.com
http://youtu.be/2C-YEXFwT4I
3:00 Audio Boom 6:00 Podcast Players. I love the Blubrry player 8:10 Podcast Stats 69% mobile 172 median 1823 average per episode
10:15 New and NOteworthy Jim gets a lift from N&N
Podcasters Roundtable iTunes Strengths Finder 20:15 24:50 13 million people a day
Question: 26:52 Music in Podcasting
People will visit yoru website before they visit your church or business
35:38 Doing things Live
36:50 Networking with other like Podcasters
42:05 Listening Live on your phone spreaker
45:13 Meetups
53: Who cares what we call ourselves
55:30 Question: Taking Live Calls
Today we are joined by Charles McFall of Successreaks.com and House of the Bear. Charles was a guy who was doing live, and talked me into trying it. Its been a fun experiment and I love Saturday mornings.
Today we talk about the following:
Bad Names for Podcasting [4:30]
The Magic of 3% [8:10] (based on a chapter from the book Podcasting Good to Great: How to Grow Your Audience Through Collaboration )
New Media Expo Buys the Podcast Awards [14:35]
Avoiding Podcast Burn Out – Keeping Your Schedule [17:35]
Wunderlist Review 22:30
Podcasting Platforms [26:56]
Podbean is False Advertising [29:00]
Podcast Releases [34:28]
Question: Who owns the content? From Rich Grimshaw [40:00]
Are You In Line with Your Goals? [51:51]
Have you hear about the rule of 3%
Mentioned on This Show:
Sellfy.com
Checklist Manifesto
Podcasting Good to Great: How to Grow Your Audience Through Collaboration
Excuses Be Gone
We've heard it over and over that the money is in the list. Today we have a tool that enables people to get on your list by texting a word to a number. Another tool allows you to do full on SMS marketing.
Join By Text - Well Named
This product does one thing, and it does it well. You can provide a keyword and a number and when people text to it, they are instantly sent a message asking for their email address. When they send it, they are subscribed to your email list. It works with all the typical players (Aweber, Mail Chimp). the cost is $19 a month. For more information go to www.weeklywebtools.com/joinbytext
Call Loop
SMS MarketingCall Loop is more of a marketing tool that uses SMS. You can have auto responders when people text your keyword to a number . The packages start at free with each text cost .05. The keyword is $10 a month. I've used it for two days and have already had someone sign up and use a coupon that I had automatically delivered. If you wanted to you could also do a voicemail blast where you record a message and everyone gets a call (I hate these myself, we all get a ton of these around election time). You can also integrate this tool into your current email sign up form. By adding a phone field, when someone signs up for your email list they are on both your email and SMS list. Plans go from free all the way up to 99 a month with three keywords. For more information go to www.weeklywebtools.com/callloop
Today we look at some tools to help you grow your audience, grow your list, and make it easy to promote your podcast. We also talk about a podcast promotion strategy that may - in the long run - hurt podcasting. What do you think? I'd love to hear your comments. Call them in at 888-563-3228, or use any of the other contact methods. Podcast Album Art is Now The Size of Your Head [2:00]
Apple has released a new spec for album artwork is now can be a minimum of 1400X1400 the recommended size is now 2048X2048 jpg
Apple is “not” recommending you save your image art in .png (portable network graphics) format, but if you can’t resist .png needs to be RGB (red, green and blue color model) only.
There are sties like pixlr.com that you can use to try and resize your current album artwork.
Podcast Rewind [4:05]
I appeared on the Internet Marketing show (By Site Visibility) one of the longest running and top rated Internet Marketing Podcasts. Check it out here
I also appeared on the Gary Leland Show where we talk about using Podcasting with your business. Check it out here
Simple Podcast Press - Grow Your List and Subscriptions [7:25]
Today we interview Hani Mourra the man behind the Simple Podcast Press plugin for Wordpress. We all want podcasting to be easy, we want to grow our audience, we want subscribers, we want promotion, and this tool does all of that with a 2 minute install.Hani Mourra
You can add links to itunes, stitcher, soundcloud, as well as a download button. You can also have button for people to subscribe to your email list (so if you're using someone like Aweber or Mail Chimp). With these tools you can boost your subscribers and your email list.
Another great feature is the ability to make clickable tweets with a few mouse clicks. This can make it super easy for your audience to share your show.
The plugin will also help create easy to remember links like www.schoolofpodcasting.com/427 that link to the episode (again making it simple to share)
Lastly if provides the latest reviews from iTunes right in your dashboard.
I was worried as I am already using PowerPress (for my player) and Pretty link (for my easy to remember links). The plugin does not have any conflicts with these plugins and in the case of PowerPress can easily switch the player on your website and all the back catalog. This means by installing this plugin you can an email sign up on every episode. That's pretty cool when you are someone like me who has over 400 episodes.
The best part is if you're not happy with it, you can get a refund as there is a 30 day money back guarantee
Want a Coupon For the School of Podcasting? [16:24]
Call Loop SMS MarketingI am testing a new system called Callloop.com which is a tool to build a list of people you can text (or you can deliver automated marketing information - like a coupon over their phone). All you have to do is text the word podcast to 38470 and you will receive a coupon for the School of Podcasting.
You can start with a free program and only pay .05 for the messages you send. If you want a keyword (podcast in my case) it's $10 a month. There are other plans available at callloop.com
If you'd rather have people sign up for your email list check out joinbytext.com which is $19 a month but people can send a keyword (in my case podcast ) to 66866 and they will be asked to subscribe to my email list.
If you like these kind of tools and fun way to grow your audience, check out my Weekly Web Tools Podcast
Last 5 in 5 [20:05]
Today we have a last 5 in 5 from a regular person in the chat room of the Ask the Podcast Show Tommy G Kendrick who runs the Actors Talk Podcast
The Unmistakable Creative
Podcast411
School of Podcasting
Podcaster's Roundtable
This is Your Life
Podcast Review Swapping [ 22:05]
I published an article on Podcaster News
I made a couple of points:
You only have one change to make a first impression When you start, your publish may need some polishing Sometimes getting to the front of the line before your ready is a bad thing in the long run - see American Idol Good marketing only allows people to find out you have a poor product faster Remember word of mouth works both ways When you do things SOLEY in the name of profit< it"s typically not good for the consumer. Review Swapping Damages the reputation of New and Noteworthy
To see the video go to www.weeklywebtools.com/260 or for more information go to www.weeklywebtools.com/optinmonster
Today I look at the Logical Weight Loss Podcast. You can check it out http://logicalloss.com/241
Today I issue the challenge that if you are watching TV you are moving.
Many times when we are sitting watching TV we are also eating not so healthy food.
For me I’m going to watch football on a treadmill, and that goes for the Biggest Loser which starts this Thursday.
Many athletes have lives that are out of control because they are not use to handling consequences. They do whatever they want. We might feel that way too and eat whatever we want, but we need to realize WE are the people who are putting that food in our mouths. We need to own our choices, and accept our consequences.
See if there is a way you can stack a good habit with a bad habit.
Udemy You keep 100% of the revenue (minus payment fees) when you bring new students to Udemy. For every student Udemy brings to your course through our marketing efforts, you keep 50% of the sale. Udemy handles all customer service, payment processing and hosting fees, and gives you access to the complete feature set of Udemy including the mobile version of your courses all for no additional cost. You can see more information on our revenue share here. How should I price my course? Some instructors use a metric of around $10 - $30 per hour of course content. Most courses on Udemy are priced between $29 - $99.
Skillfeed Each month, 30% of Skillfeed's revenue is allocated to instructor earnings. The remaining 70% is used to invest in Skillfeed's mission to help instructors reach the broadest possible audience, with the primary focus being on marketing instructors' courses and building and maintaining a platform that makes it easy to discover and enjoy helpful instructional videos
Udemy and Skillfeed are two sites where you can create courses to sell. It doesn't cost you anything to list your course and there are people making a fair amount of money with these sites. Like anything else, you get out of it what you put into it. In my case I don't promote my courses (so any money made came from being found on the site). Here is how the money is broken down.
Udemy.com
You keep 100% of the revenue (minus payment fees) when you bring new students to Udemy. For every student Udemy brings to your course through our marketing efforts, you keep 50% of the sale. Udemy handles all customer service, payment processing and hosting fees, and gives you access to the complete feature set of Udemy including the mobile version of your courses all for no additional cost. You can see more information on our revenue share here.
How should I price my course? Some instructors use a metric of around $10 - $30 per hour of course content. Most courses on Udemy are priced between $29 - $99.
Skillfeed.com
Each month, 30% of Skillfeed's revenue is allocated to instructor earnings. The remaining 70% is used to invest in Skillfeed's mission to help instructors reach the broadest possible audience, with the primary focus being on marketing instructors' courses and building and maintaining a platform that makes it easy to discover and enjoy helpful instructional videos
When I first launched my Planning Your Podcast Course I did some promotion at Udemy and made almost $80 (4 sales). That was a while ago. I make one or two sales a month ($5 - $15 take home). I've just started using Skillfeed and in the two months I've used it I've made around $35.
Udemy has a cool app for ipads and phones.
If you're not looking to get your teach on, there are TONS of courses on all sorts of topics.
National Podcast Day September 30th September 30th 2104 is National Podcast Day where we all put the spotlight on Podcast Movement and help turn more people on to listening to podcast, creating new podcasts, and general helping podcast awareness raise up a few notches. Using the Roland R-05 John from http://www.letstalkmetaldetectingandtreasurehunting.com/ wants to know how I use this device? When I recorded at Podcast Movement. When I use the built in microphone I try to use my guests as sound shields (putting them between the mic and the sounds). I kept the microphone about chest level. I always listen so I can hear what is being recorded. Promo For Podcast Review Show Dave Jackson and Erik K Johnson will go over your show from top to bottom and use their 30 cobined years of creating content to help you spotlight what you are doing right, and help you tweak those things that need help. You can get reviewed by going to www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme Podcasting Good To Great How to Grow your Audience through Collaboration [7:55] To we focus on one thing: growing your audience. We have Jared Easley author of the book Podcasting Good To Great How to Grow your Audience through Collaboration. You might also recognize that name as we was one of the organizers of the HIGHLY SUCCESSFUL Podcast movement and also has a really good podcast called Starve the Doubts. Today we hear how Jared stared out by noticing others and seeing how they could help them (looking for nothing in return). He didn’t know what he was doing all the time, but that didn’t stop him. When he doubt, he could always find someone and ask some questions.
I first started listening to his podcast before Podcast Movement. I liked this show. I met Matt Lovell at the event, and he mentioned how he was going to be in Cleveland soon. I toll him to look me up. He did. We did and he sat in on a recording o the Ask the Podcast Coach show that I do live on Saturday Mornings. On the way to breakfast he told me a story of how he had reached out to a podcast host, and the host had called him on the phone. The podcaster? Jared Easley. Does this mean that you have to call all of your listeners to grow your audience? No. If you have the time, you could. We talk about using teleconferencing to connect live with your audience (especially helpful if they are not up to speed on webinars). Jared mentioned FreeConferencing.com and Dave like uberconference.com. Its not doing LARGE things that will grow your audience. In many cases its the little things you do that have the most impact. What if you impacted 5 people a week. What would that do over the span of a year? You could have 60 people who have true connection with you and enjoy telling people about your show. As the old commercial goes, “And they told two friends, and they told two friends..” Matt’s Story – Permission To Chat? [31:00] Matt Lovel had just found Jared’s podcast, he tweeted about it to his friends. He asked what their favorite episode of Starve the Doubts was. People came out of the woodwork with suggestions and one person was the host Jared Easley. Jared asked (via twitter) if they would like to move to the phone, and 2.5 hours later their phone call ended. One of the cool things about podcasting is people who like your show are more than likely LIKE YOU. This means you will probably connect with people who listen to your show. In this instance Matt and Jared talked about life goals, etc and Matt explained how he was moving between jobs. Jared new someone who was looking for Matt’s skills. When I say you can have an impact on your listener’s lives, I don’t mean that you will find them work that pays them more and changes your quality of living, but we ca now say, “It could happen.” Find Matt’s Podcast at www.mindingthegap.com Start Your Podcast Today – Join the School of Podcasting Join Now - Start a Podcast Mentioned on this Episode www.starvethedoubts.com http://www.letstalkmetaldetectingandtreasurehunting.com/blog/ www.podcastmovement.com www.schoolofpodcasting.com
Today Dave talks about his insight from Podcast Movement and we are joined by Matt from www.mindingthegap.net who just published his first podcast (CONGRATS!). Dave met Matt at podcast movement and Matt said he was going to be in Cleveland and Dave said to look him up - and he did.
[powerpress]
Insights from Advertising Session[2:00]
It doesn't matter what you are talking about as long as you have 10,000 downloads (they may think about you if you have 5,000 per episode).
10 to $15 per one thousand downloads (better known as CPM)
They are looking for female related podcasts to run advertisements
Make sure you are checking the email that you have setup to receive email inquiries. Todd Cochran from Blubrry.com is saying "We have potential sponsors" and Todd is not getting any response. Meanwhile people are always asking about how to get a sponsor (Hello????).
Dave have a CPM of over $50 when he was promoting his Fitbit on his Logical Weight Loss Podcast
More Reflections [10:00 ish].
You don't run a race looking sideways. - Chris Brogan
Quit copying each other
What didn't work in some sessions.
Matt reflects on the conference (20:00)
Garbled Skype Sounds[24:50]
Try to get a good solid recording level. Also turn off all things that use bandwidth so you computer can focus on skype and only skype. The calls us using the Zoom H5.
Troubleshooting your podcast begins with separating the different items involved in creating your sound and see if you can isolate them.
Thanks to barb from www.Sageclinician.com
Control Your Mental State [35:00]
When Dave first started his session he knew everyone in the room. At first this bummed him out. He explains how there were two ways to think about your presentation when the room was not completely full.
Being positive is a choice. It takes effort, and it may not be easy. Always deliver your best as you never know who is listening or watching
Dave may be more accessible than other podcasters
Dave talks about jumping up and down on the stage during his presentation.
Dave Starts ClevelandPodcasters.com [42:00]
Dave is using meetup.com to try to get together a group of Cleveland Podcasters if you are in the Northeast Ohio Podcaster come over and sign up.
During the show an Atlanta group decided to create a group.
Minding The Gap Podcast [45:30]
Matt's show will be a podcast documenting going from where you are to where you want to be. You can find him at www.mindingthegap.net
Matt talks about how he is traveling for his job now and its throwing a wrench into his production.
Now that Jim has a personal connection, Jim is more likely to listen to Matt's podcast.
Focus on CONTENT first. Then worry about the graphics, etc.
Dave went over 1 million downloads this week.
[powerpress]
Mentioned in this Episode
Avada Wordpress theme
Dave is at www.schoolofpodcasting.com
Jim is at www.theaverageguy.tv
Today I explain how important it is to have your own domain name (and even better to have your own website).
To see the full notes go to www.podcastreviewshow.com/43 to get reviewed go to www.podastreviewshow.com/reviewme
Pat Flynn made 89,903.53 last month. This is down from the 89,000 he made in April. This doesn't happen by chance. Pat has always been a hard worker. If you haven't check out his book Let Go, then you should. You read how he did all the things you were supposed to do (go to college, work insane hours to get up the corporate ladder) only to be let go. Pat had been studying for a certification and was using the web to store his notes. Later when he passed the exam he uncovered that his notes were very, VERY popular. So he took the notes and repackaged them as an ebook, and put it up for sale. He never considered himself an author, but why not. It made (and continues to make ) a LOT of cash. Along the way Pat shares the good the bad and the ugly of his journey. Today he shares some insights into what it takes to create content that truly resonates with your audience, and how he is taking podcast players to a new level with his Smart Podcast Player.
[powerpress]
Here are some key points from the interview
Pat spends HOURS writing a single blog post. When you read his posts at smartpassiveincome.com you will see the insane amounts of detail that he puts into his posts. The goal is always to inform his audience in an unbiased way. The goal is to help his audience make an informed decision. By not selling out to the top bidder, and only talking about products he has first hand knowledge of, Pat is not only a resource, but a trusted resource.
Pat knows when he is most productive (he's a night owl) and that's when he does his work. He has a dedicated office. He admits that its hard to separate work and family, but in the same way that a employee clocks out to go home Pat knows that when he leaves his office he has "clocked out" and it's time for his family. When I read the book Let Go you get to see bonus videos of Pat with his family. It's very cool, and his passion and love for his kids is beyond evident.
Pat learned that you need to let others who can do things better take over. He tried to turn his book into an audio book, but later hired someone to read it for him. It was a lot of money ($1400) but that money came back to him. Many people are envious of Pat's bank account. I envy the time and influence Pat has with his children.
Pat took his successful blog and grew his audience using a podcast. When Pat meets people at conferences, they all mention the podcast.
It took Pat a year and a half to build his audience
Smart Podcast Player
When Pat launched the Ask the Pat podcast ( a quick daily show where he answers one listener question) . He had a custom player created. You can find it at www.smartpodcastplayer.com or at www.askpat.com it has built in share buttons and if you have a large catalog (like a daily show will produce) it makes it easy to browse through the episodes and listen to the one you want.Smart Podcast Player
How Does it Work?
It doesn't matter what media host you use. You input the location of your RSS feed and it pulls the information from that and creates the payer. This way when you release a new episode it automatically is added to the player. If you use soundcoud as your media host (for the record I would only use soundcloud as a secondary host - see my thought on this) you can add additional tags which may help you be found, and help people discover your content.
When In Doubt Ask Your Audience
Pat rolled it out to a limited beta group knowing there would be growing pains. Pat knew there were features he would want to add, and by rolling it out to a select few, he had a built in focus group to help him identify and prioritize new features that will be added to the player. When it first rolled out there were limited choices to the colors you could use. Now you can use any color for your player.
Great Support
As expected there were a few bugs when it rolled out. I worked with his group and they were very responsive and a great group of guys. With my recent moving of my website to a new host, I have had other priorities and have not activated the player on the new host (not that it takes a lot to put it into place - you know podcast movement, etc, first things first).
Flexible
The Smart Podcast Player allows you to put a full page of your podcasts in one spot ( see screenshot) or you can put a single episode on your site. It will be exciting to see what features are added in the future. Pat talked about wanting the player to prompt you to join a mailing list (or other call to action). He realizes that while you could throw in a bunch of features, its best to roll them out slowly and make sure you are adding features that are wanted.
Protecting Your Brand
Pat talks about he is asked on a daily basis to promote products. Many of these have huge payouts, but Pat knows that if he were to endorse a product that turned out to be awful, his trust would be ruined. He has the intelligence to know that the most valuable thing you have is the trust of your audience. He could have a list of hundreds of thousands of subscribers, but if they don't trust your content - it's worthless. If you're in it for the long haul, guard your audience and protect from the people who are looking to make a quick buck.
Find all things Pat at
www.smartpassiveincome.com
www.smartpodcastplayer.com
www.askpat.com
www.nichesiteduel.com
The people who made the Google hangout plugin have come out with a new version with tons more features. You can capture leads, export your attendee list, schedule webinars to run at any time. It really does everything all those big name webinar systems do, except there is not monthly fee. It’s amazing. This video has a brief introduction and then goes into a demonstration. It looks very cool. runclick.com
Jillian has released a new DVD that is also available as a streaming video from Amazon. It's called 7 day shred. This is a workout that is going to take you to the next level. Next month she releases the beginner shred, and that will help people on the other end of the spectrum. Jillian looks great in the video, and the reviews are good (with 111 reviews already).
If you haven't heard, Jillian is NOT coming back to the Biggest Loser (not a surprise after how she was treated last season). Bob will still be there (also not a big surprise). The question will be are you going to continue to watch (leave a comment below), and where do you think she should go?
Today we talk about identifying your perfect customer and then making a podcast for them . We also hear a story of courage from a young 14 year old boy. We get an update on the patent troll case, and a book review
Because of His Attitude [5:00]
Today I get feedback from a 14 year old Australian boy who had the courage to ask to speak at a Wordcamp. Sure enough he passed, and was able to speak in front of 500 people. His attitude, "What the heck, let's try and see." I think we all can learn from William and see that while we may not think we have the credentials, WE DO. For those above the age of 14, you have a bit more history under our belt.
Get Reviewed on the Podcast Review Show [9:43]
Recently we reviewed Dan Hansen's Coffee Couch (hear the review). Dan shares his thoughts on the experience. You can get the most affordable private coaching with two coaches for $99
Marketing Your Business With Your Podcast - Ben Kruger Interview [11:20]
Ben Kruger produces the Authority Engine podcast and is known as the "Podcast Marketing Guy" who took his passion for marketing and incorporated it into a podcast that helps people use podcasting to bring in new clients. He offers services for small business who just want to create content (and let Ben and his team do the rest)
Some topics we talk about are:
Does your show need to be daily?
How many downloads do you need to be successful?
The key is targeting your audience.
Find the top leaders in your niche and help them deliver the best content to their audience.
Don't do a giant commercial.
Start building your email list with tools like Aweber and Mailchimp
Book Recommendation :
Ray Edwards recommend a bunch of books on his last episode. I've heard about the Scorre conference and it turns out the man behind it has written a book about it (for those who can't afford the $1300 for the conference). I've only read the book's first two chapters and it's been highlighted so much it looks like a pee'd on the book. I'm using it to shape my presentation at Podcast Movement. I can see this being useful for people:
Doing presentations
Pastors
Podcasters
It really talks about how you should THINK before pressing record.
Patent Troll Tries to back Off - Adan Carolla is Going in the for the Kill Adam Carolla was being sued by a company who claims to own a patent on podcasting (they are trolls, they blackmail people for money). They picked on the wrong dog, and this dog has a microphone and bit back. Well the troll is now saying "never mind" and has decided to drop the case and go after TV networks (more money). Adam is NOT dropping the case as most of us feel we can prove their patent is invalid and then they won't be able to sue ANYONE in the future. YOU GO ADAM! Full story
Mentioned in this Show Foodcraftsmen.com
Podcast Movement.
UK Podcasters
Smart Podcast Player
Some Podcasting Basics Are Worth Repeating
In today's episode we talk about how I often revisit some concepts about podcasting. Today I get an email from a listener that points out that I repeat myself over and over. Looking back, I see his point, but I also know that new podcasters make the same mistakes over and over and over (hence causing me to repeat myself). Here are some basic podcasting truths that will never go out of style:
-
Build your website using a Web hosting company (use the coupon podcastcoach at Host Gator to save).
-
Put your media on a media host like Libsyn.com or Blubrry.com (use the coupon sopfree to get a free month at both places).
-
Have a great looking album artwork.
-
Don't use another platform (blog Talk Radio, Tumblr, etc) as your "main" website
-
There is a huge difference between a $8 microphone and a $99 microphone. There is NOT a huge difference between a $99 microphone and a $300 microphone (in my opinion).
-
When in doubt ask your audience.
-
Don't get into podcasting to make some quick cash
-
When you connect with your audience, they will download your back catalog.
-
Podcasting takes time. A 15 minute audio podcast takes about an hour from start to finish to create (roughly speaking).
-
Some times you get what you pay for when the prices is free.
Because of My Podcast - I Exchanged e-Mails With Jay Mohr [2:00]
Brainstorm from the Cannabis Community Project explained how he got free tickets from Jay Mohr by just reaching out to the comedian/movie actors/radio host and to his surprise he got a direct response from Jay himself. Now he can truthfully say that Jay Mohr has been involved with his podcast.
Does Dave Repeat Himself Too Much? [6:15]
In response to the listener who emailed and said I repeat myself too much, thank you so much for the feedback. I will try not to do that in the future. There are some topics I will repeat (see the list above for a short list) but I will try to not stretch 15 minute topics into 45 minutes. I was unaware of this. I would love any additional constructive feedback in the comments (below) or just send them directly to me.
What I've done in the past and will continue doing in the future is I find other people to share their experience that reinforces the opinions and facts that I shares on each episode.
I Have An Idea - The Next Step of Podcasting [13:50]
I had a caller on the Ask the Podcast Coach show who was very excited about starting a podcast (we've all been there) but couldn't really say WHAT his podcast was going to be about. Many of us have been in Michael's shoes and we focus on the tools of podcasting. We ask about microphones, and wordpress themes. We ask about promotional tools like twitter and facebook. The problem is we don't have a podcast yet. We have nothing to record. We have nothing to upload .Podcasting starts with content. So if you are in this boat ( I want to podcast, but I'm not sure about what). I would recommend listening to the episode where I talk about getting your podcast in sync with your goals, and then write down 10 topics for 10 episodes. This will help you identify if you are really ready to start a podcast.
Don't get distracted by the tools. The tools you will use to distribute your content. They are worthless without the content. Make the content first, then start working toward how to distribute the podcast. Don't look at distribution, and then figure out what you're going to create.
Podcast Rewind [21:10]
I appeared on the Timelines of Success Podcast with Bill Conrad.
Podcasters Roundtable - Best Practices
Why You Don't Use Your Web Host as a Media Host [30:00]
The SDR ShowI have been saying how its a bad idea to use your web host (a website that provides a service to build a WEBSITE on) as a MEDIA HOST (a service designed to deliver and track the delivery of audio or video). I was contacted by Ralph Sutton of The SDR Show (Sex, Drugs, & Rock and Roll) because Ralph was using Dreamhost as his website host, and as his media host. H e even asked them if it was ok, and they said "Sure." One month later and his dreamhost had turned into a nightmare. He was getting thousands of downloads per episode and his server was taking a beating. Consequently, his host wanted him to upgrade. The upgrade would be $150 a month to be on a private server because he was getting too much traffic.
Luckily, Ralph contacted myself and a representative from Libsyn and we switched his media to a media server and now instead of spending $150 a month, Ralph is spending $20. Had this continued, there is a good chance his website company would shut him down. At that point you've developed a nice audience only to have your reputation tarnished by trying to save a few bucks.
Ralph Did The Work of Podcast Promotion
Ralph didn't look for the giant switch that would turn on one thousand listeners. He flipped those switches that turned on one new listener one thousand times. He crafted an email message and then customized it and sent it to everyone he knew on facebook. He then asked his friends who work in the rock industry if they would tell their audience about the show.
Stating the Obvious: Ralph has a radio background and a syndicated show across the US. he also has access to guests who are/were famous. This helps, but none the less these people would now have known if Ralph had not told them about his podcast. He did it in a personal way, and utilized the relationship he had built up over years of being in radio.
Ralph had some stickers printed up and went to places where his target audience hangs out and passed out stickers. He went to where his audience was, made some contacts, and told them about his podcast. He use fiverr.com to have someone paint his logo on her back. He used this image to announce t-shirts.
Advice to Doing Podcast Interviews
Ralph does not write out questions, but topic he wants to know about. He wants to avoid the interview being an interrogation. He wants it to be a conversion. He plans how he will start the podcast, and from there he tries to have a conversation.
Be Ready For Traffic
Ralph switch to Libsyn.com for his media and his problems went away. (use the coupon sopfree to get a free month at Libsyn). He then hired Dave to move his feed from one website to another.
What Caused the Problem With the School of Podcasting Website Last Week
Just because you can add domain after domain after domain on your shared web host doesn't mean you should. It is OK to do this as long as you don't use up more than 25% of the server's resources. I had 18 add on domains, and I was taking up 87% of the server's resources and consequently, my media host emailed me that they were shutting me down, and before I could upgrade it was too late. Does this mean every podcaster should NOT use shared hosting? No. Shared hosting should be fine for 95% of the podcasting community. When you do see yourself getting close to exceeding your resources, don't wait to upgrade.
In the end, I took a huge hit for two days as my websites were down. What did I save? $50-ish
Why Diet's Are Doomed
I was at a Casting Crowns concert and Mark Hall the lead singer made a great point. You start a diet when you are full and feel awful. You are inspired by the way you feel. You jump into everything you see. You buy P90X, and schedule time to jog every day after you do the work out, you buy Shakeology and get on the monthly program. It's Sunday night. You're pumped up. While you are waiting for the new tools to arrive, something happens. You get hungry. You are strong and ready to take on the world because you're full. When you are hungry you get weak. The problem is many times you are not hungry for food. You are hungry for love (ladies) and men you are hungry for respect. You are hungry for sleep, money, and many other things, but you try to fill that hole with food. Stay strong. Identify your weaknesses.
Is Facebook Making you Fat?
Instead of mirror mirror on the wall who is the fairest one of all, we are saying smart phone show me the facebook, tell me how my life should look. Tell me tell me instagram, tell me who you think I am. When we compare ourselves to others, we fall into traps. All the sudden the Ford focus we were happy with, is no longer good enough because the neighbor got some new fancy hybrid car with a cooler stereo. We need to adopt the attitude of gratitude. When we compare ourselves we are guaranteed to find to find something we don't have and focus on it. This creates a want, that we can't fill. But we will try - with food. Notice I didn't say a need. I said it creates a want. Nobody is posting, "Hey I just gained 5 pounds", or , "My son just got busted for drugs again." Facebook is not real. Don't believe the hype. Now I love facebook. It allows me to stay connected with friends and family. I also realize that this is not a 100% true picture of their life.
Today we have a great because of my podcast story, we talk about how long it takes to build an audience, and we talk with Nick Loper after podcasting for a year.
The Short Time Wrestling Podcast covers the world of Wrestling (not the TV type). Jason Bryant comes on the show to see what he’s doing great, and identify items that may need some tweaking. Doing Well Doing a great job pulling stories out of guests Obvious show prep and really knowing your guest Great forum with lots of activity Content moves quickly Well produced Nice information on website Could Improve A bit of a band confusion with URLs, names and website (who is TOM). Could use a bit of white space on the website Be careful with yes no questions Avoid the obvious question, and find a new slant on those. When I am on TheOpenMat.com, the podcast is hard to find (under features) -
Today we talk about the Under ten Fitness (itunes link). This is a short podcast (under ten minutes - get it?) that has a little bit of news and the talks about something in the health and fitness area.
Things They Are Doing Right:
Nice job wrapping up the tip & delivering it to one person rather than a group of listeners
Nice job of focusing on a key take away
10minute_fitnessThings They Could Tweak
Be sure to drive traffic back to their your website, and mention the website in your show.
Work on a website. The classic podcast system is
-
A Self-hosted wordpress website
-
Using Libsyn, or blubrry.com for your media host (and yes you need a media host).
-
Have great looking custom artwork
-
Have an easy to navigate website.
They using podomatic for a media host (one of the worst), and their website is confusing. The website does not match the level of the podcast. You have good content, but your website needs lots of work.
You also want to make it easy to contact you.
Check out their website at undertenfitness.com
Get reviewed at www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme
Today we have some great news tips, and an interview about keeping your brand in front of customers using podcasts.
Today we have lots of call, and have a great time talking contents, mix minus, new show launches, and more. Join us at www.askthepodcastcoach.com start podcasting at www.schoolofpodcasting.com
Get your podcast questions answered every Saturday at 10:30 EST. First Impression of the Smart Podcast Player Dave bought the Smart Podcast Player, and unfortunately it has a condlict with one of my other plugins. The good news is their support is all over it. I’m really impress with their team. It pulls your items in via the RSS feed (not the host). So you can use it if you’re on Libsyn.com Blubrry,com, Soundcloud.com (or really anybody). Is a better player going to get you more listens? Dave uses the player from Blubrry.com Next time you’re in Best Buy look at your site on a tablet. My Podcast Reviews [09:50] A cool service that gives you an archive of ALL of your reviews from ALL of the countries. Then going forward it will give you an email with any new reviews. Very cool and a big time saver. Check it out at www.mypodcastreviews.com Daniel J Lewis is the guy behind this and he is also the guy behind the Subscribe and Follow WordPress Plugin. Rapping Writing Class [15:23] Dave is taking the rapid writing class at rapidwritingmethod.com that has some great tips on making great content. Twitter Tips [17:45] Jim has been playing with Twitter and finds that much like every other platform, you get out of it what you put into it. Zapier creates automation Tweet Adder Twitter Automation Tool Hootesuite Getting Rid of Crackles on Hangouts [26:00] If you move your bandwidth to medium, you will hear “crackling” Sony Sound Forge 30:29 What’s the difference sound forge and audio studio? – nothing Recording Skype 32:25 schoolofpodcasting.fm My Speed – Speed up Videos Trying to send the sound of your computer back into your computer. We also talk some editing workflow. Reviewing Your Own Show 40:15 When listening to your own show, listen through the ears of your audience
Rescue Time Track Your Efficiency [43:00] This is a free tool that tracks how much time you spend on websites, in software, etc. Check it out at rescuetime.com toggl.com is another tool, but Rescue Time is a bit more automated.
Today I talk about some reviews we've received in iTunes. Sometimes its hard to hear negative things about you, but you need to stop and ask if there is any validity to comments. In some cases, there are.
Here is the one that really got me. It was from Ellen.
Shakeologyby EllenHenderson from USA on February 8, 2014
I like the guy - he seems like a really good person. However, for the entire time I've been listening to his podcasts, he has puttered around with about a 10 lb. range - this over 2 years or so. He is addicted to Mountain Dew and the entire gist of his shows is to review some web based food and exercise tracking systems or fitness "aids" or iPhone apps. The bottom line is, I need somebody that motivates me by example. Dave seems to be doing this podcast just to listen to himself talk. If that is the purpose of the podcast, I think there are plenty of others that have moved past the "eat less exercise more" mentality. And the difference between them and Dave is, their approaches actually work. I need a podcast that gives me REAL guidance for losing, and not someone going on and on about the fit bit or body media / body bug. Inspire me by actually using LOGIC, not gimmicks. And, inspire me by actually losing weight. If the eat less exercise more model works, why are you not losing weight? Eat healthier foods, not Mountain Dew and McDonalds. The body needs nutrients, not to be tricked by processed foods that you scan the barcode with some b/s ap on your iPhone. Quit buying into paid websites, apps, fitness gurus who want to sell you plans or supplements, and do your research. I hope the best for you, but what you are doing is not working - for you or for me.
I've always try to be a person of integrity. I don't lie. I don't steal. I'm honest. Was I mad or hurt by this? Well, no. OK, maybe a little hurt. Then I read it again. This is a valid point. It is as simple (not easy) as eat less exercise more, but I'm not doing it. So I saw this last week, and I've really stepped up my game. I'm down two pounds this week. Thank you Ellen Henderson I really appreciate the kick in the pants.
Tips from Someone Who Lost 80 Lbs
Here is the video we were listening to
http://youtu.be/REG9iKC0YcQ
Mentioned in this Show
Logical Losers Accountability Club (cheaper than weight watchers)www.logicallosers.com
Shakeology (Shakeology is so incredibly healthy, there's no other single food item out there that can supply you with all the nutrients, vitamins, proteins, and minerals in the amounts you need the way one delicious shake can.) www.logicalloss.com/shakeology
Today we talk about a tool at www.weeklywebtools.com/resucetime that tracks EVERYTHING you do on your website. You can categorize it as productive or not. Then you get weekly reports that let you know how productive you were.
Today Dave and Jim answer a question about rebranding your show as well as web hosting, and twitter. For more information visit www.askthepodcastcoach.com use the coupon ask20 to save $20 off at the School of Podcasting
Today we talk with Christopher Brian Jones of trek.fm about what its like to run a podcast network. We learn about some of the struggles he has had along the way, how he builds a relationship with the hosts on the network, abd creates a shared vision and brand. You will be amazed at how focused some of his shows are. If you are a fan of Star Trek, you definitely want to check out www.trek.fm or if you are an iTunes user check out http://www.itunes.com/trek.fm. Want to comment on the show? Call in your comments at 888-563-3228. For more go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/412
Today we listen to Jillian's iSweat mix which you can pick up at Amazon at http://www.amazon.com/gp/product/B00IUEJZ8Q/ref=as_li_tl?ie=UTF8&camp=1789&creative=390957&creativeASIN=B00IUEJZ8Q&linkCode=as2&tag=jillian02-20&linkId=SVKESE5UKN4JWE7G
Today we talk about easy links, co-host chemistry, podcast hosting, and more. Join us every Saturday at 10:30 EST at www.askthepodcastcoach.com
Today I'm still sharing from the book IMPOSSIBLE: How I Lost Nearly 400 Pounds Without Surgery and I'm finding it amazing.
He talks about forcefeeders, and on Memorial Day I was faced with quite a few. Now, let me stop right there. Nobody put a gun to my head. My response is my responsibility. But I didn't want to hurt anyone, and in doing so I hurt my chances of losing weight. It was a dumb move.
My wife had some surgery not too long ago and was told not to eat. Now I'm not a fan of fasting, but it sounds very hard. She did it. We call can go deeper into our own strengths that we don't even know exist until we are tested. I'm sure we can all do more than we think we can.
So today, pretend a doctor told you to stop. If we don't start doing that, eventually we won't be pretending.
Are you dreading your podcast? Are you not happy with the results you're getting. Today we ask some questions to help you get your ducks in a row. We help you see if the goals for your podcast are aligned with the content that you readers want to hear. We also look to see if the goal of your podcast is in alignment with your life. This is episode 411 and I deeply apprecaite you taking the time to listen. I would love to hear from you. You can reach me at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact
Cedric the Entertainer Launches a Podcast "Whole Damn World"
Cedric the entertainer has launched his own podcast to talk about "this crazy world." He is a farily well known name (he's appeared in movies, does stand up, and recently hosted "Who wants to be a millionaire.").
Updates On Last Week's Show About Podcast Media Hosting (4:00)
I email soundcloud.com as I could no longer find the direct link to the mp3 file to put on my website. Their response was dig it out of the RSS feed and sent me a link to my RSS feed, and a screenshot of where the file was. This is not convenient, and furthers my thoughts that this is just not ready for prime time. They have been in beta for THREE YEARS. Also I said that a media host should NOT mess with my file. What I upload is what I want to download. If a visitor uses the download link they get your file (great). However, the file that is included in the RSS feed has it's name changed to a rather lengthy name. I was testing this on my Jillian Michaels Fan cast and the original file was titled, "jmp43_052914.mp3 " and the file available for download is "152162769-podcastcoach-podcast-review-show-ask-the.mp3" which to me is messing with my brand. Mike Phillips of Computer2know.com let me know that if you Google the address to podbean it comes up as a virtual office. Lawyers often will use these to look more official than they might be at the time. I'm not saying that this is what podbean.com is doing, but I do find it odd. If you missed it, you can check out last week's episode.
How Do I Update My Wordpress Theme? [7:08]
Justin from braverbytheday.com is using Opimizepress and is thinking of leaving this file and wants to know how to move to a new theme. In some cases you can simply switch themes in the wordpress dashboard. A wordpress theme is like, "Clothes" for your website. The content is the same, but the look is different. One way to test things before publishing them is to use software like WPSimulator (affiliate link) that allows you to run Wordpress on your PC computer. Once you get it finished, you can upload it to the web. Another (cheaper) alternative is to buy a domain name, and create what others call a "Staging" site. Then once it's done here, you simply move it to the "real" site. In some cases you web host will allow you to have more than one domain under the same account.
Live Training Classes - Podcast Equipment and Podcast Reviews[11:25]
The next live class in the "how to podcast" line is How to choose the right podcast equipment. It is going to be Saturday June 7th at Noon EST (if you can't make that time you can get the recording). For more information go to www.howtopodcast.com Erik K Johnson and I do a Podcast Review Show, and we are looking to stockpile a bunch of reviews so we are offering 50% off with the coupon sop50 when you go to www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme
Backblaze Saved My Podcast[14:26]
logo-backblaze-bigAs a computer instructor I know how to manage the files. I'm here to tell you I had a folder just disappear. It was weird. I didn't accidnetally drag it into another folder. I didn't accidentally delete it (it was not in the trash can). Luckily I use backblaze.com and I was able to go get all the files (transition music, artwork) for my podcast and restore the files. It was very weird, but by far the best $5 a month I will ever spend. I know Scott Johnson of computertutorflorida.com (a future guest) uses MyPCBackup
Connect with Other Podcasters
UK Podcasters August 6th
Saturday, August 16, 2014 from 9:00 AM to 11:00 PM (BST)
Birmingham, United Kingdom Tickets are £12.00 Podcast Movement
August 16-17 in Dallas Texas (I'll be speaking at this one). Tickets: $129 Is Your Podcast Out of Alignment? [19:04]
Why Do You Want to Get Into Podcasting? To Reach a Global Audience To promote your product or service To Network with like minded people To be seen as an expert To Educate To Inspire To Entertain To make money What Do You Want To Talk about? This should be something you want to talk about all the time, you think about all the time. Who Do you want to listen? The more detailed a picture you have, the better your content will. What do I hear about the why? People were missing something, I wanted to add to the conversation I had a background in radio. –This is why you are capable, but not why you should start. This is why if you start, you’ll be slightly ahead of the game. A person has experience as a public speaker. They decide to “nice down” and do a podcast an interview small business owners. They want companies that are between 1 and 20 employees, and do less than 1 million a year. They want to hear about the trials that the small business person went through to build their business. They might even focus on business local to their area. What does your content do for your audience? How does it make them feel? What do you want people to do with your content? What does your content do for your audience? Do You Have the Time to Do it RIGHT? Plan on spending four minutes for every minute of podcast. That’s to create the show. How much time is left in your life to promote the show you just created? Does this mean you don't podcast? NO! It means you make shorter episodes (or publish less frequently). What – Your topic, your passion, Who – Your audience. What do they want to hear? What do you want them to DO with your content? Why – Position the topics that your audience wants to hear so that they are aligned with your goals. How – Does the format (interviews?), length, and publishing schedule align with your life and goals for the podcast.
Is your Podcast In Alignment?
I would love to hear your thoughts on the matter? If not, what needs tweaked? Let me know here
Join the School of Podcasting http://schoolofpodcasting.com/become-a-member/
Today we talk about easy to use links, Soundcloud, podomatic, and the Roland R-05. Use the coupon code ask20 to get $20 off at the School of Podcasting
Check out Dave and Erik on www.podcastreviewshow.com as they talk to Gary from Fastpitch.tv
Today Dave and Erik give Jim Hollis some tips on bringing some energy to his podcast. Chime in with your opinion at www.podcastreviewshow.com/
Dave and Erik put the contractor's secret weapon under the microscope to see what they are doing right, and what they need to tweak. Check out podcastreviewshow.com/37 for more information and the video.